W471-E1-01 CP1L OperationManual

OPERATION MANUAL
Cat. No. W471-E1-01

SYSMAC CP Series
CP1L-J14D@-@
CP1L-J20D@-@
CP1L-L14D@-@
CP1L-L20D@-@
CP1L-M30D@-@
CP1L-M40D@-@
CP1L CPU Unit
CP1L-J14D@-@
CP1L-J20D@-@
CP1L-L14D@-@
CP1L-L20D@-@
CP1L-M30D@-@
CP1L-M40D@-@
CP1L CPU Unit
Operation Manual
Produced December 2007
iv
v
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures
by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this
manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed pre-
cautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word Unit is also
capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not
it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation Ch, which appears in some displays and on some OMRON
products, often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in
this sense.
The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Controller. PC is used, how-
ever, in some CX-Programmer displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you
locate different types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera-
tion of the product.
1,2,3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 2007
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
vi
Unit Versions of CP-series CPU Units
Unit Versions A unit version has been introduced to manage CPU Units in the CP Series
according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
Notation of Unit Versions
on Products
The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
Confirming Unit Versions
with Support Software
CX-Programmer version 7.22 or higher can be used to confirm the unit ver-
sion of the CP1L-J CPU Unit.
CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher can be used to confirm the unit version
of the CP1L-L and CP1L-M CPU Unit.
Note CX-Programmer version 7.0 or lower cannot be used to confirm unit versions
for CP1L-L and CP1L-M CPU Units.
CX-Programmer version 7.21 or lower cannot be used to confirm unit versions
for CP1L-J CPU Units.
Confirmation Procedure
Procedure When the Device Type and CPU Type Are Known
1,2,3... 1. Set the Device Type Field in the Change PLC Dialog Box to CP1L.
Lot No.
Product nameplate
CP-series CPU Unit
Unit version (Example for Unit version 1.0)
CP1L-M40DR-A
CPU UNIT
Lot No. 28705 0000 Ver.1.0
OMRON Corporation MADE IN CHINA
vii
2. Click the Settings Button by the Device Type Field and, when the Device
Type Settings Dialog Box is displayed, set the CPU Type Field to M, L or J.
3. Go online and select PLC - Edit - Information
The PLC Information Dialog Box will be displayed.
viii
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Procedure When the Device Type and CPU Type Are Not Known
This procedure is possible only when connected directly to the CPU Unit with
a serial connection.
If you don't know the device type and CPU type that are connected directly to
the CPU Unit on a serial line, select PLC - Auto Online to go online, and then
select PLC - Edit - Information from the menus.
The PLC Information Dialog Box will be displayed and can be used to confirm
the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Unit version
Unit version
ix
Using the Unit Version
Labels
The following unit version labels are provided with the CPU Unit.
These labels can be attached to the front of previous CPU Units to differenti-
ate between CPU Units of different unit versions.
Functions Supported by Unit Version for CP-series CPU Units
Functions Supported by Unit Version 1.0 and 1.1
Functionality is the same as that for CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version
3.0. The functionality added for CS/CJ-series CPU Unit unit version 4.0 is not
supported.
CP1H CPU Units
CX-Programmer version 6.11 or higher is required to use CP1H-X@@@@-
@/XA@@@@-@ with unit version 1.1 or 1.0.
CX-Programmer version 6.20 or higher is required to use CP1H-Y@@@@-
@ with unit version 1.1.
Note 1. The unit version for the CP1H-X@@@@-@/XA@@@@-@ begins at 1.0.
2. The unit version for the CP1H-X@@@@-@ begins at 1.1.
3. CX-Programmer version 7.11 or higher is required to use CP1L CPU Units
with unit version 1.0.
4. CX-Programmer version 7.22 or higher is required to use CP1L-J CPU Units.

Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.0
Ver.
Ver.
These Label s can be used
t o manage di f f er ences
i n t he avai l abl e
f unct i ons among t he Uni t s.
Pl ace t he appr opr i at e l abel
on t he f r ont of t he Uni t t o
show what Uni t
ver si on i s actual l y bei ng
used.
CPU Unit CP1H CPU Unit
Model CP1H-@@@@-@
CP1H-XA@@@@-@
(See note 1.)
CP1H-Y@@@@-
@
(See note 2.)
Unit version
Function
Ver. 1.1 or later Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.1
Pulse
outputs
Allocated built-
in I/O terminals
4 axes at 100 kHz 2 axes at 100 kHz
2 axes at 30 kHz
2 axes at 100 kHz
Special pulse
output terminals
None 2 axes at 1 kHz
x
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
1 Intended Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
5 Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1-1 Features and Main Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1-3 Connecting the CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1-4 Function Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1-5 Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2-1 Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2-2 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2-3 CP1L CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2-4 CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2-5 CPU Unit Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2-6 Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2-7 Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3-1 Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3-2 Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3-3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3-4 Wiring CP1L CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3-5 Wiring CPU Unit I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3-6 CP/CPM1A-series Expansion I/O Unit Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SECTION 4
I/O Memory Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4-1 Overview of I/O Memory Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4-2 I/O Area and I/O Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4-3 1:1 Link Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4-4 Serial PLC Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
xii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-5 Internal Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4-6 Holding Area (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4-7 Auxiliary Area (A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4-8 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4-9 Timers and Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4-10 Data Memory Area (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4-11 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4-12 Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4-13 Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4-14 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4-15 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
SECTION 5
Pulse and Counter Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5-1 High-speed Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
5-2 Pulse Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5-3 Inverter Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
SECTION 6
Advanced Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
6-1 Interrupt Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
6-2 Quick-response Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6-3 Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
6-4 Analog Adjuster and External Analog Setting Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
6-5 Battery-free Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6-6 Memory Cassette Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6-7 Program Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
6-8 Failure Diagnosis Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
6-9 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
SECTION 7
Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . 395
7-1 Connecting Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
7-2 Analog Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
7-3 Analog Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
7-4 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
7-5 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
7-6 CompoBus/S I/O Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
7-7 DeviceNet I/O Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
xiii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 8
Program Transfer, Trial Operation, and Debugging . . . . . 465
8-1 Program Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
8-2 Trial Operation and Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
SECTION 9
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
9-1 Error Classification and Confirmation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
9-2 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
9-3 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
9-4 Troubleshooting Unit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
SECTION 10
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
10-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
10-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Appendices
A Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
B Dimensions Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
C Auxiliary Area Allocations by Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
D Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
E Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
F Connections to Serial Communications Option Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
G PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
xiv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
xv
About this Manual:
This manual describes installation and operation of the CP-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs)
and includes the sections described below. The CP Series provides advanced package-type PLCs
based on OMRONs advanced control technologies and vast experience in automated control.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install or operate a CP-series PLC. Be sure to read the precautions provided in the fol-
lowing section.
Definition of the CP Series
The CP Series is centered around the CP1H and CP1L CPU Units and is designed with the same
basic architecture as the CS and CJ Series. Always use CP-series Expansion Units and CP-series
Expansion I/O Units when expanding I/O capacity.
I/O words are allocated in the same way as the CPM1A/CPM2A PLCs, i.e., using fixed areas for inputs
and outputs.
xvi
Precautions provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller and related devices.
Section 1 introduces the features of the CP1L and describes its configuration. It also describes the
Units that are available and connection methods for Programming Devices and other peripheral
devices.
Section 2 describes the names and functions of CP1L parts and provides CP1L specifications.
Section 3 describes how to install and wire the CP1L.
Section 4 describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
Section 5 describes the CP1Ls interrupt and high-speed counter functions.
Section 6 describes all of the advanced functions of the CP1L that can be used to achieve specific
application needs.
Section 7 describes how to use CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
Section 8 describes the processes used to transfer the program to the CPU Unit and the functions that
can be used to test and debug the program.
Section 9 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during CP1L operation
Section 10 provides inspection and maintenance information.
The Appendices provide product lists, dimensions, tables of Auxiliary Area allocations, and a memory
map.
xvii
Related Manuals
The following manuals are used for the CP1L CPU Units. Refer to these manuals as required.
Cat. No. Model numbers Manual name Description
W462 CP1L-J14D@-@
CP1L-J20D@-@
CP1L-L14D@-@
CP1L-L20D@-@
CP1L-M30D@-@
CP1L-M40D@-@
SYSMAC CP Series
CP1L CPU Unit Oper-
ation Manual
Provides the following information on the CP Series:
Overview, design, installation, maintenance, and
other basic specifications
Features
System configuration
Mounting and wiring
I/O memory allocation
Troubleshooting
Use this manual together with the CP1L Program-
mable Controllers Programming Manual (W451).
W451 CP1H-X40D@-@
CP1H-XA40D@-@
CP1H-Y20DT-D
CP1L-J14D@-@
CP1L-J20D@-@
CP1L-L14D@-@
CP1L-L20D@-@
CP1L-M30D@-@
CP1L-M40D@-@
SYSMAC CP Series
CP1H /CP1L CPU
Unit Programming
Manual
Provides the following information on programming
the CP Series:
Programming methods
Tasks
Programming instructions
W461 CP1L-J14D@-@
CP1L-J20D@-@
CP1L-L14D@-@
CP1L-L20D@-@
CP1L-M30D@-@
CP1L-M40D@-@
SYSMAC CP Series
CP1L CPU Unit Intro-
duction Manual
Describes basic setup methods of CP1L PLCs:
Basic configuration and component names
Mounting and wiring
Programming, data transfer, and debugging using
the CX-Programmer
Application program examples
W446 WS02-CXPC1-E-V72 SYSMAC CX-Pro-
grammer
Ver. 7.2 Operation
Manual
Provides information on installing and operating the
CX-Programmer for all functions except for function
blocks.
W447 WS02-CXPC1-E-V72 SYSMAC CX-Pro-
grammer Ver. 7.1
Operation Manual
Function Blocks
Provides specifications and operating procedures
for function blocks. Function blocks can be used
with CX-Programmer Ver. 7.1 or higher and a CP1L
CPU Unit. Refer to W446 for operating procedures
for functions other than function blocks.
W463 CXONE-AL@@C-EV2
CXONE-AL@@D-EV2
CX-One Setup Man-
ual
Provides an overview of and describes how to
install the CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package.
W464 CX-Integrator Opera-
tion Manual
Describes operating the CX-Integrator, including
operations to build networks (e.g., setting data links,
routing tables, and Communications Units.
xviii
W344 WS02-PSTC1-E CX-Protocol Opera-
tion Manual
Provides operating procedures for creating protocol
macros (i.e., communications sequences) with the
CX-Protocol and other information on protocol mac-
ros.
The CX-Protocol is required to create protocol mac-
ros for user-specific serial communications or to
customize the standard system protocols.
W342 CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU@@-V1
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1D-CPU@@S
CS1W-SCU@@-V1
CS1W-SCB@@-V1
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1
SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP/
NSJ-series Communi-
cations Commands
Reference Manual
Describes commands addressed to CS-series, CJ-
series, and CP-series CPU Units, including C-mode
commands and FINS commands.
Note This manual describes on commands
address to CPU Units regardless of the com-
munications path. (CPU Unit serial ports,
Serial Communications Unit/Board ports, and
Communications Unit ports can be used.)
Refer to the relevant operation manuals for
information on commands addresses to Spe-
cial I/O Units and CPU Bus Units.
Cat. No. Model numbers Manual name Description
xix
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xx
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xxi
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xxii
xxiii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CP-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable Controllers.
You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PLC system.
1 Intended Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
5 Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
6-1 Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
6-2 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
6-3 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
6-4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
6-5 Conditions for Meeting EMC Directives
when Using CPM1A Relay Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxii
xxiv
Intended Audience 1
1 Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2 General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica-
tions described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amuse-
ment machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equip-
ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man-
ual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci-
fied purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned appli-
cations.
3 Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
xxv
Safety Precautions 3
The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
The PLC or outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning
of the output relays, or destruction of the output transistors. As a counter-
measure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
When the 24-V DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is over-
loaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs
being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!WARNING Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Not doing so may result in
serious accidents.
!WARNING Do not apply the voltage / current outside the specified range to this unit. It
may cause a malfunction or fire.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or editing the I/O area. Doing either of these without confirming
safety may result in injury.
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC power supply to the torque
specified in this manual. The loose screws may result in burning or malfunc-
tion.
!Caution Do not touch anywhere near the power supply parts or I/O terminals while the
power is ON, and immediately after turning OFF the power. The hot surface
may cause burn injury.
!Caution Pay careful attention to the polarities (+/-) when wiring the DC power supply. A
wrong connection may cause malfunction of the system.
!Caution When connecting the PLC to a computer or other peripheral device, either
ground the 0 V side of the external power supply or do not ground the external
power supply at all. Otherwise the external power supply may be shorted
depending on the connection methods of the peripheral device. DO NOT
ground the 24 V side of the external power supply, as shown in the following
diagram.
24 V
0 V 0 V
Non-insulated DC power supply
0 V
Peripheral device
FG FG
CPU Unit
FG
Twisted-pair
cable
FG
xxvi
Operating Environment Precautions 4
!Caution After programming (or reprogramming) using the IOWR instruction, confirm
that correct operation is possible with the new ladder program and data before
starting actual operation. Any irregularities may cause the product to stop
operating, resulting in unexpected operation in machinery or equipment.
!Caution The CP1L CPU Units automatically back up the user program and parameter
data to flash memory when these are written to the CPU Unit. I/O memory
(including the DM Area, counter present values and Completion Flags, and
HR Area), however, is not written to flash memory. The DM Area, counter
present values and Completion Flags, and HR Area can be held during power
interruptions with a battery. If there is a battery error, the contents of these
areas may not be accurate after a power interruption. If the contents of the
DM Area, counter present values and Completion Flags, and HR Area are
used to control external outputs, prevent inappropriate outputs from being
made whenever the Battery Error Flag (A402.04) is ON.
4 Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
Locations subject to direct sunlight.
Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem-
perature.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
Locations close to power supplies.
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Make sure that the operating environment is within the specified con-
ditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the
life of the system.
xxvii
Application Precautions 5
5 Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
Always connect to 100 or less when installing the Units. Not connecting
to a ground of 100 or less may result in electric shock.
Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of
the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction
or electric shock.
Mounting or dismounting Expansion Units or any other Units
Connecting or removing the Memory Cassette or Option Board
Setting DIP switches or rotary switches
Connecting or wiring the cables
Connecting or disconnecting the connectors
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting may result in burning.
Mount the Unit only after checking the connectors and terminal blocks
completely.
Be sure that all the terminal screws and cable connector screws are tight-
ened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening
torque may result in malfunction.
Wire all connections correctly according to instructions in this manual.
Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction.
Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis-
sipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
Do not apply voltages to the input terminals in excess of the rated input
voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.
Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the output terminals in excess
of the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
xxviii
Be sure that the terminal blocks, connectors, Option Boards, and other
items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking
may result in malfunction.
Disconnect the functional ground terminal when performing withstand
voltage tests. Not disconnecting the functional ground terminal may result
in burning.
Wire correctly and double-check all the wiring or the setting switches
before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burn-
ing.
Check that the DIP switches and data memory (DM) are properly set
before starting operation.
Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected opera-
tion.
Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the con-
tents of the DM, HR, and CNT Areas required for resuming operation. Not
doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operating mode).
Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
Doing either of these may break the cables.
Do not place objects on top of the cables. Doing so may break the cables.
When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object
in order to discharge any static buildup. Not doing so may result in mal-
function or damage.
Do not touch the Expansion I/O Unit Connecting Cable while the power is
being supplied in order to prevent malfunction due to static electricity.
Do not turn OFF the power supply to the Unit while data is being trans-
ferred.
When transporting or storing the product, cover the PCBs with electrically
conductive materials to prevent LSIs and ICs from being damaged by
static electricity, and also keep the product within the specified storage
temperature range.
Do not touch the mounted parts or the rear surface of PCBs because
PCBs have sharp edges such as electrical leads.
Double-check the pin numbers when assembling and wiring the connec-
tors.
Wire correctly according to specified procedures.
Do not connect pin 6 (+5V) on the RS-232C Option Board (CP1W-CIF01)
on the CPU Unit to any external device other than the NT-AL001 or
CP1W-CIF11 Conversion Adapter. The external device and the CPU Unit
may be damaged.
xxix
Use the dedicated connecting cables specified in this manual to connect
the Units. Using commercially available RS-232C computer cables may
cause failures in external devices or the CPU Unit.
The user program and parameter area data in the CPU Unit is backed up
in the built-in flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the front of
the CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do not turn OFF
the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. The data
will not be backed up if power is turned OFF.
Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC while the Memory Cassette
is being written. Doing so may corrupt the data in the Memory Cassette.
The BKUP indicator will light while the Memory Cassette is being written.
Wait for the BKUP indicator to go out before turning OFF the power sup-
ply to the PLC.
Before replacing the battery, supply power to the CPU Unit for at least 5
minutes and then complete battery replacement within 5 minutes of turn
OFF the power supply. Memory data may be corrupted if this precaution is
not observed.
Always use the following size wire when connecting I/O terminals:
AWG22 to AWG18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm
2
).
Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordinances as
they apply.
Have qualified specialists properly dispose of used batteries as industrial
waste.
UL standards required that batteries be replaced only by experienced
technicians. Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries. Also,
always follow the replacement procedure provided in the manual.
Never short-circuit the positive and negative terminals of a battery or
charge, disassemble, heat, or incinerate the battery. Do not subject the
battery to strong shocks or deform the barry by applying pressure. Doing
any of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition of
the battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or
otherwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been sub-
jected to shock may leak if they are used.
Always construct external circuits so that the power to the PLC it turned
ON before the power to the control system is turned ON. If the PLC power
supply is turned ON after the control power supply, temporary errors may
result in control system signals because the output terminals on DC Out-
put Units and other Units will momentarily turn ON when power is turned
ON to the PLC.
Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal cir-
cuit failures, which can occur in relays, transistors, and other elements.
If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be
turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is
switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure
that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this
occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced
with the FALS(007) instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned
OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
xxx
Conformance to EC Directives 6
6 Conformance to EC Directives
6-1 Applicable Directives
EMC Directives
Low Voltage Directive
6-2 Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note The applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standard is EN61131-2.
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
6-3 Conformance to EC Directives
The CP1L PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine or
device in which the CP1L PLC is used complies with EC Directives, the PLC
must be installed as follows:
1,2,3... 1. The CP1L PLC must be installed within a control panel.
2. You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power
supplies used for I/O Units and CPU Units requiring DC power. The output
holding time must be 10 ms minimum for the DC power supply connected
to the power supply terminals on Units requiring DC power.
3. CP1L PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to EN61131-2. Ra-
diated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on
the configuration of the control panel used, other devices connected to the
control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that
the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives.
6-4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods
The CP1L PLCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards (EN61131-2)
of the EMC Directives. However, noise generated by relay output switching
may not satisfy these Standards. In such a case, a noise filter must be con-
nected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures must be pro-
vided external to the PLC.
Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the
devices on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc. Following are
examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.
xxxi
Countermeasures
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PLC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole
system with the PLC included is more than 5 times per minute.
Note Refer to EN61131-2 for more details.
Countermeasure Examples
When switching an inductive load, connect an surge protector, diodes, etc., in
parallel with the load or contact as shown below.
Circuit Current Characteristic Required element
AC DC
Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, there is
a time lag between the moment the cir-
cuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the surge protector in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the surge protector
between the contacts.
The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 F per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 per contact voltage of 1 V.
These values, however, vary with the
load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from experi-
ments, and take into consideration that
the capacitance suppresses spark dis-
charge when the contacts are sepa-
rated and the resistance limits the
current that flows into the load when
the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an
AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
No Yes The diode connected in parallel with
the load changes energy accumulated
by the coil into a current, which then
flows into the coil so that the current will
be converted into Joule heat by the
resistance of the inductive load.
This time lag, between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset, caused by this method is
longer than that caused by the CR
method.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
The forward current of the diode must
be the same as or larger than the load
current.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the
surge protector is applied to electronic
circuits with low circuit voltages.
Yes Yes The varistor method prevents the impo-
sition of high voltage between the con-
tacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
time lag between the moment the cir-
cuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the varistor in parallel with the load. If
the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V,
insert the varistor between the con-
tacts.
---
CR method
Power
supply
I
n
d
u
c
t
i
v
e
l
o
a
d
C
R
Diode method
Power
supply
I
n
d
u
c
t
i
v
e
l
o
a
d
Varistor method
Power
supply
I
n
d
u
c
t
i
v
e
l
o
a
d
xxxii
When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent
lamp, suppress the inrush current as shown below.
6-5 Conditions for Meeting EMC Directives when Using CPM1A Relay
Expansion I/O Units
EN61131-2 immunity testing conditions when using the CP1W-40EDR,
CPM1A-40EDR, CP1W-16ER, or CPM1A-16ER with a CP1W-CN811 I/O
Connecting Cable are given below.
Recommended Ferrite Core
Ferrite Core (Data Line Filter): 0443-164151 manufactured by Nisshin Electric
Minimum impedance: 90 at 25 MHz, 160 at 100 MHz
Recommended Connection Method
1,2,3... 1. Cable Connection Method
OUT
COM
R
OUT
COM
R
Countermeasure 1
Providing a dark current of
approx. one-third of the rated
value through an incandescent
Countermeasure 2
Providing a limiting resistor
lamp
30
32 33
xxxiii
2. Connection Method
As shown below, connect a ferrite core to each end of the CP1W-CN811
I/O Connecting Cable.
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07
IN
OUT
CH
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM
COM COM COM COM COM COM 03 06 01 03 06
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
IN
40EDR
OUT
CH CH
CH CH EXP
CH
CH
CH
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
xxxiv
1
SECTION 1
Features and System Configuration
This section introduces the features of the CP1L and describes its configuration. It also describes the Units that are available
and connection methods for the CX-Programmer and other peripheral devices.
1-1 Features and Main Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-1-1 CP1L Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-1-2 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1-2-1 Basic System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1-2-2 System Expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1-2-3 Restrictions on System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1-3 Connecting the CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1-3-1 Connecting with a Commercially Available USB Cable . . . . . . . . . 20
1-3-2 Connecting to a Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1-4 Function Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1-5 Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1-5-1 Overview of Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1-5-2 Advantages of Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2
Features and Main Functions Section 1-1
1-1 Features and Main Functions
1-1-1 CP1L Overview
The SYSMAC CP1L PLCs are the low end PLCs in the SYSMAC CP Series
of package-type Programmable Controllers. They have the smallest program
and I/O capacity. The CP1L PLCs are the same size as the CPM1A and
CPM2A PLCs, but offer many more features and high performance.
Four high-speed counters for two axes and two pulse outputs for two axes
can be used with the CPU Unit alone.
Using CP-series Expansion Units also allows extra functions (such as
temperature sensor inputs) to be added.
Installing an Option Board enables RS-232C and RS-422A/485 communi-
cations for Programmable Terminals, Bar Code Readers, Inverters, etc.
CPU Units with 40 I/O Points: CP1L-M40D@-@ CPU Units with 30 I/O Points: CP1L-M30D@-@
The CPU Unit has 24 inputs and 16 outputs built
in.
The CPU Unit has 18 inputs and 12 outputs built
in.
The PLC can be expanded to a maximum total of
160 I/O points by using CP-series Expansion I/O
Units.
Units.
24 built-in inputs (Functions
can be assigned.) (See note.)
Normal inputs (24)
Interrupt inputs (6)
Quick-response inputs (6)
High-speed counter
(4 counters/2 axes)
100 kHz (single phase)
16 built-in outputs (Functions
Normal outputs (16)
2 pulse outputs
100 kHz
2 PWM outputs
Normal inputs (18)
High-speed counter
(4 counters/2 axes)
Normal outputs (12)
2 pulse outputs
100 kHz
2 PWM outputs
CPU Units with transistor outputs only. CPU Units with transistor outputs only.
3
Note Settings in the PLC Setup determine whether each input point is to be used
as a normal input, interrupt input, quick-response input, or high-speed
counter. The instruction used to control each output point determines whether
it is used as a normal output, pulse output, or PWM output.
Four high-speed counters for two axes and two pulse outputs for two axes
can be used with the CPU Unit alone.
Using CP-series Expansion Units also allows extra functions (such as
temperature sensor inputs) to be added.
Installing an Option Board enables RS-232C and RS-422A/485 communi-
cations for Programmable Terminals, Bar Code Readers, Inverters, etc.
Note Settings in the PLC Setup determine whether each input point is to be used
as a normal input, interrupt input, quick-response input, or high-speed
counter. The instruction used to control each output point determines whether
it is used as a normal output, pulse output, or PWM output.
CPU Units with 20 I/O Points: CP1L-L20D@-@ and
CP1L-J20D@-@
CPU Units with 14 I/O Points: CP1L-L14D@-@ and
CP1L-J14D@-@
The CPU Unit has 12 inputs and 8 outputs built in. The CPU Unit has 8 inputs and 6 outputs built in.
Units.
Units.
Normal inputs (12)
High-speed counter
(4 counters/2 axes)
100 kHz (single phase) CP1L-L
20 kHz (single phase) CP1L-J
High-speed counter
(4 counters/2 axes)
100 kHz (single phase) CP1L-L
20 kHz (single phase) CP1L-J
Normal outputs (8)
2 pulse outputs
100 kHz (CP1L-L)
20 kHz (CP1L-J)
2 pulse outputs
100 kHz (CP1L-L)
20 kHz (CP1L-J)
2 PWM outputs
8 built-in inputs (Functions can
be assigned.) (See note.)
Normal inputs (8)
Normal outputs (6)
2 PWM outputs
CPU Units with transistor outputs only. CPU Units with transistor outputs only.
4
CP1L CPU Units
Note (1) Three Expansion I/O Units connected to a CP-series CPU Unit with 40 or
30 I/O Points.
(2) One Expansion I/O Unit connected to a CP-series CPU Unit with 20 or 14
I/O Points.
Interpreting CP1L CPU Unit Model Numbers
Type M CPU Units L CPU Units J CPU Units
Model CP1L-M40DR-A
CP1L-M40DR-D
CP1L-M40DT-D
CP1L-M40DT1-D
CP1L-M30DR-A
CP1L-M30DR-D
CP1L-M30DT-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
CP1L-L20DR-A
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-L20DT-D
CP1L-L20DT1-D
CP1L-L14DR-A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L14DT-D
CP1L-L14DT1-D
CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-J20DT1-D
CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J14DT1-D
Power supply Models with AC power (model numbers ending in -A):
100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Models with DC power (model numbers ending in -D):
24 V DC
Program capacity 10K steps 5K steps 1K steps
Maximum number of I/O points 160
(See note 1.)
150
(See note 1.)
60
(See note 2.)
54
(See note 2.)
60
(See note 2.)
54
(See note 2.)
Normal
I/O
I/O points 40 30 20 14 20 14
Input points 24 18 12 8 12 8
Input specifications 24 VDC
Interrupt or quick-
response inputs
6 max. 4 max. 6 max 4 max
Output points 16 12 8 6 8 6
Output specifications Relay outputs: Model numbers with R before the final suffix
Transistor outputs, sinking: Model numbers with T before the final suffix
Transistor outputs, sourcing:Model numbers with T1 before the final suffix
High-speed counter inputs 4 counters/2 axes, 100 kHz (single-phase),
100 kHz for up/down pulses or pulse plus direction, 50
kHz for differential phases
4 counters/2 axes, 20 kHz
(single-phase),
20 kHz for up/down pulses
or pulse plus direction, 10
kHz for differential phases
Pulse outputs 2 axes, 100 kHz (transistor outputs) 2 axes, 20 kHz (transistor
outputs)
Program capacity
M: 10K steps
L: 5K steps
J: 1K steps
Number of built-in
normal I/O points
40: 40
30: 30
20: 20
14: 14
Input classification
D: DC inputs
Power supply
A: AC
D: DC
Output classification
R: Relay outputs
T: Transistor outputs (sinking)
T1: Transistor outputs (sourcing)
5
1-1-2 Features
This section describes the main features of the CP1L.
Basic CP1L Configuration
Positioning with an
Inverter
Positioning can be controlled using an inverter. Previously, an internal pulse
output with trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration is created using the PULSE
OUTPUT instruction. The position offset is calculated using an error counter
for the feedback pulse input from a rotary encoder connected to an inductive
motor and the internal pulse output. The error counter is then used to output a
speed command to the inverter to control positioning. This enables positioning
with high-capacity motors, as well as low-cost positioning with small-capacity
motors (in comparison to using a servo).
CX-One CP1L CPU Unit (Example for model with 40 I/O points)
USB port
Battery (CJ1W-BAT01)
Power supply/input terminal block
Peripheral
USB port
Analog adjuster
External analog
settings input
Memory Cassette
CP1W-ME05M
Memory Cassette
Two Option Board slots
Option Board
One RS-232C port
CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C
Option Board
One RS-422A/485 port
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485
Option Board
Output terminal block
USB cable

6
Note If high-precision positioning is required, we recommend using an inverter with
vector control.
Full Complement of
High-speed Counter
Functions
High-speed counter inputs can be enabled by connecting rotary encoders to
the built-in inputs. The ample number of high-speed counter inputs makes it
possible to control a multi-axis device with a single PLC.
Four 100-kHz (single phase)/50-kHz (differential phases) high-speed
counter inputs (4 counters/2 axes) are provided as a standard feature.
(See note.)
For CP1L-J PLCs, four 20-kHz (single phase)/10-kHz (differential phases)
high-speed counter inputs (4 counters/2 axes) are provided as a standard
feature. (See note.)
Note Settings in the PLC Setup determine whether each input point is to
be used as a normal input, interrupt input, quick-response input, or
high-speed counter.

A virtual pulse output is created using a pulse output instruction, the position
offset is calculated using an error counter, and a frequency (i.e., speed)
command is output according to the position offset to control positioning.
Analog output or RS-422A (Modbus-RTU)
Frequency
command
Pulse input
Encoder
Pulse Output
Instruction
Inverter
Motor

24 built-in inputs
(Functions can be assigned.)
High-speed counters
(4 counters/2 axes)
7
Full Complement of High-
speed Counter Functions
High-speed Processing for High-speed Counter Present Value (PV)
Target Values or Range Comparison Interrupts
An interrupt task can be started when the count reaches a specified value or
falls within a specified range.
High-speed Counter Input Frequency (Speed) Monitoring
The input pulse frequency can be monitored using the PRV instruction (one
point (counter 0) only, and you must select whether to use input frequency
monitoring or counter 3; you cannot use both).
High-speed Counter PV Holding/Refreshing
It is possible to toggle between holding and refreshing the high-speed counter
PV by turning ON and OFF the High-speed Counter Gate Flag from the ladder
program.
Versatile Pulse
Control (CPU Units
with Transistor
Outputs Only)
Positioning and speed control by a pulse-input servo driver is enabled by out-
putting fixed duty ratio pulse output signals from the CPU Unit's built-in out-
puts.
Pulse outputs for 2 axes at 100 kHz maximum are provided as standard
features. (See note.)
For CP1L-J PLCs, pulse outputs for 2 axes at 20 kHz maximum are pro-
vided as standard features. (See note.)
Note The instruction used to control each output point determines
whether it is used as a normal output, pulse output, or PWM output.
Full Complement of Pulse
Output Functions
Select CW/CCW Pulse Outputs or Pulse Plus Direction Outputs for the
Pulse Outputs
The pulse outputs can be selected to match the pulse input specifications of
the motor driver.
Easy Positioning with Absolute Coordinate System Using Automatic
Direction Setting
For operations in an absolute coordinate system (i.e., when the origin is
established or when the PV is changed by the INI instruction), the CW/CCW
direction can be automatically set when PULSE OUTPUT instructions are
executed according to whether the specified number of output pulses is more
or less than the pulse output PV.

16 built-in outputs
(Functions assigned.)
2 pulse outputs
100 kHz
8
Triangular Control
If the amount of output pulses required for acceleration and deceleration (the
target frequency times the time to reach the target frequency) exceeds the
preset target number of output pulses during positioning (when the ACC
instruction in independent mode or the PLS2 instruction is executed), the
acceleration and deceleration will be shortened and triangular control will be
executed instead of trapezoidal control. In other words, the trapezoidal pulse
output will be eliminated, with no period of constant speed.
Target Position Changes during Positioning (Multiple Start)
While positioning using a PULSE OUTPUT (PLS2) instruction is in progress,
the target position, target speed, acceleration rate, and deceleration rate can
be changed by executing another PLS2 instruction.
Positioning Changes during Speed Control (Interrupt Feeding)
While speed control in continuous mode is in effect, it is possible to change to
positioning in independent mode by executing a PULSE OUTPUT (PLS2)
instruction. By this means, interrupt feeding (moving a specified amount) can
be executed under specified conditions.
Target Speed, Acceleration Rate, and Deceleration Rate Changes during
Acceleration or Deceleration
When a PULSE OUTPUT instruction with trapezoidal acceleration and decel-
eration is executed (for speed control or positioning), the target speed and
acceleration and deceleration rates can be changed during acceleration or
deceleration.
Lighting and Power Control by Outputting Variable Duty Ratio Pulses
Operations, such as lighting and power control, can be handled by outputting
variable duty ratio pulse (PWM) output signals from the CPU Unit's built-in
outputs.
Origin Searches Origin Search and Origin Return Operations Using a Single Instruction
An accurate origin search combining all I/O signals (origin proximity input sig-
nal, origin input signal, positioning completed signal, error counter reset out-
put, etc.) can be executed with a single instruction. It is also possible to move
directly to an established origin using an origin return operation.
Input Interrupts In direct mode, an interrupt task can be started when a built-in input turns ON
or OFF. In counter mode, the rising or falling edges of built-in inputs can be
counted, and an interrupt task started when the count reaches a specified
value. The maximum number of interrupt input points is 6 for CPU Units with
20, 30, or 40 I/O points and 4 for CPU Units with 14 I/O points.
Note For each input point, a selection in the PLC Setup determines whether it is to
be used as a normal input, interrupt input, quick-response input, or high-
speed counter. The interrupt input response frequency in counter mode must
be 5 kHz or less total for all interrupts.
Quick-response
Inputs
By using quick-response inputs, built-in inputs up to a minimum input signal
width of 50 s can be read regardless of the cycle time. The maximum num-
ber of quick-response input points is 6 for CPU Units with 20, 30, or 40 I/O
points and 4 for CPU Units with 14 I/O points.
Note For each input, a PLC Setup parameter determines whether it is to be used as
a normal input, interrupt input, quick-response input, or high-speed counter.
9
Analog Settings
Changing Settings Using
Analog Adjustment
By adjusting the analog adjuster with a Phillips screwdriver, the value in the
Auxiliary Area can be changed to any value between 0 and 255. This makes it
easy to change set values such as timers and counters without Programming
Devices.
Changing Settings Using
External Analog Setting
Inputs
External analog values of 0 to 10 V (resolution: 256) are converted to digital
values and stored in a word in the AR Area. This enables applications that
require on-site adjustment of settings that do not demand a particularly high
degree of accuracy, such as for example, a setting based on changes in out-
door temperatures or potentiometer inputs.
Phillips screwdriver
Analog adjuster
Ladder program
Example: The production quantity could be changed by
changing the counter set value from 100 to 150.
Turning the control on the CP1H changes the
PV in A642 between 0000 and 0255 (00 and
FF hex).

CNTX
A642
External analog setting
input connector
Ladder program
Example: The production quantity could be changed by changing
the timer set value from 100 to 150.
When a voltage (0 to 10 V) is input from a
device such as a potentiometer to the
external analog setting input, the PV in A643
is refreshed between 0000 and 0100 hex (0
to 256).
TIMX
A643
0 to 10 V
Potentiometer, temperature
sensor, etc.
10
Connectability with Various Components
USB Port for
Programming Devices
CX-One Support Software, such as the CX-Programmer, connects from the
USB port on a computer to the CP1L built-in peripheral USB port via commer-
cially available USB cable.
Expansion Capability for
Serial Ports
Up to two Serial Communications Boards each with one RS-232C port or one
RS-422A/485 port can be added to a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points. One
Serial Communications Boards can be added to a CPU Unit with 20 or 14 I/O
points. With a total of up to three ports, including the USB port, this makes it
possible to simultaneously connect a computer, PT, CP1L, and/or various
components, such as an Inverter, Temperature Controller, or Smart Sensor.
Note (1) The Modbus-RTU easy master (available for all models) makes it easy to
control Modbus Slaves (such as Inverters) with serial communications.
After the Modbus Slave address, function, and data have been preset in
Personal computer
CX-One (ver. 2.0 or higher)
(e.g., CX-Programmer ver. 7.22 or
higher)
USB port
USB cable
Peripheral
USB port

NS-series PT, personal computer, bar code reader, etc.
CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C
Option Board
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485
Option Board
Inverter, etc. (See note 1.)
CP1L
RS-232C
RS-422A

CP1L
11
a fixed memory area (DM), messages can be sent or received indepen-
dently of the program by turning software switches.
(2) By using the serial PLC Links, a maximum of 10 words of data per CPU
Unit can be shared independently of the program among a maximum of
nine CPU Units (CP1L-CP1L-CP1H/CJ1M) using RS-422A/485 Option
Boards.
No-battery Operation Programs, the PLC Setup, and other data can be automatically saved to the
CPU Unit's built-in flash memory. Moreover, DM Area data can be saved to
the flash memory and then used as initial data when the power is turned ON.
This allows programs and initial values (such as recipe setup data) in the DM
Area to be saved in the CPU Unit without the need to maintain a backup bat-
tery.
Modbus-RTU
Inverter

Communications can be executed
independently of the program by setting
a Modbus-RTU command in the DM and
turning ON a software switch.
RS-422A/485
CP1L CPU Unit
(Master)
Data sharing CP1L CPU Unit
(Slave)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Slave)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Slave)
8 CPU Units max.

12
System Configuration Section 1-2
Memory Cassettes Built-in flash memory data, such as programs and DM initial-value data, can
be stored on a Memory Cassette (optional) as backup data. In addition, pro-
grams and initial-value data can be easily copied to another CPU Unit using
the Memory Cassette to recreate the same system.
Note Memory Cassette cannot be used in CP1L-J CPU Unit.
Security A password registration function is provided for the CPU Unit to prevent unau-
thorized copy of ladder programs. If an attempt is made to read a ladder pro-
gram from a CX-Programmer, access to the program is denied if the password
that is entered does not match the registered password. If incorrect pass-
words are entered for five consecutive attempts, the CPU Unit does not
accept any more passwords for two hours.
1-2 System Configuration
1-2-1 Basic System
CP1L CPU Unit
Data saving capability
without a battery
Programs, DM initial values, etc.

Built-in flash
memory
CP1L CPU Unit Another CP1L CPU Unit
Memory
Cassette
Can be automatically
transferred at startup.
Programs, DM initial values, etc.

Built-in flash
memory
CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points CPU Unit with 30 I/O Points CPU Unit with 20 I/O Points CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points
13
Maximum Number of Normal I/O Points
Optional Products
Serial
Communications
Expansion
When serial communications are required for a CP1L CPU Unit, an RS-232C
or RS-422A/485 Option Board can be added.
Two Option Boards can be mounted with a CPU Units with 30 or 40 I/O points
and one Option Board can be mounted with a CPU Units with 20 or 14 I/O
points.
This enables connection by serial communications to NS-series PTs, Bar
Code Readers, components such as Inverters, and computers without USB
ports (such as when using the CX-Programmer).
Type I/O
capacity
Power supply
voltage
Model Normal built-in
inputs
Normal built-in
outputs
Weight
M 40 points 100 to 240 VAC CP1L-M40DR-A 24 DC inputs 16 relay outputs 675 g max.
24 VDC CP1L-M40DR-D 590 g max.
CP1L-M40DT-D 16 transistor (sinking)
outputs
550 g max.
CP1L-M40DT1-D 16 transistor (sourcing)
outputs
550 g max.
30 points 100 to 240 VAC CP1L-M30DR-A 18 DC inputs 12 relay outputs 610 g max.
24 VDC CP1L-M30DR-D 525 g max.
CP1L-M30DT-D 12 transistor (sinking)
outputs
495 g max.
CP1L-M30DT1-D 12 transistor (sourcing)
outputs
495 g max.
L 20 points 100 to 240 VAC CP1L-L20DR-A 12 DC inputs 8 relay outputs 380 g max.
24 VDC CP1L-L20DR-D 350 g max.
CP1L-L20DT-D 8 transistor (sinking)
outputs
335 g max.
CP1L-L20DT1-D 8 transistor (sourcing)
outputs
335 g max.
14 points 100 to 240 VAC CP1L-L14DR-A 8 DC inputs 6 relay outputs 380 g max.
24 VDC CP1L-L14DR-D 350 g max.
CP1L-L14DT-D 6 transistor (sinking)
outputs
335 g max.
CP1L-L14DT1-D 6 transistor (sourcing)
outputs
335 g max.
J 20 points 100 to 240 VAC CP1L-J20DR-A 12 DC inputs 8 relay outputs 380 g max.
24 VDC CP1L-J20DR-D 350 g max.
CP1L-J20DT1-D 8 transistor (sourcing)
outputs
335 g max.
14 points 100 to 240 VAC CP1L-J14DR-A 8 DC inputs 6 relay outputs 380 g max.
24 VDC CP1L-J14DR-D 350 g max.
CP1L-J14DT1-D 6 transistor (sourcing)
outputs
335 g max.
Item Model Specifications Weight
Memory
Cassette
CP1W-ME05M Can be used to store user programs in
flash memory, parameters, DM initial
values, comment memory, FB pro-
grams, and data in RAM.
10 g max.
14
Option Boards for Serial Communications
1-2-2 System Expansion
CP-series Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units can be connected to a
CP1L CPU Unit. Up to three Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units can be
connected to a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points and one Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit can be connected to a CPU Unit with 20 or 14 I/O points.
This allows for the expansion of various functions such as I/O points or tem-
perature sensor inputs.
NS-series PT, personal computer, bar code reader, etc.
RS-232C
(Expansion)
CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C
Option Board
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485C
Option Board
RS-422A (Expansion)
Inverter, etc.
Appearance Name Model Port Serial communications modes
RS-232C
Option Board
CP1W-CIF01 One RS-232C port
(D-Sub, 9 pins,
female)
Host Link, NT Link (1: N or 1:1
Link Master, 1:1 Link Slave),
No-protocol, Serial PLC Link
Slave, Serial PLC Link Master,
Serial Gateway (conversion to
CompoWay/F, conversion to Mod-
bus-RTU), peripheral bus
RS-422A/485
Option Board
CP1W-CIF11 One RS-422A/485
port (terminal block
for ferrules)
COMM
COMM
15
Maximum I/O Points
Up to three Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units can be connected to a
CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points and one Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O
Unit can be connected to a CPU Unit with 20 or 14 I/O points. The maximum
I/O capacity is thus achieved by connecting either one or three Expansion
Units or Expansion I/O Units.
CP1L CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O Points
A maximum of three CP-series Expansion
I/O Units or Expansion Units can be added.

CP1L CPU Unit with 20 or 14 I/O Points
One CP-series Expansion I/O Unit or
Expansion Unit can be added.
Type I/O capacity Model Built-in
inputs
Built-in
outputs
Maximum number of
Expansion I/O Units or
Expansion Units
Maximum total I/O
points
M 40 points CP1L-M40DR-A
CP1L-M40DR-D
CP1L-M40DT-D
CP1L-M40DT1-D
24 16 3 Units max.
Inputs: 24 3
Outputs: 16 3
Max.: 160 points
Inputs: 96 points
Outputs: 64 points
30 points CP1L-M30DR-A
CP1L-M30DR-D
CP1L-M30DT-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
18 12 3 Units max.
Inputs: 24 3
Outputs: 16 3
Max.: 150 points
Inputs: 90 points
Outputs: 60 points
L 20 points CP1L-L20DR-A
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-L20DT-D
CP1L-L20DT1-D
12 8 1 Unit max.
Inputs: 24
Outputs: 16
Max.: 60 points
Inputs: 36 points
Outputs: 24 points
14 points CP1L-L14DR-A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L14DT-D
CP1L-L14DT1-D
8 6 1 Unit max.
Inputs: 24
Outputs: 16
Max.: 54 points
Inputs: 32 points
Outputs: 22 points
J 20 points CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-J20DT1-D
12 8 1 Unit max.
Inputs: 24
Outputs: 16
Max.: 60 points
Inputs: 36 points
Outputs: 24 points
14 points CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J14DT1-D
8 6 1 Unit max.
Inputs: 24
Outputs: 16
Max.: 54 points
Inputs: 32 points
Outputs: 22 points
16
CP-series Expansion I/O Units
CP-series Expansion Units
Appearance Model Normal
inputs
Normal outputs Weight
CP1W-40EDR
CPM1A-40EDR
24 VDC:
24 inputs
16 relay outputs 380 g max.
CP1W-40EDT
CPM1A-40EDT
16 transistor outputs (sink-
ing)
320 g max.
CP1W-40EDT1
CPM1A-40EDT1
16 transistor outputs (sourc-
ing)
CP1W-20EDR1
CPM1A-20EDR1
24 VDC:
12 inputs
8 relay outputs 300 g max.
CP1W-20EDT
CPM1A-20EDT
8 transistor outputs (sinking)
CP1W-20EDT1
CPM1A-20EDT1
ing)
CP1W-16ER
CPM1A-16ER
None 16 relay outputs 280 g max.
CP1W-8ED
CPM1A-8ED
24 VDC:
8 inputs
None 200 g max.
CP1W-8ER
CPM1A-8ER
None 8 relay outputs 250 g max.
CP1W-8ET
CPM1A-8ET
CP1W-8ET1
CPM1A-8ET1
ing)
Name and
appearance
Model Specifications Weight
Analog I/O Units CPM1A-MAD01 2 analog
inputs
0 to 10 V/1 to 5 V/4
to 20 mA
Resolu-
tion: 256
150 g max.
1 analog
output
0 to 10 V/10 to
+10 V/4 to 20 mA
CP1W-MAD11
CPM1A-MAD11
2 analog
inputs
0 to 5 V/1 to 5 V/0 to
10 V/10 to +10 V/0
to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA
Resolu-
tion: 6,000
1 analog
output
1 to 5/0 to 10 V/10
to +10 V/0 to 20
mA/4 to 20 mA
Analog Input
Units
CP1W-AD041
CPM1A-AD041
4 analog
inputs
0 to 5 V/1 to 5 V/0 to
10 V/10 to +10 V/
0 to 20 mA/
4 to 20 mA
Resolu-
tion: 6,000
200 g max.
Analog Output
Units
CP1W-DA041
CPM1A-DA041
4 analog
outputs
1 to 5 V/0 to 10 V/
10 to +10 V/
0 to 20 mA/
4 to 20 mA
CH
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
IN
OUT
CH CH
CH CH EXP
CH
CH
CH
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
IN CH
CH
OUT
00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
04 05 06 07
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 CH
CH EXP
COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06
IN
00 02
01 COM 03
COM 05 07
04 06
CH 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
EXP
IN OUT
V OUT COM I IN1 V IN2 COM2
I OUT V IN1 COM1 I IN2
MAD01
CH CH EXP
NC NC
CH
I IN1 I IN3
I IN2 VIN1
VIN2
VIN3 COM1
COM2
I IN4
VIN4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
IN
CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
OUT
17
1-2-3 Restrictions on System Configuration
The following restrictions apply to the CP-series Expansion Units and CP-
series Expansion I/O Units that can be connected to CP1L CPU Units.
Number of Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units Connected
A maximum of three Units can be connected to a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O
points and one Unit can be connected to a CPU Unit with 20 or 14 I/O points.
Mounting Restriction
When connecting CP-series or CPM1A-series Expansion Units or Expansion
I/O Units to a CPU Unit with AC power, provide a space of approximately 10
mm between the CPU Unit and the first Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
If sufficient space cannot be provided between the CPU Unit and the first
Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit, use the PLC in an ambient temperature
of 0 to 50C.
Restrictions in the External Power Supply Capacity
The following restrictions apply when using the external power supply from a
CPU Unit with AC power.
Temperature
Sensor Units
CP1W-TS001
CPM1A-TS001
2 inputs Thermocouple input
K, J
250 g max.
CP1W-TS002
CPM1A-TS002
4 inputs
CP1W-TS101
CPM1A-TS101
2 inputs Platinum resistance thermometer
input
Pt100, JPt100
CP1W-TS102
CPM1A-TS102
4 inputs
DeviceNet I/O
Link Unit
CPM1A-DRT21 As a DeviceNet Slave, 32 inputs and 32 out-
puts are allocated.
200 g max.
CompoBus/S
I/O Link Unit
CP1W-SRT21
CPM1A-SRT21
As a CompoBus/S slave, 8 inputs and 8 out-
puts are allocated.
200 g max.
Name and
appearance
Model Specifications Weight
BD L NC(BS-) NC
BD H NC(BS+)
S
COMM
ERR
No.
SRT21
EXP
10 mm
CP1L CPU Unit
Expansion I/O Units or Expansion Units
18
CPU Units with 30 or 40 I/O Points and AC Power (CP1L-M@@DR-A)
When CP1W or CPM1A Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units are con-
nected to a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O Points and AC Power (CP1L-M@@DR-
A), it may not be possible to use the entire 300 mA from the external power
supply due to restrictions in the power supply capacity. The entire 300 mA
from the external power supply can be used if Expansion Units and Expansion
I/O Units are not connected.
Calculation Examples of Restrictions in External Power Supply Capacity
Calculate the external power supply capacity using the following calculation
example.
CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O Points and AC Power (CP1L-L@@DR-A)
When CP1W or CPM1A Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units are con-
nected to a CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O Points and AC Power (CP1L-L@@DR-
A), the external power supply cannot be used. If no Expansion Units or
Expansion I/O Units are connected, up to 200 mA can be used.
CPU Units with DC Power
CPU Units with DC power do not have an external power supply.
Restrictions Imposed by Ambient Temperature
There are restrictions in the power supply voltage and output load current
imposed by the ambient temperature for CPU Units with DC power. Use the
CPU Unit within the following ranges of power supply voltage and output load
current.
CPU Units with Relay Outputs (CP1L-@@@DR-D)
Relay Output Load Current Derating Curves for CPU Units and Expansion I/O
Units
Note The above restrictions, apply to the relay output load current from the CPU
Unit even if Expansion I/O Units are not connected.
Item CPU Unit Expansion Unit Total Restriction
1st Unit 2nd Unit 3rd Unit
CP1L-M40DR-A CP1W-DA041 CP1W-DA041 CP1W-DA041
5 V 0.22 A 0.08 A 0.08 A 0.08 A 0.46 A
24 V 0.08 A 0.124 A 0.124 A 0.124 A 0.452 A
Power con-
sumption
5 V 0.46 A = 2.3 W
24 V 0.452 A = 10.848 W
13.148 W 18.5 W
Applicable
external power
supply capacity
18.5 W (total external power supply capacity) 13.148 W = 5.352 W
5.352 W/24V = 0.223 A
0.223 A 0.3 A
Note If the results exceeds 0.3 A, reduce the current consumption to 0.3 A or less.
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-M30DR-D CP1L-M40DR-D
50%
100%
55C 40 45
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
0%
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45 35
0%
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45

35
0%
50
Power
voltage:
21.6 VDC
Power
voltage:
20.4 VDC
Ambient temperature
19
Using CP1W-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/40EDR or
CPM1A-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/40EDR Expansion I/O Units with
CPU Units with Transistor Outputs (CP1L-@@@DT@-D)
Relay Output Load Current Derating Curves for Expansion I/O Units
Note There are no restrictions on the transistor output load current from the CPU
Unit.
CPU Units with AC Power
There are no restrictions on the output load current from CPU Units with AC
power.
Expansion I/O Units added
to the
CP1L-L14DT@-D or
CP1L-L20DT@-D
CP1L-J14DT@-D or
CP1L-J20DT@-D
to the
CP1L-M30DT@-D
to the
CP1L-M40DT@-D
50%
100%
55C 40 45
0%
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45 35
0%
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45 35
0%
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
Ambient temperature
20
Connecting the CX-Programmer Section 1-3
1-3 Connecting the CX-Programmer
The CX-Programmer (version 7.1 or higher), which runs on Windows, can be
used with CP-series CP1L L or M model PLCs. The CX-Programmer (Version
7.22 or higher), which runs on Windows, can be used with CP-series CP1L J
model PLCs. Computers running Support Software (e.g., the CX-Program-
mer) can be connected to the USB port or to a serial port.
Note A Programming Console cannot be used with CP1L PLCs.
1-3-1 Connecting with a Commercially Available USB Cable
Connect the computer running the CX-One Support Software (e.g., the CX-
Programmer) using a commercially available USB cable to the peripheral USB
port on the CPU Unit.
Restrictions when
Connecting by USB
In conformity with USB specifications, the following restrictions apply when
connecting a computer running Support Software.
A USB connection is possible for only one CP-series PLC from a single
computer. It is not possible to connect multiple PLCs simultaneously.
Do not disconnect the USB cable while the Support Software is con-
nected online. Before disconnecting the USB cable, be sure to place the
application in offline status. If the USB cable is disconnected while online,
the situations described below will occur as a result of OS error.
Windows Me, 2000, or XP:
The Support Software cannot be returned to online status by simply re-
connecting the USB cable. First return the Support Software to offline
status, and then reconnect the USB cable. Then perform the online
connection procedure for the Support Software.
Windows 98:
If the USB cable is disconnected while online, an error message may
be displayed on a blue screen. If that occurs, it will be necessary to re-
boot the computer.
The peripheral USB port (conforming to USB 1.1, B connector) is a dedicated
port for connecting Support Software, such as the CX-Programmer.
Items Required for USB Connection
Personal computer
CX-One (CX-Programmer, etc.)
USB port
USB cable
Peripheral
USB port

Operating system Windows 98, Me, 2000, or XP
Support Software CX-Programmer Ver. 6.1 (CX-One Ver. 1.1)
USB driver Included with above Support Software.
USB cable USB 1.1(or 2.0) cable (A connector-B connector), 5 m max.
21
Installing the USB Driver The procedure for first connecting a computer to the CP1L peripheral USB
port is described below.
It is assumed that the Support Software has already been installed in the
computer.
Windows XP
Turn ON the power supply to the CP1L, and connect USB cable between the
USB port of the computer and the peripheral USB port of the CP1L.
After the cable has been connected, the computer will automatically recognize
the device and the following message will be displayed.
1,2,3... 1. If the following window appears, select the No, not this time Option and
then click the Next Button. This window is not always displayed.
2. The following window will be displayed. Select the Install from a list of spe-
cific location Option and then click the Next Button.
22
3. The following window will be displayed. Click the Browse Button for the In-
clude this location in the search Field, specify C:\Program Files\
OMRON\CX-Server\USB\win2000_XP\Inf, and then click the Next Button.
The driver will be installed. (C:\ indicates the installation drive and may
be different on your computer.)
4. Ignore the following window if it is displayed and click the Continue Any-
way Button.
23
5. The following window will be displayed if the installation is completed nor-
mally. Click the Finish Button.
Windows 2000
Turn ON the power supply to the CP1L, and connect USB cable between the
USB port of the computer and the peripheral USB port of the CP1L.
After the cable has been connected, the computer will automatically recognize
the device and the following message will be displayed.
1,2,3... 1. The following message will be displayed. Click the Next Button.
24
2. The following window will be displayed.
3. Select the Search for a suitable driver for the device (recommended) Op-
tion and then click the Next Button. The following window will be displayed.
From the list in the window, select the Specify location Checkbox and then
click the Next Button.
4. Click the Browse Button, specify C:\Program Files\OMRON\CX-Serv-
er\USB\win2000_XP\Inf, and then click the Next Button. (C:\ indicates
the installation drive and may be different on your computer.)
25
5. A search will be made for the driver and the following window will be dis-
played. Click the Next Button. The driver will be installed.
6. After the driver has been successfully installed, the following window will
be displayed. Click the Finish Button.
Connection Setup Using the CX-Programmer
1,2,3... 1. Select CP1L as the device type in the Change PLC Dialog Box and confirm
that USB is displayed in the Network Type Field.
26
2. Click the OK Button to finish setting the PLC model. Then connect to the
CP1L by executing the CX-Programmer's online connection command.
Checking after Installation
1,2,3... 1. Display the Device Manager at the computer.
2. Click USB (Universal Serial Bus) Controller, and confirm that OMRON
SYSMAC PLC Device is displayed.
Re-installing the USB
Driver
If the USB driver installation fails for some reason or is cancelled in progress,
the USB driver must be reinstalled.
Checking USB Driver Status
1,2,3... 1. Display the Device Manager on the computer.
2. If USB Device is displayed for Other devices, it means that the USB driver
installation has failed.
27
Reinstalling the USB Driver
1,2,3... 1. Right-click USB Device and select Delete from the pop-up menu to delete
the driver.
2. Reconnect the USB cable. The USB Driver Installation Window will be dis-
played.
3. Reinstall the USB driver.
1-3-2 Connecting to a Serial Port
Mounting a CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board in a CP1L Option Board slot
makes it possible to connect Support Software with serial communications,
just as with previous models.
Connect the CX-Programmer to the RS-232C port of the CP1W-CIF01 Option
Board by XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV RS-232C cable.
Connection Method Connect the Programming Device using the Connecting Cable that is appro-
priate for the serial communications mode of the computer and CPU Unit.
Personal computer
CX-One (e.g., CX-Programmer)
D-Sub connector
(9-pin, female)
D-Sub connector
(9-pin, male)
Recommended cable
XW2Z-200S-CV (2 m) or
XW2Z-500S-CV (5 m)
CP1W-CIF01
RS-232C Option Board

Computer Connecting Cable CP1L CPU Unit
Model Connector Model Length Connector Serial
communications
mode
IBM PC/AT or
compatible
D-Sub 9 pin,
male
XW2Z-200S-CV 2 m D-Sub 9 pin, female
(With a CP1W-CIF01 RS-
232C Option Board
mounted in Option Board
Slot 1 or 2.)
Peripheral bus or Host
Link (SYSWAY)
XW2Z-500S-CV 5 m
28
Serial Communications Mode
Note When a Serial Communications Option Board is mounted in Option Board
Slot 1, it is called Serial Port 1. When mounted in Option Board Slot 2, it is
called Serial Port 2.
Serial
communications
mode
Features CPU Unit setting method
Peripheral bus
(toolbus)
This is the faster mode, so it is
generally used for CX-Pro-
grammer connections.
Only 1: 1 connections are
possible.
When a CP1L CPU Unit is
used, the baud rate is auto-
matically detected by the Sup-
port Software.
Turn ON pins SW4 (Serial Port
1) and SW5 (Serial Port 2) on
the DIP switch on the front
panel of the CPU Unit. These
settings enable connection by
peripheral bus regardless of the
serial port settings in the PLC
Setup.
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
A standard protocol for host
computers with either 1: 1 or 1:
N connections.
Slower than the peripheral
bus mode.
Allows modem or optical
adapter connections, or long-
distance or 1: N connections
using RS-422A/485.
Turn OFF pins SW4 (Serial Port
1) and SW5 (Serial Port 2) on
the DIP switch on the front
panel of the CPU Unit.
The mode will then be deter-
mined by the serial port set-
tings in the PLC Setup. The
default settings are for Host
Link with a baud rate of 9,600
bits/s, 1 start bit, data length of
7 bits, even parity, and 2 stop
bits.
29
Function Charts Section 1-4
1-4 Function Charts
Selected in PLC Setup.
Target value comparison interrupts
Range comparison interrupts
Selected by instructions.
Execute the ORG instruction to move from any position to the origin.

Built-in I/O functions Built-in input functions Normal inputs
Interrupt inputs
High-speed counter inputs
Quick-response inputs
Built-in output functions
Normal outputs
Pulse outputs
Variable duty ratio pulse outputs
(PWM outputs)
Origin functions
Origin search
Origin return
Inverter positioning functions
Interrupt inputs (Direct mode)
Interrupt inputs (Counter mode)
No interrupts
High-speed counter interrupts
No-battery operation
User memory, parameters (such as PLC Setup), DM initial
values, comment memory, etc., can be saved in the CPU
Unit's built-in flash memory.
Memory Cassette
Data saved in the CPU Unit's built-in flash memory can be saved to a
Memory Cassette (purchased separately) and transferred automatically
from the Memory Cassette when the power supply is turned ON.
Memory Cassette cannot be used in CP1L-J CPU Unit.
Clock
Functions using Option Boards
Serial
communications
Functions using CP-
series or CPM1A
Expansion Units
Analog I/O functions
Temperature sensor
input functions
CompoBus/S Slave
function
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
Data exchanged with Master Unit: 8 inputs and 8 outputs
DeviceNet Slave function
DeviceNet I/O Link Unit
Data exchanged with DeviceNet Master: 32 inputs
and 32 outputs
Analog setting functions
Analog adjustment
1 input
Set value: 0 to 255
External analog setting
input
1 input, 0 to 10 V
Resolution: 256
30
Function Blocks Section 1-5
1-5 Function Blocks
Function blocks can be used in programming SYSMAC CP-series PLCs.
Note Function blocks cannot be used in CP1L-J PLCs.
1-5-1 Overview of Function Blocks
A function block is a basic program element containing a standard processing
function that has been defined in advance. Once the function block has been
defined, the user just has to insert the function block in the program and set
the I/O in order to use the function.
As a standard processing function, a function block is not created with actual
physical addresses, but local variables. The user sets parameters (addresses
or values) in those variables to use the function block. The addresses used for
the variables themselves are automatically assigned by the system (CX-Pro-
grammer) each time they are placed in the program.
In particular, each function block is saved by the CX-Programmer as an indi-
vidual file that can be reused with programs for other PLCs. This makes it pos-
sible to create a library of standard processing functions.
1-5-2 Advantages of Function Blocks
Function blocks allow complex programming units to be reused easily. Once
standard program sections have been created as function blocks and saved in
files, they can be reused just by placing a function block in a program and set-
ting the parameters for the function block's I/O. Reusing standardized function
blocks reduces the time required for programming/debugging, reduces coding
errors, and makes programs easier to understand.
Structured
Programming
Structured programs created with function blocks have better design quality
and required less development time.
Easy-to-read Block Box
Design
The I/O operands are displayed as local variable names in the program, so
the program is like a black box when entering or reading the program and no
extra time is wasted trying to understand the internal algorithm.
cc aa
bb
#0000
MOV
dd
Standard program
section written
with variables
Function block A
Define in advance.
Insert in program.
Save function
block as file.
Library
Function
block A
Reuse
To another PLC program
Program 1
Copy of function block A
Input Variable Variable Output
Setting Setting
Input Variable Variable Output
Program 2
Variable Output
31
Different Processes Easily
Created from a Single
Function Block
Many different processes can be created easily from a single function block by
using input variables for the parameters (such as timer SVs, control con-
stants, speed settings, and travel distances) in the standard process.
Reduced Coding Errors Coding mistakes can be reduced, because blocks that have already been
debugged can be reused.
Data Protection The local variables in the function block cannot be accessed directly from the
outside, so the data can be protected. (Data cannot be changed unintention-
ally.)
Improved Reusability
through Programming
with Variables
The function block's I/O is entered as local variables, so the data addresses in
the function block do not have to be changed as they do when copying and
reusing a program section.
Creating Libraries Processes that are independent and reusable (such as processes for individ-
ual steps, machinery, equipment, or control systems) can be saved as func-
tion block definitions and converted to library functions.
The function blocks are created with local variable names that are not tied to
physical addresses, so new programs can be developed easily just by reading
the definitions from the file and placing them in a new program.
Nesting Multiple
Languages
Mathematical expressions can be entered in structured text (ST) language.
Nesting function blocks is supported for CX-Programmer Ver. 6.0 or higher.
For example, it is possible to express only special operations in ST language
within a function block in a ladder diagram.
For details on using function blocks, refer to the CX-Programmer Ver. 7.@
Operation Manual: Function Blocks (Cat. No. W447).
Function block (ladder language)
Call (Nesting)
Function block (ST language)
32
33
SECTION 2
Nomenclature and Specifications
This section describes the names and functions of CP1L parts and provides CP1L specifications.
2-1 Part Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2-1-1 CP1L CPU Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2-1-2 CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2-1-3 CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2-2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2-2-1 CP1L CPU Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2-2-2 I/O Memory Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2-2-3 I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2-2-4 CP/CPM1A-series Expansion I/O Unit I/O Specifications . . . . . . . 59
2-3 CP1L CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2-3-1 Overview of CPU Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2-3-2 Flash Memory Data Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2-3-3 Memory Cassette Data Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2-4 CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2-4-1 General Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2-4-2 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2-4-3 I/O Refresh Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2-4-4 Initialization at Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2-5 CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2-5-1 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2-5-2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2-5-3 Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2-5-4 Startup Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2-6 Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2-6-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2-6-2 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2-7 Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2-7-1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2-7-2 Cycle Time Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2-7-3 Functions Related to the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
2-7-4 I/O Refresh Times for PLC Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2-7-5 Cycle Time Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2-7-6 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2-7-7 I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2-7-8 Interrupt Response Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
2-7-9 Serial PLC Link Response Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2-7-10 Pulse Output Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2-7-11 Pulse Output Change Response Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
34
Part Names and Functions Section 2-1
2-1 Part Names and Functions
2-1-1 CP1L CPU Units
(1) Battery Cover
Covers the location where the battery is stored.
(2) Operation Indicators
Show CP1L operation status.
Front Back
(1) Battery cover
(2) Operation indicators
(3) Peripheral USB port
(4) Analog adjuster
(5) External analog settings
input connector
(6) DIP switch
(8) Power supply, ground,
and input terminal block
(9) Option Board slots
(10) Input indicators
(11) Expansion I/O
Unit connector
(12) Output indicators
(7) Memory
Cassette slot
(13) External power supply,
and output terminal
block

POWER
(Green)
Lit Power is ON.
Not lit Power is OFF.
RUN
(Green)
Lit The CP1L is executing a program in either RUN or
MONITOR mode.
Not lit Operation is stopped in PROGRAM mode or due to
a fatal error.
ERR/ALM
(Red)
Lit A fatal error (including FALS execution) or a hard-
ware error (WDT error) has occurred. CP1L opera-
tion will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF.
Flashing A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL execu-
tion). CP1L operation will continue.
Not lit Operation is normal.
INH
(Yellow)
Lit The Output OFF Bit (A500.15) has turned ON. All
outputs will be turned OFF.
PRPHL
(Yellow)
Flashing Communications (either sending or receiving) are in
progress through the peripheral USB port.
Not lit Other than the above.
BKUP
(Yellow)
Lit A user program, parameters, or Data Memory is
being written or accessed in the built-in flash mem-
ory (backup memory).
A user program, parameters, Data Memory, DM ini-
tial values, or comment memory is being written or
accessed in a Memory Cassette.
The BKUP indicator also lights while user programs,
parameters, and Data Memory are being restored
when the PLC power supply is turned ON.
Note Do not turn OFF the PLC power supply while
this indicator is lit.
POWER
ERR/ALM
BKUP
RUN
INH
PRPHL
35
(3) Peripheral USB Port
Used for connecting to a personal computer for programming and moni-
toring by the CX-Programmer.
(4) Analog Adjuster
By turning the analog adjuster, it is possible to adjust the value of A642
within a range of 0 to 255. (Refer to 6-4 Analog Adjuster and External
Analog Setting Input.)
(5) External Analog Setting Input Connector
By applying 0 to 10 V of external voltage, it is possible to adjust the value
of A643 within a range of 0 to 256. This input is not isolated. (Refer to 6-
4 Analog Adjuster and External Analog Setting Input.)
(6) DIP Switch
CPU Units with 30 or 40 I/O Points
Note The following data will be write-protected if pin SW1 is turned ON:
The entire user program (all tasks)
All data in parameter areas (such as the PLC Setup)
When SW1 is turned ON, the user program and the data in the pa-
rameter areas will not be cleared even if the All Clear operation is
performed from a Peripheral Device (i.e., the CX-Programmer).
No. Setting Description Application Default
SW1 ON User memory write-
protected (See note.)
Used to prevent pro-
grams from being inad-
vertently overwritten.
OFF
OFF User memory not
write-protected.
SW2 ON Data automatically
transferred from
Memory Cassette at
startup.
Used to enable pro-
grams, Data Memory, or
parameters saved on a
Memory Cassette to be
opened by the CPU Unit
at startup.
OFF
OFF Data not transferred.
SW3 ON A395.12 ON This pin enables control-
ling a bit in memory with-
out using an input relay.
OFF
OFF A395.12 OFF
SW4 ON Used for peripheral
bus.
Used to enable a Serial
Communications Option
Board mounted in Option
Board Slot 1 to be used
by the peripheral bus.
OFF
OFF According to PLC
Setup.
bus.
OFF
Setup.
SW6 OFF Keep turned OFF. --- OFF
SW1 ON User memory write-
protected (See note.)
Used to prevent pro-
grams from being inad-
vertently overwritten.
OFF
OFF User memory not
write-protected.
O
N
1
2
3
4
5
6
O
N
1
2
3
4
36
Note The following data will be write-protected if pin SW1 is turned ON:
The entire user program (all tasks)
All data in parameter areas (such as the PLC Setup)
When SW1 is turned ON, the user program and the data in the pa-
rameter areas will not be cleared even if the All Clear operation is
performed from a Peripheral Device (i.e., the CX-Programmer).
(7) Memory Cassette Slot
Used for mounting a CP1W-ME05M Memory Cassette. When mounting
a Memory Cassette, remove the dummy cassette.
Data, such as CP1L CPU Unit programs, parameters, and data memory,
can be transferred to the Memory Cassette to be saved.
(8) Power Supply, Ground, and Input Terminal Block
(9) Option Board Slots
The following Option Boards can be mounted in either slot 1 or slot 2.
CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Board
CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Board
!Caution Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before mounting or removing
an Option Board.
(10) Input Indicators
The input indicators light when input terminal contacts turn ON.
SW2 ON Data automatically
transferred from
Memory Cassette at
startup.
Used to enable pro-
grams, Data Memory, or
parameters saved on a
Memory Cassette to be
opened by the CPU Unit
at startup.
Memory Cassette cannot
be used in CP1L-J CPU
Unit.
OFF
OFF Data not transferred.
SW3 ON A395.12 ON This pin enables control-
ling a bit in memory with-
out using an input relay.
OFF
OFF A395.12 OFF
bus.
OFF
Setup.
Power supply ter-
minals
Used to provide a 100- to 240-VAC or 24-VDC power
supply.
Ground terminals
Functional ground ( ):
Connect this ground to strengthen noise immunity and to
prevent electric shock.
(AC power supply models only.)
Protective ground ( ):
To prevent electric shock, ground to 100 or less.
Input terminals Used to connect input devices.
37
(11) Expansion I/O Unit Connector
CP-series Expansion I/O Units and Expansion Units (Analog I/O Units,
Temperature Sensor Units, CompoBus/S I/O Link Units, or DeviceNet I/O
Link Units) can be connected. Up to three Expansion Units or Expansion
I/O Units can be connected to a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points and
one Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit can be connected to a CPU
Unit with 20 or 14 I/O points. (For details on using Expansion Units and
Expansion I/O Units, refer to SECTION 7 Using Expansion Units and
Expansion I/O Units.)
(12) Output Indicators
The output indicators light when output terminal contacts turn ON.
(13) External Power Supply and Output Terminal Block
2-1-2 CP1W-CIF01 RS-232C Option Boards
An RS-232C Option Board can be mounted to an Option Board slot on the
CPU Unit. With a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points, either Option Board slot
may be used.
When mounting an Option Board, first remove the slot cover. Grasp both of
the cover's up/down lock levers at the same time to unlock the cover, and then
pull the cover out.
Then to mount the Option Board, check the alignment and firmly press it in
until it snaps into place.
an Option Board.
External power
supply terminals
CPU Units with AC power supply specifications have
external 24-VDC, 300-mA, power supply terminals.
(except for the CP1L-L@DR-A, which has a 200-mA
power supply terminals). They can be used as service
power supplies for input devices.
Output terminals Used for connecting output devices.
COMM
Front Back
(1) Communications Status Indicator
(2) RS-232 Connector
(3) CPU Unit Connector
38
RS-232C Connector
2-1-3 CP1W-CIF11 RS-422A/485 Option Boards
An RS-422A/485 Option Board can be mounted to an Option Board slot on
the CPU Unit. With a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points, either Option Board
slot may be used.
When mounting an Option Board, first remove the slot cover. Grasp both of
the cover's up/down lock levers at the same time to unlock the cover, and then
pull the cover out.
Then to mount the Option Board, check the alignment and firmly press it in
until it snaps into place.
an Option Board.
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Pin Abbr. Signal name Signal direction
1 FG Frame Ground ---
2 SD (TXD) Send Data Output
3 RD (RXD) Receive Data Input
4 RS (RTS) Request to Send Output
5 CS (CTS) Clear to Send Input
6 5V Power Supply ---
7 DR (DSR) Data Set Retry Input
8 ER (DTR) Equipment Ready Output
9 SG (0V) Signal Ground ---
Connector hood FG Frame Ground ---
5
6
1
9
COMM
RDA RDB+ SDA SDB+ FG
Front Back
(1) Communications Status Indicator
(2) RS-422A/485 Connector
(3) CPU Unit Connector
(4) DIP Switch for
Operation Settings
RDB+
RDA
SDA SDB+
FG
Tighten the terminal block screws to
a torque of 0.28 Nm (2.5 Lb In.).
39
Specifications Section 2-2
DIP Switch for Operation Settings
Note (1) Set both pins 2 and 3 to either ON (2-wire) or OFF (4-wire).
(2) To disable the echo-back function, set pin 5 to ON (RS control enabled).
(3) When connecting to a device on the N side in a 1: N connection with the
4-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (RS control enabled).
Also, when connecting by the 2-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (RS control
enabled).
2-2 Specifications
2-2-1 CP1L CPU Units
General Specifications
Pin Settings
1 ON ON (both ends) Terminating resistance selection
OFF OFF
2 ON 2-wire 2-wire or 4-wire selection (See
note 1.)
OFF 4-wire
3 ON 2-wire 2-wire or 4-wire selection (See
note 1.)
OFF 4-wire
4 --- --- Not used.
5 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for RD (See
note 2.)
OFF RS control disabled (Data
always received.)
6 ON RS control enabled RS control selection for SD (See
note 3.)
OFF RS control disabled (Data
always sent.)
ON
123456
Power supply classification AC power supply DC power supply
Model
numbers
40 I/O points CP1L-M40DR-A CP1L-M40DR-D, CP1L-M40DT-D, or
CP1L-M40DT1-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
20 I/O points CP1L-L20DR-A
CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-L20DR-D, CP1L-L20DT-D,
CP1L-L20DT1-D, CP1L-J20DR-D, or
CP1L-J20DT1-D
CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DT1-D
Power supply 100 to 240 VAC
50/60 Hz
24 VDC
Operating voltage range 85 to 264 VAC 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Power consumption 50 VA max. (CP1L-M@DR-A)
30 VA max. (CP1L-L@DR-A)
30 VA max. (CP1L-J@DR-A)
See note 3.
20 W max. (CP1L-M@DT@-D)
13 W max. (CP1L-L@DT@-D)
13 W max. (CP1L-J@DT@-D)
Inrush current
(See note 1.)
100 to 120 VAC inputs:
20 A max.(for cold start at room tem-
perature.)
8 ms max.
200 to 240 VAC inputs:
40 A max.(for cold start at room tem-
perature.)
8 ms max.
30 A max.(for cold start.)
20 ms max.
40
Note (1) The above values are for a cold start at room temperature for an AC pow-
er supply, and for a cold start for a DC power supply.
A thermistor (with low-temperature current suppression characteris-
tics) is used in the inrush current control circuitry for the AC power sup-
ply. The thermistor will not be sufficiently cooled if the ambient
temperature is high or if a hot start is performed when the power sup-
ply has been OFF for only a short time, so in those cases the inrush
current values may be higher (as much as two times higher) than those
shown above.
A capacitor delay circuit is used in the inrush current control circuitry
for the DC power supply. The capacitor will not be charged if a hot start
is performed when the power supply has been OFF for only a short
time, so in those cases the inrush current values may be higher (as
much as two times higher) than those shown above.
Always allow for this when selecting fuses and breakers for external cir-
cuits.
(2) Use the external power supply to power input devices. Do not use it to
drive output devices.
(3) This is the rated value for the maximum system configuration. Use the fol-
lowing formula to calculate DC power consumption for CPU Units with DC
power.
External power supply (See note 2.) 300 mA at 24 VDC (CP1L-M@DR-A)
200 mA at 24 VDC (CP1L-L@DR-A)
None
Insulation resistance 20 M min. (at 500 VDC) between the
external AC terminals and GR terminals
No insulation between primary and sec-
ondary DC power supplies.
Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between
the external AC and GR terminals, leak-
age current: 5 mA max.
No insulation between primary and sec-
ondary DC power supplies.
Noise resistance Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (power supply line)
Vibration resistance
10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s
2
in X, Y, and
Z directions for 80 minutes each (time coefficient of 8 minutes coefficient factor
of 10 = total time of 80 minutes)
Shock resistance
147 m/s
2
three times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55C
Ambient humidity 10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Atmosphere No corrosive gas.
Ambient storage temperature 20 to 75C (excluding battery)
Terminal screw size M3
Power interrupt time 10 ms min. 2 ms min.
Weight CP1L-M40D@-@: 675 g max.
CP1L-M30D@-@: 610 g max.
CP1L-L20D@-@: 380 g max.
CP1L-L14D@-@: 380 g max.
CP1L-J20D@-@: 380 g max.
CP1L-J14D@-@: 380 g max.
Power supply classification AC power supply DC power supply
Model
numbers
CP1L-M40DT1-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-J20DT1-D
CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DT1-D
41
Formula:
DC-powered CP1L power consumption = 5-V current consumption 5 V/
70% (CP1L internal power efficiency) + 24-V current consumption 1.1
(current fluctuation factor)
Calculation Example
CP1L Power Consumption
= (0.39 A 5 V/70% + 0.139 A 24 V) 1.1
= 6.73 W
The above calculation results show that a power supply with a capacity of
7 W or greater is required.
Current Consumption
CPU Units
Note (1) The current consumption of the CP1W-ME05M Memory Cassette and
CP1W-CIF01/11 Option Boards are included in the current consumption
of the CPU Unit.
(2) CPU Units with DC power do not provide an external power supply.
(3) The current consumptions given in the following table must be added to
the current consumption of the CPU Unit if an Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit is connected.
(4) The external power supply cannot be used if an Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit is connected to a CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O points.
System
CPU Unit Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit Total
1st Unit 2nd Unit 3rd Unit
CP1L-M40DR-D CP1W-DA041 CP1W-DA041 CP1W-DA041
5 V 0.220 A 0.130 A 0.040 A 0.000 A 0.390 A
24 V 0.080 A 0.000 A 0.059 A 0.000 A 0.139 A
Type I/O capacity Model Current consumption External power
supply
5 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
M 40 I/O points CP1L-M40DR-A 0.22 A 0.08 A 0.3 A max.
CP1L-M40DR-D 0.22 A 0.08 A ---
CP1L-M40DT-D 0.31 A 0.03 A ---
CP1L-M40DT1-D 0.31 A 0.03 A ---
30 I/O points CP1L-M30DR-A 0.21 A 0.07 A 0.3 A max.
CP1L-M30DR-D 0.21 A 0.07 A ---
CP1L-M30DT-D 0.28 A 0.03 A ---
CP1L-M30DT1-D 0.28 A 0.03 A ---
L 20 I/O points CP1L-L20DR-A 0.20 A 0.05 A 0.2 A max.
CP1L-L20DR-D 0.20 A 0.05 A ---
CP1L-L20DT-D 0.24 A 0.03 A ---
CP1L-L20DT1-D 0.24 A 0.03 A ---
14 I/O points CP1L-L14DR-A 0.18 A 0.04 A 0.2 A max.
CP1L-L14DR-D 0.18 A 0.04 A ---
CP1L-L14DT-D 0.21 A 0.03 A ---
CP1L-L14DT1-D 0.21 A 0.03 A ---
J 20 I/O points CP1L-J20DR-A 0.20 A 0.05 A 0.2 A max.
CP1L-J20DR-D 0.20 A 0.05 A ---
CP1L-J20DT1-D 0.24 A 0.03 A ---
14 I/O points CP1L-J14DR-A 0.18 A 0.04 A 0.2 A max.
CP1L-J14DR-D 0.18 A 0.04 A ---
CP1L-J14DT1-D 0.21 A 0.03 A ---
42
Expansion Units and
Expansion I/O Units
Characteristics
Unit name Model Current consumption
5 VDC 24 VDC
Expansion I/O Units 40 I/O points
24 inputs
16 outputs
CP1W/CPM1A-40EDR 0.080 A 0.090 A
CP1W/CPM1A-40EDT 0.160 A ---
CP1W/CPM1A-40EDT1
20 I/O points
12 inputs
8 outputs
CP1W/CPM1A-20EDR1 0.103 A 0.044 A
CP1W/CPM1A-20EDT 0.130 A ---
CP1W/CPM1A-20EDT1
16 outputs CP1W/CPM1A-16ER 0.042 A 0.090 A
8 inputs CP1W/CPM1A-8ED 0.018 A ---
8 outputs CP1W/CPM1A-8ER 0.026 A 0.044 A
CP1W/CPM1A-8ET 0.075 A ---
CP1W/CPM1A-8ET1
Expansion
Units
Analog Input Unit 4 inputs CP1W/CPM1A-AD041 0.100 A 0.090 A
Analog Output
Unit
4 outputs CP1W/CPM1A-DA041 0.080 A 0.124 A
Analog I/O Units 2 inputs
1 output
CP1W/CPM1A-MAD01 0.066 A 0.066 A
CP1W/CPM1A-MAD11 0.083 A 0.110 A
Temperature Sen-
sor Units
K or J thermocou-
ples
CP1W/CPM1A-TS001 0.040 A 0.059 A
CP1W/CPM1A-TS002
Pt or JPt platinum
resistance ther-
mometers
CP1W/CPM1A-TS101 0.054 A 0.073 A
CP1W/CPM1A-TS102
CompoBus/S I/O
Link Unit
8 inputs
8 outputs
CP1W/CPM1A-SRT21 0.029 A ---
DeviceNet I/O Link
Unit
32 inputs
32 outputs
CPM1A-DRT21 0.048 A ---
Model CP1L-M40DR-A
CP1L-M40DR-D
CP1L-M40DT-D
CP1L-M40DT1-D
CP1L-M30DR-A
CP1L-M30DR-D
CP1L-M30DT-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
CP1L-L20DR-A
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-L20DT-D
CP1L-L20DT1-D
CP1L-L14DR-A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L14DT-D
CP1L-L14DT1-D
CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-J20DT1-D
CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J14DT1-D
Program capacity 10 Ksteps 5 Ksteps 1 Ksteps
Control method Stored program method
I/O control method Cyclic scan with immediate refreshing
Program language Ladder diagram
Function blocks Maximum number of function block definitions: 128
Maximum number of instances: 256
Languages usable in function block definitions: Ladder dia-
grams, structured text (ST)
Unusable
Instruction length 1 to 7 steps per instruction
Instructions Approx. 500 (function codes: 3 digits)
Instruction execution time Basic instructions: 0.61 s min.
Special instructions: 4.1 s min.
Common processing time 0.38 ms
Number of connectable
Expansion Units and Expan-
sion I/O Units
3 Units (CP Series or
CPM1A)
1 Unit (CP Series or CPM1A)
Maximum number of I/O
points
160 points
(40 built in,
40 3
expansion)
150 points
(30 built in,
40 3
expansion)
60 points
(20 built in,
40 1
expansion)
54 points
(14 built in,
40 1
expansion)
60 points
(20 built in,
40 1
expansion)
54 points
(14 built in,
40 1
expansion)
43
Built-in
terminals
(Functions
can be
assigned.)
Built-in I/O 40 terminals
(24 inputs
and 16
outputs)
30 terminals
(18 inputs
and 12
outputs)
20 terminals
(12 inputs
and 8
outputs)
14 terminals
(8 inputs and
6 outputs)
20 terminals
(12 inputs
and 8
outputs)
14 terminals
(8 inputs and
6 outputs)
Inter-
rupt
inputs
Direct
mode
6 inputs 4 inputs 6 inputs 4 inputs
Response time: 0.3 ms
Counter
mode
6 inputs 4 inputs 6 inputs 4 inputs
Response frequency: 5 kHz total, 16 bits
Incrementing counter or decrementing counter
Quick-response
inputs
6 points 4 inputs 6 inputs 4 inputs
Min. input pulse width: 50 s max.
High-speed
counters
4 inputs/2 axes (24 VDC)
Single phase (pulse plus direction, up/down, increment),
100 kHz
Differential phases (4), 50 kHz
Value range: 32 bits, Linear mode or ring mode
Interrupts: Target value comparison or range comparison
4 inputs/2 axes (24 VDC)
Single phase (pulse plus
direction, up/down, incre-
ment), 20 kHz
Differential phases (4), 10
kHz
Value range: 32 bits, Linear
mode or ring mode
Interrupts: Target value com-
parison or range comparison
Pulse
outputs
(Transistor
output
models
only)
Pulse outputs 2 outputs, 1 Hz to 100 kHz
(CCW/CW or pulse plus direction)
Trapezoidal or S-curve acceleration and deceleration (Duty
ratio: 50% fixed)
2 outputs, 1 Hz to 20 kHz
(CCW/CW or pulse plus
direction)
Trapezoidal or S-curve
acceleration and decelera-
tion (Duty ratio 50% fixed)
PWM outputs 2 outputs, 0.1 to 6,553.5 Hz or 1 to 32,800 Hz
Variable duty ratio: 0.0% to 100.0% (in increments of 0.1% or 1%)
(Accuracy: 5% at 1 kHz)
Analog
settings
Analog adjuster 1 (Setting range: 0 to 255)
External ana-
log setting input
1 input (Resolution: 1/256, Input range: 0 to 10 V)
Serial port Peripheral USB
port
Supported. (1-port USB connector, type B): Special for a Peripheral Device such as the
CX-Programmer. (Set the network classification to USB in the Peripheral
Device's PLC model setting.)
Serial communications standard: USB 1.1
RS-232C port,
RS-422A/485
port
Ports not provided as standard equipment. (M-type CPU Unit: 2 ports max., L-type
CPU Unit: 1 port)
The following Option Boards can be mounted:
CP1W-CIF01: One RS-232C port
CP1W-CIF11: One RS-422A/485 port
Applicable communications modes (same for all of the above ports): Host Link, NT
Link (1: N mode), No-protocol, Serial PLC Link Slave, Serial PLC Link Master, Serial
Gateway (conversion to CompoWay/F, conversion to Modbus-RTU), peripheral bus
(See note.)
Number of
tasks
288 (32 cycle execution tasks and 256 interrupt tasks)
Scheduled
interrupt tasks
1 (interrupt task 2, fixed)
Input interrupt
tasks
6 (interrupt tasks 140 to 145, fixed) 4 (interrupt
tasks 140 to
143, fixed)
6 (interrupt
tasks 140 to
145, fixed)
4 (interrupt
tasks 140 to
143, fixed)
High-speed counter interrupts and interrupt tasks specified by external interrupts
can also be executed.)
Maximum subroutine number 256
Maximum jump number 256
Scheduled interrupts 1
Model CP1L-M40DR-A
CP1L-M40DR-D
CP1L-M40DT-D
CP1L-M40DT1-D
CP1L-M30DR-A
CP1L-M30DR-D
CP1L-M30DT-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
CP1L-L20DR-A
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-L20DT-D
CP1L-L20DT1-D
CP1L-L14DR-A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L14DT-D
CP1L-L14DT1-D
CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-J20DT1-D
CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J14DT1-D
44
Note Can be used as Modbus-RTU easy master function.
2-2-2 I/O Memory Details
Clock function Supported.
Accuracy (monthly deviation): 4.5 min to 0.5 min (ambient temperature: 55C),
2.0 min to +2.0 min (ambient temperature: 25C),
2.5 min to +1.5 min (ambient temperature: 0C)
Memory
Backup
Built-in flash
memory
User programs and parameters (such as the PLC Setup) are automatically saved to the
flash memory. It is also possible to save and read data memory initial data.
The data is automatically transferred to RAM when the power supply is turned ON.
(Data memory initial data, however, may or may not be transferred, depending on the
selection in the PLC Setup.
Battery backup The HR Area, DM Area, and counter values (flags, PV) are backed up by a battery.
Battery model: CJ1W-BAT01 (Built into the CP1L CPU Unit.)
Maximum battery service life: 5 years
Guaranteed (ambient temperature: 55C): 13,000 hours (approx. 1.5 years)
Effective value (ambient temperature: 25C): 43,000 hours (approx. 5 years)
Memory Cassette function A CP1W-ME05M Memory Cassette (512K words, optional)
can be mounted. It can be used to back up the following
data on the CPU Unit's RAM and to transfer the data at
startup.
Data saved on Memory Cassette: User programs,parame-
ters (such as the PLC Setup), DM Area, data memory ini-
tial data, comment memory (CX-Programmer conversion
tables, comments, program indices), and FB program
memory.
Writing to Memory Cassette: By operations from the CX-
Programmer.
Reading from Memory Cassette: At startup or by opera-
tions from the CX-Programmer.
Unusable
Model CP1L-M40DR-A
CP1L-M40DR-D
CP1L-M40DT-D
CP1L-M40DT1-D
CP1L-M30DR-A
CP1L-M30DR-D
CP1L-M30DT-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
CP1L-L20DR-A
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-L20DT-D
CP1L-L20DT1-D
CP1L-L14DR-A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L14DT-D
CP1L-L14DT1-D
CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-J20DT1-D
CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J14DT1-D
I/O
Areas
Input bits 24 bits
CIO 0.00 to
CIO 0.11
CIO 1.00 to
CIO 1.11
18 bits
CIO 0.00 to
CIO 0.11
CIO 1.00 to
CIO 1.05
12 bits
CIO 0.00 to
CIO 0.11
8 bits
CIO 0.00 to
CIO 0.07
12 bits
CIO 0.00 to
CIO 0.11
8 bits
CIO 0.00 to
CIO 0.07
Output bits 16 bits
CIO 100.00 to
CIO 100.07
CIO 101.00 to
CIO 101.11
12 bits
CIO 100.00 to
CIO 100.07
CIO 101.00 to
CIO 100.03
8 bits
CIO 100.00 to
CIO 100.07
6 bits
CIO 100.00 to
CIO 100.05
8 bits
CIO 100.00 to
CIO 100.07
6 bits
CIO 100.00 to
CIO 100.05
1:1 Link Bit
Area
1024 bits (64 words): CIO 3000.00 to CIO 3063.15 (words CIO 3000 to CIO 3063)
Serial PLC
Link Area
1,440 bits (90 words): CIO 3100.00 to CIO 3189.15 (words CIO 3100 to CIO 3189)
Work bits 4,800 bits (300 words): CIO 1200.00 to CIO 1499.15 (words CIO 1200 to CIO 1499)
37,504 bits (2,344 words): CIO 3800.00 to CIO 6143.15 (words CIO 3800 to CIO 6143)
Work bits 8,192 bits (1,536 words): W000.00 to W511.15 (words W0 to W511)
TR Area 16 bits: TR0 to TR15
Model CP1L-M40DR-A
CP1L-M40DR-D
CP1L-M40DT-D
CP1L-M40DT1-D
CP1L-M30DR-A
CP1L-M30DR-D
CP1L-M30DT-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
CP1L-L20DR-A
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-L20DT-D
CP1L-L20DT1-D
CP1L-L14DR-A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L14DT-D
CP1L-L14DT1-D
CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-J20DT1-D
CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J14DT1-D
45
2-2-3 I/O Specifications
I/O Terminal Blocks of CPU Units with 40 I/O Points
Input Terminal Block (Top Block)
HR Area 24,576 bits (512 words): H0.00 to H1535.15 (words H0 to H1535)
AR Area Read-only (Write-prohibited) 7,168 bits (448 words): A0.00 to A447.15 (words A0 to A447)
Read/Write 8,192 bits (512 words): A448.00 to A959.15 (words A448 to A959)
Timers 4,096 bits: T0 to T4095
Counters 4,096 bits: C0 to C4095
DM Area 32 Kwords: D0 to D32767
Note Initial data can be trans-
ferred to the CPU Unit's
built-in flash memory
using the data memory
initial data transfer func-
tion. A setting in the PLC
Setup can be used so that
the data in flash memory
is transferred to RAM at
startup.
DM fixed allocation words for
Modbus-RTU Easy Master
D32200 to D32249 for Serial
Port 1, D32300 to D32349 for
Serial Port 2
10 Kwords: D0 to D9999 and D32000 to D32767
Note Initial data can be transferred to the CPU Unit's built-in flash
memory using the data memory initial data transfer function.
A setting in the PLC Setup can be used so that the data in
flash memory is transferred to RAM at startup.
DM fixed allocation words for Modbus-RTU Easy Master
D32300 to D32349 for Serial Port 1
Data Register Area 16 registers (16 bits): DR0 to DR15
Index Register Area 16 registers (16 bits): IR0 to IR15
Task Flag Area 32 flags (32 bits): TK0 to TK31
Trace Memory 4,000 words (500 samples for the trace data maximum of 31 bits and 6 words.)
Model CP1L-M40DR-A
CP1L-M40DR-D
CP1L-M40DT-D
CP1L-M40DT1-D
CP1L-M30DR-A
CP1L-M30DR-D
CP1L-M30DT-D
CP1L-M30DT1-D
CP1L-L20DR-A
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-L20DT-D
CP1L-L20DT1-D
CP1L-L14DR-A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L14DT-D
CP1L-L14DT1-D
CP1L-J20DR-A
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-J20DT1-D
CP1L-J14DR-A
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J14DT1-D
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
AC Power Supply Models
Inputs (CIO 0) Inputs (CIO 1)
DC Power Supply Models
COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 10 00 04 06 08 10 02 08
+
NC
46
Setting Input Functions Using PLC Setup
Address Input operation settings High-speed counters Origin searches
Word Bit Normal
inputs
Interrupt
inputs
(See note.)
Quick-
response
inputs
Operation settings:
High-speed counters enabled
Phase-Z reset
Origin searches
enabled for pulse
outputs 0 and 1
Single-phase
(increment
pulse input)
Two-phase (differential
phase x4, up/down, or
pulse/direction)
CIO 0 00 Normal
input 0
--- --- Counter 0, incre-
ment input
Counter 0, A phase, up,
or count input
---
01 Normal
input 1
ment input
Counter 0, B phase,
down, or direction input
---
02 Normal
input 2
ment input
or count input
---
03 Normal
input 3
ment input
Counter 1, B phase,
---
04 Normal
input 4
Interrupt
input 0
Quick-
response
input 0
Counter 0,
phase-Z/reset
input
Counter 0, phase-Z reset
input
---
05 Normal
input 5
Interrupt
input 1
Quick-
response
input 1
Counter 1,
phase-Z reset
input
input
---
06 Normal
input 6
Interrupt
input 2
Quick-
response
input 2
Counter 2,
phase-Z reset
input
--- Pulse output 0: Origin
input signal
07 Normal
input 7
Interrupt
input 3
Quick-
response
input 3
Counter 3,
phase-Z reset
input
input signal
08 Normal
input 8
Interrupt
input 4
Quick-
response
input 4
--- --- ---
09 Normal
input 9
Interrupt
input 5
Quick-
response
input 5
--- --- ---
10 Normal
input 10
--- --- --- --- Pulse output 0: Origin
proximity input signal
11 Normal
input 11
--- --- --- --- Pulse output 1: Origin
47
Output Terminal Block Arrangement (Bottom Block)
CIO 1 00 Normal
input 12
--- --- --- --- ---
01 Normal
input 13
--- --- --- --- ---
02 Normal
input 14
--- --- --- --- ---
03 Normal
input 15
--- --- --- --- ---
04 Normal
input 16
--- --- --- --- ---
05 Normal
input 17
--- --- --- --- ---
06 Normal
input 18
--- --- --- --- ---
07 Normal
input 19
--- --- --- --- ---
08 Normal
input 20
--- --- --- --- ---
09 Normal
input 21
--- --- --- --- ---
10 Normal
input 22
--- --- --- --- ---
11 Normal
input 23
--- --- --- --- ---
Word Bit Normal
inputs
Interrupt
inputs
(See note.)
Quick-
response
inputs
Operation settings:
Phase-Z reset
Origin searches
enabled for pulse
outputs 0 and 1
Single-phase
(increment
pulse input)
pulse/direction)
COM
01 03
05 07
01 03
05 07
00 02 04 06 00
02
04 06
COM
+
NC
CIO 100 CIO 101
NC
COM COM COM COM
COM
01 03
05 07
01 03
05 07
00 02 04 06 00
02
04 06
COM
CIO 100 CIO 101
COM COM COM COM
48
Setting Output Functions Using Instructions and PLC Setup
Address When the
instructions to
the right are not
executed
When a pulse output
instruction (SPED, ACC,
PLS2, or ORG) is executed
When origin searches are
enabled in the PLC Setup,
and an origin search is
executed with ORG
instruction
When the PWM
instruction is
executed
Word Bit Normal outputs Fixed duty ratio pulse output Variable duty ratio
pulse output
CW/CCW Pulse plus
direction
+ When the origin search
function is used
PWM output
CIO 100 00 Normal output 0 Pulse output 0
(CW)
Pulse output 0
(pulse)
--- ---
01 Normal output 1 Pulse output 0
(CCW)
Pulse output 0
(direction)
--- PWM output 0
(CW)
Pulse output 1
(pulse)
--- ---
(CCW)
Pulse output 1
(direction)
--- PWM output 1
04 Normal output 4 --- --- Origin search 0 (Error counter
reset output)
---
reset output)
---
06 Normal output 6 --- --- --- ---
07 Normal output 7 --- --- --- ---
CIO 101 00 Normal output 8 --- --- --- ---
01 Normal output 9 --- --- --- ---
02 Normal output 10 --- --- --- ---
03 Normal output 11 --- --- --- ---
04 Normal output 12 --- --- --- ---
05 Normal output 13 --- --- --- ---
06 Normal output 14 --- --- --- ---
07 Normal output 15 --- --- --- ---
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 NC
COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05
00 02 04 06 10 00 04 NC 02 08
+
NC
49
Word Bit Normal
inputs
Interrupt
inputs
(See note.)
Quick-
response
inputs
Operation settings:
Phase-Z reset
Origin searches
enabled for pulse
outputs 0 and 1
Single-phase
(increment
pulse input)
pulse/direction)
CIO 0 00 Normal
input 0
--- --- Counter 0,
increment input
or count input
---
01 Normal
input 1
--- --- Counter 1,
increment input
Counter 0, B phase,
---
02 Normal
input 2
--- --- Counter 2,
increment input
or count input
---
03 Normal
input 3
--- --- Counter 3,
increment input
Counter 1, B phase,
---
04 Normal
input 4
Interrupt
input 0
Quick-
response
input 0
Counter 0,
phase-Z/reset
input
input
---
05 Normal
input 5
Interrupt
input 1
Quick-
response
input 1
Counter 1,
phase-Z reset
input
input
---
06 Normal
input 6
Interrupt
input 2
Quick-
response
input 2
Counter 2,
phase-Z reset
input
input signal
07 Normal
input 7
Interrupt
input 3
Quick-
response
input 3
Counter 3,
phase-Z reset
input
input signal
08 Normal
input 8
Interrupt
input 4
Quick-
response
input 4
--- ---
09 Normal
input 9
Interrupt
input 5
Quick-
response
input 5
--- ---
10 Normal
input 10
--- --- --- Pulse output 0: Origin
11 Normal
input 11
CIO 1 00 Normal
input 12
--- --- ---
01 Normal
input 13
--- --- ---
02 Normal
input 14
--- --- ---
03 Normal
input 15
--- --- ---
04 Normal
input 16
--- --- ---
05 Normal
input 17
--- --- ---
50
Output Terminal Block (Bottom Block)
Address When the
instructions to
the right are not
executed
When a pulse output
instruction (SPED, ACC, PLS2,
or ORG) is executed
enabled in the PLC Setup,
and an origin search is
executed with ORG
instruction
When the PWM
instruction is
executed
Word Bit Normal outputs Fixed duty ratio pulse output Variable duty
ratio pulse output
CW/CCW Pulse plus
direction
function is used
PWM output
(CW)
Pulse output 0
(pulse)
--- ---
(CCW)
Pulse output 0
(direction)
--- PWM output 0
(CW)
Pulse output 1
(pulse)
--- ---
(CCW)
Pulse output 1
(direction)
--- PWM output 1
reset output)
---
reset output)
---
06 Normal output 6 --- --- --- ---
07 Normal output 7 --- --- --- ---
CIO 101 00 Normal output 8 --- --- --- ---
01 Normal output 9 --- --- --- ---
02 Normal output 10 --- --- --- ---
03 Normal output 11 --- --- --- ---
01
03
05 07
01 03
00 02
04
06
00 02
COM
+
NC
CIO 100
CIO 101
NC
COM COM COM COM
COM
CIO 100 CIO 101
COM COM
01
03
00 02
05 07
01 03
04
06
00 02
COM
COM
51
Word Bit Normal
inputs
Interrupt
inputs
(See note.)
Quick-
response
inputs
Operation settings:
Phase-Z reset
Origin searches
enabled for pulse
outputs 0 and 1
Single-phase
(increment
pulse input)
pulse/direction)
CIO 0 00 Normal
input 0
--- --- Counter 0,
increment input
or count input
---
01 Normal
input 1
--- --- Counter 1,
increment input
Counter 0, B phase,
---
02 Normal
input 2
--- --- Counter 2,
increment input
or count input
---
03 Normal
input 3
--- --- Counter 3,
increment input
Counter 1, B phase,
---
04 Normal
input 4
Interrupt
input 0
Quick-
response
input 0
Counter 0,
phase-Z/reset
input
Counter 0, phase-Z
reset input
---
05 Normal
input 5
Interrupt
input 1
Quick-
response
input 1
Counter 1,
phase-Z reset
input
Counter 1, phase-Z
reset input
---
06 Normal
input 6
Interrupt
input 2
Quick-
response
input 2
Counter 2,
phase-Z reset
input
input signal
07 Normal
input 7
Interrupt
input 3
Quick-
response
input 3
Counter 3,
phase-Z reset
input
input signal
08 Normal
input 8
Interrupt
input 4
Quick-
response
input 4
--- ---
09 Normal
input 9
Interrupt
input 5
Quick-
response
input 5
--- ---
10 Normal
input 10
11 Normal
input 11
L1 L2/N
COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Inputs (CIO 0)
COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 10 08
+
NC
Inputs (CIO 0)
52
Address When the
instructions to
the right are
not executed
When a pulse output
enabled in PLC Setup, and an
origin search is executed
with ORG instruction
When the PWM
instruction is
executed
pulse output
CW/CCW Pulse plus
direction
function is used
PWM output
(CW)
Pulse output 0
(pulse)
--- ---
(CCW)
Pulse output 0
(direction)
--- PWM output 0
(CW)
Pulse output 1
(pulse)
--- ---
(CCW)
Pulse output 1
(direction)
--- PWM output 1
reset output)
---
reset output)
---
06 Normal output 6 --- --- --- ---
07 Normal output 7 --- --- --- ---
COM
07
05
06
AC Power Supply Models DC Power Supply Models
COM
+
NC
CIO 100
NC COM COM 03 COM
CIO 100
COM COM
01 04 00 02
COM
07
03
05
06
01 04 00 02
53
Word Bit Normal
inputs
Interrupt
inputs
(See note.)
Quick-
response
inputs
Operation settings:
Phase-Z reset
Origin searches
enabled for pulse
outputs 0 and 1
Single-phase
(increment
pulse input)
pulse/direction)
CIO 0 00 Normal
input 0
ment input
or count input
---
01 Normal
input 1
ment input
Counter 0, B phase,
---
02 Normal
input 2
ment input
or count input
Pulse output 0: Ori-
gin proximity input
signal
03 Normal
input 3
ment input
Counter 1, B phase,
Pulse output 1: Ori-
gin proximity input
signal
04 Normal
input 4
Interrupt
input 0
Quick-
response
input 0
Counter 0,
phase-Z/reset
input
Counter 0, phase-Z or
reset input
---
05 Normal
input 5
Interrupt
input 1
Quick-
response
input 1
Counter 1,
phase-Z reset
input
Counter 1, phase-Z or
reset input
---
06 Normal
input 6
Interrupt
input 2
Quick-
response
input 2
Counter 2,
phase-Z reset
input
--- Pulse output 0: Ori-
gin input signal
07 Normal
input 7
Interrupt
input 3
Quick-
response
input 3
Counter 3,
phase-Z reset
input
--- Pulse output 1: Ori-
gin input signal
L1 L2/N
COM 01 03 05 07
00 02 04 06
Inputs (CIO 0)
COM 01 03 05 07
00 02 04 06
+
NC
Inputs (CIO 0)
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
NC NC
54
Setting Functions Using Instructions and PLC Setup
Input Specifications
Normal Inputs
Address When the
instructions to
the right are not
executed
When a pulse output
enabled in PLC Setup, and an
origin search is executed with
ORG instruction
When the PWM
instruction is
executed
pulse output
CW/CCW Pulse plus
direction
function is used
PWM output
CIO 100 00 Normal output 0 Pulse output
0 (CW)
Pulse output
0 (pulse)
--- ---
01 Normal output 1 Pulse output
0 (CCW)
Pulse output
0 (direction)
--- PWM output 0
1 (CW)
Pulse output
1 (pulse)
--- ---
1 (CCW)
Pulse output
1 (direction)
--- PWM output 1
reset output)
---
reset output)
---
COM
05
AC Power Supply Models DC Power Supply Models
COM
+
NC
CIO 100
NC COM COM 03
COM
CIO 100
COM COM
01 04 00 02
COM 03
05 01 04 00 02
NC
NC
NC
NC
Item Specification
High-speed Counter Inputs Interrupt Inputs and
Quick-response Inputs
Normal inputs
CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.03 CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.09 (See
note 1.)
CIO 0.10 to CIO 0.11 and
CIO 1.00 to 1.11 (See note 2.)
Input voltage
24 VDC
+10%
/
15%
Applicable inputs 2-wire and 3-wire sensors
Input impedance 3.0 k 3.0 k 4.7 k
Input current 7.5 mA typical 7.5 mA typical 5 mA typical
ON voltage 17.0 VDC min. 17.0 VDC min. 14.4 VDC min.
OFF voltage/current 1 mA max. at 5.0 VDC max. 1 mA max. at 5.0 VDC max. 1 mA max. at 5.0 VDC max.
ON delay 2.5 s max. 50 s max. 1 ms max. (See note 3.)
55
Note (1) HIgh-speed counter inputs, interrupt inputs, and quick-response inputs
can also be used as normal inputs.
(2) The bits that can be used depend on the model of CPU Unit.
(3) The response time is the hardware delay value. The delay set in the PLC
Setup (0 to 32 ms, default: 8 ms) must be added to this value.
High-speed Counter Inputs
OFF delay 2.5 s max. 50 s max. 1 ms max. (See note 3.)
Circuit configuration
Item Specification
High-speed Counter Inputs Interrupt Inputs and
Normal inputs
CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.03 CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.09 (See
note 1.)
CIO 0.10 to CIO 0.11 and
CIO 1.00 to 1.11 (See note 2.)
IN
IN
COM
3.0 k
4
.
3

k
1000 pF
3.0 k
1000 pF
IN
IN
COM
9
1
0

IN
IN
COM
4.7 k
7
5
0

Input bits: CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.11

Input bits: CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.03, CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.03
Input LED
Input LED
Input LED
Internal
circuits
Internal
circuits
Internal
circuits
Bit Differential
phase mode
Pulse plus
direction input
mode
Up/down input
mode
Increment
mode
CIO 0.00,
CIO 0.02
A-phase pulse
input
Pulse input Increment pulse
input
Increment pulse
input
CIO 0.01,
CIO 0.03
B-phase pulse
input
Direction input Decrement
pulse input
Normal input
CIO 0.04,
CIO 0.05
Z-phase pulse input or hardware reset input (Can be used as ordinary
inputs when high-speed counter is not being used.)
Max. count
frequency
50 kHz (4) 100 kHz
56
Input Bits for High-speed Counters
Interrupt Inputs and
With CPU Units with 20, 30, or 40 I/O points, the six input bits from CIO 0.04
to CIO 0.09 can be used as either normal inputs or as interrupt or quick-
response inputs depending on the settings in the PLC Setup. With CPU Units
with 14 I/O points, the four input bits from CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.07 can be used
as either normal inputs or as interrupt or quick-response inputs.
Output Specifications
Relay Outputs
Counter Single phase Phase A Phase B Phase Z
High-speed counter 0 CIO 0.00 CIO 0.00 CIO 0.01 CIO 0.04
High-speed counter 1 CIO 0.01 CIO 0.02 CIO 0.03 CIO 0.05
High-speed counter 2 CIO 0.02 --- --- ---
High-speed counter 3 CIO 0.03 --- --- ---
90%
10%
50 s
min.
50 s
min.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
T1 T2 T3 T4
T1, T2, T3, T4: 2.5 s min.
90%
50%
10%
90%
50%
10%
90%
50%
10%
2.5 s
min.
2.5 s
min.
20.0 s min. 10.0 s min.
Up/down input mode Differential phase mode
Pulse plus direction input mode,
Increment mode
Input bit Interrupt inputs Quick-response inputs
CPU Units with 20,
30, or 40 I/O points
CPU Units with
14 I/O points
CIO 0.04 CIO 0.04 Interrupt input 0 Quick-response input 0
CIO 0.08 --- Interrupt input 4 Quick-response input 4
CIO 0.09 --- Interrupt input 5 Quick-response input 5
Item Specification
Max. switching capacity 2 A, 250 VAC (cos = 1)
2 A, 24 VDC (4 A/common)
Min. switching capacity 10 mA, 5 VDC
Service life
of relay
Electrical Resistive
load
100,000 operations (24 VDC)
Inductive
load
48,000 operations (250 VAC, cos = 0.4)
Mechanical 20,000,000 operations
ON delay 15 ms max.
57
Note (1) Under the worst conditions, the service life of output contacts is as shown
above. The service life of relays is as shown in the following diagram as
a guideline.
(2) There are restrictions imposed by the ambient temperature.
CPU Units with Relay Outputs (CP1L-@@@DR-D)
Relay Output Load Current Derating Curves for CPU Units and Expansion
I/O Units
Note The above restrictions, apply to the relay output load current from
the CPU Unit even if Expansion I/O Units are not connected.
OFF delay 15 ms max.
Item Specification
COM
OUT
OUT
Output LED
Internal
circuits
Maximum
250 VAC: 2 A
24 VDC: 2 A
CP1L-L14DR-D
CP1L-L20DR-D
CP1L-J14DR-D
CP1L-J20DR-D
CP1L-M30DR-D CP1L-M40DR-D
300
500
200
100
50
30
20
5
3
2
10
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5 10
L
i
f
e

(

1
0
4
)
Contact current (A)
125 VAC resistive load
30 VDC/250 VAC resistive load
30 VDC = 7 ms
125 VAC cos = 0.4
250 VAC cos = 0.4
50%
100%
55C 40 45
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
0%
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45 35
0%
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45

35
0%
50
Power
voltage:
21.6 VDC
Power
voltage:
20.4 VDC
Ambient temperature
58
Transistor Outputs (Sinking or Sourcing)
Normal Outputs
Note (1) The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
(2) Also do not exceed 0.9 A for the total for CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.03.
(3) The bits that can be used depend on the model of the CPU Unit.
!Caution Do not connect a load to an output terminal or apply a voltage in excess of the
maximum switching capacity.
Pulse Outputs (CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.03)
Item Specification
CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.03 CIO 100.04 to CIO 100.07 (See note 3.)
Max. switching capac-
ity
4.5 to 30 VDC, 300 mA/output, 0.9 A/common, M40D@-D 3.6 A/Unit
M30D@-D 2.7 A/Unit
L20D@-D 1.8 A/Unit
L14D@-D 1.4 A/Unit (See note 2.)
J20D@-D 1.8 A/Unit
J14D@-D 1.4 A/Unit
Min. switching capacity 4.5 to 30 VDC, 1 mA
Leakage current 0.1 mA max.
Residual voltage 0.6 V max. 1.5 V max.
ON delay 0.1 ms max.
OFF delay 0.1 ms max. 1 ms max.
Fuse 1 fuse/output (See note 1.)
Circuit configuration Normal outputs CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.03
(Sinking Outputs)
Normal outputs CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.03
(Sourcing Outputs)
(Sinking Outputs)
(Sourcing Outputs)
OUT
OUT
COM ()
L
L
Internal
circuits
Internal
circuits
24 VDC/
4.5 to
30 VDC
OUT
OUT
COM (+)
L
L
Internal
circuits
Internal
circuits
24 VDC/
4.5 to
30 VDC
OUT
OUT
COM ()
L
L
Internal
circuits
24 VDC/4.5
to 30 VDC
OUT
OUT
COM (+)
L
L
Internal
circuits
24 VDC/4.5
to 30 VDC
Item Specification
Max. switching capacity 30 mA/4.75 to 26.4 VDC
Min. switching capacity 7 mA/4.75 to 26.4 VDC
Max. output frequency 100 kHz
Output waveform
4 s min. 2 s min.
ON
90%
10%
OFF
59
Note (1) The load for the above values is assumed to be the resistance load, and
does not take into account the impedance for the connecting cable to the
load.
(2) Due to distortions in pulse waveforms resulting from connecting cable im-
pedance, the pulse widths in actual operation may be smaller than the
values shown above.
PWM Outputs (CIO 100.01 and CIO 100.03)
2-2-4 CP/CPM1A-series Expansion I/O Unit I/O Specifications
Input Specifications (CP1W-40EDR/40EDT/40EDT1/20EDR1/20EDT/20EDT1/8ED)
Note (1) The response time is the hardware delay value. The delay set in the PLC
Setup (0 to 32 ms, default: 8 ms) must be added to this value. For the
CP1W-40EDR/EDT/EDT1 and CPM1A-40EDR/EDT/EDT1, a fixed value
of 16 ms must be added.
(2) Do not apply voltage in excess of the rated voltage to the input terminal.
Output Specifications
Relay Outputs (CP1W-40EDR/20EDR1/16ER/8ER)
Item Specification
Max. switching capacity 30 mA/4.75 to 26.4 VDC
Max. output frequency 1 kHz
PWM output accuracy For ON duty +1%, 0%:10 kHz output
For ON duty +5%, 0%: 0 to 32.8 kHz output
Output waveform
Item Specification
Input voltage
24 VDC
+10%
/
15%
Input impedance 4.7 k
Input current 5 mA typical
ON voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON delay 1 ms max. (See note 1.)
OFF delay 1 ms max. (See note 1.)
ON
tON
T
OFF
100%
tON
T
ON duty =
IN
IN
COM
4.7 k
7
5
0

Input LED
Internal
circuits
Item Specification
Max. switching capacity 2 A, 250 VAC (cos = 1),
2 A, 24 VDC (4 A/common)
Min. switching capacity 5 VDC, 10 mA
60
Note (1) Under the worst conditions, the service life of output contacts is as shown
above. The service life of relays is as shown in the following diagram as
a guideline.
(2) There are restrictions imposed by the ambient temperature.
Relay Output Load Current Derating Curves for Expansion I/O Units
(CP1W-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/40EDR and CPM1A-8ER/16ER/20EDR1/
40EDR)
Service life
of relay
(See note.)
Electrical Resistive
load
150,000 operations (24 VDC)
Inductive
load
100,000 operations (240 VAC, cos = 0.4)
Mechanical 20,000,000 operations
ON delay 15 ms max.
OFF delay 15 ms max.
Item Specification
COM
OUT
OUT
Output LED
Internal
circuits
Maximum
250 VAC: 2 A
24 VDC: 2 A
Added to CP1L-L14DR-D,
CP1L-L20DR-D,
CP1L-J14DR-D or
CP1L-J20DR-D
Added to CP1L-M30DR-D Added to CP1L-M40DR-D
300
200
100
50
30
20
5
3
2
10
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1 2 3 5
L
i
f
e

(

1
0
4
)
Contact current (A)
120 VAC resistive load
24 VDC = 7 ms
120 VAC cos = 0.4
240 VAC cos = 0.4
24 VDC/240 VAC resistive load
Switching rate: 1,800 operations/hour
50%
100%
55C 40 45
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
0%
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45 35
0%
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45

35
0%
50
Power
voltage:
21.6 VDC
Power
voltage:
20.4 VDC
Ambient temperature
61
Transistor Outputs (Sinking or Sourcing)
Note (1) The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
(2) If the ambient temperature is maintained below 50C, up to 0.9 A/com-
mon can be used.
!Caution Do not connect a load to an output terminal or apply a voltage in excess of the
maximum switching capacity.
Added to CP1L-L14DT@-D,
CP1L-L20DT@-D,
CP1L-J14DT@-D or
CP1L-J20DT@-D
Added to CP1L-M30DT@-D Added to CP1L-M40DT@-D
50%
100%
55C 40 45
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Power voltage:
21.4 VDC
0%
Ambient temperature

50%
100%
55C 45 35
0%
Power voltage:
21.6 VDC
Power voltage:
20.4 VDC
Ambient temperature
50%
100%
55C 45 35
0%
Power
voltage:
21.6 VDC
Power
voltage:
20.4 VDC
Ambient temperature

Item Specification
CP1W/CPM1A-40EDT
CP1W/CPM1A-40EDT1
CP1W/CPM1A-20EDT
CP1W/CPM1A-20EDT1
CP1W/CPM1A-8ET
CP1W/CPM1A-8ET1
Max. switching
capacity (See note
2.)
4.5 to 30 VDC
0.3 A/output
24 VDC
+10%
/5%
0.3 A/output
OUT00/01
4.5 to 30 VDC, 0.2 A/output
OUT02 to 07
4.5 to 30 VDC, 0.3 A/output
0.9 A/common
3.6 A/Unit
0.9 A/common
1.8 A/Unit
0.9 A/common
1.8 A/Unit
Leakage current 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max. 0.1 mA max.
Residual voltage 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max. 1.5 V max.
ON delay 0.1 ms max. 0.1 ms 0.1 ms max.
OFF delay 1 ms max.
24 VDC
+10%
/5%
5 to 300 mA
1 ms max.
24 VDC
+10%
/5%
5 to 300 mA
1 ms max.
24 VDC
+10%
/5%
5 to 300 mA
Fuse (See note 1.) 1 fuse/common
COM ()
OUT
OUT
L
L
COM (+)
OUT
OUT
L
L
Sinking Outputs Sourcing Outputs
Output LED
Output LED
Internal
circuits
Internal
circuits
24 VDC/4.5
to 30 VDC
24 VDC/4.5
to 30 VDC
0.9
0.8
(A)
0 (C) 50 55
Ambient temperature
T
o
t
a
l

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

f
o
r

c
o
m
m
o
n
62
CP1L CPU Unit Operation Section 2-3
2-3 CP1L CPU Unit Operation
2-3-1 Overview of CPU Unit Configuration
The CP1L CPU Unit memory consists of the following blocks.
(1) Data is backed up from RAM to the built-in flash memory when
changes are made, e.g., from the CX-Programmer.
When the power supply is turned ON, data is transferred from the built-
in flash memory to RAM.
(2) A CX-Programmer operation can be used to transfer DM Area initial
values from RAM to the built-in flash memory.
The PLC Setup can be set so that DM Area initial values are trans-
ferred from the built-in flash memory to RAM when the power supply
is turned ON.
(3) CX-Programmer operations can be used to transfer data from RAM to
the Memory Cassette or from the built-in flash memory to the Memory
Cassette.
RAM
DM Area
(2)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
Built-in inputs
CPU Unit
User program
I/O memory
AR Area
PLC Setup
and other
parameters
Flash memory
User
program
Comment
memory
FB program
memory
DM Area
initial values
PLC Setup
and other
parameters
Memory
Cassette
Analog adjuster
External analog
setting input
Built-in outputs
Access
63
When the power supply is turned ON, data is transferred from the
Memory Cassette to the built-in flash memory and RAM. Data can also
be transferred from the Memory Cassette to the built-in flash memory
and RAM using the CX-Programmer.
User Program The user program consists of up to 288 tasks, including interrupt tasks. Each
task is programmed from the CX-Programmer and then transferred to the
CPU Unit.
There are two types of tasks: cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks. Cyclic tasks are
executed once each cycle and interrupt tasks are executed only when the
interrupt conditions are met. There can be up to 32 cyclic tasks and up to 256
interrupt tasks. Cyclic tasks are executed in the order of the task numbers.
Instructions programmed in the tasks are executed in order from the first
instruction and then I/O memory is refreshed. When all cyclic tasks have been
executed, I/O refreshing with PLC Units is performed and then the cyclic tasks
are executed again starting from the one with the lowest task number. This is
called the cyclic scan method.
I/O Memory The I/O memory area is a RAM area read and written by the user. Some parts
of the I/O memory are cleared when the power is interrupted. Other parts are
maintained. There are parts that used for data exchange with PLC Units and
parts that are used internally.
There are two ways to refresh the parts of I/O memory used for data
exchange with PLC Units: Once each program execution cycle and immedi-
ately when needed when executing specific instructions.
Parameter Area In addition to the I/O memory used as instructions operands by the user, there
is also a separate memory area that can be manipulated only from the CX-
Programmer. This area, called the parameter area, contains the following.
PLC Setup
Routing tables
PLC Setup The PLC Setup contains configuration parameters that can be set by the user
to define the basic specifications of the CPU Unit. Included are serial port set-
tings, a minimum cycle time setting, and other parameters. For details, refer to
the CX-Programmer Operation Manual.
64
Routing Tables Tables specifying the communications paths from the Communications Units
on the local PLC to remote PLCs connected on other networks must be regis-
tered in all the CPU Units in network PLCs to send and receive data between
networks. These tables are called the routing tables. The routing tables con-
sist of the relay network table and local network table.
Routing tables are created from the CX-Programmer or Support Software for
Communications Units (e.g., CX-Integrator) and then transferred to each CPU
Unit.
Remote Network Table
The remote network tables lists the node number and network address of the
first relay node that must be passed through to reach any remote network to
which the PLC is not directly connected. Once the routing tables have been
registered, any remote network can be reached by passing through relay
nodes.
Local Network Table
The local network table contains the unit number and network address of all
Communications Units that are part of the local PLC.
Built-in Flash Memory Flash memory is built into the CP1L CPU Units. Data in the following areas is
automatically backed up to the flash memory whenever it is written in any way
other than by instructions in the user program, e.g., when the CX-Programmer
or PT is used to transfer or edit data, edit the program online, or transfer data
from a Memory Cassette.
User program area
Parameter area (PLC Setup and routing tables)
The next time the power supply is turned ON, the data in the built-in flash
memory is automatically transferred to user memory (i.e., the user program
area and parameter area).
It is also possible to save data from data areas in I/O memory in the built-in
flash memory using operations from the CX-Programmer.
The symbol table, comment file, and program index file can be stored in the
comment memory in flash memory. When the program is transferred from the
CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit, function block program information is also
stored automatically in flash memory.
Note The BKUP indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light whenever the built-in
flash memory is being written or the Memory Cassette is being accessed.
3 N
3 M
PLC 1 PLC 2 PLC 3
PLC 4
3
1
2
n
Node M
Unit number n
Network 1
Network 2
Network 3
Node N
Relay Network Table for PLC 1
Relay Network Table for PLC 2
Local Network Table for PLC 3
Remote
network
Relay
network
Relay
node
Remote
network
Relay
network
Relay
node
Local
network
Unit
number
65
Never turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is
lit.
Memory Cassette Memory Cassettes can be used as required in system operation and mainte-
nance. For example, they can be used to save programs, data memory con-
tents, PLC Setup data, or I/O comments from the CX-Programmer. The
contents of a Memory Cassette can also be automatically transferred if
desired.
Note Memory Cassettes cannot be used in CP1L-J CPU Unit.
2-3-2 Flash Memory Data Transfers
Built-in Flash Memory
Writing to Flash Memory
Data Transfer method
User program and
parameter data
This data is automatically transferred from RAM to flash mem-
ory when a project is transferred from the CX-Programmer,
when the data is written to RAM from a PT or other external
device, or when the data is transferred from a Memory Cas-
sette.
DM Area data This data is transferred to flash memory only when the trans-
fer is specified from the CX-Programmer.
Comment memory
data
This data is written to flash memory when a project is trans-
ferred from the CX-Programmer and transferring comment
memory is specified.
Function block
source data
This data is written to flash memory when a project containing
one or more function blocks is transferred from the CX-Pro-
grammer.
RAM

Write operation from CX-Programmer
or automatic transfer from Memory
Cassette at startup.
Write
Write
User program
area
Parameter area
I/O memory area
DM Area
Battery
Backup
Write (comment memory specified)
Write
Automatic write
Automatic write
Write
Built-in flash memory
User program
area
Parameter area
DM Area initial
values
Comment memory
area
FB source memory
area
CPU Unit
FB = Function block
Write operation
to flash memory
66
Reading from Flash
Memory
Data Read method
User program and
parameter data
This data is automatically read to RAM when power is turned
ON.
DM Area data Reading this data when power is turned ON can be enabled or
disabled in the PLC Setup.
Comment memory
data
When the project is transferred from the CX-Programmer,
comment memory can be specified as a destination to transfer
the comment memory data to built-in flash memory.
Function block
source data
When a project that contains function blocks is transferred
from the CX-Programmer, the function block source data is
transferred to built-in flash memory.
RAM

User program area
Parameter area
I/O memory area
DM Area
Battery
Backup
User program
area
Parameter area
DM Area initial
values
Comment
memory area
FB source
memory area
Power
ON
Auto read
Power
ON
Auto read
Auto read
CPU Unit
FB = Function block
When power-ON
transfer is specified
in PLC Setup.
67
2-3-3 Memory Cassette Data Transfers
Writing to a Memory Cassette
Data Method Source
User program and
parameter data
Data is written to a Memory
Cassette using write opera-
tions from the CX-Program-
mer.
Data in the built-in flash mem-
ory is written to the Memory
Cassette.
Comment memory
and function block
source data
Either of both of the following
can be transferred to the
Memory Cassette.
Data in the built-in flash
memory.
Data in RAM.
DM Area data
RAM
DM Area
data from RAM
User program
area
Parameter area
I/O memory
area
DM Area
Battery
Backup
User program
area
Parameter area
DM Area initial
values
Comment
memory area
FB source
memory area
Memory Cassette
User program
area
Parameter area
DM Area initial
values
Comment
memory area
FB source
memory area
Memory
Cassette write
operation from
CX-Programmer CPU Unit
FB = Function block
68
Reading from a Memory Cassette
Data Method Destination
User program and
parameter data
This data is transferred by
turning SW2 on the DIP
switch to ON and turning ON
the power supply.
Data in the Memory Cassette
is transferred to RAM and
then automatically transferred
to the built-in flash memory.
Comment memory
and function block
source data
Data is transferred to the built-
in flash memory.
DM Area data DM Area data originally from
the built-in flash memory is
transferred back to the flash
memory and DM Area data
originally from RAM is trans-
ferred to RAM.

RAM

DM Area
data from RAM
User program
area
Parameter
area
I/O memory area
DM Area
Battery
Backup
Power turned ON with SW2 turned ON
Parameter area
DM Area initial
values
Comment
memory area
FB source
memory area
Memory Cassette
User program
area
Parameter area
DM Area initial
values
Comment
memory area
FB source
memory area
CPU Unit
FB = Function block
User program
area
69
CPU Unit Operation Section 2-4
2-4 CPU Unit Operation
2-4-1 General Flow
The following flowchart shows the overall operation of the CPU Unit. First the
user program is executed and then I/O is refreshed and peripheral servicing is
performed. These processes are then repeated in cyclic fashion.
Startup
initialization
I/O refreshing
(even in
PROGRAM
mode)
Peripheral
servicing
Cycle time
Initialize hardware
memory and system work
area.
Detect I/O.
Automatically transfer data
from Memory Cassette.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status, etc.
Check the Battery.
Read DIP switch settings.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Overseeing
processing
Program
execution Operation processing: Execute the user program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs. (Reset Units
for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory if an error occurs
(unless a FALS(007) instruction created the error).
Refresh data for the following Units.
CP-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
Perform the following servicing if any events have occurred.
Peripheral USB port servicing
Serial port servicing
Communications port servicing
Built-in flash memory access servicing
Memory Cassette access servicing
Online editing
Power ON
70
2-4-2 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing
I/O Refreshing I/O refreshing involves cyclically transferring data with external devices using
preset words in memory. I/O refreshing includes the following:
Refreshing between I/O words in the CIO Area and CPU Unit built-in I/O,
CP/CPM1A-series Expansion Units, and CP/CPM1A-series Expansion
I/O Units
All I/O refreshing is performed in the same cycle (i.e., time slicing is not used).
I/O refreshing is always performed after program execution.
Peripheral Servicing Peripheral servicing involves servicing non-scheduled events for external
devices. This includes both events from external devices and service requests
to external devices.
Most peripheral servicing involves FINS commands. The specific amount of
time set in the system is allocated to each type of servicing and executed
every cycle. If all servicing cannot be completed within the allocated time, the
remaining servicing is performed the next cycle.
Note Peripheral USB port, serial port, and communications port servicing is allo-
cated 8% of the previous cycle time by default (the default can be changed)
for each service. If servicing is separated over many cycles, delaying comple-
tion of the servicing, set the same allocated time (same time for all services)
rather than a percentage under execute time settings in the PLC Setup.
2-4-3 I/O Refresh Methods
I/O for CPU Unit built-in I/O and I/O on CP/CPM1A-series Expansion Units
and Expansion I/O Units is performed at the following times.
1,2,3... 1. Cyclic refresh period
2. When instructions with an immediate refresh variation are executed
3. When IORF(097) is executed
Units Max. data exchange Data exchange area
CPU Unit built-in I/O 2 input words
2 output words
I/O Bit Area
CP/CPM1A-series Expansion
Units and Expansion I/O Units
Fixed depending on Units I/O Bit Area
Service Description
USB port servicing Non-scheduled servicing for FINS or Host Link
commands received via a USB port or serial port
from the CX-Programmer, PTs, or host computers
(e.g., requests for program transfers, monitoring,
forced-set/reset operations, or online editing)
Non-scheduled servicing from the CPU Unit trans-
mitted from a serial port (non-solicited communica-
tions)
Communications port servic-
ing
Communications port servic-
ing
Servicing to execute network communications or
serial communications for the SEND, RECV, CMND
or PMCR instructions using communications ports
0 to 7 (internal logical ports)
Servicing to execute background execution using
communications ports 0 to 7 (internal logical ports)
Built-in flash memory access
servicing
Read/write processing for built-in flash memory
Memory Cassette access ser-
vicing
Read/write processing for a Memory Cassette
71
Cyclic Refreshing I/O is refreshed after all the instructions in executable tasks have been exe-
cuted.
Immediate Refreshing When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified and the
instructions operand is an input bit or word in the Built-in I/O Area, the word
containing the bit or the word itself will be refreshed.
Note (1) Immediate refreshing is possible only for the Built-in I/O Area. Use
IORF(097) for I/O on CP/CPM1A-series Expansion Units and Expansion
I/O Units.
(2) Refreshing Range
Bit Operands
The ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O points allocated to the word contain-
ing the specified bit will be refreshed.
Word Operands
The ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O points allocated to the specified word
will be refreshed.
(3) Refresh Timing
Input or source operands are read just before the instruction is execut-
ed.
Output or destination (results) operands are written just after the in-
struction is executed.
(4) Using instructions with the immediate refresh option, instruction execu-
tion time will be increased, increasing the overall cycle time. Be sure to
confirm that this will not adversely affect system operation.
IORF(097) Refreshing When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the I/O bits in the specified
range of words are refreshed. IORF(097) can be used for CP/CPM1A-series
Expansion Units and CP/CPM1A-series Expansion I/O Units.
END(001)
END(001)
END(001)
Task
Task
Task
I/O refresh period
Cycle
I/O terminal
status
15 0
!LD 0.00
0 15
!OUT 100.00
0 15
!MOV 1 101
11
7
11
7
Immediate refresh
I/O terminal status (built-in I/O)
CIO 0
CIO 101
CIO 1
CIO 100
72
If high-speed response is required from input to output, execute IORF(097)
before and after the relevant instructions.
Note IORF(097) has a relatively long execution time which increases with the num-
ber of words being refreshed. Be sure to consider the affect of this time on the
overall cycle time. Refer to the CP Series Programmable Controllers Program-
ming Manual for instruction execution times.
2-4-4 Initialization at Startup
The following initializing processes will be performed once each time the
power is turned ON.
Confirm mounted Units and I/O allocations.
Clear the non-holding areas of I/O memory according to the status of the
IOM Hold Bit. (See note 1.)
Clear forced status according to the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit.
(See note 2.)
Automatically transfer data from the Memory Cassette if one is mounted
and automatic transfer at startup is specified.
Perform self-diagnosis (user memory check).
Restore the user program. (See note 3.)
Note (1) The I/O memory is held or cleared according to the status of the IOM Host
Bit and the setting for IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup in the PLC Setup
(read only when power is turned ON).
Note When the mode is changed between PROGRAMMING mode and
RUN or MONITOR mode, I/O memory initialization is according to
the status of the IOM Hold Bit at that time.
(2) The forced status held or cleared according to the status of the Force Sta-
tus Hold Bit and the setting for Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup
in the PLC Setup (read only when power is turned ON).
IORF
St
E
IORF
2
5
Example
St: Starting word
E: End word
All the words from St to E, inclusive
are refreshed.
Here, the four words from CIO 2
to CIO 5 are refreshed.
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
IOM Hold Bit (A500.12)
Clear (OFF) Hold (ON)
IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup
Clear
(OFF)
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Clear
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Hold
Hold
(ON)
At power ON: Hold
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
Forced Status Hold Bit (A500.13)
Clear (OFF) Hold (ON)
Forced Status Hold
Bit Status at Startup
Clear
(OFF)
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Clear
At power ON: Clear
Hold
(ON)
At power ON: Hold
73
CPU Unit Operating Modes Section 2-5
Note When the mode is changed between PROGRAMMING mode and
RUN or MONITOR mode, forced status initialization is according to
the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit at that time.
(3) User program recovery is performed if online editing is performed but the
power supply to the PLC is turned OFF before the CPU Unit can complete
backup processing. The BKUP indicator will light during backup process-
ing.
2-5 CPU Unit Operating Modes
2-5-1 Operating Modes
The CPU Unit has three operating modes that control the entire user program
and are common to all tasks.
PROGRAM: Programs are not executed and preparations, such as initial-
izing the PLC Setup and other settings, transferring pro-
grams, checking programs, force-setting and force-resetting
can be executed prior to program execution.
MONITOR: Programs are executed, but some operations, such as online
editing, forced-set/reset, and changes to present values in I/O
memory, are enabled for trial operation and other adjust-
ments.
RUN: Programs are executed and some operations are disabled.
2-5-2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode
The following table lists status and operations for each mode.
Note The following table shows the relationship of operating modes to tasks.
Operation PROGRAM mode RUN mode MONITOR mode
Program execution Stopped Executed Executed
I/O refreshing Executed Executed Executed
External I/O status OFF According to program According to program
I/O memory Non-holding memory Cleared According to program According to program
Holding memory Held
CX-Programmer
operations
I/O memory monitoring OK OK OK
Program monitoring OK OK OK
Program
transfers
From CPU Unit OK OK OK
To CPU Unit OK X X
Checking program OK X X
Setting PLC Setup OK X X
Changing program OK X OK
Force-setting/resetting OK X OK
Changing timer/counter SV OK X OK
Changing timer/counter PV OK X OK
Change I/O memory PV OK X OK
Mode Cyclic task status Interrupt task
status
PROGRAM Disabled status (INI) Stopped
74
CPU Unit Operating Modes Section 2-5
2-5-3 Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory
Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory
Note 1. The following processing is performed if the I/O Memory Hold Bit is ON.
Outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF when operation stops even
if I/O bit status is held in the CPU Unit.
2. The cycle time will increase by approximately 10 ms when the operating
mode is changed from MONITOR to RUN mode. This will not, however,
cause an error for exceeding the maximum cycle time limit.
Note Refer to SECTION 4 I/O Memory Allocation.
2-5-4 Startup Mode Setting
This setting in the PLC Setup determines the operating mode that will be used
by the CPU Unit when the power supply is turned ON.
PLC Setup
Note A Programming Console cannot be connected to the CP1L.
RUN Any task that has not yet been executed, will be in disabled status (INI).
A task will go to READY status if the task is set to go to READY status at star-
tup or the TASK ON (TKON) instruction has been executed for it.
A task in READY status will be executed (RUN status) when it obtains the
right to execute.
A status will go to Standby status (WAIT) if a READY task is put into Standby
status by a TASK OFF (TKOF) instruction.
Executed if inter-
rupt condition is
met.
MONITOR
Mode Changes Non-holding areas Holding Areas
I/O bits
Data Link bits
Work bits
Timer PV/Completion Flags
Index Registers
Data Registers
Task Flags
Auxiliary Area bits/words are holding or
non-holding depending on the address.
HR Area
DM Area
Counter PV and Completion Flags
Auxiliary Area bits/words are holding or
non-holding depending on the address.
RUN or MONITOR to PROGRAM Cleared (See note 1.) Held
PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR Cleared (See note 1.) Held
RUN to MONITOR or
MONITOR to RUN
Held (See note 2.) Held
I/O Memory
Hold Bit status
(A500.12)
I/O Memory Output bits allocated to Output Units
Mode changed
between
PROGRAM
and RUN/
MONITOR
Operation stopped Mode changed
between
PROGRAM
and RUN/
MONITOR
Operation stopped
Fatal error
other than
FALS
FALS
executed
Fatal error
other than
FALS
FALS
executed
OFF Cleared Cleared Held OFF OFF OFF
ON Held Held Held Held OFF OFF
Name Description Settings Default
Startup Mode Specifies the
CPU Unit oper-
ating mode at
startup
Program (See note.)
Monitor
Run
Use programming console
Use program-
ming console
(See note.)
75
Power OFF Operation Section 2-6
Note A Programming Console cannot be connected to a CP1L CPU Unit. If Use
programming console is set, the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode.
2-6 Power OFF Operation
2-6-1 Overview
The following processing is performed when CPU Unit power is turned OFF.
Power OFF processing will be performed if the power supply voltage falls
below the specified value while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR mode.
1,2,3... 1. The CPU Unit will stop.
2. Outputs from all Output Units will be turned OFF.
Note (1) All outputs will turn OFF despite the status of the I/O Memory Hold Bit or
I/O Memory Hold Bit at power ON settings in the PLC Setup.
(2) AC Power
85% of the rated voltage: 85 V or less for a 100 to 240 V AC system
(3) DC Power
90% of rated voltage: 20.4 V DC or less
The following processing will be performed if power drops only momentarily
(momentary power interruption).
1,2,3... 1. The system will continue to run unconditionally if the momentary power in-
terruption lasts less than 10 ms for AC power or 2 ms for DC power, i.e.,
the time it takes the rated voltage at 85% or less to return to 85% or higher
is less than 10 ms for AC power or the time it takes the rated voltage at 90%
or less to return to 90% or higher is less than 2 ms for DC power.
76
Power OFF Operation Section 2-6
2. A momentary power interruption that lasts more than 10 ms for AC power
or more than 2 ms for DC power may or may not be detected.
The following timing chart shows the CPU Unit power OFF operation in more
detail.
Power OFF Timing Chart
Description of Operation
Power OFF will be detected if the 100 to 240 V AC power supply falls below
85% of the rated voltage or the DC power supply falls below 90% of the rated
voltage for the power OFF detection time (10 ms minimum for AC power and
2 ms minimum for DC power). The CPU reset signal will turn ON while the
internal power supply is being held and the CPU Unit will be reset.
2-6-2 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions
If power is interrupted and the interruption is detected when the CPU Unit is
operating in RUN or MONITOR mode, the instruction currently being executed
will be completed and then the CPU Unit will be reset.
10 ms
0
85% of the rated voltage or less for AC power
90% of the rated voltage or less or DC power
0 to 10 ms for AC
0 to 2 ms for DC
Momentary power
interruption not detected
and operation continues.
Greater than 10 ms for AC
Greater than 2 ms for DC
Operation will continue or stop
depending on whether or not a
momentary power interruption is
detected.
Power supply
voltage
Power supply
voltage
Time
Power OFF detection time:
The time from when the power supply voltages drops to 85% or less of the rated
voltage for AC power or 90% for DC power until the power OFF condition is detected.
Holding time for 5 V internal power supply after power OFF detection:
The maximum time that the 5 V internal power supply voltage will be maintained after
the power OFF condition is detected. The holding time is fixed at 1 ms.
AC: 85% of rated voltage
DC: 90% of rated voltage
Operation always stopped
at this point regardless.
Power OFF detected signal
Program execution status
CPU reset signal
Cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks Stopped
Power OFF detected
Power OFF Detection
Delay Time
AC: 10 ms
DC: 2 ms
Holding time for 5 V internal
power supply after power
OFF detection: 1 ms
77
Computing the Cycle Time Section 2-7
2-7 Computing the Cycle Time
2-7-1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart
The CPU Unit processes data in repeating cycles from the overseeing pro-
cessing up to peripheral servicing as shown in the following diagram.
NO
YES
Power ON
Checks Unit connection status.
Checks hardware and user
program memory.
Executes user program (i.e.,
executes READY cyclic tasks).
Waits until the set cycle time
has elapsed.
Calculates cycle time.
Sets error flags.
Performs I/O refreshing.
Services peripheral devices.
Peripheral
servicing
I/O
refreshing
Cycle time
calculation
Program
execution
Overseeing
processing
PLC
cycle
time
Startup
initialization
Check OK?
ERR/ALM
indicator ON or
flashing?
End of program?
Flashing
(nonfatal error)
ON (fatal error)
Error
Normal
78
2-7-2 Cycle Time Overview
The cycle time depends on the following conditions.
Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, and within interrupt tasks for which the
execution conditions have been satisfied)
Type and number of CP/CPM1A-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/
O Units
Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
Use of USB and serial ports
Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
Note 1. The cycle time is not affected by the number of tasks that are used in the
user program. The tasks that affect the cycle time are those cyclic tasks
that are READY in the cycle.
2. When the mode is switched from MONITOR mode to RUN mode, the cycle
time will be extended by 10 ms (this will not, however, take the cycle time
over its limit).
The cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the five opera-
tions given in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
1: Overseeing
2: Program Execution
3: Cycle Time Calculation
4: I/O Refreshing
Details Processing time and fluctuation cause
Checks the I/O bus and user program memory, checks for
battery errors, etc.
0.4 ms
Executes the user program, and calculates the total time
time taken for the instructions to execute the program.
Total instruction execution time
Waits for the specified cycle time to elapse when a minimum
(fixed) cycle time has been set in the PLC Setup.
Calculates the cycle time.
When the cycle time is not fixed, the time for step 3 is
approximately 0.
When the cycle time is fixed, the time for step 3 is the preset
fixed cycle time minus the actual cycle time ((1) + (2) + (4) +
(5)).
CPU Unit built-
in I/O and I/O
on CP/
CPM1A-series
Expansion
Units and
Expansion I/O
Units
Outputs from the CPU Unit to the actual
outputs are refreshed first for each Unit,
and then inputs.
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
79
5: Peripheral Servicing
2-7-3 Functions Related to the Cycle Time
Minimum Cycle Time Set the minimum cycle time to a non-zero value to eliminate inconsistencies in
I/O responses. A minimum cycle time can be set in the PLC Setup between 1
and 32,000 ms in 1-ms increments.
This setting is effective only when the actual cycle time is shorter than the
minimum cycle time setting. If the actual cycle time is longer than the mini-
mum cycle time setting, the actual cycle time will remain unchanged.
PLC Setup
Services USB port. If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasnt been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 8% of the previous cycles cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servic-
ing will be performed for the set time. Servicing will be performed for at
least 0.1 ms, however, whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If the ports are not connected, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services serial ports
Services communications ports. If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasnt been set in the PLC Setup for
If no communications ports are used, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services built-in flash memory access. If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasnt been set in the PLC Setup for
If there is no access, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Serves Memory Cassette access.
Minimum cycle time
(effective)
Minimum cycle time
(effective)
Minimum cycle time
(effective)
Actual cycle
time
Actual cycle
time
Actual cycle
time
Minimum cycle time
Actual cycle
time
Minimum cycle time
Actual cycle
time
Minimum cycle time (effective)
Actual cycle
time
Name Settings Default
Minimum cycle time 0000 to 7D00 hex
(1 to 32,000 ms in 1-ms incre-
ments)
0000 hex: Variable cycle time
80
Watch Cycle Time
If the cycle time exceeds the watch (maximum) cycle time setting, the Cycle
Time Too Long Flag (A401.08) will be turned ON and PLC operation will be
stopped.
PLC Setup
Related Flags
Cycle Time
Monitoring
The maximum cycle time is stored in A262 and A263 and the present cycle
time is stored in A264 and A265 every cycle.
Related Words
The average cycle time for the past eight cycles can be read from the CX-Pro-
grammer.
Note The following methods are effective in reducing the cycle time.
Place tasks that do not need to be executed on standby.
Use JMP-JME instructions to skip instructions that do not need to be exe-
cuted.
Name Settings Default
Enable Watch Cycle
Time Setting
0: Default (1 s)
1: User setting
0000 hex: Watch cycle time of
1 s
Watch Cycle Time 001 to FA0: 10 to 40,000 ms
(10-ms increments)
Name Address Description
Cycle Time Too Long
Flag
A401.08 Turns ON if the present cycle time exceeds the
Watch Cycle Time set in the PLC Setup.
Name Addresses Description
Maximum Cycle
Time
A262 and
A263
These words contain the maximum cycle time in
increments of 0.1 ms. The time is updated every
cycle and is recorded in 32-bit binary (0 to FFFF
FFFF hex, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms). (A263 is
the leftmost word.)
Present Cycle Time A264 and
A265
These words contain the present cycle time in
increments of 0.1 ms. The time is updated every
cycle and is recorded in 32-bit binary (0 to FFFF
FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms). (A265 is the
leftmost word.)
81
2-7-4 I/O Refresh Times for PLC Units
CP-series Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit I/O Refresh Times
Note The I/O refresh time for CPU Unit built-in I/O is included in overhead process-
ing.
2-7-5 Cycle Time Calculation Example
The following example shows the method used to calculate the cycle time
when CP-series Expansion I/O Units only are connected to a CP1L CPU Unit.
Name Model I/O refresh time per Unit
Expansion I/O Units CP1W-40EDR
CPM1A-40EDR
0.39 ms
CP1W-40EDT
CPM1A-40EDT
0.39 ms
CP1W-40EDT1
CPM1A-40EDT1
0.39 ms
CP1W-40ETR1
CPM1A-40ETR1
0.18 ms
CP1W-20EDT
CPM1A-20EDT
0.18 ms
CP1W-20EDT1
CPM1A-20EDT1
0.18 ms
CP1W-16ER
CPM1A-16ER
0.25 ms
CP1W-8ED
CPM1A-8ED
0.13 ms
CP1W-8ER
CPM1A-8ER
0.08 ms
CP1W-8ET
CPM1A-8ET
0.08 ms
CP1W-8ET1
CPM1A-8ET1
0.08 ms
Analog Input Units CP1W-AD041
CPM1A-AD041
0.61 ms
Analog Output Units CP1W-DA041
CPM1A-DA041
0.33 ms
Analog I/O Units CPM1A-MAD01 0.29 ms
CP1W-MAD11
CPM1A-MAD11
0.32 ms
Temperature Sensor Units CP1W-TS001
CPM1A-TS001
0.25 ms
CP1W-TS002
CPM1A-TS002
0.52 ms
CP1W-TS101
CPM1A-TS101
0.25 ms
CP1W-TS102
CPM1A-TS102
0.52 ms
DeviceNet I/O Link Unit CPM1A-DRT21 0.38 ms
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit CP1W-SRT21
CPM1A-SRT21
0.21 ms
82
Conditions
Calculation Example
2-7-6 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension
When online editing is executed to change the program from the CX-Program-
mer while the CPU Unit is operating in MONITOR mode, the CPU Unit will
momentarily suspend operation while the program is being changed. The
period of time that the cycle time is extended is determined by the following
conditions.
Number of steps changed
Editing operations (insert/delete/overwrite)
Types of instructions
The cycle time extension for online editing is negligibly affected by the size of
task programs. If the maximum program size for a task is 10 Ksteps, the
online editing cycle time extension will be as follows:
When editing online, the cycle time will be extended by according to the edit-
ing that is performed. Be sure that the additional time will not adversely affect
system operation.
Note When there is one task, online editing is processed all in the cycle time follow-
ing the cycle in which online editing is executed (written). When there are mul-
tiple tasks (cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks), online editing is separated, so
that for n tasks, processing is executed over n to n 2 cycles max.
Item Details
CP1L CP1W-40EDR
40-pt I/O Unit
1 Unit
User program 5 K steps LD instructions: 2.5 Ksteps,
OUT instructions: 2.5 Ksteps
USB port connection Yes and no
Fixed cycle time processing No
Serial port connection No
Other peripheral servicing No
Process name Calculation Processing time
USB port
connected
USB port not
connected
(1) Overseeing --- 0.4 ms 0.4 ms
(2) Program execution 0.55 s 2,500 + 1.1 s
2,500
4.1 ms 4.1 ms
(3) Cycle time calculation (Minimum cycle time not
set)
0 ms 0 ms
(4) I/O refreshing 0.39 ms 0.39 ms 0.39 ms
(5) Peripheral servicing (Only USB port con-
nected)
0.1 ms 0 ms
Cycle time (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5) 4.99 ms 4.89 ms
CPU Unit Increase in cycle time for online editing
CP1L CPU Unit Maximum: 16 ms, Normal: 12 ms
(for a program size of 10 Ksteps)
83
2-7-7 I/O Response Time
The I/O response time is the time it takes from when an input turns ON, the
data is recognized by the CPU Unit, and the user program is executed, up to
the time for the result to be output to an output terminal. The length of the I/O
response time depends on the following conditions.
Timing of Input Bit turning ON.
Cycle time.
Minimum I/O
Response Time
The I/O response time is shortest when data is retrieved immediately before I/
O refresh of the CPU Unit. The minimum I/O response time is calculated as
follows:
Minimum I/O response time = Input ON delay + Cycle time + Output ON delay
Note The input and output ON delays depend on the type of terminals used on the
CPU Unit or the model number of the Unit being used.
Maximum I/O Response
Time
The I/O response time is longest when data is retrieved immediately after I/O
refresh period of the CPU Unit. The maximum I/O response time is calculated
as follows:
Maximum I/O response time = Input ON delay + (Cycle time 2) + Output ON
delay

Input
I/O refresh
Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Cycle time Cycle time
(Interrupt to
CPU Unit)
Output
Minimum I/O
response time
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Input
I/O refresh
Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Cycle time
Cycle time
(Interrupt to
CPU Unit)
Output
Maximum I/O
response time
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
84
Calculation Example
Conditions: Input ON delay 1 ms (normal input with input
constant set to 0 ms)
Output ON delay 0.1 ms (transistor output)
Cycle time 20 ms
Minimum I/O response time = 1 ms + 20 ms + 0.1 ms = 21.1 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1 ms + (20 ms 2) + 0.1 ms = 41.1 ms
Input Response
Times
Input response times can be set in the PLC Setup. Increasing the response
time reduces the effects of chattering and noise. Decreasing the response
time allows reception of shorter input pulses, (but the pulse width must be
longer than the cycle time).
PLC Setup
2-7-8 Interrupt Response Times
Input Interrupt Tasks The interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks is the time taken from when
a built-in input has turned ON (or OFF) until the I/O interrupt task has actually
been executed. The length of the interrupt response time for I/O interrupt
tasks depends on the following conditions.
Note (1) The wait time occurs when there is competition with other interrupts. As
a guideline, the wait time will be 6 to 169 s.
(2) I/O interrupt tasks can be executed during execution of the user program
(even while an instruction is being executed by stopping the execution of
an instruction), I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The inter-
rupt response time is not affected by which of the above processing op-
erations during which the interrupt inputs turns ON. I/O interrupts,
however, are not executed during execution of other interrupt tasks even
if the I/O interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the I/O interrupts are
Input
Input response time
Input
I/O refresh
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Input response time
The pulse width is
less than the input
response time, so
it is not detected.
I/O refresh
Name Description Settings Default
Input constants Input response times 00 hex: 8 ms
10 hex: 0 ms
11 hex: 0.5 ms
12 hex: 1 ms
13 hex: 2 ms
14 hex: 4 ms
15 hex: 8 ms
16 hex: 16 ms
17 hex: 32 ms
00 hex (8 ms)
Item Interrupt response time Counter interrupts
Hardware response Rise time: 50 s ---
Fall time: 50 s ---
Software interrupt
response
Minimum: 134 s Minimum: 236 s
Maximum: 234 s + Wait
time (See note 1.)
Maximum: 336 s + Wait time
(See note1.)
85
executed in order of priority after the current interrupt task has completed
execution and the software interrupt response time has elapsed.
The interrupt response time of input interrupt tasks is calculated as follows:
Interrupt response time = Input ON delay + Software interrupt response time
Scheduled Interrupt Tasks The interrupt response time of scheduled interrupt tasks is the time taken
from after the scheduled time specified by the MSKS(690) instruction has
elapsed until the interrupt task has actually been executed. The length of the
interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is 1 ms max. There is
also an error of 80 s in the time to the first scheduled interrupt (0.5 ms min.).
Note Scheduled interrupt tasks can be executed during execution of the user pro-
gram (even while an instruction is being executed by stopping the execution of
an instruction), I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt
response time is not affected by which of the above processing operations
during which the scheduled interrupt time occurs. Scheduled interrupts, how-
ever, are not executed during execution of other interrupt tasks even if the
interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the interrupts are executed in order
of priority after the current interrupt task has completed execution and the
software interrupt response time has elapsed.
2-7-9 Serial PLC Link Response Performance
The response times for CPU Units connected via a Serial PLC Link (master to
slave or slave to master) can be calculated as shown below. If a PT is in the
Serial PLC Link, however, the amount of communications data will not be
fixed and the values will change.
Maximum I/O response time (not including hardware delay) =
Master cycle time + Communications cycle time + Slave cycle time + 4 ms
Minimum I/O response time (not including hardware delay) =
Slave communications time + 0.8 ms
Input
(Interrupt signal retrieval)
Interrupt task execution
Input interrupt task
response time
Software interrupt response time
Input ON delay
Cyclic task execution
(main program)
Ladder program
execution time
Return time from
input interrupt task
Next interrupt signal
can be accepted.
The time from completing the ladder program in the input
interrupt task until returning to cyclic task execution is 60 s.
Software interrupt response time
Internal timer
Scheduled interrupt task
Scheduled interrupt time
86
Here,
2-7-10 Pulse Output Start Time
The pulse output start time is the time required from executing a pulse output
instruction until pulses are output externally. This time depends on the pulse
output instruction that is used and operation that is performed.
2-7-11 Pulse Output Change Response Time
The pulse output change response time is the time for any change made by
executing an instruction during pulse output to actually affect the pulse output
operation.
Number of partici-
pating slave nodes
The number of slaves to which links have been established
within the maximum unit number set in the master.
Number of non-par-
ticipating slave
nodes
The number of slaves not participating in the links within the
maximum unit number set in the master
Communications
cycle time (ms)
Slave communications time Number of participating slave
nodes + 10 Number of non-participating slave nodes
Slave communica-
tions time (ms)
Communications time set to Standard
0.4 + 0.286 ((No. of slaves + 1) No. of link words 2 + 12)
Communications time set to Fast
0.4 + 0.0955 ((No. of slaves + 1) No. of link words 2 +
12)
Pulse output instruction Start time
SPED: continuous 86 s
SPED: independent 98 s
ACC: continuous 103 s
ACC: independent, trapezoidal 122 s
ACC: independent, triangular 123 s
PLS2: trapezoidal 145 s
PLS2: triangular 146 s
Start time
Instruction execution
Pulse output
Pulse output instruction Change response time
INI: immediate stop 63 s + 1 pulse output time
SPED: immediate stop 106 s + 1 pulse output time
ACC: deceleration stop 1 control cycle (4 ms) minimum,
2 control cycles (8 ms) maximum
PLS2: deceleration stop
SPED: speed change
ACC: speed change
PLS2: target position change in
reverse direction
same direction at same speed
same direction at different speed
87
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install and wire the CP1L.
3-1 Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3-2 Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3-2-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3-3 Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3-3-1 Mounting in a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3-3-2 Connecting Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . 94
3-3-3 DIN Track Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3-4 Wiring CP1L CPU Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3-4-1 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3-4-2 Wiring Built-in I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3-4-3 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3-5 Wiring CPU Unit I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3-5-1 I/O Wiring for CPU Units with 40 I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3-5-5 Pulse Input Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
3-5-6 Pulse Output Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3-6 CP/CPM1A-series Expansion I/O Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
88
Fail-safe Circuits Section 3-1
3-1 Fail-safe Circuits
Always set up safety circuits outside of the PLC to prevent dangerous condi-
tions in the event of errors in the CP1L CPU Unit or external power supply. In
particular, be careful of the following points.
Supply Power to the
CP1L CPU Unit before
the Controlled
System
If the PLC's power supply is turned ON after the controlled system's power
supply, outputs in Units such as DC Output Units may malfunction momen-
tarily. To prevent any malfunction, add an external circuit that prevents the
power supply to the controlled system from going ON before the power supply
to the PLC itself.
Managing CPU Unit
Errors
When any of the following errors occurs, PLC operation (program execution)
will stop and all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF.
A CPU error (watchdog timer error) or CPU on standby
A fatal error (memory error, I/O bus error, duplicate number error, too
many I/O points error, I/O setting error, program error, cycle time too long
error, or FALS(007) error) (See note.)
Always add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety of
the system in the event of an error that stops PLC operation.
Note When a fatal error occurs, all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF
even if the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON to protect the contents of I/O
memory. (When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the outputs will retain their previous
status after the PLC has been switched from RUN/MONITOR mode to PRO-
GRAM mode.)
Managing Output
Malfunctions
It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal
circuitry of the Output Unit, such as a relay or transistor malfunction. Always
add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety of the sys-
tem in the event that an output fails to go OFF.
Interlock Circuits When the PLC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclock-
wise operation of a motor and if there is any possibility of an accident or
mechanical damage due to faulty PLC operation, provide an external interlock
such as the one shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs
from turning ON at the same time.
Example
This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same
time even if both PLC outputs CIO 100.00 and CIO 100.01 are both ON, so
the motor is protected even if the PLC is programmed improperly or malfunc-
tions.
CP1H
MC2
CIO
100.00
MC1
CIO
100.01
MC1
MC2
Interlock circuit
Motor clockwise
Motor counterclockwise
89
Installation Precautions Section 3-2
3-2 Installation Precautions
3-2-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions
Always consider the following factors when installing and wiring the PLC to
improve the reliability of the system and make the most of the CP1L functions.
Ambient Conditions Do not install the PLC in any of the following locations.
Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0C or higher than
55C.
Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation.
Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10% or higher than
90%.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
Locations subject to excessive dust, salt, or metal filings.
Locations that would subject the PLC to direct shock or vibration.
Locations exposed to direct sunlight.
Locations that would subject the PLC to water, oil, or chemical reagents.
Always enclose or protect the PLC sufficiently in the following locations.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
Locations close to power lines.
Installation in
Cabinets or Control
Panels
When the CP1L is being installed in a cabinet or control panel, always provide
proper ambient conditions as well as access for operation and maintenance.
Temperature Control The ambient temperature within the enclosure must be within the operating
range of 0C to 55C. When necessary, take the following steps to maintain
the proper temperature.
Provide enough space for good air flow.
Do not install the PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat, such as heaters, transformers, or high-capacity resistors.
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55C, install a cooling fan or air con-
ditioner.
SYSMAC
CP1H
Control
panel
Fan
Louver
90
Installation Precautions Section 3-2
Accessibility for
Operation and
Maintenance
To ensure safe access for operation and maintenance, separate the PLC
as much as possible from high-voltage equipment and moving machinery.
The PLC will be easiest to install and operate if it is mounted at a height of
about 1,000 to 1,600 mm.
!Caution Do not touch the power supply or the area around the I/O terminals while
power is being supplied or immediately after power has been turned OFF.
Doing so may result in burns.
!Caution After the power supply has been turned OFF, wait until the PLC has suffi-
ciently cooled before touching it.
Improving Noise
Resistance
Do not mount the PLC in a control panel containing high-voltage equip-
ment.
Install the PLC at least 200 mm from power lines.
Ground the mounting plate between the PLC and the mounting surface.
Mounting in a Panel The CP1L must be installed in the orientation shown below to ensure ade-
quate cooling.
SYSMAC CP1L
200 mm min.
200 mm
min.
Power lines

91
Mounting Section 3-3
Do not install the CP1L in any of the following orientations.
3-3 Mounting
3-3-1 Mounting in a Panel
When mounting the CP1L CPU Unit in a panel, use either surface installation
or DIN Track installation.
Surface Installation Even if a DIN Track is not used, a CP1L CPU Unit and CP/CPM1A-series
Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units can be mounted using M4 screws.
For restrictions on the number of Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
that can be connected, refer to 1-2 System Configuration.
CP1L CPU Unit
92
DIN Track Installation The CP1L CPU Unit, Expansion Units, and Expansion I/O Units can be
mounted to DIN Track. Secure the DIN Track with screws in at least three
places.
Using I/O Connecting
Cable
When using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units, it is possible to use
CP1W-CN811 Connecting Cable to arrange the Units in upper and lower
rows. The following restrictions apply:
I/O Connecting Cable can be used in one place only, and not in multiple
places.
Wiring Ducts Whenever possible, route I/O wiring through wiring ducts. Install the duct so
that it is easy to wire from the I/O Units through the duct. It is handy to have
the duct at the same height as the PLC.
Note Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torque.
M4: 1.2 Nm
M3: 0.5 Nm
DIN Track

SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CH
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
IN
40EDR
OUT
CH CH
CH CH EXP
CH
CH
CH
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
CH
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
IN
40EDR
OUT
CH CH
CH CH EXP
CH
CH
CH
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
CH
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
IN
40EDR
OUT
CH CH
CH CH EXP
CH
CH
CH
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

20 mm min.
20 mm min.
40 mm
30 mm
30 mm
81.6 to 89.0 mm
Duct
Unit
Duct
DIN Track
Duct
CPU
Rack
Mounting
bracket
93
Routing Wiring Ducts Install the wiring ducts at least 20 mm between the tops of the PLC and any
other objects, (e.g., ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.) to
provide enough space for air circulation and replacement of Units.
Dimensions
External Dimensions
SYSMAC CP1H IN
BATTERY
AC100-240V0CH
1CH
101CH
100CH DC24V 0.3A OUTPUT
EXP
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 07 COM 05 07 OUT
POWER ERR/ALM BKUP
RUN INH PRPHL
PERIPHERAL
200 mm min.
CP1L
Input duct Output duct Power duct
Breakers
and fuses
Power
equipment,
such as
transformers
and magnetic
relays
Fuses, relays,
timers, etc. (not
heat-generating
equipment,
power
equipment,
etc.)
Terminal
blocks for
PLC
Terminal blocks
for power
equipment
Model W1 W2
CP1L-M40D@-@ 150 140
CP1L-M40D@-@ 130 120
CP1L-L20D@-@ 86 76
CP1L-L14D@-@ 86 76
Four, 4.5 dia.
90 100 110
W2
W1
8
85
94
Mounting Height The mounting height is approximately 90 mm.
When a cable is connected to an Option Board, however, the additional height
must be factored in. Always allow for the additional height when considering
the depth of the control panel in which the PLC is to be mounted.
3-3-2 Connecting Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
Leave approximately 10 mm of space between the CPU Unit and the Expan-
sion Units or Expansion I/O Units.
Mounting Method
10 mm
CP1L CPU Unit

Unit A (mm)
CP1L CPU Unit 40 I/O points 140 0.5
30 I/O points 120 0.5
20 I/O points 76 0.5
Expansion I/O Unit 40 I/O points 140 0.2
16 outputs 76 0.2
8 inputs 56 0.2
8 outputs 56 0.2
Analog I/O Unit MAD01 56 0.2
MAD11
AD041
DA041
76 0.2
Temperature Sensor Unit 76 0.2
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit 56 0.2
DeviceNet I/O Link Unit 56 0.2
100 mm

A
A
CP1L CPU Unit
with 30 or 40 I/O points
Expansion I/O Unit
with 40 I/O points
8 mm
100 mm
CP1L CPU Unit
with 14 or 20 I/O points
Expansion I/O Unit
with 8, 16, or 20 I/O
points
Expansion Unit
8 mm
95
Space between Units When Expansion I/O Units Are Connected
1,2,3... 1. Remove the cover from the CPU Unit's or the Expansion I/O Unit's expan-
sion connector. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to remove the cover from the
Expansion I/O Connector.
2. Insert the Expansion I/O Unit's connecting cable into the CPU Unit's or the
Expansion I/O Unit's expansion connector.
3. Replace the cover on the CPU Unit's or the Expansion I/O Unit's expansion
connector.
100 mm
20 mm min.
25 mm max.
10 mm min.
15 mm max.
CP1L CPU Unit
Expansion I/O Unit
Expansion Unit
Expansion I/O Unit
Expansion Unit
Expansion
connector cover

CH
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM
COM COM COM COM COM
COM
03 06 01 03 06
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
IN
40EDR
OUT
CH
CH
CH
CH
EXP
CH
CH
CH
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

CH
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM
COM COM COM COM COM
COM
03 06 01 03 06
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
IN
40EDR
OUT
CH
CH
CH
CH
EXP
CH
CH
CH
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

96
3-3-3 DIN Track Installation
1,2,3... 1. Use a screwdriver to pull down the DIN Track mounting pins from the back
of the Units, and mount the Units to the DIN Track.
2. Lower the Units so that they catch on the top of the DIN Track, and then
press them forward all the way to the DIN Track at the bottom.
3. Press in all of the DIN Track mounting pins to securely lock the Units in
place.
DIN Track Mount the DIN Track in the control panel with screws in at least three places.
DIN Track: PFP-50N (50 cm), PFP-100N (100 cm), or PFP-100N2
(100 cm)

97
Wiring CP1L CPU Units Section 3-4
Secure the DIN Track to the control panel using M4 screws separated by
210 mm (6 holes). The tightening torque is 1.2 Nm.
3-4 Wiring CP1L CPU Units
Note (1) Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign mat-
ter from entering the Unit during wiring procedures.
(2) Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis-
sipation.
15
10
4.5
25 25 25
10
25 15
1000
1000 (500)
(See note.)
PFP-100N2
PFP-100N/50N
15
10
4.5
25 25 25
10
25 15 (5)
(See note.)
1
16
1.5 1
29.2 24 27 30 0.3
7.3 0.15
35 0.3 27 0.15
28.25 4.5 oblong holes
Note: PFP-50N dimensions are given in parentheses.
98
3-4-1 Wiring Power Supply and Ground Lines
CPU Units with AC Power Supply
Wiring the AC Power Supply and Ground Lines
Wire a separate circuit for the power supply circuit so that there is no volt-
age drop from the inrush current that flows when other equipment is
turned ON.
When several CP1L PLCs are being used, it is recommended to wire the
PLCs on separate circuits to prevent a voltage drop from the inrush cur-
rent or incorrect operation of the circuit breaker.
Use twisted-pair power supply cables to prevent noise from the power
supply lines. Adding a 1:1 isolating transformer reduces electrical noise
even further.
Consider the possibility of voltage drops and the allowable current, and
always use thick power lines.
Use round crimp terminals for AC power supply wiring.
AC Power Supply
Provide a power supply of 100 to 240 VAC.
Use a power supply within the following voltage fluctuation range.
Note (1) Before connecting the power supply, make sure that the CPU Unit re-
quires an AC power supply and not a DC power supply. The CPU Unit's
internal circuitry will be damaged if AC power is mistakenly supplied to a
CPU Unit that requires a DC power supply.
(2) The power supply input terminals are at the top of the CPU Unit; the ter-
minals at the bottom of the CPU Unit output 24-VDC power for external
devices. The CPU Unit's internal circuitry will be damaged if AC power is
mistakenly supplied to a CPU Unit's power supply output terminals.
!Caution Tighten the terminal block screws for the AC power supply to the torque of
0.5 Nm. Loose screws may result in fire or malfunction.
Always ground the ground terminal to 100 or less to protect against
electric shock and incorrect operation from electrical noise.
MCCB
S R
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
100 to 240 VAC at 50/60 Hz
Upper terminal block
Ground (100 or less)
GR: Protective ground terminal LG: Functional ground terminal
Power supply voltage Allowable voltage fluctuation range
100 to 240 VAC 85 to 264 VAC
6.2 mm max.
99
If one phase of the power supply is grounded, connect the grounded
phase to the L2/N terminal.
The GR terminal is a ground terminal. To prevent electrical shock, use a
dedicated ground line (2 mm
2
min.) of 100 or less.
The line ground terminal (LG) is a noise-filtered neutral terminal. If noise
is a significant source of errors or if electrical shocks are a problem, con-
nect the line ground terminal (LG) to the ground terminal (GR) and ground
both with a ground resistance of 100 or less.
To prevent electrical shock when short-circuiting between the LG and GR
terminals, always use a ground of 100 or less.
Do not connect ground lines to other devices or to the frame of a building.
Doing so will reverse the effectiveness of the ground and instead have a
bad influence.
Isolating Transformer The PLC's internal noise control is sufficient for the general noise to which
power supply lines are subjected. Ground noise can be further reduced by
providing the power supply through a 1:1 isolating transformer. Leave the iso-
lating transformer's secondary side ungrounded.
CPU Units with DC Power Supply
DC Power Supply Wiring
Use crimp terminals or solid wire for wiring the power supply. Do not con-
nect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
M3 self-rising terminal screws are used. Tighten the terminal screws to
the torque of 0.5 Nm.
To prevent noise, use a ground of 100 or less.
DC Power Supply
Provide a power supply of 20.4 to 26.4 VDC.
The maximum current consumption is 20 W for CPU Units with 30 or 40
I/O points and 13 W for CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O points.
When the power supply is turned ON, the inrush current is approximately
five times the normal current.
The GR terminal is a ground terminal. To prevent electrical shock, use a
dedicated ground line (2 mm
2
min.) of 100 or less.
Note (1) Never reverse the positive and negative leads when wiring the power sup-
ply terminals.
+ COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
+
24 VDC
Circuit protector
Upper terminal block
Ground (100 or less)
GR: Protective ground terminal
6.2 mm max. 6.2 mm max.
100
(2) Supply all power to the power supply terminals from the same source.
3-4-2 Wiring Built-in I/O
Wiring Precautions
Double-checking I/O
Specifications
Double-check the specifications for the I/O Units. In particular, do not apply a
voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switch-
ing capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in breakdown, damage, or
fire.
When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, always wire them
correctly.
Electric Wires AWG22 to AWG18 (0.32 to 0.82 mm
2
) power lines are recommended.
Use cable with a maximum diameter of 1.61 mm including the insulation
covering.
The current capacity of electric wire depends on factors such as the ambi-
ent temperature and insulation thickness, as well as the gauge of the con-
ductor.
M3 self-rising screws are used for all screw terminals including terminal
screws for crimp terminal power supply wiring.
Use crimp terminals or solid wire for wiring.
Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to terminals.
Tighten the terminal block screws to the torque of 0.5 Nm.
Use crimp terminals (M3) having the dimensions shown below.
Wiring Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced.
Make sure that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
Do not place the I/O wiring in the same conduits or ducts as high-voltage
or power lines. Inductive noise can cause errors or damage.
Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.5 Nm.
Note (1) Never apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the
maximum switching capacity for Output Units.
(2) When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, always wire
them correctly.
(3) When required by EC Low Voltage Directive, use reinforced insulation or
double insulation on the DC power supply connected to DC-power-supply
CPU Units and I/O.
For the DC power supply connected to a DC-power-supply CPU Unit, use
a power supply with a minimum output holding time of 10 ms.
(4) Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit. Do-
ing either of these may break the cables.
101
Connecting I/O
Devices
Use the following information for reference when selecting or connecting input
devices.
DC Input Devices Connectable DC Input Devices (for DC Output Models)
The circuit below should not be used for I/O devices with a voltage output.
Precautions when
Connecting a Two-wire DC
Sensor
When using a two-wire sensor with a 24-V DC input device, check that the fol-
lowing conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions may result
in operating errors.
1,2,3... 1. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and the sensor residual
voltage:
V
ON
V
CC
V
R
2. Relation between current when the PLC is ON and sensor control output
(load current):
I
OUT
(min) I
ON
I
OUT
(max)
I
ON
= (V
CC
V
R
1.5 [PLC internal residual voltage]*)/R
IN
When I
ON
is smaller than I
OUT
(min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The
bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R (V
CC
V
R
)/(I
OUT
(min) I
ON
)
Power W (V
CC
V
R
)
2
/R 4 [allowable margin]
IN
COM
CP1L
+
+
IN
CP1L
5 mA/
7 mA
+
COM
+
IN
COM
CP1L
+
CP1L
COM
IN
IN
COM
CP1L
0 V
+
+
IN
COM
CP1L
+
+
Contact output Two-wire DC output
Sensor
power supply
NPN open-collector output
Sensor
power supply
Output
NPN current output
Current
regulator Output
Sensor
power supply
PNP current output
Output
Sensor
power supply
Voltage output
Output
Sensor
power supply
0 V
5 mA/
7 mA
0 V
5 mA/
7 mA
0 V
IN
CP1L
0 V
+
COM
Output
Sensor
power supply
102
3. Relation between current when the PLC is OFF and sensor leakage cur-
rent:
I
OFF
I
leak
Connect a bleeder resistor if I
leak
is greater than I
OFF
. Use the following
equation to calculate the bleeder resistance constant.
R R
IN
V
OFF
/(I
leak
R
IN
V
OFF
)
Power W (V
CC
V
R
)
2
/R 4 (allowable margin)
Vcc: Power voltage Vr: Sensor output residual current
Von: PLC ON voltage Iout: Sensor control output (load current)
Voff: PLC OFF voltage
Ion: PLC ON current Ileak: Sensor leakage current
Ioff: PLC OFF current R: Bleeder resistance
Rin: PLC input impedance
4. Precautions on Sensor Inrush Current
An incorrect input may occur due to sensor inrush current if a sensor is
turned ON after the PLC has started up to the point where inputs are pos-
sible. Determine the time required for sensor operation to stabilize after the
sensor is turned ON and take appropriate measures, such as inserting into
the program a timer delay after turning ON the sensor.
Program Example
In this example, the sensor's power supply voltage is provided to input bit CIO
0.00 and a 100-ms timer delay (the time required for an OMRON Proximity
Sensor to stabilize) is created in the program. After the Completion Flag for
the timer turns ON, the sensor input on input bit CIO 0.01 will cause output bit
CIO 100.00 to turn ON.
Output Wiring Precautions
Output Short-circuit
Protection
If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output compo-
nents and the printed circuit boards may be damaged. To guard against this,
incorporate a fuse in the external circuit. Use a fuse with a capacity of about
twice the rated output.
Connecting to a TTL
Circuit
A TTL circuit cannot be connected directly to a transistor output because of
the transistor's residual voltage. It is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor
and a CMOS IC between the two.
Inrush Current
Considerations
When connecting a transistor or triac output to a load having a high inrush
current (such as an incandescent lamp), steps must be taken to avoid dam-
age to the transistor or triac. Use either of the following methods to reduce the
inrush current.
R VR
VCC
RIN
Two-wire Sensor
DC Input Unit
TIM
100
#0001
0.00
100.00
0.01 T100
103
3-4-3 Wiring Safety and Noise Controls
I/O Signal Wiring Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
conduits both inside and outside of the control panel.
If the I/O wiring and power wiring must be routed in the same duct, use
shielded cables and connect the shields to the GR terminal to reduce noise.
Inductive Loads When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, connect a surge suppres-
sor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below.
Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.
OUT
R
COM
L
+
OUT
R
COM
L
+
SYSMAC CP1L
SYSMAC CP1L
Example Method 1
Example Method 2
Use a dark current of approximately 1/3 the rated current of the incandescent lamp.
Install a limit resistance.
(1)
(2)
(1) (2)
(1) (2)
Suspended duct
In-floor duct
(1) = I/O cables
(2) = Power cables
Conduits
L
IN
COM
OUT
COM
OUT
COM
L
+
Diode
DC input Relay output
Surge suppressor
Relay output or
transistor output
Diode
104
Noise from External
Wiring
Take the following points into account when externally wiring I/O, power sup-
ply, and power lines.
When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid combining I/O
wires and other control wires in the same cable.
If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm between them.
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they
must be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal.
Surge Suppressor Specifications
Resistance: 50
Capacitance: 0.47F
Voltage: 200 V
Diode Specifications
Breakdown voltage: 3 times load voltage min.
Mean rectification current: 1 A
300 mm min.
300 mm min.
PLC I/O wiring
PLC power supply
cable and general
control circuit wiring
Power lines
Low-current cables
Control cables
Power cables
Ground to 100 or less
200 mm min.
PLC I/O wiring
PLC power
supply cable
and general
control circuit
wiring Power lines
Steel sheet metal
Ground to 100 or less
105
Wiring CPU Unit I/O Section 3-5
3-5 Wiring CPU Unit I/O
3-5-1 I/O Wiring for CPU Units with 40 I/O Points
Input Wiring (Upper Terminal Block)
The input circuits have 24 points/common. Use power lines with sufficient cur-
rent capacity for the COM terminals.
Output Wiring (Lower Terminal Block)
Relay Outputs
(CP1L-M40DR-A and
CP1L-M40DR-D)
AC-power-supply models have a 24-VDC output terminals (+/) on the lower
terminal block. They can be used as a DC power supply for the input circuit.
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11

00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
24 VDC
CIO 0 CIO 1
CIO 0 CIO 1
+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
CIO 100 CIO 101
CIO 100
CIO 101
L
L L L
L L L L L L L L
L
L
L
L
106
Sinking Transistor
Outputs (CP1L-M40DT-D)
Sourcing Transistor
Outputs (CP1L-M40DT1-D)
NC 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
NC COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CIO 100 CIO 101
L L L L L L L L L L L
L L L L L
NC 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
NC COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07

CIO 100 CIO 101
CIO 100 CIO 101
L L L L L
24 VDC
CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 0
CIO 1
L1 L2/N COM 01
00
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
01
00
03
02
05
04
107
Relay Outputs
(CP1L-M30DR-A)
Relay Outputs
(CP1L-M30DR-D)
Sinking Transistor
Outputs (CP1L-M30DT-D)
CIO 100
L L L L L L
L L
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
CIO 100
L L
L L
CIO 101
CIO 101
CIO 100
L L L L L L
L L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03
CIO 100
L L
L L
CIO 101
CIO 101
CIO 100 CIO 101
L L L L L L L L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
L
L L
L
CIO 100 CIO 101
108
Sourcing Transistor
Outputs (CP1L-M30DT1-D)
Relay Outputs
(CP1L-L20DR-A and
CP1L-J20DR-A)
L L L L L L L L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02
L
L L
L
CIO 100
CIO 100 CIO 101
CIO 101
24 VDC
CIO 0
CIO 0
L1 L2/N COM 01
00
03
02
05
04
07
06
09
08
11
10
CIO 100
L L L L L L
L L
+ 00 01 02 04 05 07
- COM COM COM 03 COM 06
CIO 100
109
Relay Outputs
(CP1L-L20DR-D and
CP1L-J20DR-D)
Sinking Transistor
Outputs (CP1L-L20DT-D)
Sourcing Transistor
Outputs (CP1L-L20DT1-D
and CP1L-J20DT1-D)
CIO 100
L L L L L L
L L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07
CIO 100
CIO 100
L L L L L L
L L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07
CIO 100
CIO 100
L L L L L L
L L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07
CIO 100
110
Relay Outputs
(CP1L-L14DR-A and
CP1L-J14DR-A)
Relay Outputs
(CP1L-L14DR-D and
CP1L-J14DR-D)

24 VDC
CIO 0
CIO 0
L1 L2/N COM 01
00
03 05
04
07
06
NC
NC
NC
NC 02
CIO 100
L L L L L
L
+ 00 01 02 04 05 NC
- COM COM COM 03 COM NC
CIO 100
CIO 100
L L L L L
L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 NC
NC COM COM COM 03 COM NC
CIO 100
111
Sinking Transistor
Outputs (CP1L-L14DT-D)
Sourcing Transistor
Outputs (CP1L-L14DT1-D
and CP1L-J14DT1-D)
3-5-5 Pulse Input Connection Examples
For a 24-VDC Open-
collector Encoder
This example shows the connections to an encoder with phase-A, phase-B,
and phase Z inputs.
CIO 100
L L L L L
L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 NC
CIO 100
CIO 100
L L L L L
L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 NC
CIO 100
Black
White
Orange
+Vcc Brown
0 V (COM)
Blue
0 V
+24 V
008
009
003
COM (COM 24 V)
Encoder
(Power supply: 24 VDC)
Example: E6B2-CWZ6C
NPN open-
collector output
Phase A
Phase B
Phase Z
24-V DC power supply
CP1L CPU Unit
(Differential phase input mode)
(High-speed counter 0:
Phase A 0 V)
Phase B 0 V)
Phase Z 0 V)
Encoder
Power provided.
(Do not use the same I/O power supply as other equipment.)
Phase A
Phase B
Phase Z
Shielded twisted-pair cable
0.00
0.01
0.04
COM
0V
24V 0V
IA
IB
IZ
CP1L CPU Unit

Power
supply
112
3-5-6 Pulse Output Connection Examples
This example shows a connection to a motor driver. Always check the specifi-
cations of the motor driver before actually connecting it.
For open-collector output, use a maximum of 3 m of wiring between the CP1L
CPU Unit and the motor driver.
No pulses are output while the pulse output transistor is OFF. For a direction
output, OFF indicates that CCW output is in progress.
Do not use the same power supply for both pulse output 24-VDC/5-VDC
power and other I/O power.
CW/CCW Pulse Output and Pulse Plus Direction Output
Using a 24-VDC Photocoupler Input Motor Driver (CP1L-@@@DT-D)
ON
OFF
CW
CW
CCW
CCW
CW CCW
Output transistor
Pulse output in progress
CW and CCW Pulse Outputs
Pulse and Direction Outputs
Pulses
Direction
Output ON Output OFF
(+)
()
(+)
()
+
CP1L CPU Unit
24-VDC
power supply
for outputs
CW pulse
output
(Pulse
output)
CCW pulse
output
(Direction
output)
Motor driver (for 24-V input)
113
Using a 5-VDC
Photocoupler Input Motor
Driver (CP1L-@@@DT-D)
Connection Example 1
In this example, a 5-V input motor driver is used with a 24-VDC power supply.
Be careful to ensure that the Position Control Unit output current does not
damage the input circuit at the motor driver and yet is sufficient to turn it ON.
Take into account the power derating for the 1.6-k resistance.
Connection Example 2
1.6 k
Approx. 12 mA
100.02
1.6 k
Approx. 12 mA
COM
100.03
(+)
()
(+)
()
+
CP1L CPU Unit
24-VDC
power supply
for outputs
CW pulse
output
(Pulse
output)
CCW pulse
output
(Direction
output)
(Example: R = 220 )
100.02
100.03
COM
5-V DC power supply
()
()
(+)
(+)
+
CP1L CPU Unit
CW pulse
output
(Pulse
output)
CCW pulse
output
(Direction
output)
114
CP/CPM1A-series Expansion I/O Unit Wiring Section 3-6
3-6 CP/CPM1A-series Expansion I/O Unit Wiring
CP-series Expansion I/O Units
For details on wiring Expansion Units, refer to SECTION 7 Using Expansion
Units and Expansion I/O Units.
40-point I/O Units (CP1W-40ED@@/CPM1A-40ED@@)
Input Wiring
Model Inputs Outputs
40-point I/O
Units
CP1W-40EDR
CPM1A-40EDR
24 24-VDC
inputs
16 relay outputs
CP1W-40EDT
CPM1A-40EDT
CP1W-40EDT1
CPM1A-40EDT1
16 transistor outputs (sourcing)
20-point I/O
Units
CP1W-20EDT1
CPM1A-20EDR1
12 24-VDC
inputs
8 relay outputs
CP1W-20EDT
CPM1A-20EDT
CP1W-20EDT1
CPM1A-20EDT1
16-point
Output Units
CP1W-16ER
CPM1A-16ER
None 16 relay outputs
8-point Input
Units
CP1W-8ED
CPM1A-8ED
8 24-VDC
inputs
None
8-point Out-
put Units
CP1W-8ER
CPM1A-8ER
None 8 relay outputs
CP1W-8ET
CPM1A-8ET
CP1W-8ET1
CPM1A-8ET1
+
+

CIO m+1 CIO m+2
24 VDC
NC NC COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC NC 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
CIO m+1 CIO m+2
115
Output Wiring CP1W-40EDR/CPM1A-40EDR (Relay Outputs)
CP1W-40EDT/CPM1A-40EDT (Sinking Transistor Outputs)
CP1W-40EDT1/CP1A-40EDT1 (Sourcing Transistor Outputs)
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
NC COM COM COM 03 COM 06 COM 01 03 COM 06
L L L L L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07

4.5 to 30 VDC
L
L L L L
NC 00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07

4.5 to 30 VDC L
L L L L
116
20-point I/O Units (CP1W-20ED@@/CPM1A-20ED@@)
Input Wiring CP1W-20ED@@/CPM1A-20ED@@
Output Wiring CP1W-20EDR1/CPM1A-20EDR1 (Relay Outputs)
CP1W-20EDT/CPM1A-20EDT (Sinking Transistor Outputs)
COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
NC 00 02 04 06 08 10

+
+

CIO m+1
CIO m+1
24 VDC
250 VAC
24 VDC
00 01 02 04 05 07
COM COM COM 03 COM 06

L L L L L L
L L
00 01 02 04 05 07

L L L L L L
L L
117
CP1W-20EDT1/CP1A-20EDT1 (Sourcing Transistor Outputs)
16-point Output Units (CP1W-16ER/CPM1A-16ER)
Output Wiring CP1W-16ER/CPM1A-16ER (Relay Outputs)
8-point Input Units (CP1W-8ED/CPM1A-8E)
Input Wiring
00 01 02 04 05 07

L L L L L L
L L
Unit Upper Terminal Block
Unit Lower Terminal Block
NC COM COM COM 04 06 COM
NC 00 01 02 03 05 07
NC 00 02 04 05 07 NC
NC COM 01 03 COM 06 NC

L L L L L
L L
L L L L L L
L L L
+
+

+
+
Unit Upper Terminal Block

24 VDC
Unit Lower Terminal Block
24 VDC
The Unit's upper terminal block COM
and lower terminal block COM are
connected internally, but connect them
externally as well.
COM 01 03
00 02

04 06
COM 05 07
118
8-point Output Units (CP1W-8E@/CPM1A-8E@)
Output Wiring CP1W-8ER/CPM1A-8ER (Relay Outputs)
Output Wiring CP1W-8ET/CPM1A-8ET (Sinking Transistor Outputs)
Output Wiring CP1W-8ET1/CPM1A-8ET1 (Sourcing Transistor Outputs)
Unit Upper Terminal Block Unit Lower Terminal Block
04 06
COM 05 07
COM 01 03
00 02
L L
L L
L L
L L

+
4.5 to
30 VDC
4.5 to
30 VDC
04 06
COM 05 07
COM 01 03
00 02
L L
L L
+
L L
L L
COM 01 03
00 02
04 06
COM 05 07
+
L L
4.5 to
30 VDC
+
L L L L
4.5 to
30 VDC
L L
119
SECTION 4
I/O Memory Allocation
This section describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
4-1 Overview of I/O Memory Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4-1-1 I/O Memory Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4-1-2 Overview of the Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4-1-3 Clearing and Holding I/O Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4-1-4 Hot Start/Hot Stop Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4-2 I/O Area and I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4-2-1 I/O Bits Allocated to CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4-2-2 I/O Bits Allocated to Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4-2-3 I/O Allocation Examples with Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4-2-4 I/O Word Allocations to Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4-3 1:1 Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4-4 Serial PLC Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4-5 Internal Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4-6 Holding Area (H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4-7 Auxiliary Area (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4-8 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4-9 Timers and Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4-9-1 Timer Area (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4-9-2 Counter Area (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4-9-3 Changing the BCD or Binary Mode for Counters and Timers . . . . . 140
4-10 Data Memory Area (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4-11 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4-11-1 Using Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4-11-2 Precautions for Using Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4-12 Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4-13 Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4-14 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4-15 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
120
Overview of I/O Memory Area Section 4-1
4-1 Overview of I/O Memory Area
4-1-1 I/O Memory Area
This region of memory contains the data areas that can be accessed as
instruction operands. I/O memory includes the CIO Area, Work Area, Holding
Area, Auxiliary Area, DM Area, Timer Area, Counter Area, Task Flag Area,
Data Registers, Index Registers, Condition Flag Area, and Clock Pulse Area.
Note 1. A0 to A447 are read only and cannot be written. A448 to A959 are
read/write.
2. Bits can be manipulated using TST(350), TSTN(351), SET, SETB(532),
RSTB(533), and OUTB(534).
Instruction
I/O Memory
Area Size Range Task usage Allocation Bit
access
Word
access
Access Change
from CX-
Programmer
Forcing
bit
status
Read Write
CIO
Area
I/O Area Input
Area
1,600 bits
(100
words)
CIO 0 to
CIO 99
Shared by
all tasks
CP1L CPU
Units and CP-
series Expan-
sion Units or
Expansion I/O
Units
OK OK OK OK OK OK
Output
Area
1,600 bits
(100
words)
CIO 100
to CIO
199
OK OK OK OK OK OK
1:1 Link Area 1,024 bits
(64 words)
CIO 3000
to CIO
3063
1:1 Links OK OK OK OK OK OK
Serial PLC Link Area 1,440 bits
(90 words)
CIO 3100
to CIO
3189
Serial PLC
Links
OK OK OK OK OK OK
Work Area 14,400
bits (900
words)
CIO 3800
to CIO
6143
--- OK OK OK OK OK OK
Work Area 8,192 bits
(512
words)
W000 to
W511
Holding Area 8,192 bits
(512
words)
H000 to
H511
(Note 6)
Auxiliary Area 15,360
bits (960
words)
A000 to
A959
--- OK --- OK Note 1 Note 1 No
TR Area 16 bits TR0 to
TR15
--- OK OK OK OK No No
Data Memory Area 32,768
words
D00000
to
D32767
(Note 7)
--- No
(Note
2)
OK OK OK OK No
Timer Completion Flags 4,096 bits T0000 to
T4095
--- OK --- OK OK OK OK
Counter Completion Flags 4,096 bits C0000 to
C4095
--- OK --- OK OK OK OK
Timer PVs 4,096
words
T0000 to
T4095
--- --- OK OK OK OK No
(Note 4)
Counter PVs 4,096
words
C0000 to
C4095
--- --- OK OK OK OK No
(Note 5)
Task Flag Area 32 bits TK0 to
TK31
--- OK --- OK No No No
Index Registers 16 regis-
ters
IR0 to
IR15
Function
separately in
each task
(Note 3)
--- OK OK Indirect
address-
ing only
Specific
instruc-
tions only
No No
Data Registers 16 regis-
ters
DR0 to
DR15
--- No OK OK OK No No
121
3. Index registers and data registers can be used either individually by task
or they can be shared by all the tasks (the default is individual use by task).
4. Timer PVs can be refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the Timer
Completion Flags.
5. Counter PVs can be refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the
Counter Completion Flags.
6. H512 to H1535 are used as a Function Block Holding Area. These words
can be used only for function block instances (internally allocated variable
area).
7. Data Memory Area for CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O Points: D0 to D9999
and D32000 to D32767.
4-1-2 Overview of the Data Areas
CIO Area
It is not necessary to input the CIO acronym when specifying an address in
the CIO Area. The CIO Area is generally used for data exchanges, such as
I/O refreshing with PLC Units. Words that are not allocated to Units may be
used as work words and work bits in the program.
Note The parts of the CIO Area that are labelled not used may be used in pro-
gramming as work bits. In the future, however, unused CIO Area bits may be
used when expanding functions. Always use Work Area bits first.
I/O Area (Inputs: CIO 0 to CIO 99, Outputs: CIO 100 to CIO 199)
These words are allocated to built-in I/O terminals of CP1L CPU Units and
CP-series Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units. Input words and output
bits that arent allocated may be used in programming.
Input Area
Output Area
Not used (see note).
1:1 Link Area
Work Area
CIO 0
Reserved for system.
CIO 3063
CIO 3800
CIO 1999
CIO 3189
CIO 6143
CIO 100
CIO 99
CIO 199
15
00
Bit
Serial PLC Link Area
CIO 3100
CIO 3000
Word
CIO 1900
122
1:1 Link Area
These bits are used by the 1:1 Link Master and Slave. They are used for data
links between CP1L CPU Units and CPM2@ CPU Units.
These words are allocated for use for data links (Serial PLC Links) with other
CP1L CPU Units or CP1H CPU Units. Addresses not used for Serial PLC
Links can be used in programming.
Internal I/O Area
These words can be used in programming; they cannot be used for I/O
exchange with external I/O terminals. Be sure to use the work words provided
in the Work Area before using words in the Internal I/O Area or other unused
words in the CIO Area. It is possible that these words will be assigned to new
functions in future versions of the CPU Units. The parts of the CIO Area that
are labelled Not used are functionally identical to the Internal I/O Area.
Work Area (W) Words in the Work Area can be used in programming; they cannot be used for
I/O exchange with external I/O terminals. Use this area for work words and
bits before any words in the CIO Area.
Note These words should be used first in programming be assigned to new func-
tions in future versions of CP1L CPU Units.
Holding Area (H) Words in the Holding Area can be used in programming. These words retain
their content when the PLC is turned ON or the operating mode is switched
between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode.
Note H512 to H1535 are used as a Function Block Holding Area. These words can
be used only for function block instances (internally allocated variable area).
These words cannot be specified as instruction operands in the user program.
15
W511
Word Bit
15
H511
Word Bit
123
Auxiliary Area (A) These words are allocated to specific functions in the system.
Refer to Appendix C Auxiliary Area Allocations by Function and Appendix D
Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address for details on the Auxiliary Area.
Temporary Relay Area
(TR)
The TR Area contains bits that record the ON/OFF status of program
branches. Refer to the CP1H/CP1L Programming Manual for details.
Data Memory Area (D) The DM Area is a multi-purpose data area that is normally accessed only in
word-units. These words retain their content when the PLC is turned ON or
the operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MON-
ITOR mode.
Timer Area (T) There are two parts to the Timer Area: the Timer Completion Flags and the
timer Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 timers with timer numbers T0 to
T4095 can be used.
Timer Completion Flags
These flags are read as individual bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the
system when the corresponding timer times out (i.e., when the set time
elapses).
Timer PVs
The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the timer operates.
Counter Area (C) There are two parts to the Counter Area: the Counter Completion Flags and
the Counter Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 counters with counter num-
bers C0 to C4095 can be used.
Counter Completion Flags
These flags are read as individual bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the
system when the corresponding counter counts out (i.e., when the set value is
reached).
A447
A448
A959
15
Read-write area
Read-only area
Word Bit

D0
D32767
15
0
Bit

D0
D32767
15
0
Bit

D9999
D32000
CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O Points CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O Points
124
Counter PVs
The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the counter operates.
Condition Flags These flags include the Arithmetic Flags, such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag, which indicate the results of instruction execution as well as the Always
ON and Always OFF Flags. The Condition Flags are specified with symbols
rather than addresses.
Clock Pulses The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Units internal timer.
These bits are specified with symbols rather than addresses.
Task Flag Area (TK) A Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasnt been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Index Registers (IR) Index registers (IR0 to IR15) are used to store PLC memory addresses (i.e.,
absolute memory addresses in RAM) to indirectly address words in I/O mem-
ory. The Index Registers can be used separately in each task or they can be
shared by all tasks.
Data Registers (DR) Data registers (DR0 to DR15) are used together with Index Registers. When a
Data Register is input just before an Index Register, the content of the Data
Register is added to the PLC memory address in the Index Register to offset
that address. The Data Registers can be used separately in each task or they
can be shared by all tasks.
125
4-1-3 Clearing and Holding I/O Memory
Note 1. Mode changed from PROGRAM to RUN/MONITOR or vice-versa.
2. The PLC Setups IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting determines wheth-
er the IOM Hold Bits status is held or cleared when the PLC is turned ON.
4-1-4 Hot Start/Hot Stop Functions
Operating Mode Changes
Hot Start
Turn ON the IOM Hold Bit to retain all data* in I/O memory when the CPU Unit
is switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode to start program
execution.
Hot Stop
When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, all data* in I/O memory will also be retained
when the CPU Unit is switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM
mode to stop program execution.
Note *The following areas of I/O memory will be cleared during mode changes
(between PROGRAM and RUN/MONITOR) unless the IOM Hold Bit is ON:
the CIO Area (I/O Area, Data Link Area, CPU Bus Unit Area, Special I/O Unit
Area, DeviceNet (CompoBus/D) Area, and Internal I/O Areas), Work Area,
Timer Completion Flags, and Timer PVs.
Area
Mode changed
1 Fatal error generated
PLC power turned ON
Execution of FALS Other fatal errors PLC Setup set to
clear IOM Hold Bit
status
2
PLC Setup set to
hold IOM Hold Bit
status
2
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
IOM Hold
Bit ON
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
IOM Hold
Bit ON
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
IOM Hold
Bit ON
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
IOM Hold
Bit ON
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
IOM Hold
Bit ON
CIO
Area
I/O Area Cleared Retained Retained Retained Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Serial PC Link Area
Internal I/O Area
Work Area (W) Cleared Retained Retained Retained Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Holding Area (H) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Auxiliary Area (A) Status treatment depends on address.
Data Memory Area (D) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Timer Completion Flags (T) Cleared Retained Retained Retained Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Timer PVs (T) Cleared Retained Retained Retained Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Counter Completion Flags (C) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Counter PVs (C) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Task Flags (TK) Cleared Cleared Retained Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared
Index Registers (IR) Cleared Retained Retained Retained Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Data Registers (DR) Cleared Retained Retained Retained Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
PROGRAM
Retain
I/O memory
CIO and
other areas
MONITOR or RUN
PROGRAM
Retain
MONITOR or RUN I/O memory
CIO and
other areas
126
Auxiliary Area Flags and Words
When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, all outputs from Output Units will be maintained
when program execution stops. When the program starts again, outputs will
have the same status that they had before the program was stopped and
instructions will be executed. (When the IOM Hold Bit is OFF, instructions will
be executed after the outputs have been cleared.)
PLC Power ON In order for all data* in I/O memory to be retained when the PLC is turned ON,
the IOM Hold Bit must be ON and it must be protected in the PLC Setup using
the IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup parameter.
PLC Setup
IOM Hold Bit A500.12 Specifies whether the I/O memory will be retained or not
when the CPU Unit operating mode is changed
(between PROGRAM and RUN/MONITOR) or when the
power is cycled.
OFF: I/O memory is cleared to 0 when the operating
mode is changed.
ON: I/O memory is retained when the operating mode
is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or
MONITOR.
IOM Hold Bit A500.12 Specifies whether the I/O memory will be retained or
not when the CPU Unit operating mode is changed
(between PROGRAM and RUN/MONITOR) or when
the power is cycled.
OFF: I/O memory is cleared to 0 when the operating
mode is changed.
ON: I/O memory is retained when the operating
mode is changed between PROGRAM and
RUN or MONITOR.
Name Description Setting Default
IOM Hold
Bit Status
at Startup
To retain all data in I/O
memory when the PLC
is turned ON, set the
IOM Hold Bit at startup
parameter to hold the
status of the I/O Hold Bit.
OFF: The IOM Hold Bit is cleared
to 0 when power is cycled.
ON: The status of the IOM Hold
Bit is retained when power is
cycled.
OFF
(Cleared)
Retained
Power ON
I/O memory
CIO and
other areas
127
I/O Area and I/O Allocations Section 4-2
4-2 I/O Area and I/O Allocations
Input Bits: CIO 0.00 to CIO 99.15 (100 words)
Output Bits: CIO 100.00 to CIO 199.15 (100 words)
The starting words for inputs and outputs are predetermined for CP1L CPU
Unit. Input bits in CIO 0 and CIO 1 and output bits in CIO 100 and CIO 101
are automatically allocated to the built-in I/O on the CPU Unit. CP-series
Expansion Units and CP-series Expansion I/O Units are automatically allo-
cated input bits in words starting from CIO 2 and output bits in words starting
from CIO 102.
Allocated Words and Number of Expansion Units and Expansion I/O
Units
For example, with a CPU Unit with 40 I/O points, the input bits in CIO 0 and
CIO 1 and the outputs bits in CIO 100 and CIO 101 would be allocated to the
built-in I/O of the CPU Unit. Input bits in CIO 2 and higher and outputs bits in
CIO 102 and higher would be automatically allocated in order to any Expan-
sion Units or Expansion I/O Units connected to the CPU Unit.
When the power to the CPU Unit is turned ON, the CPU Unit checks for any
Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units connected to it and automatically
allocates I/O bits. If the order in which the Units are connected is changed, the
the bits used in the ladder program will no longer match the bits allocated to
the actual Units. Always review the ladder program whenever changing the
order in which Units are connected.
4-2-1 I/O Bits Allocated to CPU Units
CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points
CPU Unit Allocated words Number of
Expansion Units
and Expansion I/O
Units connected
Input bits Output bits
CPU Unit with
14 I/O points
CIO 0 CIO 100 1
CPU Unit with
20 I/O points
CIO 0 CIO 100 1
CPU Unit with
30 I/O points
CIO 0 and CIO 1 CIO 100 and CIO 101 3
CPU Unit with
40 I/O points
CIO 0 and CIO 1 CIO 100 and CIO 101 3
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

Output bits
Input bits
8 inputs
CIO 0
(CIO 0. 00 to CIO 0.07)
CIO 100
(CIO 100. 00 to CIO 100.05)
6 outputs
CIO 0
Do not use.
Can be used as work bits.
8 input bits
6 output bits
CIO 100
128
For a CPU Unit with 40 I/O points (shown above), a total of 24 input bits are
allocated to the input terminal block. The bits that are allocated are input bits
CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11 (i.e., bits 00 to 11 in CIO 0) and input bits CIO 1.00 to
CIO 1.11 (i.e., bits 00 to 11 in CIO 1).
In addition, a total of 16 output bits are allocated to the output terminal block.
The bits that are allocated are output bits CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07 (i.e., bits
00 to 07 in CIO 0) and output bits CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.07 (i.e., bits 00 to 07
in CIO 1).
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

12 inputs bits
8 output bits

8 outputs
CIO 0
(CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11)
CIO 100
(CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07)
Input bits
Output bits
CIO 0
CIO 100
12 inputs
Do not use.
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

18 inputs bits
12 output bits
8 outputs
CIO 0 (CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11)
CIO 1 (CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.05)
CIO 100 (CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07)
CIO 101 (CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.03)
Input bits
Output bits
CIO 0
CIO 100
18 inputs
Do not use.
CIO 1
CIO 101
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

24 inputs bits
16 output bits
16 outputs
CIO 0 (CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11)
CIO 1 (CIO 1.00 to CIO 1.11)
CIO 100 (CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07)
CIO 101 (CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.07)
Input bits
Output bits
CIO 0
CIO 100
24 inputs
Do not use.
CIO 1
CIO 101
129
The upper bits (bits 12 to 15) not used in the input words cannot be used as
work bits. Only the bits not used in the output words can be used as work bits.
4-2-2 I/O Bits Allocated to Expansion I/O Units
There are Expansion I/O Units for expanding inputs, for expanding outputs,
and for expanding both input and outputs. I/O bits starting from bit 00 in the
next word after the word allocated to the previous Expansion Unit, Expansion
I/O Unit, or CPU Unit are automatically allocated. This word is indicated as
CIO m for input words and as CIO n for output words.
I/O Bit Addresses
Units 8 Input Points (CP1W-8ED/CPM1A-8ED)
Eight input bits are allocated in one word (bits 00 to 07 in CIO m).
Only one word (8 bits) is allocated to an 8-input Expansion Input Unit. No out-
put words are allocated. Input bits 08 to 15 are always cleared by the system
and cannot be used as work bits.
Units with 8 Output Points (CP1W-8E@@/CPM1A-8E@@)
Eight output bits are allocated in one word (bits 00 to 07 in CIO n+1).
Only one word (8 bits) is allocated to an 8-output Expansion Output Unit. No
input words are allocated. Output bits 08 to 15 can be used as work bits.
Unit Input bits Output bits
No. of
bits
No. of
words
Addresses No. of
bits
No. of
words
Addresses
Unit with 8 inputs CP1W-8ED
CPM1A-8ED
8 bits 1 word CIO m (bits 00 to 07) --- None None
Unit with
8 outputs
Relays CP1W-8ER
CPM1A-8ER
--- None None 8 bits 1 word CIO n (bits 00 to 07)
Sinking
transistors
CP1W-8ET
CPM1A-8ET
Sourcing
transistors
CP1W-8ET1
CPM1A-8ET1
Unit with 16 relay out-
puts
CP1W-16ER
CPM1A-16ER
--- None None 16 bits 2 words CIO n (bits 00 to 07)
CIO n+1 (bits 00 to 07)
Unit with
20 I/O
Relays CP1W-20EDR1
CPM1A-20EDR1
12 bits 1 word CIO m (bits 00 to 11) 8 bits 1 word CIO n (bits 00 to 07)
Sinking
transistors
CP1W-20EDT
CPM1A-20EDT
Sourcing
transistors
CP1W-20EDT1
CPM1A-20EDT1
Unit with
40 I/O
Relays CP1W-40EDR
CPM1A-40EDR
24 bits 2 words CIO m (bits 00 to 11)
CIO m+1 (bits 00 to 11)
16 bits 2 words CIO n (bits 00 to 07)
Sinking
transistors
CP1W-40EDT
CPM1A-40EDT
Sourcing
transistors
CP1W-40EDT1
CPM1A-40EDT1
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
m
Do not use. Inputs
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n
Outputs
130
Units with 8 Output Points (CP1W-16ER/CPM1A-16ER)
Sixteen output bits in two words are allocated in one word (bits 00 to 07 in CIO
n and bits 00 to 07 in CIO n+1). Eight output bits are allocated in one word
(bits 00 to 07 in CIO n+1).
Two words (16 bits) are allocated to a 16-output Expansion Output Unit. No
input words are allocated. Output bits 08 to 15 can be used as work bits.
Units with 20 I/O Points (CPM1A-20ED@@/20EDT/20ED@@)
Twelve input bits are allocated in one word (bits 00 to 11 in CIO m). Eight out-
put bits are allocated in one word (bits 00 to 07 in CIO n).
One input word (12 bits) and one output word (8 bits) are allocated for a 20-
point Expansion I/O Unit.
Input bits 12 to 15 are always cleared by the system and cannot be used as
work bits. Output bits 08 to 15, however, can be used as work bits.
Units with 40 I/O Points (CPM1A-40ED@@/40EDT/40ED@@)
Twenty-four input bits in two words are allocated (bits 00 to 11 in CIO m and
bits 00 to 11 CIO m+1). Sixteen output bits in two words are allocated (bits 00
to 07 in CIO n and bits 00 to 07 in CIO n+1).
Two input words (24 bits) and two output words (16 bits) are allocated to a 40-
point Expansion I/O Unit. Input bits 12 to 15 cannot be used as work bits. Out-
put bits 08 to 15, however, can be used as work bits.
4-2-3 I/O Allocation Examples with Expansion I/O Units
Example 1: Maximum I/O Capacity
The configuration shown in this example is for the maximum I/O capacity. It
consists of a CPU Unit with 40 I/O points and three Expansion I/O Units, each
with 40 I/O points. Up to three Expansion I/O Units can be connected to a
CPU Unit with either 30 or 40 I/O points.
When Expansion I/O Units with 40 I/O points are connected, control is possi-
ble for up to 160 I/O points, including 96 inputs and 64 outputs.

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n
n+1
Output
bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

n
Do not use.
Output bits
Input bits m
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
m
m+1
Do not use.

n

n+1

Input
bits
Output
bits
131
Example 2: Connecting Expansion I/O Units with Only Inputs or Only
Outputs
If Expansion I/O Units with only inputs or only outputs are connected, the
input or output word not used by an Expansion I/O Unit is allocated to the next
Unit that requires it.

24 input points

16 output points

24 input points

16 output points
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 2
CIO 3
CIO 4
CIO 5
CIO 6
CIO 7

Do not use.
CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11
CIO 106.00 to CIO 106.07
CIO 107.00 to CIO 107.07
CIO 104.00 to CIO 106.07
CIO 105.00 to CIO 105.07
24 input points 24 input points
16 output points 16 output points
CIO 102.00 to CIO 102.07
CIO 103.00 to CIO 103.07
CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07
CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.07
CPU Unit
(40 I/O points)
Three Expansion I/O Units, each with 40 I/O points
CPU Unit with 40 I/O points
First Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
Second Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
Third Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
First Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
Second Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
Third Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 102
CIO 103
CIO 104
CIO 105
CIO 106
CIO 107
Input bits
Input bits
Output bits
Output bits
Bit

104.00 104.07

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 2
CIO 3
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 102
CIO 103
CIO 104
Do not use.
18 input points
12 output points
CPU Unit
(30 I/O points)
8 input points
CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07
CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.03
CIO 102.00 to CIO 102.07
CIO 103.00 to CIO 103.07
No outputs
16 output points
No inputs
12 input points
8 output points
CIO 104.00 to CIO 104.07
First Expansion I/O Unit:
Unit with 8 inputs
Second Expansion I/O Unit:
Unit with 16 outputs
Third Expansion I/O Unit:
Unit with 20 I/O
First Expansion I/O Unit: Unit with 8 inputs
Third Expansion I/O Unit: Unit with 20 I/O
CPU Unit with 30 I/O
points
Second Expansion I/O Unit:
Unit with 16 outputs
Third Expansion I/O Unit: Unit with 20 I/O
Input bits
Input bits
Output bits
Output bits
132
4-2-4 I/O Word Allocations to Expansion Units
m: Indicates the next input word after the input word allocated to the
Expansion Unit, Expansion I/O Unit, or CPU Unit to the left of the cur-
rent Unit.
n: Indicates the next output word after the output word allocated to the
Expansion Unit, Expansion I/O Unit, or CPU Unit to the left of the cur-
rent Unit.

Unit Input words Output words
Analog I/O Units CP1W-MAD11
CPM1A-MAD11
CPM1A-MAD01
2 words CIO m to CIO m+1 1 word CIO n
Analog Input Units CP1W-AD041 4 words CIO m to CIO m+3 1 word CIO n
CPM1A-AD041 2 words CIO n to CIO n+1
Analog Output Units CP1W-DA041
CPM1A-DA041
None --- 4 words CIO n to CIO n+3
Temperature Sensor Units CP1W-TS001
CPM1A-TS001
2 words CIO m to CIO m+1 None ---
CP1W-TS002
CPM1A-TS002
CP1W-TS101
CPM1A-TS101
CP1W-TS102
CPM1A-TS102
DeviceNet I/O Link Units CPM1A-DRT21 2 words CIO m to CIO m+1 2 words CIO n to CIO n+1
CompoBus/S I/O Link
Units
CP1W-SRT21
CPM1A-SRT21
1 word CIO m 1 word CIO n
133
1:1 Link Area Section 4-3
I/O Word Allocations to Expansion Units
CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points + TS002 + DA041 + 40ED
4-3 1:1 Link Area
The 1:1 Link Area contains 1,024 bits (64 words) with addresses ranging from
CIO 3000.00 to CIO 3063.15 (CIO 3000 to CIO 3063).
These bits are used to create 1:1 links (i.e., shared data link areas) by con-
necting the RS-232C ports of two PLCs, including the CP1L, CPM1A,
CPM2A, CPM2B, CPM2C, SRM1(-V2), CQM1H, and C200HX/HG/HE(-Z).

Refer to 6-3-6 1:1 Links for information on using 1:1 links.

DA041

TS002

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 2
CIO 3
CIO 4
CIO 5
CIO 6
CIO 7

CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 102
CIO 103
CIO 104
CIO 105
CIO 106
CIO 107
Do not use.
Do not use.
CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07
CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.07
CPU Unit
(40 I/O points)
CIO 2 to CIO 5
No outputs
No inputs
CIO 2 to CIO 6.11
CIO 7 to CIO 7.11
24 input points
16 output points
24 input points
16 output points
CIO 102 to CIO 105
CIO 106.00 to CIO 106.07
CIO 107.00 to CIO 107.07
First Unit: Temperature Sensor Unit
Third Unit: Expansion I/O Unit with 40
Second Unit: Analog Output Unit
Third Unit: Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
First Unit:
Temperature Sensor Unit
Second Unit:
Analog Input Unit
Third Unit:
Expansion I/O Unit with 40 I/O points
Input bits
Input bits
Output bits
Output bits
RS-232C
CIO 3000
CIO 3031
CIO 3032
CIO 3063
Master
Slave
1:1 Links
CIO 3000
CIO 3031
CIO 3032
CIO 3063
Write words
Write words
Read words
Read words
CP1L,
CPM1A,
CPM2A,
CPM2B,
CPM2C,
SRM1(-V2),
CQM1H,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z),
Other C-series PLCs
134
Serial PLC Link Area Section 4-4
4-4 Serial PLC Link Area
The Serial PLC Link Area contains 1,440 bits (90 words) with addresses rang-
ing from CIO 3100.00 to CIO 3189.15 (CIO 3100 to CIO 3189).
Words in the Serial PLC Link Area can be used for data links with other PLCs.
Serial PLC Links exchange data among CPU Units via the built-in RS-232C
ports, with no need for special programming.
The Serial PLC Link allocations are set automatically by means of the follow-
ing PLC Setup in the Polling Unit.
Serial PLC Link Mode
Number of Serial PLC Link transfer words
Maximum Serial PLC Link unit number
Addresses not used for Serial PLC Links can be used in programming, the
same as the Work Area.
Forcing Bit Status Bits in the Serial PLC Link Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Initialization
The contents of the Serial PLC Link Area will be cleared in the following
cases:
1. When the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to
RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF
2. When the power is cycled
3. When the Serial PLC Link Area is cleared from the CX-Programmer
4. When PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an
FALS(007) error occurs (The contents of the Serial PLC Link Area will be
retained when FALS(007) is executed.)
4-5 Internal Work Area
The Internal Work Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from W0
to W511. These words can be used in programming as work words.
There are unused words in the CIO Area (CIO 3800 to CIO 6143) that can
also be used in the program, but use any available words in the Work Area
first because the unused words in the CIO Area may be allocated to other
applications when functions are expanded.
Forcing Bit Status Bits in the Work Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Work Area Initialization The contents of the Work Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1. When the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONI-
TOR mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF
3. When the Work Area is cleared from the CX-Programmer.
CP1L CPU
Unit
CP1L CPU
Unit
CJ1M CPU
Unit
RS-232C
port
RS-232C
port
Serial PLC Link
Serial PLC
Link Area
RS-232C
port
135
Holding Area (H) Section 4-6
4. When PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an
FALS(007) error occurs. (The contents of the Work Area will be retained
when FALS(007) is executed.)
4-6 Holding Area (H)
The Holding Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from H0 to
H511 (bits H0.00 to H511.15). These words can be used in programming.
Holding Area Initialization Data in the Holding Area is not cleared when the power is cycled or the PLCs
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa.
A Holding Area bit will be cleared if it is programmed between IL(002) and
ILC(003) and the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. To keep a bit ON
even when the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF, turn ON the bit with the
SET instruction just before IL(002).
Self-maintaining Bits When a self-maintaining bit is programmed with a Holding Area bit, the self-
maintaining bit wont be cleared even when the power is reset.
Note 1. If a Holding Area bit is not used for the self-maintaining bit, the bit will be
turned OFF and the self-maintaining bit will be cleared when the power is
reset.
2. If a Holding Area bit is used but not programmed as a self-maintaining bit
as in the following diagram, the bit will be turned OFF by execution condi-
tion A when the power is reset.
3. H512 to H1535 are used as a Function Block Holding Area. These words
can be used only for function block instances (internally allocated variable
area). These words cannot be specified as instruction operands in the user
program.
Precautions When a Holding Area bit is used in a KEEP(011) instruction, never use a nor-
mally closed condition for the reset input if the input device uses an AC power
supply. When the power supply goes OFF or is temporarily interrupted, the
input will go OFF before the PLCs internal power supply and the Holding Area
bit will be reset.
H0.00
H0.00
A
H0.00
Input
Unit
Set input
Reset input
H1.00
136
Auxiliary Area (A) Section 4-7
Instead, use a configuration like the one shown below.
There are no restrictions in the order of using bit address or in the number of
N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed.
4-7 Auxiliary Area (A)
The Auxiliary Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from A0 to
A959). These words are preassigned as flags and control bits to monitor and
control operation.
A0 through A447 are read-only, but A448 through A959 can be read or written
from the program or the CX-Programmer.
Refer to Appendix C Auxiliary Area Allocations by Function and Appendix D
Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address for Auxiliary Area functions.
Forcing Bit Status Read/write bits in the Auxiliary Area cannot be force-set and force-reset con-
tinuously.
4-8 TR (Temporary Relay) Area
The TR Area contains 16 bits with addresses ranging from TR0 to TR15.
These temporarily store the ON/OFF status of an instruction block for branch-
ing and are used only with mnemonics. TR bits are useful when there are sev-
eral output branches and interlocks cannot be used.
The TR bits can be used as many times as required and in any order required
as long as the same TR bit is not used twice in the same instruction block.
TR bits can be used only with the OUT and LD instructions. OUT instructions
(OUT TR0 to OUT TR15) store the ON OFF status of a branch point and LD
instructions recall the stored ON OFF status of the branch point.
Forcing Bit Status TR bits cannot be changed from the CX-Programmer.
Examples In this example, a TR bit is used when two outputs have been directly con-
nected to a branch point.
Input
Unit
Set input
Reset input
H1.00
LD
OR
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
AND
OUT
0.00
0.01
TR 0
0.02
0.03
TR 0
0.04
0.05
Instruction Operand
TR0 0.00
0.05 0.01
0.02
0.04
0.03
137
Timers and Counters Section 4-9
In this example, a TR bit is used when an output is connected to a branch
point without a separate execution condition.
Note A TR bit is not required when there are no execution conditions after the
branch point or there is an execution condition only in the last line of the
instruction block.
4-9 Timers and Counters
4-9-1 Timer Area (T)
The 4,096 timer numbers (T0000 to T4095) are shared by the TIM,
TIMX(550), TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TMHH(540), TIMHHX(552), TTIM(087),
TTIMX(555), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815), and TIMHWX(817)
instructions. Timer Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these
instructions are accessed with the timer numbers.
The TIML(542), TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instructions do not
use timer numbers.
When a timer number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the timer
number accesses the Completion Flag of the timer. When a timer number is
used in an operand that requires word data, the timer number accesses the
PV of the timer. Timer Completion Flags can be used as often as necessary
as normally open and normally closed conditions and the values of timer PVs
can be read as normal word data.
The refresh method for timer PVs can be set from the CX-Programmer to
either BCD or binary.
Note It is not recommended to use the same timer number in two timer instructions
because the timers will not operate correctly if they are timing simultaneously.
(If two or more timer instructions use the same timer number, an error will be
generated during the program check, but the timers will operate as long as the
instructions are not executed in the same cycle.)
LD
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
OUT
0.00
TR 0
0.01
0.02
TR 0
0.03
Instruction
Operand
TR0 0.00 0.01 0.02
0.03
LD 0.00
OUT 0.01
AND
OUT
0.02
0.03
LD 0.00
OUT
OUT
0.01
0.02
Instruction Operand
Instruction Operand
0.00 0.01
0.02
0.00 0.01
0.03 0.02
138
The following table shows when timers will be reset or maintained.
Note 1. If the IOM Hold Bit (A500.12) is ON, the PV and Completion Flag will be
retained when a fatal error occurs (including execution of FALS instruc-
tions) or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or
MONITOR mode or vice-versa. The PV and Completion Flag will be
cleared when power is cycled.
2. If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setups IOM Hold Bit Sta-
tus at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the PV and Com-
pletion Flag will be retained when the PLCs power is cycled.
3. Since the TIML(542), TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instruc-
tions do not use timer numbers, they are reset under different conditions.
Refer to the descriptions of these instructions for details.
4. The present value of TIM, TIMX(550), TIMH(015), TIMHX(551), TM-
HH(540), TMHHX(552), TIMW(813), TIMWX(816), TMHW(815) and TMH-
WX(817) timers programmed with timer numbers 0000 to 2047 will be
updated even when jumped between JMP and JME instructions or when
in a task that is on standby. The present value of timers programmed with
timer numbers 2048 to 4095 will be held when jumped or when in a task
that is on standby.
Forcing Bit Status Timer Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Timer PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be
refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the Completion Flag.
Restrictions There are no restrictions in the order of using timer numbers or in the number
of N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed. Timer PVs can be read as
word data and used in programming.
4-9-2 Counter Area (C)
The 4,096 counter numbers (C0000 to C4095) are shared by the CNT,
CNTX(546), CNTR(012), CNTRX(548), CNTW(814), and CNTWX(818)
instructions. Counter Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these
instructions are accessed with the counter numbers.
When a counter number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the
counter number accesses the Completion Flag of the counter. When a
counter number is used in an operand that requires word data, the counter
number accesses the PV of the counter.
Instruction name Effect on PV and Completion Flag Operation in
Jumps and Interlocks
Mode change
1
PLC start-up
2
CNR(545)/CN
RX(547)
Jumps
(JMP-JME) or
Tasks on
standby
4
Interlocks
(IL-ILC)
TIMER: TIM/TIMX(550) PV 0
Flag OFF
PV 0
Flag OFF
PV 9999
Flag OFF
PVs refreshed in
operating timers
PV SV
(Reset to SV.)
Flag OFF
HIGH-SPEED TIMER:
TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)
ONE-MS TIMER:
TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552)
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER:
TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555)
PV Maintained PV Maintained
TIMER WAIT:
TIMW(813)TIMWX(816)
PVs refreshed in
operating timers
---
HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT:
TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817)
---
139
The refresh method for counter PVs can be set from the CX-Programmer to
either BCD or binary. (Refer to the previous page).
It is not recommended to use the same counter number in two counter
instructions because the counters will not operate correctly if they are count-
ing simultaneously. If two or more counter instructions use the same counter
number, an error will be generated during the program check, but the counters
will operate as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle.
The following table shows when counter PVs and Completion Flags will be
reset.
Forcing Bit Status Counter Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Counter PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be
refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the Completion Flag.
Restrictions There are no restrictions in the order of using counter numbers or in the num-
ber of N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed. Counter PVs can be
read as word data and used in programming.
Instruction name Effect on PV and Completion Flag
Reset Mode
change
PLC startup Reset Input CNR(545)/CN
RX(547)
Interlocks
(IL-ILC)
COUNTER:
CNT/CNTX(546)
PV 0
Flag OFF
Maintained Maintained Reset Reset Maintained
REVERSIBLE
COUNTER:
CNTR(012)/CNTRX(548)
COUNTER WAIT:
CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818)
140
4-9-3 Changing the BCD or Binary Mode for Counters and Timers
The refresh method for set values and present values for timers and counters
can be changed from BCD mode (0000 to 9999) to binary method (0000 to
FFFF) using the CX-Programmer
This setting is made in common for all tasks for all timers and counters.
1. Right-click New PLC in the project tree and select Properties.
2. Select the Execute Timer/Counter as Binary Option in the PLC Properties
Dialog Box. The timers and counters for all tasks will be executed in binary
mode.
141
Data Memory Area (D) Section 4-10
4-10 Data Memory Area (D)
CPU Units with 30 or 40 I/O points: D0 to D32767
CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O points: D0 to D9999 and D32000 to D32767
This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation and is
accessible only by word.
Data in the DM Area is retained when the PLCs power is cycled or the PLCs
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the DM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Forcing Bit Status Bits in the DM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Indirect Addressing Words in the DM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@D)
When a @ character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the DM word at
that binary address. The entire DM Area (D0 to D32767) can be indirectly
addressed with hexadecimal values 0000 to 7FFF.
BCD-mode Addressing (*D)
When a * character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the DM word at that
BCD address. Only part of the DM Area (D0 to D09999) can be indirectly
addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.
Note (1) If an address between D10000 and D31999 is specified as an operand
for a CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O Points, an illegal area access error will
occur.
D32200
D32000
D32399
D9999
D0
D32199
D32399
D32200
D32199
D32767
D32400
D0
D32767
D32400

D10000
D31999

CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O Points
CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O Points
DM Fixed Allocation
Words for Modbus-RTU
Easy Master
DM Fixed Allocation
Easy Master
Do not use.
@D100
D256 0100
Address actually used.

*D100 D100 0100
Address actually used.

142
Index Registers Section 4-11
(2) If two-word data is accessed from the last address in the DM Area (D9999
for the CP1L-L@D@-@ and D32767 for other CPU Units), the Access Er-
ror Flag (P_AER) will turn ON and the data at D9999 or D32767 will not
be read or written.
DM Fixed Allocation
Easy Master
The following DM area words are used as command and response storage
areas for the Modbus-RTU Easy Master function.
D32200 to D32299: Serial port 1 on CP1L CPU Unit with M CPU type
D32300 to D32399: Serial port 2 on CP1L CPU Unit with M CPU type and
serial port 1 on CP1L CPU Unit with L CPU type
For use of these areas, refer to 6-3-3 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function.
4-11 Index Registers
The sixteen Index Registers (IR0 to IR15) are used for indirect addressing.
Each Index Register can hold a single PLC memory address, which is the
absolute memory address of a word in I/O memory. Use MOVR(560) to con-
vert a regular data area address to its equivalent PLC memory address and
write that value to the specified Index Register. (Use MOVRW(561) to set the
PLC memory address of a timer/counter PV in an Index Register.)
Note Refer to Appendix E Memory Map for more details on PLC memory
addresses.
Indirect Addressing When an Index Register is used as an operand with a , prefix, the instruction
will operate on the word indicated by the PLC memory address in the Index
Register, not the Index Register itself. Basically, the Index Registers are I/O
memory pointers.
All addresses in I/O memory (except Index Registers, Data Registers, and
Condition Flags) can be specified seamlessly with PLC memory
addresses. It isnt necessary to specify the data area. I/O memory
addresses for IR, DR, and Condition Flags, however, cannot be held.
In addition to basic indirect addressing, the PLC memory address in an
Index Register can be offset with a constant or Data Register, auto-incre-
mented, or auto-decremented. These functions can be used in loops to
read or write data while incrementing or decrementing the address by one
each time that the instruction is executed.
With the offset and increment/decrement variations, the Index Registers can
be set to base values with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561) and then modified as
pointers in each instruction.
Note It is possible to specify regions outside of I/O memory and generate an Illegal
Access Error when indirectly addressing memory with Index Registers. Refer
to Appendix E Memory Map for details on the limits of PLC memory
addresses.
I/O Memory
Pointer Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).
143
The following table shows the variations available when indirectly addressing
I/O memory with Index Registers. (IR@ represents an Index Register from IR0
to IR15.)
Example This example shows how to store the PLC memory address of a word (CIO 2)
in an Index Register (IR0), use the Index Register in an instruction, and use
the auto-increment variation.
MOVR(560) 2 IR0 Stores the PLC memory address of
CIO 2 in IR0.
MOV(021) #0001 ,IR0 Writes #0001 to the PLC memory ad-
dress contained in IR0.
MOV(021) #0020 +1,IR0 Reads the content of IR0, adds 1,
and writes #0020 to that PLC memo-
ry address.
Note The PLC memory addresses are listed in the diagram above, but it isnt nec-
essary to know the PLC memory addresses when using Index Registers.
Variation Function Syntax Example
Indirect addressing The content of IR@ is treated as
the PLC memory address of a bit
or word.
,IR@ LD , IR0 Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0.
Indirect addressing
with constant offset
The constant prefix is added to the
content of IR@ and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
The constant may be any integer
from 2,048 to 2,047.
Constant ,IR@
(Include a + or
in the constant.)
LD +5, IR0 Adds 5 to the contents of IR0
and loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
Indirect addressing
with DR offset
The content of the Data Register
is added to the content of IR@ and
the result is treated as the PLC
memory address of a bit or word.
DR@, IR@ LD
DR0, IR0
Adds the contents of DR0 to
the contents of IR0 and
loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
Indirect addressing
with auto-increment
After referencing the content of
IR@ as the PLC memory address
of a bit or word, the content is
incremented by 1 or 2.
Increment by 1:
, IR@+
Increment by 2:
, IR@++
LD , IR0++ Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0 and then increments
the content of IR0 by 2.
Indirect addressing
with auto-decrement
The content of IR@ is decre-
mented by 1 or 2 and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
Decrement by 1:
,IR@
Decrement by 2:
, IR@
LD , IR0 Decrements the content of
IR0 by 2 and then loads the
bit at that PLC memory
address.
#0001
#0020
Regular
data area
address I/O memory
PLC memory
address
MOVE TO REGISTER instruction
MOVR(560) 0002 IR0
Pointer
144
Since some operands are treated as word data and others are treated as bit
data, the meaning of the data in an Index Register will differ depending on the
operand in which it is used.
1,2,3... 1. Word Operand:
MOVR(560) 0000 IR2
MOV(021) D0 , IR2
When the operand is treated as a word, the contents of the Index Register
are used as is as the PLC memory address of a word.
In this example MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of CIO 2 in IR2
and the MOV(021) instruction copies the contents of D0 to CIO 2.
2. Bit Operand:
MOVR(560) 000013 ,IR2
SET +5 , IR2
When the operand is treated as a bit, the leftmost 7 digits of the Index Reg-
ister specify the word address and the rightmost digit specifies the bit num-
ber. In this example, MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of CIO 13
(0C00D hex) in IR2. The SET instruction adds +5 from bit 13 (D hex) to this
PLC memory address, so it turns ON bit CIO 1.02.
Index Register
Initialization
The Index Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1. When the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONI-
TOR mode or vice-versa
Setting Index Registers Always set the required value in an index register before using it. The contents
of an index register will be unpredictable if it is not set in advance.
The contents of an index register is also unpredictable after an interrupt task
is started. When using index registers inside an interrupt task, use
MOVR(560) (for anything but timer/counter PVs) or MOVRW(561) (for
timer/counter PVs) to set the required value.
Direct Addressing When an Index Register is used as an operand without a , prefix, the instruc-
tion will operate on the contents of the Index Register itself (a two-word or
double value). Index Registers can be directly addressed only in the instruc-
tions shown in the following table. Use these instructions to operate on the
Index Registers as pointers.
The Index Registers cannot be directly addressed in any other instructions,
although they can usually be used for indirect addressing.
Instruction group Instruction name Mnemonic
Data Movement
Instructions
MOVE TO REGISTER MOVR(560)
MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REG-
ISTER
MOVRW(561)
DOUBLE MOVE MOVL(498)
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE XCGL(562)
Table Data Processing
Instructions
SET RECORD LOCATION SETR(635)
GET RECORD NUMBER GETR(636)
Increment/Decrement
Instructions
DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY ++L(591)
DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY L(593)
145
The SRCH(181), MAX(182), and MIN(183) instructions can output the PLC
memory address of the word with the desired value (search value, maximum,
or minimum) to IR0. In this case, IR0 can be used in later instructions to
access the contents of that word.
4-11-1 Using Index Registers
Processing of multiple (identical) instructions such as consecutive addresses
for table data can be merged into one instruction by combining repetitive pro-
cessing (e.g., FOR(513) and NEXT(514)instructions) with indirect addressing
using Index Registers, thereby simplifying programming.
The Index operation uses the following procedure.
1. PLC memory addresses for the addresses in the Index Registers are
stored using a MOVR instruction.
2. Operation is then executed by indirectly addressing Index Registers to the
operand for Instruction A.
3. The addresses are moved using processing such as adding, subtracting,
incrementing, or decrementing the Index Register (see note).
4. Steps 2 and 3 are processed repeatedly until the conditions are met.
Note Adding, subtracting incrementing, or decrementing for the Index
Register is performed using one of the following methods.
Each Type of Indirect Addressing for Index Registers:
Auto-increment (,IR@+ or ,IR@++), auto-decrement (,-IR@ or ,--IR@),
constant offset (constant ,IR@), and DR offset (DR@,IR@) for Index
Registers
Instructions for Direct Addressing of Index Registers:
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY (+L), DOUBLE
SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY (-L), DOUBLE IN-
CREMENT BINARY (++L), DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY (--L)
Comparison Instructions DOUBLE EQUAL =L(301)
DOUBLE NOT EQUAL < >L(306)
DOUBLE LESS THAN < L(311)
DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL < =L(316)
DOUBLE GREATER THAN > L(321)
DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL > =L(326)
DOUBLE COMPARE CMPL(060)
Symbol Math Instructions DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH-
OUT CARRY
+L(401)
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
L(411)
Instruction group Instruction name Mnemonic

IR0

,IR0

Instruction execution
repeatedly incrementing
IR0 by 1

Instruction
Indirect
addressing
Table data
146
Example:
If, for example, instruction A above is a comparison instruction, table data
could be read from start to the end of the table to compare all of the data with
a specific value. In this way, blocks of user-defined processing can be freely
created depending by applying Index Registers.
Example Using Index Registers
In the following example, TIM instructions for timer numbers 0 to 99 use set
values in D100 to D199. This can be achieved by using one TIM instruction,
using an index register for the timer number, using another index register for
the Completion Flags, and repeatedly executing the TIM instruction to start
the timers.
Instruction A
Instruction A m+1
Instruction A m+n
MOVR m IR0
The PLC memory address
of address m is stored in IR0.
Repeated execution,
e.g., loop for
FOR or NEXT.
Instruction A ,IR0+

The PLC memory addresses for each T0's PV, Completion
Flag, and W0.00 are set in Index Registers IR0, IR1, and IR2 using a
MOVRW or MOVR instruction.
- The TIM instruction is executed for the timer number
(timer PV) that IR0+ indirectly addresses.
- The Timer Completion Flag that is indirectly addressed for
IR1+ turns ON when the time elapses. When the ON status
is received, bits in the work area that are indirectly
addressed for IR2+ are turned ON.
- The contents of IR0+, IR1+, and IR2+ are automatically
incremented by one after accessing the values using indirect
addressing.
- D0 is incremented.
Repeated
147
4-11-2 Precautions for Using Index Registers
Precautions Do not use a Index Register until a PLC memory address has been set in the
register. The pointer operation will be unreliable if the registers are used with-
out setting their values.
The values in Index Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt
task. When an Index Register will be used in an interrupt task, always set a
PLC memory address in the Index Register with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561)
before using the register in that task.
Each Index Register task is processed independently, so they do not affect
each other. For example, IR0 used in Task 1 and IR0 used in Task 2 are differ-
ent. Consequently, each Index Register task has 16 Index Registers.
++
D0
NEXT
JME
&1
MOVRW
T0
IR0
ON
The PLC memory address for the
PV area for TO is set in IR0.
,IR1+
,IR2+
MOVR
T0
IR1
The PLC memory address for the
Completion Flag for TO is set in IR1.
MOVR
W0.00
IR2
The PLC memory address for W0.00
is set in IR2.
MOV
&100
D0
The value &100 (100 decimal) is
set in D0.
If the above are not set, the FOR to
NEXT loop is not executed, and if
the above are set, the loop is executed.
When indirect addressing for IR2
is OFF, timers are started with indirect
addressing (auto-increment) for IR0 as
the timer number and indirect addressing
for D0 as the timer SV.
Indirect addressing for IR2 will turn ON
(auto-increment) when indirect addressing
for IR1 is ON (auto-increment).
D0 is incremented.
Return to FOR and repeat.
TIM
,IR0+
@D0
FOR
&100
,IR2
TIM
0000
D100
W0.00
T0000
W0.00
TIM
0001
D101
W0.01
T0001
W0.01
TIM
0099
D199
W6.03
T0099
W6.03
JMP
&1
Repeat execution of TIM instructions 100 times while incrementing each value for IR0
(timer number, PV), IR1 (Completion Flag), IR2 (W0.00 on), and @D0, and start T0 to T99.
Start of repetition (100 times)
148
Limitations when Using Index Registers
It is only possible to read the Index Register for the last task executed
within the cycle from the CX-Programmer. If using Index Registers with
the same number to perform multiple tasks, it is only possible with the CX-
Programmer to read the Index Register value for the last task performed
within the cycle from the multiple tasks, nor is it possible to write the Index
Register value from the CX-Programmer.
It is not possible to either read or write to the Index Registers using Host
Link commands or FINS commands.
A setting can be made from the CX-Programmer to share Index Registers
between tasks. This setting will be enabled uniformly for all Index Regis-
ters and Data Registers.
Sharing Index Registers The following setting can be made from the PLC Properties Dialog Box on the
CX-Programmer to control sharing Index and Data Registers between tasks.
Monitoring Index Registers
It is possible to monitor Index Registers as follows:
To use the Programming Devices to monitor the final Index Register values for
each task, or to monitor the Index Register values using Host Link commands
or FINS commands, write a program to store Index Register values from each
task to another area (e.g., DM area) at the end of each task, and to read Index
Register values from the storage words (e.g., DM area) at the beginning of
each task. The values stored for each task in other areas (e.g., DM area) can
then be edited using the CX-Programmer, Host Link commands, or FINS
commands.
149
Data Registers Section 4-12
Note Be sure to use PLC memory addresses in Index Registers.
4-12 Data Registers
The sixteen Data Registers (DR0 to DR15) are used to offset the PLC mem-
ory addresses in Index Registers when addressing words indirectly.
The value in a Data Register can be added to the PLC memory address in an
Index Register to specify the absolute memory address of a bit or word in I/O
memory. Data Registers contain signed binary data, so the content of an
Index Register can be offset to a lower or higher address.
D1001 and D1000
stored in IR0
or
Actual memory address of
CIO 0 (0000C000 hex)
stored in IR0
Contents of IR0 stored in
D01001 and D01000
D02001 and D02000
stored in IR0
or
Actual memory address
CIO 5 (0000C005 hex)
stored in IR0
Contents of IR0 stored in
D02001 and D02000
Peripheral servicing
Read D01001
and D01000
Read D02001
and D02000
IR storage words for task 2
IR storage words for task 1
or
or
Task 1
Task 2
150
Data Registers Section 4-12
Normal instructions can be used to store data in Data Registers.
Forcing Bit Status Bits in Data Registers cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Examples The following examples show how Data Registers are used to offset the PLC
memory addresses in Index Registers.
LD DR0 ,IR0 Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR0 and loads the bit at that PLC mem-
ory address.
MOV(021) #0001 DR0 ,IR1 Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR1 and writes #0001 to that PLC
memory address.
Range of Values The contents of data registers are treated as signed binary data and thus
have a range of 32,768 to 32,767.
Data Register Initialization The Data Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF
2. When the power is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not protected in
the PLC Setup
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold Bit (A500.12) is ON, the Data Registers wont be cleared
when a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM
mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A500.12) is ON and the PLC Setups IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the Data Registers wont
be cleared when the PLCs power supply is reset (ON OFF ON).
Precautions Data Registers are normally local to each task. For example, DR0 used in
task 1 is different from DR0 used in task 2. (A PLC Setup setting can be made
from the CX-Programmer to share Data Registers between tasks.)
The content of Data Registers cannot be accessed (read or written) from the
CX-Programmer.
Do not use Data Registers until a value has been set in the register. The reg-
isters operation will be unreliable if they are used without setting their values.
The values in Data Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt
task. When a Data Register will be used in an interrupt task, always set a
value in the Data Register before using the register in that task.
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).
Set with a regular
instruction.
Pointer
I/O Memory
Hexadecimal content Decimal equivalent
8000 to FFFF 32,768 to 1
0000 to 7FFF 0 to 32,767
151
Task Flags Section 4-13
4-13 Task Flags
Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31. A
Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasnt been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Note These flags indicate the status of cyclic tasks only, they do not reflect the sta-
tus of interrupt tasks.
Task Flag Initialization The Task Flags will be cleared in the following cases, regardless of the status
of the IOM Hold Bit.
RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa
2. When the power is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status The Task Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
4-14 Condition Flags
These flags include the Arithmetic Flags, such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag, which indicate the results of instruction execution.
The Condition Flags are specified with symbols, such as P_CY and P_ER,
rather than addresses. The status of these flags reflects the results of instruc-
tion execution, but the flags are read-only; they cannot be written directly from
instructions or the CX-Programmer.
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
All Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the sta-
tus of the ER and AER flags are maintained only in the task in which the error
occurred.
Forcing Bit Status The Condition Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Summary of the Condition
Flags
The following table summarizes the functions of the Condition Flags, although
the functions of these flags will vary slightly from instruction to instruction.
Refer to the description of the instruction for complete details on the operation
of the Condition Flags for a particular instruction.
Name Symbol Function
Error Flag P_ER Turned ON when the operand data in an instruction is incorrect (an
instruction processing error) to indicate that an instruction ended
because of an error.
When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error
(Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be stopped and
the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A29508) will be turned ON
when the Error Flag is turned ON.
Access Error Flag P_AER Turned ON when an Illegal Access Error occurs. The Illegal Access
Error indicates that an instruction attempted to access an area of
memory that should not be accessed.
When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error
(Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be stopped and
the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A429510) will be turned ON
when the Access Error Flag is turned ON.
152
Condition Flags Section 4-14
Using the Condition Flags The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, so their status may
change often in a single cycle. Be sure to read the Condition Flags immedi-
ately after the execution of instruction, preferably in a branch from the same
execution condition.
Since the Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, program oper-
ation can be changed from its expected course by interruption of a single task.
Be sure to consider the effects of interrupts when writing the program. Refer
to SECTION 2 Programming of CS/CJ Series Programming Manual (W394)
for more details.
The Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the sta-
tus of a Condition Flag cannot be passed to another task. For example the
status of a flag in task 1 cannot be read in task 2.
Carry Flag P_CY Turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic opera-
tion or a 1 is shifted to the Carry Flag by a Data Shift instruction.
The Carry Flag is part of the result of some Data Shift and Symbol
Math instructions.
Greater Than Flag P_GT Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than the second or a value exceeds a specified range.
Equals Flag P_EQ Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
equal the result of a calculation is 0.
Less Than Flag P_LT Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than the second or a value is below a specified range.
Negative Flag P_N Turned ON when the most significant bit (sign bit) of a result is ON.
Overflow Flag P_OF Turned ON when the result of calculation overflows the capacity of the
result word(s).
Underflow Flag P_UF Turned ON when the result of calculation underflows the capacity of
the result word(s).
Greater Than or
Equals Flag
P_GE Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than or equal to the second.
Not Equal Flag P_NE Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
not equal.
Less Than or
Equals Flag
P_LE Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than or equal to the second.
Always ON Flag P_On Always ON. (Always 1.)
Always OFF Flag P_Off Always OFF. (Always 0.)
Name Symbol Function
=
Instruction A
The result from instruction A is
reflected in the Equals Flag.
Instruction B
Instruction
LD
Instruction A
AND
Instruction B
Operand
Condition Flag,
e.g., =
153
Clock Pulses Section 4-15
Saving and Loading Condition Flag Status
The CP1-H CPU Units support instructions to save and load the Condition
Flag status (CCS(282) and CCL(283)). These can be used to access the sta-
tus of the Condition Flags at other locations in a task or in a different task.
The following example shows how the Equals Flag is used at a different loca-
tion in the same task.
4-15 Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are flags that are turned ON and OFF at regular intervals by
the system.
The Clock Pulses are specified with symbols rather than addresses.
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
CMP
CCS
CCL

Instruction A
Instruction B
Stores result of comparison in the Condition Flags.
This will enable loading the results to use with
Instruction B.
The result of the comparison instruction in the
Equals Flag can be used by Instruction B without
interference from Instruction A.
Loads the statuses of the Conditions Flags that
were stored.
Saves status of Condition Flags.
Task
Name Symbol Operation
0.02 s Clock Pulse P_0_02_s ON for 0.01 s
OFF for 0.01 s
0.1 s Clock Pulse P_0_1s ON for 0.05 s
OFF for 0.05 s
0.2 s Clock Pulse P_0_2s ON for 0.1 s
OFF for 0.1 s
1 s Clock Pulse P_1s ON for 0.5 s
OFF for 0.5 s
1 min Clock Pulse P_1min ON for 30 s
OFF for 30 s
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
30 s
30 s
154
Clock Pulses Section 4-15
The Clock Pulses are read-only; they cannot be overwritten from instructions
or the CX-Programmer.
The Clock Pulses are cleared at the start of operation.
Using the Clock Pulses The following example turns CIO 100.00 ON and OFF at 0.5 s intervals.
1 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
100.00
100.00
OUT
LD 1 s
100.00
Instruction Operand
155
SECTION 5
Pulse and Counter Functions
This section describes the CP1Ls interrupt and high-speed counter functions.
5-1 High-speed Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
5-1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
5-1-2 High-speed Counter Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5-1-3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
5-1-4 PLC Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5-1-5 High-speed Counter Terminal Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
5-1-6 Pulse Input Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5-1-7 Ladder Program Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
5-1-8 Additional Capabilities and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
5-2 Pulse Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5-2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5-2-2 Pulse Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5-2-3 Pulse Output Terminal Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5-2-4 Pulse Output Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
5-2-5 Origin Search and Origin Return Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
5-2-6 Origin Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5-2-7 Pulse Output Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5-2-8 Instructions Used for Pulse Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
5-2-9 Variable Duty Factor Pulse Outputs (PWM(891) Outputs) . . . . . . . 227
5-2-10 Example Pulse Output Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
5-3 Inverter Positioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
5-3-1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
5-3-2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
5-3-3 Functional Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
5-3-4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
5-3-5 Application Procedure for Inverter Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
5-3-6 Instruction Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
5-3-7 Determining the Internal Pulse Output Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5-3-8 PLC Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
5-3-9 Automatic Calculation of Inverter Frequency Command Value. . . . 280
5-3-10 Memory Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
5-3-11 Application Example with Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
5-3-12 Application Example with an Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
5-3-13 Supplemental Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
156
High-speed Counters Section 5-1
5-1 High-speed Counters
5-1-1 Overview
A rotary encoder can be connected to a built-in input to produce a high-
speed pulse input.
The PRV(881) instruction can be used to measure the input pulse fre-
quency (one input only).
The high-speed counter PVs can be maintained or refreshed.
The High-speed Counter Gate Bit can be turned ON/OFF from the ladder
program to select whether the high-speed counter PVs will be maintained
or refreshed.
Any one of the following input signals can be selected as the counter input
mode.
Response Frequencies for 24 VDC Inputs to High-speed Counters 0 and 1:
Differential phase inputs (4x): 50 kHz
Pulse + direction inputs: 100 kHz
Up/Down pulse inputs: 100 kHz
Increment pulse inputs: 100 kHz
Response Frequencies of CP1L-J show below:
Differential phase inputs (4x): 10 kHz
Pulse + direction inputs: 20 kHz
Up/Down pulse inputs: 20 kHz
Increment pulse inputs: 20 kHz
The counting mode can be set to linear mode or circular (ring) mode.
The counter reset method can be set to Z phase signal + software reset,
software reset, Z phase signal + software reset (continue comparing), or
software reset (continue comparing).
Pulse Input Functions
Purpose Function used Description
Receive incremental rotary
encoder inputs to calculate
length or position.
High-speed counter
function
Built-in input terminals can be used for high-speed counter
inputs.
The PV for the high-speed counters are stored in the Auxiliary
Area.
The counters can be operated in ring mode or linear mode.
Measure a workpiece's length
or position.
(Start counting when a certain
condition is established or
pause counting when a certain
condition is established.)
High-speed Counter
Gate Bit
The high-speed counter can be started or stopped (PV held)
from the Unit's program by turning ON/OFF the High-speed
Counter Gate Bit when the desired condition is met.
Measure a workpiece's speed
from its position data (frequency
measurement.)
PRV(881) HIGH-
SPEED COUNTER
PV READ
The PRV(881) instruction can be used to measure the pulse fre-
quency.
Range with differential phase inputs: 0 to 50 kHz (Y models: 0
to 500 kHz, J models: 0 to 10 kHz)
Range with all other input modes: 0 to 100 kHz (Y models: 0 to
1 MHz, J models: 0 to 20 kHz)
PRV2(883) PULSE
FREQUENCY CON-
VERT
PRV2(883) reads the pulse frequency and converts it to a rota-
tional speed (r/min) or it converts the counter PV to a total num-
ber of rotations. Results are calculated by the number of pulses/
rotation.
157
5-1-2 High-speed Counter Specifications
Specifications
Item Specification
Number of high-speed counters 2 (High-speed counters 0 and 1) 4 (High-speed
counters 0 to 3)
Pulse input modes (Selected in the PLC
Setup)
Differential phase
inputs
Up/down inputs Pulse + direction
inputs
Increment inputs
Input terminal allocation Phase-A input Increment pulse
input
Pulse input Increment pulse
input
Phase-B input Decrement pulse
input
Direction input ---
Phase-Z input Reset input Reset input Reset input
Input method Differential phase,
4x
(Fixed)
Two single-phase
inputs
Single-phase
pulse + direction
inputs
Single-phase
input
Response frequency 50 kHz
(J models: 10 kHz)
100 kHz
(J models: 20 kHz)
100 kHz
(J models: 20 kHz)
100 kHz
(J models: 20 kHz)
Counting mode Linear mode or circular (ring) mode (Select in the PLC Setup.)
Count values Linear mode: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
Ring mode: 0000 0000 to Ring SV
(The Ring SV (Circular Max. Count) is set in the PLC Setup and the setting
range is 00000001 to FFFFFFFF hex.)
High-speed counter PV storage locations High-speed counter 0: A271 (leftmost 4 digits) and A270 (rightmost 4 digits)
High-speed counter 1: A273 (leftmost 4 digits) and A272 (rightmost 4 digits)
Target value comparison interrupts or range comparison interrupts can be
executed based on these PVs.
Note The PVs are refreshed in the overseeing processes at the start of each
cycle. Use PRV(881) to read the most recent PVs.
Data format: 8 digit hexadecimal
Range in linear mode: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
Range in ring mode: 0000 0000 to Ring SV (Circular Max. Count)
Control
method
Target value comparison Up to 48 target values and corresponding interrupt task numbers can be reg-
istered.
Range comparison Up to 8 ranges can be registered, with a separate upper limit, lower limit, and
interrupt task number for each range.
Counter reset method Select one of the following methods in the PLC Setup.
Phase-Z + Software reset
The counter is reset when the phase-Z input goes ON while the Reset Bit is
ON.
Software reset
The counter is reset when the Reset Bit goes ON.
(Set the counter reset method in the PLC Setup.)
Note Operation can be set to stop or continue the comparison operation
when the high-speed counter is reset.
158
Auxiliary Area Data
Allocation
Counter Input Modes
Differential Phase Mode
(4x)
The differential phase mode uses two phase signals (phase A and phase B)
and increments/decrements the count according to the status of these two
signals.
Conditions for Incrementing/Decrementing the Count
Pulse + Direction Mode The pulse + direction mode uses a direction signal input and pulse signal
input. The count is incremented or decremented depending on the status (ON
or OFF) of the direction signal.
Function High-speed counter number
0 1 2 3
PV storage words Leftmost 4 digits A271 A273 A317 A319
Rightmost 4 digits A270 A272 A316 A318
Range Comparison Con-
dition Met Flags
Range 1 Comparison Condition Met Flag A274.00 A275.00 A320.00 A321.00
Comparison In-progress
Flags
ON when a comparison operation is being exe-
cuted for the high-speed counter.
A274.08 A275.08 A320.08 A321.08
Overflow/Underflow Flags ON when an overflow or underflow has
occurred in the high-speed counters PV.
(Used only when the counting mode is set to
Linear Mode.)
A274.09 A275.09 A320.09 A321.09
Count Direction Flags 0: Decrementing
1: Incrementing
A274.10 A275.10 A320.10 A321.10
11 12 11 10 10 9 9 8 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 0
Phase-A
Phase-B
Count
Phase A Phase B Count value
L Increment
H Increment
H Increment
L Increment
L Decrement
H Decrement
H Decrement
L Decrement
2 2

1

1

0

0

7 6 8 7 6 5 5

4 4 3 3

Pulse
Direction
159
The count is incremented when the direction signal is ON and decre-
mented when it is OFF.
Only up-differentiated pulses (rising edges) can be counted.
Up/Down Mode The up/down mode uses two signals, an increment pulse input and a decre-
ment pulse input.
The count is incremented for each increment pulse input and decre-
mented for each decrement pulse input.
Increment Mode The increment mode counts single-phase pulse signal inputs. This mode only
increments the count.
Direction
signal
Pulse
signal
Count value
L No change
H Increment
H No change
L No change
L Decrement
H No change
H No change
L No change
2 2 1 1 0 0 7 6 8 7 6 5 5 4 4 3 3
Increment pulse
Decrement pulse
Decrement
pulse
Increment
pulse
Count value
L Decrement
H Increment
H No change
L No change
L Increment
H Decrement
H No change
L No change
14 2 15 1 16

0 9 10 8 7 6 11 5 12 4 13 3
Pulse
Pulse Count value
Increment
H No change
No change
L No change
160
Note The count of the high-speed counter can be monitored to see if it is currently
being incremented or decremented. The count in the current cycle is com-
pared with the count in the previous cycle to determine if it is being incre-
mented or decremented. The results are reflected in the High-speed Counter
Count Direction Flags (A274.10 for high-speed counter 0, A275.10 for high-
speed Counter 1, A320.10 for high-speed counter 2, and A321.10 for high-
speed counter 3.)
Counting Modes
Linear Mode Input pulses can be counted in the range between the lower limit and upper
limit values. If the pulse count goes beyond the lower/upper limit, an under-
flow/overflow will occur and counting will stop.
Lower and Upper Limits of the Range
The following diagrams show the lower limit and upper limit values for incre-
ment mode and up/down mode.
Circular (Ring) Mode Input pulses are counted in a loop within the set range. The loop operates as
follows:
If the count is incremented from the max. ring count, the count will be
reset to 0 automatically and incrementing will continue.
If the count is decremented from 0, the count will be set to the max. ring
count automatically and decrementing will continue.
Consequently, underflows and overflows cannot occur when ring mode is
used.
Max. Ring Count
Use the PLC Setup to set the max. ring count (Circular Max. Count), which is
the max. value of the input pulse counting range. The max. ring count can be
set to any value between 00000001 and FFFFFFFF hex.

4294967295
(FFFFFFFF hex)
2147483648
(80000000 hex)
0
(00000000 hex)
+2147483647
(7FFFFFFF hex)
PV overflow
Increment Mode
Up/Down Mode
PV underflow PV overflow
0
(000000 hex)
2
32
1
0
Count value
Max. ring
count
161
Restrictions
There are no negative values in ring mode.
If the max. ring count is set to 0 in the PLC Setup, the counter will operate
with a max. ring count of FFFFFFFF hex.
Reset Methods
Phase-Z Signal + Software
Reset
The high-speed counter's PV is reset when the phase-Z signal (reset input)
goes from OFF to ON while the corresponding High-speed Counter Reset Bit
is ON.
The CPU Unit recognizes the ON status of the High-speed Counter Reset Bit
only at the beginning of the PLC cycle during the overseeing processes. Con-
sequently, when the Reset Bit is turned ON in the ladder program, the phase-
Z signal does not become effective until the next PLC cycle.
Software Reset The high-speed counter's PV is reset when the corresponding High-speed
Counter Reset Bit goes from OFF to ON.
The CPU Unit recognizes the OFF-to-ON transition of the High-speed
Counter Reset Bit only at the beginning of the PLC cycle during the oversee-
ing processes. Reset processing is performed at the same time. The OFF-to-
ON transition will not be recognized if the Reset Bit goes OFF again within the
same cycle.
Note The comparison operation can be set to stop or continue when a high-speed
counter is reset. This enables applications where the comparison operation
can be restarted from a counter PV of 0 when the counter is reset.
One cycle
Phase-Z
Reset Bit
PV not
reset
PV not
reset
PV
reset
PV
reset
PV
reset
PV
reset
One cycle
Reset Bit
PV not
reset
PV
reset
PV not
reset
PV not
reset
162
5-1-3 Procedure
Select high-speed counter 0 to 3.
Select the pulse input method, reset
method, and counting range.
Select the kind of interrupt (if any).
Wire inputs.
PLC Setup settings
Ladder program
Pulse input methods: Differential phase (4x),
Pulse + direction, Up/Down, or Increment
Reset methods: Phase-Z + Software reset, Software reset,
Phase-Z + Software reset (continuing comparing),
Software reset (continuing comparing)
Counting ranges: Linear mode or Ring mode
Enable/disable interrupts
Target value comparison interrupt
Range comparison interrupt
Connect to the terminals (24 VDC input or line-driver)
High-speed Counters 0 to 3 Enable/Disable:
High-speed Counters 0 to 3Pulse Input Mode:
Differential phase (4x)
Pulse + direction
Up/Down
Increment
High-speed Counters 0 to 3 Reset Method:
Phase-Z + Software reset, Software reset, Phase-Z + Software
reset (continuing comparing), Software reset (continuing
comparing)
High-speed Counters 0 to 3 Counting Mode:
Linear mode
Ring mode
Program the interrupt task (with any interrupt number between 0
and 255) to be executed when using a target value comparison
or range comparison interrupts.
Register a target value comparison table and start the
comparison.
Register a range comparison table and start the comparison.
Register a target value comparison table without starting the
comparison.
Register a range comparison table without starting the
comparison.
Change the counter PV.
Start comparison with the registered target value comparison
table or range comparison table.
Read the high-speed counter PVs, read the status of the high-
speed counter comparison operation, or read the range-
comparison results.
Turn ON the High-speed Counter Gate Bit to stop counting input
pulses.
High-speed counters 0 to 3: 24 VDC input,
Response frequency: 50 kHz for single-phase, 100 kHz for
differential phase
163
5-1-4 PLC Setup
The settings for high-speed counters 0 to 3 are located in the Built-in Input
Tab of the CX-Programmers PLC Settings Window.
Settings in the Built-
in Input Tab
Item Setting
Use high speed counter 0 to 3 Use counter
Counting mode Linear mode
Circular mode (ring mode)
Circular Max. Count
(max. ring count)
0 to 4,294,967,295 (0 to FFFF FFFF hex)
Reset method Phase Z and software reset
Software reset
Phase Z and software reset (continue comparing)
Software reset (continue comparing)
Input Setting Differential phase inputs (4x)
Pulse + direction inputs
Up/Down inputs
Increment pulse input
164
5-1-5 High-speed Counter Terminal Allocation
The following diagrams show the input terminals that can be used for high-
speed counters in each CPU Unit.
Differential Phases, Up/
Down, or Pulse + Direction
Input Terminal Arrangement for CPU Units with 14 I/O Points
Upper Terminal Block
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
High-speed counter 0
(Phase A, Increment, or
Count input)
(Phase B, Decrement, or
Direction input)
(Phase Z or Reset input)
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
00 02 04 06 NC NC
Count input)
Direction input)
Count input)
Count input)
Direction input)
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10

Direction input)
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
Count input)
Count input)
Direction input)
Direction input)
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
L1 L2/ N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 NC
165
Increment Pulse Inputs Input Terminal Arrangement for CPU Units with 14 I/O Points
COM L1 L2/N 01
00 02 04
03 05 07
06
09
08
11
10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Count input)
Count input)
Direction input)
Direction input)
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
COM L2/N 01
00 02 04
03 05 07
06
L1
(Increment)
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
NC NC
NC NC
(Increment)
(Increment)
(Increment)
COM L1 L2/N 01
00 02 04
03 05 07
06
09
08
11
10
(Increment)
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
(Increment)
(Increment)
(Increment)
COM L1 L2/N 01
00 02 04
03 05 07
06
09
08
11
10
01 03 05
00 02 04 NC
(Increment)
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
(Increment)
(Increment)
(Increment)
166
Input Terminal Arrangement for CPU Units with 40 I/O Point
Input Function Settings in the PLC Setup
The CPU Units built-in inputs can be set for use as high-speed counter inputs
in the PLC Setups Built-in Input Tab using the CX-Programmer. (When an
input is set for use as a high-speed counter input, the corresponding words
and bits cannot be used for general-purpose (normal) inputs, input interrupts,
or quick-response inputs.)
CPU Units with 14 I/O Points
COM L1 L2/N 01
00 02 04
03 05 07
06
09
08
11
10
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
(Increment)
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
(Increment)
(Increment)
(Increment)
Input terminal
block
Default setting High-speed counter operation setting Origin search
setting
Word Bit Single-phase
(increment pulse input)
phases x4, up/down, or
pulse/direction)
CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 High-speed counter 0
(Increment)
Count input)
---
01 Normal input 1 High-speed counter 1
(Increment)
Direction input)
---
(Increment)
Count input)
Pulse output 0:
Origin proximity input
signal
(Increment)
Direction input)
Pulse output 1:
signal
(Phase Z or reset input)
---
---
--- Pulse output 0:
Origin input signal
--- Pulse output 1:
Origin input signal
167
CPU Units with 20, 30, 04 40 I/O Points
Input terminal
block
setting
Word Bit CPU Units
with 40 I/O
Points
CPU Units
with 30 I/O
Points
CPU Units
with 20 I/O
Points
Single-phase
(increment pulse
input)
Two-phase
(differential phases
x4, up/down, or
pulse/direction)
CIO 0 00 Normal
input 0
Normal
input 0
Normal
input 0
High-speed counter
0 (Increment)
High-speed counter
0 (Phase A, Incre-
ment, or Count
input)
---
01 Normal
input 1
Normal
input 1
Normal
input 1
High-speed counter
1 (Increment)
High-speed counter
0 (Phase B, Decre-
ment, or Direction
input)
---
02 Normal
input 2
Normal
input 2
Normal
input 2
High-speed counter
2 (Increment)
High-speed counter
1 (Phase A, Incre-
ment, or Count
input)
---
03 Normal
input 3
Normal
input 3
Normal
input 3
High-speed counter
3 (Increment)
High-speed counter
0 (Phase B, Decre-
ment, or Direction
input)
---
04 Normal
input 4
Normal
input 4
Normal
input 4
High-speed counter
0 (Phase Z or reset
input)
High-speed counter
0 (Phase Z or reset
input)
---
05 Normal
input 5
Normal
input 5
Normal
input 5
High-speed counter
1 (Phase Z or reset
input)
High-speed counter
1 (Phase Z or reset
input)
---
06 Normal
input 6
Normal
input 6
Normal
input 6
High-speed counter
2 (Phase Z or reset
input)
--- Pulse output 0:
Origin input sig-
nal
07 Normal
input 7
Normal
input 7
Normal
input 7
High-speed counter
3 (Phase Z or reset
input)
--- Pulse output 1:
Origin input sig-
nal
08 Normal
input 8
Normal
input 8
Normal
input 8
--- --- ---
09 Normal
input 9
Normal
input 9
Normal
input 9
--- --- ---
10 Normal
input 10
Normal
input 10
Normal
input 10
--- --- Pulse output 0:
Origin proximity
input signal
11 Normal
input 11
Normal
input 11
Normal
input 11
Origin proximity
input signal
CIO 1 00 to
05
Normal
input 12 to
17
Normal
input 12 to
17
--- --- --- ---
06 to
11
Normal
input 23 to
17
--- --- --- --- ---
168
5-1-6 Pulse Input Connection Examples
Encoders with 24 VDC Open-collector Outputs
This example shows how to connect an encoder that has phase-A, phase-B,
and phase-Z outputs.
5-1-7 Ladder Program Example
Inspecting a Dimension by
Counting Pulse Inputs
This example is for a CPU Unit with 40 I/O Points.
High-speed counter 0 is used.
When the edge of the workpiece is detected, the counter PV is reset by a
phase-Z pulse.
The workpiece is passes inspection if the final count is between 30,000
and 30,300, otherwise the workpiece fails.
If the workpiece passes, output CIO 100.00 is turned ON by an interrupt
and the indicator PL1 is lit. If the workpiece fails, output CIO 100.01 is
turned ON by an interrupt and indicator PL2 is lit.
The interrupt program is interrupt task 10.
X/XA CPU Unit
Phase A
Black
Phase B
White
Phase Z Orange
+Vcc Brown
0 V
(COM)
Blue
24-VDC power supply
0 V
+24 V
Encoder
(Power: 24 VDC)
Example: E6B2-CWZ6C
(NPN open-collector
output)
0.00 (High-speed counter 0: Phase A, 0 V)
(Differential Input Mode)
0.01 (High-speed counter 0: Phase B, 0 V)
0.04
COM
(High-speed counter 0: Phase Z, 0 V)
(COM 24 V)
0.00
0.01
0.04
COM
0 V
24 V
Power
0 V Encoder
Power supply

Shielded twisted-pair cable
(Do not use the same power supply as for other I/O.)
IA
IB
IZ
Phase A
Phase B
Phase Z
+
CPU Unit
169
I/O Allocations
Input Terminals
Note The high-speed counter inputs are enabled when the Use high speed counter
0 Option is selected in the PLC Setups Built-in Input Tab.
Output Terminals
Auxiliary Area Addresses for High-speed Counter 0
Range Comparison Table
The range comparison table is stored in D10000 to D10039.
PLC Setup
Select the Use high speed counter 0 Option in the PLC Setups Built-in Input
Tab.
Input terminal Usage
Word Bit
CIO 0 00 High-speed counter 0 phase-A input (See note.)
01 High-speed counter 0 phase-B input (See note.)
02 Start measurement by pushbutton switch (normal input).
03 Detect trailing edge of measured object (normal input).
04 Detect leading edge of measured object for high-speed counter 0
phase-Z/reset input (see note). Bit status is reflected in A531.00.
05 to 11 Not used. (normal input)
CIO 1 00 to 11 Not used. (normal input)
Output terminal Usage
Word Bit
CIO 100 00 Normal input PL1: Dimension pass output
01 Normal input PL2: Dimension fail output
02 to 07 Normal input Not used.
CIO 101 00 to 07 Normal input Not used.
Function Address
PV storage words Leftmost 4 digits A271
Rightmost 4 digits A270
Range Comparison
Condition Met Flag
Range 1 Comparison Condition Met Flag A274.00
Comparison In-
progress Flag
ON when a comparison operation is being exe-
cuted for the high-speed counter.
A274.08
Overflow/Underflow
Flag
ON when an overflow or underflow has occurred
in the high-speed counters PV. (Used only when
the counting mode is set to Linear Mode.)
A274.09
Count Direction Flag 0: Decrementing
1: Incrementing
A274.10
Reset Bit Used for the PV software reset. A531.00
High-speed Counter
Gate Bit
When ON, the counter's PV will not be changed
even if pulse inputs are received for the counter.
A531.08
Item Setting
High-speed counter 0 Use high speed counter 0
Circular Max. Count ---
Reset method Software reset
Input Setting Up/Down inputs
170
I/O Wiring
Input Wiring
Output Wiring
Range Comparison Table Settings
The inspection standards data is set in the DM Area with the CX-Programmer.
Even though range 1 is the only range being used, all 40 words must still be
dedicated to the range comparison table.
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
W
o
r
k
p
i
e
c
e

e
n
d
d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
H
i
g
h
-
s
p
e
e
d

c
o
u
n
t
e
r

0

(
p
h
a
s
e

Z
)
W
o
r
k
p
i
e
c
e

s
t
a
r
t

d
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n
H
i
g
h
-
s
p
e
e
d

c
o
u
n
t
e
r

0

(
p
h
a
s
e

B
)
Measurement
start switch

H
i
g
h
-
s
p
e
e
d

c
o
u
n
t
e
r

0

(
p
h
a
s
e

A
)
(Example: AC Power
Supply Modules)
+
00 01 06
COM
05 07
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 100
CIO 101
PL1: OK indicator
PL2: NG indicator
Bottom
terminal block

PL1 PL2
COM COM COM
COM COM
03
02
04 06 01 02 03 04 00
05 07
Word Setting Function
D10000 7430 Rightmost 4 digits of range 1 lower limit Lower limit value:
30,000
D10001 0000 Leftmost 4 digits of range 1 lower limit
D10002 765C Rightmost 4 digits of range 1 upper limit Upper limit value:
30,300
D10003 0000 Leftmost 4 digits of range 1 upper limit
D10004 000A Range 1 interrupt task number = 10 (A hex)
D10005 to
D10008
All 0000 Range 2 lower and upper limit values
(Not used and dont need to be set.)
Range 2 settings
D10009 FFFF Disables range 2.
~
171
Creating the Ladder Program
Programming in Cyclic Task
Use CTBL(882) to start the comparison operation with high-speed counter 0
and interrupt task 10.
Programming in Interrupt Task 10
Create the processing performed by interrupt task 10.
5-1-8 Additional Capabilities and Restrictions
Restrictions on High-
speed Counter Inputs
The Phase-Z signal + Software reset method cannot be used when the
high speed counters are operating in Differential Phase or Pulse + Direc-
tion Input Modes and the origin search function is enabled for the pulse
output (in the PLC Setup). The Phase-Z signal + Software reset method
can be used when the high speed counters are operating in Incrementing
or Up/Down Input Modes.
When a high-speed counter is being used (enabled in the PLC Setup), the
input cannot be used as a general-purpose (normal) input, interrupt input,
or quick-response input.
D10014
D10019
D10024
D10029
D10034
FFFF Set the fifth word for ranges 3 to 7 (listed at left) to FFFF to dis-
able those ranges.
:
D10035 to
D10038
All 0000 Range 8 lower and upper limit values
Range 8 settings
D10039 FFFF Disables range 8.
@CTBL(882)
#0000
#0001
D10000
0.01
W0.00
A531.00
W0.00
W0.01
W0.01
A531.00 W0.00
Use high-speed counter 0.
First comparison table word
Register a range comparison table and
start comparison operation.
0.00 (Measurement start input)
W0.01
END(001)
100.00 (Pass inspection: PL1 indicator)
A274.00 (in range)
A274.00 (in range)
100.01 (Fail inspection: PL2 indicator)
172
Starting Interrupt Tasks based on Comparison Conditions
Data registered in advance in a comparison table can be compared with the
actual counter PVs during operation. The specified interrupt tasks (registered
in the table) will be started when the corresponding comparison condition is
met.
There are two comparison methods available: Target value comparison and
range comparison.
Use the CTBL(882) instruction to register the comparison table.
Use either the CTBL(882) instruction or INI(880) instruction to start the
comparison operation.
Use the INI(880) instruction to stop the comparison operation.
Target Value Comparison The specified interrupt task is executed when the high-speed counter PV
matches a target value registered in the table.
The comparison conditions (target values and counting directions) are
registered in the comparison table along with the corresponding interrupt
task number. The specified interrupt task will be executed when the high-
speed counter PV matches the registered target value.
Up to 48 target values (between 1 and 48) can be registered in the com-
parison table.
A different interrupt task can be registered for each target value.
The target value comparison is performed on all of the target values in the
table, regardless of the order in which the target values are registered.
If the PV is changed, the changed PV will be compared with the target
values in the table, even if the PV is changed while the target value com-
parison operation is in progress.
Restrictions
A comparison condition (target value and count direction) cannot appear in
the table more than once. An error will occur if a comparison condition is
specified two or more times.
Note When the count direction (incrementing/decrementing) changes at a PV that
matches a target value, the next target value cannot be matched in that direc-
tion.
No. 001 No. 015 No. 000 No. 020
High-speed counter PV
Comparison is
executed without
regard to the order
of the values in the
table.
Target value 1
Target value 2
Target value 3
Target value 4
Interrupt task that is started.
Time
Comparison table
Number of values = 4
Target value 1 (Incrementing)
Interrupt task = 000
Target value 3 (Decrementing)
173
Set the target values so that they do not occur at the peak or trough of count
value changes.
Range Comparison The specified interrupt task is executed when the high-speed counter PV is
within the range defined by the upper and lower limit values.
The comparison conditions (upper and lower limits of the range) are regis-
tered in the comparison table along with the corresponding interrupt task
number. The specified interrupt task will be executed once when the high-
speed counter PV is in the range (Lower limit PV Upper limit).
A total of 8 ranges (upper and lower limits) are registered in the compari-
son table.
The ranges can overlap.
A different interrupt task can be registered for each range.
The counter PV is compared with the 8 ranges once each cycle.
The interrupt task is executed just once when the comparison condition
goes from unmet to met.
Restrictions
When more than one comparison condition is met in a cycle, the first interrupt
task in the table will be executed in that cycle. The next interrupt task in the
table will be executed in the next cycle.
Note The range comparison table can be used without starting an interrupt task
when the comparison condition is met. The range comparison function can be
useful when you just want to know whether or not the high-speed counter PV
is within a particular range.
Use the Range Comparison Condition Met Flags to determine whether the
high-speed counter PV is within a registered range.
Pausing Input Signal Counting (Gate Function)
If the High-speed Counter Gate Bit is turned ON, the corresponding high-
speed counter will not count even if pulse inputs are received and the counter
PV will be maintained at its current value. Bits A53108 to A53111 are the
High-speed Counter Gate Bits for high-speed counters 0 to 3.
Target value 1
Target value 2
Target value 1
Target value 2
Match not recognized.
Match
Match
Match
No. 255 No. 000 No. 000 No. 255
High-speed counter PV
Comparison is executed
without regard to the
order of the ranges in
the table.
Upper limit 1
Lower limit 1
Upper limit 2
Lower limit 2
Interrupt task that is started.
Time
Comparison table
Upper limit 1
Lower limit 1
Upper limit 2
Lower limit 2
174
When the High-speed Counter Gate Bit is turned OFF again, the high-speed
counter will resume counting and the counter PV will be refreshed.
Restrictions The Gate Bit will be disabled if the high-speed counter's reset method is
set to Phase-Z signal + Software reset and the Reset Bit is ON (waiting
for the phase-Z input to reset the counter PV.)
High-speed Counter Frequency Measurement
This function measures the frequency of the high-speed counter (input
pulses.)
The input pulse frequency can be read by executing the PRV(881) instruction.
The measured frequency is output in 8-digit hexadecimal and expressed in
Hz. The frequency measurement function can be used with high-speed
counter 0 only.
The frequency can be measured while a high-speed counter 0 comparison
operation is in progress. Frequency measurement can be performed at the
same time as functions such as the high-speed counter and pulse output with-
out affecting the performance of those functions.
Procedure
1,2,3... 1. High-speed Counter Enable/Disable Setting (Required)
Select the Use high speed counter 0 Option in the PLC Setup.
2. Pulse Input Mode Setting (Required)
Set the High-speed Counter 0 Pulse Input Mode (Input Setting) in the PLC
Setup.
3. Counting Mode Setting (Required)
Set the High-speed Counter 0 Counting Mode in the PLC Setup.
If ring mode counting is selected, set the High-speed Counter 0 Circular
Max. Count (max. ring count) in the PLC Setup.
4. Reset Method Setting (Required)
Set the High-speed Counter 0 Reset Method in the PLC Setup.
5. PRV(881) Instruction Execution (Required)
N: Specify the high-speed counter number. (High-speed counter 0: 0010)
C: 0003 (Read frequency)
D: Destination word for frequency data
Restrictions The frequency measurement function can be used with high-speed
counter 0 only.
Specifications
Item Specifications
Number of frequency
measurement inputs
1 input (high-speed counter 0 only)
Frequency measurement
range
High-speed counter 0:
Differential phase inputs: 0 to 50 kHz
(J models: 0 to 10 kHz)
All other input modes: 0 to 100 kHz
(J models: 0 to 20 kHz)
Note: If the frequency exceeds the maximum value, the
maximum value will be stored.
Measurement method Execution of the PRV(881) instruction
Output data range Units: Hz
Range:
Differential phase input: 0000 0000 to 0003 0D40 hex
(Y models: 0000 0000 to 0007 A120 hex)
All other input modes: 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0 hex
(Y models: 0000 0000 to 000F 4240 hex)
175
Pulse Outputs Section 5-2
Pulse Frequency Conversion
The pulse frequency input to a high-speed counter can be converted to a rota-
tional speed (r/min) or the PV of the counter can be converted to the total
number of rotations. The converted value is output as 8-digit hexadecimal.
This function is supported only for high-speed counter 0.
FrequencyRotational Speed Conversion
The rotational speed in r/min is calculated from the pulse frequency input to a
high-speed counter and the number of pulses per rotation.
Counter PVTotal Number of Rotations Conversion
The total number of rotations is calculated from the present value of the
counter and the number of pulses per rotation.
Procedure
1,2,3... 1. High-speed Counter Enable/Disable Setting (Required)
Select the Use high speed counter 0 Option in the PLC Setup.
2. Pulse Input Mode Setting (Required)
Set the High-speed Counter 0 Pulse Input Mode (Input Setting) in the PLC
Setup.
3. Counting Mode Setting (Required)
Set the High-speed Counter 0 Counting Mode in the PLC Setup.
If ring mode counting is selected, set the Circular Max. Count (max. ring
count) in the PLC Setup.
4. Reset Method Setting (Required)
Set the High-speed Counter 0 Reset Method in the PLC Setup.
5. Execute PRV2(883) as described below (required).
Converting the Frequency to a Rotational Speed
Execute PRV2(883) with the following operands.
C: Control data (Set to 0000 for frequency-rotational speed conversion.)
P: Coefficient (pulses/rotation (hex))
D: First word for result
Converting the Counter PV to the Total Number of Rotations
Execute PRV2(883) with the following operands.
C: Control data (Set to 0001 for counter PV-total number of rotations con-
version.)
P: Coefficient (pulses/rotation (hex))
D: First word for result
Restrictions Pulse frequency conversion is possible only for high-speed counter 0.
5-2 Pulse Outputs
5-2-1 Overview
Fixed duty factor pulses can be output from the CPU Unit's built-in outputs to
perform positioning or speed control with a servo driver that accepts pulse
inputs.
CW/CCW Pulse Outputs or Pulse + Direction Outputs
The pulse output mode can be set to match the motor driver's pulse input
specifications.
176
Automatic Direction Selection for Easy Positioning with Absolute
Coordinates
When operating in absolute coordinates (origin defined or PV changed with
the INI(880) instruction), the CW/CCW direction will be selected automatically
when the pulse output instruction is executed. (The CW/CCW direction is
selected by determining whether the number of pulses specified in the
instruction is greater than or less than the pulse output PV.)
Triangular Control
Triangular control (trapezoidal control without a constant-speed plateau) will
be performed during positioning executed by an ACC(888) instruction (inde-
pendent) or PLS2(887) instruction if the number of output pulses required for
acceleration/deceleration exceeds the specified target pulse Output Amount.
Change Target Position during Positioning (Multiple Start)
When positioning was started with a PULSE OUTPUT (PLS2(887)) instruc-
tion and the positioning operation is still in progress, another PLS2(887)
instruction can be executed to change the target position, target speed, accel-
eration rate, and deceleration rate.
Switch from Speed Control to Positioning (Fixed Distance Feed Interrupt)
A PLS2(887) instruction can be executed during a speed control (continuous
mode) operation to change to positioning mode (independent mode). This
feature allows a fixed distance feed interrupt (moving a specified amount) to
be executed when specific conditions occur.
Change Target Speed and Acceleration/Deceleration Rate during
Acceleration or Deceleration
When trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration is being executed according to a
pulse output instruction (speed control or positioning), the target speed and
acceleration/deceleration rate can be changed during acceleration or deceler-
ation.
Use Variable Duty Factor Pulse Outputs for Lighting, Power Control, Etc.
The PULSE WITH VARIABLE DUTY FACTOR instruction (PWM(891)) can be
used to output variable duty factor pulses from the CPU Unit's built-in outputs
for applications such as lighting and power control.
Controlling Pulse Outputs
Purpose Function Description
Perform simple posi-
tioning by outputting
pulses to a motor driver
that accepts pulse-train
inputs.
Pulse output functions
Single-phase pulse output without
acceleration/deceleration
Controlled by SPED.
Single-phase pulse output with
acceleration/deceleration (equal
acceleration and deceleration
rates for trapezoidal form)
Controlled by ACC.
Single-phase pulse output with
trapezoidal acceleration/decelera-
tion (Supports a startup fre-
quency and different acceleration/
deceleration rates.)
Controlled by PLS2(887).
Built-in outputs can be used as pulse outputs 0 and 1.
Target frequency ranges: 1 Hz to 100 kHz (J models:
1 Hz to 20 kHz)
Duty factor: 50%
The pulse output mode can be set to CW/CCW pulse
control or Pulse plus direction control, but the same out-
put mode must be used for pulse outputs 0 and 1.
Note The pulse output PVs are stored in the Auxiliary
Area.
177
Perform origin search
and origin return opera-
tions.
Origin functions (Origin search and
origin return)
Origin search and origin return operations can be exe-
cuted through pulse outputs.
Origin search:
To start the origin search, set the PLC Setup to
enable the origin search operation, set the various
origin search parameters, and execute the ORIGIN
SEARCH instruction (ORG(889)). The Unit will deter-
mine the location of the origin based on the Origin
Proximity Input Signal and Origin Input Signal. The
coordinates of the pulse output's PV will automatically
be set as the absolute coordinates.
Origin return:
To return to the predetermined origin, set the various
origin return parameters and execute the ORIGIN
SEARCH instruction (ORG(889)).
Change the target posi-
tion during positioning.
(For example, perform
an emergency avoid
operation with the Multi-
ple Start feature.)
Positioning with the PLS2(887)
instruction
When a positioning operation started with the PULSE
OUTPUT (PLS2(887)) instruction is in progress, another
PLS2(887) instruction can be executed to change the
target position, target speed, acceleration rate, and
deceleration rate.
Change speed in steps
(polyline approxima-
tion) during speed con-
trol.
Use the ACC(888) instruction (con-
tinuous) to change the acceleration
rate or deceleration rate.
When a speed control operation started with the
ACC(888) instruction (continuous) is in progress,
another ACC(888) instruction (continuous) can be exe-
cuted to change the acceleration rate or deceleration
rate.
Change speed in steps
(polyline approxima-
tion) during positioning.
Use the ACC(888) instruction (inde-
pendent) or PLS2(887) to change the
acceleration rate or deceleration rate.
When a positioning operation started with the ACC(888)
instruction (independent) or PLS2(887) instruction is in
progress, another ACC(888) (independent) or
PLS2(887) instruction can be executed to change the
acceleration rate or deceleration rate.
Perform fixed distance
feed interrupt.
Execute positioning with the
PLS2(887) instruction during an
operation started with SPED(885)
(continuous) or ACC(888) (continu-
ous).
When a speed control operation started with the
SPED(885) instruction (continuous) or ACC(888)
instruction (continuous) is in progress, the PLS2(887)
instruction can be executed to switch to positioning, out-
put a fixed number of pulses, and stop.
After determining the
origin, perform position-
ing simply in absolute
coordinates without
regard to the direction
of the current position
or target position.
The positioning direction is selected
automatically in the absolute coordi-
nate system.
When operating in absolute coordinates (with the origin
determined or INI(880) instruction executed to change
the PV), the CW or CCW direction is selected automati-
cally based on the relationship between the pulse output
PV and the pulse Output Amount specified when the
pulse output instruction is executed.
Perform triangular con-
trol.
Positioning with the ACC(888)
instruction (independent) or
PLS2(887) instruction.
When a positioning operation started with the ACC(888)
instruction (independent) or PLS2(887) instruction is in
progress, triangular control (trapezoidal control without
the constant-speed plateau) will be performed if the
number of output pulses required for acceleration/decel-
eration exceeds the specified target pulse Output
Amount.
(The number of pulses required for acceleration/deceler-
ation equals the time required to reach the target fre-
quency x the target frequency.)
Use variable duty factor
outputs for time-propor-
tional temperature con-
trol.
Control with analog inputs and the
variable duty factor pulse output func-
tion (PWM(891)).
Two built-in outputs can be used as PWM(891) outputs 0
and 1 by executing the PWM(891) instruction.
Purpose Function Description
178
5-2-2 Pulse Output Specifications
Specifications
Pulse Output Modes
There are two pulse output modes. In independent mode the number of out-
put pulses is specified and in continuous mode the number of output pulses is
not specified.
Item Specifications
Output mode Continuous mode (for speed control) or independent mode (for position control)
Positioning (independent mode)
instructions
PULS(886) and SPED(885), PULS(886) and ACC(888), or PLS2(887)
Speed control (continuous mode)
instructions
SPED(885) or ACC(888)
Origin (origin search and origin
return) instructions
ORG(889)
Output frequency Pulse outputs 0, 1: 1 Hz to 100 kHz (1 Hz units)
(J models: 1 Hz to 20 kHz (1 Hz units))
Frequency acceleration and decel-
eration rates
Set in 1 Hz units for acceleration/deceleration rates from 1 Hz to 65,635 Hz (every 4
ms). The acceleration and deceleration rates can be set independently only with
PLS2(887).
Changing SVs during instruction
execution
The target frequency, acceleration/deceleration rate, and target position can be
changed.
Duty factor Fixed at 50%
Pulse output method CW/CCW inputs or Pulse + direction inputs
The method is selected with an instruction operand. The same method must be used
for pulse outputs 0 and 1.
Number of output pulses Relative coordinates: 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(Each direction accelerating or decelerating: 2,147,483,647)
Absolute coordinates: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(2147483648 to 2147483647)
Pulse output PV's relative/absolute
coordinate specification
Absolute coordinates are specified automatically when the origin location has been
determined by setting the pulse output PV with INI(880) or performing an origin
search with ORG(889). Relative coordinates are used when the origin location is
undetermined.
Relative pulse specification/
Absolute pulse specification
The pulse type can be specified with an operand in PULS(886) or PLS2(887).
Note The absolute pulse specification can be used when absolute coordinates are specified for
the pulse output PV, i.e. the origin location has been determined.
The absolute pulse specification cannot be used when relative coordinates are specified,
i.e. the origin location is undetermined. An instruction error will occur.
Pulse output PV's storage location The following Auxiliary Area words contain the pulse output PVs:
Pulse output 0: A277 (leftmost 4 digits) and A276 (rightmost 4 digits)
Pulse output 1: A279 (leftmost 4 digits) and A278 (rightmost 4 digits)
The PVs are refreshed during regular I/O refreshing.
Acceleration/deceleration curve
specification
Trapezoidal or S-curve acceleration/deceleration
Mode Description
Independent mode This mode is used for positioning.
Operation stops automatically when the preset num-
ber of pulses has been output. It is also possible to
stop the pulse output early with INI(880).
Continuous mode This mode is used for speed control.
The pulse output will continue until it is stopped by
executing another instruction or switching the PLC to
PROGRAM mode.
179
5-2-3 Pulse Output Terminal Allocations
The following diagrams show the terminals that can be used for pulse outputs
in each CPU Unit.

Lower Terminal Block
(Example: Transistor Outputs)
Pulse output 0 (CCW/direction/PWM output 0)
Pulse output 0 (CW/pulse)
CIO 100
Origin search 0
(Error counter reset output)
Origin search 1
NC
00 01 02
03
04 NC
COM COM COM
05
COM
NC
NC

CIO 100
Origin search 0
Origin search 1
NC
00 01 02
03
04 NC
COM COM COM
05
COM 06
07

CIO 100
Origin search 0 (Error counter reset output)
CIO 101
NC
00 01 02
03
04 NC
COM COM COM
05
COM
07
06
00 02
COM 01
03
180
Input Terminal Block Arrangements
Input
terminal
block
When the
instructions to
the right are not
executed
When a pulse output instruction
(SPED, ACC, PLS2, or ORG) is executed
When the origin search
function is enabled in
the PLC Setup, and an
origin search is
executed by the ORG
instruction
When the PWM
instruction is
executed
Word Bit Normal output Fixed duty factor pulse output Variable duty
factor pulse output
CW/CCW Pulse plus direction When the origin search
function is used
PWM output
CIO
100
00 Normal output 0 Pulse output 0 (CW)
fixed
Pulse output 0 (pulse)
fixed
--- ---
01 Normal output 1 Pulse output 0 (CCW)
fixed
Pulse output 0 (direction)
fixed
--- PWM output 0
02 Normal output 2 Pulse output 1 (CW)
fixed
Pulse output 1 (pulse)
fixed
--- ---
03 Normal output 3 Pulse output 1 (CCW)
fixed
Pulse output 1 (direction)
fixed
--- PWM output 1
04 Normal output 4 --- --- Origin search 0 (Error
counter reset output)
---
05 Normal output 5 --- --- Origin search 1 (Error
counter reset output)
---
06 Normal output 6 --- --- --- ---
07 Normal output 7 --- --- --- ---
CIO
101
00 to
07
Normal output 8
to 15
--- --- ---

CIO 100
CIO 101
NC
00 01 02 03 NC
COM COM COM
04
COM
06
02
00 01
COM 05 07
03 04 06
07 05 COM
(Example: DC Power
Supply Models)
Pulse 0: Origin proximity input signal

Pulse output 0: Origin input signal
COM 01 03 05 07
00 02 04 06 NC
+
NC NC
NC NC
181
(Example: DC Power
Supply Models)

COM 01 03 05 07
00 02 04 06 NC
+
09 11
NC 10

COM 01 03 05 07
00 02 04 06 NC
+
09 11
NC 10
01 03 05
00 02 04 NC
(Example: DC Power
Supply Models)
(Example: DC Power
Supply Models)
COM 01 03 05 07
00 02 04 06 NC
+
09 11
08 10
01 03 05
00 02 04
07 09 11
06 08 10
182
Input terminal
block
setting
(increment pulse input)
phases x4, up/down, or
pulse/direction)
CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 High-speed counter 0
(Increment)
Count input)
---
(Increment)
Direction input)
---
(Increment)
Count input)
Pulse output 0:
signal
(Increment)
Direction input)
Pulse output 1:
signal
---
---
--- Pulse output 0:
Origin input signal
--- Pulse output 1:
Origin input signal
183
CPU Units with 20, 30, or 40 I/O Points
Auxiliary Area Data Allocation
Input terminal
block
Default setting High-speed counter operation settings Origin search
setting
Word Bit CPU Units
with 40 I/O
Points
CPU Units
with 30 I/O
Points
CPU Units
with 20 I/O
Points
Single-phase
(increment pulse
input)
Two-phase
(differential phases
x4, up/down, or
pulse/direction)
CIO 0 00 Normal
input 0
Normal
input 0
Normal
input 0
High-speed counter
0 (Increment)
High-speed counter
0 (Phase A, Incre-
ment, or Count
input)
---
01 Normal
input 1
Normal
input 1
Normal
input 1
High-speed counter
1 (Increment)
High-speed counter
0 (Phase B, Decre-
ment, or Direction
input)
---
02 Normal
input 2
Normal
input 2
Normal
input 2
High-speed counter
2 (Increment)
High-speed counter
1 (Phase A, Incre-
ment, or Count
input)
---
03 Normal
input 3
Normal
input 3
Normal
input 3
High-speed counter
3 (Increment)
High-speed counter
0 (Phase B, Decre-
ment, or Direction
input)
---
04 Normal
input 4
Normal
input 4
Normal
input 4
High-speed counter
0 (Phase Z or reset
input)
High-speed counter
0 (Phase Z or reset
input)
---
05 Normal
input 5
Normal
input 5
Normal
input 5
High-speed counter
1 (Phase Z or reset
input)
High-speed counter
1 (Phase Z or reset
input)
---
06 Normal
input 6
Normal
input 6
Normal
input 6
High-speed counter
2 (Phase Z or reset
input)
--- Pulse output 0:
Origin input sig-
nal
07 Normal
input 7
Normal
input 7
Normal
input 7
High-speed counter
3 (Phase Z or reset
input)
--- Pulse output 1:
Origin input sig-
nal
08 Normal
input 8
Normal
input 8
Normal
input 8
--- --- ---
09 Normal
input 9
Normal
input 9
Normal
input 9
--- --- ---
10 Normal
input 10
Normal
input 10
Normal
input 10
Origin proximity
input signal
11 Normal
input 11
Normal
input 11
Normal
input 11
Origin proximity
input signal
CIO 1 00 to
05
Normal
input 12 to
17
Normal
input 12 to
17
--- --- --- ---
06 to
11
Normal in
18 to 23
--- --- --- --- ---
Function Pulse output number
0 1
Pulse output PV storage words
PV range: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
Leftmost 4 digits A277 A279
Rightmost 4 digits A276 A278
184
Reset Bits
The pulse output PV will be cleared when this bit is
turned from OFF to ON.
0: Not cleared.
1: Clear PV.
A540.00 A541.00
CW Limit Input Signal Flags
This is the CW limit input signal, which is used in the
origin search.
ON when turned ON from an external
input.
A540.08 A541.08
CCW Limit Input Signal Flags
This is the CCW limit input signal, which is used in
the origin search.
input.
A540.09 A541.09
Positioning completed input signals
This is the positioning completed input signal, which
is used in the origin search.
input.
A540.10 A541.10
Accel/Decel Flags
ON when pulses are being output according to an
ACC(888) or PLS2(887) instruction and the output
frequency is being changed in steps (accelerating or
decelerating).
0: Constant speed
1: Accelerating or decelerating
A280.00 A281.00
Overflow/Underflow Flags
ON when an overflow or underflow has occurred in
the pulse output PV.
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
A280.01 A281.01
Output Amount Set Flags
ON when the number of output pulses has been set
with the PULS instruction.
0: No setting
1: Setting made
A280.02 A281.02
Output Completed Flags
ON when the number of output pulses set with the
PULS(886)/PLS2(887) instruction has been output.
0: Output not completed.
1: Output completed.
A280.03 A281.03
Output In-progress Flags
ON when pulses are being output from the pulse
output.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
A280.04 A281.04
No-origin Flags
ON when the origin has not been determined for the
pulse output.
0: Origin established.
1: Origin not established.
A280.05 A281.05
At-origin Flags
ON when the pulse output PV matches the origin
(0).
0: Not stopped at origin.
1: Stopped at origin.
A280.06 A281.06
Output Stopped Error Flags
ON when an error occurred while outputting pulses
in the origin search function.
0: No error
1: Stop error occurred.
A280.07 A281.07
Stop Error Codes
When a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs, the error
code is stored in that pulse outputs corresponding
Stop Error Code word.
--- A444 A445
0 1
185
5-2-4 Pulse Output Patterns
The following tables show the kinds of pulse output operations that can be
performed by combining various pulse output instructions.
Continuous Mode (Speed Control)
Starting a Pulse Output
Changing Settings
Operation Example
application
Frequency changes Description Procedure
Instruction Settings
Output with
specified
speed
Changing the
speed (frequency)
in one step
Outputs pulses at a
specified frequency.
SPED(885)
(Continuous)
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Continuous
Target fre-
quency
Output with
specified
acceleration
and speed
Accelerating the
speed (frequency)
at a fixed rate
Outputs pulses and
changes the fre-
quency at a fixed
rate.
ACC(888)
(Continuous)
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Continuous
Accelera-
tion/decel-
eration rate
Target fre-
quency

Pulse frequency
Target frequency
Execution of SPED(885)
Time
Pulse frequency
Target frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration
rate
Execution of
ACC(888)
Time
Operation Example applica-
tion
Change
speed in
one step
Changing the
speed during oper-
ation
Changes the fre-
quency (higher or
lower) of the pulse
output in one step.
SPED(885)
(Continu-
ous)
SPED(885)
(Continu-
ous)
Port
Continuous
Target fre-
quency
Change
speed
smoothly
Changing the
speed smoothly
during operation
Changes the fre-
quency from the
present frequency
at a fixed rate. The
frequency can be
accelerated or
decelerated.
ACC(888) or
SPED(885)
(Continu-
ous)
ACC(888)
(Continu-
ous)
Port
Continuous
Target fre-
quency
Accelera-
tion/decel-
eration rate
Changing the
speed in a polyline
curve during opera-
tion
Changes the accel-
eration or decelera-
tion rate during
acceleration or
deceleration.
ACC(888)
(Continu-
ous)
ACC(888)
(Continu-
ous)
Port
Continuous
Target fre-
quency
Accelera-
tion/decel-
eration rate
Change
direction
Not supported.
Change
pulse out-
put method
Not supported.

Pulse frequency
Target frequency
Present frequency
Execution of
SPED(885)
Time
Pulse frequency
Target frequency
Present frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration
rate
Execution of
ACC(888)
Time
Pulse frequency
Target frequency
Present frequency
Acceleration rate n
Acceleration
rate 2
Acceleration
rate 1
Execution of ACC(888)
Time
186
Stopping a Pulse Output
Operation Example
application
Stop pulse
output
Immediate
stop
Stops the pulse out-
put immediately.
SPED(885)
or ACC(888)
(Continu-
ous)
INI(880)
Port
Stop pulse
output
Stop pulse
output
Immediate
stop
Stops the pulse out-
put immediately.
SPED(885)
or ACC(888)
(Continu-
ous)
SPED(885)
(Continu-
ous)
Port
Continuous
Target fre-
quency=0
Stop pulse
output
smoothly
Decelerate
to a stop
Decelerates the
pulse output to a
stop.
Note If ACC(888)
started the
operation, the
original
acceleration/
deceleration
rate will
remain in
effect.
If SPED(885)
started the
operation, the
acceleration/
deceleration
rate will be
invalid and
the pulse out-
put will stop
immediately.
SPED(885)
or ACC(888)
(Continu-
ous)
ACC(888)
(Continu-
ous)
Port
Continuous
Target fre-
quency=0
Pulse frequency
Present frequency
Execution of INI(880)
Time
Pulse frequency
Present frequency
Time
Pulse frequency
Present frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration rate
(Rate set at the
start of the
operation.)
Target frequency = 0
Time
187
Independent Mode (Positioning)
Starting a Pulse Output
Note Triangular Control
If the specified number of pulses is less than the number required just to
reach the target frequency and return to zero, the function will automatically
reduce the acceleration/deceleration time and perform triangular control
(acceleration and deceleration only.) An error will not occur.
Operation Example
application
Output with
specified
speed
Positioning
without accel-
eration or
deceleration
Starts outputting
pulses at the speci-
fied frequency and
stops immediately
when the specified
number of pulses
has been output.
Note The target
position
(specified
number of
pulses) can-
not be
changed dur-
ing position-
ing.
PULS(886)
SPED(885)
Number of
pulses
Relative or
absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Indepen-
dent
Target fre-
quency
Simple trap-
ezoidal con-
trol
Positioning
with trapezoi-
dal accelera-
tion and
deceleration
(Same rate
used for
acceleration
and decelera-
tion; no start-
ing speed)
The number
of pulses can-
not be
changed dur-
ing position-
ing.
Accelerates and
decelerates at the
same fixed rate and
stops immediately
when the specified
number of pulses
has been output.
(See note.)
Note The target
position
(specified
number of
pulses) can-
not be
changed dur-
ing position-
ing.
PULS(886)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
Number of
pulses
Relative or
absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Indepen-
dent
Accelera-
tion and
decelera-
tion rate
Target fre-
quency
Complex
trapezoidal
control
Positioning
with trapezoi-
dal accelera-
tion and
deceleration
(Separate
rates used for
acceleration
and decelera-
tion; starting
speed)
The number
of pulses can
be changed
during posi-
tioning.
Accelerates and
decelerates at a
fixed rates. The
pulse output is
stopped when the
specified number of
pulses has been
output. (See note.)
Note The target
position
(specified
number of
pulses) can
be changed
during posi-
tioning.
PLS2(887) Number of
pulses
Relative or
absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Accelera-
tion rate
Decelera-
tion rate
Target fre-
quency
Starting
frequency
Pulse frequency
Target
frequency
Specified number of
pulses (Specified with
PULS(886).)
Execution of
SPED(885)
Outputs the specified
number of pulses
and then stops.
Time
Pulse frequency
Target
frequency
Specified number of
pulses (Specified
with PULS(886).)
Acceleration/
deceleration
rate
Execution of
ACC(888)
Outputs the specified
number of pulses and
then stops.
Time
Pulse frequency
Target
frequency
Starting
frequency
Acceler-
ation
rate
Specified number
of pulses
Deceleration
rate
Execution of
PLS2(887)
Target
frequency
reached.
Deceleration point
Output stops.
Stop
frequency
Time
Pulse frequency
Target
frequency
Specified number
of pulses
(Specified with
PULS(886).)
Execution of
ACC(888)
Time
Pulse frequency
Target
frequency
Specified number
of pulses
(Specified with
PULS(887).)
Execution of
PLS2(887)
188
Changing Settings
Operation Example
application
Change
speed in
one step
Changing
the speed in
one step dur-
ing operation
SPED(885) can be
executed during
positioning to
change (raise or
lower) the pulse
output frequency in
one step.
The target position
(specified number
of pulses) is not
changed.
PULS(886)
SPED(885)
(Indepen-
dent)
SPED(885)
(Indepen-
dent)
Number of
pulses
Relative or
absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Indepen-
dent
Target fre-
quency
Change
speed
smoothly
(with accel-
eration rate
= decelera-
tion rate)
Changing
the target
speed (fre-
quency) dur-
ing
positioning
(accelera-
tion rate =
deceleration
rate)
ACC(888) can be
executed during
positioning to
change the acceler-
ation/deceleration
rate and target fre-
quency.
The target position
(specified number
of pulses) is not
changed.
PULS(886)
ACC(888) or
SPED(885)
(Indepen-
dent)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
Number of
pulses
Relative or
absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Indepen-
dent
Accelera-
tion and
decelera-
tion rate
Target fre-
quency
PLS2(887)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
Change
speed
smoothly
(with
unequal
acceleration
and deceler-
ation rates)
Changing
the target
speed (fre-
quency) dur-
ing
positioning
(different
acceleration
and deceler-
ation rates)
PLS2(887) can be
executed during
positioning to
change the acceler-
ation rate, decelera-
tion rate, and target
frequency.
Note To prevent
the target
position from
being
changed
intentionally,
the original
target posi-
tion must be
specified in
absolute
coordinates.
PULS(886)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
PLS2(887)
Number of
pulses
Relative or
absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Accelera-
tion rate
Decelera-
tion rate
Target fre-
quency
Starting
frequency
PLS2(887)
PLS2(887)

Pulse
frequency
New target
frequency
Original target
frequency
Specified number
of pulses
(Specified with
PULS(886).)
Number of pulses
specified with
PULS(886) does
not change.
(independent mode)
SPED(885) (independent
mode) executed again to
change the target
frequency. (The target
position is not changed.)
Time
New target
frequency
Original target
frequency
Specified
number of
pulses
(Specified with
PULS(886).)
Number of
pulses specified
with PULS(886)
does not
change.
Pulse
frequency
Execution of
ACC(888)
(independent
mode)
ACC(888) (independent
mode) executed again to
change the target
frequency. (The target
position is not changed,
but the
rate is changed.)
Time
Acceleration/
deceleration
rate

Pulse
frequency
New target
frequency
Original target
frequency
Specified number of
pulses (Specified
with PULS(886).)
Acceleration/
deceleration
rate
Execution of
ACC(888)
(independent
mode)
PLS2(887) executed to
change the target frequen-
cy and acceleration/decel-
eration rates.
(The target position is not
changed. The original tar-
get position is specified
again.)
Time
189
Change tar-
get position
Change the
target posi-
tion during
positioning
(multiple
start func-
tion)
PLS2(887) can be
executed during
positioning to
change the target
position (number of
pulses).
Note When the tar-
get position
cannot be
changed
without main-
taining the
same speed
range, an
error will
occur and the
original oper-
ation will con-
tinue to the
original tar-
get position.
PULS(886)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
PLS2(887)
Number of
pulses
Relative or
absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Accelera-
tion rate
Decelera-
tion rate
Target fre-
quency
Starting
frequency
PLS2(887)
PLS2(887)
PLS2(887)
PLS2(887)
Change tar-
get position
and speed
smoothly
Change the
target posi-
tion and tar-
get speed
(frequency)
during posi-
tioning (mul-
tiple start
function)
PLS2(887) can be
executed during
positioning to
change the target
position (number of
pulses), accelera-
tion rate, decelera-
tion rate, and target
frequency.
Note When the
settings can-
not be
changed
without main-
taining the
same speed
range, an
error will
occur and the
original oper-
ation will con-
tinue to the
original tar-
get position.
PULS(886)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
PLS2(887)
Number of
pulses
Relative or
absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Accelera-
tion rate
Decelera-
tion rate
Target fre-
quency
Starting
frequency
Change the
acceleration
and deceler-
ation rates
during posi-
tioning (mul-
tiple start
function)
PLS2(887) can be
executed during
positioning (accel-
eration or decelera-
tion) to change the
acceleration rate or
deceleration rate.
PULS(886)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
PLS2(887)
Number of
pulses
Accelera-
tion rate
Decelera-
tion rate
PLS2(887)
PLS2(887)
Operation Example
application

Pulse
frequency
Target
frequency Acceleration/
deceleration
rate
Specified
number of
pulses
Number of pulses
changed with
PLS2(887).
Execution of
PLS2(887)
PLS2(887) executed to
change the target position.
(The target frequency and
rates are not changed
Time

Pulse
frequency
Target frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration
rate
Number of
pulses specified
with PLS2(887).
Execution of
PLS2(887)
ACC(888) executed to change the
target frequency. (The target position is
not changed, but the acceleration/
deceleration rates are changed.)
Time
Number of pulses
not change with
PLS2(887).
Changed target
frequency
Pulse
frequency
New target
frequency
Original target
frequency
Acceleration rate n
Acceleration
rate 3
Acceleration
rate 2
Acceleration
rate 1
Number of pulses
specified by
PLS2(887) #N.
Execution of
PLS2(887) #1
Execution of
PLS2(887) #2
Execution of PLS2(887) #3
Execution of PLS2(887) #N
Time
190
Stopping a Pulse Output
Change
direction
Change the
direction dur-
ing position-
ing
PLS2(887) can be
executed during
positioning with rel-
ative pulse specifi-
cation to change to
absolute pulses and
reverse direction.
PULS(886)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
PLS2(887)
Number of
pulses
Absolute
pulse spec-
ification
Port
CW/CCW
or Pulse +
direction
Accelera-
tion rate
Decelera-
tion rate
Target fre-
quency
Starting
frequency
PLS2(887)
PLS2(887)
Change
pulse out-
put method
Not supported.
Operation Example
application
Pulse
frequency
Target
frequency
Specified
number of
pulses
Change of direction at the
specified deceleration rate
Number of pulses
(position) changed
by PLS2(887)
Execution
of PLS2
(887) Execution of
PLS2(887)
Time
Operation Example applica-
tion
Stop pulse
output
(Number of
pulses set-
ting is not
preserved.)
Immediate stop Stops the pulse out-
put immediately
and clears the num-
ber of output pulses
setting.
PULS(886)
ACC(888) or
SPED(885)
(Indepen-
dent)
INI(880)
Stop pulse
output
PLS2(887)
INI(880)
Stop pulse
output
(Number of
pulses set-
ting is not
preserved.)
Immediate stop Stops the pulse out-
put immediately
and clears the num-
ber of output pulses
setting.
PULS(886)
SPED(885)
(Indepen-
dent)
SPED(885)
Port
Indepen-
dent
Target fre-
quency = 0
Stop sloped
pulse out-
put
smoothly.
(Number of
pulses set-
ting is not
preserved.)
Decelerate to a
stop
Decelerates the
pulse output to a
stop.
Note If ACC(888)
started the
operation, the
original
acceleration/
deceleration
rate will
remain in
effect.
If SPED(885)
started the
operation, the
acceleration/
deceleration
rate will be
invalid and
the pulse out-
put will stop
immediately.
PULS(886)
ACC(888) or
SPED(885)
(Indepen-
dent)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
Port
Indepen-
dent
Target fre-
quency = 0
PLS2(887)
ACC(888)
(Indepen-
dent)
Pulse frequency
Present
frequency
Execution of
SPED(885)
Execution
of INI(880)
Time
Pulse frequency
Present frequency
Execution of
SPED(885)
Execution of
SPED(885)
Time
Pulse frequency
Present
frequency
Target
frequency = 0
Execution of
ACC(888)
Original
deceleration
rate
Time
191
Switching from Continuous Mode (Speed Control) to Independent Mode (Positioning)
Relative Pulse Outputs and Absolute Pulse Outputs
Selecting Relative or
Absolute Coordinates
The pulse output PV's coordinate system (absolute or relative) is selected
automatically, as follows:
When the origin is undetermined, the system operates in relative coordi-
nates.
When the origin has been determined, the system operates in absolute
coordinates.
Example applica-
tion
Change from speed
control to fixed dis-
tance positioning
during operation
PLS2(887) can be
executed during a
speed control oper-
ation started with
ACC(888) to
change to position-
ing operation.
Note An error will
occur if a
constant
speed can-
not be
achieved
after switch-
ing the mode.
If this hap-
pens, the
instruction
execution will
be ignored
and the previ-
ous opera-
tion will be
continued.
ACC(888)
(Continu-
ous)
PLS2(887)
Port
Acceleration rate
Deceleration rate
Target frequency
Number of pulses
Note The starting fre-
quency is ignored.
Fixed distance feed
interrupt
Pulse frequency
Target
frequency
Outputs the number of
pulses specified in
PLS2(887) (Both relative
and absolute pulse
specification can be used.)
Execution of
ACC(888)
(continuous) Execution of
PLS2(887)
Time
Pulse
frequency
Present
frequency
Execution of
ACC(888)
(continuous) Execution of
PLS2(887) with the
following settings
Number of pulses = number
of pulses until stop
Relative pulse specification
Target frequency = present
frequency
Acceleration rate = Not 0
Deceleration rate = target
deceleration rate
Time
Conditions Origin has been
determined by an ori-
gin search
Origin has been
determined by exe-
cuting INI(880) to
change the PV
Origin not estab-
lished (Origin search
has not been per-
formed and PV has
not been changed
with INI(880).)
Pulse output
PV's coordi-
nate system
Absolute coordinates Relative coordinates
192
Relationship between the
Coordinate System and
Pulse Specification
The following table shows the pulse output operation for the four possible
combinations of the coordinate systems (absolute or relative) and the pulse
output (absolute or relative) specified when PULS(886) or PLS2(887) is exe-
cuted.
Pulse output
specified in
PULS(886) or
PLS2(887)
Coordinate system
Relative coordinate system Absolute coordinate system
Origin not established:
The No-origin Flag will be ON in this case.
Origin established:
The No-origin Flag will be OFF in this case.
Relative pulse speci-
fication
Positions the system to another position relative to the current position.
Number of movement pulses = number of pulses setting
The pulse output PV after instruction execution
= Number of movement pulses = Number of
pulses setting
Note The pulse output PV is reset to 0 just before
pulses are output. After that, the specified num-
ber of pulses is output.
The following example shows the number of
pulses setting = 100 counterclockwise.
Pulse output PV range:
8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
Number of pulses setting range:
The pulse output PV after instruction execution
= PV + Number of movement pulses.
pulses setting = 100 counterclockwise.
100
Number of pulses
setting
II
Number of
movement pulses
Target
position
Current
position=0
Pulse
output PV
100
0
Number of pulses
setting
II
Number of
movement pulses
Target
position
Current
position
Pulse
output PV
Origin
193
Operations Affecting the Origin Status (Established/Not Established Status)
The following table shows the operations that can affect the origin status (ori-
gin established or no-origin), such as changing the operating mode and exe-
cuting certain instructions.
The No-origin Flag will be ON when the corresponding pulse output's origin is
not established and OFF when the origin is established.
Absolute pulse
specification
The absolute pulse specification cannot be
used when the origin location is undetermined,
i.e., when the system is operating in the relative
coordinate system. An instruction execution
error will occur.
Positions the system to an absolute position rel-
ative to the origin.
The number of movement pulses and move-
ment direction are calculated automatically from
the current position (pulse output PV) and target
position.
pulses setting = +100.
Number of movement pulses = Number of
pulses setting - Pulse output PV when instruc-
tion is executed
The movement direction is determined automat-
ically.
Pulse output PV when instruction is executed =
Number of pulses setting
Pulse output
specified in
PULS(886) or
PLS2(887)
Coordinate system
Relative coordinate system Absolute coordinate system
Origin not established:
The No-origin Flag will be ON in this case.
Origin established:
The No-origin Flag will be OFF in this case.
+100
+200
0
Number of pulses
setting
II
Number of
movement pulses
Target
position =
number of
pulses
setting
Current
position
Pulse
output PV
Origin
Current status PROGRAM mode RUN mode or MONITOR
mode
Operation Origin
established
Origin not
established
Origin
established
Origin not
established
Operat-
ing mode
change
Switch to
RUN or
MONITOR
Status
changes to
Origin not
established.
Origin not
established
status contin-
ues.
--- ---
Switch to
PROGRAM
--- --- Origin
established
status contin-
ues.
Origin not
established
status contin-
ues.
194
Movement Direction when Using Absolute Pulse Specification
When operating with the absolute pulse specification, the movement direction
is selected automatically based on the relationship between the pulse output
PV when the instruction is executed and the specified target position. The
direction (CW/CCW) specified in an ACC(888) or SPED(885) instruction is not
effective.
Using CW/CCW Limit Inputs for Pulse Output Functions Other than Origin Searches
Pulse outputs will stop when either the CW or CCW limit input signals turns
ON. It is also possible to select whether or not the established origin will be
cleared when a CW or CCW limit input signal turns ON for an origin search or
other pulse output function.
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
S-curve acceleration/deceleration can be used for pulse output instructions
involving acceleration/deceleration. When there is leeway in the maximum
allowable speed, S-curve accelerations/decelerations will help control shock
and vibration by reducing the initial acceleration rate in comparison with linear
acceleration/deceleration.
Note The setting for S-curve acceleration/deceleration applies to all pulse outputs.
Instruc-
tion exe-
cution
Origin search
performed by
ORG(889)
--- --- Status
changes to
Origin
established.
Status
changes to
Origin
established.
PV changed
by INI(880)
--- --- Origin
established
status contin-
ues.
Status
changes to
Origin
established.
The Pulse Output Reset
Bit (A54000 or A54100)
goes from OFF to ON.
Status
changes to
Origin not
established.
Origin not
established
status contin-
ues.
Status
changes to
Origin not
established.
Origin not
established
status contin-
ues.
Current status PROGRAM mode RUN mode or MONITOR
mode
Operation Origin
established
Origin not
established
Origin
established
Origin not
established
195
Output Pattern The output pattern for S-curve acceleration/deceleration is shown below.
Example for PLS2(887)
The same type of S-curve acceleration/deceleration can be used for
ACC(888) as well.
Note The curve for S-curve acceleration/deceleration is formed by applying a cubic
equation to the straight line of the set acceleration/deceleration rates (a cubic
polynomial approximation). The curves parameters cannot be changed.
The maximum acceleration will be 1.5 times that of trapezoidal acceleration/
deceleration for the same acceleration/deceleration rate.
Stop frequency
Time
Starting
frequency
Target
frequency
Pulse frequency
Set
acceleration
Specified
number of
pulses
PLS2
executed
Target frequency
reached
Deceleration point
Set
deceleration
Output stops
Acceleration
specified
for S-curve
acceleration
Deceleration
specified
for S-curve
deceleration
Max. acceleration
is 1.5 times
set acceleration
196
Procedure Make the following settings in the PLC Setup.
Pulse Output 0 to 3
Restrictions The following restrictions apply when using S-curve acceleration/deceleration.
Starting Frequency
The starting frequency must be 100 Hz or greater. If the starting frequency is
set to less than 100 Hz, it will automatically be increased to 100 Hz if S-curve
acceleration/deceleration is set.
Target Frequency
S-curve acceleration/deceleration will not be performed if the target frequency
is less than 100 Hz.
Precautions when
using the Pulse
Output Function
The CP1L CPU Units pulse output frequency is determined by dividing the
source clock frequency by an integer ratio. (The source clock frequency for
ports 0 and 1 is 20 MHz and the frequency for ports 2 and 3 is 16.4 MHz.)
Consequently, there may be a slight difference between the set frequency and
the actual frequency, and that difference increases as the frequency
increases. The actual frequency can be calculated from the following equa-
tions.
Pulse Output System
Speed Curve Trapezium When a pulse output is executed with accelera-
tion/deceleration, this setting determines
whether the acceleration/deceleration rate is lin-
ear (trapezium) or S-shaped.
S-shaped
50 Hz
100 Hz
Automatically
increased
to 100 Hz.
Pulse frequency
Time
50 Hz
No
Time
Pulse frequency
Frequency
divider
Output pulses (actual frequency)
Integer dividing ratio calculated
from user's set frequency
Source
clock
16.4 MHz
197
Equations
The INT function extracts an integer from the fraction. The non-integer
remainder is rounded.
Differences between Set Frequencies and Actual Frequencies
5-2-5 Origin Search and Origin Return Functions
The CP1L CPU Units have two functions that can be used to determine the
machine origin for positioning.
1,2,3... 1. Origin Search
The ORG instruction outputs pulses to turn the motor according to the pat-
tern specified in the origin search parameters. As the motor turns, the ori-
gin search function determines the machine origin from the following 3
kinds of position input signals.
Origin input signal
Origin proximity input signal
CW limit input signal and CCW limit input signal
Source clock frequency
Dividing ratio
(Clock frequency x 2) + Set frequency
Set frequency (Hz) x 2
Actual frequency (Hz) =
Dividing ratio = INT
Source clock frequency: 16.4 MHz
Set frequency (kHz) Actual frequency (kHz)
99.696 to 100.000 100.000
99.093 to 99.696 99.393
98.498 to 99.093 98.795
: :
50.076 to 50.229 50.152
49.923 to 50.076 50.000
49.772 to 49.923 49.848
: :
20.012 to 20.036 20.024
19.987 to 20.012 20.000
19.963 to 19.987 19.975
: :
10.003 to 10.009 10.006
9.996 to 10.003 10.000
9.990 to 9.996 9.993
: :
5.000 to 5.002 5.001
4.999 to 5.000 5.000
4.997 to 4.999 4.998
: :
3.001 to 3.001 3.001
3.000 to 3.000 3.000
2.998 to 2.999 2.999
198
2. Changing the Pulse Output PV
When you want to set the current position as the origin, execute INI(880)
to reset the pulse output PV to 0.
The origin location can be determined after using either method.
The CP1L CPU Units are also equipped with the origin return function, which
can be executed to return the system to the origin after the origin location has
been determined by one of the methods above.
Origin Return
If the motor is stopped, ORG(889) can be executed to perform an origin
return operation that moves the motor back to the origin position. The ori-
gin position must be determined in advance by performing an origin
search or changing the pulse output PV.
Note The motor can be moved even if the origin position has not been determined,
but positioning operations will be limited as follows:
Origin return: Cannot be used.
Positioning with absolute pulse specification: Cannot be used.
Positioning with relative pulse specification: Outputs the specified number
of pulses after setting the current position to 0.
5-2-5-1 Origin Search
When ORG(889) executes an origin search, it outputs pulses to actually move
the motor and determines the origin position using the input signals that indi-
cate the origin proximity and origin positions.
The input signals that indicate the origin position can be received from the
servomotor's built-in phase-Z signal or external sensors such as photoelectric
sensors, proximity sensors, or limit switches.
Several origin search patterns can be selected.
In the following example, the motor is started at a specified speed, acceler-
ated to the origin search high speed, and run at that speed until the origin
proximity position is detected. After the Origin Proximity Input is detected, the
motor is decelerated to the origin search low speed and run at that speed until
the origin position is detected. The motor is stopped at the origin position.
Pulse frequency
Origin search
initial speed
Origin search
acceleration rate
Origin search
high speed
Deceleration
point
Origin search
deceleration rate
Origin search
proximity speed
Start
Execution of ORG(889)
Decelerate from high to low speed.
Indicated by the Origin
Proximity Input Signal
Stop
Indicated by the
Origin Input Signal
Time
199
Procedure
Restrictions The Phase-Z signal + Software reset method cannot be used for a high-
speed counter when the origin search function has been enabled in the
PLC Setup.
PLC Setup
Origin Search Function Enable/Disable Settings
These PLC Setup indicate whether or not the origin search function will be
used for each pulse output.
Wire the pulse output
and input signals.
Output: Connect the outputs using the CW/CCW
method or pulse + direction method. The same
method must be used for all of the pulse outputs.
Power supply for outputs: 24 V DC
Inputs: Connect the Origin input Signal, Near Origin
Input Signal, and Positioning Complete Signal to the
built-in input terminals allocated to the pulse output
being used.
The limit inputs must be connected to available normal
input terminals or terminals and output from the ladder
program.
PLC Setup settings
Enable the origin search function for pulse output 0 to 3 by setting
the Origin Search Function Enable/Disable setting to 1.
Limit Input Signal Settings
Limit Input Signal Operation and Undefine Origin Settings
Acceleration/Deceleration Curve Setting
Other Parameter Settings
1. Operation Mode
Set the best operation mode for the driver being used (servomotor
or stepping motor.)
Set "mode 0" when driving a stepping motor. Set "mode 1" or
"mode 2" when driving a servomotor.
2. Set the origin search operation setting.
3. Set the origin detection method.
4. Set the origin search direction (CW or CCW.)
5. Set the origin search speeds:
Initial speed for origin search/origin return, origin search high
speed, origin search proximity speed, origin search acceleration
rate, and origin search deceleration rate
6. Origin Compensation
After the origin has been determined, the origin compensation can
be set to compensate for a shift in the Proximity Sensor's ON
position, motor replacement, or other change.
7. Set the Origin Proximity Input Signal type, Origin Input Signal
type, and Limit Input Signal type.
8. Set the Positioning Monitor Time.
Ladder program
Output the status of the Limit Signal Inputs and Positioning
Completed Signal to Auxiliary Area bits.
Execute ORG(889).
Specify the origin search operation by setting the third
operand to 0000.
200
Limit Input Signal Setting
Specify in the following PLC Setup whether to use the CW/CCW limit input
signals only for origin searches or for all pulse output functions. These set-
tings affect all pulse outputs.
(This setting is called the Limited Input Signal Operation setting.)
Pulse Output 0 Undefined Origin Setting
Acceleration/Deceleration Curve Settings
Note The acceleration/deceleration curve setting applies to all pulse outputs, not
just to origin searches. Refer to S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration on
page 194 for details.
Origin Search Parameters The various origin search parameters are set in the PLC Setup.
Name Settings Time when
read
Operating mode Operating mode 0, 1, or 2 Start of
operation
Origin search operation
setting
0: Reversal mode 1
1: Reversal mode 2
Start of
operation
Origin detection method 0: Read the Origin Input Signal after the
Origin Proximity Input Signal goes
from OFFONOFF.
1: Read the Origin Input Signal after the
Origin Proximity Input Signal goes
from OFFON.
2: Just read the Origin Input Signal with-
out using the Origin Proximity Input
Signal.
Start of
operation
Origin search direction 0: CW direction
1: CCW direction
Start of
operation
Origin
search
speed
(See
note.)
Origin search/
return initial
speed
Pulse outputs 0,1:
00000001 to 000186A0 hex
(1 Hz to 100 kHz)
J models: 00000001 to 00004E20 hex
(1 Hz to 20 kHz)
Start of
operation
Origin search
high speed
Same as above. Start of
operation
Origin search
proximity speed
Same as above. Start of
operation
Origin search
acceleration rate
0001 to FFFF hex (1 to 65,535 Hz/4 ms) Start of
operation
Origin search
deceleration rate
0001 to FFFF hex (1 to 65,535 Hz/4 ms) Start of
operation
Origin compensation 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(2147483648 to 2147483647)
Start of
operation
I/O settings Limit Input Signal type
0: Normally closed (NC)
1: Normally open (NO)
Start of
operation
Origin Proximity Input Signal type
Start of
operation
Origin Input Signal type
When power
is turned ON
Positioning monitor time 0000 to 270F hex
(0 to 9,999 ms)
Start of
operation
201
Note An origin search will not be started unless the origin search proximity speed is
less than the origin search high speed and unless the origin search/return ini-
tial speed is less than the origin search proximity speed.
Explanation of the Origin Search Parameters
Operating Mode The operating mode parameter specifies the kind of I/O signals that are used
in the origin search. The 3 operating modes indicate whether the Error
Counter Reset Output and Positioning Completed Input are used.
The following table shows the proper operating mode settings for different
drivers and applications.
Note There are stepping motor drivers that are equipped with a positioning com-
pleted signal like a Servo driver. Operating modes 1 and 2 can be used with
these stepping motor drivers.
Remarks: Operations Detecting the Origin During Deceleration from High
Speed
Operating Mode 0 (without Error Counter Reset Output, without
Positioning Completed Input)
Connect the sensor's open collector output signal to the Origin Input Signal.
The Origin Input Signal's response time is 0.1 ms when set as a NO contact.
When the Origin Proximity Input Signal is received, the motor will begin decel-
erating from the origin search high speed to the origin search proximity speed.
In this operating mode, the Origin Input Signal will be detected if it is received
during this deceleration and an Origin Input Signal Error (error code 0202) will
be generated. In this case, the motor will decelerate to a stop.
Operating
mode
I/O signal Remarks
Origin Input
Signal
Error Counter
Reset Output
Positioning Completed
Input
Operation when the origin is
detected during deceleration from
the origin search's high speed
0 The origin position
is determined
when the Origin
Input Signal goes
from OFF to ON.
Not used.
The origin search
operation ends
after the origin is
detected.
Not used. The Origin Input Signal will be
detected during deceleration. An Ori-
gin Input Signal Error (error code
0202) will occur and the motor will
decelerate to a stop.
1 Goes ON for 20 to
30 ms when the
origin is detected.
The Origin Input Signal will not be
detected during deceleration. When
the Origin Input Signal is detected
after the motor has reached the prox-
imity speed for origin search, the
motor will be stopped and the origin
search operation will end.
2 After the origin is
detected, the origin
search will not be end
until the Positioning
Completed Input is
received from the driver.
Driver Remarks Operating mode
Stepping motor driver (See note.) 0
Servo driver Use this mode when you want to
reduce the processing time, even at the
expense of positioning accuracy. (The
Servo Driver's positioning complete
signal is not used.)
1
Use this mode when you want high
positioning accuracy. (The Servo
Driver's positioning complete signal is
used.)
2
202
Operating Mode 1 (with Error Counter Reset Output, without Positioning
Completed Input)
Connect the phase-Z signal from the Servo Driver to the Origin Input Signal.
When the Origin Input Signal is received, the pulse output will be stopped and
the Error Counter Reset Signal will be output for about 20 to 30 ms.
When the Origin Proximity Input Signal is received, the motor will begin decel-
erating from the origin search high speed to the origin search proximity speed.
In this operating mode, the motor will stop at the Origin Input Signal after
deceleration is completed.
Operating Mode 1 with Origin Proximity Input Signal Reverse (Origin
Detection Method Setting = 0)
When the deceleration time is short, the Origin Input Signal can be detected
immediately after the Origin Proximity Input Signal goes from ON to OFF. Set
1
1
0
0
CCW CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Starts when
ORG(889) is
executed.
Origin Input Signal goes from OFF
to ON while motor is decelerating.
Original pulse output
pattern
Origin Input Signal
Error (error code
0202)
1
1
0
0
Approx. 20 to 30 ms
Origin Input Signal
(Phase-Z signal)
Pulse output
Error Counter Reset
Signal
203
a Origin Proximity Input Signal dog setting that is long enough (longer than
the deceleration time.)
Operating Mode 1 without Origin Proximity Input Signal Reverse (Origin
Detection Method Setting = 1)
Depending on the length of the deceleration time, the stopping position may
change when the Origin Input Signal is detected during deceleration.
Operating Mode 2 (with Error Counter Reset Output, with Positioning
Completed Input)
This operating mode is the same as mode 1, except the Positioning Com-
pleted Signal (INP) from the Servo Driver is used. Connect the Positioning
Completed Signal from the Servo Driver to a normal input (origin search 0 to 3
input).
1
1
0
0
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input Signal
(Phase-Z signal)
Pulse output
Verify that the Origin Proximity Input
Signal's dog setting is long enough
(longer than the deceleration time.)
Origin Input
Signal is
ignored during
deceleration.
Motor stopped by an Origin
Input Signal received after
deceleration.
Starts when
ORG(889) is
executed.
Stop
Ideal time for the Origin Proximity Input
Signal to go OFF.
(Settings when the
deceleration time is short)
Stop (See note.)
Starts when ORG(889)
is executed.
Note: The Origin Input Signal can be detected immediately
after the Origin Proximity Input Signal goes from ON
to OFF if the deceleration time is short, e.g., starting
from within the Origin Proximity Input Signal.
1
1
0
0
CCW
CCW CW
CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input Signal
(Phase-Z signal)
(The deceleration time is
relatively long in this case.)
Pulse output
(The deceleration time is short
in this case.)
Origin Input
Signal is
ignored during
deceleration. Motor stopped by an Origin
Input Signal received after
deceleration.
Starts when
ORG(889) is
executed.
Stop
Motor stopped by an
Origin Input Signal
received after
deceleration.
Starts when
ORG(889)
is executed.
Stop
204
If origin compensation is not being applied, the Positioning Completed Signal
is checked after the Error Counter Reset Output. If origin compensation is
being applied, the Positioning Completed Signal is checked after the compen-
sation operation is completed.
Origin Search Operation
Setting
Select either of the following two reverse modes for the origin search opera-
tion pattern.
Origin Detection Method The origin detection method depends on the Origin Proximity Input Signal set-
tings. Select one of the following three methods in each ports parameters.
Origin Detection Method 0: Origin Proximity Input Signal Reversal
Required
1
1
0
0
Pulse output
Error Counter
Reset Output
Positioning
Completed
Signal
Stop
Time
Setting Description
0: Reversal mode 1 When the limit input signal is received in the origin search
direction, reverse and continue operation.
1: Reversal mode 2 When the limit input signal is received in the origin search
direction, generate an error and stop operation.
Setting Description
0: Origin Proximity Input Signal
reversal required.
Reads the first Origin Input Signal after the Ori-
gin Proximity Input Signal goes
OFFONOFF.
1: Origin Proximity Input Signal
reversal not required.
Reads the first Origin Input Signal after the Ori-
gin Proximity Input Signal goes OFFON.
2: Origin Proximity Input Signal not
used.
Just read the Origin Input Signal without using
the Origin Proximity Input Signal.
1
1
0
0
CCW
CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Deceleration starts when
Origin Proximity Input
Signal goes OFFON.
After the Origin Proximity Input Signal has gone
from OFFONOFF, the motor is stopped
when the Origin Input Signal goes OFFON.
Initial
speed
Acceleration
High speed for
origin search
Deceler-
ation
Proximity speed for origin search
Start when
ORG(889) is
executed.
Stop
205
Origin Detection Method 1: Origin Proximity Input Signal Reversal Not
Required
Origin Detection Method 2: Origin Proximity Input Signal Reversal Not
Used
Origin Search Operating
Mode and Origin
Detection Method Settings
The following examples explain how the operation patterns are affected by the
origin search operation and origin detection method settings.
These examples have a CW origin search direction. (The search direction and
limit input signal direction would be different for an origin search in the CCW
direction.)
1
1
0
0
CCW CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Signal goes OFFON.
After the Origin Proximity Input Signal has gone
from OFFONOFF, the motor is stopped when
the Origin Input Signal goes OFFON.
Initial
speed
Acceleration
High speed for
origin search
Deceler-
ation
Start when
ORG(889) is
executed.
Stop
1
0
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Signal goes OFFON.
Initial
speed
Acceleration
Proximity speed
for origin search
Start when
ORG(889) is
executed.
Stop
206
Using Reversal Mode 1
Origin search
operation
Origin
detection
method
0: Reversal mode 1
0: Origin Prox-
imity Input Sig-
nal reversal
required.
Note When the limit input signal is received, the motor stops without decel-
eration, reverses direction, and accelerates.
1: Origin Prox-
imity Input Sig-
nal reversal not
required.
Note When the limit input signal is received, the motor stops without decel-
eration, reverses direction, and accelerates.
2: Origin Prox-
imity Input Sig-
nal not used.
Note When the direction of operation is reversed, it is reversed immediately
without deceleration or acceleration.
1
1
0
0
CCW
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
High speed for origin search
Stop
CW limit input signal (See note.)
Stop
Start
Start
Start Stop
1
1
0
0
CCW
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Start
Stop
CW limit input signal
(See note.)
Stop
Start
Start Stop
1
0
CCW
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CW
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Start
Stop
Start
(See note.)
Stop Start
Stop
207
Using Reversal Mode 2
Origin search
operation
Origin detection
method
1: Reversal mode 2
0: Origin Proximity Input
Signal reversal required.
Note When the limit input signal is received, the motor stops without deceleration.
Signal reversal not
required.
1
1
0
0
CCW
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Start
Stop
(See note.)
Start
Stop
Limit stop
(error code 0200)
Start
1
1
0
0
CCW
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CW
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Stop
Start
Start
Stop
Start Limit stop
(error code 0200)
(See note.)
208
Specifying the Origin
Search Direction (CW or
CCW Direction)
Sets the direction to move when detecting the Origin Input Signal.
Typically, the origin search is performed so that the Origin Input Signal's rising
edge is detected when moving in the origin search direction.
Origin Search Speed These are the motor speed settings used in the origin search.
Note The origin search will not be performed in these cases:
Origin search high speed Origin search proximity speed
Origin search proximity speed Origin search initial speed
Origin Search/Return Initial Speed
Sets the motor's starting speed when the origin search is executed. Specify
the speed in the number of pulses per second (pps).
Origin Search High Speed
Sets the motor's target speed when the origin search is executed. Specify the
speed in the number of pulses per second (pps).
Origin Search Proximity Speed
Sets the motor's speed after the Origin Proximity Input Signal is detected.
Specify the speed in the number of pulses per second (pps).
Origin Search Acceleration Rate
Sets the motor's acceleration rate when the origin search is executed. Specify
the amount to increase the speed (Hz) per 4-ms interval.
Origin Search Deceleration Rate
Sets the motor's acceleration rate when the origin search function is deceler-
ating. Specify the amount to decrease the speed (Hz) per 4-ms interval.
Origin Compensation After the origin has been determined, the origin compensation can be set to
compensate for a shift in the Proximity Sensor's ON position, motor replace-
ment, or other change.
Signal not used.
Origin search
operation
Origin detection
method
1: Reversal mode 2
1
0
CCW
CCW
CCW
CW
CW
CW
Origin Input
Signal
Pulse output
Start
Stop
CW limit input signal (See note.)
Start Stop
Start
Limit stop (error code 0201)
Setting Description
0 CW direction
1 CCW direction
209
Once the origin has been detected in an origin search, the number of pulses
specified in the origin compensation is output, the current position is reset to
0, and the pulse output's No-origin Flag is turned OFF.
Setting range: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex (2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647) pulses
I/O Settings Limit Input Signal Type (NC/NO)
Specifies the type of input signal (normally closed or normally open) being
used for the limit inputs.
0: NC
1: NO
Origin Proximity Input Signal Type (NC/NO)
used for the Origin Proximity Input Signal.
0: NC
1: NO
Origin Input Signal Type (NC/NO)
used for the Origin Input Signal.
0: NC
1: NO
Positioning Monitor Time When the operating mode is set to mode 2, this setting specifies how long to
wait (in ms) for the Positioning Completed Signal after the positioning opera-
tion has been completed, i.e., the pulse output has been completed. A Posi-
tioning Timeout Error (error code 0300) will be generated if the motor driver's
Positioning Completed Signal does not come ON within the specified time.
Setting range: 0000 to 270F hex (0 to 9,999 ms)
The actual monitoring time will be the Positioning Monitor Time rounded up to
the nearest 10-ms unit + 10 ms max.
If the Positioning Monitor Time is set to 0, the function will be disabled and the
Unit will continue waiting for the Positioning Completed Signal to come ON. (A
Positioning Timeout Error will not be generated.)
Executing an Origin Search
Execute ORG(889) in the ladder program to perform an origin search with the
specified parameters.
Restrictions
The motor can be moved even if the origin position has not been determined
with the origin search function, but positioning operations will be limited as fol-
lows:
P
C
ORG(889) P: Port specifier
Pulse output 0: #0000
C: Control data; Origin search and CW/CCW method: #0000
Origin search and pulse + direction method: #0001
Function Operation
Origin return Cannot be used.
210
An origin search will not be started unless the origin search proximity speed is
less than the origin search high speed and unless the origin search/return ini-
tial speed is less than the origin search proximity speed.
Origin Search Error Processing
The CP1L CPU Unit's pulse output function performs a basic error check
before starting to output pulses (when the instruction is executed) and will not
output pulses if the settings are incorrect. There are other errors that can
occur with the origin search function during pulse output, which may stop the
pulse output.
If an error occurs that stops pulse output, the pulse output's Output Stopped
Error Flag will be turned ON and the Pulse Output Stop Error Code will be
written to Error Code word. Use these flags and error codes to identify the
cause of the error.
The Pulse Output Stop Errors will not affect the CPU Unit's operating status.
(The Pulse Output Stop Errors do not cause a fatal or non-fatal error in the
CPU Unit.)
Related Auxiliary Area Flags
Pulse Output Stop Error Codes
Positioning with absolute
pulse specification
Cannot be used.
Positioning with relative
pulse specification
Outputs the specified number of pulses after setting the
current position to 0.
Function Operation
0 1
Output Stopped Error Flags
ON when an error occurred while outputting pulses in the ori-
gin search function.
0: No error
1: Stop error occurred.
A280.07 A281.07
Stop Error Codes
When a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs, the error code is stored in that pulse outputs corre-
sponding Stop Error Code word.
A444 A445
Error name Error code Likely cause Corrective action Operation after
error
CW Limit Stop Input
Signal
0100 Stopped due to a CW limit signal
input.
Move in the CCW direction. Immediate stop,
No effect on
other port CCW Limit Stop
Input Signal
0101 Stopped due to a CCW limit sig-
nal input.
Move in the CW direction.
No Origin Proximity
Input Signal
0200 The parameters indicate that the
Origin Proximity Input Signal is
being used, but a Origin Proxim-
ity Input Signal was not received
during the origin search.
Check the wiring of the Origin
Proximity Input Signal as well as
the PLC Setup's Origin Proxim-
ity Input Signal Type setting (NC
or NO) and execute the origin
search again. Turn the power
supply OFF and then ON if the
signal type setting was changed.
No effect on
other port
No Origin Input Sig-
nal
0201 The Origin Input Signal was not
received during the origin
search.
Input Signal as well as the PLC
Setup's Origin Input Signal Type
setting (NC or NO) and execute
the origin search again. Turn the
power supply OFF and then ON
if the signal type setting was
changed.
211
Origin Input Signal
Error
0202 During an origin search in oper-
ating mode 0, the Origin Input
Signal was received during the
deceleration started after the
Origin Proximity Input Signal
was received.
Take one or both of the following
steps so that the Origin Input
Signal is received after deceler-
ation is completed.
Increase the distance between
the Origin Proximity Input Sig-
nal sensor and Origin Input Sig-
nal sensor.
Decrease the difference
between the origin search's
high speed and proximity
speed settings.
Decelerates to a
stop,
No effect on
other port
Limit Inputs in Both
Directions
0203 The origin search cannot be per-
formed because the limit signals
for both directions are being
input simultaneously.
Check the wiring of the limit sig-
nals in both directions as well as
the PLC Setup's Limit Signal
Type setting (NC or NO) and
execute the origin search again.
Turn the power supply OFF and
then ON if the signal type setting
was changed.
Operation will
not start.
No effect on
other port
Simultaneous Origin
Proximity and Limit
Inputs
0204 The Origin Proximity Input Sig-
nal and the Limit Input Signal in
the search direction are being
input simultaneously during an
origin search.
Proximity Input Signal and the
Limit Input Signal. Also check
the PLC Setup's Origin Proxim-
ity Input Signal Type and Limit
Signal Type settings (NC or NO)
and then execute the origin
search again. Turn the power
supply OFF and then ON if a
signal type setting was changed.
Immediate stop,
No effect on
other port
Limit Input Signal
Already Being Input
0205 When an origin search in one
direction is being performed,
the Limit Input Signal is already
being input in the origin search
direction.
When a non-regional origin
search is being performed, the
Origin Input Signal and the
Limit Input Signal in the oppo-
site direction (from the search
direction) are being input simul-
taneously.
Check the wiring of the Limit
Input Signal and the PLC
Setup's I/O settings. Also check
the PLC Setup's Limit Signal
Type setting (NC or NO) and
then execute the origin search
again. Turn the power supply
OFF and then ON if the signal
type setting was changed.
Immediate stop,
No effect on
other port
Origin Proximity
Input Signal Origin
Reverse Error
0206 When an origin search with
reversal at the limit is being per-
formed, the Limit Input Signal in
the search direction was input
while the Origin Proximity Input
Signal was reversing.
When an origin search with
reversal at the limit is being per-
formed and the Origin Proximity
Input Signal is not being used,
the Limit Input Signal in the
search direction was input
while the Origin Input Signal
was reversing.
Check the installation positions
of the Origin Proximity Input Sig-
nal, Origin Input Signal, and
Limit Input Signal as well as the
PLC Setup's I/O settings. Also
check the PLC Setup's Signal
Type settings (NC or NO) for
each input signal and then exe-
cute the origin search again.
Turn the power supply OFF and
then ON if a signal type setting
was changed.
Immediate stop,
No effect on
other port
Positioning Timeout
Error
0300 The Servo Driver's Positioning
Completed Signal does not
come ON within the Positioning
Monitor Time specified in the
PLC Setup.
Adjust the Positioning Monitor
Time setting or Servo system
gain setting. Check the Position-
ing Completed Signal wiring,
correct it if necessary, and then
execute the origin search again.
Decelerates to a
stop,
No effect on
other port
Error name Error code Likely cause Corrective action Operation after
error
212
Origin Search Examples
Operation Connect a Servo Driver and execute an origin search based on the Servomo-
tor's built-in encoder phase-Z signal and a Origin Proximity Input Signal.
Conditions Operating mode: 1
(Uses the Servomotor encoder's phase-Z signal as the Origin Input Sig-
nal.)
Origin search operation setting: 0
(Sets reverse mode 1. Reverses direction when the limit input signal is
input in the origin search direction.)
Origin detection method: 0
(Reads the Origin Input Signal after the Origin Input Signal goes
OFFONOFF.)
Origin search direction: 0 (CW direction)
System Configuration
Instructions Used ORG(889)
CW limit
detection
sensor
Origin Proximity
Input sensor
Workpiece
CCW limit
detection
sensor
Servomotor
Encoder
Servomotor Driver
Pulse output from built-in
outputs OUT0
0.00: Servomotor encoder's
phase-Z input; Origin input
0.10: Origin proximity input sensor
0.00: CW limit detection sensor
0.01: CCW limit detection sensor
213
I/O Allocations
(Example: CP1L-M40/30
DT@-D, CP1L-L20D@-D
Units)
Inputs
Outputs
Operation
PLC Setup
Input terminal Name
Word Bit
CIO 0 00 CW limit detection sensor
01 CCW limit detection sensor
06 Pulse Output 0 Origin Input Signal
10 Pulse Output 0 Origin Proximity Input Signal
Word Bit Name
A540 08 Pulse Output 0 CW Limit Input Signal
09 Pulse Output 0 CCW Limit Input Signal
Output terminal Name
Word Bit
CIO 100 00 Pulse Output 0 CW output
01 Pulse Output 0 CCW output
Function Setting (example)
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Function Enable/Disable 1 hex: Enabled
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Operating Mode 1 hex: Mode 1
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Operation Setting 0 hex: Reverse mode 1
Pulse Output 0 Origin Detection Method 0 hex: Origin detection method 0
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Direction Setting 0 hex: CW direction
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search/Return Initial Speed 0064 hex (100 pps)
0000 hex
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search High Speed 07D0 hex (2,000 pps)
0000 hex

1
1
0
0
CCW CW
Pulse Output 0
(0.10)
Pulse Output 0
Origin Signal Input
(0.06)
Pulse Output 0
(100.00 and 100.01)
Pulse
frequency
Execution of
ORG(889) starts.
Origin search starts.
Origin search
initial speed
Origin search
acceleration
rate
Origin search
high speed
Origin search
deceleration
rate
Stop
Origin search
proximity speed
214
Ladder Program
5-2-6 Origin Return
Overview
Moves the motor to the origin position from any other position. The origin
return operation is controlled by ORG(889).
The origin return operation returns the motor to the origin by starting at the
specified speed, accelerating to the target speed, moving at the target speed,
and then decelerating to a stop at the origin position.
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Proximity Speed 03E8 hex (1,000 pps)
0000 hex
Pulse Output 0 Origin Compensation 0000 hex
0000 hex
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Acceleration Rate 0032 hex (50 Hz/4 ms)
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Deceleration Rate 0032 hex (50 Hz/4 ms)
Pulse Output 0 Limit Input Signal Type 1: NO
Pulse Output 0 Origin Proximity Input Signal Type 1: NO
Pulse Output 0 Origin Input Signal Type 1: NO
Function Setting (example)
@ORG
#0000
#0000
CW limit detection
sensor
0.00
CW Limit
Input Signal
0.01
CCW limit
detection sensor
A540.08
CCW Limit
Input Signal
A540.09
Execution condition
Origin search 0:
#0000; Origin
search and
CW/CCW
method: #0000
Pulse frequency
Origin return
initial speed
Start
Started by executing
ORG(889)
Origin return
acceleration
rate
Origin return
target speed
Origin return
deceleration rate
Stop
Time
215
Procedure
PLC Setup
The various origin return parameters are set in the PLC Setup.
Origin Return Parameters
Explanation of the Origin Return Parameters
Origin Search/Return
Initial Speed
Sets the motor's starting speed when the origin return is executed. Specify
the speed in the number of pulses per second (pps).
Origin Return Target
Speed
Sets the motor's target speed when the origin return is executed. Specify the
speed in the number of pulses per second (pps).
Origin Return
Acceleration Rate
Sets the motor's acceleration rate when the origin return operation starts.
Specify the amount to increase the speed (Hz) per 4-ms interval.
Origin Return
Deceleration Rate
Sets the motor's acceleration rate when the origin return function is decelerat-
ing. Specify the amount to decrease the speed (Hz) per 4-ms interval.
Executing an Origin Return
Note An instruction execution error will occur if the origin is not determined (relative
coordinate system) when ORG(889) is executed to perform an origin return
operation.
1. Starting Speed for Origin Search and Origin Return
2. Origin return target speed
3. Origin return acceleration rate
4. Origin return deceleration rate
Outputs: Use either the CW/CCW method or Pulse +
direction method. The same method must be used
for both pulse output 0 and pulse output 1.
Various origin return parameter settings
Execution of ORG(889)
To specify the origin return operation, set bits 12
to 15 of the second operand to 1 hex.
Determine the origin return parameters.
Wire the outputs.
PLC Setup settings
Ladder program
Name Settings Remarks
Origin search/return initial speed 00000001 to 000186A0 hex
(1 Hz to 100 kHz)
J models: 00000001 to 00004E20 hex
(1 Hz to 20kHz)
Start of operation
Origin return target speed Same as above.
Origin return acceleration rate 0001 to FFFF hex
(1 to 65,535 Hz/4 ms)
Origin return deceleration rate 0001 to FFFF hex
(1 to 65,535 Hz/4 ms)
P
C
ORG(889)
P: Port specifier (Pulse output 0: #0000, Pulse output 1: #0001)
C: Control data
(Origin return and CW/CCW method: #1000, Origin search and pulse
+ direction method: #1100)
216
5-2-7 Pulse Output Procedures
Single-phase Pulse Output without Acceleration/Deceleration
The number of output pulses setting cannot be changed during positioning.
PULS(886) and SPED(885)
Determine the pulse output method,
output frequency, and port.
Pulse output method
CW/CCW inputs: Pulse outputs 0 to 1
Pulse + direction inputs: Pulse outputs 0 to 1
Output frequency: 1 Hz to 100 kHz (1 Hz units)
J models: 1 Hz to 20 kHz (1 Hz units)
Wire the outputs.
PLC Setup settings
Enable/disable the origin search function. Set the
various origin search parameters if the origin search
function is enabled.

Ladder program
PULS(886): Specify port number and set the number of
output pulses.
SPED(885): Specify port number and set the output
method (CW/CCW method or Pulse + direction method)
and pulse output control without acceleration/deceleration.
INI(880): Specify port number and stop pulse output when
necessary.
PRV(881): Specify port number and read pulse output PV
when necessary.
217
Single-phase Pulse Output with Acceleration/Deceleration
PULS(886) and ACC(888)
Determine the pulse output method,
output frequency, and port.
Wire the outputs.
PLC Setup settings
various origin search parameters if the origin
search function is enabled.
Ladder program
PULS(886): Specify port number and set the number
of output pulses.
ACC(888): Specify port number and set the output
method (CW/CCW method or Pulse + direction
method) and pulse output control with
acceleration/deceleration (the same rate is used for
both acceleration and deceleration.)
INI(880): Specify port number and stop pulse output
when necessary.
PRV(881): Specify port number and read pulse
output PV when necessary.
Pulse output method
CW/CCW inputs
218
Pulse Output with Trapezoidal Acceleration/Deceleration (Using PLS2(887))
5-2-8 Instructions Used for Pulse Outputs
The pulse output functions can be used by executing the pulse control instruc-
tions in the ladder program. For some instructions, the PLC Setup must be set
in advance. The following instructions can be combined for positioning and
speed control.
Supported Pulse
Instructions
Use the following 8 instructions to control the pulse outputs.
Determine the pulse output
method, output frequency, and port.
Wire the outputs.
PLC Setup settings
various origin search parameters if the origin
search function is enabled.
Ladder program
PLS2(887): Specify port number and set the
output method (CW/CCW method or Pulse +
direction method) and pulse output control with
trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration (different
rates can be set for acceleration and
deceleration).
INI(880): Specify port number and stop pulse
output when necessary.
PRV(881): Specify port number and read pulse
output PV when necessary.
Pulse output method
CW/CCW inputs
219
The following table shows the kinds of pulse outputs controlled by each
instruction.
Instruction Function Positioning (independent mode) Speed control
(continuous mode)
Origin
search
Pulse
output
without
accelera-
tion/
decelera-
tion
Pulse output with accel-
eration/deceleration
Pulse
output
without
accelera-
tion/
decelera-
tion
Pulse
output
with
accelera-
tion/
decelera-
tion
Trapezoi-
dal, equal
accelera-
tion/ decel-
eration
rates
Trapezoi-
dal, sepa-
rate
accelera-
tion/ decel-
eration
rates
PULS(886)
SET PULSES
Sets the number of pulses
to be output.
Used --- --- --- --- ---
SPED(885)
SPEED OUTPUT
Performs pulse output con-
trol without acceleration or
deceleration.
(When positioning, the
number of pulses must be
set in advance with
PULS(886).)
Used --- --- Used --- ---
ACC(888)
ACCELERATION
CONTROL
trol with acceleration and
deceleration.
(When positioning, the
number of pulses must be
set in advance with
PULS(886).)
--- Used --- --- Used ---
PLS2(887)
PULSE OUTPUT
trol with independent
acceleration and decelera-
tion rates.
(Also sets the number of
pulses.)
--- --- Used --- --- ---
ORG(889)
ORIGIN SEARCH
Actually moves the motor
with pulse outputs and
determines the machine
origin based on the Origin
Proximity Input and Origin
Input signals
--- --- --- --- --- Used
INI(880)
MODE CONTROL
Stops the pulse output.
Changes the pulse output
PV. (This operation deter-
mines the origin location.)
Used Used Used Used Used ---
PRV(881)
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER PV
READ
Reads the pulse output PV. Used Used Used Used Used ---
PWM(891)
PULSE WITH
VARIABLE DUTY
FACTOR
trol with variable duty fac-
tor pulse output.
--- --- --- --- --- ---
220
SET PULSES: PULS(886) PULS(886) is used to set the pulse output amount (number of output pulses)
for pulse outputs that are started later in the program using SPED(885) or
ACC(888) in independent mode.
SPEED OUTPUT:
SPED(885)
SPED(885) can be used to perform pulse output without acceleration or
deceleration. Either independent mode positioning or continuous mode speed
control is possible. For independent mode positioning, the number of pulses is
set using PULS(886).
SPED(885) can also be executed during pulse output to change the output
frequency, creating stepwise changes in the speed.
Operand Contents
P Port specifier 0000 hex: Pulse output 0
0001 hex: Pulse output 1
T Pulse type 0000 hex: Relative pulse output
0001 hex: Absolute pulse output
N First number
of pulses word
N and N+1 contain the number of pulses setting. (N contains
the rightmost 4 digits and N+1 contains the leftmost 4 digits.)
Relative pulse output:
0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex (0 to 2,147,483,647)
Absolute pulse output:
8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex (-2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
PULS(886)
P
T
N
P: Port specifier
T: Pulse type
N: Number of pulses
Operand Contents
T Output
mode
Bits 0 to 3 Mode
0 hex: Continuous
1 hex: Independent
Bits 4 to 7 Direction
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
Bits 8 to 11 Pulse output method (See note.)
0 hex: CW/CCW
1 hex: Pulse + direction
Bits 12 to 15 Not used. (Always 0 hex.)
F First pulse frequency
word
F and F+1 contain the pulse frequency setting, in units of
1 Hz. (F contains the rightmost 4 digits and F+1 contains
the leftmost 4 digits.)
0000 0000 to 000186A0 hex (0 Hz to 100 kHz)
J models: 0000 0000 to 00004E20 hex (0 Hz to 20 kHz)
SPED(885)
P
T
F
P: Port specifier
T: Output mode
F: First pulse frequency word
221
ACCELERATION
CONTROL: ACC(888)
Use ACC(888) to set the target frequency and acceleration and deceleration
rate and output pulses with acceleration and deceleration. (Acceleration rate
is the same as the deceleration rate.)
Either independent mode positioning or constant mode speed control is possi-
ble when used in combination with PULS(886). ACC(888) can also be exe-
cuted during pulse output to change the target frequency or acceleration/
deceleration rate, enabling smooth (sloped) speed changes.
PULSE OUTPUT:
PLS2(887)
Use PLS2(887) to set the startup frequency, acceleration rate, and decelera-
tion rate, and output a specified number of pulses. Only independent mode
positioning is supported.
PLS2(887) can also be executed during pulse output to change the number of
output pulses, target frequency, acceleration rate, or deceleration rate.
Operand Contents
M Output
mode
Bits 0 to 3 Mode
0 hex: Continuous
1 hex: Independent
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
0 hex: CW/CCW
S First
set-
tings
table
word
S Acceleration/deceleration rate:
0001 to FFFF hex (1 to 65,535 Hz)
Specify the increase or decrease in the frequency per
pulse control period (4 ms).
S+1 and
S+2
S and S+1 contain the target frequency setting, in units
of 1 Hz. (S+1 contains the rightmost 4 digits and S+2
contains the leftmost 4 digits.)
0000 0000 to 000186A0 hex (0 Hz to 100 kHz)
ACC(888)
P
M
S
P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
S: First word of settings table
PLS2(887)
P
M
S
F
P: Port specifier
M: Output mode
F: First word of starting frequency
222
ORIGIN SEARCH:
ORG(889)
ORG(889) performs an origin search or origin return operation. The required
PLC Setup parameters must be set before performing an origin search or ori-
gin return operation.
Origin Search
Positions the system to the origin based on the origin proximity input and ori-
gin input signals.
Origin Return
Returns the system from its present position to the pre-established origin.
Operand Contents
M Output
mode
Bits 0 to 3 Mode
0000 hex: Relative pulse output
0001 hex: Absolute pulse output
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
0 hex: CW/CCW
S First
set-
tings
table
word
S Acceleration rate:
0001 to FFFF hex (1 to 65,535 Hz)
S+1 Deceleration rate:
0001 to FFFF hex (1 to 65,535 Hz)
S+2 and
S+3
S+2 and S+3 contain the target frequency setting, in
units of 1 Hz. (S+2 contains the rightmost 4 digits and
S+3 contains the leftmost 4 digits.)
0000 0000 to 000186A0 hex (0 Hz to 100 kHz)
S+4 and
S+5
S+4 and S+5 contain the number of pulses setting. (S+4
contains the rightmost 4 digits and S+5 contains the left-
most 4 digits.)
Relative pulse output:
0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex (0 to 2,147,483,647)
Absolute pulse output:
8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex (-2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
F First starting fre-
quency word
F and F+1 contain the starting frequency setting, in units
of 1 Hz. (F contains the rightmost 4 digits and F+1 con-
tains the leftmost 4 digits.)
0000 0000 to 000186A0 hex (0 Hz to 100 kHz)
ORG(889)
P
C
P: Port specifier
C: Control data
223
MODE CONTROL: INI(880) In addition to the various interrupt and high-speed counter functions, INI(880)
can be used to change the pulse output PV or stop the pulse output.
Note This section explains the functions related to pulse outputs only. For details on
the INI(880) instructions high-speed counter or interrupt functions, refer to 6-1
Interrupt Functions or 5-1 High-speed Counters.
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER
PV READ: PRV(881)
In addition to its interrupt and high-speed counter functions, PRV(881) can be
used to read the pulse output PV or pulse output status information.
The status of the following flags is read as status information:
Pulse Output Status Flag
PV Underflow/Overflow Flag
Pulse Output Amount Set Flag
Pulse Output Completed Flag
Pulse Output Flag
No-origin Flag
At Origin Flag
Pulse Output Stopped Error Flag
Operand Contents
C Con-
trol
data
0 hex: CW/CCW
Bits 12 to 15 Mode
0 hex: Origin search
1 hex: Origin return
Operand Contents
1000 hex: PWM output 0
C Control data 0002 hex: Change the PV.
0003 hex: Stop pulse output.
NV First word of new PV NV and NV+1 contain the new PV when changing the
PV. (N contains the rightmost 4 digits and N+1 con-
tains the leftmost 4 digits.)
0000 0000 to FFFFFFFF hex
INI(880)
P
C
NV
P: Port specifier
C: Control data
NV: First word of new PV
PRV(881)
P
C
D
P: Port specifier
C: Control data
D: First destination word
224
Note This section explains the functions related to pulse outputs only. For details on
the PRV(881) instructions high-speed counter or interrupt functions, refer to
6-1 Interrupt Functions or 5-1 High-speed Counters.
PULSE WITH VARIABLE
DUTY FACTOR: PWM(891)
PWM(891) is used to output pulses with the specified duty factor.
Operand Contents
C Control data 0000 hex: Read the PV.
0001 hex: Read the status.
0003 hex: Read the pulse output frequency.
0013 hex: Read the frequency for 10-ms sampling.
0023 hex: Read the frequency for 100-ms sampling.
0033 hex: Read the frequency for 1-s sampling.
D First
desti-
nation
word
Reading PV
(D and D+1)
After the pulse output PV is read, the 8-digit hexadecimal
data is stored in D and D+1. (D contains the rightmost 4
digits and D+1 contains the leftmost 4 digits.)
Reading
pulse output
status
(D)
Bit 0 Pulse Output Status Flag
0: Constant speed
1: Accelerating/decelerating
Bit 1 PV Underflow/Overflow Flag
0: Normal
1: Error
Bit 2 Pulse Output Amount Set Flag
0: Not set
1: Set
Bit 3 Pulse Output Completed Flag
0: Output not completed
1: Output completed
Bit 4 Pulse Output Flag
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses
Bit 5 No-origin Flag
0: Origin established
1: Origin not established
Bit 6 At Origin Flag
0: Not stopped at origin
1: Stopped at origin
Bit 7 Pulse Output Stopped Error Flag
0: No error
1: Pulse output stopped due to error
Bits 8 to 15 Not used.
Reading
PWM output
status (D)
Bit 0 PWM Output Flag
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses
Bits 1 to 15 Not used.
PWM
P
F
D
P: Port specifier
F: Frequency
D: Duty factor
225
Combinations of
Pulse Control
Instructions
The following tables show when a second pulse control instruction can be
started if a pulse control operation is already being executed.
Generally, a second independent-mode positioning instruction can be started
if an independent-mode positioning instruction is being execute, and a second
continuous-mode speed control instruction can be started if a continuous-
mode speed control instruction is being executed. Operation cannot be
switched between the independent and continuous modes, although
PLS2(887) can be started while ACC(888) (continuous mode) is being exe-
cuted.
It is possible to start another operation during acceleration/deceleration and
start another positioning instruction during positioning.
Note (1) SPED(885) (Independent) to SPED(885) (Independent)
Operand Contents
P Port specifier 0000 hex: Pulse output 0 (duty factor set in 1% units, fre-
quency 0.1 Hz units)
0001 hex: Pulse output 1 (duty factor set in 1% units, fre-
quency 0.1 Hz units)
1000 hex: Pulse output 0 (duty factor set in 0.1% units,
frequency 0.1 Hz units)
1001 hex: Pulse output 1 (duty factor set in 0.1% units,
frequency 0.1 Hz units)
0100 hex: Pulse output 0 (duty factor set in 1% unit, fre-
quency 1 Hz units)
0101 hex: Pulse output 1 (duty factor set in 1% unit, fre-
quency 1 Hz units)
1100 hex: Pulse output 0 (duty factor set in 0.1% unit,
frequency 1 Hz units)
1101 hex: Pulse output 1 (duty factor set in 0.1% unit,
frequency 1 Hz units)
T Frequency 0001 to FFFF hex (0.1 to 6553.5 Hz, in 0.1 Hz units)
0001 to 8020 hex (1 to 32,800 Hz, in 1 Hz units)
S Duty factor Specify the duty factor of the pulse output, i.e., the percent-
age of time that the output is ON.
0000 to 03E8 hex: 0.0% to 100.0% (in 0.1 units)
0000 to 0064 hex: 0.0% to 100% (in 1% units)
Instruction being executed Starting instruction
(: Can be executed., : Instruction Error occurs and Error Flag goes ON)
INI(880) SPED(885)
(Independent)
SPED(885)
(Continuous)
ACC(888)
(Independent)
ACC(888)
(Continuous)
PLS2(887) ORG(889)
SPED(885) (Independent) (note 1) (note 3)
SPED(885) (Continuous) (note 2) (note 5)
ACC(888)
(Independent)
Steady speed (note 4) (note 6)
Accelerating or
decelerating
(note 4) (note 6)
ACC(888)
(Continuous)
Steady speed (note 5) (note 7)
Accelerating or
decelerating
(note 5) (note 7)
PLS2(887) Steady speed (note 4) (note 8)
Accelerating or
decelerating
(note 4) (note 8)
ORG(889) Steady speed
Accelerating or
decelerating

PWM
226
The number of pulses cannot be changed.
The frequency can be changed.
The output mode and direction cannot be switched.
(2) SPED(885) (Continuous) to SPED(885) (Continuous)
(3) SPED(885) (Independent) to ACC(888) (Independent)
The acceleration/deceleration rate can be changed.
(4) ACC(888) (Independent) to ACC(888) (Independent)
or PLS2(887) to ACC(888) (Independent)
The acceleration/deceleration rate can be changed. (The rate can
even be changed during acceleration or deceleration.)
(5) SPED(885) (Continuous) to ACC(888) (Continuous)
or ACC(888) (Continuous) to ACC(888) (Continuous)
The frequency can be changed. (The target frequency can even be
changed during acceleration or deceleration.)
(6) ACC(888) (Independent) to PLS2(887)
The number of pulses can be changed. (The setting can even be
(7) ACC(888) (Continuous) to PLS2(887)
(8) PLS2(887) to PLS2(887)
The number of pulses can be changed. (The setting can even be
227
5-2-9 Variable Duty Factor Pulse Outputs (PWM(891) Outputs)
Overview
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) pulse outputs can be output with a specified
duty factor. The duty factor is the ratio of the pulse's ON time and OFF time in
one pulse cycle. Use the PWM(891) instruction to generate variable duty fac-
tor pulses from a built-in output.
The duty factor can be changed while pulses are being output.
Bit Allocations
Procedure
Specifications
Note The frequency can be set up to 6553.5 Hz in the PWM(891) instruction, but
the duty factor accuracy declines significantly at high frequencies because of
limitations in the output circuit at high frequencies.
5-2-10 Example Pulse Output Applications
Outputting Pulses after a Preset Delay
This example program waits for a preset time (0.5 ms) after the interrupt input
(CIO 0.04) goes ON and then outputs 100,000 pulses at 100 kHz from pulse
output 0.
Word Bit Function
CIO 100 01 PWM output 0
03 PWM output 1
Item Specifications
Duty factor 0.0% to 100.0% in 0.1% increments
(Duty factor accuracy is +1%/0% at10 kHz, +5%/0% at
10 to 32.8 kHz .)
Frequency 0.1 Hz to 6,553.5 Hz
Set in 0.1 Hz units. (See note.)
Output mode Continuous mode
Instruction PWM(891)
PWM output 0 or PWM output 1
Enable/disable the origin search function.
Execute PWM(891).
Determine the pulse output port.
Wire the outputs.
PLC Setup settings
Ladder program
228
Input interrupt task 0 (interrupt task number 140) starts a scheduled interrupt
with a scheduled time of 0.5 ms. The scheduled interrupt task executes the
pulse output instructions and stops the scheduled interrupt.
Instructions Used MSKS(690) Enables the I/O interrupt. Starts the scheduled interrupt.
PULS(886) Sets the number of output pulses.
SPED(885) Starts the pulse output.
Preparation
PLC Setup
Built-in Input Settings
Pulse Output 0 Settings
MSKS PULS SPED
Pulse output 0
(CIO 100.00)
Interrupt input 0
(CIO 0.04)
I/O interrupt
response time
Scheduled interrupt
time 500 s
PLC Setup setting details
Use built-in input 0.04 as the interrupt input.
PLC Setup setting details
Do not use high-speed counter 0.
Do not use the pulse output 0 origin search function.
229
Scheduled Interrupt Time Unit Setting
PLC Setup setting details Data
Set the scheduled interrupt time units to 0.1 ms. 0002 hex
230
Ladder Program
Cyclic Task (Task 0)
Built-in Input 0 Interrupt Task (Interrupt Task 140)
* Select 0.1 ms for the setting units in the PLC Setup.
Scheduled Interrupt Task 0 (Interrupt Task 2)
#0000
MSKS(690)
0100
P_First_Cycle_Task
Task Start Flag
Built-in interrupt input 0
(IN0.04)
Unmask (Enable
interrupts.)
MSKS(690)
#0005
0014
A280.04
Pulse Output 0
Output In-progress
Flag
Scheduled interrupt 2
(Reset start)
Scheduled interrupt time
(5 x 0.1 ms* = 0.5 ms)
#0000
#0000
&100000
SPED(885)
MSKS(690)
#0001
&100000
#0000
0014
PULS(886)
#0000
P_On
Always ON
Flag
Pulse output 0
Relative pulse
specification
Number of output pulses
(100,000 pulses)
Pulse output 0
Specifies CW/CCW outputs,
CW direction, and
independent mode.
Target frequency
(100,000 Hz)
Stop scheduled interrupt
231
Positioning (Trapezoidal Control)
Specifications and
Operation
When the start input (0.00) goes ON, this example program outputs 600,000
pulses from pulse output 0 and turns the motor.
Instructions Used PLS2(887)
Preparation
PLC Setup
There are no settings that need to be made in the PLC Setup.
DM Area Settings PLS2(887) Settings (D00000 to D00007)
Ladder Program
Remarks Absolute pulses can be specified when the origin position has been deter-
mined.
If a target frequency that cannot be reached has been set, the target fre-
quency will be reduced automatically, i.e., triangular control will be per-
formed. In some cases where the acceleration rate is substantially greater
than the deceleration rate, the operation won't be true triangular control.
The motor will be operated at a constant speed for a short time between
the acceleration and deceleration.
100 Hz
Target frequency
50,000 Hz
Starting frequency
Start input (0.00)
Acceleration rate
300 Hz/4 ms
Number of
output pulses
600,000 pulses
Deceleration rate
200 Hz/4 ms
Setting details Address Data
Acceleration rate: 300 Hz/4 ms D0 012C
Deceleration rate: 200 Hz/4 ms D1 00C8
Target frequency: 50,000 Hz D2 C350
D3 0000
Number of output pulses: 600,000 pulses D4 27C0
D5 0009
Starting frequency: 100 Hz D6 0064
D7 0000
@PLS2 (887)
#0000
D0
D6
#0001
END(001)
0.00
Pulse output 1
Start input
Specifies CW/CCW output method,
CW side, and relative pulses
Target frequency, number of
pulses setting
Starting frequency
232
Jog Operation
Specifications and
Operation
Low-speed jog operation (CW) will be executed from pulse output 1 while
input 0.00 is ON.
Low-speed jog operation (CCW) will be executed from pulse output 1
while input 0.01 is ON.
High-speed job operation (CW) will be executed from pulse output 1 while
input 0.04 is ON.
High-speed jog operation (CCW) will be executed from pulse output 1
while input 0.05 is ON.
Instructions Used SPED(885) Starts and stops (immediate stop) the low-speed jog operations.
ACC(888) Starts and stops (decelerate to a stop) the high-speed jog opera-
tions.
Preparation
PLC Setup
DM Area Settings Settings to Control Speed while Jogging
(D0 to D1 and D10 to D15)
1,000 Hz
Target frequency
CW Low-speed
JOG (0.00)
CCW Low-speed
JOG (0.01)
Target frequency
100,000 Hz
CW High-speed jog
(0.04)
CCW high-speed
jog (0.05)
Acceleration/de-
celeration rate
100 Hz/4 ms
Acceleration/de-
celeration rate
100 Hz/4 ms
Target frequency (low speed): 1,000 Hz D0 03E8
D1 0000
Acceleration rate: 100 Hz/4 ms D10 0064
233
Ladder Program
Target frequency (high speed): 100,000 Hz D011 86A0
D12 0001
Deceleration rate: 100 Hz/4 ms (Not used.) D13 0064
Target frequency (stop): 0 Hz D14 0000
D15 0000
#0001
#0001
#0000
#0001
#0001
#0000
0.00 A281.04
W0.00 0.00
0.01 A281.04
W0.01 0.01
SPED(885)
SPED(885)
SPED(885)
#0000
D0
SET W0.00
#0000
RSET W0.00
#0010
D0
SET W0.01
SPED(885)
#0010
RSET W0.01
Low-speed
CW Start
Pulse Output
in Progress
Pulse output 1
CW side, and continuous mode.
Target frequency
Low-speed
CW output in
progress
Low-speed
CW Start
Low-speed
CCW Start
Outputting
Pulses
Pulse output 1
Target frequency
Low-speed
CCW output
in progress
Low-speed
CCW Start
234
Remarks PLS2(887) can be used to set a starting frequency or unequal acceleration
and deceleration rates, but there are limitations on the operating range
because the end point must be specified in PLS2(887).
Cutting Long Material Using Fixed Feeding
Specifications and
Operation
Outline
In this example, first jogging is used to position the material and then fixed-
distance positioning is used to feed the material.
#0001
#0001
#0001
#0001
ACC(888)
#0000
D10
SET W0.02
ACC(888)
#0000
D13
RSET W0.02
ACC(888)
#0010
D00010
SET W0.03
ACC(888)
#0010
D13
RSET W0.03
END(001)
0.04 A281.04
W0.02 0.04
0.05 A281.04
W0.03 0.05
High-speed
CW Start
Pulse Output
in Progress
Pulse output 1
High-speed
CW output in
progress
High-speed
CW Start
High-speed
CCW Start
Pulse Output
in Progress
Pulse output 1
Acceleration rate and target frequency
High-speed
CCW output
in progress
High-speed
CCW Start
Acceleration rate and target frequency
CW
1,000 Hz
10,000 Hz
50000
Material cut
with cutter
Material cut
with cutter
Material cut
with cutter
Acceleration: 1,000 Hz/4 ms
Jogging
Fixed-distance
feeding
(03E8 hex)
(2710 hex)
(03E8 hex)
(C350 hex)
235
Operation
1,2,3... 1. The workpiece is set at the starting position using the Jogging Switch Input
(IN 0.00).
2. The workpiece is feed the specified distance (relative) using the Position-
ing Switch Input (IN 0.01).
3. When feeding has been completed, the cutter is activated using the Cutter
Start Output (OUT 100.02).
4. Feeding is started again when the Cutter Finished Input (IN 0.02) turns
ON.
5. The feeding/cutting operation is repeated for the number of times specified
for the counter (C0, 100 times).
6. When the operation has been completed, the Cutting Operation Finished
Output (OUT 100.03). is turned ON.
The feeding operation can be canceled and operation stopped at any point
using the Emergency Switch Input (IN 0.03).
Instructions Used SPED(885)
PLS2(887)
Preparation
PLC Setup
DM Area Settings
Speed Settings for Jogging (D0 to D3)
Jogging switch
IN 0.00
Positioning switch
IN 0.01
Emergency stop switch
IN 0.03
Cut operation finished
OUT 100.03
Pulse output (CW/CCW)
Cutter finished
IN 0.02
Cutter start
OUT 100.02
Built-in I/O other than pulse outputs are used.
Target frequency: 1,000 Hz D0 03E8
D1 0000
Target frequency: 0 Hz D2 0000
D3 0000
236
Settings for PLS2(887) for Fixed-distance Feeding (D10 to D20)
Ladder Program
Acceleration rate: 1,000 Hz/4 ms D10 03E8
Deceleration rate: 1,000 Hz/4 ms D11 03E8
Target frequency: 10,000 Hz D12 2710
D13 0000
Number of output pulses: 50,000 pulses D14 C350
D15 0000
D17 0000
Counter setting: 100 times D20 0100
SPED(885)
#0000
#0000
D0
0.00
SET W0.00
A280.04
SPED(885)
#0000
#0000
D2

0.00
RSET W0.00
W0.00
@PLS2(887)
#0000
#0000
D10
D16
0.01
0.02
CNT
0000
D20
A280.03
100.02
A280.03
0.01
C0000
100.03
INI(880)
#0000
#0003
0
0.03
Jog Operation
Jogging
Switch
Pulse Output
In-Progress
Flag
Target frequency:
1,000 Hz
Jogging Flag
Jogging
Switch
Jogging
Flag
Target frequency:
0Hz
Jogging Flag
Fixed-distance Feed
Positioning
Switch
Cutter
Finished
Pulse Output
Completed Flag
Cutter activated
Counting Feed Operations
Emergency
Stop
Cutting Operation
Finished
Pulse Output
Completed Flag
Positioning
Switch
237
Remarks
1,2,3... 1. PLS22(887) used a relative pulse setting. This enables operation even if
the origin is not defined. The present position in A276 (lower 4 digits) and
A277 (upper 4 digits) is set to 0 before pulse output and then contains the
specified number of pulses.
2. ACC(888) can be used instead of SPED(885) for the jog operation. If
ACC(888) is used, acceleration/deceleration can be included in the jog op-
eration.
Vertically Conveying PCBs (Multiple Progressive Positioning)
Specifications and
Operation
Outline
1,2,3... 1. PCBs with components mounted are stored in a stocker.
2. When a stocker becomes full, it is moved to the conveyance point.
Positioning Operation for Vertical Conveyor
Operation Pattern
1,2,3... 1. An origin search is performed.
2. Fixed-distance positioning is repeated.
(2) (3)
(1)
Stocker conveyance
position
From mounter
238
3. The system is returned to the original position.
CW CCW
CW CCW
50,000 Hz
10000
(C350 hex)
CCW
limit
Origin
(servo
phase Z)
Origin
proximity
CW
limit
2. Fixed-distance
positioning repeated
3. Return to start
Acceleration/
deceleration:
1,000 Hz/4 ms
(03E8 hex)
Stocker
movement
completed
Stocker
moved
PCB storage
completed
PCB storage
enabled
1. Origin search
(2710 hex)
239
Wiring Example Using SmartStep A-series Servo Driver
Operation
1,2,3... 1. An origin search is performed using the Origin Search Switch (CIO 0.00).
2. When the origin search is finished, the PCB Storage Enabled Output
(CIO 100.03) is turned ON.
3. When a PCB has been stored, the stocker is raised (relative positioning)
using the PCB Storage Completed Input (CIO 0.03).
4. Storing PCBs is repeated until the stocker is full.
5. The number of PCBs in the stocker is counted with counter C0 by counting
the number of times the stocker is raised.
Stocker Movement Completed (CIO 0.04)
Origin Search Switch (CIO 0.00)
Emergency Stop Switch (CIO 0.01)
PCB Storage Completed (CIO 0.03)
Stocker Moving (CIO 100.02)
PCB Storage Enable (CIO 100.03)
SmartStep A-series
Servo Driver
R88A-CPU00@S and resistor
1
2
5
6
8
13
14
18
10
35
34
7
+CW
CW
+ECRST
ECRST
INP
33 ZCOM
32 Z
+24VIN
RUN
RESET
OGND
ALMCOM
ALM
FG
X1
XB
24 VDC
X1
Servo Driver
RUN input
24 VDC
BKIR
CW output (CIO 100.00)
CCW output (CIO 100.01)
4
3 +CCW
CCW
24-VDC input terminal (+)
24-VDC input terminal (-)
COM (CIO 100)
COM
1.6 k
1.6 k
1.6 k

R88A-CPU00@S
Shell
SMARTSTEP A-series Servo Driver
CP1L-M40/30DT-D, CP1L-20DT-D
Output Terminal Block
Pulse
output
0
Deviation counter reset output 0 (CIO 100.04)
Stocker moving (CIO 100.02)
PCB storage enable (CIO 100.03)
Input Terminal Block
Pulse 0 origin input signal (CIO 0.06)
Pulse 0 origin proximity input signal (CIO 0.10)
Origin search switch (CIO 0.00)
Emergency stop switch (CIO 0.01)
PCB storage completed (CIO 0.03)
Stocker movement completed (CIO 0.04)
Servo Driver
alarm reset input
240
6. When the stocker is full, it is moved (CIO 100.02) and only the conveyor is
lowered (absolute positioning) when stoker movement is completed (CIO
0.04).
The operation can be canceled and pulse output stopped at any point using
the Emergency Switch Input (CIO 0.01).
Preparation
PLC Setup
Note The origin search enable setting is read when the power supply is turned ON.
DM Area Settings Settings for PLS2(887) for Fixed-distance Positioning (D0 to D7)
Settings for PLS2(887) to Return to Start (D10 to D17)
Setting details
Enable origin search function for pulse output 0.
Deceleration rate: 1,000 Hz/4 ms D1 03E8
D3 0000
Number of output pulses: 10,000 pulses D4 2710
D5 0000
D7 0000
Acceleration rate: 300 Hz/4 ms D10 012C
Deceleration rate: 200 Hz/4 ms D11 00C8
D13 0000
241
Number of Repeats of Fixed-distance Positioning Operation (D20)
Number of output pulses: 10,000 15 pulses D14 49F0
D15 0002
D17 0000
Number of repeats of fixed-distance positioning operation
(number of PCBs in stocker)
D20 0015
242
Ladder Program
ORG(889)
#0000
#0000
0.00 W0.01
100.03
W0.04
W0.00
W0.00
W0.01
A280.05
W0.01
W0.05
W0.02
100.03
W0.02
0.03
W0.02
W0.03
W0.04
W0.03
W0.04
A280.03
@PLS2(887)
#0000
#0000
D0
D6
CNT
0000
D20 W0.09
Origin
Search
Switch
Origin
Search
Completed
Origin Search in
progress
Origin
Search in
progress
No Origin
Flag
Origin Search
Completed
Origin Search
Completed
Lift
positioning
start
PCB Storage
enabled
PCB
Stored
PCB
storage
completed
Lift positioning
start
PCB
Storage enabled
Positioning
Lift 10,000 pulses (relative) at a time
Lift
positioning
start
Lift
positioning
completed
Lift positioning in
progress
Lift
positioning
in
progress
Lift positioning
completed
Counter for Number of Lifts (Number of PCBs stored)
Lift positioning
completed
Lower
positioning
completed
Pulse Output
Completed Flag
Jog Operation
243
W0.04 C0000
0.01
W0.05
W0.06
100.02
W0.07
100.02
W0.07
0.04
W0.07
W0.08
W0.09
W0.08
W0.09
A280.03
@PLS2(887)
#0000
#0001
D10
D16
@INI(880)
#0000
#0003
0
W0.04 C0000
W0.06

0.05
A540.08
0.07
A540.09
When the stocker is not full (C0=OFF), store PCB,
and repeat lift positioning after PCB storage is completed.
Lift
positioning
completed
Stocker
full
PCB Stored
When the stocker is full (C0=ON), move the stocker,
and start lower positioning after stocker movement is completed.
Lift
positioning
completed
Stocker
full
Stocker Moving
Stocker
Moving
Lower
positioning
start
Stocker moving
output
Stocker
moving
output
Stocker
movement
completed
Lower positioning
start
Positioning
Lower to "0" position (absolute pulses)
Lower
positioning
start
Lower
positioning
start
Lower positioning
in progress
Lower
positioning
in progress
Pulse
output
completed
Lower positioning
completed
Emergency Stop (Pulse Output Stopped)
Emergency
stop
switch
Repeat Limit Input Settings
Limit inputs are allocated to external sensors using the following programming.
Built-in
input
CW limit input
signal
Built-in
input
CCW limit input
signal
244
Palletize: Two-axis Multipoint Positioning
Specifications and
Operation
Outline
Operation Pattern
1,2,3... 1. An origin search is performed.
2. A workpiece is grasped and moved to position A.
3. The workpiece is grasped at one position and moved back and forth to sev-
eral assembly positions.
Note The X and Y axes are moved independently, i.e., interpolation is not per-
formed.
X axis
Y axis
Cylinder
Workpieces grasped
and moved.
B
C
50000 30000
35000
25000
5000
5000
A
D
(C350 hex) (7530 hex)
(88B8 hex)
(61A8 hex)
(1388 hex)
(1388 hex)
1. Origin search
2. Move to
position A.
3. Move back and
forth to several
positions.
Origin
1
.

O
r
i
g
i
n

s
e
a
r
c
h
X axis (CW)
Y axis (CW)
245
Wiring Example Using SmartStep A-series Servo Driver

Origin Search Switch (CIO 0.00)
X axis
Y axis
246
X Axis
Y Axis
1
2
5
6
8
13
14
18
10
35
34
7
INP
33 ZCOM
32 Z
24VIN
RUN
RESET
OGND
ALMCOM
ALM
FG
X1
XB
24 VDC
X1
24 VDC
BKIR
4
3

R88A-CPU00@S
SMARTSTEP A-series Servo Driver CP1L-M40/30DT-D, CP1L-L20DT-D
Pulse
output
0
COM (CIO 100)
COM
+CW
CW
+ECRST
ECRST
+CCW
CCW
1.6 k
1.6 k
1.6 k
Shell
Servo Driver
RUN input
Servo Driver
alarm reset input
1
2
5
6
8
13
14
18
10
35
34
7
+CW
CW
+ECRST
ECRST
INP
33 ZCOM
32 Z
24VIN
RUN
RESET
OGND
ALMCOM
ALM
FG
X1
XB
24 VDC
X1
24 VDC
BKIR
4
3 +CCW
CCW

Servo Driver
RUN input
Servo Driver
alarm reset input
R88A-CPU00@S
SMARTSTEP A-series Servo Driver CP1L-M40/30DT-D, CP1L-L20DT-D
Pulse
output
1
COM (CIO 100)
COM
1.6 k
1.6 k
1.6 k
Shell
247
Operation
1,2,3... 1. An origin search is performed using the Origin Search Switch (CIO 0.00).
2. When the origin search is finished, the following operations are performed
continuously.
Move to A.
Move to B and return to A.
Move to C and return to A.
Move to D and return to A.
3. An emergency stop can be performed using the Emergency Stop Input
(CIO 0.01)
Preparation
PLC Setup
Note The origin search enable setting is read when the power supply is turned ON.
Setting details
Enable origin search function for pulse output 0 and 1.
248
DM Area Settings
Starting Frequency
PLS2(887) Settings to Move from Origin to Position A
PLS2(887) Settings to Move from Position A to Position B
X-axis starting frequency D0 0000
Y-axis starting frequency D2 0000
X axis Acceleration rate: 2,000 Hz/4 ms D10 07D0
Deceleration rate: 2,000 Hz/4 ms D11 07D0
Target frequency: 100,000 Hz D12 86A0
D13 0001
D15 0000
Y axis Acceleration rate: 2,000 Hz/4 ms D20 07D0
D23 0001
D25 0000
D33 0001
Number of output pulses: 25,000 pulses D34 61A8
D35 0000
249
PLS2(887) Settings to Move from Position A to Position C
PLS2(887) Settings to Move from Position A to Position D
D43 0001
D45 0000
D53 0001
Number of output pulses: 35,000 pulses D54 88B8
D55 0000
D63 0001
D65 0000
D73 0001
Number of output pulses: 25,000 pulses D74 61A8
D75 0000
D83 0001
D85 0000
250
Ladder Program
000000
(000000)
[Program Name: New Program1]
[Section Name: Section1]
Origin Search for X and Y Axis
0.00
Origin
Search
Switch
SET
W0.00
<W000.00>
a02 a06
000001
(000002)
W0.00 W1.14 Origin Search
start
<W001.14>
a48
W1.15
Origin
Search
completed
RSET
W0.00
<W000.00>
a02 a06
000002
(000006)
Operation 1: Positioning to A
W0.00 SET
W0.01
<W000.01>
a08 a12
000003
(000008)
W0.01 W1.00 Positioning to A
start
<W001.00>
a54
W2.00
Positioning
to A
completed
RSET
W0.01
<W000.01>
a08 a12
000004
(000012)
Operation 2: Positioning to B
W0.01 SET
W0.02
<W000.02>
a14 a18
000005
(000014)
W0.02 W1.01 Positioning to B
start
<W001.01>
a63
W2.01
Positioning
to B
completed
RSET
W0.02
<W000.02>
a14 a18
000006
(000018)
W0.02 SET
W0.03
<W000.03>
a20 a24
000007
(000020)
start
<W003.00>
a55
W2.00
Positioning
to A
completed
RSET
W0.03
<W000.03>
a20 a24
000008
(000024)
Operation3: Positioning to C
251
W0.03 SET
W0.04
<W000.04>
a26 a30
000009
(000026)
W0.04 W1.02 Positioning to C
start
<W001.02>
a69
W2.02
Positioning
to C
completed
RSET
W0.04
<W000.04>
a26 a30
000010
(000030)
W0.04 SET
W0.05
<W000.05>
a32 a36
000011
(000032)
start
<W003.01>
a56
W2.00
Positioning
to A
completed
RSET
W0.05
<W000.05>
a32 a36
000012
(000036)
Operation 4: Positioning to D
W0.05 SET
W0.06
<W000.06>
a38 a42
000013
(000038)
W0.06 W1.03 Positioning to D
start
<W001.03>
a75
W2.03
Positioning
to D
completed
RSET
W0.06
<W000.06>
a38 a42
000014
(000042)
W0.06 SET
W0.07
<W000.07>
a44
000015
(000044)
start
<W003.02>
a57
W2.00
Positioning
to A
completed
RSET
W0.07
<W000.07>
a44
000016
(000048)
Origin Search Start and Completion for X and Y Axis
W1.14
Origin
Search
start
@ORG
(889)
#0
#0
[OP1]
[OP2]
@ORG
(889)
#1
#0
[OP1]
[OP2]
252
A280.05
No Origin
Flag
A281.05
No Origin
Flag
W1.15 Origin Search
completed
<W001.15>
a04
000017
(000054)
Positioning to A Start and Completion for X and Y axis
W1.00
Positioning
to A
start
@PLS2
(887)
#0
#1
D10
D0
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
<cD00000>
c64 c70 c76
W3.00
Positioning
to A
start
W3.01
Positioning
to A
start
W3.02
Positioning
to A
start
@PLS2
(887)
#1
#1
D20
D2
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
<cD00002>
c65 c71 c77
A280.03
Pulse
output
completed
A281.03
pulse
output
completed
W2.00 Positioning to A
completed
<W002.00>
a10 a22 a34 a46
000018
(000063)
Positioning to B Start and Completion for X and Y axis
W1.01
Positioning
to B
start
@PLS2
(887)
#0
#1
D30
D0
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
<cD00000>
c58 c70 c76
@PLS2
(887)
#1
#1
D40
D2
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
<cD00002>
c59 c71 c77
A280.03
Pulse
output
completed
A281.03
pulse
output
completed
W2.01 Positioning to B
completed
<W002.01>
a16
000019
(000069)
Positioning to C Start and Completion for X and Y axis
W1.02
Positioning
to C
start
@PLS2
(887)
#0
#1
D50
D0
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
253
<cD00000>
c58 c64 c76
@PLS2
(887)
#1
#1
D60
D2
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
<cD00002>
c59 c65 c77
A280.03
Pulse
output
completed
A281.03
pulse
output
completed
W2.02 Positioning to C
completed
<W002.02>
a28
000020
(000075)
Positioning to D Start and Completion for X and Y axis
W1.03
Positioning
to D
start
@PLS2
(887)
#0
#1
D70
D0
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
<cD00000>
c58 c64 c70
@PLS2
(887)
#1
#1
D80
D2
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
<cD00002>
c59 c65 c71
A280.03
Pulse
output
completed
A281.03
pulse
output
completed
W2.03 Positioning to D
completed
<W002.03>
a40
000021
(000081)
0.01
Emergency
stop
switch
@INI
(880)
#0
#3
0
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
<c0>
c83
<0.00>
a00
<0.01>
a81
<0.06>
b84
<0.07>
b86
<0.08>
b88
<0.09>
b90
@INI
(880)
#1
#3
0
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
<c0>
c82
<0.00>
a00
<0.01>
a81
<0.06>
b84
<0.07>
b86
254
<0.08>
b88
<0.09>
b90
000022
(000084)
Limit Input Setting
0.04
Built-in
input
A540.08 CW limit input
signal X axis
000023
(000086)
0.05
Built-in
input
A540.09 CCW limit input
signal X axis
000024
(000088)
0.08
Built-in
input
A541.08 CW limit input
signal Y axis
000025
(000090)
0.09
Built-in
input
A541.09 CCW limit input
signal Y axis
255
Feeding Wrapping Material: Interrupt Feeding
Specifications and
Operation
Feeding Wrapping Material in a Vertical Pillow Wrapper
Operation Pattern
Speed control is used to feed wrapping material to the initial position. When
the marker sensor input is received, fixed-distance positioning is performed
before stopping.
Operation
1,2,3... 1. Speed control is used to feed wrapping material to the initial position when
the Start Switch (CIO 0.00) is activated.
2. When the Marker Sensor Input (0.04) is received, PLS2(887) is executed
in interrupt task 140.
3. Fixed-distance positioning is executed with PLS2(887) before stopping.
4. An emergency stop is executed to stop pulse output with the Emergency
Stop input (0.01).
Start Switch (CIO 0.00)
Pulse output
(CW/CCW)
Marker sensor
(Built-in input 0.04)
Position
control
Speed
control
10000 Hz
500 Hz/4 ms
(2710 hex)
(01F4 hex)
Speed
control
Position control
5,000 (1388 hex) pulses
output before stopping.
Input interrupt task
executes PLS2(887)
Marker sensor
input (0.04)
256
Preparation
PLC Setup
Note The interrupt input setting is read when the power supply is turned ON.
DM Area Settings
Speed Control Settings to Feed Wrapping Material to Initial Position
Positioning Control Settings for Wrapping Material
Setting details
Enable using built-in input IN0 as an interrupt input.
D2 0000
Acceleration rate: 500 Hz/4 ms D10 01F4
Deceleration rate: 500 Hz/4 ms D11 01F4
D13 0000
D15 0000
D17 0000
257
Ladder Program
Cyclic Task Program
(Executed at Startup)
Program for Interrupt Task
140
000000
(000000)
Enabling Input Interrupt 0 (IN0)
P_First_Cycle
MSKS
(690)
6
#0
[OP1]
[OP2]
000001
(000002)
Feeding Material with Speed Control
0.00
Material
feed start
W0.01
Material
positioning
completed
W0.00 Material being
fed
<W000.00>
a03
W0.00
Material
being fed
@ACC
(888)
#0
#0
D0
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
A280.03 A280.04 W0.01 Material
positioning
completed
<W000.01>
b04
000002
(000010)
0.01
Emergency
stop
switch
@INI
(880)
#0
#3
0
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
<0.00>
a02
<0.01>
a10
Pulse Output
Completed Flag
Pulse Output
Completed Flag
First Cycle Flag
000000
(000000)
Interrupt Task for Master Sensor ON
Starting interrupt Feed
P_On
Always ON Flag
PLS2
(887)
#0
#0
D10
D16
[OP1]
[OP2]
[OP3]
[OP4]
258
Inverter Positioning Section 5-3
5-3 Inverter Positioning
5-3-1 Features
Simple, accurate high-speed positioning can be achieved using an inverter.
This enables a far more economical positioning system than with a servomo-
tor.
Feedback Control
with Error Counter
A position error counter built into the CP1L CPU Unit enables high-precision
positioning with an Inverter using feedback control. The PULSE OUTPUT
instruction is used in the ladder program in the CP1L CPU Unit to output inter-
nal pulses to a built-in error counter.
The error counter calculates the position error from the number of input inter-
nal pulses and the number of feedback pulses from the rotary encoder, and
sends speed commands to the inverter so that the position error goes to zero.
Reducing Positioning
Time
With traditional inverter positioning, positioning patterns are created in which
set positions are detected to trigger changes in the speed. Pulses are read
from the encoder and compared to set values during positioning to enable
determining when a position requiring a speed change has been reached.
This results in positioning errors at speed-change points when stopping at
high speed, reducing stopping precision. To ensure high-precision positioning,
sufficient deceleration was required before stopping, but this increases the
positioning time.
With the CP1Ls inverter positioning function, feedback pulses are used so
that the prevent position is always known, increasing positioning accuracy.
And because preset positioning patterns are used for deceleration and stop-
ping, positioning time is reduced.
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CP1L CPU Unit
Feedback pulses
Ladder program
Inverter
PLS2 instruction
Speed command
RS-485 or analog output
Encoder
Motor
Error
counter
Positioning
instruction
Frequency
command
Internal pulses
259
Traditional Inverter Positioning
The PLC counts the feedback pulses from the encoder using a high-speed
counter. When a deceleration point is reached, the speed is changed to con-
trol the stop position. If the precision of the stop position must be increased,
the stop position must also be detected to control positioning.

PLC
Speed change judgments
Multi-step or
speed
commands
Inverter
Power
supply
frequency
Inductive motor
Encoder
Feedback pulses
If Positioning Speed Is Increased:
Frequency
Calculated speed-
change point
Point where speed was
actually changed (High speed
results in positioning error.)
Preset
deceleration
Position
Actual
Settings
Positioning
error occurs
Positioning
error occurs!
Command
output
Setting
Actual
Changing the speed
is delayed.
Time
If Positioning Accuracy Is Increased:
Frequency
Calculated speed-
change point Points where speed was
actually changed
Low-speed
operation
Actually stopping
point
Calculated
stopping
point
Time Position
Actual
Settings
Positioning
error occurs
Positioning
error
continues
Error is reduced
by using a low
speed
Positioning
error is
reduced
Command
output
Setting
Actual
Time
Stopping position
is reached faster
due to high-speed
positioning error.
Stopping from a low speed is necessary to prevent positioning error.
The speed of high-speed operation produces error, requiring that
the deceleration start position be calculated and adjusted so that
a low speed is achieved near the stopping point.
The need for low-speed operation near the stopping position
increases the positioning time. PLC
260
Inverter Positioning with the CP1L
With the CP1Ls inverter positioning function, feedback is constantly read for
the positioning data while controlling the position.
Note (1) The CP1Ls inverter positioning function is designed to increase position-
ing speed and stopping precision by reading position information and us-
ing a feedback loop with an error counter to switch speeds. It does not
increase the response, stopping precision, or speed change rate of the
inverter and motor. These are characteristics of the inverter and motor.
Refer to user documentation on your inverter and motor for details.
(2) The corresponding pulse output number (0 or 1) cannot be used for the
PULSE WITH VARIABLE DUTY FACTOR instruction (PWM) if inverter
positioning 0 or 1 is used. The high-speed counter of the same number
(0 or 1) is used to input the feedback pulse.

CP1L
Position feedback
Speed command
Inverter
Power
supply
frequency
Inductive motor
Encoder
Feedback pulses
There is no positioning error because the present position and position error
are constantly monitored and corrected.
Frequency
Low-speed operation is not required to prevent
positioning error. Control is simplified because the
low-speed position does not need to be calculated.
Time
Time
Position
Actual/Settings
Command output
Settings/Actual
Positioning is faster because low-speed
operation is not used.
261
5-3-2 System Configuration
Speed Commands
Using Serial
Communications or
Analog Outputs
There are two ways to send speed commands to the inverter: serial communi-
cations and analog outputs.
Note (1) The inverter positioning function uses either serial communications or an
analog output, and is thus possible with a CP1L CPU Unit with either tran-
sistor or relay outputs.
(2) The inverter positioning function does not use external pulse outputs.
Normal outputs are used for commands to the inverter (e.g., forward/re-
verse commands).

SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
COMM
CP1L
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
OUT
CP1L
Speed Commands Using Serial Communications
Inverter
Speed Commands Using an Analog Output
OR
RS-485 communications
(Modbus-RTU)
P1W-CIF11
(RS-422A/485
Option Board)
Serial communications
mode: Serial Gateway
3G3MV or 3G 3RV
General-purpose
motor
Feedback
pulses
Encoder
CP1W/CPM1A-MAD11
(Analog I/O Unit)
CP1W/CPM1A-DA041
(Analog Output Unit)
262
5-3-3 Functional Overview
Operation
1. To use inverter positioning, the motor and encoder specifications, feed-
back gain, and other parameters must be set in the PLC Setup. The high-
speed counter and inverter must also be set.
2. Pulse output instructions, such as PLS2 or PULS with SPED, are used to
execute positioning. Although normally the pulse output instructions are
used to output pulses from CP1L output contacts, when inverter position-
ing 0 or inverter positioning 1 is enabled in the PLC Setup, the internal po-
sition error counter (called simply the error counter) is enabled and the
pulse output instruction will output internal pulses to the error counter. Both
error counters 0 and 1 can be used at the same time.
3. For the number of pulses (i.e., the amount of movement) set in the pulse
output instruction, use the number of feedback pulses from the encoder.
For the pulse frequency set in the pulse output instruction, use the motor
power supply frequency converted to the feedback pulse frequency from
the encoder. (Refer to 5-3-7 Determining the Internal Pulse Output Fre-
quency for details.)
4. Specify an inverter positioning port for the pulse output instruction (port 0:
0020, port 1: 0021). The internal pulses will be output to the error counter
for the specified port.
5. The number of pulses remaining in the error counter is converted to a pow-
er supply frequency command for the inverter according to a value set in
the PLC Setup and output to a word in the Auxiliary Area in increments of
0.01 Hz.
6. The frequency command value output to the Auxiliary Area is output to the
inverter from the ladder program according to the inverter command meth-
od (i.e., RS-485 communications or analog output). (Refer to 5-3-9 Auto-
matic Calculation of Inverter Frequency Command Value for details.)
CP1L
Feedback pulses
(See note.)
CP1W-CIF11
CP1W-DA041/MAD11
CPM1A-DA041/MAD11
Point 1.
Point 2.
Point 3.
Point 4.
Point 8.
Point 9.
Point 7.
Point 5.
Point 6.
Point 1.
PLC Setup
Inverter Positioning
Settings
Enable function
Calculation cycle
Motor/encoder specs
Gain
In-position width
Min./max. output
Error settings
Etc.
High-speed
Counter Settings
Enable counter
Mode settings
Etc.
Serial Port Settings
(When using serial
communications for
outputs to the inverter.)
Ladder Program
Port Setting
No. 0: #0020
No. 1: #0021
Frequency command
conversions for inverter
MOV
(automatically
calculated inverter
frequency
commands
MOV
(forward/reverse
operation)
Output to CP1W-CIF11
Analog output
settings
Output to Analog Unit
Analog output: Output bits
Serial: Serial communications
Forward/reverse commands
and other commands
Error Counter Status
(forward/reverse commands, in-position
status, etc.)
Stored in Auxiliary Area bits.
Position
feedback
Internal pulses
Error
counter
Conversion
using PLC Setup
Gain
Auxiliary
Area word
0.01 Hz
increments
Serial or
analog
output
Inverter
Power
supply
frequency
Inductive
motor
Encoder
High-speed
counter input
terminal
Output
compensation
(upper/lower
limits)
Pulse output
instruction
(PLS2, PULS +
SPED, etc.)
MOV
(operation
commands,
output values,
present values
Positioning
instructions
Modbus
communications
register settings
Note: There is no speed or current (i.e.,
torque) loop.
263
7. When a speed command is sent to the inverter, the motor will turn at the
command speed and feedback pulses (i.e., the amount of movement) from
the encoder will be returned to a high-speed counter of the CP1L. The
CP1L will continue to send a speed command to the inverter until the error
counter (i.e., the position error) goes to zero, i.e., until positioning has been
completed.
8. When the error counter goes to zero, the speed command to the inverter
will also go to zero. Even after the completion of internal pulse output (i.e.,
position command) from the pulse output instruction, the CP1L will main-
tain the error counter so that is remains at zero.
9. The status of the error counter (such as the command direction and in-po-
sition status) will be stored in the Auxiliary Area. This status can be read
from the user program to enable controlling output of commands to the in-
verter.
For example, if a change in the load causes the motor shaft to turn, feedback
pulses from the encoder will enter the error counter, the value in the error
counter will be reduced, and the Reverse Command Flag in the Auxiliary Area
will turn ON. By writing the ladder program to output a reverse operation com-
mand to the inverter for the Reverse Command Flag, a command in the oppo-
site direction of motor shaft movement will be output from the CP1L to the
inverter, causing the motor to return to its original position. This compensating
operation to continuously maintain the current stop position is called a servo
lock.
Other Functions
Servo Locks with Vector
Control Inverters
The servo lock on an inverter can be used to stop positioning. By using the
inverters servo lock, the inverter positioning function and the output command
to the inverter can be stopped from the user program without using feedback
control even if the error counter value is not zero. This enables servo locks
when using an inverter with vector control.
Clearing the Error Counter
for Errors
If the motor shaft is moved manually for error stops or when the inverter is
stopped, feedback pulses will accumulate in the error counter. This can be
very dangerous because it may cause the motor to suddenly return to the
original position at high speed when operation is started again. To prevent
such problems, an error counter error output can be produced when more
than a set number of pulses accumulated in the error counter when position-
ing operations are stopped.
264
Low-speed Operation
Using Minimum Output
Setting
An inductive motor driven with an inverter is different from a servomotor in that
the torque at low speeds is so low that it may not be possible to turn the motor
shaft at the minimum frequency. The CP1L provide a minimum output setting
the ensure a minimum output to enable positioning at low speeds even when
there are extremely few pulses in the error counter.
Absolute Positioning The amount of movement (i.e., amount of rotation) is input to the high-speed
counter as feedback pulses. During inverter positioning, the present value of
the high-speed counter can be used as an absolute position.
Note The absolute position will change if the present value of the high-speed
counter is changed or the high-speed counter is reset.
5-3-4 Specifications
Specifications
Pulse frequency
Time
In-position width
Pulse Output Flag
In-position flag
PLS2
instruction
Error counter
present value
Error counter
error setting
Error Counter Error
Flag (Output value cleared.)
Error Counter Reset Bit
(Error counter cleared.)
Motor shaft
turned manually.
Error counter
error occurs.
Item Specification
Applicable inverters Inverter that receives frequency commands from an analog
input or via Modbus-RTU communications. (Control method:
V/f control, vector control, etc.)
Applicable motors Depends on the inverter (e.g., squirrel-cage inductive motor)
Number of position-
ing ports and
response frequency
Two ports at 100 kHz (J models: 20 kHz) (within the speed
command range of the pulse output instructions)
Inverter command
output method
Modbus-RTU communications commands or analog output
(from ladder program)
Present value coor-
dinate system
With origin: Absolute coordinate system
Without origin: Relative coordinate system
Present value range 32 bits: 8000 000 to 7FFF FFFF hex (range of position com-
mand values and present values for pulse output instructions)
Output modes Continuous output (Number of pulses not specified.)
Independent mode (Number of pulses specified.)
Acceleration/decel-
eration control
Trapezoidal or S-curve acceleration/deceleration
265
Note (1) If inverter positioning 0 is used, pulse output 0 and PWM0 cannot be
used. If inverter positioning 1 is used, pulse output 1 and PWM1 cannot
be used.
(2) If inverter positioning 1 is used with a CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points, origin
searches cannot be used.
(3) If the continuous output mode is specified (i.e., if the number of pulses is
not specified), be sure to use the high-speed counter (linear mode) so
that it does not overflow.
High-speed Counter
Specifications for Inverter
Positioning
Note Target value matching and zone comparisons can be used for high-speed
counters with a feedback pulse input from an encoder even when using
inverter positioning.
Specifications of
number of pulses
Relative positions: 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(2,147,483,647 incrementing and decrementing)
Absolute positions: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
(Ranges of position command values and present values for
pulse output instructions)
Origin searches Motor driver and signal wire modes: 3 modes
Origin search modes: 2 modes
Origin detection methods: 3 methods
Feedback pulse
input ports
High-speed counter 0 and high-speed counter 1 (fixed)
Maximum response frequency: 100 kHz (J models: 20 kHz)
Present value range
for feedback pulses
32 bits: 8000 000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
Error counter range 8000 to 7FFF hex (signed)
Error counter calcu-
lation cycle
4 to 1,020 ms (x4)
Item Specification
Item Specification
Response frequency and num-
ber of counters
Two 2-phase counters at 50 kHz and two single-
phase counters at 100 kHz
Counting mode Differential-phase inputs (x4), up/down pulse
inputs, or pulse plus direction inputs
Numeric range mode Linear mode
Note Always set linear mode when using inverter
positioning.
Numeric range 32 bits (2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
Reset method Phase Z signal (reset input) + software reset, or
software reset
Interrupts
(See note.)
Target value
matching
Up to 48 target values and interrupt task numbers
can be registered.
Zone compari-
son
Up to 8 sets of upper values, lower values, and
interrupt task numbers can be registered.
266
5-3-5 Application Procedure for Inverter Positioning
Positioning Instruction Settings
PULSE OUTPUT (PLS2)
Port: Inverter positioning, Mode: Absolute pulse
SET PULSES (PULS)
+ SPEED OUTPUT (SPED)
Mode: Independent
SET PULSES (PULS)
+ ACCELERATION CONTROL (ACC)
Port: Inverter positioning, Mode: Independent
Determine positioning
patterns.
Decided to use error counter 0 or 1.
Determine inverter specifications
Wire the system.
Set inverter parameters.
Set PLC Setup.
Write ladder program.
Determine applicability.
Determine instructions to use.
PLS2
PULS + SPED
PULS + ACC
Etc.
For example, the control method (V/f control
or vector control)
RS-485 communications (Modbus-RTU)
Analog signal
Enable inverter positioning
Error counter calculation cycle
Gain
In-position width
Minimum output
Error counter error setting
Power supply frequency per motor rotations/s
Number of encoder pulses per motor rotation
High-speed counter
Counting mode
Numeric range mode
Etc.
Enter positioning instructions.
Program scaling for inverter frequency commands.
Program forward/reverse operation instructions, stopping instructions,
etc.
Determine inverter command
method.
267
MODE CONTROL (INI)
Port: Inverter positioning, stopping inverter positioning
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER PV READ (PRV)
Port: Inverter positioning, Operation: Reading error counter, inverter posi-
tioning status, or error counter present value
Automatic Calculation of Inverter Frequency Commands
For either serial communications or an analog output, the power supply
frequency per motor revolutions/s, the number of encoder pulses per
motor revolution, and the error counter calculation cycle can be set in the
PLC Setup to automatically calculate the inverter frequency command
values and store it in A23/A33 in increments of 0.01 Hz.
For serial communications, the ladder program is used to output the value
in A23/A33 to the inverter using serial communications.
For analog output, the value in A23/A33 can be scaled to analog output
values and output from the Analog Unit to the inverter.
Forward/Reverse Operation Commands, Stopping Commands, Etc.
The Forward Command Flag (A26.01/A36.01) and Reverse Command
Flag (A26.02/A36.02) can be used as input conditions for forward and
reverse operation commands.
The Operation Command Flag (A26.00/A36.00) and In-position Flag
(A26.03/A36.03) can be used as input conditions to execute scaling to
inverter frequency commands and to execute stop commands.
5-3-6 Instruction Specifications
The normal pulse output instructions are used (PLS2, PULS + SPED, or
PULS + ACC). One of the inverter positioning ports is specified as the port for
the instruction. Just like pulses are output externally for the normal pulse out-
put instructions, error counter pulses are accumulated in the internal error
counter when executing inverter positioning.
Port Designation
Operand
Specifications
When executing pulse output instructions or status read instructions for
inverter positioning, a port number for inverter positioning is specified for the
port operand of the instruction. The following values are used.
0020 hex: Inverter positioning 0
When reading the present value of inverter positioning, use the following val-
ues to specified the port number for inverter positioning.
0030 hex: Inverter positioning 0 (signed)
0031 hex: Inverter positioning 1 (signed)
Set value Specified port Applicable instructions
0000 Pulse output 0 ---
0010 High-speed counter input 0 ---
0020 Inverter positioning 0 SPED, PULS, ACC, PLS2, INI, PRV, ORG
0021 Inverter positioning 1 SPED, PULS, ACC, PLS2, INI, PRV, ORG
268
Applicable
Instructions
The following seven instructions can be used to execute inverter positioning.
The relationship between the instructions and internal pulse outputs is as fol-
lows:
0030 Error counter 0 (signed) PRV
0031 Error counter 1 (signed) PRV
0100 Interrupt input 0 (counter
mode)
---
: : :
0107 Interrupt input 7 (counter
mode)
---
1000 PWM output 0 ---
1001 PWM output 1 ---
Set value Specified port Applicable instructions
Instruction Overview Positioning (Independent Mode) Origin
searches
Pulse output
with no
acceleration/
deceleration
Pulse output with acceleration/
deceleration
Trapezoid,
same rate for
acceleration/
deceleration
Trapezoid,
different rates
for acceleration/
deceleration
PULS(886)
SET PULSES
Sets the number of internal
pulses to output.
Applicable --- --- ---
SPED(885)
SPEED OUTPUT
Controls pulse output without
acceleration or deceleration. (The
number of internal pulses must be
set in advance with PULS(886).)
Applicable --- --- ---
ACC(888)
ACCELERATION
CONTROL
Controls pulse output with accel-
eration or deceleration using the
same rate for both. (The number
of internal pulses must be set in
advance with PULS(886).)
--- Applicable --- ---
PLS2(882)
PULSE OUTPUT
Controls pulse output with accel-
eration or deceleration using a dif-
ferent rate for each (The number
of internal pulses is also set.)
--- --- Applicable ---
ORG(889)
ORIGIN SEARCH
Actually moves the motor to
establish the origin using origin
proximity input, origin input, etc.
--- --- --- Applica-
ble
INI(880)
MODE CONTROL
Used to stop internal pulse output
and inverter positioning. It can
also be used to change the
present value of pulse output
(thus establishing the origin).
Applicable Applicable Applicable ---
PRV(881)
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER PV
READ
Reads the present value of the
internal pulse output or error
counter.
Applicable Applicable Applicable ---
269
SET PULSES: PULS(886) PULS(886) is used to set the pulse output amount (number of output pulses)
for pulse outputs that are started later in the program using SPED(885) or
ACC(888) in independent mode.
SPEED OUTPUT:
SPED(885)
SPED(885) is used to start pulse output without acceleration or deceleration.
It is used together with PULS(886). SPED(885) can also be executed during
pulse output to change the output frequency.
ACCELERATION
CONTROL: ACC(888)
ACC(888) outputs pulses to the specified output port at the specified fre-
quency using the specified acceleration and deceleration rate. (Acceleration
rate is the same as the deceleration rate.) For positioning, ACC(888) is used
in combination with PULS(886). ACC(888) can also be executed during pulse
output to change the target frequency or acceleration/deceleration rate.
Operand Description
P Port specifier 0020 hex: Inverter positioning 0
T Pulse type 0000 hex: Relative
0001 hex: Absolute
N Number of
pulses
N (lower 4 digits) Relative pulses: 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF
hex (0 to 2,147,489,647)
Absolute pulses: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF
hex (2,147,489,648 to 2,147,489,647)
N+1 (upper 4
digits)
PULS(886)
T: Pulse type
P: Port specifier
N: Number of pulses
P
T
N
Operand Description
M Output mode Bits 0 to 3 Mode
0 hex: Continuous
1 hex: Independent
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
Bits 8 to 11 Not used: Always set to 0 hex.
F First pulse fre-
quency word
F (lower 4 dig-
its)
Output Frequency in Hz
Pulse output 0 or 1: 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0
hex (0 to 100 kHz)
J models: 0000 0000 to 0000 4E20 hex (0 to 20
kHz)
F+1 (upper 4
digits)
SPED(885)
M: Output mode
P: Port specifier
F: First pulse frequency word
P
M
F
Operand Description
ACC(888)
M: Output mode
P: Port specifier
S: First word of se
P
M
S
270
PULSE OUTPUT:
PLS2(887)
PLS2(887) outputs a specified number of pulses to the specified port. Pulse
output starts at a specified startup frequency, accelerates to the target fre-
quency at a specified acceleration rate, decelerates at the specified decelera-
tion rate, and stops at approximately the same frequency as the startup
frequency. Only independent mode positioning is supported.
PLS2(887) can also be executed during pulse output to change the number of
output pulses, target frequency, acceleration rate, or deceleration rate.
PLS2(887) can thus be used for sloped speed changes with different acceler-
ation and deceleration rates, target position changes, target and speed
changes, or direction changes.
1 hex: Independent
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
S First word of
settings table
S Acceleration/Deceleration Rate
1 to 65,535 Hz (0001 to FFFF hex)
S+1 (lower 4
digits)
Target Frequency in Hz
Pulse output 0 to 3: 0000 0000 to 0001 86A0
hex (0 to 100 kHz)
J models: 0000 0000 to 0000 4E20 hex (0 to
20 kHz)
S+2 (upper 4
digits)
Operand Description
Operand Description
0 hex: Relative pulses
1 hex: Absolute pulses
0 hex: CW
1 hex: CCW
S First word of
settings table
S1 Acceleration rate
0001 to FFFF hex (1 to
65,535 Hz)
Specify the increase or
decrease in the fre-
quency in Hz per pulse
control period (4 ms).
S1+1 Deceleration rate
0001 to FFFF hex (1 to
65,535 Hz)
S1+2 (lower 4
digits)
Target Frequency in Hz
hex (0 to 100 kHz)
kHz)
S1+3 (upper 4
digits)
S1+4 (lower 4
digits)
Number of Pulses
Relative pulses: 0000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(0 to 2,147,489,647)
Absolute pulses: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF
hex (2,147,489,648 to 2,147,489,647)
S1+5 (upper 4
digits)
PLS2(887)
P
M
S
F
M: Output mode
P: Port specifier
F: First word of starting frequency
271
ORIGIN SEARCH:
ORG(889)
ORG(889) performs an origin search or origin return operation.
Origin Search:
Pulses are output to establish the origin based on origin proximity input
and origin input signals.
Origin Return:
The positioning system is returned to the origin.
The parameters for pulse output 0 or pulse output 1 must be set in advance in
the PLC Setup to perform either an origin search or origin return operation.
MODE CONTROL: INI(880) INI(880) changes the present value of inverter positioning or stops position-
ing.
F First word of
starting fre-
quency
F (lower 4 dig-
its)
Starting Frequency in Hz
hex (0 to 100 kHz)
kHz)
F+1 (upper 4
digits)
Operand Description
Operand Description
C Control data Bits 0 to 3 Not used: Always set to 0 hex
Bits 4 to 7 Not used: Always set to 0 hex
Bits 8 to 11 Not used: Always set to 0 hex
Bits 9 to 15 Mode
0 hex: Origin search
1 hex: Origin return
ORG(889)
P
C C: Control data
P: Port specifier
Operand Description
C Control data 0002 hex: Changes the PV of the internal pulse
output.
0003 hex: Stops internal pulse output. Position-
ing will continue and the output value will not be
cleared.
0004 hex: Stops inverter positioning. Internal
pulse output will be stopped, positioning will be
stopped, and the output value will be cleared.
The next operation will not be accepted until the
error counter is cleared.
NP First word
with new PV
NP (lower 4
digits)
New PV
0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex
NP+1 (upper
4 digits)
INI(880)
C: Control data
P: Port specifier
NV: First word with new PV
P
C
NP
272
HIGH-SPEED COUNTER
PV READ: PRV(881)
PRV(881) is used to read the present value and status of inverter positioning.
The following status can be read.
Operation Command Flag
Forward Command Flag
Reverse Command Flag
In-position Flag
Internal Pulse Output Flag
Internal Pulse Acceleration/
Deceleration Flag
Error Counter Error Flag
Error Counter Alarm Flag
Error Counter Sign Flag
Operand Description
0030 hex: Error counter 0
0031 hex: Error counter 1
C Control data 0000 hex: Read present value.
0001 hex: Read status.
PRV(881)
C: Control data
P: Port specifier
D: First destination word
P
C
D
273
5-3-7 Determining the Internal Pulse Output Frequency
Use the following formula to calculate the internal pulse frequency (Hz) to out-
put from the pulse output instruction (e.g., PLS2) based on the power supply
frequency (Hz) to be output from the inverter to the motor.
Note (1) Calculate the power supply frequency for one revolution per second from
the motor specifications. For example, with a 1,800-r/min (60-Hz) motor
(30 r/s), the power supply frequency for one revolution per second would
be calculated as follows: 60 [Hz] 30 [r/s] = 2 [Hz].
D First destina-
tion word for
present value
D Lower 4
digits
When a present value is read, the following
data is stored in D and D+1 as an 8-digit hexa-
decimal value.
P = #0020/#0021: The actual movement from
the internal pulse origin.
P = #0030/#0031: The present value of the
error counter.
D+1 Upper 4
digits
Destination
word for
inverter posi-
tioning status
(P = #0020 or
#0021)
D Bit 0 Operation Command Flag
ON: Operation command in progress
OFF: Stopped
Bit 1 Forward Command Flag
ON: Forward command in progress
OFF: Reverse command in progress or
stopped
Bit 2 Reverse Command Flag
ON: Reverse command in progress
OFF: Forward command in progress or
stopped
Bit 3 In-position Flag
ON: In position
OFF: Not in position
Bit 4 Error Counter Error Flag
ON: Error occurred in error counter
OFF: No error
Bit 5 Internal Pulse Output Flag
ON: Pulses being output
OFF: Pulse output stopped
Bit 6 Internal Pulse Acceleration/Deceleration Flag
ON: Acceleration/deceleration in progress for
internal pulse output (i.e., frequency being
changed)
OFF: Constant frequency for internal pulse out-
put
Bit 7 Error Counter Alarm Flag
ON: Alarm occurred for error counter
OFF: No alarm
Bit 15 Error Counter Sign Flag
ON: Positive
OFF: Negative
Operand Description
Frequency of
internal pulse
output (Hz)
Power supply
frequency to
motor (Hz)
Encoder resolution
(pulses/revolution)
Power supply frequency to motor
for one revolution per second (See note 1.)
High-speed
counter multiplier
Gear ratio between motor
shaft and encoder shaft
(See note 2.)
274
(2) The encoder resolution times the counter multiplier times the gear ratio
equals the number of pulses output by the encoder for one motor shaft
revolution.
Example of
Calculating
Conversion Factor
Conditions
Frequency for 1 revolution/s for inductive motor: 2 Hz (motor specification)
Rotary encoder resolution: 1,000 pulses/revolution (encoder specifica-
tion)
High-speed counter multiplier: x4 (PLC Setup)
Gear ratio between motor and encoder shafts: 1/4 (machine specification)
Calculations
The factor goes into the formula as shown below.
For example, to output a power supply frequency of 10 Hz to the motor:
Frequency of internal pulse output = 500 10 Hz = 5,000 Hz = 5 kHz
Therefore, set a pulse output frequency of 5 kHz in the pulse output instruc-
tions (e.g., PLS2).
CP1L
Pulse output
instruction
Target frequency
Internal
pulses Error
counter
Conversion formula
Inverter
Motor
Power
supply
frequency
Encoder
2
1000 4 1/4
500 Power supply frequency to motor (Hz)
Frequency of
internal pulse
output (Hz)
Power supply
frequency to
motor (Hz)
275
5-3-8 PLC Setup
The following settings must be made in advance when using inverter position-
ing 0 or 1.
Basic Settings The following settings are required to use inverter positioning.
Function
Gain
Setting Description Set value Default Application Refresh timing
Use
inverter
positioning
Select this option to use inverter
positioning. High-speed counter 0
will be allocated to inverter posi-
tioning 0 and high-speed counter 1
will be allocated to inverter posi-
tioning 1. The high-speed counter
mode that is set will be used.
Note If inverter positioning 1 is
used with a CPU Unit with
14 I/O Points, origin
searches cannot be used.
(Origin searches are possi-
ble even if inverter position-
ing 0 is used.)
Use/Do not use Do not use --- When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Gain The error counter present value times
the gain setting will be used as the out-
put command to the inverter.
Note The setting is made in incre-
ments of 0.1. The gain will thus
be 1/10 of the set value. For
example, if 50 is set, the gain will
be 5.
Its best to initially try a gain of
from 5 to 10 (settings of 50 to
100) and then adjust from there.
1 to 65,535
(0.1 increments)
0 sets a value of
10 (0.1 incre-
ments)
0: 10 (0.1
incre-
ments)
This will
set a
gain of 1.
Adjusting the
following char-
acteristic of the
motor
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Error counter
present value
Inverter output command
Gain = 1
Gain < 1
Gain > 1
276
In-position Range
Minimum Output Value
Maximum Output Value
In-position
range
The In-position Flag (A26.03) will turn
ON when pulse output to the error
counter has been completed and the
error counter present value is less equal
to or less than the in-position range.
1 to 65,535
Setting 0 is
the same
as setting
1.
0: 1 When using the
inverters servo lock, the
command value to the
inverter is set to zero
during in-position status.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Pulse frequency
In-position range
Positioning
In-position Flag
(A02603)
PLS2
Error counter present value
Min.
output
value
If the error counter present value times the gain
setting is less than the minimum output value,
the minimum output value will be output.
Set the minimum output value so that it is equal
to or smaller than the maximum output value.
1 to 65,535
Setting 0 is
the same
as setting
1.
0: 1 A minimum output
value can be set to
ensure an output of
a specified size even
when the error
counter present
value is very small.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Error counter
present value
Output command to inverter
Min. output
Min. output
Max.
output
value
If the error counter present value times the gain
setting is greater than the maximum output
value, the maximum output value will be output.
Set the maximum output value so that it is equal
to or greater than the minimum output value.
1 to
4,294,967,29
5
Setting 0 is
the same as
setting
2,000,000.
0: 2,000,000 A maximum
output value
can be set to
prevent the
output value
from becom-
ing too large.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Error counter
present value
Output command to inverter
Max. output
Max. output
277
Error Counter Overflow
Detection Value
Error Counter Alarm
Detection Value
Error Counter Cycle
Power Supply Frequency
for One Motor Revolution
per Second
Error counter
overflow detection
value
If the absolute value of the
error counter present value is
greater than the error counter
overflow detection value, the
Error Counter Error Flag
(A26.03) will turn ON.
1 to 32,767
Setting 0 is
the same as
setting
10,000.
0: 10,000 Provides notification of
excessive pulses in the
error counter, e.g., when
manually moving the
motor shaft while position-
ing is stopped.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Error counter
alarm detection
value
If the absolute value of the
error counter present value is
greater than the error counter
alarm detection value, the
Error Counter Alarm Flag
1 to 32,767
Setting 0 is
the same as
setting
10,000.
0: 10,000 Provides notification of
excessive pulses in the
error counter, e.g., when
encoder wiring breaks dur-
ing positioning.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Error counter
cycle
The calculation cycle of the error
counter can be set. If the cycle is
too short when using a motor with a
slow response, pulses may easily
accumulate in the error counter.
Change the error counter cycle
according to the machine load and
motor response.
ments of 4 ms. The error
counter cycle will thus be the
set value times 4 ms. For
example, if the set value is
10, the error counter cycle
will be 40 ms.
1 to 255 (in 4-
ms increments)
Setting 0 is the
same as setting
3 (4-ms incre-
ments)
0: 3 (4-ms
incre-
ments)
The error
counter
cycle will
be 12 ms.
Set when using
a motor with a
slow response.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Power Supply
Freq. for One
Motor Revolution
per Sec.
Calculate the power supply fre-
quency for one revolution per second
from the motor specifications. For
example, with a 1,800-r/min (60-Hz)
motor (30 r/s), the power supply fre-
quency for one revolution per second
would be calculated as follows:
60 [Hz] 30 [r/s] = 2 [Hz].
ments of 0.1 Hz. The fre-
quency will thus be the set
value times 0.1 Hz. For exam-
ple, if the set value is 20, the
frequency will be 2 Hz.
0 to 65,535 Hz
(0.1-Hz incre-
ments)
0 (0.1-Hz
incre-
ments)
This setting is
used when con-
verting the out-
put value to an
inverter fre-
quency com-
mand.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
278
Number of Encoder
Pulses for One Motor
Revolution
Operation Adjustment
Settings
Use the following settings if the gain adjustment in the basic settings does not
produce stable operation.
Limit Output during
Acceleration and
Constant Speed
Limit Output during
Deceleration and When
Stopped
Number of
Encoder Pulses
for One Motor
Revolution
Calculate the number of encoder pulses for
one motor revolution from the encoder res-
olution (pulses/revolution), high-speed
counters multiplier, and motor-encoder
shaft gear ratio. For example, if the
encoder resolution is 1,000, the high-
speed counter multiplier is 4, and the gear
ratio is 1/4, the number of encoder pulses
for one motor revolution is 1,000 4 (1/4)
= 1,000.
0 to 65,535 0 This setting is
used when con-
verting the out-
put value to an
inverter fre-
quency com-
mand.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Limit output during
acceleration and
constant speed
Select this option to limit the upper and
lower values of the output value based on
the pulse output value during internal
pulse output acceleration or constant
speed.
Use/Do
not use
Do not
use
Use this setting
when positioning
precision is bad.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Limit output during
deceleration and
when stopped
Select this option to multiply the error of
the output value by a coefficient during
internal pulse output deceleration or
after output has been completed.
Use/Do
not use
Do not
use
Use this setting
when positioning
precision is bad.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
279
Output Coefficient during
Acceleration and
Constant Speed
Output Coefficient during
Deceleration
Output coeffi-
cient during
acceleration
and constant
speed
Upper and lower limits are placed on
the output value by multiplying the pulse
output value by a coefficient during
internal pulse output acceleration or
constant speed.
Output Upper Limit =
Internal pulse output value + Internal
pulse output value Output coefficient
Output Lower Limit =
Internal pulse output value Internal
pulse output value Output coefficient
ments of 0.01. The coefficient will
thus be the set value times 0.01.
For example, if the set value is
10, the coefficient will be 0.1 ms.
1 to 255
(0.01 incre-
ments)
Setting 0 is
the same as
setting 6
(0.01 incre-
ments).
0: 6 (0.01
incre-
ments)
This coefficient can
be used to restrict
the output range to
prevent excessive
values, based on the
internal pulse output
value when the
motor response is
slow even if a large
error is produced.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
Internal pulses
Error counter
present value
Output command
to inverter
Output coefficient
during deceleration
The output value can be
changed by multiplying the
value in the error counter by
a coefficient during decelera-
tion of internal pulse output.
Output value =
Error Error counter cycle
(s) Gain Coefficient
Note The setting is made in
increments of 0.01.
The coefficient will
thus be the set value
times 0.01. For exam-
ple, if the set value is
10, the coefficient will
be 0.1 ms.
1 to 255
(0.01 incre-
ments)
Setting 0 is
the same as
setting 96
(0.01 incre-
ments).
0: 96
(0.01
incre-
ments)
This coefficient can be
used to reduce the output
value when the motor
response is slow and the
target position is
exceeded when stopping.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
280
Output Coefficient after
Pulse Output
5-3-9 Automatic Calculation of Inverter Frequency Command Value
Set the Power Supply Frequency for One Motor Revolution per Second, Num-
ber of Encoder Pulses for One Motor Revolution, and Error Counter Cycle in
the PLC Setup to automatically calculate the inverter frequency command
value and store it in A23 for inverter positioning 0 and A33 for inverter posi-
tioning 1.
Note The inverter frequency command values are stored in A23 and A33
in increments of 0.01 Hz. Divide the value in A23 or A33 by 100 to
obtain the value in hertz.
The values stored in A23 and A33 can be used in converting the output value
to the frequency command value for the inverter. This value can be output to
the inverter from the program using serial communications or an Analog Out-
put Unit.
Note The following formula is used inside the PLC to automatically cal-
culate the inverter frequency command value from the output value
(i.e., the error counter present value multiplied by the gain). (The
output value is stored in A20 and A21 for inverter positioning 0 and
in A30 and A31 for inverter positioning 1.)
Note (1) Calculate the power supply frequency for one revolution per second from
the motor specifications. For example, with a 1,800-r/min (60-Hz) motor
(30 r/s), the power supply frequency for one revolution per second would
be calculated as follows: 60 [Hz] 30 [r/s] = 2 [Hz].
(2) The encoder resolution times the counter multiplier times the gear ratio
equals the number of pulses output by the encoder for one motor shaft
revolution.
Output coefficient
after pulse output
The output value can be
changed by multiplying the
value in the error counter by a
coefficient after deceleration of
internal pulse output.
Output value =
Error Error counter cycle (s)
Gain Coefficient
Note The setting is made in
increments of 0.01. The
coefficient will thus be
the set value times 0.01.
For example, if the set
value is 10, the coeffi-
cient will be 0.1 ms.
1 to 255
(0.01 incre-
ments)
Setting 0 is
the same as
setting 50
(0.01 incre-
ments).
0: 50
(0.01
incre-
ments)
This coefficient can be
used to reduce the output
value when it the value in
the error counter is too
large after completing
internal pulse output.
When CPU Unit
power is turned
ON
A20/A21
A30/A31
(See
note 1.)
(See
note 2.)
1 Inverter frequency
command value (Hz)
Conversion Factor
Motor frequency for 1 rotation per second (Hz)
Encoder resolution
(pulses/rotation)
High-speed
counter
multiplier
Motor-encoder
shaft gear
ratio
Error counter
cycle (s)
Output value
Note: The inverter frequency command value is stored in A23/A33 in increments of 0.01 Hz.
281
Example of
Calculating
Conversion Factor
Conditions
Power Supply Frequency for One Motor Revolution per Second: 2 Hz
(PLC Setup)
Number of Encoder Pulses for One Motor Revolution: 1,000 (PLC Setup)
Rotary encoder resolution: 1,000 pulses/revolution (encoder specifica-
tion)
High-speed counter multiplier: x4 (PLC Setup)
Gear ratio between motor and encoder shafts: 1/4 (machine specifica-
tion)
Error Counter Cycle: 12 ms (PLC Setup)
Calculation
The calculation performed inside the PLC is as shown below.
Serial Communications The command value calculated above is used in the Modbus-RTU command
frame, adjusting for the frequency unit. (See note.)
Refer to 6-3-3 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function and to the inverter manual
for details on Modbus-RTU communications.
Note If the frequency command unit set in the inverter is 0.1 Hz, divide the com-
mand frequency in A23 or A33 by 10.
Analog Output The following example is for the CP1W-DA041.
The analog output resolution is 6,000, so the command value calculated
above is multiplied by 6,000 divided by the inverters maximum output fre-
quency.
CP1L
PLC Setup
Output value
Automatic
calculation
Inverter frequency
command value
Auxiliary Area
A23 or A33
Unit: Hz
Auxiliary Area
A20/A21 or
A30/A31
Unit: 0.01 Hz
A23/A33
Inverter frequency
command value
(0.1-Hz increments)
2
1000 0.012
Output value: Hz
A20/A21
A30/A31
Output value: Hz
A20/A21
A30/A31
17
(To 0.01-Hz
increments)
100
CP1L
Automatic
calculation
Auxiliary Area
A23/A33
Inverter
frequency
command value
Unit: 0.01 Hz
282
Refer to 7-3 Analog Output Units for operating procedures for the Analog Out-
put Unit.
Calculation Example
Conditions
Inverters maximum output frequency: 60 Hz
Calculation
The stored analog output value is calculated as follows:
Stored analog
output value

Inverter frequency
command value (Hz)
Inverter's max. output frequency (Hz)
6,000
CP1L
Automatic
calculations
Inverter
frequency
command value
Auxiliary Area
A23/A33
6,000
Inverter maximum
output frequency (Hz)
Stored analog
output value
Analog output
Unit: 0.01 Hz
1
100
Converting values in A23/A33 to Hz.
Converted in ladder program
Stored analog
output value
60
6,000 1
Auxiliary Area
A23/A33
(Unit: 0.01 Hz)
Auxiliary Area
A23/A33
(Unit: 0.01 Hz)
100
1
283
5-3-10 Memory Allocations
Built-in Input Area
Note (1) The above table shows only allocations related to inverter positioning.
(2) Bits 08 to 11 are not supported by CPU Units with 14 I/O Points.
(3) If inverter positioning 1 is used with a CPU Unit with 14 I/O Points, origin
searches (i.e., the origin proximity input signal) cannot be used.
Built-in Output Area This area is not used for inverter positioning.
When inverter positioning is enabled, bits 00 to 03 in CIO 100 can be used as
normal outputs 0 to 3. The corresponding pulse output and PWM output can-
not be used.
Input terminal block Default Pulse output origin searches enabled Inverter positioning
enabled
Word Bit Normal inputs Origin search
CIO 0
(See note 1.)
00 Normal input 0 --- High-speed counter 0:
Phase A
01 Normal input 1 --- High-speed counter 0:
Phase B
02 Normal input 2 Pulse output 0: Origin proximity input signal
(CPU Units with 14 I/O (See note 3.))
Phase A
03 Normal input 3 Pulse output 1: Origin proximity input signal
(CPU Units with 14 I/O (See note 3.))
Phase B
04 Normal input 4 --- ---
05 Normal input 5 --- ---
06 Normal input 6 Pulse output 0: Origin input signal ---
07 Normal input 7 Pulse output 1: Origin input signal ---
08 (See note 2.) Normal input 8 --- ---
09 (See note 2.) Normal input 9 --- ---
10 (See note 2.) Normal input 10 Pulse output 0: Origin proximity input signal
(CPU Units with 20, 30, or 40 I/O)
---
11 (See note 2.) Normal input 11 Pulse output 1: Origin proximity input signal
(CPU Units with 20, 30, or 40 I/O)
---
284
Auxiliary Area
Read Area
Inverter Positioning 0
Use one of the following for the inverter frequency command.
Word Bits Function Data range Refresh timing Application
examples
A20 00 to 15 Lower 4 digits of
present value of
unsigned output
value (output value =
present value of
error counter error
counter cycle (s)
gain)
Note The maxi-
mum and min-
imum output
values are
applied.
0000 0000 to 8000
0000 hex
(0 to
2,147,483,648)
Cleared to zero at following times:
When power to CPU Unit is turned ON
At start of operation
When an error counter error occurs
Updated at following times:
Cyclically according to error counter
cycle
This value can be
used when not
using automatic
frequency com-
mand calculations
and instead to con-
vert the output
value provided
here in the user
program for output
to the inverter.
This value is used
when signed data
is not required, i.e.,
when using com-
munications or nor-
mal I/O to specify
the direction.
A21 00 to 15 Upper 4 digits of
present value of
unsigned output
present value of
error counter error
counter cycle (s)
gain)
Note The maxi-
mum and min-
imum output
values are
applied.
285
A23 00 to 15 Inverter frequency
command value
(0.01-Hz increments,
unsigned)
Note Set the Power
Supply Fre-
quency for
One Motor
Revolution per
Second, Num-
ber of
Encoder
Pulses for
One Motor
Revolution,
and Error
Counter Cycle
in the PLC
Setup before
using this
value.
0000 to FFFF hex
(0.00 to
655.35 Hz)
cycle
These words con-
tain the automati-
cally calculated
frequency com-
mand value for the
inverter. (This value
is normally used.)
For example, if the
frequency setting
unit of the inverter
is 0.01 Hz, this
value can be used
as it in serial com-
munications with
the inverter. When
converting to an
analog output (0 to
5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10
V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4
to 20 mA), this
value can be used
to simplify the con-
version.
This value is used
when signed data
when using com-
munications or nor-
mal I/O to specify
the direction.
present value of
signed output value
(output value =
present value of
error counter error
counter cycle (s)
gain)
Note The maxi-
mum and min-
imum output
values are
applied.
8000 0000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex
(214,748,348 to
214,748,347)
cycle
This value can be
used when not
using automatic
frequency com-
mand calculations
and instead to con-
vert the output
value provided
here in the user
program for output
to the inverter.
This value is used
when signed data
is required, i.e.,
when outputting
the frequency com-
mand with an ana-
log output from 10
to 10 V.
present value of
signed output value
(output value =
present value of
error counter error
counter cycle (s)
gain)
Note The maxi-
mum and min-
imum output
values are
applied.
examples
286
Use the following for inverter positioning status and the workpiece position.
examples
A26 00 Operation Command
Flag
ON: Operation
command exe-
cuted.
OFF: Stop com-
mand executed.
Turned ON at following times:
When inverter positioning is started
Turned OFF at following times:
When CPU Unit operation stops
When inverter positioning is stopped
using INI instruction
This flag is used as
a NO input condi-
tion when calculat-
ing the frequency
command value in
the user program. It
is also used as a
NC input condition
when clearing the
frequency com-
mand value to zero.
01 Forward Operation
Command Flag
ON: Forward com-
mand in progress
OFF: Reverse
command in
progress or
stopped
When error counter present value is
greater than 0 (i.e., positive)
less than 0 (i.e., negative) or zero
When CPU Unit operation starts
a NO input condi-
tion when output-
ting a forward
operation com-
mand to the
inverter from the
user program
It is also used as a
NC input condition
when outputting a
reverse command
to the inverter.
02 Reverse Operation
Command Flag
ON: Reverse com-
mand in progress
OFF: Forward
command in
progress or
stopped
less than 0 (i.e., negative)
greater than 0 (i.e., positive) or zero
a NO input condi-
tion when output-
ting a reverse
operation com-
mand to the
inverter from the
user program
NC input condition
when outputting a
forward command
to the inverter.
287
A26 03 In-position Flag ON: In position
OFF: Not in posi-
tion
When pulse output to error counter is
stopped and absolute value of error
counter present value is less than in-
position range
When pulses are being output to error
counter
When absolute value of error counter
present value is greater than in-posi-
tion range.
an NO condition
when clearing the
frequency com-
mand value to zero
from the user pro-
gram.
04 Error Counter Error
Flag
ON: Error counter
error
OFF: No error
counter present value is greater than
or equal to error counter error detec-
tion value
When error counter error is reset
This flag can be
used to provide
notification of
excessive pulses in
the error counter,
e.g., when manu-
ally moving the
motor shaft while
positioning is
stopped.
05 Error Counter Pulse
Output Flag
ON: Pulses being
output
OFF: Pulse output
stopped
started
stopped (including immediate stops
and deceleration stops)
This flag is used to
determine whether
pulses are being
output to the error
counter.
This flag can be
used to determine
when internal pulse
output has been
completed and
start the next
instruction.
Output Acceleration/
Deceleration Flag
ON: Pulse output
to the error counter
is accelerating or
decelerating (i.e.,
the frequency is
changing)
OFF: Pulse output
is constant
When pulse output frequency to error
counter is changed by ACC or PLS2
instruction
During output of a constant pulse fre-
quency to error counter
detect changes in
the output fre-
quency when the
frequency is
changed stepwise
for internal pulses
are being output by
the ACC or PLS2
instruction. It can
be used as a condi-
tion for executing
ACC or PLS2 dur-
ing internal pulse
output.
examples
288
Use the following for the present values of the internal pulse and error counter
of inverter positioning.
A26 07 Error Counter Alarm
Flag
ON: Error counter
alarm
OFF: No error
counter alarm
or equal to error counter alarm detec-
tion value
When error counter alarm is reset
This flag can be
used to provide
notification of
excessive pulses in
the error counter,
e.g., when encoder
wiring breaks dur-
ing positioning.
08 to 14 Not used.
15 Inverter Positioning
Output Value Sign
Flag
ON: Positive value
OFF: Negative
value
When signed output value is between
0000 0000 and 7FFF FFFF hex.
FFFF FFFF and 8000 0000 hex.
This flag can be
used as a direction
signal
high-speed counter
present value
8000 000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex
(2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
The present value of the feedback
pulse from the encoder.
Operation is the same as for a high-
speed counter.
Use as the abso-
lute position of the
workpiece posi-
tioned with inverter
positioning.
high-speed counter
present value
examples
examples
A22 00 to 15 Error counter 0
present value
(signed)
8000 to 7FFF hex
(32,768 to
32,767)
cycle
Held at following times:
When Error Counter Disable Bit
(A562.01) is turned ON.
Use to monitor the
difference between
the target value
and the present
value.
present value of
pulse output to
inverter (relative
value)
8000 0000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex
(2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
Contains relative internal pulse output
value when pulses are output to error
counter.
When operation is started
started
Cyclically on error counter cycle
These values can
be used to monitor
the present value
of internal pulse
output.
present value of
pulse output to
inverter (relative
value)
289
Use one of the following for the inverter frequency command.
A276 00 to 15 Lower 4 digits of the
present value of the
(absolute value for
absolute coordi-
nates)
8000 0000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex
(2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
Contains absolute movement value
from the internal pulse origin when
pulses are output to error counter.
This value can be
used to monitor the
present value of
the internal pulse
output as an abso-
lute value when
using absolute
coordinates.
A277 00 to 15 Upper 4 digits of the
(absolute value for
absolute coordi-
nates)
examples
examples
present value of
unsigned output
present value of
error counter error
counter cycle (s)
gain)
Note The maxi-
mum and min-
imum output
values are
applied.
0000 0000 to 8000
0000 hex
(0 to
2,147,483,648)
cycle
This value can be
used when not
using automatic
frequency com-
mand calculations
and instead to con-
vert the output
value provided
here in the user
program for output
to the inverter.
This value is used
when signed data
when using com-
munications or nor-
mal I/O to specify
the direction.
present value of
unsigned output
present value of
error counter error
counter cycle (s)
gain)
Note The maxi-
mum and min-
imum output
values are
applied.
290
A33 00 to 15 Inverter frequency
command value
(0.01-Hz increments,
unsigned)
Note Set the Power
Supply Fre-
quency for
One Motor
Revolution per
Second, Num-
ber of
Encoder
Pulses for
One Motor
Revolution,
and Error
Counter Cycle
in the PLC
Setup before
using this
value.
0000 to FFFF hex
(0.00 to
655.35 Hz)
cycle
These words con-
tain the automati-
cally calculated
frequency com-
mand value for the
inverter. (This value
is normally used.)
For example, if the
frequency setting
unit of the inverter
is 0.01 Hz, this
value can be used
as it in serial com-
munications with
the inverter. When
converting to an
analog output (0 to
5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10
V, 0 to 20 mA, or 4
to 20 mA), this
value can be used
to simplify the con-
version.
This value is used
when signed data
when using com-
munications or nor-
mal I/O to specify
the direction.
present value of
signed output value
(output value =
present value of
error counter error
counter cycle (s)
gain)
Note The maxi-
mum and min-
imum output
values are
applied.
8000 0000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex
(214,748,348 to
214,748,347)
cycle
This value can be
used when not
using automatic
frequency com-
mand calculations
and instead to con-
vert the output
value provided
here in the user
program for output
to the inverter.
This value is used
when signed data
is required, i.e.,
when outputting
the frequency com-
mand with an ana-
log output from 10
to 10 V.
present value of
signed output value
(output value =
present value of
error counter error
counter cycle (s)
gain)
Note The maxi-
mum and min-
imum output
values are
applied.
examples
291
Use the following for inverter positioning status and the workpiece position.
examples
A36 00 Operation Command
Flag
ON: Operation
command exe-
cuted.
OFF: Stop com-
mand executed.
When inverter positioning is started
When inverter positioning is stopped
using INI instruction
a NO input condi-
tion when calculat-
ing the frequency
command value in
the user program. It
is also used as a
NC input condition
when clearing the
frequency com-
mand value to zero.
01 Forward Operation
Command Flag
ON: Forward com-
mand in progress
OFF: Reverse
command in
progress or
stopped
greater than 0 (i.e., positive)
less than 0 (i.e., negative) or zero
a NO input condi-
tion when output-
ting a forward
operation com-
mand to the
inverter from the
user program
NC input condition
when outputting a
reverse command
to the inverter.
02 Reverse Operation
Command Flag
ON: Reverse com-
mand in progress
OFF: Forward
command in
progress or
stopped
less than 0 (i.e., negative)
greater than 0 (i.e., positive) or zero
a NO input condi-
tion when output-
ting a reverse
operation com-
mand to the
inverter from the
user program
NC input condition
when outputting a
forward command
to the inverter.
292
A36 03 In-position Flag ON: In position
OFF: Not in posi-
tion
counter present value is less than in-
position range
When pulses are being output to error
counter
When absolute value of error counter
present value is greater than in-posi-
tion range.
an NO condition
when clearing the
frequency com-
mand value to zero
from the user pro-
gram.
04 Error Counter Error
Flag
ON: Error counter
error
OFF: No error
or equal to error counter error detec-
tion value
When error counter error is reset
This flag can be
used to provide
notification of
excessive pulses in
the error counter,
e.g., when manu-
ally moving the
motor shaft while
positioning is
stopped.
Output Flag
ON: Pulses being
output
OFF: Pulse output
stopped
started
determine whether
pulses are being
output to the error
counter.
This flag can be
used to determine
when internal pulse
output has been
completed and
start the next
instruction.
Output Acceleration/
Deceleration Flag
ON: Pulse output
is accelerating or
decelerating (i.e.,
the frequency is
changing)
OFF: Pulse output
is constant
When pulse output frequency to error
counter is changed by ACC or PLS2
instruction
During output of a constant pulse fre-
quency to error counter
detect changes in
the output fre-
quency when the
frequency is
changed stepwise
for internal pulses
are being output by
the ACC or PLS2
instruction. It can
be used as a condi-
tion for executing
ACC or PLS2 dur-
ing internal pulse
output.
examples
293
Use the following for the present values of the internal pulse and error counter
of inverter positioning.
A36 07 Error Counter Alarm
Flag
ON: Error counter
alarm
OFF: No error
counter alarm
or equal to error counter alarm detec-
tion value
When error counter alarm is reset
This flag can be
used to provide
notification of
excessive pulses in
the error counter,
e.g., when encoder
wiring breaks dur-
ing positioning.
08 to 14 Not used.
15 Inverter Positioning
Output Value Sign
Flag
ON:
OFF:
0000 0000 and 7FFF FFFF hex.
FFFF FFFF and 8000 0000 hex.
This flag can be
used as a direction
signal.
(absolute value for
absolute coordi-
nates)
8000 0000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex
(2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
when pulses are output to error
counter.
This value can be
used to monitor the
present value of
the internal pulse
output as an abso-
lute value when
using absolute
coordinates.
(absolute value for
absolute coordi-
nates)
examples
examples
A32 00 to 15 Error counter 0
present value
(signed)
8000 to 7FFF hex
(32,768 to
32,767)
cycle
Saved at following times:
When Error Counter Disable Bit
(A562.01) is turned ON.
Use to monitor the
difference between
the target value
and the present
value.
present value of
pulse output to
inverter (relative
value)
8000 0000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex
(2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
Contains relative internal pulse output
value when pulses are output to error
counter.
started
These values can
be used to monitor
the present value
of internal pulse
output.
present value of
pulse output to
inverter (relative
value)
294
Read/Write Area
Note Present Values of High-speed Counter and Pulse Outputs
The present value of the high-speed counter when inverter positioning is used
is stored in the same memory location as for normal high-speed counter appli-
cation. This value can be used as the present value of feedback pulses from
the encoder, i.e., as the absolute position of inverter positioning. Target value
and range comparisons for high-speed counters are also valid.
The present value of the pulse output (A276/A277 or A278/A279), i.e., the
pulse output value to the error counter, is an absolute position if an absolute
coordinate system is specified and is a relative position if a relative coordinate
system is specified.
(absolute value for
absolute coordi-
nates)
8000 0000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex
(2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
from the internal pulse origin when
pulses are output to error counter.
This value can be
used to monitor the
present value of
the internal pulse
output as an abso-
lute value when
using absolute
coordinates.
(absolute value for
absolute coordi-
nates)
examples
Word Bits Function Data range Refresh
timing
Application
A562 00 Inverter
positioning 0
Error Counter
Reset Bit
Turned ON: Error counter 0
present value (A22) reset and
Error Counter Error Flag cleared.
--- Turn ON this bit to
clear the error
counter error status.
01 Error Counter
Disable Bit
While ON: Error counter value
held.
--- Turn ON this bit, for
example, to disable
accumulating
pulses in the error
counter when stop-
ping positioning and
moving the motor
shaft manually.
02 to 15 Not used.
A563 00 Inverter
positioning 1
Error Counter
Reset Bit
Turned ON: Error counter 0
present value (A32) reset and
Error Counter Error Flag cleared.
--- Turn ON this bit to
clear the error
counter error status.
01 Error Counter
Disable Bit
While ON: Error counter value
held.
--- Turn ON this bit, for
example, to disable
accumulating
pulses in the error
counter when stop-
ping positioning and
moving the motor
shaft manually.
02 to 15 Not used.
295
5-3-11 Application Example with Serial Communications
Positioning with
Trapezoidal Control
Specifications and
Operation
When start input CIO 1.04 turns ON, 600,000 pulses are output internally for
inverter positioning 0 to turn the motor shaft.
Note Refer to 5-3-7 Determining the Internal Pulse Output Frequency for the for-
mula to convert the frequency and use the converted internal pulse frequency.
The number of output pulses is calculated from the encoder specifications
and the high-speed counter multiplier.
CP1L
Pulse output
instruction
CP1L
Target frequency
Present value of
high-speed counter
Present value of pulse output
Internal
pulses
Error
counter
Inverter
Power
supply
frequency
Encoder
Motor
No. of output
pulses: 600,000
Start input
CIO 0.05
Deceleration:
80 Hz/4 ms
Starting
frequency
100 Hz
Target
frequency
20,000 Hz
Acceleration:
100 Hz/4 ms
296
Terminal Allocations
Error Counter
RS-422A/485 Communications (CP1W-CIF11)
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
COMM
CP1W-CIF11
Speed Command via Serial Communications
CP1L
RS-485
communications
(Modbus-RTU)
Inverter
Standard motor
Encoder
3G3MV
3G3RV
Feedback pulses
CIO 0 CIO 1
Error counter 0
Phase B
Error counter 1
Phase B
Error counter 1
Phase Z
Error counter 0
Phase A
Error counter 1
Phase A
Error counter 0
Phase Z
L1 L2/N COM
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
SW
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG
297
Inverter (3G3MV)
Encoder
Connection Example
Encoder (24 VDC) Connections to High-speed Counter 0
S5 S6 S7 P1 P2 R+ R- FS FR FC
S1 S2 S3 S4 SC PC S+ S- AM AC RP
SW1
PNP
NPN
SW2
1
2
OFF ON
Encoder
Black
Phase A
White
Phase B
Orange
Phase Z
Brown
+Vcc
Blue
COM
24-VDC power supply
0 V
+24 V
+Vcc
+24 V
0.00
0.01
0.04
COM
Differential-phase
Input
Error counter 0: Phase A, 0 V
Error counter 0: Phase B, 0 V
Error counter 0: Phase Z, 0 V
(COM 24 V)
CP1L-@@DT-D
Encoder
Black
Phase A
White
Phase B
Orange
Phase Z
Brown
Blue 0 V (COM)
0 V
298
RS-422A/485 (CP1W-CIF11) Connections to Inverter
Inverter Connections to Motor
Parameter Settings
for 3G3MV Inverter
When connecting the Inverter to the PLC, communications parameters must
be set in the Inverter. The settings of parameters n152 to n157 cannot be
changed while communications are in progress. Always set them before start-
ing communications.
RS-422A/485
RDA- RDB+ SDA- SDB+ FG
SW1
1 ON SW2
2
SW
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
CP1W-CIF11
Either setting
Either setting
Inverter
S5
S6 S7 P1 P2 R+ R- FS FR FC
U V W U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Motor Inverter
299
Example settings of 3G3MV parameters are listed below. Refer to the Users
Manual of the Inverter for details on the parameters.
Parameter
No.
Name Description Default Setting
n003 RUN command selection 0: The RUN Key and STOP/RESET Key on the
Digital Operator are enabled.
1: Multi-function input is enabled through the con-
trol circuit terminals.
2: RS-422A/485 communications are enabled.
3: Input is enabled from the optional Communica-
tions Unit.
0 2
n004 Frequency reference selection 0: Frequency reference adjustment
1: Frequency reference 1 (n024)
2: Frequency reference control terminal (0 to 10
V)
mA)
mA)
5: Pulse train reference control terminal
6: Frequency reference through RS-422A/RS-485
7: Multi-function analog voltage input (0 to 10 V)
8: Multi-function analog current input (4 to 20 mA)
9: Frequency reference input through optional
Communications Unit.
0 6
n005 Stopping method selection 0: Decelerates to stop
1: Coasts to stop
0 0
n006 Reverse rotation-prohibit
selection
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
0 0
n011 Maximum frequency (FMAX) 50.0 to 400.0 Hz (0.1-Hz increments) 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz
(Depends
on machine
configura-
tion.)
n016 Minimum output frequency
(FMIN)
0.1 Hz to 10.0 Hz (0.1-Hz increments) 1.5 Hz 0.1 Hz
n018 Acceleration/deceleration time
setting unit
0: 0.1 s
1: 0.01 s
0 0
n019 Acceleration time 1 0 to 6,000 s 10.0 s 0
n020 Deceleration time 1 0 to 6,000 s 10.0 s 0
n151 RS-422A/485 communications
timeover detection selection
(The time between receiving
PLC signals is monitored, Tim-
eout time: 2 s.)
0: Detects time-over, fatal error, and the Inverter
coasts to a stop.
1: Detects time-over, detects fatal error, and the
Inverter decelerates to a stop in deceleration time
1.
2: Detects time-over, detects fatal error, and the
Inverter decelerates to a stop in deceleration time
2.
3: Detects time-over, detects nonfatal error warn-
ing, and the Inverter continues operating.
4: No time-over is detected.
0 0
frequency reference/display
unit selection
0: 0.1 Hz
1: 0.01 Hz
2: Converted value based on 30,000 decimal as
maximum frequency
3: 0.1% (Maximum frequency: 100%)
0 1
300
PLC Setup
Serial Port Communications Settings
Note (1) Set the baud rate and parity check settings to the same value as for the
Inverter communications parameters.
(2) Set the serial port to the serial gateway communications mode.
Slave address
Setting range: 0 to 32
00: Communications disabled
01 to 32: Slave address
0 1
n154 RS-422A/485 baud rate selec-
tion
0: 2,400 bps
1: 4,800 bps
2: 9,600 bps
3: 19,200 bps
2 2
n155 RS-422A/485 parity selection 0: Even
1: Odd
2: No parity
0 0
n156 RS-422A/485 send wait time Set value: 10 to 65 ms
Setting unit: 1 ms
10 ms 10 ms
n157 RS-422A/485 RTS control
selection
0: RTS control enabled
1: RTS control disabled
0 0
Parameter
No.
301
High-speed Counter Settings (on Built-in Input Tab Page)
Note (1) Set high-speed counter 0 when using inverter positioning 0. Set high-
speed counter 1 when using inverter positioning 1.
(2) Use linear mode for inverter positioning.
Inverter Positioning Settings (on Inverter Positioning 0 or 1 Tab Page)
Ladder Program The following Modbus-RTU communications parameters are used.
Baud rate 9,600 bits/s
Format 8, 1, E
Serial communications mode Serial Gateway
302
Serial port 1 is used for communications with the Inverter.
Starting Inverter
Positioning
PLS2(887) Settings
High-speed counter 0 (i.e., error counter 0) is used for the feedback pulse
input port.
Stopping Internal Pulse
Output to the Error
Counter
Internal pulse output is stopped immediately.
Inverter positioning (i.e., the error counter) will continue to function.
Stopping Inverter
Positioning
The output value will remain at 0 until the error counter is reset.
@PLS2(887)
#0020
#0000
D200
D300
0.05
Start input Inverter positioning 1
CW, relative pulses
Target frequency, No. of output pulses
Starting frequency
Deceleration rate: 80 Hz/4 ms D201 0050
D203 0000
D205 0009
D301 0000
@INI
#0020
Port specifier
(Error counter 0: 0020 hex)
#0003 0003 hex: Stop virtual pulse output
0000 0000 (Not used.)
0.06
Error counter
Operation
Inverter
Inductive motor
Encoder
Set to 0.
@INI
#0020 Port specified (Error counter 0: 0020 hex)
#0004 0004 hex: Stop inverter positioning
0000 0000 (Not used.)
0.07
303
Pulse outputs will not be accepted until the error counter is reset. (Execut-
ing a pulse output instruction will cause an error.)
Referencing the
Automatically Calculated
Inverter Frequency
Command Value
If the following settings are made in the PLC Setup, the inverter frequency
command value will be calculated automatically and set in A23 in the Auxiliary
Area. These settings are on the Inverter Positioning 0 Tab Page in the PLC
Setup.
Power Supply Frequency for One Motor Revolution per Second (0.1-Hz
increments)
Number of Encoder Pulses for One Motor Revolution
Error Counter Cycle (x 4 ms)
The inverter frequency command value in A23 is accessed. The value is
stored in 0.01-Hz increments.
Internal Work Addresses
Error counter
Operation
Inverter
Inductive motor
Encoder
Outputs not
accepted
Sets forward
command in
D10.
Sets reverse
command in
D10.
Sets stop
command
in D1.
Sets operation
command
in D1.
Sets frequency
command
value in D2.
In-position Flag
Operation Command Flag
Forward Command Flag
Reverse Command Flag
Modbus
simple master
function not
active
Operation
Command
Flag
A641.00 A026.00
A26.01
A26.02
A26.00
A26.03
A641.00
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
#0001
D1
A023
D2
#0000
D10
#0001
D10
#0000
D1
Address Usage
D1 Bits 00 to 03: Run/Stop Command
D2 Bits 00 to 15: Frequency Command Value
D10 Bits 00 to 03: Forward/Reverse Command
304
Setting Modbus
Communications
Registers
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
A641.00
XFRB
XFRB
ORW
XFRB
XFRB
#0001
D32200
#0010
D32201
#0009
D32202
#0001
D32203
#0002
D32204
#0400
D32205
#0480
D1
D32206
#0190
D10
D15
D15
D32206
D32206
#0808
D2
D32206
#0880
D2
D32207
Move bits 00 to 07 of D2
(frequency command
value) to bits 08 to 15 of
D32207 (register 0002).
Move bits 08 to 15 of D2
(frequency command
value) to bits 00 to 07 of
D32206 (register 0001).
ORs D15 and D32206
(register 0001) and
stores the result in
D32206. (Reflect bit 09
of D15 in D32206
(register 0001).
Moves bit 00 of D10
(Forward/Reverse
Command) to bit 09 of
D15.
Moves bits 00 to 03 of
D1 (Run/Stop
Command) to D32206
(register 0001) bits 08 to
11.
Number of attached
data bytes: 04 hex (4
bytes)
Number of write data
registers: 0002 hex
Register number of
write start data: 0001
hex
Number of
communications data
bytes: 09 hex (9 bytes)
Function code:
10 hex (write data)
Slave address:
01 hex
Modbus
simple master
function not
active
305
Settings Addresses
Modbus Communications
Add the above instructions to the end of the program as a starting condition
for the ladder programming example. For error processing, refer to the ladder
program in 6-3-3 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function and to the inverters
manual.
5-3-12 Application Example with an Analog Output
Positioning with
Trapezoidal Control
Specifications and
Operation
When start input CIO 1.04 turns ON, 600,000 pulses are output internally for
inverter positioning 0 to turn the motor shaft.
Note Refer to 5-3-7 Determining the Internal Pulse Output Frequency for the for-
mula to convert the frequency and use the converted internal pulse frequency.
The number of output pulses is calculated from the encoder specifications
and the high-speed counter multiplier.
Address Usage
D1 Bits 00 to 03: Run/Stop Command
D2 Bits 00 to 15: Frequency Command Value
D10 Bits 00 to 03: Forward/Reverse Command
D15 Bit 09: Forward/Reverse Command
Address Usage Data
D32200 Bits 00 to 07: Slave address 01
D32201 Bits 00 to 07: Function code 10
D32202 Bits 00 to 07: Number of communications data bytes 09
D32203 Bits 00 to 15: Register number of write start data 0001
D32204 Bits 00 to 15: Number of data registers to write 0002
D32205 Bits 08 to 15: Number of attached data bytes 04
D32206 Bits 00 to 07: Upper bytes of frequency command value in D2
Bit 08: Run/Stop Command
Bit 09: Forward/Reverse Command
---
D32207 Bits 08 to 15: Lower bytes of frequency command value in D2 ---

A26.00
Operation
Command Flag
A641.00 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Bit
306
Error Counter
100 Hz
20,000 Hz
No. of output
pulses: 600,000
Start input
CIO 0.05
Deceleration:
80 Hz/4 ms
Starting
frequency
Target
frequency
Acceleration:
100 Hz/4 ms
Inverter
Standard motor
Encoder
3G3MV
3G3RV
Feedback pulses
Speed Command via Analog Output
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
OUT
CP1W/CPM1A-DA041
(Analog Output Unit)
CP1L
CP1W/CPM1A-MAD11
(Analog I/O Unit)
Output Bits
Forward
Reverse
Current/Voltage
Output
Frequency
command
L1 L2/N COM 01
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
CIO 0 CIO 1
Error counter 0
Phase B
Error counter 1
Phase B
Error counter 1
Phase Z
Error counter 0
Phase A
Error counter 1
Phase A
Error counter 0
Phase Z
307
Built-in Outputs
CP1W/CPM1A-DA041
Inverter (3G3MV)
Encoder
+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
Output word CIO 100 Output word CIO 101
CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
NC
COM3
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
NC
COM3
OUT
SW1
PNP
NPN
S5 S6 S7 P1 P2 R+ R FS FR FC
SW2
1
2
OFF ON
0 V
+24 V
+Vcc
Encoder
Black
Phase A
White
Phase B
Orange
Phase Z
Brown
Blue 0 V (COM)
308
Connection Example
Encoder (24 VDC) Connections to High-speed Counter 0
Output Terminal Connections to Inverter
CP1W/CPM1A-DA041 (Current Output) Connections to Inverter
0 V
+24 V
0.00
0.01
0.04
COM
Differential-phase
Input
Error counter 0: Phase A, 0 V
Error counter 0: Phase B, 0 V
Error counter 0: Phase Z, 0 V
(COM 24 V)
CP1L-@@DT-D
+Vcc
Encoder
Black
Phase A
White
Phase B
Orange
Phase Z
Brown
Blue 0 V (COM)
+ 00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
- COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07
Output word CIO 100
Inverter
PLC
Output word CIO 101
1 SW2
2
Inverter
IOUT1 VOUT2 COM2 IOUT3 VOUT4 COM4 NC
VOUT1 COM IOUT2 VOUT3 COM3 IOUT4 NC
CPM1A-DA041
Inverter Switch Settings
SW1 NPN
Either setting
ON (Current: I)
309
Inverter Connections to Motor
Parameter Settings
for 3G3MV Inverter
When connecting the Inverter to the PLC, communications parameters must
be set in the Inverter.
Example settings of 3G3MV parameters are listed below. Refer to the Users
Manual of the Inverter for details on the parameters.
U V W U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Motor Inverter
Parameter
No.
n003 RUN command selection 0: The RUN Key and STOP/RESET Key on the
Digital Operator are enabled.
1: Multi-function input is enabled through the con-
trol circuit terminals.
2: RS-422A/485 communications are enabled.
3: Input is enabled from the optional Communica-
tions Unit.
0 1
n004 Frequency reference selection 0: Digital Operator
1: Frequency reference 1 (n024)
2: Frequency reference control terminal (0 to 10 V)
mA)
mA)
5: Pulse train reference control terminal
6: Frequency reference through RS-422A/RS-485
7: Multi-function analog voltage input (0 to 10 V)
8: Multi-function analog current input (4 to 20 mA)
9: Frequency reference input through optional
Communications Unit.
0 4
n050 Multi-function input 1 1 to 25 1 1
n051 Multi-function input 2 1 to 25 2 2
n060 Frequency reference gain 0% to 255% (1% increments) 100% 100%
n061 Frequency reference bias 100% to 100% (1% increments) 0% 0%
n005 Stopping method selection 0: Decelerates to stop
1: Coasts to stop
0 0
n006 Reverse rotation-prohibit
selection
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
0 0
n011 Maximum frequency (FMAX) 50.0 to 400.0 Hz (0.1-Hz increments) 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz
(Depends
on machine
configura-
tion.)
n016 Minimum output frequency
(FMIN)
0.1 Hz to 10.0 Hz (0.1-Hz increments) 1.5 Hz 0.1 Hz
n018 Acceleration/deceleration time
setting unit
0: 0.1 s
1: 0.01 s
0 0
n019 Acceleration time 1 0 to 6,000 s 10.0 s 0
n020 Deceleration time 1 0 to 6,000 s 10.0 s 0
310
PLC Setup
High-speed Counter Settings (on Built-in Input Tab Page)
Note (1) Set high-speed counter 0 when using inverter positioning 0. Set high-
speed counter 1 when using inverter positioning 1.
(2) Use linear mode for inverter positioning.
Inverter Positioning Settings (on Inverter Positioning 0 or 1 Tab Page)
311
Ladder Program
Starting Inverter
Positioning
Note The pulse output method (CCW/CW or pulse + direction) setting and direction
setting are not used.
PLS2(887) Settings
High-speed counter 0 (i.e., error counter 0) is used for the feedback pulse
input port.
Stopping Internal Pulse
Output to the Error
Counter
Inverter positioning (i.e., the error counter) will continue to function.
Stopping Inverter
Positioning
The output value will remain at 0 until the error counter is reset.
Pulse outputs will not be accepted until the error counter is reset. (Execut-
ing a pulse output instruction will cause an error.)
PLS2(887)
#0020
#0000
D200
D300
0.05
Start input Inverter positioning 1
CW, relative pulses
Target frequency, No. of output pulses
Starting frequency
Deceleration rate: 80 Hz/4 ms D201 0050
D203 0000
D205 0009
D301 0000
0.06
@INI
#0020
#0003
0000
Port specifier (Error counter 0: 0020 hex)
0003 hex: Stop virtual pulse output
0000 (Not used.)
Error counter
Operation
Inverter
Inductive motor
Encoder
Set to 0.
0.07
@INI
#0020
#0004
0000
Port specified (Error counter 0: 0020 hex)
0004 hex: Stop inverter positioning
0000 (Not used.)
312
Referencing the
Automatically Calculated
Inverter Frequency
Command Value
If the following settings are made in the PLC Setup, the inverter frequency
command value will be calculated automatically and set in A23 in the Auxiliary
Area. These settings are on the Inverter Positioning 0 Tab Page in the PLC
Setup.
Power Supply Frequency for One Motor Revolution per Second (0.1-Hz
increments)
Number of Encoder Pulses for One Motor Revolution
Error Counter Cycle (x 4 ms)
The inverter frequency command value in A23 is accessed and converted to
an analog output signal. The CP1W/CPM1A-DA041 has a resolution of 6,000,
so the conversion to an analog signal is performed as follows:
6,000 60 Hz (inverters maximum output frequency) 100 = 1
The conditions are as follows:
In this example, the results of *U and /UL are 1, so the value in A23 is moved
directly to D102 with MOV.
Error counter
Operation
Inverter
Inductive motor
Encoder
Outputs not
accepted
Forward/Reverse Command
Bit turned ON.
The contents of D102 is set in D1020.
Analog
conversion
trigger
Operation
Command Bit
Operation
Command Bit
A26.00
In-position Flag
Forward
Command Bit
A26.01
Forward
Command Bit
Reverse
Command Bit
T0
T0
T0
A26.00
A26.01 A26.02
A26.03
100.02
100.03
The frequency command value is divided by
100 to convert to Hz and stored in D1020.
To convert to the analog output value, the inverter
frequency command value is multiplied by 100
(analog resolution of 6,000 divided by inverter's
maximum frequency of 60) and stored in D1010
and D1011.
An analog value of 0 for the
stop command set in D102.
*U
A023
&100
D1010
/U
D1010
&100
D1020
MOV
#0000
D102
MOV
D1020
D102
Always ON Flag
P_On
TIM
0
#0003
Time for data for Analog Output Unit to become valid.
Analog
conversion
trigger
Analog
conversion
trigger
Reverse
Command Bit
A26.02
313
Settings Addresses
CP1W/CPM1A-DA041
Analog Output Settings
Analog output 1 is used in this example. It is set to a range of 4 to 20 mA. The
scaled value is set in the analog conversion area of the Analog Output Unit.
Refer to the first line in the programming example in Referencing the Automat-
ically Calculated Inverter Frequency Command Value on page 312 for a timer
for the time required for the Analog Output Units data to be valid (analog con-
version trigger: T0).
Address Usage
D1010 Holds the frequency command value converted for the analog
output resolution.
D1011
D1020 Holds the frequency command value converted from 0.01-Hz
increments to hertz.
T0 Analog conversion trigger
Address Usage
D102 Bits 00 to 15: Analog output value
CIO 100.02 Forward (external output)
CIO 100.03 Reverse (external output)
Analog output 1 set to a
range of 0 to 20 mA
(range code: B hex).
Analog outputs 2 to 4 are
not used.
D103 (scaled value) is
initialized.
The scaled value in
D102 is written as the
converted data for
analog output 1.
P_First_Cycle
First Cycle
Flag
T0
MOV
#800B
102
MOV
#0000
103
MOV
#0000
D102
MOV
D102
102
D102 (scaled value) is
initialized.
314
Settings Addresses
5-3-13 Supplemental Information
Restrictions Inverter positioning 0 and inverter positioning 1 each use one high-speed
counter and one serial port (except that a serial port is not used when an
Analog Output Unit is used). (High-speed counter 0 is allocated to inverter
positioning 0 and high-speed counter 1 is allocated to inverter positioning
1.)
When inverter positioning 0 or 1 is used, the corresponding pulse output
(0 or 1) and the corresponding PWM command (pulse output 0 or 1) can-
not be used.
Precautions Determine the in-position range based on the mechanical system. Use a
smaller range if positioning precision is required. If the range is too small,
however, time may be required when stopping. If stopping quickly is more
important than precision, increase the in-position range.
The error counter cycle also affects the conversion between the output
value and the inverter frequency command value. Refer to 5-3-9 Auto-
matic Calculation of Inverter Frequency Command Value for details.
If inverter positioning does not end normally, adjust the following settings.
Reduce the acceleration/deceleration rates.
Lower rates will stabilize operation at the end of acceleration/deceleration.
Reduce the target frequency.
Change the error counter cycle. Increasing the error counter cycle improve
stopping precision, but it may also cause unstable speeds during opera-
tion.
Adjust the gain.
Increasing the gain will improve stopping precision, but it may also cause
unstable speeds during operation.
Address Usage
D102 Bits 00 to 15: Analog output value
T0 Analog conversion trigger
Address Usage
CIO 102 Bits 00 to 15: Analog conversion area
CIO 103 Bits 00 to 15: Analog conversion area
315
SECTION 6
Advanced Functions
This section describes all of the advanced functions of the CP1L that can be used to achieve specific application needs.
6-1 Interrupt Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
6-1-1 Overview of CP1L Interrupt Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
6-1-2 Input Interrupts (Direct Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
6-1-3 Input Interrupts (Counter Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
6-1-4 Scheduled Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
6-1-5 High-speed Counter Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
6-2 Quick-response Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6-3 Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
6-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
6-3-2 No-protocol Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
6-3-3 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
6-3-4 Communications: Smart Active Parts and Function Blocks. . . . . . . 350
6-3-5 Serial PLC Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
6-3-6 1:1 Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
6-3-7 1:N NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
6-3-8 1:1 NT Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
6-3-9 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
6-4 Analog Adjuster and External Analog Setting Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6-4-1 Analog Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6-4-2 External Analog Setting Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
6-5 Battery-free Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
6-5-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
6-5-2 Using Battery-free Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
6-6 Memory Cassette Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6-6-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
6-6-2 Mounting and Removing a Memory Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
6-6-3 Operation Using the CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
6-6-4 Memory Cassette Data Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
6-6-5 Procedures for Automatic Transfer from the Memory Cassette
at Startup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6-7 Program Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6-7-1 Read Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
6-7-2 Write Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
6-7-3 Protecting Program Execution Using the Lot Number. . . . . . . . . . . 389
6-8 Failure Diagnosis Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
6-8-1 Failure Alarm Instructions: FAL(006) and FALS(007) . . . . . . . . . . 390
6-8-2 Failure Point Detection: FPD(269) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
6-8-3 Simulating System Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
6-8-4 Output OFF Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
6-9 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
316
Interrupt Functions Section 6-1
6-1 Interrupt Functions
6-1-1 Overview of CP1L Interrupt Functions
The CP1L CPU Units processing is normally cyclical (overseeing processing
program execution I/O refreshing peripheral servicing), with cyclic
tasks executed in the program execution stage of the cycle. The interrupt
functions can be used to temporarily interrupt this cyclic processing and exe-
cute a particular program when a predefined condition occurs.
Types of Interrupt
Functions
Input Interrupts (Direct
Mode)
When one of the CPU Units built-in inputs goes from OFF to ON (or ON to
OFF), the corresponding interrupt task is executed. Interrupt tasks 140 to 145
are allocated to the 8 input terminals used for the input interrupts.
Input Interrupts (Counter
Mode)
This function counts input pulses at one of the CPU Units built-in inputs and
executes the corresponding interrupt task when the count reaches the SV.
The maximum input response frequency for input interrupts (in counter mode)
is 5 kHz.
Scheduled Interrupts This function executes an interrupt task at a fixed time interval measured by
the CPU Units built-in timer. The time interval units can be set to 10 ms, 1 ms,
or 0.1 ms. The minimum timer SV is 0.5 ms.
Interrupt task 2 is allocated to scheduled interrupt.
High-speed Counter
Interrupts
This function counts input pulses with the CPU Units built-in high-speed
counter and executes an interrupt task when the count reaches the preset
value or falls within a preset range (target-value or zone comparison). An
interrupt task between 0 and 255 can be allocated with an instruction.
Refer to 5-1 High-speed Counters for details on high-speed counters.
Note Power OFF interrupts cannot be used with CP1L CPU Units.
Creating an Interrupt
Task Program
1,2,3... 1. Right-click NewPLC1 [CP1L] Offline in the project workspace and select
Insert Program from the pop-up menu. A new program called
NewProgram2 (unassigned) will be inserted in the project workspace.
317
2. Right-click NewProgram2 (unassigned) and select Properties from the
pop-up menu to display the Program Properties Window.
3. Set the Task type in the Program Properties Window.
In this example, interrupt task 140 was allocated to NewProgram2.
If you click the X Button in the upper-right corner of the window, you can cre-
ate the program that will be executed as interrupt task 140.
The programs allocated to each task are independent and an END(001)
instruction must be input at the end of each program.
Interrupt Task Priority The input interrupts (direct mode and counter mode), high-speed counter
interrupts, scheduled interrupts, and external interrupts all have the same pri-
ority. If interrupt task A (an input interrupt, for example) is being executed
when interrupt task B (a scheduled interrupt, for example) is called, task A
processing will not be interrupted. Task B processing will be started when task
A is completed.
If two different types of interrupt occur simultaneously, they are executed in
the following order:
If two of the same type interrupt occur simultaneously, the task with the lower
interrupt task number is executed first.
Note If a user program is likely to generate multiple interrupts simultaneously, the
interrupt tasks will be executed in the order shown above, so it may take some
time from the occurrence of the interrupt condition to the actual execution of
the corresponding interrupt task. In particular, it is possible that scheduled
interrupts will not be executed in the preset time, so the program must be
designed to avoid interrupt conflicts if necessary.
Duplicate Processing
in Cyclic and Interrupt
Tasks
If a memory address is processed both by a cyclic task and an interrupt task,
an interrupt mask must be set to disable interrupts.
Input interrupt
(direct mode or
counter mode)
>
High-speed
counter inter-
rupt
>
Scheduled
interrupt
318
When an interrupt occurs, execution of the cyclic task will be interrupted
immediately, even during execution of a cyclic tasks instruction, and the par-
tially processed data is saved. After the interrupt task is completed, process-
ing returns to the cyclic task and the interrupted processing restarts with the
data saved before the interrupt processing. If the interrupt task overwrites a
memory address used by one of the interrupted instructions operands, that
overwrite may not be reflected after the saved data is restored as processing
returns to the cyclic task.
To prevent an instruction from being interrupted during processing, enter
DI(693) just before the instruction to disable interrupts and EI(694) just after
the instruction to enable interrupts again.
a. The following example shows duplicate processing by an interrupt
task, which interrupts processing of a +B instruction between the first
and third operands and overwrites the same memory address.
The interrupt occurs during processing of the +B instruction and the result is
saved temporarily without being written to the destination word (D0).
The interrupt task transfers the value of #0010 to D0, but the saved result of
the +B instruction (1235) is written to D0 when processing returns to the cyclic
task. In the end, the interrupt tasks processing has no effect.
+B
D0
#0001
D0
MOV
#0010
D0
D0
1234
0010
1235
Processing
interrupted.
Cyclic task
Interrupt task
Read D0 value (1234).
BCD addition: 1234 + 1 = 1235
Interrupt occurs.
MOV executed
0010 moved to D0.
Interrupt completed.
Data saved.
Addition result (1235)
Write addition result (1235).
Processing
of +B
instruction
Processing
continues.
Flow of Processing
319
Prevention of Duplicate Processing
b. The following example shows duplicate processing by an interrupt
task, which interrupts processing while BSET is writing to a block of
words and yields an incorrect comparison result.
Since the interrupt occurs during BSET(071) processing and before #1234 is
set in D10, the content of D0 and D10 do not match when the comparison is
made in the interrupt task (*1) and output A remains OFF.
In the end (*2), the D0 and D10 both contain #1234 and match, but the correct
comparison result is not reflected in comparison result output A.
+B
D0
#0001
D0
DI
EI
Cyclic task
Disables execution of
interrupt programs.
Enables execution of
interrupt programs.
BSET
#1234
D0
D10
CMP
D0
D10
A
1234
1234
1234 1234 1234
1234
0502
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
1234
OFF
OFF*
1
003E 0502
D0 D1 D2 D10 A
1234*
2
OFF
Cyclic task
Interrupt task
Equals Flag
#1234 set in D0.
#1234 set in D1.
#1234 set in D2.
#1234 set in D10.
BSET(071)
processing
CMP(020)
processing
Read D0.
Read D1.
Output result.
Compare D0 and D10.
Interrupted.
Continued.
Interrupt occurs.
Interrupt completed.
Flow of Processing
320
Prevention of Duplicate Processing
6-1-2 Input Interrupts (Direct Mode)
This function executes an interrupt task when the corresponding input signal
(up or down differentiated) is received.
Input Interrupt Bit and
The following diagrams show the input bits and terminals that are used for the
input interrupt function in each CPU Unit.
Input Terminal Block of
CPU Units with 14 I/O
Points
The 4 input bits CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.07 can be used for input interrupts.
Points
BSET
#1234
D0
D10
DI
EI
Cyclic task
Disables execution of
interrupt programs.
Enables execution of
interrupt programs.
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
00 02 04 06 NC NC
Inputs (CIO 0)
Input interrupt 3
Input interrupt 1
(Example: CPU Unit
with AC Power Supply)
Input interrupt 2
Input interrupt 0
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
Input interrupt 0
Input interrupt 2
Input interrupt 3
Input interrupt 1
Input interrupt 5
Input interrupt 4
Inputs (CIO 0)
(Example: CPU Unit
321
Points
Points
Setting the Input Functions in the PLC Setup
Normally, bits CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.09 are used as normal inputs. When using
these inputs for input interrupts, use the CX-Programmer to change the
inputs setting in the PLC Setup.
Note *Input interrupts 4 and 5 are not supported by CPU Units with 14 I/O Points.
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04
Input interrupt 0
Input interrupt 2
Input interrupt 3
Input interrupt 1
Input interrupt 5
Input interrupt 4
(Example: CPU Unit
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 110
Input interrupt 0
Input interrupt 2
Input interrupt 3
Input interrupt 1
Input interrupt 5
Input interrupt 4
(Example: CPU Unit
Input terminal
block
CPU Unit Input interrupt Task number
Word Bit CPU Units with
40 I/O Points
CPU Units with
30 I/O Points
CPU Units with
20 I/O Points
CPU Units with
14 I/O Points
CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 Normal input 0 Normal input 0 Normal input 0 --- ---
01 Normal input 1 Normal input 1 Normal input 1 Normal input 1 --- ---
04 Normal input 4 Normal input 4 Normal input 4 Normal inputs 4 Input interrupt 0 Interrupt task 140
08 Normal input 8 Normal input 8 Normal input 8 --- Input interrupt 4* Interrupt task 144*
09 Normal input 9 Normal input 9 Normal input 9 --- Input interrupt 5* Interrupt task 145*
10 Normal input 10 Normal input 10 Normal input 10 --- --- ---
CIO 1 00 to 05 Normal input 12
to 17
Normal input 12
to 17
--- --- --- ---
06 to 11 Normal inputs 18
to 23
--- --- --- --- ---
322
Procedure
PLC Setup Click the Built-in Input Tab to display the Interrupt Input settings (at the bottom
of the tab). Set the input function to Interrupt for each input that will be used
as an input interrupt.
Note (1) Interrupt Input settings IN0 to IN7 correspond to input interrupt numbers
0 to 7.
(2) When using an input as a general-purpose (normal) input, set the input
function to Normal.
Writing the Ladder
Program
MSKS(690) Settings The MSKS(690) instruction must be executed in order to use input interrupts.
The settings made with MSKS(690) are enabled with just one execution, so in
general execute MSKS(690) in just one cycle using an up-differentiated condi-
tion.
Select the input interrupts.
Determine the inputs to be used for input
interrupts and corresponding task numbers.
Wire the inputs. Wire the inputs.
Set the PLC Setup.

Use the CX-Programmer to select the inter-
rupt inputs in the PLC Setup.
Write the ladder program.

Write the programs for the corresponding
interrupt task numbers.
Use MSKS(690) to specify up-differentiation
or down-differentiation.
Use MSKS(690) to enable input interrupts (in
direct mode).
323
MSKS(690) has the following two functions and two of the instructions are
used in combination. If an up-differentiated input interrupt is being used, the
first MSKS(690) instruction can be omitted since the input is set for up-differ-
entiation by default.
MSKS(690) Operands
Note *Input interrupts 4 and 5 are not supported by the CPU Units with 14 I/O
Points.
Writing the Interrupt
Tasks Program
Create programs for interrupt tasks 140 to 145, which are executed by the cor-
responding input interrupt. Always put an END(001) instruction at the last
address of the program.
Input Interrupt
Settings and
Operation
This example shows how to execute interrupt task 140 when input CIO 0.04
goes ON.
Settings
1,2,3... 1. Connect an input device to input 0.04.
2. Use the CX-Programmer to set input 0 as an input interrupt in the PLC Set-
up.
3. Use the CX-Programmer to create the program to use for interrupt pro-
cessing and allocate the program to interrupt task 140.
4. Use the CX-Programmer to write MSKS(690) in the program.
Input interrupt
number
Interrupt
task
number
1. Up-differentiation or
Down-differentiation
2. Enabling/Disabling
the input interrupt
N S N S
Input
interrupt
number
Execution
condition
Input
interrupt
number
Enable/
Disable
Input interrupt 0 140 110 (or 10) #0: Up-dif-
ferentiated
#1: Down-
differenti-
ated
100 (or 6) #0: Enable
interrupt
#1: Disable
interrupt
Input interrupt 1 141 111 (or 11) 101 (or 7)
Input interrupt 4* 144 114 104
Input interrupt 5* 145 115 105
MSKS(690)
N
S
MSKS(690)
N
S
Execution condition
2. Enables or disables the input
interrupt.
1. Specifies up-differentiated or
down-differentiated input
interrupt.
MSKS(690)
110
#0
MSKS(690)
100
#0
W0.00
(Execution condition)
1. Specifies input interrupt 0.
2. Specifies up-differentiated input interrupt.
3. Specifies input interrupt 0.
4. Enables the input interrupt.
324
Operation When execution condition W0.00 goes ON, MSKS(690) is executed to enable
CIO 0.04 as an up-differentiated input interrupt.
If CIO 0.04 goes from OFF to ON (up-differentiation), processing of the cyclic
task that is currently being executed will be interrupted and processing of
interrupt task 140 will start. When the interrupt task processing is completed,
processing of the interrupted ladder program will restart.
Restrictions Inputs cannot be used for input interrupts when they are being used as gen-
eral-purpose (normal) inputs or quick-response inputs.
6-1-3 Input Interrupts (Counter Mode)
Overview This function counts up-differentiated or down-differentiated input signals and
executes an interrupt task when the count reaches the set value.
The counter-mode input interrupts use the same input terminals as the
direct-mode input interrupts. Refer to 6-1-2 Input Interrupts (Direct Mode)
for details.
The counter input mode can be set to up or down (incrementing or decre-
menting) with MSKS(690).
The counter-mode input interrupts start the same interrupt tasks (140 to
145) as the direct-mode input interrupts.
The maximum input response frequency is 5 kHz total for all counter-
mode input interrupts.
Relationship of Input Bits,
Task Numbers, and
Counters
Procedure
W0.00
0.04
MSKS(690) executed
Cyclic task processing
Interrupt
task 140
processing
Processing
interrupted
Cyclic task
processing
Processing
interrupted
Interrupt
task 140
processing
Input bits Function Counter words
Input interrupt
number
Interrupt task
number
SV
(0000 to FFFF)
PV
0.04 Input interrupt 0 140 A532 A536
0.08* Input interrupt 4* 144 A544 A548
0.09* Input interrupt 5* 145 A545 A549
Select the input interrupts (counter
mode).
Determine the inputs to be used for input
interrupts and corresponding task numbers.
Wire the inputs. Wire the inputs.

325
Note The input interrupt (counter mode) function is one of the input interrupt func-
tions and executes an interrupt based on the pulse count. If the input pulse
frequency is too high, interrupts will occur too frequently and prevent normal
cyclic task processing. In this case, cycle time too long errors may occur or
the pulse input may not be read.
The maximum total frequency of the counter-mode interrupt inputs is 5 kHz.
Even in this case, the high frequencies may adversely affect other devices
operation or the system load, so check the systems operation thoroughly
before using the counters at high frequencies.
PLC Setup The procedures for using the CX-Programmer to set the PLC Setup are the
same as the procedures for input interrupts (direct mode). Refer to 6-1-2 Input
Interrupts (Direct Mode) for details.
Writing the Ladder
Program
MSKS(690) Settings The MSKS(690) instruction must be executed in order to use input interrupts.
The settings made with MSKS(690) are enabled with just one execution, so in
general execute MSKS(690) in just one cycle using an up-differentiated condi-
tion.
MSKS(690) has the following two functions and three of the instructions are
used in combination. If up-differentiated input pulses are being used, the first
MSKS(690) instruction can be omitted since the input is set for up-differentia-
tion by default.
Set the PLC Setup.

Use the CX-Programmer to select the inter-
rupt inputs in the PLC Setup.
Set the counter SVs.

Set the interrupt counter SVs in the corre-
sponding AR Area words.

Write the programs for the corresponding
interrupt task numbers.
Use MSKS(690) to specify up-differentiation
or down-differentiation.
Use MSKS(690) to enable input interrupts (in
counter mode).
MSKS(690)
N
S
MSKS(690)
N
S
Execution condition
2. Enables or disables the input interrupt.
1. Specifies up-differentiated or
down-differentiated inputs.
326
MSKS(690) Operands
Writing the Interrupt
Tasks Program
Create programs for interrupt tasks 140 to 145, which are executed by the cor-
responding input interrupt. Always put an END(001) instruction at the last
Input Interrupt
Settings and
Operation
This example shows how to execute interrupt task 141 when 200 up-differenti-
ated pulses have been counted at input CIO 0.05. (The counter is an incre-
menting counter.)
Settings
1,2,3... 1. Connect an input device to input 0.05.
2. Use the CX-Programmer to set input 0.05 as an input interrupt in the PLC
Setup.
3. Use the CX-Programmer to create the program to use for interrupt pro-
cessing and allocate the program to interrupt task 141.
4. Use the CX-Programmer to set a high-speed counter SV of 00C8 hex (200
decimal) in A533.
5. Use the CX-Programmer to write MSKS(690) in the program.
operation of the input interrupt in counter mode.
Input interrupt
number
Interrupt
task
number
1. Up-differentiation or
Down-differentiation
2. Enabling/Disabling the
input interrupt
N S N S
Input
interrupt
number
Count
trigger
Input
interrupt
number
Enable/
Disable
Input interrupt 0 140 110 (or 10) #0: Up-dif-
ferentiated
pulses
#1: Down-
differenti-
ated pulses
100 (or 6) #2: Start count-
ing down (dec-
rementing) and
enable inter-
rupts
#3: Start count-
ing up (incre-
menting) and
enable inter-
rupts
Input interrupt 4* 144* 114 104
Input interrupt 5* 145* 115 105
MSKS(690)
111
#0
MSKS(690)
111
#3
W0.00
Specifies input interrupt 1.
Specifies up-differentiated pulses.
Specifies input interrupt 1.
Specifies an incrementing counter,
starts counting, and enables the input
interrupt.
327
When CIO 0.05 goes from OFF to ON 200 times, processing of the cyclic task
that is currently being executed will be interrupted and processing of interrupt
task 141 will start. When the interrupt task processing is completed, process-
ing of the interrupted ladder program will restart.
Restrictions Inputs cannot be used for input interrupts when they are being used as gen-
eral-purpose (normal) inputs or quick-response inputs.
6-1-4 Scheduled Interrupts
This function executes an interrupt task at a fixed time interval measured by
the CPU Units built-in timer. Interrupt task 2 is allocated to scheduled inter-
rupt.
Procedure
PLC Setup Click the Timings Tab and set the input function to Scheduled Interrupt Inter-
val (the scheduled interrupt timers units). The timing units can be set to 10
ms, 1 ms, or 0.1 ms. The scheduled interrupt timer SV is calculated by multi-
plying this interval setting by the timer SV set with MSKS(690).

W0.00
0

0.05
Counter SV (in A533)
= 200 (00C8 hex)
Counting enabled.
Counter PV (in A537)
Interrupt task 141
executed.
Set the PLC Setup.
Use the CX-Programmer to set the scheduled
interrupt timer units in the PLC Setup.

Write the program allocated to interrupt task
2 (scheduled interrupt task).
Use MSKS(690) to specify the timer SV.
328
Scheduled Interrupt Interval Setting
Note (1) Set a scheduled interrupt time (interval) that is longer than the time re-
quired to execute the corresponding interrupt task.
(2) If the scheduled time interval is too short, the scheduled interrupt task will
be executed too frequently, which may cause a long cycle time and ad-
versely affect the cyclic task processing.
(3) If an interrupt task is being executed for another interrupt (input interrupt,
high-speed counter interrupt, or external interrupt) when the scheduled
interrupt occurs, the scheduled interrupt will not be executed until the oth-
er interrupt task is completed.
When different kinds of interrupts are being used, design the program to
handle multiple interrupts smoothly. Even if two interrupts occur at the
same time, the scheduled interrupts will continue as programmed, so the
scheduled interrupt tasks will continue to occur at the scheduled times
even if specific scheduled interrupts are delayed.
Writing the Ladder
Program
MSKS(690) Settings The MSKS(690) instruction must be executed in order to use the scheduled
interrupt. The settings made with MSKS(690) are enabled with just one exe-
cution, so in general execute MSKS(690) in just one cycle using an up-differ-
entiated condition.
MSKS(690)
N
S
Execution condition
Specifies scheduled interrupt 0 (interrupt task 2).
Sets the scheduled interrupt time interval and
starts timing.
329
MSKS(690) Operands
Writing the Scheduled
Interrupt Tasks Program
Create the program for interrupt task 2 (scheduled interrupt 0), which is exe-
cuted by the input interrupt. Always put an END(001) instruction at the last
Selecting the Scheduled Interrupt Task
Input Interrupt
Settings and
Operation
This example shows how to execute interrupt task 2 at 30.5 ms intervals.
Settings
1,2,3... 1. Use the CX-Programmer to set the scheduled interrupt time units to 0.1
ms.
2. Use the CX-Programmer to create the interrupt program allocated to inter-
rupt task 2.
the scheduled interrupt with the reset start specified. The timer is reset and
timing starts.
Operand Interrupt time interval (period)
N S Time units set in
PLC Setup
Scheduled time
interval
Scheduled interrupt
number
Interrupt time
(interrupt task 2)
14: Reset start
4: Start without reset
#0000 to #270F
(0 to 9999)
10 ms 10 to 99,990 ms
1 ms 1 to 9,999 ms
0.1 ms 0.5 to 999.9 ms
MSKS(690)
14
&305
W0.00
Specifies scheduled interrupt 0 (reset start).
Sets the scheduled time interval to 30.5 ms
(305 x 0.1 ms = 30.5 ms)
330
Scheduled interrupt 2 is executed every 30.5 ms.
6-1-5 High-speed Counter Interrupts
This function executes the specified interrupt task (0 to 255) when the CP1L
CPU Units built-in high-speed counter PV matches a pre-registered value
(target value comparison) or lies within a pre-registered range (range compar-
ison).
CTBL(882) is used to register the comparison table.
Either CTBL(882) or INI(880) can be used to start comparison.
INI(880) is used to stop comparison.
For details on the built-in high-speed counter, refer to 5-1 High-speed
Counters.
Procedure
W0.00
30.5 ms 30.5 ms 30.5 ms
Cyclic task
processing
Interrupt
task 2
Interrupt
Interrupt
task 2
Interrupt
Interrupt
task 2
Interrupt
Cyclic task
processing
Cyclic task
processing
Cyclic task
processing
Internal
clock
Set the PLC Setup.
Using the CX-Programmer, set the PLC
Setup so that the built-in input is used for a
high-speed counter.
Wire the inputs.

Wire the input being used for the high-speed
counter.

Write the interrupt task program.
Use CTBL(882) to register the high-speed
counter number and comparison table. Cre-
ate the comparison tables data in advance.
331
PLC Setup Click the Built-in Input Tab to and set the high-speed counters that will be
used for interrupts.
Settings
Input Function Settings
According the PLC Setup
Setting
If the built-in inputs are set to be used as high-speed counters 0 to 3, the func-
tion of the input bits will change as shown in the following table. If a high-
speed counter is set to be used, the bits in CIO 0 and CIO 1 can no longer be
used for normal inputs, input interrupts, or quick-response inputs.
Item Setting
Use high speed counter 0 to 3 Use counter
Circular mode (ring mode)
Circular Max. Count 0 to FFFF FFFF hex
(When circular (ring) mode is selected as the count-
ing mode, set maximum ring value here.)
Reset method Phase Z and software reset
Software reset
Phase Z and software reset (continue comparing)
Software reset (continue comparing)
Input Setting Differential phase inputs (4x)
Up/Down inputs
Increment pulse input
332
CPU Units with 20, 30, or 40 I/O Points
Input terminal
block
Default settings High-speed counter settings
Word Bit CPU Units with
40 I/O Points
CPU Units with
30 I/O Points
CPU Units with
20 I/O Points
Single-phase
(increment pulse
input)
Two-phase
(differential
phase x4,
up/down, or
pulse/direction)
Origin searches
CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 Normal input 0 Normal input 0 High-speed counter
0: Increment input
High-speed
counter 0: Phase
A, Increment, or
Count input
01 Normal input 1 Normal input 1 Normal input 1 High-speed counter
1: Increment input
High-speed
counter 0: Phase
B, Decrement, or
Direction input
2: Increment input
High-speed
counter 1: Phase
A, Increment, or
Count input
3: Increment input
High-speed
counter 1: Phase
B, Decrement, or
Direction input
0: Phase Z or reset
input
High-speed
counter 0: Phase
Z or reset input
1: Phase Z or reset
input
High-speed
counter 1: Phase
Z or reset input
2: Phase Z or reset
input
--- Pulse output 0:
Origin input signal
3: Phase Z or reset
input
--- Pulse output 1:
Origin input signal
10 Normal input 10 Normal input 10 Normal input 10 --- --- Pulse output 0:
Origin proximity
input signal
11 Normal input 11 Normal input 11 Normal input 11 --- --- Pulse output 1:
Origin proximity
input signal
CIO 1 00 to 05 Normal input 12
to 17
Normal input 12
to 17
--- --- ---
06 to 11 Normal inputs 18
to 23
--- --- --- ---
333
High-speed Counter
Memory Areas
Note The comparison table and comparison conditions 1 to 8 are different for tar-
get-value comparison and range comparison operations. For details, refer to
next page.
Input terminal block Default setting High-speed counter settings
(increment pulse
input)
Two-phase
(differential phase x4,
up/down, or
pulse/direction)
Origin searches
CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 High-speed counter 0:
Increment input
Phase A, Increment, or
Count input
---
01 Normal input 1 High-speed counter 1:
Increment input
Phase B, Decrement,
or Direction input
---
Increment input
Phase A, Increment, or
Count input
Pulse output 0: Origin
Increment input
Phase B, Decrement,
or Direction input
Pulse output 1: Origin
Phase Z or reset input
---
---
input signal
input signal
Content High-speed counter
0 1
PV Leftmost 4 digits A271 A273
Range Comparison Condi-
tion Met Flags
ON for match in range 1 A274.00 A275.00
Comparison In-progress
Flags
ON while the comparison is in
progress.
A274.08 A275.08
Overflow/Underflow Flags ON if a PV overflow or under-
flow occurred while operating
in linear mode.
A274.09 A275.09
Count Direction Flags 0: Decrementing
1: Incrementing
A274.10 A275.10
334
REGISTER
COMPARISON TABLE
Instruction:
CTBL(882)
CTBL(882) compares the PV of a high-speed counter (0 to 3) to target values
or target value ranges and executes the corresponding interrupt task (0 to
255) when the specified condition is met.
Contents of the
Comparison Table
Target-value Comparison Table
Depending on the number of target values in the table, the target-value com-
parison table requires a continuous block of 4 to 145 words.
Range Comparison Table
The range comparison table requires a continuous block of 40 words because
comparison conditions 1 to 8 require 5 words each (2 words for the upper
range value, 2 words for the lower range value, and one word for the interrupt
task number).
Operand Settings
P High-speed
counter number
#0000 High-speed counter 0
C Control data #0000 Registers a target-value comparison table and
starts the comparison operation.
#0001 Registers a range comparison table and starts
the comparison operation.
#0002 Registers a target-value comparison table.
#0003 Registers a range comparison table.
TB First comparison
table word
Specifies the leading word address of the comparison
table, which is described below.
@CTBL(882)
P
C
TB

Execution condition
P: High-speed counter number
TB: First comparison table word
C: Control data
Number of target values
Target value 1 (rightmost digits)
Target value 1 (leftmost digits)
Task number for target value 1
0001 to 0030 hex (1 to 48 target values)
Target value 48 (rightmost digits)
Target value 48 (leftmost digits)
Task number for target value 48
Interrupt task number
Direction
0: Incrementing
1: Decrementing
Interrupt task number
00 to FF hex (0 to 255)
335
Note Always set the upper limit greater than or equal to the lower limit in each
range.
MODE CONTROL
Instruction: INI(880)
INI(880) can be used to start/stop comparison with the high-speed counters
comparison table, change the high-speed counters PV, change the PV of
interrupt inputs in counter mode, and control the pulse output functions.
New PV Setting in NV and NV+1
Range 1 lower value (rightmost)
Range 1 lower value (leftmost
Task number for range 1
0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex (see note)
Range 1 upper value (rightmost)
Range 1 upper value (leftmost
Range 8 lower value (rightmost)
Range 8 lower value (leftmost
Task number for range 8
Range 8 upper value (rightmost)
Range 8 upper value (leftmost
Interrupt task number: 0000 to 00FF hex (0 to 255)
AAAA hex: Do not start interrupt task
FFFF hex: Disables that ranges settings.
Operand Settings
P Port specifier #0000, #0001 Pulse outputs 0 or 1
#0100 to #0105 Input interrupts 0 to 5 (in counter mode)
#1000 or #1001 PWM(891) output 0 or 1
C Control data #0000 Start comparison.
#0001 Stop comparison.
#0002 Change the PV.
#0003 Stop pulse output.
NV First word of
new PV
NV and NV+1 contain the new PV when C is set to #0002
(change the PV).
@INI (880)
P
C
NV
Execution condition
P: Port specifier
NV: First word of new PV
C: Control data
New PV (rightmost 4 digits)
New PV (leftmost 4 digits)
Setting range for pulse outputs and high-speed counter inputs:
Setting range for input interrupts (counter mode):
0000 0000 to 0000 FFFF hex
336
Ladder Program
Examples
Example 1: High-speed
Counter (Linear Mode)
In this example, high-speed counter 0 operates in linear mode and starts
interrupt task 10 when the PV reaches 30,000 (0000 7530 hex).
1,2,3... 1. Set high-speed counter 0 in the PLC Setups Built-in Input Tab.
2. Set the target-value comparison table in words D10000 to D10003.
3. Create the program for interrupt task 10. Always put an END(001) instruc-
tion at the programs last address.
4. Use CTBL(882) to start the comparison operation with high-speed counter
0 and interrupt task 10.
5. Operation
When execution condition W0.00 goes ON, the comparison starts with
high-speed counter 0.
When the PV of high speed counter 0 reaches 30,000, cyclic task process-
ing is interrupted, and interrupt task 10 is processed. When interrupt task
10 processing is completed, processing of the interrupted cyclic task re-
sumes.
Item Setting
High-speed counter 0 Use counter
Circular Max. Count ---
Reset method Software reset
D10000 #0001 Number of target values = 1
D10001 #7530 Rightmost 4 digits of the target value 1 data Target value =
30,000
(0000 7530 hex)
D10002 #0000 Leftmost 4 digits of the target value 1 data
D10003 #000A Bit 15: 0 (incrementing)
Bits 0 to 7: A hex (interrupt task number 10)
W0.00
@CTBL(882)
#0000
#0000
D10000
Register a target-value comparison table and
start comparison operation.
337
Example 2: High-speed
Counter (Ring Mode)
In this example, high-speed counter 1 operates in circular (ring) mode and
starts interrupt task 12 when the PV is between 25,000 (0000 61A8 hex) and
25,500 (0000 639C hex).
The maximum ring count is set at 50,000 (0000 C350 hex).
1,2,3... 1. Set high-speed counter 1 in the PLC Setups Built-in Input Tab.
2. Set the range comparison table starting at word D20000. Even though
range 1 is the only range being used, all 40 words must still be dedicated
to the range comparison table.
3. Create the program for interrupt task 12. Always put an END(001) instruc-
tion at the programs last address.
W0.00
CIO 0.01
0
Counting enabled
Cyclic task
processing
Interrupt task
10 processing
Processing
interrupted
Cyclic task
processing
Interrupt task
10 processing
Processing
interrupted
Cyclic task
processing
30,000 (7530 hex)
High-speed counter 0 PV
(in A270 and A271)
Item Setting
High-speed counter 1 Use counter
Counting mode Circular mode
Circular Max. Count 50,000
Reset method Software reset (continue comparing)
D20000 #61A8 Rightmost 4 digits of range 1 lower limit Lower limit value:
25,000
D20001 #0000 Leftmost 4 digits of range 1 lower limit
D20002 #639C Rightmost 4 digits of range 1 upper limit Upper limit value:
25,500
D20003 #0000 Leftmost 4 digits of range 1 upper limit
D20004 #000C Range 1 interrupt task number = 12 (C hex)
D20005 to
D20008
All
#0000
Range 2 lower and upper limit values
Range 2 settings
D20009 #FFFF Disables range 2.
~
D20014
D20019
D20024
D20029
D20034
#FFFF Set the fifth word for ranges 3 to 7 (listed at left) to #FFFF to
disable those ranges.
~
D20035 to
D20038
All
#0000
Range 8 lower and upper limit values
Range 8 settings
D20039 #FFFF Disables range 8.
338
Quick-response Inputs Section 6-2
4. Use CTBL(882) to start the comparison operation with high-speed counter
1 and interrupt task 12.
5. Operation
When execution condition W0.00 goes ON, the comparison starts with
high-speed counter 1.
When the PV of high speed counter 1 is between 25,000 and 25,500, cyclic
task processing is interrupted, and interrupt task 12 is processed. When
interrupt task 12 processing is completed, processing of the interrupted cy-
clic task resumes.
6-2 Quick-response Inputs
Overview
The quick-response inputs can read pulses with an ON time shorter than the
cycle time (as short as 50 s). Use the quick-response inputs to read signals
shorter than the cycle time, such as inputs from photomicrosensors.
PLC Setup Use the CX-Programmer to set a built-in input as a quick-response input in the
PLC Setup. Click the Built-in Input Tab to display the Interrupt Input settings
(at the bottom of the tab). Set the input function from Normal to Quick for each
input that will be used as a quick-response input.
W0.00
@CTBL(882)
#0001
#0001
D20000
Register a range comparison table and start
comparison operation.

CIO 0.01
W0.00
Counting enabled
Cyclic task
processing
Interrupt task
10 processing
Processing
interrupted
Cyclic task
processing
Interrupt task
10 processing
Processing
interrupted
Cyclic task
processing
Upper limit: 25,500 (639C hex)
High-speed counter 1 PV
(in A272 and A273)
Lower limit: 25,000 (61A8 hex)
339
Bit Allocation for
Quick-Response
Inputs
The following diagrams show the input bits and terminals that can be used for
quick-response inputs in each CPU Unit.
Points
The 4 input bits CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.07 can be used as quick-response inputs.
Points
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 NC NC
00 02 04 06 NC NC
((CPU Unit with
AC Power Supply)
CIO 0 inputs
Quick-response input 1
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10
(CPU Unit with
AC Power Supply))
340
Points
Points
Setting the Input Functions in the PLC Setup
Normally, bits CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.09 are used as normal inputs. When using
these inputs as quick-response inputs, use the CX-Programmer to change the
inputs setting in the PLC Setup.
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04
(CPU Unit with
AC Power Supply)
CIO 1 inputs CIO 0 inputs
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
(CPU Unit with
AC Power Supply)
CIO 1 inputs CIO 0 inputs
Input terminal
block
Input operation setting Quick-response inputs
Word Bit CPU Units with 40 I/O
Points
CPU Units with 30
I/O Points
CPU Units with
20 I/O Points
CPU Units with
14 I/O Points
CIO 0 00 Normal input 0 Normal input 0 Normal input 0 Normal input 0 ---
01 Normal input 1 Normal input 1 Normal input 1 Normal input 1 ---
04 Normal input 4 Normal input 4 Normal input 4 Normal inputs 4 Quick-response input 0
08 Normal input 8 Normal input 8 Normal input 8 --- Quick-response input 4*
09 Normal input 9 Normal input 9 Normal input 9 --- Quick-response input 5*
10 Normal input 10 Normal input 10 Normal input 10 --- ---
11 Normal input 11 Normal input 11 Normal input 11 --- ---
CIO 1 00 to 05 Normal input 12 to 17 Normal input 12 to 17 --- --- ---
06 to 11 Normal inputs 18 to 23 --- --- --- ---
341
Interrupt Input and
Quick-response Input
Specifications
Procedure
Restrictions Inputs cannot be used as quick-response inputs when they are being used as
general-purpose (normal) inputs, input interrupts, or high-speed counter
inputs.
Item Specification
ON delay 30 s max.
OFF delay 150 s max.
Response pulse
ON
OFF
30 s min. 150 s min.
Select quick-response inputs.
Wire inputs.
PLC Setup settings
When IN0 to IN5 are used as quick response inputs,
set the corresponding built-in input's Interrupt Input
setting to Quick in the PLC Setup's Built-in Input Tab.
Use the quick-response inputs in
instructions such as LD.
Ladder program
342
Serial Communications Section 6-3
6-3 Serial Communications
6-3-1 Overview
The CP1L CPU Units support the following serial communications functions.
Protocol Connected devices Description Serial
port 1
Serial
port 2
No-protocol Standard devices supporting serial communications Communicates with standard
devices with an RS-232C or
RS-422A/485 port without a
commandresponse format.
Instead the TXD(236) and
RXD(235) instructions are exe-
cuted from the program to
transmit data from the trans-
mission port or read data in the
reception port. The frame
headers and end codes can be
specified.
OK OK
Serial gate-
way (to
Compo-
Way/F or
Modbus-
RTU)
OMRON components supporting CompoWay/F or Mod-
bus-RTU slave devices
Converts received FINS com-
mands into CompoWay/F or
Modbus-RTU commands and
transfers them on the serial
communications path.
OK OK
CP1L CPU Unit
Standard device with
serial communications
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
CP1L CPU Unit
RS-485 (CompoWay/F or Modbus-RTU)
OMRON CompoWay/F-compliant components
or Modbus-RTU slave devices
343
Serial PLC
Link
CP-series CPU Units or CJ1M CPU Units Up to ten words per Unit can
be shared by up to nine CPU
Units, including one Polling
Unit and eight Polled Units.
An RS-422A/485 Option
Boards (CP1W-CIF11) are
used to communicate via RS-
422A/485, or RS-232C Option
Boards (CP1W-CIF01) can be
used to communicate between
two CPU Units via an RS-232C
connection.
CJ1M CPU Units can also be
included in Serial PLC Links,
and the Serial PLC Links can
also include PTs as Polled
Units via 1:N NT Links.
Note Serial PLC Links can be
created on serial port 1
or serial port 2, but not
on both ports at the
same time.
OK OK
1:N NT links
(1:N NT
Links are
also used for
1:1 connec-
tions.)
OMRON PTs (Programmable Terminals) Data can be exchanged with
PTs without using a communi-
cations program in the CPU
Unit.
OK OK
Host Link Host computer or OMRON PT (Programmable Terminal) 1) Various control commands
such as reading and writing
I/O memory, changing the
operating mode, and force-
setting/resetting bits can be
executed by sending C-
mode host link commands
or FINS commands from the
host computer to the CPU
Unit.
2) It is also possible to send
FINS commands from the
CPU Unit to the host com-
puter to send data or infor-
mation.
Use Host Link communica-
tions to monitor data, such as
operating status, error informa-
tion, and quality data in the
PLC or send data, such as pro-
duction planning information, to
the PLC.
OK OK
port 1
Serial
port 2
CP1L CPU Unit
Polling Unit
RS-422A/485 Option Board
RS-422A/485
Shared data
CP1L CPU Unit
Polled Unit
CP1L CPU Unit
Polled Unit
NS-series PT
RS-232C
NT Link
CP1L CPU Unit
Personal computer
RS-232C
Host Link
344
6-3-2 No-protocol Communications
No-protocol communications enable sending and receiving data using the
TRANSMIT (TXD(236)) and RECEIVE (RXD(235)) instructions without using
a protocol and without data conversion (e.g., no retry processing, data type
conversion, or process branching based on received data). The communica-
tions mode for the serial port must be set for no-protocol communications in
the PLC Setup.
No-protocol communications are used to send data in one direction to or from
standard devices that have an RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port using TXD(236)
or RXD(235).
Peripheral
bus (toolbus)
CX-Programmer Provides high-speed communi-
cations with the CX-Program-
mer.
(Remote programming through
modems is not supported.)
OK OK
1:1 NT Links OMRON PTs (Programmable Terminals) Enables data exchange with a
PT without communications
programming in the CPU Unit.
(The 1:N NT Link protocol is
used for communications even
for 1:1 connections.)
OK OK
1:1 Links Enables linking data in a 64-
word Link Area between two
PLCs connected by an RS-
232C cable.
OK OK
port 1
Serial
port 2
Personal computer running
the CX-Programmer
RS-232C
Peripheral bus (toolbus)
NS-series PT
RS-232C
NT Link
1:1 Link
CP1L CPU Unit
C-series CPU Unit
CPM1A-V1
CPM2@
CQM1H
C200HX/HG/HE
RS-232C
CP1L CPU Unit
345
For example, simple (non-protocol) communications can be used to input data
from a barcode reader or output data to a printer.
The following table lists the no-protocol communication functions supported
by CP1L PLCs.
CP1L CPU Unit
TXD(236) or RXD(235)
Sending/receiving data
RS-232C or RS422A/485
Standard device with
(e.g., barcode reader)
Transfer direction Method Max.
amount
of data
Frame format Other functions
Start code End code
Data transmission
(PLC External device)
Execution of
TXD(236) in
the program
256 bytes Yes: 00 to FF
No: None
Yes:
00 to FF or CR+LF
No: None
(The amount of data to
receive is specified
between 1 and 256 bytes
when no end code is speci-
fied.)
Send delay time
(delay between
TXD(236) execu-
tion and sending
data from specified
port): 0 to 99,990
ms (unit: 10 ms)
Controlling RS and
ER signals
Data reception
(External device PLC)
Execution of
RXD(235) in
the program
256 bytes Monitoring CS and
DR signals
346
Procedure
Message Frame Formats Data can be placed between a start code and end code for transmission by
TXD(236) and data between a start code and end code can be received by
RXD(235). When transmitting with TXD(236), data from I/O memory is trans-
mitted, and when receiving with RXD(235), the data (without start/end codes)
is stored in I/O memory. Up to 256 bytes (including the start and end codes)
can be transferred in no-protocol mode.
The start and end codes are set in the PLC Setup.
The following table shows the message formats that can be set for transmis-
sions and receptions in no-protocol mode.
When more than one start code is used, the first start code will be effec-
tive.
When more than one end code is used, the first end code will be effective.
If the data being transferred contains the end code, the data transfer will
be stopped midway. In this case, change the end code to CR+LF.
Set the PLC Setup from the CX-
Programmer.
(Set the communications mode to
RS-232C and set the parameters.)
Power OFF
Connect the CPU Unit and external device through
RS-232C or RS-485. (Mounting the RS-232C or
RS-422A/485 Option Board in option slot 1 or 2.
Set the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit.
Turn OFF pin 4 to use serial port 1.
Turn OFF pin 5 to use serial port 2.
Note Serial port 2 is not supported by CPU
Units with CPU type L.
Power ON
PLC External device External device PLC
Execute TXD(236). Execute RXD(235).
Start code End code
No Yes CR+LF
No
Yes
data
256 bytes max.
data
256 bytes max.
ED data
256 bytes max.
CR+F
data
256 bytes max.
ST
data
256 bytes max.
ST ED data
256 bytes max.
ST CR+LF
347
Note A setting can be made to delay the transmission of data after the execution of
TXD(236).
Refer to the SYSMAC CP Series CP1L CPU Unit Programming Manual
(W451) for more details on TXD(236) and RXD(235).
6-3-3 Modbus-RTU Easy Master Function
Overview If an RS-232C or RS-422A/485 Option Board is used, the CP1L CPU Unit can
function as a Modbus-RTU Master to send Modbus-RTU commands by
manipulating software switches. This enables easily controlling Modbus-com-
pliant slaves, such as Inverters, through serial communications.
The following OMRON Inverters support Modbus-RTU slave operation:
3G3JV, 3G3MV, and 3G3RV.
The communications mode in the PLC Setup must be set to the Gateway
Mode to enable this functionality.
Time
Execution of TXD(236)
Delay time
Transmission
348
Modbus-RTU commands can be set simply by turning ON a software switch
after setting the Modbus slave address, function, and data in the DM fixed
allocation words for the Modbus-RTU Easy Master. The response when
received is also store in the DM fixed allocation words for the Modbus-RTU
Easy Master.
DM Fixed Allocation
Words for the
Modbus-RTU Easy
Master
The Modbus-RTU command is stored in the following words in the DM Area.
M-type CPU Units
Serial port 1: D32200 to D32249
L-type CPU Units
When a response is received after turning ON the Modbus-RTU Master Exe-
cution Bit, it is sotred in the following words in the DM Area.
M-type CPU Units
L-type CPU Units
15 08 07 00
D32200
--- ---
D32201 --- ---
D32202
D32203
OMRON Inverters
3G3JV, 3G3MV, or
3G3RV
Communications are easily achieved
by simply by turning ON A641.00
after setting the Modbus-RTU
command in the DM fixed allocation
words.
Slave address
Function code
Number of communications data bytes
Communications data
Slave address Function code Communications data
Slave address Function code Communications data
Modbus-RTU Master
Execution Bit for Port 1
A641.00
Modbus-RTU
:
:
Words Bits Contents
Serial port 1
on M-type
CPU Unit
Serial port 2
on M-type
CPU Unit
or
Serial port 1
on L-type
CPU Unit
D32200 D32300 00 to 07 Command Slave address (00 to F7 hex)
08 to 15 Reserved (Always 00.)
D32201 D32301 00 to 07 Function code
D32202 D32302 00 to 15 Number of communications
data bytes (0000 to 005E
hex)
D32203 to
D32249
D32303 to
D32349
00 to 15 Communications data
(94 bytes maximum)
349
Error Codes The following error codes are stored in an allocated DM Area word when an
error occurs in Modbus-RTU Easy Master function execution.
D32250 D32350 00 to 07 Response Slave address (00 to F7 hex)
D32251 D32351 00 to 07 Function code
08 to 15 Reserved
D32252 D32352 00 to 07 Error code
D32253 D32353 00 to 15 Number of response bytes
(0000 to 03EA hex)
D32254 to
D32299
D32354 to
D32399
00 to 15 Response data
(92 bytes maximum)
Words Bits Contents
Serial port 1
on M-type
CPU Unit
Serial port 2
on M-type
CPU Unit
or
Serial port 1
on L-type
CPU Unit
Code Name Description
0x00 Normal end Not an error.
0x01 Illegal address The slave address specified in the parameter
is illegal (248 or higher).
0x02 Illegal function code The function code specified in the parameter is
illegal.
0x03 Data length overflow There are more than 94 data bytes.
0x04 Serial communica-
tions mode error
The Modbus-RTU Easy Master function was
executed when the serial communications
mode was not the Serial Gateway Mode.
0x80 Response timeout A response was not received from the Servo.
0x81 Parity error A parity error occurred.
0x82 Framing error A framing error occurred.
0x83 Overrun error An overrun error occurred.
0x84 CRC error A CRC error occurred.
0x85 Incorrect confirmation
address
The slave address in the response is differ-
ence from the one in the request.
0x86 Incorrect confirmation
function code
The function code in the response is difference
from the one in the request.
0x87 Response size over-
flow
The response frame is larger than the storage
area (92 bytes).
0x88 Exception response An exception response was received from the
slave.
0x89 Service being exe-
cuted
A service is already being executed (reception
traffic congestion).
0x8A Execution canceled Executing the service has been canceled.
0x8f Other error Other FINS response code was received.
350
Auxiliary Area Flags
and Bits
The Modbus-RTU command set in the DM fixed allocation words for the Mod-
bus-RTU Easy Master is automatically sent when the Modbus-RTU Master
Execution Bit is turned ON. The results (normal or error) will be given in corre-
sponding flags.
6-3-4 Communications: Smart Active Parts and Function Blocks
Overview OMRON components that support CompoWay/F communications or Modbus-
RTU slave functionality (such as Temperature Controllers) can be easily
accessed from a CP1L CPU Unit equipped with an RS-422A/485 or RS-232C
Option Board using Smart Active Parts (SAPs) on an NS-series PT or using
function blocks in the ladder program in the CP1L CPU Unit.
The communications mode in the PLC Setup must be set to the Gateway
Mode to enable this functionality.
Note Function blocks cannot be used in the CP1L-J CPU Unit.
Word Bit Port Contents
A640 00 M-type
CPU
Units:
Serial
port 2
L-type
CPU
Units:
Serial
port 1
Modbus-RTU Master Execution Bit
Turned ON: Execution started
ON: Execution in progress.
OFF: Not executed or execution completed.
01 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Normal Flag
ON: Execution normal.
OFF: Execution error or still in progress.
02 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Error Flag
ON: Execution error.
OFF: Execution normal or still in progress.
A641 00 M-type
CPU
Unit:
Serial
port 1
Modbus-RTU Master Execution Bit
01 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Normal Flag
02 Modbus-RTU Master Execution Error Flag
Using SAPs from an NS-series PT Using Function Blocks in CPU Unit
OMRON components that support CompoWay/F or
Modbus-RTU slave functionality
NS-series PT
Smart Active Parts
RS-232C
XW2Z-200T/500T Cable CP1L CPU Unit
CPU Unit functions as a gateway
RS-422A/485 (CompoWay/F or Modbus-RTU)
OMRON components that support CompoWay/F or Modbus-
RTU slave functionality
FB
User program
Function block
CP1L CPU Unit
RS-422A/485 (CompoWay/F or Modbus-RTU)
351
Note Refer to OMRONs Smart Library website for the most recent information on
using SAPs and function blocks.
Serial Gateway Function
When a FINS command is received, it is automatically converted to the proto-
col corresponding to the message and sent on the serial communications
path. Responses are also converted in the same way.
Note Serial ports 1 and 2 on the CP1L CPU Unit can be used to convert to the fol-
lowing protocols.
CompoWay/F
Modbus-RTU
This functionality is enabled when the serial communications mode is set to
Serial Gateway.
CPU Unit Serial Gateway Function Specifications
Note If a CJ-series Serial Communications Unit is connected via a CJ Unit Adapter,
messages can also be converted to Modbus-ASCII or Host Link FINS. Refer
to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Boards/Units Opera-
tion Manual (W336) for details.
Item Specification
Pre-conversion data FINS (via FINS network, Host Link FINS, toolbus, NT Link,
or CPU bus)
Conversion functions FINS commands addressed to serial port 1 or 2 on the CPU
Unit are converted to CompoWay/F commands (after
removing the header) if the FINS command code is 2803
hex and to Modbus-RTU commands (after removing the
header) if the FINS command code is 2804 hex.
Post-conversion data CompoWay/F command or Modbus-RTU command
method
1:N half-duplex
Maximum number of
nodes
31
Enabling serial commu-
nications mode
Serial Gateway Mode
Response timeout The time from when a message converted to a different pro-
tocol is set until a response is received is monitored by the
serial gateway function.
Default: 5 s, User setting: 0.1 to 25.5 s
Note A FINS response code of 0205 hex (response time-
out) is sent to the source of the FINS command if a
timeout occurs.
Send delay function None
2804
2803
The serial gateway functionality is enabled when serial port 1 or 2 is set to
the Serial Gateway Mode.
FINS message (on network or CPU bus)
FINS header CompoWay/F command
FINS header Modbus-RTU command
Serial port 1 or
2 on CPU Unit
(Serial port 1 or 2)
CompoWay/F command
Modbus-RTU command
352
6-3-5 Serial PLC Links
Overview
Serial PLC Links can be used to allow data to be exchanged among CP1L
and CJ1M CPU Units via the RS-422A/485 or RS-232C Option Boards
mounted to the CPU Units without requiring special programming. The com-
munications mode in the PLC Setup must be set to the Serial PLC Link Mode
to enable this functionality.
Either serial port 1 or 2 can be used. (See note.)
Words are allocated in memory in the Serial PLC Link Words (CIO 3100
to CIO 3199).
A maximum of 10 words can be transferred by each CP1L CPU Unit, but
the number of linked words can be set to fewer words. (The size must be
the same for all CP1L CPU Units.)
Note Serial PLC Links cannot be used on serial ports 1 and 2 at the same time. If
one port is set as a Serial PLC Link slave or master, it will not be possible to
set the other port for a Serial PLC Link. A PLC Setup error will occur if an
attempt is made to set both ports for Serial PLC Links.
Configuration 1:N Connections between CP1L/CJ1M CPU Units (8 Nodes Maximum)
1:1 Connections between CP1L/CJ1M CPU Units
8 nodes maximum
CP1L CPU Unit (Polling Unit)
RS-422A/485
Shared data
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polled Unit)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polling Unit)
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
Shared data
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polling Unit)
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
Shared data
353
Specifications
Data Refresh Methods
The following two methods can be used to refresh data.
Complete link method
Polling Unit link method
Complete Link Method The data from all nodes in the Serial PLC Links are reflected in both the Poll-
ing Unit and the Polled Units. (The only exceptions are the address allocated
to the connected PTs unit number and the addresses of Polled Units that are
not present in the network. These data areas are undefined in all nodes.)
Example: Complete Link Method, Highest Unit Number: 3
In the following diagram, Polled Unit No. 2 is either a PT or is a Unit not
present in the network, so the area allocated for Polled Unit No. 2 is undefined
in all nodes.
Item Specifications
Applicable serial
ports
Serial port 1 or 2. Both ports cannot be used for PLC Links at
the same time. If both ports are set for PLC Links (either as
polling node or polled node), a PLC Setup setting error (non-
fatal error) will occur and the PLC Setup Setting Error Flag
Connection method RS-422A/485 or RS-232C connection via RS-422A/485 or
RS-232C Option Board.
Allocated data area Serial PLC Link Words:
CIO 3100 to CIO 3199 (Up to 10 words can be allocated for
each CPU Unit.)
Number of Units 9 Units max., comprising 1 Polling Unit and 8 Polled Units (A
PT can be placed on the same network in an 1:N NT Link, but
it must be counted as one of the 8 Polled Units.)
Link methods (data
refresh methods)
Complete link method or Polling Unit link method
Polling Unit Polled Unit No.0 Polled Unit No.1 Polled Unit No.3
Local area Polling Unit Polling Unit Polling Unit
Polled Unit
No.0
Local area
Polled Unit
No.0
Polled Unit
No.0
Polled Unit
No.1
Polled Unit
No.1
Local area
Polled Unit
No.1
Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
Polled Unit
No.3
Polled Unit
No.3
Polled Unit
No.3
Local area
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
(Not used)
354
Example: Complete Link Method, Number of Link Words: 10
Each CPU Unit (either CP1L or CJ1M) sends data to the same words in all
other CPU Units for the Polling Unit and all Polled Units. The Polling Unit is a
CP1L CPU Unit in the following example, but it could also be a CJ1M CPU
Unit.
Polling Unit Link Method The data for all the Polled Units in the Serial PLC Links ar reflected in the Poll-
ing Unit only, and each Polled Unit reflects the data of the Polling Unit only.
The advantage of the Polling Unit link method is that the addresses allocated
for the local Polled Unit data are the same in each Polled Unit, allowing data to
be accessed using common ladder programming. The areas allocated for the
unit numbers of the PT or Polled Units not present in the network are unde-
fined in the Polling Unit only.
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
3100 to 3109
3110 to 3119
3120 to 3129
3130 to 3139
3140 to 3149
3150 to 3159
3160 to 3169
3170 to 3179
3180 to 3189
Serial PLC Link Words
(CIO Area)
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
3100 to 3109
3110 to 3119
3120 to 3129
3130 to 3139
3140 to 3149
3150 to 3159
3160 to 3169
3170 to 3179
3180 to 3189
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
3100 to 3109
3110 to 3119
3120 to 3129
3130 to 3139
3140 to 3149
3150 to 3159
3160 to 3169
3170 to 3179
3180 to 3189
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
3100 to 3109
3110 to 3119
3120 to 3129
3130 to 3139
3140 to 3149
3150 to 3159
3160 to 3169
3170 to 3179
3180 to 3189
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polling Unit)
(CIO Area)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit No. 0)
(CIO Area)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit No. 1)
(CIO Area)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polled Unit No. 2)
355
Example: Polling Unit Link Method, Highest Unit Number: 3
In the following diagram, Polled Unit No. 2 is a PT or a Unit not participating in
the network, so the corresponding area in the Polling Unit is undefined.
Example: Polling Unit Link Method, Number of Link Words: 10
The CPU Unit that is the Polling Unit (either CP1L or CJ1M) sends its data
(CIO 3100 to CIO 3109) to the same words (CIO 3100 to CIO 3109) in all
other CPU Units. The Polled Units send their data (CIO 3110 to CIO 3119) to
consecutive sets of 10 words in the Polling Unit. The Polling Units is a CP1L
CPU Unit in the following example, but it could also be a CJ1M CPU Unit.
(Only the first three Polled Units are shown below.)
Polling Unit Polled Unit No.0 Polled Unit No.1 Polled Unit No.3
Local area Polling Unit Polling Unit Polling Unit
Polled Unit
No.0
Local area Local area Local area
Polled Unit
No.1
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
Undefined
Polled Unit
No.3
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
(Not used.)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polling Unit)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit No. 0)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit No. 1)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polled Unit No. 2)
No.0
No.1
No.2
No.3
No.4
No.5
No.6
No.7
3100 to 3109
3110 to 3119
3120 to 3129
3130 to 3139
3140 to 3149
3150 to 3159
3160 to 3169
3170 to 3179
3180 to 3189
(CIO Area)
(CIO Area)
(CIO Area)
(CIO Area)
3100 to 3109
3110 to 3119
3100 to 3109
3110 to 3119
3100 to 3109
3110 to 3119
356
Allocated Words
Complete Link Method
Polling Unit Link Method
Address Link words 1 word 2 words 3 words to 10 words
CIO 3100
Serial PLC
Link Words
Polling Unit CIO 3100 CIO 3100 to
CIO 3101
CIO 3100 to
CIO 3102
CIO 3100 to
CIO 3109
Polled Unit No. 0 CIO 3101 CIO 3102 to
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3105
CIO 3106 to
CIO 3108
CIO 3120 to
CIO 3129
CIO 3107
CIO 3109 to
CIO 3111
CIO 3130 to
CIO 3139
CIO 3109
CIO 3112 to
CIO 3114
CIO 3140 to
CIO 3149
CIO 3111
CIO 3115 to
CIO 3117
CIO 3150 to
CIO 3159
CIO 3113
CIO 3118 to
CIO 3120
CIO 3160 to
CIO 3169
CIO 3115
CIO 3121 to
CIO 3123
CIO 3170 to
CIO 3179
CIO 3117
CIO 3124 to
CIO 3126
CIO 3180 to
CIO 3189
CIO 3199 Not used. CIO 3109
to
CIO 3199
CIO 3118 to
CIO 3199
CIO 3127 to
CIO 3199
CIO 3190 to
CIO 3199
Address Link words 1 word 2 words 3 words to 10 words
CIO 3100
Serial PLC
Link Words
Polling Unit CIO 3100 CIO 3100 to
CIO 3101
CIO 3100 to
CIO 3102
CIO 3100 to
CIO 3109
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3103
CIO 3103 to
CIO 3105
CIO 3110 to
CIO 3119
CIO 3199 Not used. CIO 3102
to
CIO 3199
CIO 3104 to
CIO 3199
CIO 3106 to
CIO 3199
CIO 3120 to
CIO 3199
357
Procedure
The Serial PLC Links operate according to the following settings in the PLC
Setup in the Polling Unit and Polled Units.
Settings at the Polling Unit
1,2,3... 1. Set the serial communications mode of serial port 1 or 2 to Serial PLC
Links (Polling Unit).
2. Set the link method to the Complete Link Method or Polling Unit Link Meth-
od.
3. Set the number of link words (up to 10 words for each Unit).
4. Set the maximum unit number in the Serial PLC Links (0 to 7).
Settings at the Polled Units
1,2,3... 1. Set the serial communications mode of serial port 1 or 2 to Serial PLC
Links (Polled Unit).
2. Set the unit number of the Serial PLC Link Polled Unit.
PLC Setup
Settings at the Polling Unit
Settings at the Polled Unit
Note Both serial ports cannot be used for PLC Links at the same time. If both ports
are set for PLC Links (either as polling node or polled node), a PLC Setup set-
ting error (non-fatal error) will occur and the PLC Setup Setting Error Flag
(A402.10) will turn ON. If PLC Links is set for one serial port, set the other
serial port to a different mode.
Item Set value Default Refresh timing
Serial port
1 or 2
Mode: Communications mode PC Link (Master): PLC Link Polling Unit Host Link Every cycle
Baud: Baud rate 38,400 bps, 115,200 bps 9,600 bps
PC link mode: PLC Link method ALL: Complete link method
Masters: Polling Unit method
ALL
Link words: No. of link words 1 to 10 words 10 words
PC Link Unit No.: Max. unit No. 0 to 7 0 hex
Item Set value Default Refresh timing
Serial port
1 or 2
Mode: Communications mode PC Link (Slave): PLC Link Polled Unit Host Link Every cycle
Baud: Baud rate 38,400 bps, 115,200 bps 9,600 bps
Unit number 0 to 7 0
358
Related Auxiliary Area Flags for Serial Port 1 of an M-type CPU Unit
Note In the same way as for the existing 1:N NT Link, the status (communicat-
ing/not communicating) of PTs in Serial PLC Links can be checked from the
Polling Unit (CPU Unit) by reading the Serial Port 1 Communicating with PT
Flag (A394 bits 00 to 07 for unit numbers 0 to 7).
Name Address Details Read/write Refresh timing
Serial Port 1
Communica-
tions Error Flag
A392.12 Turns ON when a com-
munications error occurs
at serial port 1.
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
Read Cleared when power is turned ON.
Turns ON when a communications error
occurs at serial port 1.
Turns OFF when the port is restarted.
Disabled in peripheral bus mode and NT
link mode.
Serial Port 1
Communicating
with PT Flags
(See note.)
A394.00 to
A394.07
When serial port 1 is
being used in NT link
mode, the bit correspond-
ing to the Unit performing
communications will be
ON. Bits 00 to 07 corre-
spond to unit numbers 0
to 7, respectively.
ON: Communicating
OFF: Not communicating
Turns ON the bit corresponding to the
unit number of the PT/Polled Unit that is
communicating via serial port 1 in NT link
mode or Serial PLC Link mode.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to unit numbers
0 to 7, respectively.
Serial Port 1
Restart Bit
A526.01 Turn ON this bit to restart
serial port 1.
Read/write Cleared when power is turned ON.
Turn ON to restart serial port 1, (except
when communicating in peripheral bus
mode).
Note: The bit is automatically turned OFF
by the system when restart process-
ing has been completed.
Serial Port 1
Error Flags
A528.08 to
A528.15
When an error occurs at
serial port 1, the corre-
sponding error bit is
turned ON.
Bit 08: Not used.
Bit 09: Not used.
Bit 10: Parity error
Bit 11: Framing error
Bit 12: Overrun error
Bit 13: Timeout error
Bit 14: Not used.
Bit 15: Not used.
When an error occurs at serial port 1, the
corresponding error bit is turned ON.
The flag is automatically turned OFF by
the system when serial port 1 is
restarted.
Disabled during peripheral bus mode.
In NT link mode, only bit 05 (timeout
error) is enabled.
In Serial PLC Link mode, only the following
bits are enabled.
Errors at the Polling Unit:
Errors at Polled Units:
Serial Port 1 Set-
tings Changed
Flag
A619.01 Turns ON when the com-
munications conditions of
serial port 1 are being
changed.
ON: Changed
OFF: No change
Turns ON while communications condi-
tions settings for serial port 1 are being
changed.
Turns ON when the CHANGE SERIAL
PORT SETUP instruction (STUP(237)) is
executed.
Turns OFF when the changes to settings
are completed.
359
Related Auxiliary Area Flags for Serial Port 2 of an M-type CPU Unit
Note In the same way as for the existing 1:N NT Link, the status (communicat-
Serial Port 2
Communica-
tions Error Flag
at Serial Port 2.
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
occurs at Serial Port 2.
link mode.
Serial Port 2
Communicating
with PT Flags
(See note.)
A393.00 to
A393.07
When Serial Port 2 is
to 7, respectively.
ON: Communicating
communicating via Serial Port 2 in NT
link mode or Serial PLC Link mode.
Serial Port 2
Restart Bit
Serial Port 2.
Turn ON to restart Serial Port 2, (except
mode).
Serial Port 2
Error Flags
A528.00 to
A528.07
Serial Port 2, the corre-
turned ON.
Bit 00: Not used.
Bit 01: Not used.
Bit 06: Not used.
Bit 07: Not used.
When an error occurs at Serial Port 2, the
the system when Serial Port 2 is
restarted.
error) is enabled.
bits are enabled.
Serial Port 2 Set-
tings Changed
Flag
Serial Port 2 are being
changed.
ON: Changed
OFF: No change
tions settings for Serial Port 2 are being
changed.
executed.
are completed.
360
Related Auxiliary Area Flags for Serial Port 1 of an L-type CPU Unit
In the same way as for the existing 1:N NT Link, the status (communicat-
Serial Port 1
Communica-
tions Error Flag
at Serial Port 1.
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
occurs at Serial Port 1.
link mode.
Serial Port 1
Communicating
with PT Flags
(See note.)
A393.00 to
A393.07
When Serial Port 1 is
to 7, respectively.
ON: Communicating
communicating via Serial Port 1 in NT
link mode or Serial PLC Link mode.
Serial Port 1
Restart Bit
Serial Port 1.
Turn ON to restart Serial Port 1, (except
mode).
Serial Port 1
Error Flags
A528.00 to
A528.07
Serial Port 1, the corre-
turned ON.
Bit 00: Not used.
Bit 01: Not used.
Bit 06: Not used.
Bit 07: Not used.
When an error occurs at Serial Port 1, the
the system when Serial Port 1 is
restarted.
error) is enabled.
bits are enabled.
Serial Port 1 Set-
tings Changed
Flag
Serial Port 1 are being
changed.
ON: Changed
OFF: No change
tions settings for Serial Port 1 are being
changed.
executed.
are completed.
361
6-3-6 1:1 Links
Two PLCs can be connected through their RS-232C ports to create Link
Areas.
Applicable PLCs A 1:1 Link can be create between any of the following SYSMAC PLCs:
CP1L, CQM1H, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), CPM1A-V1, CPM2A, CPM2B, CPM2C,
and SRM1(-V2)
Connections To create a 1:1 Link, connect the RS-232C ports on the two PLCs.
PLC Setup Set the PLC to a 1:1 Link Master or a 1:1 Link Slave in the PLC Setup. Set the
other PLC to the opposite setting.
Link Area Size The 1:1 Link Area in the CP1L is from CIO 3000 to CIO 3015 (16 words).
Even if a 1:1 Link is created with a CQM1H or C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PLC, the
1:1 Link Area will be only 16 words on both sides of the link, and only LR 00 to
LR 15 will be used in the CQM1H or C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) PLC. LR 16 to LR 63
cannot be used for 1:1 Links
Operation Here, operation is described assuming that the master is the CP1L and the
slave is the CPM2A.
1:1 Link
RS-232C
CP1 PLC L
C-series PLC
Master Slave
CPM1A-V1
CPM2
CQM1H
C200HX/HG/HE
Etc.
362
CP1L is set as the link master, so CIO 3000 to CIO 3007 are its write area.
Any data written to these words with the OUT or MOV instructions will be
automatically transferred to LR 00 to LR 07 in the CPM2A. The CPM2A will
use these words as its read area.
CIO 3008 to 3015 are the read area of the CP1L. The contents of LR 08 to
LR 15 in the CPM2A will automatically be transferred to CIO 3008 to 3015 in
the CP1L. The words in the PLCs read area cannot be written using the OUT,
MOV, or any other write instructions.
6-3-7 1:N NT Links
In the CP Series, communications are possible with PTs (Programmable Ter-
minals) using NT Links in 1:N mode.
Note Communications are not possible using the 1:1-mode NT Link protocol.
High-speed NT Links are possible in addition to the previous standard NT
Links by using the PT system menu and the following PLC Setup. High-speed
NT Links are possible, however, only with NS-series PTs or with the NT31(C)-
V2 or NT631(C)-V2 PTs.
1:1 Link
RS-232C
1:1 Link Area
CIO 3000
CIO 3007
CIO 3008
CIO 3015
CIO 3016
CIO 3063
Write area
Read area Write area
Read area
Not used.
LR 00
LR 07
LR 08
LR 15
Link Master: CP1L CPU Unit
Link Master:
CP1L CPU Unit
Link Slave: CPM2A CPU Unit
Link Slave:
CPM2A CPU Unit
CP1L CPU Unit
NS-series or NT31/NT631(C)-V2 PT
RS-232C
1:N NT Link
NS-series or NT31/NT631(C)-V2 PT
RS-422A/485
1:N NT Links CP1L CPU Unit
363
PLC Setup
PT System Menu Set the PT as follows:
1,2,3... 1. Select NT Link (1:N) from Comm. A Method or Comm. B Method on the
Memory Switch Menu under the System Menu on the PT Unit.
2. Press the SET Touch Switch to set the Comm. Speed to High Speed.
6-3-8 1:1 NT Links
The NT Link communications protocol was developed to enable high-speed
communications between PLC and Programmable Terminals (PTs). There are
two communications modes supported by the NT Link protocol: 1:1 NT Links,
in which one PLC is connected to one PT, and 1:N NT Links, in which one
PLC is connected to more than one PT.
Connections With the NT Link protocol, the PLC auto-
matically responds to commands sent
from the PT, so no communications pro-
gramming is required in the CP1L.
Port Name Settings contents Default values Other conditions
Serial port
1 or 2
Mode: Communications mode NT Link (1:N): 1:N NT Links Host Link Turn OFF pin 4 on the CPU
Unit DIP switch hen using
serial port 1 and turn OFF pin
5 when using serial port 2.
Baud: Baud rate 38,400 (standard)
115,200 (high speed)
9,600
(disabled)
NT/PC Link Max:
Highest unit number
0 to 7 0 ---
OMRON PT
NT Link
RS-232C
CP1L
364
PLC Setup Select NT Link (1:1) as the serial communications mode.
6-3-9 Host Link Communications
The following table shows the host link communication functions available in
CP1L PLCs. Select the method that best suits your application.
Command
flow
Command type Communications method Configuration
Create frame in the host com-
puter and send the command to
the PLC. Receive the response
from the PLC.
Application:
Use this method when commu-
nicating primarily from the host
computer to the PLC.
Host computer
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06 COM COM COM COM 05 07 COM 02 COM 05 07
IN
OUT
COMM COMM
Host link command
(C Mode)
Host link command
OR
Directly connect the host computer in a 1:1
or 1:N system.
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
IN
OUT
COMM COMM
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
IN
OUT
COMM COMM
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
IN
OUT
COMM COMM Command
365
Create frame in the host com-
puter and send the command to
the PLC. Receive the response
from the PLC.
Application:
Use these methods when com-
municating primarily from the
host computer to PLCs in the
network.
Remarks:
The FINS command must be
placed between a Host Link
header and terminator and then
sent by the host computer.
Send the command frame with
the CPU Units SEND, RECV, or
CMND instruction. Receive
response from the host com-
puter.
Application:
Use this method when commu-
nicating primarily from the PLC
to the host computer to transmit
status information, such as error
information.
Remarks:
The FINS command will be
placed between a Host Link
header and terminator when it is
sent. The FINS command must
be interpreted at the host com-
puter and then the host com-
puter must return a response.
Command
flow
Command type Communications method Configuration
FINS
Header Terminator
FINS command (with
Host Link header and
terminator) sent.
OR
or 1:N system.
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
IN
OUT
COMM COMM
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
IN
OUT
COMM COMM
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
IN
OUT
COMM COMM Command
Host computer
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
IN
OUT
COMM COMM
FINS
Header Terminator
FINS command (with
Host Link header and
terminator) is sent.
system.
SYSMAC CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
IN
OUT
COMM COMM
SEND/RECV/
CMND
366
Procedure
Host Link Commands The following table lists the host link commands. Refer to the SYSMAC
CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342) for
more details.
Set the PLC Setup from the CX-
Programmer.
(Set the communications mode to
Host Link and set the parameters.)
Power OFF
Connect the CPU Unit and external device
via RS-232C. (Mount the RS-232C Option
Board in option slot 1 or 2.)
Set the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit.
Turn pin 4 OFF when suing serial port 1.
Turn pin 5 OFF when suing serial port 2.
Power ON
Host computer to PLC PLC to Host computer
Send Host Link
commands from
the host computer.
Send FINS
commands from
the host computer.
Execute SEND/RECV/CMND
instructions in the PLCs program.
Return a response from the host
computer. (A program is required in
the host computer.)
Type Header
code
Name Function
I/O mem-
ory read
commands
RR CIO AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of CIO Area words starting from
the specified word.
RL LINK AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of Link Area words starting from
the specified word.
RH HR AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of Holding Area words starting
from the specified word.
RC PV READ Reads the contents of the specified number of timer/counter PVs (present
values) starting from the specified timer/counter.
RG T/C STATUS READ Reads the status of the Completion Flags of the specified number of tim-
ers/counters starting from the specified timer/counter.
RD DM AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of DM Area words starting from
the specified word.
RJ AR AREA READ Reads the contents of the specified number of Auxiliary Area words starting
from the specified word.
367
I/O mem-
ory write
commands
WR CIO AREA WRITE Writes the specified data (word units only) to the CIO Area, starting from the
specified word.
WL LINK AREA WRITE Writes the specified data (word units only) to the Link Area, starting from the
specified word.
WH HR AREA WRITE Writes the specified data (word units only) to the Holding Area, starting from
the specified word.
WC PV WRITE Writes the PVs (present values) of the specified number of timers/counters,
starting from the specified timer/counter.
WD DM AREA WRITE Writes the specified data (word units only) to the DM Area, starting from the
specified word.
WJ AR AREA WRITE Writes the specified data (word units only) to the Auxiliary Area, starting from
the specified word.
Timer/
counter SV
read
commands
R# SV READ 1 Reads the 4-digit BCD constant or word address in the SV of the specified
timer/counter instruction.
R$ SV READ 2 Searches for the specified timer/counter instruction beginning at the speci-
fied program address and reads the 4-digit constant or word address in the
SV.
R% SV READ 3 Searches for the specified timer/counter instruction beginning at the speci-
fied program address and reads the 4-digit BCD constant or word address in
the SV.
Timer/
counter SV
write
commands
W# SV CHANGE 1 Changes the 4-digit BCD constant or word address in the SV of the specified
timer/counter instruction.
W$ SV CHANGE 2 Searches for the specified timer/counter instruction beginning at the speci-
fied program address and changes the 4-digit constant or word address in
the SV.
W% SV CHANGE 3 Searches for the specified timer/counter instruction beginning at the speci-
fied program address and changes the 4-digit constant or word address in
the SV.
CPU Unit
status com-
mands
MS STATUS READ Reads the operating status of the CPU Unit (operating mode, force-set/reset
status, fatal error status).
SC STATUS CHANGE Changes the CPU Units operating mode.
MF ERROR READ Reads and clears errors in the CPU Unit (non-fatal and fatal).
Force-
set/force-
reset com-
mands
KS FORCE SET Force-sets the specified bit.
KR FORCE RESET Force-resets the specified bit.
FK MULTIPLE FORCE
SET/RESET
Force-sets, force-resets, or clears the forced status of the specified bits.
KC FORCE
SET/RESET CAN-
CEL
Cancels the forced status of all force-set and force-reset bits.
Model read
command
MM PLC MODEL READ Reads the model type of the PLC.
Test com-
mand
TS TEST Returns, unaltered, one block of data transmitted from the host computer.
Program
area
access
commands
RP PROGRAM READ Reads the contents of the CPU Units user program area in machine lan-
guage (object code).
WP PROGRAM WRITE Writes the machine language (object code) program transmitted from the
host computer into the CPU Units user program area.
I/O mem-
ory com-
pound read
commands
QQMR COMPOUND
COMMAND
Registers the desired bits and words in a table.
QQIR COMPOUND
READ
Reads the registered words and bits from I/O memory.
Type Header
code
Name Function
368
FINS Commands The following table lists the FINS commands. Refer to the FINS Commands
Reference Manual (W227) for more details.
Host Link
communi-
cations
processing
commands
XZ ABORT (command
only)
Aborts the host link command that is currently being processed.
** INITIALIZE (com-
mand only)
Initializes the transmission control procedure of all PLCs connected to the
host computer.
IC Undefined com-
mand
(response only)
This response is returned if the header code of a command was not recog-
nized.
Type Header
code
Name Function
Type Command
code
Name Function
I/O Memory
Area Access
Commands
01 01 MEMORY AREA READ Reads consecutive data from the I/O memory area.
01 02 MEMORY AREA WRITE Writes consecutive data to the I/O memory area.
01 03 MEMORY AREA FILL Fills the specified range of I/O memory with the same
data.
01 04 MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA
READ
Reads non-consecutive data from the I/O memory area.
01 05 MEMORY AREA TRANSFER Copies and transfers consecutive data from one part of
the I/O memory area to another.
Parameter
Area Access
Commands
02 01 PARAMETER AREA READ Reads consecutive data from the parameter area.
02 02 PARAMETER AREA WRITE Writes consecutive data to the parameter area.
02 03 PARAMETER AREA FILL Fills the specified range of the parameter area with the
same data.
Program Area
Access Com-
mands
03 06 PROGRAM AREA READ Reads data from the user program area.
03 07 PROGRAM AREA WRITE Writes data to the user program area.
03 08 PROGRAM AREA CLEAR Clears the specified range of the user program area.
Execution
Control Com-
mands
04 01 RUN Switches the CPU Unit to RUN or MONITOR mode.
04 02 STOP Switches the CPU Unit to PROGRAM mode.
Configuration
Read Com-
mands
05 01 CONTROLLER DATA READ Reads CPU Unit information.
05 02 CONNECTION DATA READ Reads the model numbers of the specified Units.
Status Read
Commands
06 01 CONTROLLER STATUS READ Reads the CPU Units status information.
06 20 CYCLE TIME READ Reads the average, maximum, and minimum cycle
times.
Clock Access
Commands
07 01 CLOCK READ Reads the clock.
07 02 CLOCK WRITE Sets the clock.
Message
Access Com-
mands
09 20 MESSAGE READ/CLEAR Reads/clears messages and FAL (FALS) messages.
Access Right
Commands
0C 01 ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE Acquires the access right if no other device holds it.
0C 02 ACCESS RIGHT FORCED
ACQUIRE
Acquires the access right even if another device cur-
rently holds it.
0C 03 ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE Releases the access right regardless of what device
holds it.
Error Access
Commands
21 01 ERROR CLEAR Clears errors and error messages.
21 02 ERROR LOG READ Reads the error log.
21 03 ERROR LOG CLEAR Clears the error log pointer to zero.
Forced Status
Commands
23 01 FORCED SET/RESET Force-sets, force-resets, or clears the forced status of
the specified bits.
23 02 FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL Cancels the forced status of all force-set and force-reset
bits.
369
Analog Adjuster and External Analog Setting Input Section 6-4
6-4 Analog Adjuster and External Analog Setting Input
6-4-1 Analog Adjuster
By turning the analog adjuster on the CP1L CPU Unit with a Phillips screw-
driver, the PV in the Auxiliary Area (A642) can be changed to any value within
a range of 0 to 255.
Application Example Setting the value for timer T100 in A642 makes it possible to use T100 as a
variable timer with a range of 0 to 25.5 s (0 to 255). A change in the set value
is reflected with the next scan.
Note Set values from the analog adjuster may vary with changes in the ambient
temperature and the power supply voltage. Do not use it for applications that
require highly precise set values.
6-4-2 External Analog Setting Input
When a voltage of 0 to 10 V is applied to the CP1L CPU Unit's external analog
setting input terminal, the voltage is converted from analog to digital and the
PV in A643 can be changed to any value within a range of 0 to 256 (0000 to
0100 hex).
External Analog Setting
Input Wiring
Use the 1-m lead wire (included) for wiring to the external analog setting input
connector on the CP1L CPU Unit.
Analog adjuster
Phillips screwdriver
TIMX
0100
A642
Start input
T0100
100.00
External analog settings
input connector
Potentiometer, external
temperature sensor, etc.
0 to 10 V
370
Battery-free Operation Section 6-5
Relationship between
Input Voltage and PV in
A643
The maximum input voltage is 11 VDC. Do not apply a voltage greater than
that.
Application Example Setting the value for timer T101 in A643 makes it possible to use T101 as a
variable timer with a range of 0 to 25.6 s (0 to 256). A change in the set value
is reflected with the next scan.
Note External analog setting input values may vary with changes in the ambient
temperature. Do not use the external analog setting input for applications that
require highly precise set values.
6-5 Battery-free Operation
6-5-1 Overview
With the CP1L CPU Unit, saving backup data in the built-in flash memory
(non-volatile memory) enables operation with no battery mounted (i.e., bat-
tery-free operation).
I/O memory (such as CIO), however, is constantly refreshed during operation,
so backup data is not saved in the built-in flash memory. When battery-free
operation is used, therefore, programs must be created assuming that I/O
memory data will not be saved.
For example, if a battery is mounted, then HR, CNT, and DM data is saved
during power interruptions if a battery is mounted but not when battery-free
operation is used.
0 to 10 V
External analog
settings input
connector
Input voltage (V)
A643 PV (BCD)
281
256
0
0 10 11
0101
A643
TIMX
Start input
T0101
100.01
371
Battery-free Operation Section 6-5
In that case it is necessary to set the required values in the ladder program. It
is also possible to save to the built-in flash memory in advance the DM initial
values that are to be set for the DM on RAM at startup.
6-5-2 Using Battery-free Operation
Precautions when
Creating Programs
for Battery-free
Operation
Be careful of the following points, and create programs for which it will not be
a problem even if the correct I/O memory values are not held.
For unstable parts of I/O memory, include programming at the start of
operation to set required data.
When battery-free operation is used, the Output OFF Flag (A500.15) in
the Auxiliary Area becomes unstable. When the Output OFF Flag turns
ON, all outputs turn OFF, so include the following program for clearing the
Output OFF Flag at the start of operation.
Do not reference the clock function, (the clock data in words A351 to A354
of the Auxiliary Area, or the various kinds of time data).
Saving DM Initial
Values (Only when
Required)
Use the following procedure to save to the built-in flash memory the DM initial
values that are to be set at startup.
1,2,3... 1. First set in the DM Area the data that is to be set as initial values at startup.
2. Execute a backup to flash memory from the CX-Programmer's Memory
Cassette Transfer/Data Memory Backup Dialog Box.
The procedure is as follows:
a. Select PLC - Edit - Memory Cassette/DM.
The following Memory Cassette Transfer/DM Backup Dialog Box will
be displayed.
RSET
A500.15
A200.11
First Cycle Flag
372
Memory Cassette Functions Section 6-6
b. Select the Data Memory Option in the Backup to Flash Memory Area
and click the Backup Button.
The DM data will be written to the built-in flash memory.
Note The DM data that is saved and written at startup is the entire DM Area (D0 to
D32767).
PLC Setup
1,2,3... 1. Set Do not detect Low Battery (run without battery) to Do not detect.
2. Set IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup and Forced Status Hold Bit Status at
Startup to Clear (OFF).
3. Set Read DM from flash memory to Read. (Only when DM initial values
have been saved as described above.)
!Caution The CP1L CPU Units automatically back up the user program and parameter
data to flash memory when these are written to the CPU Unit. Also, the CX-
Programmer can be used to save all of the data in the DM Area to the flash
memory for use as initial values when the power supply is turned ON. Neither
of these functions saves the I/O memory data (including HR Area data,
counter PVs and Completion Flags, and DM Area data other than initial val-
ues). The HR Area data, counter PVs and Completion Flags, and DM Area
data other than initial values are held during power interruptions with a bat-
tery. If there is a battery error, the contents of these areas may not be accu-
rate after a power interruption. If HR Area data, counter PVs and Completion
Flags, and DM Area data other than initial values are used to control external
outputs, prevent inappropriate outputs from being made whenever the Battery
Error Flag (A402.04) is ON.
6-6 Memory Cassette Functions
6-6-1 Overview
CP1L CPU Units have Memory Cassette functions that enable data in the
CPU Unit to be stored on and read from a special CP1W-ME05M Memory
Cassette. These functions can be used for the following applications.
Copying data to other CPU Units to produce duplicate devices.
Backing up data in case the CPU Unit needs to be replaced due to any
malfunction.
Writing and updating data when existing device versions are upgraded.
Memory Cassette
Specifications
Use the following Memory Cassette.
Model Specifications
CP1W-ME05M Memory size 512 Kwords
Storage capacity The following CPU Unit data (for each Unit)
User programs
Parameters
Comment memory
Function Block (FB) sources
DM initial values in the built-in flash memory
DM in RAM
Write method Operations from the CX-Programmer
Read method Powering up with DIP switch pin SW2 set to
ON, or operations from the CX-Programmer
373
Data that Can be
Stored on a Memory
Cassette
The following data can be stored on a Memory Cassette.
The areas for storing various types of data have fixed allocations in the Mem-
ory Cassette, and a single Memory Cassette corresponds to a single CPU
Unit.
Therefore it is not possible to simultaneously store multiple items of the same
type of data (e.g., two user programs).
Also, the data can only be read to a CPU Unit. It cannot be directly managed
from a personal computer like files.
The only data that can be stored on a Memory Cassette is the data from a
CPU Unit.
Note The CX-Programmer's function for saving DM initial values is used for saving
the values in the DM Area (D0 to D32767) to the built-in flash memory as ini-
tial values. By means of a setting in the PLC Setup, these initial values can
then be automatically written to the DM Area (D0 to D32767) when the power
is turned ON.
6-6-2 Mounting and Removing a Memory Cassette
Mounting
1,2,3... 1. Turn OFF the power supply to the PLC and removed the cover to the Mem-
ory Cassette socket.
Data stored on Memory Cassette Location in CPU Unit
User programs Built-in RAM, built-in flash
memory (User Program Area)
Parameters PLC Setup, CPU Bus Unit set-
tings, routing tables
Built-in RAM, built-in flash
memory (Parameter Area)
Comment data
for user pro-
grams
Variable tables Built-in flash memory (Com-
ment Memory Area)
(I/O comments, rung com-
ments, program comments)
Built-in flash memory (Com-
ment Memory Area)
Program indexes (section
names, section comments,
program comments)
Built-in flash memory (Com-
ment Memory Area)
Function Block (FB) sources Built-in flash memory (FB
Source Memory Area)
DM Built-in RAM (D0 to D32767 in
DM Area)
DM initial values (See note.) Built-in flash memory (DM Ini-
tial Values Area)
CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O Points CPU Units with 30 or 40 I/O Points
374
2. Holding the Memory Cassette with the side with the nameplate facing up-
wards, insert the Memory Cassette all the way into the slot.
Removal
1,2,3... 1. Turn OFF the power supply to the PLC.
2. Grasp the end of the Memory Cassette between the thumbnail and index
finger, and slide it upwards to remove it.
Note (1) Turn OFF the power supply before mounting or removing the Memory
Cassette.
(2) Absolutely do not remove the Memory Cassette while the BKUP indicator
and 7-segment LED are flashing (i.e., during a data transfer or verifica-
tion). Doing so could make the Memory Cassette unusable.
(3) The Memory Cassette is small, so be careful to not let it be dropped or
lost when it is removed.
M
E
M
O
R
Y

MEMORY
M
E
M
O
R
Y
MEMORY
375
6-6-3 Operation Using the CX-Programmer
Use the following procedure for the Memory Cassette function.
1,2,3... 1. Select PLC - Edit - Memory Cassette/DM.
The following Memory Cassette Transfer/Data Memory Backup Dialog Box
will be displayed.
2. Under Transfer Data Area, check whatever types of data are to be trans-
ferred.
Click the Valid Area Check Button to check the valid areas in the Memory
Cassette mounted in the CPU Unit and the operating mode after automatic
transfer at startup. If the user program is specified to be written, select the
operating mode after automatic transfer at startup.
PROGRAM mode (default): Used, e.g., to copy the system.
Use PLC Setup: Used, e.g., for operation with the Memory Cassette.
3. Execute any of the following operations.
To write data from the CPU Unit to the Memory Cassette:
Click the PLC Memory Cassette Button.
To read data from the Memory Cassette to the CPU Unit:
Click the Memory Cassette PLC Button.
To verify data transferred between the CPU Unit and the Memory Cas-
sette:
Click the Compare Button. This will cause all areas to be verified re-
gardless of the items checked under Transfer Area.
To format the Memory Cassette:
Click the Format Button. This will cause all areas to be formatted re-
gardless of the items checked under Transfer Area.
376
6-6-4 Memory Cassette Data Transfer Function
Writing from the CPU
Unit to the Memory
Cassette
The CX-Programmer's Memory Cassette function can be used to write data
from the CPU Unit to the Memory Cassette. The data to be written can be
individually specified.
When creating a Memory Cassette for a device version upgrade, select
and save only the required data (such as the user program and DM).
When creating a Memory Cassette for backup or duplication, save all of
the data to the Memory Cassette.
CPU Unit and Memory
Cassette Verification
When using the CX-Programmer's Memory Cassette function to store data in
the Memory Cassette, verify that data by comparing it to the data in the CPU
Unit. The data to be verified can be specified individually
This function can be used for operations such as confirmation after data has
been written to the Memory Cassette, or confirming that the data in the
backup matches the data in the CPU Unit.
Automatic Transfer
from the Memory
Cassette at Startup
With just a simple DIP switch setting, data stored in advance in the Memory
Cassette can be automatically read when the power is turned ON, and written
to the corresponding areas in the CPU Unit.
Mount a Memory Card and set DIP switch pin SW2 to ON, and then turn the
power OFF and back ON.
Programs, parameters, DM initial
values, comment memory, etc.
(Can be specified individually.)
CP1L CPU Unit
Backup
CX-Programmer
Data in CPU
Unit
Writing from CPU Unit
to Memory Cassette
CP1W-ME05M
Memory Cassette
CP1L CPU Unit
Data in CPU
Unit
Verification
CX-Programmer
Verification of CPU Unit
and Memory Cassette data
377
All valid data in the Memory Card will be automatically transferred to the CPU
Unit.
Note When this function is executed, at least the user program must be stored on
the Memory Cassette.
This function can be used to copy data to another CPU Unit without using the
CX-Programmer.
User programs can be overwritten to upgrade equipment versions without
using the CX-Programmer.
If writing data from the CPU Unit to the Memory Cassette and the CPU Unit is
set to use the operating mode specified in the PLC Setup as the operating
mode after automatic transfer at startup, operation can be started without
cycling the power, enabling operation from the Memory Cassette.
Programs, parameters, DM initial values,
comment memory, etc. (Can be specified
individually.)
CP1L CPU Unit
Data in CPU
Unit
Power turned ON.
DIP switch SW2 set to ON.
Data automatically transferred from Memory
Cassette to CPU Unit.
CP1L CPU Unit
Data in CPU
Unit
CP1W-ME05M
Memory Cassette
Another CPU Unit
Can be automatically
transferred at startup.
378
Reading Data from
the Memory Cassette
to the CPU Unit
The CX-Programmer's Memory Cassette function can be used to read data
stored on the Memory Cassette, and transfer it to the corresponding areas in
the CPU Unit. The data to be read can be individually specified.
This function can be used for operations such as writing the required backup
data to the CPU Unit for maintenance.
Precautions when
Using the Memory
Cassette Data
Transfer Function
In order for Memory Cassette data to be transferred, the Memory Cas-
sette must be mounted in the CPU Unit.
The BKUP indicator will light while data is being transferred to or verified
in a Memory Cassette. Never turn OFF the power to the PLC or remove
the Memory Cassette while the BKUP indicator is lit. Doing either may
make it impossible to use the Memory Cassette.
Memory Cassette data transfers and verification are possible only when
the CPU Unit operating mode is PROGRAM mode. The Memory Cassette
transfer function cannot be used in either RUN or MONITOR mode.
When using automatic transfer from a Memory Cassette at startup, be
sure to transfer the data to the Memory Cassette if any changes are made
using online editing.
The operating mode cannot be switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN
or MONITOR mode while a Memory Cassette data transfer or verification
is in progress.
The following table shows whether data transfers are enabled when the
CPU Unit is protected in various ways.
CP1L CPU Unit
Data in CPU
Unit
Reading
CX-Programmer
Reading from Memory
Cassette to CPU Unit
CP1W-ME05M
Memory Cassette
Type of protection Transfer from CPU Unit
to Memory Cassette
Transfer from Memory
Not protected. Yes Yes
System protected by DIP switch
pin SW1 set to ON.
Yes No
Protected by password. Over-
writing and duplication both per-
mitted.
Yes Yes
writing prohibited and duplica-
tion permitted.
Yes Transfer enabled only at
startup.
379
If a Memory Cassette is not mounted, data will be read from the flash
memory built into the CPU Unit to start operation regardless of the setting
of DIP switch pin SW2.
CP1L CPU Units with 14 or 20 I/O points. do not have D10000 to D31999.
These words will be treated as follows when data from a CPU Unit with 14
or 20 I/O points is transferred to a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points or
visa versa.
6-6-5 Procedures for Automatic Transfer from the Memory Cassette at
Startup
Copying the System Use the following procedure to enable automatic transfer at startup.
1,2,3... 1. Prepare a Memory Cassette containing the required data.
When transferring the data to the Memory Cassette, set the operating
mode after automatic transfer at startup to PROGRAM mode (default).
2. With the power supply turned OFF to the CPU Unit, remove the cover from
the Memory Cassette slot and insert the Memory Cassette.
3. Open the cover for the CPU Unit's PERIPHERAL section and set DIP
switch pin SW2 to ON.
4. Turn ON the power supply to the CPU Unit.
5. The automatic transfer from the Memory Cassette will begin. The rest of
the procedure assumes that the operating mode after automatic transfer at
startup to PROGRAM mode (default).
6. After the automatic transfer has been completed, turn OFF the power sup-
ply to the CPU Unit.
7. Remove the Memory Cassette, and replace the Memory Cassette slot cov-
er.
8. Return the setting of DIP switch pin SW2 to OFF, and close the cover.
writing permitted and duplica-
tion prohibited.
No Yes
writing and duplication both pro-
hibited.
No Transfer enabled only at
startup.
Transferring data from a CPU Unit with
14 or 20 I/O points to one with 30 or 40
I/O points
0000 will be written to D10000 to D31999
in the CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points.
Transferring data from a CPU Unit with
30 or 40 I/O points to one with 14 or 20
I/O points
D10000 to D31999 in the CPU Unit with 30
or 40 I/O points will be ignored.
Type of protection Transfer from CPU Unit
to Memory Cassette
Transfer from Memory
MEMORY
DIP switch pin
SW2 set to ON.
380
Program Protection Section 6-7
9. Turn the power supply to the CPU Unit back ON.
Note After the automatic transfer from the Memory Cassette at startup has been
completed with the operating mode after automatic transfer at startup set to
PROGRAM mode (default), the transfer will not start again automatically
(regardless of the Startup Mode setting in the PLC Setup). As described in the
procedure above, to start operation turn the power supply OFF, return the set-
ting of DIP switch SW2 to OFF, and then turn the power supply back ON. If the
the operating mode specified in the PLC Setup is set as the operating mode
after automatic transfer at startup, operation will start without changing the
DIP switch SW2 or Memory Cassette.
Operating from a
Memory Cassette
1,2,3... 1. Prepare a Memory Cassette containing the required data.
When transferring the data to the Memory Cassette, set the operating
mode after automatic transfer at startup to PROGRAM mode (default).
2. With the power supply turned OFF to the CPU Unit, remove the cover from
the Memory Cassette slot and insert the Memory Cassette.
3. Open the cover for the CPU Unit's PERIPHERAL section and set DIP
switch pin SW2 to ON.
4. Turn ON the power supply to the CPU Unit.
Note If, when the data is transferred to the Memory Cassette, the operating mode
specified in the PLC Setup is set as the operating mode after automatic trans-
fer at startup, operation will start automatically after data transfer, even if the
power is not cycled. Be sure that starting operation will cause no problems
before using automatic transfer at startup.
6-7 Program Protection
The following protection functions are supported by the CP1L CPU Units.
Read protection from the CX-Programmer
Write protection using a DIP switch setting
Write protection setting from the CX-Programmer
Write protection against FINS commands sent to the CPU Unit via net-
works
Prohibiting creating a program file for file memory
6-7-1 Read Protection
Overview
It is possible to read-protect individual program tasks (called task read protec-
tion) or the entire user program (called UM read protection).
Read protection prevents anyone from displaying or editing the read-protected
set of tasks or entire user program from CX-Programmer without inputting the
correct password. If the password is input incorrectly five times consecutively,
password input will be disabled for two hours, providing even better security
for PLC data.
Operating Procedure
1,2,3... 1. Go online and select PLC - Protection - Release Password. The follow-
ing Release Read Protection Dialog Box will be displayed.
381
2. Input the password. If the password is incorrect, one of the following mes-
sages will be displayed and protection will not be released.
UM Read Protection
Task Read Protection
3. If an incorrect password is input five times consecutively, read protection
will not be released even if the correct password is input on the sixth at-
tempt and displaying and editing the entire user program or the specified
tasks will be disabled for two hours.
Read Protection for Individual Tasks Using Passwords
Overview
It is possible to read-protect individual program tasks (referred to as task
read protection below) or the entire PLC. The same password controls
access to all of the read-protected tasks.
Task read protection prevents anyone from displaying or editing the read-pro-
tected set of tasks from CX-Programmer without inputting the correct pass-
word. In this case, the entire program can be uploaded, but the read-protected
tasks cannot be displayed or edited without inputting the correct password.
Tasks that are not read-protected can be displayed, edited, or modified with
online editing.
Note Task read protection cannot be set if UM read protection is already set. How-
ever, it is possible to set UM read protection after task read protection has
been set.
382
Operating Procedure
1,2,3... 1. Right-click the tasks that will be password-protected, select Properties
from the pop-up menu, and select the Task read protect Option on the Pro-
tection Tab Page.
2. Display the Protection Tab of the PLC Properties Dialog Box and register
a password in the Task read protection Box.
3. Connect online and select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the pro-
gram. The tasks registered in step 2 will be password-protected.
Note The program can be transferred after step 1, above, and then pass-
word protection be set by selecting PLC - Protection - Set Pass-
word. The tasks registered in step 1 will be password-protected.
END
END
END
CX-Programmer
Password?
Set a password for particular tasks in the project directory.
Those tasks cannot be displayed without inputting the password.
CP1L CPU Unit
The entire user program can be uploaded, but password-
protected tasks will not be displayed until the password is input.
The other tasks can be displayed/edited and are also accessible
through online editing.
Read
383
Usage
Apply read protection to tasks when you want to convert those task programs
to black box programs.
Note 1. If the CX-Programmer is used to read a task with task read protection ap-
plied, an error will occur and the task will not be read. Likewise, if the PT
Ladder Monitor function is used to read a password protected task, an er-
ror will occur and the task will not be read.
2. The entire program can be transferred to another CPU Unit even if individ-
ual tasks in the program are read-protected. The task read protection will
remain in effective for the password-protected tasks.
3. When the CX-Programmer is used to compare a user program in the com-
puter's memory with a user program in the CPU Unit, password-protected
tasks will be compared too.
Restrictions to Function
Block Use
Function block definitions can be read even if the entire program or individual
tasks in a program containing function blocks are read-protected. If required,
set read protection individually for each function block.
Prohibiting Backing Up
the Programs to a Memory
Cassette
Overview
When a password is set for the entire user program or for a task from the CX-
Programmer, prohibiting backing up the user program can be set as an option.
Doing so will make it impossible to upload PLC data to the CX-Programmer
and make it impossible to save PLC data offline to a storage device.
Operating Procedure
1,2,3... 1. When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from saving to a memory
card, and transferring program from PLC Option.
END
END
END
Task 0
Task 1
Task 2
Password applied.
Task converted to "black box."
Accessible
Not accessible
Accessible
When a password is set for the entire user program, or for one or more tasks,
backing up the user program (i.e., creating an OBJ program file) can be prohibited.
CX-Programmer
Password?
CPU Unit
A program file (.OBJ) cannot be created with file memory operations.
Creating a backup to a Memory
Cassette online can be prohibited.
No PLC data
can be uploaded.

CX-Programmer
Memory Cassette
384
2. Go online and then either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the
program or select PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK but-
ton.
Application
The above procedure enables using a password to protect against disclosure
of the program to unauthorized persons.
Note (1) Copying the program is possible if read protection is not set.
(2) The setting to prohibit backing up the program is not effective until the
program is transferred to the PLC. Always transfer the program after
changing the setting.
Prohibiting Creating
Program Files in File
Memory
When a password is set for the entire user program or for a task from the CX-
Programmer, prohibiting creating a program file (.OBJ) as a backup can be
set as an option. Doing so will make it impossible to create a program file in
file memory using the file memory operations. (This setting will also prohibit
uploading PLC data to the CX-Programmer and saving PLC data to a storage
device.)
Operating Procedure
1,2,3... 1. When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from saving to a memory
card, and transferring program from PLC Option.
CX-Programmer

Password?
CX-Programmer
When a password is set for the entire user program, or for one or more tasks,
backing up the user program (i.e., creating an OBJ program file) can be prohibited.
CPU Unit
A program file (.OBJ) cannot be created with file memory operations.
Creating a program file as a backup using online
operations can be prohibited.
No PLC data
can be uploaded.
Memory Cassette
385
2. Go online and then either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the
program or select PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK but-
ton.
Application
The above procedure enables using a password to protect against disclosure
of the program to unauthorized persons.
Note (1) Copying the program is possible if read protection is not set.
(2) The setting to prohibit backing up the program is not effective until the
program is transferred to the PLC. Always transfer the program after
changing the setting.
Auxiliary Area Flags and Bits Related to Password Protection
Properties
Name Bit
address
Description
UM Read Protection
Flag
A99.00 Indicates whether or not the PLC (the entire user
program) is read-protected.
OFF: UM read protection is not set.
ON: UM read protection is set.
Flag
A99.01 Indicates whether or not selected program tasks
are read-protected.
OFF: Task read protection is not set.
ON: Task read protection is set.
Program Write Protec-
tion for Read Protec-
tion
A99.02 Indicates whether or not the write protection
option has been selected to prevent overwriting of
password-protected tasks or programs.
OFF: Overwriting allowed
ON: Overwriting prohibited (write-protected)
Enable/Disable Bit for
Program Backup
A99.03 Indicates whether or not a backup program file
(.OBJ file) can be created when UM read protec-
tion or task read protection is set.
OFF: Creation of backup program file allowed
ON: Creation of backup program file prohibited
UM Read Protection
Release Enable Flag
A99.12 Indicates when UM read protection cannot be
released because an incorrect password was
input five times consecutively.
OFF: Protection can be released
ON: Protection cannot be released
Release Enable Flag
A99.13 Indicates when task read protection cannot be
released because an incorrect password was
input five times consecutively.
386
6-7-2 Write Protection
Write-protection
Using the DIP Switch
The user program can be write-protected by turning ON pin 1 of the CPU
Units DIP switch. When this pin is ON, it wont be possible to change the user
program or parameter area (e.g., PLC Setup and routing tables) from the CX-
Programmer. This function can prevent the program from being overwritten
inadvertently at the work site.
It is still possible to read and display the program from the CX-Programmer
when it is write-protected.
CPU Unit DIP Switch
Confirming the User Program Date
The dates the program and parameters were created can be confirmed by
checking the contents of A90 to A97.
Auxiliary Area Words
Pin Name Settings
SW1 User Program Memory Write Protection ON: Protected
OFF: Not protected
User Program
Date
A90 to A93 The time and date the user program was last over-
written in memory is given in BCD.
A90.00 to A90.07 Seconds (00 to 59 BCD)
A90.08 to A90.15 Minutes (00 to 59 BCD)
A91.00 to A91.07 Hour (00 to 23 BCD)
A91.08 to A91.15 Day of month (01 to 31 BCD)
A92.00 to A92.07 Month (01 to 12 BCD)
A92.08 to A92.15 Year (00 to 99 BCD)
A93.00 to A93.07 Day (00 to 06 BCD)
Day of the week:
00: Sunday, 01: Monday,
02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday,
06: Saturday
Parameter Date A94 to A97 The time and date the parameters were last overwrit-
ten in memory is given in BCD. The format is the
same as that for the User Program Date given above.
387
Write-protection
Using Passwords
The program (or selected tasks) can also be write-protected if the write pro-
tection option is selected from the CX-Programmer when a password is being
registered for the entire program or those selected tasks. The write protection
setting can prevent unauthorized or accidental overwriting of the program.
Note 1. If the selected tasks are write-protected by selecting this option when reg-
istering a password, only the tasks (program) that are password-protected
will be protected from overwriting. It will still be possible to overwrite other
tasks with operations such as online editing and task downloading.
2. All tasks (programs) can be overwritten when program read protection is
not enabled.
Operating Procedure
1,2,3... Table 1 When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from overwriting to a protected
program Option.
3. Either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program or select
PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button.
Note The setting to enable/disable creating file memory program files will not take
effect unless the program is transferred to the CPU Unit. Always transfer the
program after changing this setting.
CX-Programmer
Password?
When a password is being registered for the entire user
program or selected tasks, program write-protection can be
enabled/disabled with an option setting.
The user program cannot be overwritten.
CPU Unit
Overwriting can be prohibited with password protection,
regardless of the DIP switch setting.
Memory Cassette
The user program cannot be overwritten.
388
Write Protection
against FINS
Commands Sent to
the CPU Unit via
Networks
It is possible to prohibit write operations and other editing operations sent to
the PLC's CPU Unit as FINS commands through a network (including write
operations from CX-Programmer, CX-Protocol, CX-Process, and other appli-
cations using Fins Gateway). Read processes are not prohibited.
FINS write protection can disable write processes such as downloading the
user program, PLC Setup, or I/O memory, changing the operating mode, and
performing online editing.
It is possible to exclude selected nodes from write protection so that data can
be written from those nodes.
An event log in the CPU Unit automatically records all write processes sent
through the network and that log can be read with a FINS command.
6-7-3 Protecting Program Execution Using the Lot Number
The lot number is stored in A310 and A311 and can be used to prevent the
program from being executed on a CPU Unit with the wrong lot number.
The following instructions can be added to the program to create a fatal error
and thus prevent program execution if an attempt is made to execute the pro-
gram on a CPU Unit with the incorrect lot number. A password can also be set
to read-protect the program so that it cannot be copied, e.g., using a Memory
Cassette.
The lot number stored in A310 and A311 cannot be changed by the user.
The upper digits of the lot number are stored in A311 and the lower digits are
stored in A310, as shown below.
X, Y, and Z in the lot number are converted to 10, 11, and 12, respectively, in
A310 and A311. Some examples are given below.
Ladder Programming
Example
The following instructions will create a fatal error to prevent the program
from being executed when the lot number is not 23905.
Lot number A311 A310
01805 0005 0801
30Y05 0005 1130
A310 A311
Manufacturing lot
number (5 digits)
ANDL(610)
A310
#00FFFFFF
D0
FALS(007)
1
D100
<>L(306)
D0
#050923
First Cycle Flag
389
Failure Diagnosis Functions Section 6-8
from being executed when the lot number does not end in 05.
from being executed when the lot number does not begin with 23Y.
6-8 Failure Diagnosis Functions
This section introduces the following functions.
Failure Alarm Instructions: FAL(006) and FALS(007)
Failure Point Detection: FPD(269)
Output OFF Bit
6-8-1 Failure Alarm Instructions: FAL(006) and FALS(007)
The FAL(006) and FALS(007) instructions generate user-defined errors.
FAL(006) generates a non-fatal error that allows program execution to con-
tinue and FALS(007) generates a fatal error that stops program execution.
When the user-defined error conditions (i.e., the execution conditions for
FAL(006) or FAL(007)) are met, the instruction will be executed and the follow-
ing processing will be performed.
1,2,3... 1. The FAL Error Flag (A402.15) or FALS Error Flag (A401.06) is turned ON.
2. The corresponding error code is written to A400.
3. The error code and time of occurrence are stored in the Error Log.
4. The error indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash or light.
5. If FAL(006) has been executed, the CPU Unit will continue operating.
If FALS(007) has been executed, the CPU Unit will stop operating. (Pro-
gram execution will stop.)
First Cycle Flag
ANDL(610)
A310
#00FF0000
D0
FALS(007)
1
D100
<>L(306)
D0
#050000
First Cycle Flag
ANDL(610)
A310
#0000FFFF
D0
FALS(007)
1
D100
<>L(306)
D0
#1123
390
Operation of FAL(006)

When execution condition A goes ON, an error with FAL number 002 is gener-
ated, A402.15 (FAL Error Flag) is turned ON, and A360.02 (FAL Number 002
Flag) is turned ON. Program execution continues.
Errors generated by FAL(006) can be cleared by executing FAL(006) with FAL
number 00 or performing the error read/clear operation from the CX-Program-
mer.
Operation of FALS(007)

When execution condition B goes ON, an error with FALS number 003 is gen-
erated, and A401.06 (FALS Error Flag) is turned ON. Program execution is
stopped.
Errors generated by FAL(006) can be cleared by eliminating the cause of the
error and performing the error read/clear operation from the CX-Programmer.
6-8-2 Failure Point Detection: FPD(269)
FPD(269) performs time monitoring and logic diagnosis. The time monitoring
function generates a non-fatal error if the diagnostic output isnt turned ON
within the specified monitoring time. The logic diagnosis function indicates
which input is preventing the diagnostic output from being turned ON.
Time Monitoring
Function
FPD(269) starts timing when it is executed and turns ON the Carry Flag if the
diagnostic output isnt turned ON within the specified monitoring time. The
Carry Flag can be programmed as the execution condition for an error pro-
cessing block. Also, FPD(269) can be programmed to generate a non-fatal
FAL error with the desired FAL number.
When an FAL error is generated, a preset message will be registered and can
be displayed on the CX-Programmer. FPD(269) can be set to output the
results of logic diagnosis (the address of the bit preventing the diagnostic out-
put from being turned ON) just before the message.
The teaching function can be used to automatically determine the actual time
required for the diagnostic output to go ON and set the monitoring time.
Logic Diagnosis
Function
FPD(269) determines which input bit is causing the diagnostic output to
remain OFF and outputs the result. The output can be set to bit address out-
put (PLC memory address) or message output (ASCII).
If bit address output is selected, the PLC memory address of the bit can be
transferred to an Index Register and the Index Register can be indirectly
addressed in later processing.
A
FAL
002
#0000
B
FALS
003
#0000
391
If the message output is selected, an error message can be displayed on the
CX-Programmer at the same time as a FAL error is generated for time moni-
toring.

Time Monitoring
Monitors whether output C goes ON with 10 seconds after input A. If C
doesnt go ON within 10 seconds, a failure is detected and the Carry Flag
is turned ON. The Carry Flag executes the error-processing block. Also, an
FAL error (non-fatal error) with FAL number 004 is generated.
Logic Diagnosis
FPD(269) determines which input bit in block B is preventing output C from
going ON. That bit address is output to D1000 and D1001.
6-8-3 Simulating System Errors
FAL(006) and FALS(007) can be used to intentionally create fatal and non-
fatal system errors. This can be used in system debugging to test display
messages on Programmable Terminals (PTs) or other operator interfaces.
Use the following procedure.
1,2,3... 1. Set the FAL or FALS number to use for simulation in A529. A529 is used
when simulating errors for both FAL(006) and FALS(007).
2. Set the FAL or FALS number to use for simulation as the first operand of
FAL(006) or FALS(007).
Name Address Operation
Error Code A400 When an error occurs, the error code is stored in
A400.
FAL Error Flag A402.15 Turns ON when FAL(006) is executed.
FALS Error Flag A401.06 Turns ON when FALS(007) is executed.
Executed FAL Num-
ber Flags
A360 to
A391
The corresponding flag turns ON when an
FAL(006) error occurs.
Error Log Area A100 to
A199
The Error Log Area contains information on the
most recent 20 errors.
Error Log Pointer A300 When an error occurs, the Error Log Pointer is
incremented by 1 to indicate where the next error
record will be recorded as an offset from the
beginning of the Error Log Area (A100).
Error Log Pointer
Reset Bit
A500.14 Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer
(A300) to 00.
FPD Teaching Bit A598.00 Turn this bit ON when you want the monitoring
time to be set automatically when FPD(269) is
executed.
C (Diagnostic output)
Carry Flag
(ON for timeout)
Control data
(FAL 004, bit address output for failure)
Monitoring time (0.1-s units): 10 s
First register word of diagnostics output
FPD
#0004
&100
D01000
Error-processing block
FPD(269)
execution condition A
Logic diagnosis
execution condition B
392
3. Set the error code and error to be simulated as the second operand (two
words) of FAL(006) or FALS(007). Indicate a nonfatal error for FAL(006)
and a fatal error for FALS(007).
To simulate more than one system error, use more than one FAL(006) or
FALS(007) instruction with the same value in A529 and different values for the
second operand.
Example for a Battery Error
Note Use the same methods as for actual system errors to clear the simulated sys-
tem errors. Refer to the 9-2 Troubleshooting for details. All system errors sim-
ulated with FAL(006) and FALS(007) can be cleared by cycling the power
supply.
6-8-4 Output OFF Bit
As an emergency measure when an error occurs, all outputs from Output
Units can be turned OFF by turning ON the Output OFF Bit (A500.15). The
operating mode will remain in RUN or MONITOR mode, but all outputs will be
turned OFF.
Note Normally (when IOM Hold Bit = OFF), all outputs from Output Units are turned
OFF when the operating mode is changed from RUN/MONITOR mode to
PROGRAM mode. The Output OFF Bit can be used to turn OFF all outputs
without switching to PROGRAM mode.
Application Precaution for
DeviceNet
When the CPM1A-DRT21 is used, all slave outputs will be turned OFF, i.e., all
inputs to the master will be OFF.
Name Address Operation
FAL/FALS Number
for System Error
Simulation
A529 Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to use to simu-
late a system error.
0001 to 01FF hex: FAL/FALS numbers 1 to 511
0000 or 0200 to FFFF hex: No FAL/FALS number
for system error simulation.
MOV
&100
A529
a
MOV
#00F7
D10
FAL
100
D10
Execution condition
Set FAL number 100 in A529.
Set error code for battery error
(#00F7) in D10.
Generate a battery error using FAL
number 100.
393
Clock Section 6-9
6-9 Clock
A clock is built into the CP1L CPU Unit and is backed up by a battery. The cur-
rent data is stored in the following words and refreshed each cycle.
Note The clock cannot be used if a battery is not installed or the battery voltage is
low.
Name Addresses Function
Clock data:
A351 to A354
A351.00 to A351.07 Second: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A351.08 to A351.15 Minute: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A352.00 to A352.07 Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)
A352.08 to A352.15 Day of the month: 00 to 31 (BCD)
A353.00 to A353.07 Month: 00 to 12 (BCD)
A353.08 to A353.15 Year: 00 to 99 (BCD)
A354.00 to A354.07 Day of the week:
00: Sunday, 01: Monday,
02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday
394
Clock Section 6-9
Time-related Instructions
Name Addresses Contents
Start-up Time A510 and
A511
The time at which the power was
turned ON (year, month, day of month,
hour, minutes, and seconds).
Power Interruption Time A512 and
A513
The time at which the power was last
interrupted (year, month, day of month,
hour, minutes, and seconds).
Power ON Clock Data 1 A720 to A722 Consecutive times at which the power
was turned ON (year, month, day of
month, hour, minutes, and seconds).
The times are progressively older from
number 1 to number 10.
Power ON Clock Data 2 A723 to A725
Operation Start Time A515 to A517 The time that operation started (year,
month, day of month, hour, minutes,
and seconds).
Operation End Time A518 to A520 The time that operation stopped (year,
month, day of month, hour, minutes,
and seconds).
User Program Date A90 to A93 The time when the user program was
last overwritten (year, month, day of
Parameter Date A94 to A97 The time when the parameters were
last overwritten (year, month, day of
Name Mnemonic Function
HOURS TO SECONDS SEC(065) Converts time data in hours/minutes/sec-
onds format to an equivalent time in seconds
only.
SECONDS TO HOURS HMS(066) Converts seconds data to an equivalent time
in hours/minutes/seconds format.
CALENDAR ADD CADD(730) Adds time to the calendar data in the speci-
fied words.
CALENDAR SUBTRACT CSUB(731) Subtracts time from the calendar data in the
specified words.
CLOCK ADJUSTMENT DATE(735) Changes the internal clock setting to the set-
ting in the specified source words.
395
Clock Section 6-9
396
Clock Section 6-9
395
SECTION 7
Using Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
This section describes how to use CP-series/CPM1A-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units.
7-1 Connecting Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
7-2 Analog Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
7-3 Analog Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
7-4 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
7-4-1 CPM1A-MAD01 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
7-4-2 CP1W-MAD11/CPM1A-MAD11 Analog I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
7-5 Temperature Sensor Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
7-6 CompoBus/S I/O Link Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
7-7 DeviceNet I/O Link Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
396
Connecting Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units Section 7-1
7-1 Connecting Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
CP-series and CPM1A-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units can
be connected to the CP1L. Up to three Expansion Units or Expansion I/O
Units can be connected to a CPU Unit with 30 or 40 I/O points and one
Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit can be connected to a CPU Unit with 20
or 14 I/O points.
The functionality and performance of CP-series Expansion Units and Expan-
sion I/O Units is the same as the functionality and performance of CP1MA-
series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units. CP-series Units are black,
and CPM1A-series Units are ivory.
Number of I/O Words
Unit name Model Current
consumption (mA)
I/O words
5 VDC 24 VDC Input Output
Expansion
Units
Analog Input Unit CP1W-AD041
CPM1A-AD041
100 90 4 2
Analog Output Unit CP1W-DA041
CPM1A-DA041
80 124 --- 4
Analog I/O Unit CPM1A-MAD01 66 66 2 1
CP1W-MAD11
CPM1A-MAD11
83 110
Temperature Control Unit CP1W-TS001
CPM1A-TS001
40 59 2 ---
CP1W-TS101
CPM1A-TS101
54 73
CP1W-TS002
CPM1A-TS002
40 59 4 ---
CP1W-TS102
CPM1A-TS102
54 73
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit CP1W-SRT21
CPM1A-SRT21
29 --- 1 1
DeviceNet I/O Link Unit CPM1A-DRT21 48 --- 2 2
Expansion
I/O Units
40-point I/O Unit CP1W-40EDR
CPM1A-40EDR
80 90 2 2
CP1W-40EDT
CPM1A-40EDT
160 ---
CP1W-40EDT1
CPM1A-40EDT1
160 ---
20-point I/O Unit CP1W-20EDR1
CPM1A-20EDR1
103 44 1 1
CP1W-20EDT
CPM1A-20EDT
130 ---
CP1W-20EDT1
CPM1A-20EDT1
130 ---
16-point Output Unit CP1W-16ER
CPM1A-16ER
42 90 --- 2
8-point Input Unit CP1W-8ED
CPM1A-8ED
18 --- 1 ---
8-point Output Unit CP1W-8ER
CPM1A-8ER
26 44 --- 1
CP1W-8ET
CPM1A-8ET
75 ---
CP1W-8ET1
CPM1A-8ET1
75 ---
397
Analog Input Units Section 7-2
Allocation of I/O Words Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units are allocated I/O bits in the order
the Units are connected starting from the CPU Unit. When the power to the
CPU Unit is turned ON, the CPU Unit checks for any Expansion Units and
Expansion I/O Units connected to it and automatically allocates I/O bits
7-2 Analog Input Units
Each CP1W-AD041/CPM1A-AD041 Analog Input Unit provides four analog
inputs.
The analog input signal ranges are 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to +10
V, 0 to 20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA. The resolution is 1/6,000. The open-circuit
detection function is activated in the ranges of 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA.
The Analog Input Unit uses four input words and two output words, so a
maximum of three Units can be connected.
Part Names CP1W-AD041/CPM1A-AD041
1. Analog Input Terminals
Connected to analog output devices.

None
CIO 102 to CIO 105
DA041

CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.07
CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.07

CIO 2 to CIO 5
None
TS002
Third Unit:
40-point I/O Unit

CIO 106.00 to CIO 106.07
CIO 107.00 to CIO 107.07
Second Unit:
Analog I/O Unit
40-point I/O Unit
CPU Unit
First Unit:
Temperature Control Unit
24 input points
16 output points
Input bits
Output bits
24 input points
16 output points
CH
I IN1 I IN3
I IN2 VIN1
VIN2
VIN3 COM1
COM2
I IN4
VIN4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
IN
(3) Expansion connector
(2) Expansion I/O
connecting cable
(1) Analog input terminals
398
Input Terminal Arrangement
Note When using current inputs, voltage input terminals must be short-circuited
with current input terminals.
2. Expansion I/O Connecting Cable
Connected to the CPU Unit or Expansion Unit expansion connector. The
cable is attached to the Analog Input Unit and cannot be removed.
Note Do not touch the cables during operation. Static electricity may cause operat-
ing errors.
3. Expansion Connector
Connected to the next Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit to enable ex-
pansion.
Main Analog Input
Unit Specifications
Analog Input Units are connected to a CP1L CPU Unit. A maximum of three
Units can be connected, including other Expansion Units and Expansion I/O
Units.
V IN1 Voltage input 1
I IN1 Current input 1
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
COM3 Input common 3
COM4 Input common 4
CH
I IN1 I IN3
I IN2 VIN1
VIN2
VIN3 COM1
COM2
I IN4
VIN4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
IN
I IN1 I IN3
I IN2 VIN1
VIN2
VIN3 COM1
COM2
I IN4
VIN4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
IN
00
C H
C H
02 04 06 08 10
OUT
01 C OM 03 05 07 09 11
C OM CO M C OM 03 CO M 06
00 01 02 04 05 07
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11
20EDR1
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
N C
N C
N C
C H EXP
IN
00 02
01 C OM 03
C OM 05 07
04 06
C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
8ED
EXP CH
I IN1 I IN3
I IN2 VIN1
VIN2
VIN3 COM1
COM2
I IN4
VIN4 COM4
COM3
IN
NC
AG
CP1L CPU Unit
CP1W-20EDR1/
CPM1A-20EDR1
Expansion I/O Unit
A maximum of 3 Expansion Units or
Expansion I/O Units can be connected.
CP1W-8ED/
CPM1A-8ED
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-AD041/
CPM1A-AD041
Analog Input Unit
4

a
n
a
l
o
g

i
n
p
u
t
s
399
Analog Input Signal
Ranges
Analog input data is digitally converted according to the input signal range as
shown below.
Note When the input exceeds the specified range, the A/D conversion data will be
fixed at either the lower limit or upper limit.
Item Voltage Input Current Input
Number of inputs 4 inputs (4 words allocated)
Input signal range 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC,
0 to 10 VDC, or 10 to 10 VDC
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Max. rated input 15 V 30 mA
External input impedance 1 M min. Approx. 250
Resolution 1/6000 (full scale)
Overall accuracy 25C 0.3% full scale 0.4% full scale
0 to 55C 0.6% full scale 0.8% full scale
A/D conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for 10 to 10 V: F448 to 0BB8 Hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 1770 Hex
Averaging function Supported (Set in output words n+1 and n+2.)
Open-circuit detection function Supported
Conversion time 2 ms/point (8 ms/all points)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal circuits. No isolation
between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption 5 VDC: 100 mA max.; 24 VDC: 90 mA max.
400
Analog Input Signal
Ranges
10 to 10 V Inputs
0 to 10 V Inputs
0 to 5 V Inputs
1 to 5 V Inputs
Voltage in the -10 to 10 V
range corresponds to hexa-
decimal values F448 to 0BB8
(-3,000 to 3,000). The range
of data that can be converted
is F31C to 0CE4 hex (-3,300
to 3,300). A negative voltage
is expressed as twos comple-
ment.
Voltage in the 0 to 10 V range
corresponds to hexadecimal
values 0000 to 1770 (0 to
6,000). The range of data that
can be converted is FED4 to
189C hex (-300 to 6,300). A
negative voltage is expressed
as twos complement.
189C hex (-300 to 6,300). A
negative voltage is expressed
as twos complement.
189C hex (-300 to 6,300).
Voltage in the range of 0.8 to
1 V is expressed as twos
complement.
If an input is below the range
(i.e., less than 0.8 V), the
open-circuit detection func-
tion is activated and the data
becomes 8,000.
0 V 10 V 11 V
11 V 10 V

Converted data
Hexadecimal (Decimal)
0CE4 (3300)
0BB8 (3000)
0000 (0)
F448 (3000)
F31C (3300)
0 V 10 V 10.5 V
0.5 V

Converted data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
FED4 (300)
0 V 5 V 5.25 V
0.25V

Converted data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
FED4 (300)
1 V 5 V 5.2 V
0.8 V
Converted data
189c (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
FED4 (300)
401
0 to 20 mA Inputs
4 to 20 mA Inputs
Averaging Function For analog inputs, the averaging function operates when the averaging bit is
set to 1. The averaging function outputs the average (a moving average) of
the last eight input values as the converted value. If there is only a slight vari-
ation in inputs, it is handled by the averaging function as a smooth input.
The averaging function stores the average (a moving average) of the last eight
input values as the converted value. Use this function to smooth inputs that
vary at a short interval.
Open-circuit Detection
Function
The open-circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to
1 to 5 V and the voltage drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4
to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2 mA. When the open-circuit detec-
tion function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.
The time for enabling or clearing the open-circuit detection function is the
same as the time for converting the data. If the input returns to the convertible
range, the open-circuit detection is cleared automatically and the output
returns to the normal range.
Current in the 0 to 20 mA
decimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6,000). The range of
data that can be converted is
FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to
6,300). A negative current is
expressed as twos comple-
ment.
Current in the 4 to 20 mA
decimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6,000). The range of
data that can be converted is
FED4 to 189C hex (-300 to
6,300). Current in the range of
3.2 to 4 mA is expressed as
twos complement.
If an input is below the range
(i.e., less than 3.2 mA), the
open-circuit detection func-
tion is activated and the data
becomes 8,000.
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
1 mA

Converted data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
FED4 (300)
Converted data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
FED4 (300)
4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
3.2 mA
0 mA
402
Procedure
Writing Set Data and
Reading A/D
Conversion Values
Connect the Analog Input Unit to the CPU Unit.
Connect and wire Units.
Create a ladder program
Connect Analog Input Units.
Wire to analog output devices.
Write set data to output words (n+1, n+2).
Set use of inputs.
Select input signals using range codes.
Set use of averaging.
Read A/D conversion values from input words
(m+1 to m+4).
For current inputs, confirm that there is no open
circuit.

CPU Unit
MOV
Set data (inputs 1, 2)
Set data (inputs 3, 4)
Analog input 3 conversion value

Analog Input Unit
Ladder program
Analog devices
Temperature sensor
Pressure sensor
Speed sensor
Flow sensor
Voltage/current meter
Other devices
Writes the set data (use
of inputs, averaging,
range codes).
Reads the conversion
value.
The last input word allocated to the
CPU Unit or already connected
Expansion (I/O) Unit is m and the
last output word is n.
(n+1) CH
(n+2) CH
(m+1) CH
(m+2) CH
(m+3) CH
(m+4) CH
1. Connecting the Analog Input Unit
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CH
I IN1 I IN3
I IN2 VIN1
VIN2
VIN3 COM1
COM2
I IN4
VIN4 COM4
COM3
IN
NC
AG
CPU Unit
Analog Input Unit
CP1W-AD041
CPM1A-AD041
403
Internal Circuits
Wiring for Analog Inputs
Note (1) Connect the shield to the FG terminal to prevent noise.
(2) When an input is not being used, short the + and terminals.
(3) Separate wiring from power lines (AC power supply lines, high-voltage
lines, etc.)
(4) When there is noise in the power supply line, install a noise filter on the
input section and the power supply.
(5) Refer to the following information on open circuits when using voltage in-
puts.
2. Wiring Analog Inputs

AG
Analog input 4

Analog ground
COM1()
I IN1
V IN1

COM4()
I IN4
V IN4

510 k
510 k
510 k
510 k
250
250
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
Analog input 1
to
to

V IN
COM
I IN
V IN
COM
I IN
Analog
device with
voltage
output
Analog
Input
Unit
+
Analog
device with
current
output
Analog
Input
Unit
FG FG
2-core shielded
twisted-pair cable
2-core shielded
twisted-pair cable
404
For example, if analog input device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power
supply is being used as shown above, about 1/3, or 1.6 V, will be applied at
the input for input device 1.
Consider the following information on open input circuits when using voltage
inputs. Either use separate power supplies, or install an isolator at each input.
If the same power supply is used as shown in the following diagram and an
open circuit occurs at point A or B, an unwanted current flow will occur as
shown by the dotted lines in the diagram, creating a voltage at the other input
of about 1/3 to 1/2. If the 1 to 5-V range is being used, the open-circuit detec-
tion function will not operate. Also, if there is an open circuit at C, the open-cir-
cuit detection function will not operate because the negative sides are the
same.
Allocating I/O Words Four input words and two output words are allocated from the next words fol-
lowing the last I/O words allocated to the CPU Unit or an existing Expansion
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Writing Set Data Write the settings for input use, averaging use, and range codes for words n+1
and n+2. When the set data is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O
Unit, the A/D conversion will be started.
A
C B
Analog
input
device
1
Analog
input
device
2
24 VDC
3. Creating the Ladder Program
Words (m+1) to (m+4)
Analog Input Unit
Words (n+1), (n+2)
405
Set Data
The Analog Input Unit will not start converting analog I/O values until the
range code has been written.
Once the range code has been set, it is not possible to change the setting
while power is being supplied to the CPU Unit. To change the I/O range,
turn the CPU Unit OFF then ON again.
Averaging Set whether averaging is to be used for set data. When the averaging bit is set
to 1, the average (moving average) for the past eight inputs is output as con-
version data.
Reading Analog Input
Conversion Values
Read the conversion value storage area with the ladder program. With word m
as the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit or an already-connected
Expansion Unit, the A/D conversion data will be output to the following words
m+1 to m+4.
Startup Operation After the power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately
50 ms before the first conversion data is stored in the input words. Therefore,
create a program as shown below, so that when operation begins simulta-
neously with startup it will wait for valid conversion data.
The analog input data will be 0000 until the initial processing is completed.
Handling Unit Errors When an error occurs in an Analog Input Unit, the analog input conversion
data becomes 0000.
15 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
15 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0
0
Set to 1.
Set to 1.
Wd (n+1)
Wd (n+2)
Analog input 1 Analog input 2

Averaging
0 No
1 Yes
Input Use
0 No
1 Yes
Range code Analog input signal range
10 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
0 to 5 V or 0 to 20 mA
00
01
10
11

MOV(021)
2
D 0
T 5
#0002
T5
Power ON
P_On TIM5 is started when the power is
turned ON. After 0.1 to 0.2 s (100 to
200 ms) elapses, the TIM5 contact
turns ON and the analog input 1 con-
version data stored in word 2 is trans-
ferred to DM0.
406
Analog Output Units Section 7-3
Expansion Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 6 of word A436. The bits are
allocated from A436.00 in order starting with the Unit nearest the CPU
Unit. Use these flags in the program when it is necessary to detect errors.
Ladder Program Example
7-3 Analog Output Units
Each CP1W-DA041/CPM1A-DA041 Analog Output Unit provides four analog
outputs.
The analog output signal ranges are 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, -10 to +10 V, 0 to
20 mA, and 4 to 20 mA. The resolution is 1/6,000. The open-circuit detec-
tion function is activated in the ranges of 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA.
The Analog Input Unit uses four output words, so a maximum of three
Units can be connected.
Analog
input
Input range Range code Averaging Set data Destination
word
Input 1 0 to 10 V 01 Yes 1101 (B hex) n+1
Input 2 4 to 20 mA 10 Yes 1110 (E hex) n+1
Input 3 -10 to +10 V 00 No 1000 (8 hex) n+2
Input 4 Not used. -(00) --- 0000 (0 hex) n+2
MOV(021)
#80EB
102
TIM5
#0002
002
D100
T5

MOV(021)
004
D102
T5
MOV(021)
Input 2 open circuit alarm
P_EQ
110.00
003
#8000
T5
CMP(020)
MOV(021)
#8008
103
003
D101
T5
MOV(021)
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Reads analog input 1 converted value.
Writes set data E and B.
Writes set data 0 and 8. Always ON
P_On
Operation start 1 cycle ON
A200.11
407
Part Names CP1W-DA041/CPM1A-DA041
1. Analog Output Terminals
Connected to analog input devices.
Output Terminal Arrangement
2. Expansion I/O Connecting Cable
Connected to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit. The cable is pro-
vided with the Unit and cannot be removed.
Note Do not touch the cables during operation. Static electricity may cause operat-
ing errors.
3. Expansion Connector
Connected to the next Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Main Analog Output
Unit Specifications
Analog Output Units are connected to a CP1L CPU Unit. A maximum of three
Units can be connected, including other Expansion Units and Expansion I/O
Units.
CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
NC
COM3
OUT
(1) Analog output terminals
(2) Expansion I/O
connecting cable
V OUT1 Voltage output 1
I OUT1 Current output 1
COM1 Output common 1
CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
OUT

408
Analog Output Signal
Ranges
The analog values depend on the output signal ranges, as shown in the fol-
lowing diagrams.
Note When the output exceeds the specified range, the output signal will be fixed at
either the lower limit or upper limit.
Item Voltage Output Current Output
Analog
output sec-
tion
Number of outputs 4 outputs (4 words allocated)
Output signal range 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC,
External output allow-
able load resistance
2 k min. 350 max.
External output
impedance
0.5 max. ---
Overall
accuracy
25C 0.4% full scale
0 to 55C 0.8% full scale
D/A conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for 10 to 10 V: F448 to 0BB8 Hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 1770 Hex
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal circuits. No isola-
tion between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption 5 VDC: 80 mA max.; 24 VDC: 124 mA max.
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
IN
00
C H
C H
02 04 06 08 10
OUT
01 C OM 03 05 07 09 11
00 01 02 04 05 07
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11
20EDR1
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
N C
N C
N C
C H EXP
IN
00 02
01 C OM 03
C OM 05 07
04 06
C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
8ED
EXP CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
OUT
CP1L CPU Unit
CP1W-20EDR1/
CPM1A-20EDR1
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-8ED/
CPM1A-8ED
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-DA041/
CPM1A-DA041
Analog Output Unit
4

a
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t
s
409
Ranges
10 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8 (3000 to 3000) correspond to an ana-
log voltage range of 10 to 10 V. The entire output range is 11 to 11 V. Spec-
ify a negative voltage as a twos complement.
0 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0 to 6000) correspond to an analog
voltage range of 0 to 10 V. The entire output range is 0.5 to 10.5 V. Specify a
negative voltage as a twos complement.
1 to 5 V
voltage range of 1 to 5 V. The entire output range is 0.8 to 5.2 V.
0 V
10 V
11 V
11 V
10 V
F448
(3000)
F31C
(3300)
0CE4
(3300)
0BB8
(3000)
8000
7FFF

0000 (0) Conversion
Data
Hexadecimal
(Decimal)

0 V
10 V
10.5 V
0.5 V
FED4
(300)
189C
(6300)
1770
(6000)
8000
7FFF

0000 (0)
Conversion
Data
Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
1 V
5 V
5.2 V
0.8 V
189C
(6300)
1770
(6000)
0 V
7FFF
FED4
(300)
8000

Conversion
Data
Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
410
0 to 20 mA
current range of 0 to 20 mA. The entire output range is 0 to 21 mA.
4 to 20 mA
current range of 4 to 20 mA. The entire output range is 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
Procedure
Writing D/A Conversion
Data
Conversion
Data
Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
0 mA
20 mA
21 mA
189C
(6300)
1770
(6000)
7FFF
8000

0000 (0)
Conversion
Data
Hexadecimal
(Decimal)
4 mA
20 mA
20.8 mA
3.2 mA
189C
(6300)
1770
(6000)
0 mA 7FFF FED4
(300)
8000

Connect and wire Units.
Connect Analog Output Units.
Wire to analog input devices.
Write range code to output words (n+1, n+2).
Set use of outputs.
Select output signals using range codes.
Write D/A conversion values to output words
(n+1 to n+4).
MOV
(n+1) CH Range code (outputs 1, 2)
(n+2) CH Range code (outputs 3, 4)
(n+1) CH
(n+2) CH Analog output 2 conversion value
CPU Unit Analog Output Unit
Ladder program
Writes the range code.
Writes the converted
values.
Analog output 1 conversion value
Where "n" is the last output word
allocated to the CPU Unit, or
previous Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit.
Analog devices
Adjustment equipment
Servo Controller
Variable speed device
Recorder
Other
411
Connect the Analog Output Unit to the CPU Unit.
Internal Circuits
Wiring for Analog Outputs
Note (1) Connect the shield to the FG terminal to prevent noise.
lines, etc.)
input section and the power supply.
(4) When external power is supplied (when range codes are set), or when the
power is interrupted, there may be a pulse status analog output of up to
1 ms. If this status is a problem, take the following measures.
Turn ON the power to the CP1L CPU Unit, check the operation status,
and then turn ON the power at the load.
Turn OFF the power to the load and then turn OFF the power to the
CP1L CPU Unit.
1. Connecting the Analog Output Unit
CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
OUT
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CPU Unit
CP1W-DA041
CPM1A-DA041
Analog Output Unit
2. Wiring Analog Outputs

Analog output 1
Analog ground
NC

I OUT1
COM1 ()
V OUT1
I OUT4
COM4 ()
V OUT4
Analog output 4

I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
to
to

+ V OUT
COM
I OUT
+
V OUT
COM
I OUT
Analog
output
unit
Analog
device
with
voltage
input
Analog
output
unit
Analog
device
with
current
input
2-core shielded
twisted-pair cable
2-core shielded
twisted-pair cable
FG FG
412
Allocation of Output
Words
Four output words are allocated, beginning from the first word following the
last I/O word allocated to the CPU Unit or already-connected Expansion I/O
Unit or Expansion Unit.
Writing the Range Code Write the output use and the range code to words n+1 and n+2. The D/A con-
version will start when the set data is transferred from the CPU Unit to the
Analog Output Unit.
Range Code
The Analog Input Unit will not start converting analog I/O values until the
range code has been written. The output will be 0 V or 0 mA.
From when the range code has been written until data in the analog out-
put convertible range is written, 0 V or 0 mA will be output in the 0 to 10 V,
-10 to +10 V, and 0 to 20 mA ranges, and 1 V or 4 mA will be output in the
1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA ranges.
3. Ladder Program

Words n+1 to n+4

Analog Output Unit

15 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Wd n+1
15 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0
0

Set to 1.
Set to 1.
Wd n+2

0
1

Range code Analog input signal range
10 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
1 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
000
001
010
011
100
Output use
No
Yes
413
Writing Analog Output Set
Values
The ladder program can be used to write data to the output word where the
set value is stored. The output word will be n+1 when n is the last output
word allocated to the CPU Unit, or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O
Unit.
Startup Operation After power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approximately 50
ms before the first data is converted.
The following table shows the output status after the initial processing is com-
pleted.
Therefore, create a program as shown below, so that when operation begins
simultaneously with startup it will wait for valid set data.
Handling Unit Errors When an error occurs at the Analog Output Unit, the analog output will be
0 V or 0 mA. If a CPU Unit fatal error occurs when analog outputs are set
in the 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA range, 0 V or 0 mA will be output for a CPU
error I/O bus error, and 1 V or 1 mA will be output for all other errors.
Expansion Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 6 of word A436. The bits are
allocated from A436.00 in order starting with the Unit nearest the CPU
Unit. Use these flags in the program when it is necessary to detect errors.
Program Example
Output type Voltage output Current output
Output range 0 to 10 V,
-10 to +10 V
1 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA
Before range
code is written
0 V 0 mA
After range
code is written
0 V 1 V 0 mA 4 mA

MOV(021)
D100
102
P_On
T 5
#0002
T5
Always ON Flag
TIM 005 will start as soon as power
turns ON. After 0.1 to 0.2 s (100 to
200 ms), the Completion Flag for
TIM 005 will turn ON, and the data
stored in DM 0100 will be moved to
IR 102 as the conversion data for
analog output 1.
Analog output Output range Range code Set data Destination
word
Output 1 0 to 10 V 001 1001 (9 hex) Wd n+1
Output 2 4 to 20 mA 011 1011 (B hex) Wd n+1
Output 3 -10 to 10 V 000 1000 (8 hex) Wd n+2
Output 4 Not used. -(000) 0000 (0 hex) Wd n+2
414
Analog I/O Units Section 7-4
7-4 Analog I/O Units
7-4-1 CPM1A-MAD01 Analog I/O Units
Each CPM1A-MAD01 Analog I/O Unit provides 2 analog inputs and 1 analog
output.
The analog input range can be set to 0 to 10 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, or 4 to
20 mA with a resolution of 1/256.
An open-circuit detection function can be used with the 1 to 5 VDC and 4
to 20 mA settings.
The analog output range can be set to 0 to 10 VDC, 10 to 10 VDC, or 4
to 20 mA. The output has a resolution of 1/256 when the range is set to 0
to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA, or a resolution of 1/512 when set to 10 to
10 VDC.
Part Names

MOV(021)
#80B9
102
TIM5
#0002

P_On
D200
102
T5
MOV(021)
D202
104
T5
MOV(021)
MOV(021)
#8008
103
D201
103
T5

MOV(021)
Always ON Flag
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Operation start 1 cycle ON
A200.11
Writes set data B and 9.
Writes set data 0 and 8.
Writes analog output 1 conversion data.
IN OUT
V OUT COM I IN1 V IN2 COM 2
I OUT VIN 1 COM1 I IN2
MAD01
CH CH EXP
CPM1A-MAD01
(2) Expansion I/O connecting cable
(1) Analog I/O terminals
415
(1) Analog I/O Terminals
Connected to analog I/O devices.
Note When using current inputs, short terminal V IN1 with I IN1 and ter-
minal V IN2 with I IN2.
(2) Expansion I/O Connecting Cable
Connected to the expansion connector of a CP1L CPU Unit or an Expan-
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. The cable is provided with the Analog I/
O Unit and cannot be removed.
!Caution Do not touch the cables during operation. Static electricity may cause operat-
ing errors.
(3) Expansion Connector
Used for connecting Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units.
V OUT Voltage output
I OUT Current output
COM Output common
COM1 Input common 1
COM2 Input common 2
I OUT VIN1 COM1 I IN2
VOUT COM I IN1 V IN2 COM2
IN OUT
I/O Terminal Arrangement
416
Main Analog I/O Unit
Specifications
Analog I/O Units are connected to the CP1L CPU Unit. Up to three Units can
be connected, including any other Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
that are also connected.
Note (1) The conversion time is the total time for 2 analog inputs and 1 analog out-
put.
(2) With analog outputs it is possible to use both voltage outputs and current
outputs at the same time. In this case however, the total output current
must not exceed 21 mA.
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
IN OUT
V O UT CO M IIN 1 VIN 2 CO M2
IO U T V IN 1 CO M1 IIN 2
MAD01
C H C H EXP
IN
00
C H
C H
02 04 06 08 10
OUT
01 C OM 03 05 07 09 11
00 01 02 04 05 07
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11
20EDR1
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
N C
N C
N C
C H EXP
IN
00 02
01 C OM 03
C OM 05 07
04 06
C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
8ED
EXP
CP1L CPU Unit
CP1W-20EDR1/
CPM1A-20EDR1
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-8ED/
CPM1A-8ED
Expansion I/O Unit
CPM1A-MAD01
Analog I/O Unit
1

a
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t
2

a
n
a
l
o
g

i
n
p
u
t
s
Item Voltage I/O Current I/O
Analog
Input
Section
Number of inputs 2
Input signal range 0 to 10 V/1 to 5 V 4 to 20 mA
External input impedance 1 M min. 250 rated current
Resolution 1/256
Accuracy 1.0% full scale
A/D conversion data 8-bit binary
Analog
Output
Section
(See
note 2.)
Number of outputs 1
Output signal range 0 to 10 V or 10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA
Max. external output current 5 mA ---
Allowable external output load resistance --- 350
Resolution 1/256 (1/512 when the output signal range is 10 to 10 V)
Accuracy 1.0% of full scale
Set data 8-bit signed binary
Conversion time 10 ms max. per Unit (See note 1.)
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between I/O terminals and PC signals.
No isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption 5 VDC: 66 mA max., 24 VDC: 66 mA max.
417
Analog I/O Signal Ranges
Analog Input Signal Ranges
Analog Output Signal Ranges
0 V
80
FF
00
5 V 10 V
Input signal
0 V
80
FF
00
5 V 3 V
Input signal
4 mA
80
FF
00
20 mA 12 mA
Input signal
1 V 0 mA
0 to 10 V inputs
Conversion value
1 to 5 V inputs
Conversion value
4 to 20 mA inputs
Conversion value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
00
0080 00FF
5
4
3
2
10
9
8
7
6
1
80FF 8080
10 to +10 V outputs
Set value
Set value
(V)
8100
0100
4
8
12
16
20
0000 0080 00FF
4 to 20 mA outputs
Set value
(mA)
0100 0080 8080
5
10
0000 0080 00FF
0 to 10 V output
(V)
0100 8080
418
Using Analog I/O
Connecting the Analog I/O
Unit
Connect the Analog I/O Unit to the CPU Unit.
Wiring Analog I/O Devices Analog Input Wiring
Analog I/O Wiring Example
Connect the Unit
Wire the analog I/O
Connect the Analog I/O Unit.
Connect an analog input device.
Write the range code.
Analog input: 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA
Analog output: 0 to 10 V, 10 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA
Analog input: Read converted data.
Analog output: Write set value.
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
IN OUT
V O UT CO M IIN 1 VIN 2 CO M2
IO U T V IN 1 CO M1 IIN 2
MAD01
C H C H EXP
CPU Unit CPM1A-MAD01
Analog I/O Unit
+
V IN1
COM1
V IN2
I IN2
I IN1
COM2
250
250
10 K
10 K
0 V
0 V
FG
FG
2-core shielded
twisted-pair cable
Analog I/O Unit
Analog
output
device
voltage
output
Analog
output
device
current
output
Common ()
Voltage input 1 (+)
VOUT
I OUT
COM
V IN1
I IN1
COM1
COM2
I IN2
V IN2
Current input 2 (+)
Common ()
VOUT
I OUT
COM
V IN1
I IN1
COM1
COM2
I IN2
V IN2
Using analog input 1 as a voltage input Using analog input 2 as a current input
419
Analog Output Wiring
Analog I/O Wiring Example
Note (1) For analog outputs it is possible to use both voltage outputs and current
outputs at the same time, but the total current output must not exceed
21 mA.
(2) Use 2-core shielded twisted-pair cables.
(3) Wire away from power lines (AC power supply wires, power lines, etc.)
(4) When an input is not being used, short V IN and I IN to the COM terminal.
(5) Use crimp terminals. (Tighten terminals to a torque of 0.5 Nm.)
(6) When using current inputs, short V
IN
to I
IN
.
input section and the power supply terminals.
Creating a Ladder
Program
I/O Allocation
Two input words and one output word are allocated to the Analog I/O Unit,
starting from the next word following the last allocated word on the CPU Unit
or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Analog I/O Unit
+
VOUT
I OUT
COM
Voltage Outputs
Current Outputs
Analog I/O Unit
VOUT
I OUT
COM
0 V
0 V
FG
FG
2-core shielded
twisted-pair cable
Analog
input
device
voltage
input
2-core shielded
twisted-pair cable
Analog
input
device
current
input
Voltage output (+)
Common ()
VOUT
I OUT
COM
V IN1
I IN1
COM1
COM2
I IN2
V IN2
Using analog output as a voltage output
420
Writing the Range Code
Write the range code to word n+1. A/D or D/A conversion begins when the
range code is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O Unit. There are
eight range codes, FF00 to FF07, that combine both the analog input 1 and 2
and analog output signal ranges, as shown below.
The voltage/current selection is made by switching the wiring.
Write the range code to the Analog I/O Unit output word (n + 1) in the first
cycle of program execution.
The Analog I/O Unit will not start converting analog I/O values until the
range code has been written.
If a range code other than those specified in the above table is written to
n+1, the range code will not be received by the Analog I/O Unit and ana-
log I/O conversion will not start.
Range
code
Analog input 1 signal
range
range
Analog output signal
range
FF00 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA
FF01 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA
FF02 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA
FF03 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA
FF04 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA
FF05 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 10 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA
FF06 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA
FF07 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 10 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA
Analog I/O Unit
(m + 1)
(m + 2)
32 analog inputs
16 analog outputs
(n + 1)
"m" is the last allocated input word and
"n" the last allocated output word on
the CPU Unit or previous Expansion
Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
MOV(021)
FF02
(n+1)
A200.11
First Cycle Flag
Range code (4 digits hexadecimal)
Analog input 1: 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
Analog input 2: 0 to 10 V
Analog output: 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA
Allocated output word
421
Reading A/D Conversion Tables
Data converted from analog to digital is output to bits 00 to 07 in words m+1
and m+2.
Note The Open-circuit Detection Flag is turned ON if the input signal range is set to
1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA and the input signal falls below 1 V or 4 mA. (Open cir-
cuits are not detected when the input signal range is set to 0 to 10 V.)
MOV(21)
MOVE instruction
Ladder program
Range code
Word n + 1
Word m + 1
Word m + 2
CPU Unit Analog I/O Unit
Writes the range
code. Reads the
conversion value.
Analog input 1
conversion value
Analog input 2
conversion value
"m" is the last input word and "n" is the last
output word allocated to the CPU Unit, or
previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Analog devices
Temperature sensor
Pressure sensor
Speed sensor
Flow sensor
m + 1
15
m + 2
15 00 07
07 00
Analog input 1
Open-circuit
Detection Flag
0: Normal
1: Open-circuit
Analog input 1 conversion value (00 to FF hex)
Analog input 2
Open-circuit
Detection Flag
0: Normal
1: Open-circuit
Analog input 2 conversion value (00 to FF hex)
422
Setting D/A Conversion Data
Output data is written to the Analog I/O Units allocated output word, word
n+1.
Note Word (n + 1) can be used for either the range code or the analog output set
value.
1,2,3... 1. The set value range is 0000 to 00FF hex when the output signal range is 0
to 10 V/4 to 20 mA.
2. The set value range is divided into two parts: 8000 to 80FF hex (10 to 0
V) and 0000 to 00FF hex (0 to 10 V) when the output signal range is 10
to 10 V.
3. If FF@@ is input, 0 V/4 mA will be output.
4. If an output value is specified, the following bits will be ignored.
Output range of 10 to 10 V: Bits 08 to 14
Output range of 0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA: Bits 08 to 15
Startup Operation
After power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approx. 100 ms
before the first data is converted. The following instructions can be placed at
the beginning of the program to delay reading converted data from analog
inputs until conversion is actually possible.
Analog input data will be 0000 until initial processing has been completed.
Analog output data will be 0 V or 0 mA until the range code has been written.
After the range code has been written, the analog output data will be 0 V or
4 mA if the range is 0 to 10 V, 10 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA.
MOV(21)
MOVE instruction
Ladder program
Word n + 1
(See note.)
Writes the range code
Writes the set value
Range code
Analog output set value
"n" is the last output word allocated to the CPU
Unit, or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O
Unit.
Analog devices
Servo Controller
Recorder
Other
n + 1
15 00
Sign bit
(Used when the
output signal range is
10 to 10 V.)
Set value (00 to FF hex)
423
Handling Unit Errors
When an error occurs in the Analog I/O Unit, analog input data will be
0000 and 0 V or 4 mA will be output as the analog output.
Expansion Unit/Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 6 of word
A436. The bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting with the Unit
nearest the CPU Unit. Use these flags in the program when it is neces-
sary to detect errors.
Programming Example
This programming example uses these ranges:
Analog input 1: 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA
Analog output: 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA
MOV(021)
2
D0
0
Always ON
P_On
TIM
T0
TIM 0 will start as soon as power turns ON.
After 0.2 to 0.3 s (200 to 300 ms), the input for
TIM 0 will turn ON, and the converted data
from analog input 0 that is stored in word 2
will be transferred to D00000.
#3
MOV(021)
#FF04
102
First Cycle ON Flag
A200.11
Always ON Flag
P_On
10
D0
T0
T0
MOV(021)
3.15
110.00
3
D1
T0
MOV(021)
D10
102
T0
MOV(021)
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Writes the range code (FF04) to the Unit.
Reads analog input 0's converted value.
Open-circuit alarm
The content of D10 is written to the output
word as the analog output set value.
0
TIM
#3
424
7-4-2 CP1W-MAD11/CPM1A-MAD11 Analog I/O Units
Each CP1W-MAD11/CPM1A-MAD11 Analog I/O Unit provides 2 analog
inputs and 1 analog output.
The analog input range can be set to 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to
10 VDC, 10 to 10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA. The inputs have a
resolution of 1/6000.
An open-circuit detection function can be used with the 1 to 5 VDC and 4
to 20 mA settings.
The analog output range can be set to 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 10 to
10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA. The outputs have a resolution of
1/6000.
Part Names
(1) Analog I/O Terminals
Connected to analog I/O devices.
Note For current inputs, short V IN0 to I IN0 and V IN1 to I IN1.
NC NC
CP1W-MAD11/CPM1A-MAD11
(2) Expansion I/O connecting cable
(1) Analog I/O terminals
(4) DIP switch
COM Output common
COM0 Input common 0
COM1 Input common 1
I OUT V IN0 COM0
V OUT COM I IN0
I IN1
V IN1 COM1 N C N C
AG N C N C
NC NC
CPM1A-MAD11 Terminal Arrangements
425
Connected to the expansion connector of a CP1L CPU Unit or a CMP1A
Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. The cable is provided with the
Analog I/O Unit and cannot be removed.
!Caution Do not touch the cables during operation. Static electricity may cause operat-
ing errors.
(4) DIP Switch
Used to enable or disable averaging.
Main Analog I/O Unit
Specifications
Analog I/O Units are connected to the CP1L CPU Unit. Up to three Units can
be connected, including any other Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units
that are also connected.
Pin1: Average processing for analog input 0
(OFF: Average processing not performed; ON: Average processing performed)
Pin2: Average processing for analog input 1
(OFF: Average processing not performed; ON: Average processing performed)
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
IN
00
C H
C H
02 04 06 08 10
OUT
01 C OM 03 05 07 09 11
00 01 02 04 05 07
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11
20EDR1
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
N C
N C
N C
C H EXP
IN
00 02
01 C OM 03
C OM 05 07
04 06
C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
8ED
EXP
NC NC
CP1L CPU Unit
Possible to connect to a maximum of
3 Units including Expansion I/O Units
CP1W-20EDR1/
CPM1A-20EDR1
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-8ED/
CPM1A-8ED
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-MAD11/
CPM1A-MAD11
Analog I/O Unit
1

a
n
a
l
o
g

o
u
t
p
u
t
2

a
n
a
l
o
g

i
n
p
u
t
s
426
Analog I/O Signal
Ranges
Analog I/O data is digitally converted according to the analog I/O signal range
as shown below.
Note When the input exceeds the specified range, the AD converted data will be
fixed at either the lower limit or upper limit.
Item Voltage I/O Current I/O
Analog
Input
Section
Number of inputs 2 inputs (2 words allocated)
Input signal range 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC,
External input impedance 1 M min. Approx. 250
Overall accuracy 25C 0.3% full scale 0.4% full scale
0 to 55C 0.6% full scale 0.8% full scale
A/D conversion data 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for 10 to 10 V: F448 to 0BB8 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex
Averaging function Supported (Settable for individual inputs via DIP switch)
Open-circuit detection function Supported
Analog
Output
Section
Number of outputs 1 output (1 word allocated)
Output signal range 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or
10 to 10 VDC,
Allowable external output load resistance 1 k min. 600 max.
External output impedance 0.5 max.
Overall accuracy y 25C 0.4% full scale
0 to 55C 0.8% full scale
Set data (D/A conversion) 16-bit binary (4-digit hexadecimal)
Full scale for 10 to 10 V: F448 to 0BB8 hex
Full scale for other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex
Isolation method Photocoupler isolation between analog I/O terminals and internal
circuits.
No isolation between analog I/O signals.
Current consumption 5 VDC: 83 mA max., 24 VDC: 110 mA max.
427
Analog Input Signal
Ranges
10 to 10 V
The 10- to 10-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8
(3000 to 3000). The entire data range is F31C to 0CE4 (3300 to 3300).
A negative voltage is expressed as a twos complement.
0 to 10 V
The 0- to 10-V range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770 (0
to 6000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (300 to 6300). A negative
voltage is expressed as a twos complement.
0 to 5 V
to 6000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (300 to 6300). A negative
0 V 10 V 11 V
11V 10V
F448 (3000)
F31C (3300)
0CE4 (3300)
0BB8 (3000)
0000 (0)
Converted Data
0 V 10 V 10.5 V
0.5 V
FED4 (300)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
Converted Data
0 V 5 V 5.25 V
0.25 V
FED4 (300)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
Converted Data
428
1 to 5 V
to 6000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (300 to 6300). Inputs
between 0.8 and 1 V are expressed as twos complements. If the input falls
below 0.8 V, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data will be
8000.
0 to 20 mA
The 0- to 20-mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (300 to 6300). A negative
4 to 20 mA
The 4- to 20-mA range corresponds to the hexadecimal values 0000 to 1770
(0 to 6000). The entire data range is FED4 to 189C (300 to 6300). Inputs
between 3.2 and 4 mA are expressed as twos complements. If the input falls
below 3.2 mA, open-circuit detection will activate and converted data will be
8000.
1 V 5 V 5.2 V
0.8 V
FED4 (300)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
Converted Data
0 mA 20 mA 21 mA
1 mA
FED4 (300)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
Converted Data
4 mA 20 mA 20.8 mA
3.2 mA
FED4 (300)
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
0 mA
Converted Data
429
Ranges
10 to 10 V
The hexadecimal values F448 to 0BB8 (3000 to 3000) correspond to an ana-
log voltage range of 10 to 10 V. The entire output range is 11 to 11 V. Spec-
ify a negative voltage as a twos complement.
0 to 10 V
voltage range of 0 to 10 V. The entire output range is 0.5 to 10.5 V. Specify a
negative voltage as a twos complement.
1 to 5 V
voltage range of 1 to 5 V. The entire output range is 0.8 to 5.2 V.
0 V
10 V
11 V
11 V
10 V
F448
(3000)
F31C
(3300)
0CE4
(3300)
0BB8
(3000)
0000 (0)
8000
7FFF
Conversion Data
0 V
10 V
10.5 V
0.5 V
FED4
(300)
189C
(6300)
1770
(6000)
0000 (0)
8000
7FFF
Conversion Data
1 V
5 V
5.2 V
0.8 V
189C
(6300)
1770
(6000)
0 V
7FFF FED4
(300)
8000
Conversion Data
430
0 to 20 mA
current range of 0 to 20 mA. The entire output range is 0 to 21 mA.
4 to 20 mA
current range of 4 to 20 mA. The entire output range is 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
Averaging Function for
Analog Inputs
The averaging function can be enabled for inputs using the DIP switch. The
averaging function stores the average (a moving average) of the last eight
input values as the converted value. Use this function to smooth inputs that
vary at a short interval.
Open-circuit Detection
Function for Analog
Inputs
The open-circuit detection function is activated when the input range is set to
1 to 5 V and the voltage drops below 0.8 V, or when the input range is set to 4
to 20 mA and the current drops below 3.2 mA. When the open-circuit detec-
tion function is activated, the converted data will be set to 8,000.
The time for enabling or clearing the open-circuit detection function is the
same as the time for converting the data. If the input returns to the convertible
range, the open-circuit detection is cleared automatically and the output
returns to the normal range.
0 mA
20 mA
21 mA
0000 (0)
189C
(6300)
1770
(6000)
7FFF
8000
Conversion Data
4 mA
20 mA
20.8 mA
3.2 mA
189C
(6300)
1770
(6000)
0 mA
7FFF
FED4
(300)
8000
Conversion Data
431
Using Analog I/O
Reading Range Code
Settings and A/D
Conversion Data
Writing D/A Conversion
Data
Connect the Unit.
Set the I/O ranges.
Wire the analog I/O.
Program operation in
the ladder program.
Connect the Analog I/O Unit.
Analog inputs: 0 to 5 VDC, 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 10 to
10 VDC, 0 to 20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA
Analog output: 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, 10 to 10 VDC, 0 to
20 mA, or 4 to 20 mA
Set analog inputs as voltage or current inputs and set the
averaging function.
Connect analog I/O devices.
Write the range code.
Analog inputs: Read converted data.
Analog output: Write set values.
MOV(21)
MOVE instruction
Ladder program
Range code
Word n + 1
Word m + 1
Word m + 2
Reads the converted
values.
Analog input 0
converted value
Analog input 1
converted value
"m" is the last input word and "n" is the last
output word allocated to the CPU Unit or
previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Analog devices
Temperature sensor
Pressure sensor
Speed sensor
Flow sensor
Other
MOV(21)
MOVE instruction
Ladder program
Word n + 1
(See note.)
Writes the set value.
Range code
Analog output set value
"n" is the last output word allocated to the CPU
Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O
Unit.
Analog devices
Servo Controller
Recorder
Other
432
Note Word (n + 1) can be used for either the range code or the analog output set
value.
Connecting the Analog I/O
Unit and Setting the DIP
Switch
This section describes how to connect an Analog I/O Unit to the CPU Unit.
Setting the Averaging Function
DIP switch pins 1-1 and 1-2 are used to set the averaging function. When
averaging is enabled, a moving average of the last eight input values is output
as the converted value. The averaging function can be set separately for ana-
log inputs 1 and 2.
Wiring Analog I/O Devices Internal Circuits
DIP switch
pin
Function Setting Default
1-1 Averaging Analog input 0
OFF: Disabled; ON: Enabled
OFF
1-2 Analog input 1
OFF: Disabled; ON: Enabled
OFF
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
NC NC
CPU Unit
CP1W-MAD11
CPM1A-MAD11
Analog I/O Unit
Analog Inputs Analog Outputs
Analog ground
Input 0
Input 1
Analog ground
Output
I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
510 k
510 k
510 k
510 k
250 k
250 k
COM0 ()
V IN0
V IN1
COM1 () I
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

c
i
r
c
u
i
t
s
COM ()
V OUT
I OUT
AG
NC
NC
I IN0
I IN1
433
Terminal Arrangements
Note For current inputs, short V IN0 to I IN0 and V IN1 to I IN1.
Wiring for Analog Inputs
Wiring for Analog Outputs
Note (1) Use shielded twisted-pair cables, but do not connect the shield.
(2) When an input is not being used, short the + and terminals.
lines, etc.)
input section and the power supply terminals.
I OUT V IN0 COM0
V OUT COM I IN0
I IN1
V IN1 COM1 NC NC
AG NC NC
NC NC
COM Output common
COM0 Input common 0
COM1 Input common 1
V IN
COM
I IN
V IN
COM
I IN
Analog
device
with
voltage
output
+
Analog
I/O Unit
Analog
device
with
current
output
Analog
I/O Unit
V OUT
COM
I OUT
V OUT
COM
I OUT
Analog
device
with
voltage
input
+
Analog
I/O Unit
Analog
device
with
current
input
Analog
I/O Unit
434
(5) Refer to the following diagram regarding wiring disconnections when volt-
age input is being used.
Example: If analog input device 2 is outputting 5 V and the same power sup-
ply is being used for both devices as shown above, approximately 1/3, or 1.6
V, will be applied to the input for input device 1.
If a wiring disconnection occurs when voltage input is being used, the situa-
tion described below will result. Either separate the power supplies for the
connected devices, or use an isolator for each input.
If the same power supply is being used by the connected devices and a dis-
connection occurs at points A or B in the above diagram, an unwanted circuit
path will occur as shown along the dotted line in the diagram. If that occurs, a
voltage of approximately 1/3 to 1/2 of the output voltage of the other con-
nected device will be generated. If that voltage is generated while the setting
is for 1 to 5 V, open-circuit detection may not be possible. Also, if a disconnec-
tion occurs at point C in the diagram, the negative (-) side will be used in for
both devices and open-circuit detection will not be possible.
This problem will not occur for current inputs even if the same power supply is
used.
Note When external power is supplied (when setting the range code), or when
there is a power interruption, pulse-form analog output of up to 1 ms may be
generated. If this causes problems with operation, take countermeasures
such as those suggested below.
Turn ON the power supply for the CP1L CPU Unit first, and then turn ON
the power supply for the load after confirming correct operation.
Turn OFF the power supply for the load before turning OFF the power
supply for the CP1L CPU Unit.
24 VDC
A
C B
Analog
input
device 1
Analog
input
device 2
435
Creating a Ladder
Program
I/O Allocation
Two input words and one output word are allocated to the Analog I/O Unit
starting from the next word following the last allocated word on the CPU Unit
or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.

Writing the Range Code
Write the range code to word n+1. A/D or D/A conversion begins when the
range code is transferred from the CPU Unit to the Analog I/O Unit. There are
five range codes, 000 to 100, that combine the analog input 1 and 2 and ana-
log output signal ranges, as shown below.
Example
The following instructions set analog input 0 to 4 to 20 mA, analog input 1 to 0
to 10 V, and the analog output to 10 to 10 V.
The Analog I/O Unit will not start converting analog I/O values until the
range code has been written. Until conversion starts, inputs will be 0000,
and 0 V or 0 mA will be output.
After the range code has been set, 0 V or 0 mA will be output for the 0 to
10-V, 10 to 10-V, or 0 to 20-mA ranges, and 1 V or 4 mA will be output for
the 1 to 5-V and 4 to 20-mA ranges until a convertible value has been
written to the output word.
Range
code
range
range
Analog output signal
range
000 10 to 10 V 10 to 10 V 10 to 10 V
001 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 0 to 10 V
010 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V/4 to 20 mA 1 to 5 V
011 0 to 5 V/0 to 20 mA 0 to 5 V/0 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA
100 --- --- 4 to 20 mA
Analog I/O Unit
Word m+1
Word m+2
32 inputs
16 outputs
Word n+1
n+1
15
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Analog
output
Analog
input 1
Analog
input 0
MOV(021)
#800A
n+1
First Cycle Flag
A200.11
Analog input 0: 4 to 20 mA
Analog output: 10 to 10 V
436
Reading Converted Analog Input Values
The ladder program can be used to read the memory area words where the
converted values are stored. Values are output to the next two words (m + 1,
m + 2) following the last input word (m) allocated to the CPU Unit or previous
Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Writing Analog Output Set Values
The ladder program can be used to write data to the memory area where the
set value is stored. The output word will be n+1, where n is the last output
word allocated to the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O
Unit.
Startup Operation
After power is turned ON, it will require two cycle times plus approx. 50 ms
before the first data is converted. The following instructions can be placed at
the beginning of the program to delay reading converted data from analog
inputs until conversion is actually possible.
Analog input data will be 0000 until initial processing has been completed.
Analog output data will be 0 V or 0 mA until the range code has been written.
After the range code has been written, the analog output data will be 0 V or
0 mA if the range is 0 to 10 V, 10 to 10 V, or 0 to 20 mA, or it will be 1 V or
4 mA if the range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA.
When an error occurs in the Analog I/O Unit, analog input data will be
0000 and 0 V or 0 mA will be output as the analog output.
If a CPU error or an I/O bus error (fatal errors) occurs at the CPU Unit and
the analog output is set to 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, 0 V or 0 mA will be out-
put. For any other fatal errors at the CPU Unit, 1 V or 4 mA will be output.
Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 6 of
word A436. The bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting from the
Unit nearest the CPU Unit. Use these flags in the program when it is nec-
essary to detect errors.
Programming Example
This programming example uses these ranges:
Analog input 1: 4 to 20 mA
Analog output: 0 to 10 V
MOV(021)
2
D0
Always ON Flag
P_On
T5
#0002
T5
TIM 5 will start as soon as power turns ON.
After 0.1 to 0.2 s (100 to 200 ms), the input
for TIM 5 will turn ON, and the converted
data from analog input 0 that is stored in
word 2 will be transferred to D00000.
437
Temperature Sensor Units Section 7-5
7-5 Temperature Sensor Units
CP1W-TS002/TS102 and CPM1A-TS002/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units
each provide up to four input points, and CP1W-TS001/TS001 and CPM1A-
TS001/TS101 Temperature Sensor Units each provide up to two input points.
The inputs can be from thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers.
CP1W-TS002/TS102 and CPM1A-TS002/TS102 Temperature Sensor Units
are each allocated four input words.
MOV(021)
#8051
102
First Cycle ON Flag
A200.11
TIM5
#0002
Always ON Flag
P_On
002
D0
T5
MOV(021)
(P_EQ)
110.00
003
D1
T5
MOV(021)
D10
102
T5
MOV(021)
003
#8000
T5
CMP(020)
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Execution
condition
Writes the range code (8051) to the Unit.
The content of D10 is written to the output
word as the analog output set value.
Open-circuit alarm
438
Part Names
Temperature Sensor Units:
CP1W-TS@@@
and CPM1A-TS@@@
(1) Temperature Sensor Input Terminals
Used to connect temperature sensors such as thermocouples or plati-
num resistance thermometers.
(2) DIP Switch
Used to set the temperature unit (C or F) and the number of decimal
places used.
(3) Rotary Switch
Used to set the temperature input range. Make the setting according to
the specifications of the temperature sensors that are connected.
Connected to the expansion connector of a CP1L CPU Unit or a Expan-
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. The cable is included with the Tempera-
ture Sensor Unit and cannot be removed.
Note Do not touch the cables during operation. Static electricity may
cause operating errors.
Main Specifications
(1) Temperature Sensor Input Terminals
(4) Expansion I/O
Connector Cable
(3) Rotary Switch
(2) DIP Switch
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
IN
00
C H
C H
02 04 06 08 10
OUT
01 C OM 03 05 07 09 11
00 01 02 04 05 07
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11
20EDR1
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
N C
N C
N C
C H EXP
IN
00 02
01 C OM 03
C OM 05 07
04 06
C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
8ED
EXP
Thermocouples or
platinum resistance
thermometers Temperature inputs
CP1L CPU Unit
Possible to connect to a maximum of
3 Units including Expansion I/O Units
CP1W-20EDR1/
CPM1A-20EDR1
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-8ED/
CPM1A-8ED
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-TS@@@/
CPM1A-TS@@@
439
Note Accuracy for a K-type sensor at 100C or less is 4C 1 digit max.
Using Temperature Sensor Units
Connecting Temperature
Sensor Units
A maximum of three CPM1A-TS002 and CPM1A-TS102 Temperature Sensor
Units can be connected, because each is allocated four words.
Setting Temperature Ranges
Note (1) Always turn OFF the power supply before setting the temperature range.
(2) Never touch the DIP switch or rotary switch during Temperature Sensor
Unit operation. Static electricity may cause operating errors.
The Temperature Sensor Units DIP switch and rotary switch are used to set
the temperature unit, to select 2-decimal-place Mode is to be used, and to set
the temperature input range.
Item CP1W-TS001
CPM1A-TS001
CP1W-TS002
CPM1A-TS002
CP1W-TS101
CPM1A-TS101
CP1W-TS102
CPM1A-TS102
Temperature sensors Thermocouples Platinum resistance thermometer
Switchable between K and J, but same type
must be used for all inputs.
Switchable between Pt100 and JPt100, but
same type must be used for all inputs.
Number of inputs 2 4 2 4
Allocated input words 2 4 2 4
Accuracy (The larger of 0.5% of converted value or
2C) 1 digit max. (See note.)
(The larger of 0.5% of converted value or
1C) 1 digit max.
Conversion time 250 ms for 2 or 4 input points
Converted temperature data 16-bit binary data (4-digit hexadecimal)
Isolation Photocouplers between all temperature input signals
Current consumption 5 VDC: 40 mA max., 24 VDC: 59 mA max. 5 VDC: 54 mA max., 24 VDC: 73 mA max.
Connect the Unit.
Set the temperature ranges.
Connect the temperature
sensors.
Program operation in the
ladder program.
Connect the Temperature Sensor Unit.
Set the temperature unit, 2-decimal-place Mode
if required, and set the temperature input range.
Connect temperature sensors.
Read temperature data stored in the input word.
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
IN
00
C H
C H
02 04 06 08 10
OUT
01 C OM 03 05 07 09 11
00 01 02 04 05 07
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11
20EDR1
C H 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
N C
N C
N C
C H EXP
IN
00 02
01 C OM 03
C OM 05 07
04 06
C H 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
8ED
EXP
CP1L CPU Unit
CP1W-20EDR1/
CPM1A-20EDR1
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-8ED/
CPM1A-8ED
Expansion I/O Unit
CP1W-TS001/TS101/
CPM1A-TS001/TS101
440
DIP Switch Settings
The DIP switch is used to set the temperature unit (C or F) and the number
of decimal places used.
Note For details on 2-decimal-place Mode, refer to Two-decimal-place Mode on
page 447.
Rotary Switch Setting
!Caution Set the temperature range according to the type of temperature sensor con-
nected to the Unit. Temperature data will not be converted correctly if the tem-
perature range does not match the sensor.
!Caution Do not set the temperature range to any values other than those for which
temperature ranges are given in the following table. An incorrect setting may
The rotary switch is used to set the temperature range.
SW1 Setting
1 Temperature unit OFF C
ON F
2 Number of decimal
places used (See note.)
(0.01 expression)
OFF Normal (0 or 1 digit after the decimal
point, depending on the input range)
ON 2-decimal-place Mode
Temperature input terminals
DIP Switch
Used to set the temperature
unit and the number of
decimal places used.
Rotary Switch
Used to set the
temperature input range.
ON
1 2
Setting CP1W-TS001/TS002
CPM1A-TS001/002
CP1W-TS101/TS102
CPM1A-TS101/102
Input type Range (C) Range (F) Input type Range (C) Range (F)
0 K 200 to 1,300 300 to 2,300 Pt100 200.0 to 650.0 300.0 to
1,200.0
1 0.0 to 500.0 0.0 to 900.0 JPt100 200.0 to 650.0 300.0 to
1,200.0
2 J 100 to 850 100 to 1,500 --- Cannot be set.
3 0.0 to 400.0 0.0 to 750.0 ---
4 to F --- Cannot be set. ---
441
Connecting Temperature
Sensors
Thermocouples
CP1W-TS001/CPM1A-TS001
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but both of the thermocouples
must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for each.
Either K or J thermocouples can be connected, but all four of the thermocou-
ples must be of the same type and the same input range must be used for
each.
Note When using a Temperature Sensor Unit with a thermocouple input, observe
the following precautions:
Do not remove the cold junction compensator attached at the time of
delivery. If the cold junction compensator is removed, the Unit will not be
able to measure temperatures correctly.
Each of the input circuits is calibrated with the cold junction compensator
attached to the Unit. If the Unit is used with the cold junction compensator
from other Units, the Unit will not be able to measure temperatures cor-
rectly.
Do not touch the cold junction compensator. Doing so may result in incor-
rect temperature measurement.
Input 0
Input 0
+
NC
Input 1
Input 1
+
NC NC NC NC
NC NC NC
Temperature input 0
Temperature input 1
Cold junction compensator
Temperature input 0
Input 0
Input 0
+
NC
Input 1
Input 1
+
NC NC
NC
Temperature input 1
Temperature input 2
Temperature input 3
Input 2
+
Input 3
+
Input 2
Input 3
Cold junction
compensator
442
Platinum Resistance Thermometers
One or two Pt or JPt platinum resistance thermometers can be connected, but
both of the thermometers must be of the same type and the same input range
must be used for each.
Up to four Pt100 or JPt100 platinum resistance thermometers can be con-
nected, but all four of the thermometers must be of the same type and the
same input range must be used for each.
Note Do not connect anything to terminals not used for inputs.
Creating a Ladder
Program
Word Allocations
Temperature Sensor Units are allocated words as Expansion Units, in order of
connection. A Temperature Sensor Unit is allocated the next input words fol-
lowing the input words of the CPU Unit or previous Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit. Four input words are allocated is to the 2-input CPM1A-TS001
or CPM1A-TS101 and four input words are allocated to the 4-input CPM1A-
TS002 or CPM1A-TS102. No output words are allocated.
Temperature input 0
Pt
Input 0
B
Input 0
A
Input 0
B
Input 1
B
NC NC NC NC
NC NC NC
Input 1
A
Input 1
B
NC
Temperature input 1
Pt
Pt
Input 0
B
Input 0
A
Input 0
B
Input 1
B
NC
Input 1
A
Input 1
B
NC
Pt
Input 2
B
Input 2
A
Input 2
B
Input 3
B
Input 3
A
Input 3
B
Pt Pt
Temperature
input 0
Temperature
input 1
Temperature
input 2
Temperature
input 3
443
Example 1
Example 2
Converted Temperature Data
The temperature data will be stored in the input words allocated to the Tem-
perature Sensor Unit in 4-digit hexadecimal.
m is the last input word allocated to the CPU Unit, Expansion I/O Unit, or
Expansion Unit connected immediately before the Temperature Sensor Unit.
Negative values are stored as 2s complements.
Data for range codes that include one digit after the decimal point are
stored without the decimal point, i.e., 10 times the actual value is stored.
If the input temperature exceeds the range that can be converted, the
converted temperature data will be held at the maximum or minimum
value in the range.
If the input temperature exceeds the range by more than a specified
amount, the open-circuit detection function will detect an open-circuit and
the converted temperature data will be set to 7FFF.
The open-circuit detection function will also operate if the cold junction
compensator is faulty.
The open-circuit detection function will be automatically cleared and nor-
mal input temperature conversion will begin automatically when the input
temperature returns to the convertible range.
Input Data conversion examples
Unit: 1C K or J 850C 0352 hex
200C FF38 hex
Unit: 0.1C K, J, Pt100 or
JPt100
10 500.0C 5000 1388 hex
20.0C 200 FF38 hex
200.0C 2000 F830 hex
None
CP1W-TS001/101
CPM1A-TS001/101
CP1L
Input word
addresses
Output word
addresses
CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 2
CIO 3
None
CP1W-TS002/102
CPM1A-TS002/102
CP1L
Input word
addresses
Output word
addresses
CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 2
CIO 3
CIO 4
CIO 5
TS002/TS102 TS001/TS101
m+1
Converted temperature data from input 0
m+1
m+2
m+2
m+3
m+4
444
Startup Operation
After power is turned ON, approximately 1 s is required for the first conversion
data to be stored in the input word. During that period, the data will be 7FFE.
Therefore, create a program as shown below, so that when operation begins
simultaneously with startup it will wait for valid conversion data.
Expansion Unit and Expansion I/O Unit errors are output to bits 0 to 6 of
word A436. The bits are allocated from A436.00 in order starting from the
Unit nearest the CPU Unit. CP1W-/CPM1A-TS002 and CP1W-/CPM1A-
TS102 Temperature Sensor Units are allocated two bits each. Use these
flags in the program when it is necessary to detect Expansion Unit/Expan-
sion I/O Unit errors.
When an error occurs, the Temperature Sensor Unit data becomes 7FFF
hex (the same as for an open-circuit detection). With an open-circuit
detection, it is not reflected in word A436.
Programming Example
1,2,3... 1. The following programming example shows how to convert the input data
from 2 temperature sensor inputs to BCD and store the result in D0 and
D1.
(P_EQ)
1000.00
2
#7FFE
P_On
CMP(020)
Always ON
Temperature input data
output word
Initialization
Completed Flag
CP1L
CP1W-TS001/101
CPM1A-TS001/101
Inputs
Outputs
CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 2
CIO 3
None
Temperature unit setting: 0 (C)
Two-decimal-place Mode: 0 (normal)
Input range setting: 1 (K: 0.0 to 500.0C)
Input 0: CIO 2
Input 1: CIO 3
445
2. The following programming example shows how to convert the data for
temperature input 0 to BCD and store the result in D0 and D1. 0001 is
stored in D1 when the input data is a negative value. The following system
configuration is used.
Temperature unit setting 0 (C)
Two-decimal-place Mode 0 (normal)
Input range setting 1 (Pt100: 200.0 to 650.0C)
Input 0 CIO 2
2
#7FFF
1000.00
CMP(020)
(P_EQ)
1000.00
002
#7FFE
Always ON
P_On
CMP(020)
(P_EQ)
1000.01
3
#7FFE
Always ON
P_On
CMP(020) Detects completion of input 1 initialization.
(P_EQ)
1000.02
2
#1388
CMP(020)
(P_GT)
1000.03
(P_LT)
2
D0
BCD(024)
3
#7FFF
1000.01
CMP(020)
(P_EQ)
1000.02
3
#1388
CMP(020)
(P_GT)
1000.03
(P_LT)
3
D1
BCD(024)
Detects completion of input 0 initialization.
ON when input 0 has been initialized
Execution condition
Detects an open-circuit alarm or Unit
error by checking converted temperature
data for the error code 7FFF.
ON when an open-circuit alarm or Unit
error has been detected for input 0.
Checks to see if the temperature data
in word 2 has exceeded 500.0C (1388
hex without decimal point).
ON for an input 0 temperature error
Converts the temperature data for
input 0 to BCD and stores the result in
D0.
Execution condition
error by checking whether the error
code 7FFF has been output
Checks to see if the temperature data
in word 3 has exceeded 500.0C
(1388 hex without decimal point).
ON for an input 1 temperature error
Converts the temperature data for
input 1 to BCD and stores the result in
D1.
CP1L
CP1W-TS001/101
CPM1A-TS001/101
Inputs
Outputs
CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 2
CIO 3
None
446
Programming with BCD(24) Instruction
002
#7FFF
1000.00
CMP(020)
1000.00
2
#7FFE
Always ON
P_On
CMP(020) Detects completion of input 0 initialization.
P_EQ
1000.01
2
D0
BCD(024)
2.15
#0000
2
SBB(051)
P_EQ 2.15
#0000
D1
MOV(021)
CLC(041)
D0
D0
D0
BCD(024)
#0001
D1
MOV(021)
Execution
condition
error by checking whether the error code
7FFF has been output
Stores positive BCD data in D00000.
Stores #0000 in D00001.
When input 0 converted value is negative
(#0000 minus two's complement = actual
value)
Stores negative BCD data in D0.
Stores #0001 in D1 to indicate a
negative number.
447
Programming with SCL2() Instruction
Operation
Two-decimal-place
Mode
If pin 2 on the DIP switch is turned ON, values are stored to two decimal
places. In this case, temperature data is stored as 6-digit signed hexadecimal
(binary) data with 4 digits in the integer portion and 2 digits after the decimal
point. The actual data stored in memory is 100 times the actual value, i.e., the
decimal point is not indicated. Methods for handling this data are described in
this section.
Note When set to store values to two decimal places, temperature data as far as
two digits after the decimal point is converted to 6-digit binary data, but the
actual resolution is not 0.01C (F). For this reason, there may be skipping
and inaccuracies in the first digit after the decimal point (0.1). Treat any reso-
lution above that specified for the normal data format as reference data.
2
#7FFF
1000.00
CMP(020)
1000.00
2
#7FFE
Always ON
P_On
CMP(020)
P_EQ
01000
P_CY
P_EQ
#0000
D1
MOV(021)
2
D10
SCL2(486)
D0
P_CY
#0001
D1
MOV(021)
ON when initialization complete.
Execution
condition
Detects an open-circuit alarm.
ON when an open-circuit alarm has
been detected.
Parameter settings for data conversion:
When the converted value is non-
negative, stores #0000 in D00001.
When the converted value is
negative, stores #0001 in D00001.
Detects completion of input 0
initialization.
CIO 2
D1
1: Negative, 0: Non-negative
16
3
16
2
16
1
16
0
0 0 0 1/0 1/0
D0
CY
(when using SCL2 instruction)
Binary to BCD conversion
10
3
10
2
10
1
10
0
0: If data non-negative, "0000" stored in D1.
1: If data negative, "0001" stored in D1.
448
Temperature Data Partitioning and Structure
Temperature Data (Actual Temperature x 100 Binary)
Data Conversion
Examples
Example 1
Temperature: 1,130.25C
100: 113025
Temperature Data: 01B981 (hexadecimal for 113025)
Leftmost 3 Digits and Flags
0 15 3 4 7 8 11 12 13 14
Rightmost 3 Digits and Flags
0 4 3 7 8
Not used.
Always 0
Temperature data
Temperature data
@ @ @ @ @ @
Leftmost/
Rightmost Flag
Temperature
Unit Flag
Open-circuit
Flag
0: Leftmost
1: Rightmost
0: C
1: F
0: Normal
1: Error
16
5
16
3
16
4
16
2
16
0
16
1
15 11 12 13 14
Leftmost/
Rightmost Flag
0: Leftmost
1: Rightmost
Temperature
Unit Flag
0: C
1: F
Open-circuit
Flag
0: Normal
1: Error
Not used.
Always 0
Leftmost/Rightmost Flag: Indicates whether the leftmost or rightmost 3 digits are provided.
Temperature Unit Flag: Indicates whether the temperature is in C or F.
Open-circuit Flag: Turns ON (1) when an open-circuit is detected. The temperature
data will be 7FF FFF if this flag is ON.
Flags
Bits
Data
15
0
14
0
13
0
12
0
11 to 08
0
07 to 04
1
03 to 00
B
0 0 1 B
Flags
Flags
Bits
Data
15
1
14
0
13
0
12
0
11 to 08
9
07 to 04
8
0
1
8 9 8 1
Flags
Normal
C
Leftmost
Normal
Rightmost
16
5
16
4
16
3
16
2
16
1
16
0
C
Temperature
data
Temperature
data
449
Example 2
Temperature: 100.12C
100: 10012
Temperature Data: FFD8E4 (hexadecimal for 10012)
Example 3
Temperature: 200.12F
100: 20012
Temperature Data: FFB1D4 (hexadecimal for 20012)
Flags
Bits
Data
15
0
14
0
13
0
12
0
11 to 08
F
07 to 04
F
03 to 00
D
0 F F D
Flags
Flags
Bits
Data
15
1
14
0
13
0
12
0
11 to 08
8
07 to 04
E
03 to 00
4
8 8 E 4
Flags
Normal
C
Leftmost
Normal
C
Rightmost
16
5
16
4
16
3
16
2
16
1
16
0
Temperature
data
Temperature
data
Flags
Bits
Data
15
0
14
1
13
0
12
0
11 to 08
F
107 to 04
F
03 to 00
B
4 F F B
Flags
Flags
Bits
Data
15
1
14
1
13
0
12
0
11 to 08
1
07 to 04
D
03 to 00
4
C 1 D 4
Flags
Normal
F
Leftmost
Normal
F
Rightmost
16
5
16
4
16
3
16
2
16
1
16
0
Temperature
data
Temperature
data
450
Example 4
Temperature: Open circuit (F)
Temperature Data: 7FFF FFFF
Note (1) Leftmost digits are stored in the lower memory addresses. Treat the data
in the lower memory address as the leftmost digits when programming.
(2) Be sure that the data is read at least once every 125 ms to allow for the
CPU Units cycle time and communications time. Correct data may not be
obtained if the read cycle is greater than 125 ms.
Programming Example The following programming example shows how to use 2-decimal-place Mode
for the following PC configuration.
In this example, 100 times the temperature data for temperature input 0 is
stored in binary form in D100 to D102.
Flags
Bits
Data
15
0
14
1
13
1
12
0
11 to 08
7
07 to 04
F
03 to 00
F
6 7 F F
Flags
Flags
Bits
Data
15
1
14
1
13
1
12
0
11 to 08
F
07 to 04
F
03 to 00
F
E F F F
Flags
Error
F
Leftmost
Error
F
Rightmost
16
5
16
4
16
3
16
2
16
1
16
0
Temperature
data
Temperature
data
CPU Unit
Inputs
CIO 000
CIO 001
Outputs
CIO 100
CIO 101
Inputs
CIO 002
CIO 003
Outputs
None
CP1W/CPM1A-TS001
Temperature unit setting:
0 (C)
Two-decimal-place Mode:
1 (2 digits after decimal point stored)
Temperature Unit Flag (0: C, 1: F)
Open-circuit Flag (0: Normal, 1: Error)
Bit
D100
D101
D102
15 14 13 12
Always 0
11 10 8 7 5 3 1
Always 0 Always 0 0 0
Temperature input 0 CIO 2
Leftmost data
Rightmost data
CIO 200
9 6 4 2 0
16
5
16
4
16
3
16
2
16
1
16
0
16
7
16
6
451
1000.02
#0000
D102
A200.11 (First Scan Flag)
MOV(021)

002
#0020
MOVD(083)
2001
#0100
D103
2
#7FFE
CMP(020)
1000.00
P_On (Always ON Flag)
P_EQ
1000.01
SET 02001
2
2000
1000.00 2.13 (open-circuit detected)
2.15 (leftmost digits)
2.15 (leftmost digits)
2.15 (rightmost digits)
2000
#0300
2001
2000
#0011
2002
SET 2000.02
REST 2000.01
MOV(021)
(1)
Sets D103 and D102 to #0100 and
#0000, respectively.
Detects completion of input 0 initialization.
ON when input 0 has been initialized.
Open-circuit alarm output
MOV(021) (2)
Leftmost digits moved to CIO 2000.
(3)
(4)
(5)
Leftmost and rightmost digits
rearranged and moved to CIO 2002
and CIO 2001.
MOVD(083)
MOVD(083)
Data rearrangement completed.
2000.02
CLC(041)
2001
D100
BCDL(059)
2002.07 (non-negative data)
2002.07 (negative data)
D102
2001
C(412)
H0
D0103
2002
H1
H0
D100
BCDL(059)
#0008
#0300
MOVD(083)
D101
REST2000.01
(6)
If the temperature data is non-negative, the
binary data in CIO 202 and CIO 201 is
converted to BCD and placed in D101 and
D100.
(7)
If the temperature data is negative, the 2's
complement data in CIO 202 and CIO 201 is
converted to binary data representing the
absolute value of the temperature input and
placed in H1 and H0.
C(412)
(8)
The binary data in H1 and H0 is
converted to BCD and placed in D101
and D100.
(9)
"1" is written to the bit in D101 indicating
negative data.
452
CompoBus/S I/O Link Units Section 7-6
Description of Operation
7-6 CompoBus/S I/O Link Units
The CP1L can function as a slave to a CompoBus/S Master Unit (or SRM1
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit) when a CP1W-SRT21/CPM1A-SRT21
CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit is connected. The CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
establishes an I/O link of 8 inputs and 8 outputs between the Master Unit and
the PLC. Up to three CompoBus/S I/O Link Units, including other Expansion I/
O Units, can be connected to a CP1L CPU Unit.
From the standpoint of the CP1L CPU Unit, the 8 input bits and 8 output bits
allocated to the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit are identical to input and output
bits allocated to Expansion I/O Units even though the CompoBus/S I/O Link
Unit does not control actual inputs and outputs. The input and output bits allo-
cated to the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit are one side of an I/O link between the
slave CPU Unit and the CPU Unit to which the Master Unit is connected.
CIO 2000
CIO 2002
CIO 2: Leftmost 3 digits of temperature data
0 16
5
16
4
16
3
0 0 16
5
16
4
CIO 2001 16
4
16
3
16
1
16
0
0 16
5
16
4
16
3
CIO 2: Rightmost 3 digits of temperature data
1 16
2
16
1
16
1
(2)
(1)
(9) If temperature data is negative, "8" is written here.
(3)
D101 0/8 10
6
10
5
10
4
D103 0 1 0 0
#0100
CIO 2002
2's complement data

D100 10
3
10
2
10
1
10
0
H1 0 0 16
5
16
4
H0 16
3
16
2
16
1
16
0
(5)
(4)
(1)
D102 0 0 0 0
#0000
CIO 2001 2's complement data
(6)
If the temperature data is
non-negative, binary data is
converted to BCD data.
(8)
If the temperature data is negative,
binary data is converted to BCD data.
(7)
Binary
subtraction
BD L NC( BS-) N C
BD H NC( BS+)
S
COMM
ERR
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6
No.
SRT21
EXP
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CP1L CPU Unit
Special flat cable or VCTF cable
CompoBus/S Master Unit
(or SRM1 CompoBus/S
Master Control Unit)
CP1W-SRT21/
CPM1A-SRT21
CompoBus/S
I/O Link Unit
453
Specifications
LED Indicators
CP1W-SRT21/CPM1A-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
(1) CompoBus/S Terminals
The following CompoBus/S terminals are provided: CompoBus/S com-
munications data high/low terminals, NC terminals for communications
power supply plus (+) and minus (), and an NC terminal. (Power is sup-
plied internally for this Unit, so the NC terminals for communications
power supply can be used as relay terminals.)
Master PLC (CS Series)
CPU Unit
CP1L
I/O memory
Input
CIO 2
Output
CIO 12
8 bits
8 bits
I/O memory
Input
CIO 2004
Output
CIO 2000
8 bits
8 bits
CompoBus/S
Master Unit
Unit No. 0
CompoBus/S
I/O Link Unit
Node
number: 0
Model number CP1W-SRT21/CPM1A-SRT21
Master/slave CompoBus/S Slave
Number of I/O points 8 input points, 8 output points
Number of words allocated in
CPU Unit I/O memory
1 input word, 1 output word
(Allocated in the same way as Expansion Units and
Expansion I/O Units.)
Node number setting Set using the DIP switch
(Set before turning on the CPU Units power supply.)
Indicator Name Color Meaning
COMM Communications
Indicator
Yellow ON: Communications in progress.
OFF: Communications stopped or error
has occurred.
ERR Error indicator Red ON: A communications error has
occurred.
OFF: Indicates normal communications
or stand-by.
BD NC(BS-) NC
BD NC(BS+)
S
COMM
ERR
ON
1 3 2 4 5 6
No.
SRT21
EXP
(1) CompoBus/S Terminals
(3) LED Indicators
(2) DIP Switch
454
(2) DIP Switch
Used to specify the node number for the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.
(Refer to the following table.)
(3) LED Indicators
Used to show the CompoBus/S communications status.
Connected to the expansion connector of a CP1L CPU Unit or a Expan-
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. The cable is provided with the Compo-
Bus/S I/O Link Unit and cannot be removed.
Used to connect Expansion Units or Expansion I/O Units.
Pin labels Contents
1
2
4
8
DR
HOLD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 = ON, 0 = OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Long-distance communications mode (See note.)
High-speed communications mode
Retain inputs after a communications error.
Clear inputs after a communications error.
ON
1248D
R
H
O
L
D
SW1
8 4 2 1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
NODE NUMBER
SW1
Node Number
Setting
Note: The long-distance communications
mode can be used only when one of
the following Master Units is
connected: C200HW-SRM21-V1,
CQM1-SRM21-V1, or SRM1-C0@-V2.
Indicator Name Color Meaning
COMM Communications
indicator
Yellow ON: Communications in progress.
OFF: Communications stopped or error
has occurred.
ERR Error indicator Red ON: A communications error has
occurred.
OFF: Indicates normal communications
or stand-by.
455
Operating Procedure
Connecting the
CompoBus/S I/O Link Units are connected to the CP1L CPU Unit. Up to three
Units can be connected, including any other Expansion Units and Expansion
I/O Units that are also connected. The Units can be connected in any order
from the CPU Unit.
I/O Allocation
I/O words are allocated to the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit in the same way as
to other Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units, i.e., the next available input
and output words are allocated. As shown below, when m is the last allo-
cated input word and n is the last allocated output word, the CompoBus/S I/
O Link Unit is allocated m+1 as its input word and n+1 as its output word.
In the following example, a CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit is connected as the first
Unit after the CP1L CPU Unit.
Connect the Unit.
Determine the node
address of the
and set the DIP switch.
Wire the CompoBus/S
transmission path.
Connect the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit.
The node number should be a unique number between
0 and 15.
Use the DIP switch to set the CompoBus/S I/O Link
Unit fs node number, communications mode, and the
status of output data when a communications error
occurs.
Connect the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit to a
CompoBus/S transmission path.
BD L NC( BS-) N C
BD H NC( BS+)
S
COMM
ERR
ON

1 2 3 4 5 6
No.
SRT21
EXP
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CPU Unit CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
Word m+1
8 inputs
8 outputs
Word n+1
CP1L
CPU Unit
CompoBus/S
I/O LInk Unit
Input words
Output words
CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 2
CIO 102
456
The input word (m+1) contains the 8 bits of data from the Master Unit and two
CompoBus/S communications flags.
Write the data to be transmitted to the Master Unit in the output word (n+1).
Note (1) The 8 bits of I/O data are not always transmitted simultaneously. In other
words, 8 bits of data transmitted from the Master CPU Unit at the same
time will not always reach the Slave CPU Unit simultaneously, and 8 bits
of data transmitted from the Slave CPU Unit at the same time will not al-
ways reach the Master CPU Unit simultaneously.
When the 8 bits of input data must be read together, modify the ladder
program in the CPU Unit receiving the data. For example, read the input
data twice in succession and accept the data only when the two values
match.
(2) Unused bits in the CompoBus/S I/O Link Units output word can be used
as work bits, but unused bits in the output slaves cannot be used as work
bits.
(3) Unused bits in input word cannot be used as work bits.
Determining the Node
Number and Making DIP
Switch Settings
Node Number
The CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit is a Slave Unit with 8 input bits and 8 out-
put bits. The node number setting is made using the DIP switch; the
inputs and outputs share the same node number.
The range of possible node number settings is determined by the type of
PLC the Master Unit is mounted to and the settings on the Master Unit.
For details refer to the CompoBus/S Operation Manual.
Word m+1
15 00 07 08 09
CompoBus/S Communications Error Flag
0: Normal; 1: Error
CompoBus/S Communication Status Flag
0: Stopped; 1: Communicating
Data from the Master Unit
Word n+1
15 00 07
Data to be transferred to the Master Unit
457
DIP Switch Settings
Use the DIP switch to set the CompoBus/S I/O Link Units node number, com-
munications mode, and the status of output data when a communications
error occurs.
Note Always turn OFF the power supply before changing the DIP switch settings.
Wiring the CompoBus/S
Communications Path
Wire the CompoBus/S communications path as shown in the following dia-
grams.
Pin labels Contents
1
2
4
8
DR
HOLD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 = ON, 0 = OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Long-distance communications mode (See note.)
High-speed communications mode
Retain inputs after a communications error.
Clear inputs after a communications error.
ON
1248D
R
H
O
L
D
SW1
8 4 2 1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
NODE NUMBER
SW1
Node Number
Setting
Note: The long-distance communications
mode can be used only when one of
the following Master Units is
connected: C200HW-SRM21-V1,
CQM1-SRM21-V1, or SRM1-C0@-V2.
BD L
BD H
Connect the CompoBus/S Communications Cable.
BD L
BD H
NC (BS+)
NC NC (BS)
These terminals are not used. They can
however be used as communications power
supply relay terminals.
458
DeviceNet I/O Link Units Section 7-7
7-7 DeviceNet I/O Link Units
Connecting a CPM1A-DRT21 DeviceNet I/O Link Unit (with 32 inputs and 32
outputs as built-in I/O) to function as a slave allows the CP1L to be used as a
DeviceNet slave. A maximum of three DeviceNet I/O Link Units can be con-
nected to the CP1L to create I/O Links for up to 192 points (96 inputs and 96
outputs) between the CP1L and the DeviceNet master.
From the standpoint of the CP1L CPU Unit, the 32 input bits and 32 output
bits allocated to the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit are identical to input and output
bits allocated to Expansion I/O Units even though the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit
does not control external inputs and outputs. The input and output bits allo-
cated to the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit are one side of an I/O link between the
slave CPU Unit and the CP1L CPU Unit to which the Master Unit is con-
nected.
Note Refer to the DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual (W347) for details on
DeviceNet networks.
Specifications

CP1H CPU Unit
PLC supporting DeviceNet
master, e.g., CS, C200HX/HG/HE
(-Z), CVM1, CV-series, etc.
DeviceNet Master Unit or
DeviceNet Unit
DeviceNet transmission path
DeviceNet slave
CPM1A-DRT21
DeviceNet slave
Each Unit enables remote I/O
communications for 32 input and 32
output points as a DeviceNet slave.
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
Master PLC (CS Series with fixed allocations)
CPU Unit
CP1L
CPU Unit
I/O memory I/O memory
Inputs
CIO 350
CIO 351
Outputs
CIO 50
CIO 51
Inputs
CIO 2
CIO 3
Outputs
CIO 12
CIO 13
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
DeviceNet
Master Unit
Unit No. 0
DeviceNet
I/O Link Unit
Node
number: 0
Model number CPM1A-DRT21
Master/slave DeviceNet Slave
459
CPM1A-DRT21 DeviceNet I/O Link Unit
(1) DeviceNet Communications Connector
Used to connect DeviceNet communications. For the wiring, use the con-
nector provided with the CPM1A-DRT21 or use a connector purchased
separately.
(2) Rotary Switches (SW2, SW3)
Used to set DeviceNet node numbers.
(3) DIP Switch (SW1)
Used to set the DeviceNet baud rate and the output hold function.
Number of I/O points 32 input points, 32 output points
Number of words allocated in
CPU Unit I/O memory
2 input words, 2 output words
(Allocated in the same way as other Expansion Units
and Expansion I/O Units.)
Node number setting Set using the rotary switches
(Set before turning ON the CPU Units power supply.)
Communications current con-
sumption
48 mA
Baud rate setting (See note.)
Pin 1 Pin 2 Baud rate Max. transmission path
length
OFF OFF 125 kbps 500 m
ON OFF 250 kbps 250 m
OFF ON 500 kbps 100 m
ON ON Not allowed. ---
Output hold function setting
Pin 4 DeviceNet baud rate
OFF Clears remote outputs when communications error occurs. (Outputs
turned OFF for each logic value.)
ON Holds remote outputs when communications error occurs.
(1) DeviceNet Communications
Connector
(3) DIP Switch
(4) LED Indicators
(2) Rotary Switches
Setting range: 0 to 63 (Do not set 64 to 99.)
460
Note When using Expansion Unit/Expansion I/O Unit Error Flags (A436)
in the program, set pin 4 on the DIP switch to ON. If communica-
tions are set to be cleared, the timing for clearing outputs and set-
ting the Error Flags may not agree.
(4) LED Indicators
Used to indicate CPM1A-DRT21 status, as shown in the following table.
Connected to the expansion connector of a CP1L CPU Unit or an Expan-
sion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit. The cable is included with the DeviceNet
Unit and cannot be removed.
Handling Unit Errors If a communications error occurs while the slave is on standby, the appropri-
ate bit in word A436 will turn ON. The appropriate bit is determined by the
order in which the Expansion Units and Expansion I/O Units are connected.
The Unit nearest to the CPU Unit uses A436.00. Use these flags in the pro-
gram when it is necessary to detect errors.
Indicator Color Status Condition Meaning
MS Green Lit Normal status Normal status
Flashing Not set Switch settings being read
Red Lit Fatal error Fatal hardware error
(watchdog timer)
Flashing Nonfatal error Incorrect switch settings.
--- OFF Power not supplied. Power not supplied.
Waiting for initialization to
start.
Reset in progress.
NS Green Lit Online and commu-
nications estab-
lished.
Network normal and com-
munications established.
Flashing Online and commu-
nications not estab-
lished.
Network normal and com-
munications not estab-
lished.
Red Lit Fatal communica-
tions error
Unit has detected network
status preventing normal
communications.
Node number duplications
Bus OFF detected.
Flashing Nonfatal communi-
cations error
Communications timeout
or communications error
for one or more slaves.
--- OFF Online and power
OFF.
Waiting for node number
check by master.
Switch setting error.
Power not supplied.
461
Operating Procedure
Connecting the DeviceNet
I/O Link Unit
DeviceNet I/O Link Units are connected to the CP1L CPU Unit. Up to three
Units can be connected, including any other Expansion Units and Expansion
I/O Units that are also connected. The Units can be connected in any order
from the CPU Unit.
I/O Allocation
I/O words are allocated to the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit in the same way as to
Expansion I/O Units or other Expansion Units, i.e., the next available input
and output words are allocated. As shown below, when m is the last allo-
cated input word and n is the last allocated output word, the DeviceNet I/O
Link Unit is allocated m+1 as its input word and n+1 as its output word.
In the following example, a CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit is connected as the first
Unit after the CP1L CPU Unit.
All of the words allocated to the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit are used to read and
write data between the CPU Unit of the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit and the CPU
Unit of the DeviceNet master, as shown in the following illustration.
Connect the Unit.
Determine the node
number of the DeviceNet
I/O Link Unit and set the
rotary switches.
Wire the DeviceNet
transmission path.
Connect the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit.
The node number should be a unique number between
0 and 63.
Use the DIP switch to set the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit fs
baud rate and the status of output data when a
communications error occurs.
Connect the DeviceNet I/O Link Unit to a DeviceNet
transmission path.
SYSMAC
CP1L
L1 L2/N COM 01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 03 04 06 00 01 03 04 06
IN
OUT
CPU Unit DeviceNet I/O Link Unit
Word m+1
Word m+2
Word n+1
Word n+2
32 inputs
32 outputs
CP1L
CPU Unit
DeviceNet I/O
Link Unit
Input words
Output words
CIO 0
CIO 1
CIO 100
CIO 101
CIO 2
CIO 3
CIO 102
CIO 103
462
Note (1) The 32 bits each of I/O data are not always transmitted simultaneously.
In other words, 32 bits of data transmitted from the Master CPU Unit at
the same time will not always reach the CP1L CPU Unit simultaneously,
and 32 bits of data transmitted from the CP1L CPU Unit at the same time
will not always reach the Master CPU Unit simultaneously.
When the 32 bits of input data must be read together, modify the ladder
program in the CPU Unit receiving the data. For example, read the input
data twice in succession and accept the data only when the two values
match.
(2) Unused bits in the DeviceNet I/O Link Units output words can be used as
work bits if they are not used for output from the slave.
(3) Unused bits in input words cannot be used as work bits.
Determining the Node
Number and Making DIP
Switch Settings
Setting Node Numbers
Use rotary switches SW2 and SW3 to set DeviceNet node number. The set-
ting range is from 00 to 63, and 64 to 99 cannot be set. Rotary switch settings
go into effect when the power is turned ON.
Note The actual range of node numbers that can be set depends on the type of
PLC to which the Master Unit is mounted, and on the Master Unit setting. For
details, refer to the DeviceNet DRT1-series Slaves Operation Manual.
Setting the DIP Switch (SW1)
Used to set the DeviceNet baud rate and the output hold function.
Baud Rate

DeviceNet master
I/O memory
32 bits
32 bits
Do not use.
Input Bits
Output Bits
CIO 0.00 to CIO 0.11: 12 bits
CIO 100.00 to CIO 100.11: 8 bits
CIO 101.00 to CIO 101.11: 8 bits
CIO 102.00 to CIO 102.15: 16 bits
CIO 103.00 to CIO 103.15: 16 bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 0
CIO 1 (m)
CIO 2 (m+1)
CIO 3 (m+2)
CIO 100
CIO 101 (n)
CIO 102 (n+1)
CIO 103 (n+2)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CPU Unit
DeviceNet
I/O Link Unit
CPU Unit
DeviceNet
I/O Link Unit
Setting range: 0 to 63 (Do not set 64 to 99.)
Pin 1 Pin 2 Baud rate Max. transmission path length
OFF OFF 125 kbps 500 m
ON OFF 250 kbps 250 m
OFF ON 500 kbps 100 m
ON ON Not allowed. ---
463
Output Hold Function
Note When using Expansion Unit/Expansion I/O Unit Error Flags (A436) in the pro-
gram, turn ON pin 4 on the DIP switch. If communications are set to be
cleared, the timing for clearing outputs and setting the Error Flags may not
agree.
Wiring the DeviceNet
Communications Path
When using a CPM1A-DRT21 DeviceNet I/O Link Unit, wire the DeviceNet
communications cable as shown in the following diagram.
DeviceNet Connectors
Use the following connectors.
Note Use the XW4B-05C4-TF-D when wiring multidrop connections using Thick
Cables.
Use the following screwdriver for the above connector.
Pin 4 DeviceNet baud rate
OFF Clears remote outputs when communications error occurs. (Outputs turned
OFF for each logic value.)
ON Holds remote outputs when communications error occurs.
Model XW4B-05C1-H1-D XW4B-05C4-TF-D
Form and
specifications
OMRON connector with screws
(provided with CPM1A-DRT21)
OMRON connector for multidrop
connections (See note.)
Black (V)
Blue (CAN low)
Shield
White (CAN high)
Red (V+)
CPM1A-DRT21
Connector for same CMP1A-DRT21
network (XW4B-05C1-H1-D)
Multidrop Connector
(XW4B-05C4-TF-D)
464
I/O Response Time Refer to the DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual (W347) for details on the
response time. The data read/write time for one cycle for the CPM1A-DRT21
is approximately 0.5 ms. Add a maximum of 1 ms to the I/O response time.
XW4Z-00C
0.6 mm
3.5 mm
465
SECTION 8
Program Transfer, Trial Operation, and Debugging
This section describes the processes used to transfer the program to the CPU Unit and the functions that can be used to test
and debug the program.
8-1 Program Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
8-2 Trial Operation and Debugging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
8-2-1 Forced Set/Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
8-2-2 Differential Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
8-2-3 Online Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
8-2-4 Tracing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
466
Program Transfer Section 8-1
8-1 Program Transfer
The CX-Programmer is used to transfer the programs, PLC Setup, I/O mem-
ory data, and I/O comments to the CPU Unit with the CPU Unit in PROGRAM
mode. The following procedure is used.
1,2,3... 1. Select PLC - Transfer - To PLC. The Download Options Dialog Box will be
displayed.
2. Specify the items to transfer.
3. Click the OK Button.
Note The program data on a Memory Cassette can be automatic transferred when
the power is turned ON.
8-2 Trial Operation and Debugging
8-2-1 Forced Set/Reset
The CX-Programmer can force-set (ON) or reset (OFF) specified bits in the
CIO Area, Auxiliary Area, and HR Area, as well as timer/counter Completion
Flags. Forced status will take priority over status output from the program or
I/O refreshing. This status cannot be overwritten by instructions, and will be
stored regardless of the status of the program or external inputs until it is
cleared from the CX-Programmer.
Force-set/reset operations are used to force input and output during a trial
operation or to force certain conditions during debugging.
Force-set/reset operations can be executed in either MONITOR or PRO-
GRAM modes, but not in RUN mode.
Note Turn ON the Forced Status Hold Bit (A500.13) and the IOM Hold Bit (A500.12)
at the same time to retain the status of bits that have been force-set or reset
when switching the operating mode.
Turn ON the Forced Status Hold Bit (A500.13) and the IOM Hold Bit
(A500.12), and set the Forced Status Hold Bit at Startup parameter in the PLC
Setup to retain the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit hold to retain the sta-
tus of bits that have been force-set or reset when turning OFF the power.
The following areas can be force-set and reset: CIO Area, Work Area, Timer
Completion Flags, HR Area, Counter Completion Flags.
CX-Programmer Operation
Selecting bits for forced setting/resetting
Selecting forced set or forced reset status
Clearing forced status (also clearing all forced status at the same time)

Input ignored
CPU Unit
Forced ON regardless
of programming
Forced
set
Forced
set
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
467
Trial Operation and Debugging Section 8-2
8-2-2 Differential Monitoring
When the CPU Unit detects that a bit set by the CX-Programmer has changed
from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF, the results are indicated in the Differenti-
ate Monitor Completed Flag (A508.09). The Flag will turn ON when conditions
set for the differential monitor have been met. The CX-Programmer can moni-
tor and display these results on screen.
CX-Programmer Operation
1,2,3... 1. Right-click the bit for differential monitoring.
2. Click Differential Monitor from the PLC Menu. The Differential Monitor Di-
alog Box will be displayed.
3. Click Rising or Falling.
4. Click the Start Button. The buzzer will sound when the specified change is
detected and the count will be incremented.
5. Click the Stop Button. Differential monitoring will stop.
Related Auxiliary Bits/Words
CPU Unit
Bit A
I/O memory
Moni-
tored for
OFF to
ON transi-
tion.
CX-Programmer
Detects bit A OFF
to ON transition.

Differentiate Monitor
Completed Flag
A508.09 Turns ON when the differential monitoring condition has been met dur-
ing differential monitoring.
Note: The flag will be cleared when differential monitoring is started.
468
8-2-3 Online Editing
The Online Editing function is used to add to or change part of a program in a
CPU Unit directly from the CX-Programmer when the CPU Unit is in MONI-
TOR or PROGRAM mode. This function is designed for minor program
changes without stopping the CPU Unit.
Online editing is possible simultaneously from more than one computer run-
ning the CX-Programmer as long as different tasks are edited.
The cycle time will be increased by from one to several cycle times if the pro-
gram in the CPU Unit is edited online in MONITOR mode. The cycle time will
also be increased to back up data in the flash memory after online editing.
The BKUP indicator will be lit during this period and the progress of the
backup will be displayed on the CX-Programmer. The increases per cycle are
listed in the following table.
There is a limit to the number of edits that can be made consecutively. The
actual number depends on the type of editing that is performed, but 40 edits
should be used as a guideline. A message will be displayed on the CX-Pro-
grammer if the limit is exceeded, and further editing will not be possible until
the CPU Unit has completed backing up the data.
The length of time that the cycle time is extended due to online editing is
almost unaffected by the size of the task program being edited.
Precautions The cycle time will be longer than normal when a program is overwritten using
Online Editing in MONITOR mode, so make sure that the amount of time that
it is extended will not exceed the cycle monitoring time set in the PLC Setup. If
it does exceed the monitoring time, then a Cycle Time Over error will occur,
and the CPU Unit will stop. Restart the CPU Unit by selecting PROGRAM
mode first before changing to RUN or MONITOR mode.
Note If the task being edited online contains a block program, then previous execu-
tion information, such as Standby (WAIT) or Pause status, will be cleared by
online editing, and the next execution will be from the beginning.
Online Editing from the CX-Programmer
1,2,3... 1. Display the program section that will be edited.
2. Select the instructions to be edited.
3. Select Program - Online Edit - Begin.
CPU Unit Increase in cycle time
Online editing Backup to flash memory
CP1L CPU Units 16 ms max. 4% of cycle time
Online Editing
CX-Programmer
Operating in
MONITOR mode.
Program section changed
469
4. Edit the instructions.
5. Select Program - Online Edit - Send Changes The instructions will be
check and, if there are no errors, they will be transferred to the CPU Unit.
The instructions in the CPU Unit will be overwritten and cycle time will be
increased at this time.
!Caution Proceed with Online Editing only after verifying that the extended cycle time
will not adversely affect operation. Input signals may not be read if the cycle
time is too long.
Temporarily Disabling Online Editing
It is possible to disable online editing for specific cycles to ensure response
characteristics for machine control in those cycles. Online editing from the
CX-Programmer will be disabled for those cycles and any requests for online
editing received during those cycles will be held online editing is enables.
Online editing is disabled by setting the Online Editing Disable Bit Validator
(A527.00 to A527.07) to 5A and then turning ON the Online Editing Disable
Bit (A527.09). When these settings have been made and a request for online
editing is received, online editing will be put on standby and the Online Editing
Wait Flag (A201.10) will be turned ON.
When the Online Editing Disable Bit (A527.09) is turned OFF, online editing
will be performed, the Online Editing Processing Flag (A201.11) will turn ON,
and the Online Editing Wait Flag (A201.10) will turn OFF. When online editing
has been completed, the Online Editing Processing Flag (A201.11) will turn
OFF.
Online editing can also be temporarily disabled by turning ON the Online Edit-
ing Disable Bit (A527.09) while online editing is being performed. Here too,
the Online Editing Wait Flag (A201.10) will turn ON.
If a second request for online editing is received while the first request is on
standby, the second request will not be recorded and an error will occur.
Online editing can also be disabled to prevent accidental online editing. As
described above, disable online editing by setting the Online Editing Disable
Bit Validator (A527.00 to A527.07) to 5A and turning ON the Online Editing
Disable Bit (A527.09).
Enabling Online Editing from the CX-Programmer
When online editing cannot be enabled from the program, it can be enabled
from the CX-Programmer. If operations continue with online editing in standby
status, CX-Programmer may go offline. If this occurs, reconnect the computer
to the CPU Unit and turn OFF the Online Edit Disable Bit (A527.09).
Note When using automatic transfer from a Memory Cassette at startup, be sure to
transfer the data to the Memory Cassette if any changes are made using
online editing. If power is turned OFF before the changes are transferred, the
data from before online editing was performed will be read from the Memory
Cassette.
Online Edit Disable Bit Validator A527.00 to
A527.07
Enables using the Online Edit Disable Bit (A527.09).
Not 5A: Online Edit Disable Bit disabled.
5A: Online Edit Disable Bit enabled.
Online Edit Disable Bit A527.09 To disable online editing, set the Online Edit Disable Bit Validator
(A527.00 to A527.07) to 5A and turn ON this bit ON.
470
8-2-4 Tracing Data
The Data Trace function samples specified I/O memory data using any one of
the following timing methods. It stores the sampled data in Trace Memory,
where they can be read and checked later from the CX-Programmer.
Specified sampling time (10 to 2,550 ms in 10-ms units)
One sample per cycle
When the TRACE MEMORY SAMPLING instruction (TRSM(045)) is exe-
cuted
Up to 31 bits and 6 words in I/O memory can be specified for sampling.
Basic Procedure
1,2,3... 1. Sampling will start when the parameters have been set from the CX-Pro-
grammer and the command to start tracing has been executed.
2. Sampled data (after step 1 above) will be traced when the trace trigger
condition is met, and the data just after the delay (see note 1) will be stored
in Trace Memory.
3. Memory data will be sampled until the Trace Memory is full, and then the
trace will be ended.
Note Delay value: Specifies how many sampling periods to offset the sampling in
Trace Memory from when the trace condition is met. The setting ranges are
shown in the following table.
Positive delay: Store data delayed by the set delay.
Negative delay: Store previous data according go to the set delay.
Example: Sampling at 10 ms with a 30 ms delay time yields 30 x 10 =
300 ms, so data 300 ms before the trigger will be stored.
Online Editing Wait Flag A201.10 ON while an online editing process is on standby because online editing
is disabled.
Online Editing Processing Flag A201.11 ON while an online editing process is being executed.
No. of words
sampled
Setting range
0 1999 to 2000
1 1332 to 1333
2 999 to 1000
3 799 to 800
4 665 to 666
5 570 to 571
6 499 to 500
471
Note Use the CX-Programmer to turn ON the Sampling Start Bit (A508.15). Never
turn ON this bit from the user program.
The following traces can be executed.
Scheduled Data Trace A scheduled data trace will sample data at fixed intervals. Specified sampling
interval is 10 to 2,550 ms in 10-ms units. Do not use the TRSM(045) instruc-
tion in the user program and be sure to set the sampling period higher than 0.
One-cycle Data Trace A one-cycle data trace will sample I/O refresh data after the end of all cyclic
tasks. Do not use the TRSM(045) instruction in the user program and be sure
to set the sampling period higher than 0.
Data Trace via TRSM(045) A sample will be taken once each time the TRACE MEMORY SAMPLING
instruction (TRSM(045)) instruction is executed. When more than one
TRSM(045) instruction is used in the program, a sample will be taken each
time TRSM(045) is executed after the trace trigger condition has been met
until trace memory is full.
Data Trace Procedure
Use the following procedure to execute tracing.
1,2,3... 1. Use the CX-Programmer to set trace parameters (select PLC - Data Trace
and then select Operation - Configure):
Addresses of the sampled words/bits, sampling period, delay time, and
trigger conditions.
2. Use the CX-Programmer to start sampling or turn ON the Sampling Start
Bit (A508.15).
3. Put the trace trigger condition into effect.
4. End tracing.
5. Use CX-Programmer to read the trace data.
a) Select Data Trace from the PLC Menu.
b) Select Select from the Operation Menu.
c) Select Execute from the Operation Menu.
d) Select Read from the Operation Menu.
Sampling Start Bit
Trace Start Bit
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag
Trace Busy Flag
Trace Completed Flag
Sampling
472
Sampling Start Bit A508.15 Use the CX-Programmer to turn ON this bit to start sampling. This bit must be
turned ON from the CX-Programmer. Do not turn this bit ON and OFF from the
user program.
Note: The bit will be turned OFF when the Data Trace has been completed.
Trace Start Bit A508.14 When this bit is turned ON, the trace trigger will be monitored and sampled data
will be stored in Trace Memory when the trigger condition is met. The following
traces are enabled with this bit.
1) Scheduled trace (trace at fixed intervals of 10 to 2,550 ms)
2) TRSM(045) instruction trace (trace when the TRSM(045) is executed)
3) One-cycle trace (trace at the end of execution of all cyclic tasks)
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag A508.11 This flag turns ON when the trace trigger condition has been met after the Trace
Start Bit has turned ON. This flag will turn OFF when the sampling is started.
Trace Busy Flag A508.13 This flag turns ON when sampling is started and turns OFF when the trace has
been completed.
Trace Completed Flag A508.12 This flag turns ON when Trace Memory becomes full after the trace trigger con-
dition has been met during a trace operation and turns OFF when the next sam-
pling operation is started.
473
SECTION 9
Troubleshooting
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during CP1L operation.
9-1 Error Classification and Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
9-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
9-2-1 Error Processing Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
9-2-2 No Operation When Power Is Supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
9-2-3 Fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
9-2-4 CPU Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
9-2-5 Non-fatal Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
9-2-6 Other Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
9-3 Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
9-4 Troubleshooting Unit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
474
Error Classification and Confirmation Section 9-1
9-1 Error Classification and Confirmation
Error Categories
Errors in CP1L CPU Units can be broadly divided into the following four cate-
gories.
Confirming Errors
There are three sources of information on errors that have occurred.
CPU Unit indicators
Auxiliary Area
CPU Unit Indicators
These indicators show the operating status of the CPU Unit.
Note Do not turn OFF the CPU Unit power supply when this indicator is lit.
Category Comments
CPU Error A WDT (watchdog timer) error is generated in the CPU Unit, the
CPU Unit will malfunction, and operation will stop.
CPU Standby The CPU will go on standby because conditions for stating oper-
ation have not yet been met.
Fatal Error Operation cannot continue. Operation will stop due to a serious
problem.
Non-fatal Error A minor problem has occurred. Operation will continue
POWER
RUN
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
ERR/ALM
POWER
(green)
Lit Power is ON.
Not lit Power is OFF.
RUN (green) Lit The CPU Unit is executing a program in either RUN or
MONITOR mode.
Not lit Operation is stopped in PROGRAM mode or due to a
fatal error.
ERR/ALM
(red)
Lit A fatal error or CPU error (WDT error) has occurred.
operation will stop and all outputs will be turned OFF.
Flashing A non-fatal error has occurred. Operation will continue.
INH (yellow) Lit The Output OFF Bit (A500.15) was turned ON. All out-
puts will be turned OFF.
PRPHL
(yellow)
Flashing Communications (either sending or receiving) are in
progress through the peripheral port.
BKUP
(yellow)
(See note.)
Lit The user program, parameters, or DM Area
data is being written to or accessed in the
built-in flash memory (backup memory).
The user program, parameters, DM Area data,
or DM initial values are being written to or
accessed in a Memory Cassette.
The BKUP indicator also lights while the user
program is being restored when the power
supply is turned ON.
475
Error Classification and Confirmation Section 9-1
CPU Unit Indicators and Error Meanings in RUN or MONITOR Mode
Auxiliary Area
Error Code Storage Word
The error code is stored in A400 when an error occurs. If two or more errors
occur at the same time, the most serious error will be stored.
Error Flags
Flags that indicate the type of error are allocated in the Auxiliary Area.
Error Information
This area indicates specific information on the meaning of error flags and pro-
vides information on error location and error details.
Fatal Errors
Non-fatal Errors
Indicator CPU
error
CPU
standby
Fatal
error
Non-
fatal
error
Peripheral port
communica-
tions error
Output
OFF Bit
turned ON
POWER Lit Lit Lit Lit Lit Lit
RUN Not lit Not lit Not lit Lit Lit Lit
ERR/ALM Lit Not lit Lit Flashing --- ---
INH Not lit --- --- --- --- Lit
PRPHL --- --- --- --- Not lit ---
BKUP --- --- --- --- --- ---
Error Error code
(A400)
Error flag Error information
Meaning Address
Memory error 80F1 A401.15 Memory error
location
A403
I/O bus error 80C0 to 80C7,
80CA, 80CE,
80CF
A401.14 I/O bus error
details
A404
Too many I/O error 80E1 A401.11 Details for too
many I/O error
A407
Program error 80F0 A401.09 Program error
details
A294 to A299
Cycle time too long
error
809F A401.08 --- ---
FALS instruction
executed
C101 to C2FF A401.06 --- ---
Error Error code
(A400)
Error flag Error information
Meaning Address
FAL instruction
executed
4101 to 42FF A402.15 Executed FAL
number
A360 to A391
Flash memory
error
00F1 A315.15 --- ---
Interrupt task error 008B A402.13 Interrupt task
error unit num-
ber
A426
PLC Setup error 009B A402.10 A406
Option Board error 00D1, 00D2 A315.13 Error Option
Board Flags
A424
Battery error 00F7 A402.04 --- ---
476
Troubleshooting Section 9-2
9-2 Troubleshooting
Use the following procedure to check error details and remove the cause of
the error if the CPU Unit does not operate when the power supply is ON, oper-
ation suddenly stops and the error indicator (ERR/ALM indicator) lights, or if
the error indicator (ERR/ALM indicator) flashes during operating.
9-2-1 Error Processing Flowchart
Confirm the error category by referring to the status of the CPU Unit indica-
tors, investigate the cause for the error in the error tables, and take corrective
actions.
9-2-2 No Operation When Power Is Supplied
First confirm that the POWER indicator (green) is lit.
POWER Indicator Not Lit
The power supply may not match the Unit rating, wiring may not be correct, or
the Unit may be faulty.
1,2,3... 1. Confirm the Unit rating (i.e., is it 24 VDC or 100 to 240 VAC?) and see if
the supply power matches the rating.
2. Check the wiring to see if it is correct and that nothing is disconnected.
3. Check the voltage at the power supply terminals. If the voltage is normal
and the POWER indicator is lit, the Unit may be faulty. In that case, replace
the Unit.
POWER Indicator Turns OFF and ON
There may be fluctuations in the power supply voltage, disconnected wiring,
or poor contacts. Check the power supply system and wiring.
POWER Indicator Lit but No Operation
Check the RUN indicator if the POWER indicator is lit but the CPU Unit does
not operate. The CPU Unit may be on standby if the RUN indicator is not lit.
Error occurred.
POWER indicator lit?
RUN indicator lit?
ERR/ALM indicator lit?
There is no error in the
CP1H.
Check for other causes
(section 9-3).
Check the power supply
(sections 9-2-2 and 9-3).
ERR/ALM indicator lit?
A non-fatal error has occurred.
Refer to section 9-2-5.
A fatal error has occurred.
Refer to section 9-2-3.
Lit
Not lit
Not lit
Flashing
Not lit
Lit
Not lit
Lit
477
CPU Standby
Detection of Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units has not been completed.
If a CPU Bus Unit has not started normally, check the Unit Setup.
If a Special I/O Unit is not detected, replace the Special I/O Unit.
9-2-3 Fatal Errors
CPU Unit Indicators
There may be a CPU error or a fatal error if operation stops (i.e., the RUN indi-
cator turns OFF) and the ERR/ALM indicator lights.
Data on fatal errors is displayed on the Error Tab Page of the CX-Program-
mers PLC Error Window.
Take corrective actions after checking error details based on the 7-segment
display or the CX-Programmer display message together with the Auxiliary
Area Error Flags and error information.
Note 1. Errors are listed in order with the most serious errors first.
2. If two or more errors occur at the same time, the most serious error code
will be stored in A400.
3. I/O memory will be cleared if a fatal error occurs (except those created with
FALS instructions).
4. I/O memory will be held when the I/O Memory Hold Bit is ON, but outputs
will be turned OFF.
POWER Lit
RUN Not lit
ERR/ALM Lit
INH ---
PRPHL ---
BKUP ---
POWER
RUN
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
ERR/AL
478
Memory Errors
Reference Information
Probable cause Possible remedy
Automatic transfer from the Memory Cassette
at startup failed because the required data is
not on the Memory Cassette.
Store the required data on the Memory Cas-
sette.
An error has occurred in memory. One or
more bits in A403 will turn ON to indicate
where the error has occurred. See below for
details.
Memory Error Location
See below.
A403.00 is ON A checksum error
has occurred in the
user program.
The power supply
was turned OFF
when backing up the
user program to
flash memory.
Transfer the user program again.
has occurred in the
PLC Setup.
Transfer the PLC Setup again.
has occurred in the
routing tables.
Transfer the routing tables again.
A403.09 is ON The contents of a
Memory Cassette
could not be nor-
mally read to the
CPU Unit when
power was turned
ON.
Check to see if the files required for automatic
transfer at startup are present on the Memory
Cassette.
A403.10 is ON There is a problem
with flash memory.
A hardware error has occurred in the CPU Unit.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Error flag Memory Error Flag, A401.15
Error code (A400) 80F1
Error information Memory Error Location, A403
479
I/O Bus Errors
An I/O bus error occurs in data transfer between the CPU Units and Units
connected to the I/O bus. Cycle the power supply. If operation is not restored
when the power supply has been cycled, turn OFF the power supply and
check that connections are proper and that there is no damage.
Too Many I/O Points
The number of CP1W/CPM1A-series Expansion Units and Expansion I/O
Units connected exceeds the restriction for the number of Units or words for
the system configuration. Turn OFF the power supply and reconfigure the sys-
tem within the restrictions.
Program Error
A program error indicates a problem with the user program. Refer to the error
information, check the program, and correct the mistakes. Clear the error
once the problem has been corrected.
An error occurred in data transfer between the CPU Unit
and an Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
Note 0A0A hex will be stored in A404.
Try cycling the power supply.
If the problem persists, turn OFF the power sup-
ply and check the Connecting Cables between
the Units to see if they are connected properly.
Check the Unit connections to be sure they are
ok (e.g., that there is no damage).
After correcting the problem, turn ON the power
to the Units again.
Error flag I/O Bus Error Flag, A401.14
Error code (A400) 80C0, 80CA, 80CE, 80CF
Error information I/O bus error details, A404 (0A0A)
The number of CP1W/CPM1A-series Expansion Units
and Expansion I/O Units exceeds the restriction.
Connect a maximum of three Expansion Units and
Expansion I/O Units to the CP1L-M40D@-@ or
CP1L-M30D@-@.
Connect a maximum of one Expansion Unit or
Expansion I/O Unit to the CP1L-L20D@-@ or CP1L-
L14D@-@.
Error flag Too Many I/O Points Flag, A401.11
Error code (A400) 80E1
Error information Too Many I/O Points Details, A407
Instruction Processing Error
If the PLC Setup has been set to stop operation for an
instruction error, the Error Flag will be turned ON when an
instruction cannot be executed due to a problem in the
operand data.
Refer to A298 and A299 (instruction program address when
the program fails), check the specifications for the relevant
instruction, and set the correct operand data.
Alternatively, set the PLC Setup to not stop operation for an
instruction error.
Indirect DM Addressing BCD Error
If the PLC Setup has been set to stop operation for an indi-
rect DM BCD error, the Access Error Flag will turn ON when
the content of an indirectly addressed DM operand is not
BCD although BCD mode has been selected.
the program fails), and correctly set the content for the indi-
rectly addressed DM operand (BCD mode) to BCD or
change the specified destination.
Alternatively, change the indirect addressing to binary
mode or set the PLC Setup to not stop operation for an indi-
rect DM addressing BCD error.
480
Cycle Time Too Long
Illegal Area Access Error
If the PLC Setup has been set to stop operation for an ille-
gal access error, the Access Error Flag will turn ON when
an illegal access error has occurred.
The following operations are considered illegal access:
Reading/writing the parameter area
Writing to an area without memory installed
Writing to a write-protected area
Indirect DM addressing BCD error
the program fails) and take corrective actions so that illegal
area access errors will not occur. Alternatively, set the PLC
Setup so that PLC operation will not stop when an instruc-
tion error occurs.
No END Error
This error occurs when there is not an END(001) instruction
in the program within a task.
Insert an END(001) instruction at the end of the program
allocated to the task stored in A294 (task number when the
program fails).
Task Error
This error is generated by any of the following conditions.
1. There is not an executable cyclic task (active).
2. There is no specified interrupt task when an interrupt is
generated (input interrupt, high-speed counter interrupt,
scheduled interrupt, or external interrupt).
1. Check the properties of the executable cyclic task and set
at least one task to start when operation starts.
2. Create a task for the number stored in A294 (task number
when the program fails).
Differentiation Overflow Error
Differentiation instructions were repeatedly inserted or
deleted using the online editor and the system restriction
was exceeded.
Change the operating mode to PROGRAM mode and then
return to MONITOR mode.
Illegal Instruction Error
Execution of an unexecutable instruction was attempted.
For a CPU Unit with 14 or 20 I/O Points, the instruction
operand will be given in D10000 to D31999.
Check the program, correct the problem, and transfer the
program to the CPU Unit again.
UM Overflow Error
An attempt was made to execute a program that exceeds
the user program capacity.
Transfer the program again using the CX-Programmer.
Error flag Program Error Flag, A401.09
Error information Program error details, A294 to A299
This error occurs when the cycle time PV exceeds the max-
imum cycle time set in the PLC Setup.
Review the program to decrease the cycle time or change
the maximum cycle time set in the PLC Setup.
Refer to the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time
(A440) and study the maximum cycle time.
The cycle time can be decreased using the following meth-
ods.
Separate instructions not being executed into different
tasks.
Consider using jump instructions for areas in the task that
are not executed.
Prohibit cycle refreshing with Special I/O Units that do not
require exchange of cycle data.
Error flag Cycle Time Too Long Error, A401.08
Error code (A400) 809F
Error information ---
481
Errors Created with FALS Instructions
9-2-4 CPU Errors
CPU Unit Indicators
A CPU error or fatal error may have occurred if the ERR/ALM indicator lights
during operation (RUN mode or MONITOR mode), the RUN indicator turns
OFF, and operation stops. A CPU error may have occurred if nothing is shown
on the 7-segment display or the same message remains on the display.
CPU Errors
Note Just as when a CPU error occurs, the RUN indicator will turn OFF and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when a fatal error occurs. Connecting the CX-
Programmer, however, is possible for fatal errors but not for CPU errors. If the
CX-Programmer cannot be connected (online), a CPU error has probably
occurred.
FALS instruction executed (FALS number 001) C100 hex will be added to the FALS number (001 to 1FF hex)
and the result will be stored in A400 as the error code (C100 to
C2FF hex).
Check the conditions for executing FALS instructions and
remove any causes for the user-defined error.
Error flag FALS Error Flag, A401.06
Error code (A400) C101 to C2FF
POWER Lit
RUN Not lit
ERR/ALM Lit
INH ---
BKUP ---
PRPHL ---
POWER
RUN
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
ERR/AL
A WDT (watchdog) error occurred in the
CPU Unit. (This does not occur in normal
use.)
Cycle the power supply. The Unit may be
faulty. Consult your OMRON representa-
tive.
Error flag None
Error code (A400) None
Error information None
482
9-2-5 Non-fatal Errors
A non-fatal error has occurred if both the RUN indicator and the ERR/ALM
indicator are lit during operation (i.e., in RUN or MONITOR mode).
CPU Unit Indicators
Information on the non-fatal error can be obtained from the error code on the
7-segment display and from the Error Tab Page of the CX-Programmers PLC
Error Window. Take corrective actions after checking error details using the
display messages and the Auxiliary Area Error Flags and error information.
Errors are listed in the following table in order, with the most serious ones
first.
If two or more errors occur at the same time, the most serious error code
will be stored in A400.
Errors Created with for FAL Instructions
A FAL instruction was executed in the program to create a non-fatal error.
Flash Memory Errors
POWER Lit
RUN Lit
ERR/ALM Flashing
INH ---
BKUP ---
PRPHL ---
POWER
RUN
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
ERR/AL
The executed FAL number 001 to 511 will
be stored in A360 to A391. The number 4
will be added to the front of 101 to 2FF
(which correspond to executed FAL num-
bers 001 to 511) and the result will be
stored in A400 as error code 4101 to
42FF.
Check the conditions for executing FAL
instructions and remove any causes of
the user-defined error.
Error flag FAL Error Flag, A402.15
Error code (A400) 4101 to 42FF
A315.15 will turn ON when writing to the
internal flash memory fails.
Replace the CPU Unit when the internal
flash memory has been written to more
than 100,000 times.
Error flag Flash Memory Error Flag, A315.15
Other non-fatal flags, A402.00
Error code (A400) None
483
Interrupt Task Errors
PLC Setup Errors
Option Board Errors
Battery Error
An interrupt task error occurs when the
Detect Interrupt task errors setting in the
PLC Setup is set to Detect and an attempt
is made to refresh a Special I/O Unit from
an interrupt task with IORF(097) while the
Units I/O is being refreshed by cyclic
refreshing (duplicate refreshing).
Review the program to see whether detect-
ing interrupt task errors can be disabled or
avoided.
Error flag Interrupt Task Error Flag, A402.13
Error code (A400) 008B
Error information Interrupt Task Error, A426
A set value error occurred in the PLC
Setup.
The address of the error is stored in A406
in 16-bit binary.
Correct the PLC Setup with correct val-
ues.
Error flag PLC Setup Error Flag, A402.10
Error code (A400) 009B
Error information PLC Setup error location, A406
A315.13 will turn ON if the Option Board
is removed while the power is being sup-
plied.
Turn OFF the power supply and then
install the Option Board again.
Error flags Option Board Error Flag, A315.13
Other Non-fatal Error Flag, A402.00
Error code (A400) ---
If the PLC Setup is set to detect battery
errors, this error will occur when there is
an error in the battery in the CPU Unit
(i.e., the voltage is low or a battery is not
mounted).
Check the battery connections.
When using battery-free operation, dis-
able connecting battery errors in the PLC
Setup.
Error flag Battery Error Flag, A402.04
484
9-2-6 Other Errors
Communications Errors
CPU Unit Indicators
POWER Lit
RUN Lit
ERR/ALM ---
INH ---
PRPHL ---
BKUP Not lit
An error has occurred in the communica-
tions between the peripheral port and con-
nected device.
Confirm that the peripheral port settings in
the PLC Setup are correct.
Check the USB cable and replace it if neces-
sary.
An error has occurred in the communica-
tions between the serial port and connected
device.
Confirm that the serial port 1/2 settings in
the PLC Setup are correct. Check the cable
wiring. If a host computer is connected,
check the serial port settings and program in
the host computer.
POWER
RUN
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
ERR/AL
485
Error Log Section 9-3
9-3 Error Log
Each time an error occurs, the CPU Unit stores error information in the Error
Log Area of the Auxiliary Area (A100 to A199). The error information includes
the error code (stored in A400), error contents, and time that the error
occurred. Up to 20 records can be stored in the Error Log.
In addition to system-generated errors, the CPU Unit records user-defined
errors, making it easier to track the operating status of the system.
When more than 20 errors occur, the oldest error data (stored in A100 to
A104) is deleted, the 19 errors stored in A105 to A199 shift one record, and
the newest record is stored in A195 to A199.
The number of records stored in the error log is stored in the Error Log Pointer
(A300). The Error Log Pointer is not incremented after 20 records have been
stored.
Error code
Error Log Area
Error code
Error contents
Error code
Error contents
Error code
Error contents
Order of
occurrence
Minute, second
Minute, second
Day, hour
Day, hour
Year, month
Minute, second
Day, hour
Year, month
Year, month
Time of
occurrence
Time of
occurrence
Time of
occurrence
Error Log Pointer (error counter)
486
Troubleshooting Unit Errors Section 9-4
9-4 Troubleshooting Unit Errors
CPU Unit
Inputs
Symptom Cause Remedy
POWER indicator is not lit. PCB short-circuited or damaged. Replace Unit.
RUN indicator is not lit. (1) Error in program (fatal error) Correct program.
(2) Power line is faulty. Replace Unit.
RUN indicator on the CPU Unit is lit. Internal circuitry in the Unit is faulty.
Bits do not operate past a certain point.
Error occurs in units of 8 or 16 points.
I/O bit turns ON.
All bits in one Unit do not turn ON.
Not all inputs turn ON or indi-
cators are not lit.
(1) External power is not supplied for the
input.
Supply power
(2) Supply voltage is low. Adjust supply voltage to within rated range.
(3) Terminal block mounting screws are
loose.
Tighten screws.
(4) Faulty contact of terminal block connec-
tor.
Replace terminal block connector.
Not all inputs turn ON even
though the indicator is lit.
Input circuit is faulty. (There is a short at the
load or something else that caused an over-
current to flow.)
Replace Unit.
Not all inputs turn OFF. Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
Specific bit does not turn ON. (1) Input device is faulty. Replace input devices.
(2) Input wiring disconnected. Check input wiring
(3) Terminal block screws are loose. Tighten screws
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
(5) Too short ON time of external input. Adjust input device
(6) Faulty input circuit Replace Unit.
(7) Input bit number is used for output
instruction.
Correct program.
Specific bit does not turn
OFF.
(1) Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
(2) Input bit number is used for output
instruction.
Correct program.
Input irregularly turns ON/
OFF.
(1) External input voltage is low or unstable. Adjust external input voltage to within rated
range.
(2) Malfunction due to noise. Take protective measures against noise,
such as:
Install surge suppressor.
Install insulation transformer.
Install shielded cables between the Input
Unit and the loads.
Error occurs in units of
8 points or 16 points, i.e., for
the same common.
(1) Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten screws
(3) Faulty data bus Replace Unit.
(4) Faulty CPU Replace CPU Unit.
Input indicator is not lit in nor-
mal operation.
Faulty indicator or indicator circuit. Replace Unit.
487
Outputs
Not all outputs turn ON (1) Load is not supplied with power. Supply power
(2) Load voltage is low. Adjust voltage to within rated range.
(5) An overcurrent (possibly caused by a
short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse for the output or the Unit is faulty.
Replace fuse or Unit.
(6) Faulty I/O bus connector contact. Replace Unit.
(7) Output circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
(8) If the INH indicator is lit, the Output OFF
Bit (A500.15) is ON.
Turn A500.15 OFF.
Not all outputs turn OFF Output circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
Output of a specific bit num-
ber does not turn ON or indi-
cator is not lit
(1) Output ON time too short because of a
mistake in programming.
Correct program to increase the time that
the output is ON.
(2) Bit status controlled by multiple instruc-
tions.
Correct program so that each output bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
(3) Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
ber does not turn ON (indica-
tor lit).
(1) Faulty output device. Replace output device.
(2) Break in output wiring. Check output wiring.
(3) Loose terminal block screws. Tighten screws.
(4) Faulty terminal block connector faulty. Replace terminal block connector.
(5) Faulty output bit (relay output only). Replace Unit.
(6) Faulty output circuit (relay output only). Replace Unit.
ber does not turn OFF (indi-
cator is not lit).
(1) Faulty output bit. Replace Unit.
(2) Bit does not turn OFF due to leakage
current or residual voltage.
Replace external load or add dummy resis-
tor.
ber does not turn OFF (indi-
cator lit).
tions.
Correct program.
(2) Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
Output irregularly turns ON/
OFF.
(1) Low or unstable load voltage. Adjust load voltage to within rated range
tions.
Correct program so that each output bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
(3) Malfunction due to noise. Protective measures against noise:
Install surge suppressor.
Install insulation transformer.
Use shielded cables between the output
terminal and the load.
(4) Terminal block screws are loose. Tighten screws.
Error occurs in units of
8 points or 16 points, i.e., for
the same common.
(1) Loose common terminal screw. Tighten screws.
(3) An overcurrent (possibly caused by a
short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse for the output or the Unit is faulty.
Replace fuse or Unit.
(4) Faulty data bus. Replace Unit.
(5) Faulty CPU. Replace CPU Unit.
Output indicator is not lit
(operation is normal).
Faulty indicator. Replace Unit.
488
489
SECTION 10
Inspection and Maintenance
This section provides inspection and maintenance information.
10-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
10-1-1 Inspection Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
10-1-2 Unit Replacement Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
10-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
490
Inspections Section 10-1
10-1 Inspections
Daily or periodic inspections are required in order to maintain the PLCs func-
tions in peak operating condition.
10-1-1 Inspection Points
Although the major components in CP-series PLCs have an extremely long
life time, they can deteriorate under improper environmental conditions. Peri-
odic inspections are thus required to ensure that the required conditions are
being kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more
frequent inspections will be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the fol-
lowing table are not met.
No. Item Inspection Criteria Action
1 Source Power
Supply
Check for voltage fluctuations
at the power supply terminals.
The voltage must be within
the allowable voltage fluctu-
ation range.
(See note.)
Use a voltage tester to check the
power supply at the terminals. Take
necessary steps to bring voltage
fluctuations within limits.
2 I/O Power Sup-
ply
Check for voltage fluctuations
at the I/O terminals.
Voltages must be within
specifications for each Unit.
Use a voltage tester to check the
power supply at the terminals. Take
necessary steps to bring voltage
fluctuations within limits.
3 Ambient environ-
ment
Check the ambient tempera-
ture (inside the control panel if
the PLC is in a control panel).
0 to 55C Use a thermometer to check the
temperature and ensure that the
ambient temperature remains
within the allowed range of 0 to
55C.
Check the ambient humidity
(inside the control panel if the
PLC is in a control panel).
Relative humidity must be
10% to 90% with no con-
densation.
Use a hygrometer to check the
humidity and ensure that the ambi-
ent humidity remains within the
allowed range.
Check that the PLC is not in
direct sunlight.
Not in direct sunlight Protect the PLC if necessary.
Check for accumulation of
dirt, dust, salt, metal filings,
etc.
No accumulation Clean and protect the PLC if neces-
sary.
Check for water, oil, or chemi-
cal sprays hitting the PLC.
No spray on the PLC Clean and protect the PLC if neces-
sary.
Check for corrosive or flam-
mable gases in the area of the
PLC.
No corrosive or flammable
gases
Check by smell or use a sensor.
Check the level of vibration or
shock.
Vibration and shock must
be within specifications.
Install cushioning or shock absorb-
ing equipment if necessary.
Check for noise sources near
the PLC.
No significant noise
sources
Either separate the PLC and noise
source or protect the PLC.
491
Inspections Section 10-1
Note The following table shows the allowable voltage fluctuation ranges for source
power supplies.
Tools Required for Inspections
Required Tools
Phillips screwdrivers
Voltage tester or digital voltmeter
Industrial alcohol and clean cotton cloth
Tools Required Occasionally
Synchroscope
Oscilloscope with pen plotter
Thermometer and hygrometer
10-1-2 Unit Replacement Precautions
Check the following when replacing any faulty Unit.
Do not replace a Unit until the power is turned OFF.
Check the new Unit to make sure that there are no errors.
If a faulty Unit is being returned for repair, describe the problem in as
much detail as possible, enclose this description with the Unit, and return
the Unit to your OMRON representative.
For poor contact, take a clean cotton cloth, soak the cloth in industrial
alcohol, and carefully wipe the contacts clean. Be sure to remove any lint
prior to remounting the Unit.
Note When replacing a CPU Unit, be sure that not only the user program but also
all other data required for operation is transferred to or set in the new CPU
Unit before starting operation, including DM Area and HR Area settings. If
4 Installation and
wiring
Check that each Unit is con-
nected securely and locked in
place.
No looseness Press the connectors together
completely and lock them with the
sliders.
Check that the Option Boards
and cable connectors are fully
inserted and locked.
No looseness Correct any improperly installed
connectors.
Check for loose screws in
external wiring.
No looseness Tighten loose screws with a Phillips
screwdriver.
Check crimp connectors in
external wiring.
Adequate spacing between
connectors
Check visually and adjust if neces-
sary.
Check for damaged external
wiring cables.
No damage Check visually and replace cables if
necessary.
5 User-service-
able parts
Check whether the battery
has reached its service life.
CJ1W-BAT01 Battery
Service life expectancy is 5
years at 25C, less at
higher temperatures.
(From 0.75 to 5 years
depending on model,
power supply rate, and
ambient temperature.)
Replace the battery when its ser-
vice life has passed even if a bat-
tery error has not occurred.
CPU Unit Supply voltage Allowable voltage range
CP1L-M@@DR-A
CP1L-L@@DR-A
100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC
(+10%/15%)
CP1L-M@@D@-D
CP1L-L@@D@-D
24 V DC 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
(+10%/15%)
No. Item Inspection Criteria Action
492
Replacing User-serviceable Parts Section 10-2
data area and other data are not correct for the user program, unexpected
accidents may occur.
10-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts
The following parts should be replaced periodically as preventative mainte-
nance. The procedures for replacing these parts are described later in this
section.
Battery (backup for the CPU Units internal clock and RAM)
Battery Functions The battery maintains the internal clock and the following data of the CPU
Units RAM while the main power supply is OFF.
Retained regions of I/O memory (such as the Holding Area and DM Area)
If the battery is not installed or battery voltage drops too low, the internal clock
will stop and the data in RAM will be lost when the main power supply goes
OFF.
Battery Service Life and
Replacement Period
At 25C, the maximum service life for batteries is five years whether or not
power is supplied to the CPU Unit while the battery is installed. The batterys
lifetime will be shorter when it is used at higher temperatures.
The following table shows the approximate minimum lifetimes and typical life-
times for the backup battery (total time with power not supplied).
Note The minimum lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature
of 55C. The typical lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temper-
ature of 25C.
Model Approx.
maximum lifetime
Approx. minimum
lifetime (See note.)
Typical lifetime
(See note.)
CP1L-M@@D@-D
CP1L-L@@D@-D
5 years 13,000 hours
(approx. 1.5 years)
43,000 hours
(approx. 5 years)
Memory Backup Time
Ambient temperature
This graphic is for reference only.
5 yr
4 yr
3 yr
2 yr
1 yr
CP1L CPU Unit
25C 40C 55C
493
Low Battery Indications The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash when the bat-
tery is nearly discharged.
When the ERR/ALM indicator flashes, connect the CX-Programmer to the
peripheral port and read the error messages. If a low battery message
appears on the CX-Programmer (see note 1) and the Battery Error Flag
(A402.04) is ON (see note 1), first check whether the battery is properly con-
nected to the CPU Unit. If the battery is properly connected, replace the bat-
tery as soon as possible.
Once a low-battery error has been detected, it will take 5 days before the bat-
tery fails assuming that power has been supplied at lease once a day (see
note 2). Battery failure and the resulting loss of data in RAM can be delayed
by ensuring that the CPU Unit power is not turned OFF until the battery has
been replaced.
Note 1. The PLC Setup must be set to detect a low-battery error (Detect Low Bat-
tery). If this setting has not been made, the BATT LOW error message will
not appear on the CX-Programmer and the Battery Error Flag (A402.04)
will not go ON when the battery fails.
2. The battery will discharge faster at higher temperatures, e.g., 4 days at
40C and 2 days at 55C.
Replacement Battery Use the CJ1W-BAT01 Battery Set. Be sure to install a replacement battery
within two years of the production date shown on the batterys label.
Replacement Procedure Use the following procedure to replace the battery when the previous battery
has become completely discharged. You must complete this procedure within
five minutes after turning OFF the power to the CPU Unit to ensure memory
backup.
Note 1. We recommend replacing the battery with the power OFF to prevent the
CPU Units sensitive internal components from being damaged by static
electricity. The battery can be replaced without turning OFF the power sup-
ply. To do so, always touch a grounded piece of metal to discharge static
electricity from your body before starting the procedure.
2. After replacing the battery, connect the CX-Programmer and clear the bat-
tery error.
ERR/ALM indicator

CJ1W-BAT01
05-07
Production Date
Manufactured in July 2005.
494
Procedure
1,2,3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit.
or If the CPU Unit has not been ON, turn it ON for at least five minutes and
then turn it OFF.
Note If power is not turned ON for at least five minutes before replacing the
battery, the capacitor that backs up memory when the battery is re-
moved will not be fully charged and memory may be lost before the
new battery is inserted.
2. Open the compartment on the CPU Unit and carefully draw out the battery.
3. Remove the battery connector.
4. Connect the new battery, place it into the compartment, and close the cov-
er.

!WARNING Never short-circuit the battery terminals; never charge the battery; never dis-
assemble the battery; and never heat or incinerate the battery. Doing any of
these may cause the battery to leak, burn, or rupturing resulting in injury, fire,
and possible loss of life or property. Also, never use a battery that has been
dropped on the floor or otherwise subject to shock. It may leak.
!Caution You must complete this procedure within five minutes after turning OFF the
power to the CPU Unit to ensure memory backup. If the procedure is not com-
pleted within 5 minutes, data may be lost.
!Caution UL standards require that batteries be replaced by experienced technicians.
Always place an experienced technician in charge or battery replacement.
495
!Caution Turn ON the power after replacing the battery for a CPU Unit that has been
unused for a long time. Leaving the CPU Unit unused again without turning
ON the power even once after the battery is replaced may result in a shorter
battery life.
Note The battery error will automatically be cleared when a new battery is inserted.
496
497
Appendix A
Standard Models
CPU Units
Name and
appearance
Model Specifications Remarks
Power
supply
Outputs Inputs
CPU Units with 14
I/O Points
CP1L-L14DR-A 100 to
240 VAC
6 relay outputs 24 VDC
8 inputs
Memory capacity: 5 Ksteps
High-speed counters:
100 kHz, 4 counters
Pulse outputs:
2 axes at 100 kHz
CP1L-L14DR-D 24 VDC 6 relay outputs
CP1L-L14DT-D 6 transistor out-
puts, sinking
CP1L-L14DT1-D 6 transistor out-
puts, sourcing
CP1L-J14DR-A 100 to
240 VAC
8 inputs
Memory capacity:
1 Ksteps
20 kHz, 4 counters
Pulse outputs:
2 axes at 20 kHz
CP1L-J14DR-D 24VDC 6 relay outputs
CP1L-J14DT1-D 6 transistor out-
puts,sourcing
CPU Units with 20
I/O Points
CP1L-L20DR-A 100 to
240 VAC
12 inputs
100 kHz, 4 counters
Pulse outputs:
2 axes at 100 kHz
CP1L-L20DR-D 24 VDC 8 relay outputs
CP1L-L20DT-D 8 transistor out-
puts, sinking
CP1L-L20DT1-D 8 transistor out-
puts, sourcing
CP1L-J20DR-A 100 to
240 VAC
12 inputs
Memory capacity:
1 Ksteps
20 kHz, 4 counters
Pulse outputs:
2 axes at 20 kHz
CP1L-J20DR-D 24VDC 8 relay outputs
CP1L-J20DT1-D 8 transistor out-
puts,sourcing
CPU Units with 30
I/O Points
CP1L-M30DR-A 100 to
240 VAC
18 inputs
100 kHz, 4 counters
Pulse outputs:
2 axes at 100 kHz
CP1L-M30DR-D 24 VDC 12 relay outputs
CP1L-M30DT-D 12 transistor
outputs, sinking
CP1L-M30DT1-D 12 transistor
outputs, sourc-
ing
CPU Units with 40
I/O Points
CP1L-M40DR-A 100 to
240 VAC
24 inputs
CP1L-M40DR-D 24 VDC 16 relay outputs
CP1L-M40DT-D 16 transistor
outputs, sinking
CP1L-M40DT1-D 16 transistor
outputs, sourc-
ing
498
Standard Models Appendix A
Programming Devices
Optional Products
Expansion I/O Units
Name and
appearance
Model Application Remarks
CX-Programmer
Ver. 7.1
WS02-CXPC1-E-
V71
Programming and monitoring
from a Windows environment
The CP1L L or M model is supported by
CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher.
The CP1L J model is supported by CX-
Programmer version 7.22 or higher.
Use an off-the-shelf USB cable to connect
the computer running the CX-Program-
mer to the USB port on the CP1L CPU
Unit.
Name and appearance Model Application Remarks
RS-232C Option Board CP1W-CIF01 Mounted in option slot 1 or 2 on the CPU
Unit to function as an RS-232C port.
---
RS-422A/485 Option
Board
CP1W-CIF11 Mounted in option slot 1 or 2 on the CPU
Unit to function as an RS-422A/485 port.
Memory Cassette CP1W-ME05M Used to save CPU Unit user programming,
parameters, and data or to copy these to
another CPU Unit.
---
Name and
appearance
Inputs Outputs
40-point I/O Units CP1W-40EDR
CPM1A-40EDR
24 inputs
---
CP1W-40EDT
CPM1A-40EDT
16 transistor outputs,
sinking
CP1W-40EDT1
CPM1A-40EDT1
sourcing
20-point I/O Units CP1W-20EDR1
CPM1A-20EDR1
12 inputs
---
CP1W-20EDT
CPM1A-20EDT
8 transistor outputs, sink-
ing
CP1W-20EDT1
CPM1A-20EDT1
sourcing
16-point I/O Units CP1W-16ER
CPM1A-16ER
16 relay outputs None ---
COMM
COMM
MEMORY
OUT
00
CH
CH
01 02 03 05 07
OUT
COM NC COM COM 04 06 COM
COM 01 03 COM 06 NC
00 02 04 05 07 NC
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
16ER
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
NC
NC
NC
CH EXP

499
Expansion Units
8-point Input Units CP1W-8ED
CPM1A-8ED
None 24 VDC
8 inputs
---
8-point Output Units CP1W-8ER
CPM1A-8ER
8 relay outputs None ---
CP1W-8ET
CPM1A-8ET
8 transistor outputs, sink-
ing
CP1W-8ET1
CPM1A-8ET1
sourcing
Name and appearance Model Specifications Remarks
Analog I/O Unit CPM1A-MAD01 2 analog inputs
0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA
1 analog output
0 to 10 V, 10 to +10 V, 4 to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/256
---
Analog I/O Unit CP1W-MAD11
CPM1A-MAD11
2 analog inputs
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 10 to +10 V, 0 to
20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
1 analog output
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 10 to +10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to
20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
---
Analog Input Unit CP1W-AD041
CPM1A-AD041
4 analog inputs
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 10 to +10 V, 0 to
20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
---
Analog Output Unit CP1W-DA041
CPM1A-DA041
4 analog outputs
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, 10 to +10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to
20 mA
Resolution: 1/6,000
---
Temperature Sensor
Units
CP1W-TS001
CPM1A-TS001
Thermocouple inputs K or J, 2 inputs ---
CP1W-TS002
CPM1A-TS002
Thermocouple inputs K or J, 4 inputs ---
CP1W-TS101
CPM1A-TS101
Platinum resistance thermometer inputs Pt100
or JPt100, 2 inputs
---
CP1W-TS102
CPM1A-TS102
Platinum resistance thermometer inputs Pt100
or JPt100, 4 inputs
---
Name and
appearance
Inputs Outputs
CH
I IN1 I IN3
I IN2 VIN1
VIN2
VIN3 COM1
COM2
I IN4
VIN4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
IN

CH
I OUT1 I OUT3
I OUT2 VOUT1
VOUT2
VOUT3 COM1
COM2
I OUT4
VOUT4 COM4
NC
AG
COM3
OUT

500
Maintenance Products
Installation and Wiring Products
DeviceNet I/O Link Unit CPM1A-DRT21 As a DeviceNet Slave, 32 inputs and 32 outputs are allocated.
CompoBus/S I/O Link
Unit
CP1W-SRT21
CPM1A-SRT21
As a CompoBus/S slave, 8 inputs and 8 outputs are allocated.
Battery CJ1W-BAT01 --- Installed in the
CPU Unit.
DIN Track PFP-50N --- ---
PFP-100N ---
PFP-100N2 ---
End Plate PFP-M ---
I/O Connecting Cable CP1W-CN811 Used to install CP-series/CPM1A-series Expansion
Units and Expansion I/O Units in a second row.
Only one I/O Connecting Cable can be used in each
PLC.
---
501
Appendix B
Dimensions Diagrams
CP1L CPU Units
90 100 110
76
86
8
85
Four, 4.5 dia.

90 100 110
120
130
8
85
Four, 4.5 dia.
90 100 110
140
150
8
85
Four, 4.5 dia.
502
Dimensions Diagrams Appendix B
Optional Products
CP1W-CIF01/CIF11 Option Boards
CP1W-ME05M Memory Cassette
35.9
3
7
.
3
3
5
.
9
5
.
1
16.5
16.5
0.15
13.5
19.7

35.9
3
7
.
3
3
5
.
9
8
.
9
15.7
16.5
0.15
13.5
16.5

18.6
18
14.7
9
.
4
7
.
5
0
.
8
1
6
.
8

503
Expansion I/O Units
40-point I/O Units (CP1W/CPM1A-40EDR/40EDT/40EDT1)
20-point I/O Units (CP1W/CPM1A-20EDR1/20EDT/20EDT1)

50
8
CH
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM
00 02 04 06 08 10
00 01 02 04 05 07 00 02 04 05 07
00 02 04 06 08 10
01 03 05 07 09 11 01 03 05 07 09 11
IN
40EDR
OUT
CH CH
CH CH EXP
CH
CH
CH
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 110 100 90
140
150

Four, 4.5 dia.
holes

50
8
IN
00
CH
CH
02 04 06 08 10
OUT
01 COM 03 05 07 09 11
00 01 02 04 05 07
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11
20EDR1
CH 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
NC
NC
NC
CH EXP
90
5
5
86

Two, 4.5 dia.
holes
1000.2
760.2
504
16-point Output Unit (CP1W/CPM1A-16ER)
8-point I/O Units (CP1W/CPM1A-8ER/8ET/8ET1)

90 1000.2
5
5 760.2

86

50
8
Two,
4.5 dia.
50
8
IN
00 02
01 COM 03
COM 05 07
04 06
CH 00 01 02 03
08 09 10 11
8ED
EXP
Two, 4.5 dia.
holes
90

5
5
66

1000.2
560.2
505
Expansion Units
CPM1A-MAD01/
CP1W/CPM1A/MAD11 Analog I/O Units
CP1W/CPM1A-TS@@@ Temperature Sensor Units
50
8
IN OUT
V OUT COM I IN1 V IN2 COM2
I OUT V IN1 COM1 I IN2
MAD01
CH CH EXP
90
5
5
66
NC NC
90
5
5
86

Two, 4.5 dia. holes
1000.2
560.2
760.2
1000.2
Two, 4.5 dia. holes
50
8
90
5
5
86

Two, 4.5 dia.
holes
1000.2
760.2
506
CPM1A-DRT21 DeviceNet I/O Link Unit
CP1W/CPM1A-SRT21 CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit
50
8
90
5
5
66

Two, 4.5 dia.
holes
1000.2
560.2
BD L NC(BS-) NC
BD H NC(BS+)
S
COMM
ERR
No.
SRT21
EXP
50
8
90
5
5
66

Two, 4.5 dia.
holes
1000.2
560.2
507
Appendix C
Auxiliary Area Allocations by Function
Initial Settings
CPU Unit Settings
DM Initial Value Settings
Name Address Description Access Updated
IOM Hold Bit A500.12 Turn this bit ON to retain the status of the I/O Memory when shift-
ing from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice versa or
when turning ON the power supply.
ON: I/O memory retained
OFF: I/O memory not retained
Read/write
Forced Status Hold
BIt
A500.13 Turn this bit ON to preserve the status of bits that have been force-
set or force-reset when shifting from PROGRAM to MONITOR
mode or vice versa or when turning ON the power supply.
Read/write
Status of DIP
Switch Pin 6
A395.12 The status of pin 6 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit
is written to this flag every cycle.
Read-only
Manufacturing Lot
Number
A310 and
A311
The manufacturing lot number is stored in 5 digits hexadecimal. X,
Y, and Z in the lot number are converted to 10, 11, and 12,
respectively.
Examples:
Lot number 23805
A310 = 0823, A311 = 0005
Lot number 15X05
A310 =1015, A311 = 0005
Read-only
DM Initial Values
Flag
A345.04 ON when DM initial values are stored in the flash memory. Read-only
DM Initial Values
Read Error Flag
A751.11 ON when an error occurred in transferring DM initial values from
the DM initial value area in flash memory to the DM Area.
Read-only
DM Initial Values
Save Execution
Error Flag
A751.12 ON when the DM Initial Values Transfer Password (A752) is
incorrect or when the DM Initial values area was not specified
when starting to transfer DM initial values from the DM Area to
the DM initial value area in flash memory.
Read-only
DM Initial Values
Save Error Flag
A751.13 ON when an error occurred in transferring DM initial values from
the DM Area to the DM initial value area in flash memory.
Read-only
DM Initial Values
Save Flag
A751.14 ON while DM initial values are being transferred from the DM
Area to the DM initial value area in flash memory.
OFF when the transfer has been completed.
Read-only
DM Initial Values
Save Start Bit
A751.15 Turn ON this bit to start transferring DM initial values. This bit is
valid only when a correct password is stored in A752 and the DM
Area Initial Value Area is specified (i.e., when A753.00 is ON).
The system will turn this bit OFF automatically when the transfer
has been completed.
Read/Write
DM Initial Values
Transfer Password
A752 Set the passwords here to transfer DM initial values between the
DM area and the DM initial value area in flash memory. The
transfer will not be started unless the correct password is set.
The transfer is started when A751.15 is turned ON.
The password will be cleared by the system when the transfer
has been completed.
A5A5 hex: Save initial values from DM to flash
Read/Write
DM Initial Values
Save Area Specifi-
cations
A753.00 Specifies the area to be transferred to flash memory. Read/Write
508
Auxiliary Area Allocations by Function Appendix C
Built-in Inputs
Analog Adjustment and External Analog Setting Input
Input Interrupts, Interrupt Counters 0 to 5
High-speed Counters 0 to 3
Analog Adjustment
PV
A642 Stores the value set on the analog adjuster as a hexadecimal
value (resolution: 1/256).
0000 to 00FF hex
Read-only When analog
adjustment is
turned
External Analog
Setting Input PV
A643 Stores the value set from the external analog setting input as a
hexadecimal value (resolution: 1/256).
0000 to 00FF hex
Read-only
Interrupt counter Counter SV Counter PV
Interrupt counter 0 A532 A536
Name Description Access Updated
Interrupt Counter
Counter SV
Used for an interrupt input in counter mode.
Sets the count value at which the interrupt task will start. The corre-
sponding interrupt task will start when the interrupt counter has
counted this number of pulses.
Read/Write Retained when power is
turned ON.
Retained when opera-
tion starts.
Interrupt Counter
Counter PV
These words contain the interrupt counter PVs for interrupt inputs
operating in counter mode.
In increment mode, the counter PV starts incrementing from 0.
When the counter PV reaches the counter SV, the PV is automati-
cally reset to 0.
In decrement mode, the counter PV starts decrementing from the
counter SV. When the counter PV reaches the 0, the PV is automat-
ically reset to the SV.
Read/Write Retained when power is
turned ON.
Cleared when operation
starts.
Updated when interrupt
is generated.
Item High-speed
counter 0
High-speed
counter 1
High-speed
counter 2
High-speed
counter 3
High-speed Counter PV Leftmost 4 digits A271 A273 A317 A319
Rightmost 4 digits A270 A272 A316 A318
High-speed Counter Range
Comparison Condition Met Flag
Range 1 A274.00 A275.00 A320.00 A321.00
Range 2 A274.01 A275.01 A320.01 A321.01
Range 3 A274.02 A275.02 A320.02 A321.02
Range 4 A274.03 A275.03 A320.03 A321.03
Range 5 A274.04 A275.04 A320.04 A321.04
Range 6 A274.05 A275.05 A320.05 A321.05
Range 7 A274.06 A275.06 A320.06 A321.06
Range 8 A274.07 A275.07 A320.07 A321.07
High-speed Counter Comparison In-progress Flag A274.08 A275.08 A320.08 A321.08
High-speed Counter Overflow/Underflow Flag A274.09 A275.09 A320.09 A321.09
High-speed Counter Count Direction A274.10 A275.10 A320.10 A321.10
High-speed Counter Count Reset Bit A531.00 A531.01 A531.02 A531.03
High-speed Counter Gate Flag A531.08 A531.09 A531.10 A531.11
509
Built-in Outputs
Pulse Outputs 0, 1
Name Description Read/Write Updated
High-speed Counter PV Contains the PV of the high-speed counter. Read-only Cleared when power is turned ON.
Cleared when operation starts.
Updated each cycle during oversee-
ing process.
Updated when PRV(881) instruction
is executed for the corresponding
counter.
High-speed
Counter Range
Comparison
Condition Met
Flags
Range 1 These flags indicate whether the PV is within the
specified ranges when the high-speed counter is
being operated in range-comparison mode.
OFF: PV not in range
ON: PV in range
Read-only Cleared when power is turned ON.
Cleared when range comparison
table is registered.
Updated each cycle during oversee-
ing process.
Updated when PRV(881) instruction
is executed to read range compari-
son results.
Range 2
Range 3
Range 4
Range 5
Range 6
Range 7
Range 8
High-speed Counter Com-
parison In-progress Flag
This flag indicates whether a comparison operation
is being executed for the high-speed counter.
OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed.
Updated when comparison operation
starts or stops.
High-speed Counter Over-
flow/Underflow Flag
This flag indicates when an overflow or underflow
has occurred in the high-speed counter PV. (Used
with the linear mode counting range only.)
OFF: Normal
ON: Overflow or underflow
Cleared when the PV is changed.
Updated when an overflow or under-
flow occurs.
High-speed Counter
Count Direction
This flag indicates whether the high-speed counter
is currently being incremented or decremented. The
counter PV for the current cycle is compared with
the PLC in last cycle to determine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
Read-only Setting used for high-speed counter,
valid during counter operation.
High-speed Counter
Reset Bit
When the reset method is set to Phase-Z signal +
Software reset, the corresponding high-speed
counter's PV will be reset if the phase-Z signal is
received while this bit is ON.
When the reset method is set to a software reset,
the corresponding high-speed counter's PV will be
reset in the cycle when this bit goes ON.
Read/Write Cleared when power is turned ON.
High-speed Counter Gate
Bit
When a counter's Gate Bit is ON, the counter's PV
will not be changed even if pulse inputs are received
for the counter.
When the bit is turned OFF again, counting will
restart and the high-speed counter's PV will be
updated.
When the reset method is set to Phase-Z signal +
Software reset, the Gate Bit is disabled while the
corresponding Reset Bit is ON.
Read/Write Cleared when power is turned ON.
Item Pulse output
0
Pulse output
1
Pulse Output PV Leftmost 4 digits A277 A279
Pulse Output Accel/Decel Flag A280.00 A281.00
Pulse Output Overflow/Underflow Flag A280.01 A281.01
Pulse Output, Output Amount Set Flag A280.02 A281.02
Pulse Output, Output Completed Flag A280.03 A281.03
Pulse Output, Output In-progress Flag A280.04 A281.04
Pulse Output No-origin Flag A280.05 A281.05
Pulse Output At-origin Flag A280.06 A281.06
Pulse Output, Output Stopped Error Flag A280.07 A281.07
PWM Output, Output In-progress Flag A283.00 A283.08
510
Pulse Output Stop Error Code A444 A445
Pulse Output Reset Bit A540.00 A541.00
Pulse Output CW Limit Input Signal Flag A540.08 A541.08
Pulse Output CCW Limit Input Signal Flag A540.09 A541.09
Pulse Output Positioning Completed Signal A540.10 A541.10
Pulse Output PV Contain the number of pulses output from the correspond-
ing pulse output port. PV range: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF
hex (-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
When pulses are being output in the CW direction, the PV
is incremented by 1 for each pulse.
When pulses are being output in the CCW direction, the PV
is decremented by 1 for each pulse.
PV after overflow: 7FFF FFFF hex
PV after underflow: 8000 0000 hex
Note If the coordinate system uses relative coordinates
(undefined origin), the PV will be cleared to 0 when
a pulse output starts, i.e. when a pulse output
instruction (SPED(885), ACC(888), or PLS2(887))
is executed.
Read-only Cleared when power is turned
ON.
Updated each cycle during over-
see process.
Updated when the PV is
changed by the INI(880) instruc-
tion.
Pulse Output
Accel/Decel Flag
This flag will be ON when pulses are being output accord-
ing to an ACC(888) or PLS2(887) instruction and the output
frequency is being changed in steps (accelerating or decel-
erating).
OFF: Constant speed
ON: Accelerating or decelerating
ON.
Cleared when operation starts or
stops.
see process.
Pulse Output Over-
flow/Underflow Flag
This flag indicates when an overflow or underflow has
occurred in the pulse output PV.
OFF: Normal
ON.
Cleared when the PV is changed
by the INI(880) instruction.
Updated when an overflow or
underflow occurs.
Pulse Output, Output
Amount Set Flag
ON when the number of output pulses has been set with
the PULS(886) instruction.
OFF: No setting
ON: Setting made
ON.
stops.
Updated when the PULS(886)
instruction is executed.
Updated when pulse output
stops.
Completed Flag
ON when the number of output pulses set with the
PULS(886) or PLS2(887) instruction has been output.
OFF: Output not completed.
ON: Output completed.
ON.
stops.
Updated at the start or comple-
tion of pulse output in indepen-
dent mode.
In-progress Flag
ON when pulses are being output.
OFF: Stopped
ON: Outputting pulses.
ON.
stops.
starts or stops.
Pulse Output No-origin
Flag
ON when the origin has not been determined and goes
OFF when the origin has been determined.
OFF: Origin established.
ON: Origin not established.
ON.
starts or stops.
Updated each cycle during the
overseeing processes.
Pulse Output At-origin
Flag
ON when the pulse output PV matches the origin (0).
OFF: Not stopped at origin.
ON: Stopped at origin.
ON.
Updated each cycle during the
overseeing processes.
Item Pulse output
0
Pulse output
1
511
Inverter Positioning 0 and 1
Stopped Error Flag
ON when an error occurred while outputting pulses in the
pulse output 0 origin search function.
OFF: No error
ON: Stop error occurred.
ON.
Updated when origin search
starts.
Updated when a pulse output
stop error occurs.
PWM Output, Output
In-progress Flag
ON when pulses are being output from the PWM output.
OFF: Stopped
ON.
stops.
starts or stops.
Pulse Output Stop
Error Code
If a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs, the error code is writ-
ten to this word.
ON.
Updated when origin search
starts.
Updated when a pulse output
stop error occurs.
Pulse Output Reset Bit The pulse output PV will be cleared when this bit is turned
ON.
Read/Write Cleared when power is turned
ON.
Pulse Output CW Limit
Input Signal Flag
This is the CW limit input signal for the pulse output, which
is used in the origin search. To use this signal, write the
input from the actual sensor as an input condition in the lad-
der program and output the result to this flag.
ON.
Pulse Output CCW
Limit Input Signal Flag
This is the CCW limit input signal for the pulse output,
which is used in the origin search. To use this signal, write
the input from the actual sensor as an input condition in the
ladder program and output the result to this flag.
ON.
Pulse Output Position-
ing Completed Signal
This is the positioning completed input signal used in the
origin search for the pulse output. The input signal from the
servo driver is output to this bit from the ladder program to
enable using the signal.
ON.
Item Inverter
positioning 0
Inverter
positioning 1
Inverter Frequency Command Value A23 A33
Present Value of Unsigned Output
Value
Present Value of Signed Output
Value
Operation Command Flag A26.00 A36.00
Forward Operation Command Flag A26.01 A36.01
Reverse Operation Command Flag A26.02 A36.02
In-position Flag A26.03 A36.03
Error Counter Error Flag A26.04 A36.04
Error Counter Pulse Output Flag A26.05 A36.05
Error Counter Pulse Output Acceleration/Deceleration Flag A26.06 A36.06
Error Counter Alarm Flag A26.07 A36.07
Inverter Positioning Output Value Sign Flag A26.15 A36.15
Error Counter Present Value, Signed A22 A32
Present Value of Pulse Output to
Inverter, Relative Value
Error Counter Reset Bit A562.00 A563.00
Error Counter Disable Bit A562.01 A563.01
Present Value of High-speed
Counter
Present Value of Internal Pulse Out-
put
512
Inverter Fre-
quency Com-
mand Value
This word contains the automatically calculated fre-
quency command value for the inverter.
Data range: 0000 to FFFF hex (0.00 to 655.35 Hz) (0.01-
Hz increments, unsigned)
Set the Power Supply Frequency for One Motor Revolu-
tion per Second, Number of Encoder Pulses for One
Motor Revolution, and Error Counter Cycle in the PLC
Setup before using this value.
Cleared when an error occurs in
the error counter.
Updated each error counter cycle.
Present Value of
Unsigned Output
Value
These words contain the present value of the unsigned
output value (output value = present value of error
counter error counter cycle (s) gain).
Data range: 0000 0000 to 8000 0000 hex
(0 to 2,147,483,648)
The maximum and minimum output values are applied.
the error counter.
Present Value of
Signed Output
Value
These words contain the present value of the signed out-
put value (output value = present value of error counter
error counter cycle (s) gain).
Data range: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF hex
(214,748,348 to 214,748,347)
The maximum and minimum output values are applied.
the error counter.
Operation Com-
mand Flag
This flag turns ON during an inverter positioning opera-
tion command.
ON: Operation command executed.
OFF: Stop command executed.
Read Turned OFF when power is turned
ON.
Turned OFF when operation starts.
Turned OFF when CPU Unit opera-
tion stops.
Turned OFF when inverter posi-
tioning is stopped (immediate stop)
using INI instruction.
Forward Operation
Command Flag
This flag turns ON during an inverter positioning forward
operation command.
ON: Forward command in progress
OFF: Reverse command in progress or stopped
ON.
tion starts.
tion stops.
Turned OFF when error counter
present value is 0 or less than 0
(negative).
Turned ON when error counter
present value is greater than 0
(positive).
Reverse Opera-
tion Command
Flag
This flag turns ON during an inverter positioning reverse
operation command.
ON: Reverse command in progress
OFF: Forward command in progress or stopped
ON.
tion starts.
tion stops.
present value is 0 or greater than 0
(positive).
Turned ON when error counter
present value is less than 0 (nega-
tive).
In-position Flag This flag turns ON when inverter positioning is in position.
ON: In position
OFF: Not in position
ON.
tion starts.
tion stops.
Turned OFF when pulses are being
output to error counter.
Turned OFF absolute value of error
counter present value is greater
than in-position range.
Turned OFF when pulse output to
error counter is stopped and abso-
lute value of error counter present
value is less than in-position range
513
Error Counter
Error Flag
This flag turns ON when an error occurs in the error
counter for inverter positioning.
ON: Error counter error
OFF: No error
ON.
tion starts.
tion stops.
error is reset.
Turned ON when pulse output to
value is greater than or equal to
error counter error detection value.
Error Counter
Pulse Output Flag
This flag is ON while pulses are being output to the out-
put counter for inverter positioning.
ON: Pulses being output
OFF: Pulse output stopped
ON.
tion starts.
tion stops.
error is reset.
error counter error detection value.
Error Counter
Pulse Output
Accelera-
tion/Deceleration
Flag
This flag is ON while pulse output to the output counter
for inverter positioning is accelerating or decelerating.
ON: Pulse output to the error counter is accelerating or
decelerating (i.e., the frequency is changing)
OFF: Pulse output to the error counter is constant
ON.
tion starts.
tion stops.
Turned OFF during output of a con-
stant pulse frequency to error
counter.
Turned OFF when pulse output to
error counter is stopped (including
immediate stops and deceleration
stops).
Turned ON when pulse output fre-
quency to error counter is changed
by ACC or PLS2 instruction.
Error Counter
Alarm Flag
This flag turns ON when an alarm occurs in the error
counter for inverter positioning.
ON: Error counter alarm
OFF: No alarm
ON.
tion starts.
tion stops.
alarm is reset.
error counter alarm detection
value.
Inverter Position-
ing Output Value
Sign Flag
This flag is ON when the inverter positioning output value
is positive and is OFF when it is negative.
ON: Positive value
OFF: Negative value
Read Turned ON when signed output
value is between 0000 0000 and
7FFF FFFF hex.
Turned OFF when signed output
value is between FFFF FFFF and
8000 0000 hex.
Error Counter
Present Value,
Signed
This word contains the present value of the error counter.
Data range: 8000 to 7FFF hex (32,768 to 32,767)
Cleared when error counter is
reset.
Held when Error Counter Disable
Bit (A562.01) is turned ON.
Present Value of
Pulse Output to
Inverter, Relative
Value
These words contain the relative value of the internal
pulse output value when pulses are being output to the
error counter.
(2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
Cleared when pulse output to error
counter is started.
514
System Flags
Error Counter
Reset Bit
Turn ON this bit to reset the Error Counter Present Value
and turn OFF the Error Counter Error Flag.
Read/write ---
Error Counter Dis-
able Bit
Turn ON this bit to hold the error counter value.
ON: Error counter value held.
OFF: Error counter value not held.
Read/write ---
Present Value of
High-speed
Counter
These words contain the present value of the high-speed
counter.
see process.
Updated when present value is
read using PRV instruction.
Present Value of
Internal Pulse
Output, Absolute
Value for Abso-
lute Coordinates
These words contain the absolute value of the actual
movement in relation to the internal pulse origin when
pulses are being output to the error counter.
(2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
First Cycle Flag A200.11 ON for one cycle after PLC operation begins (after the
mode is switched from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR,
for example).
Read-only
Initial Task Execution Flag A200.15 ON when a task is executed for the first time, i.e., when it
changes from INI to RUN status.
Read-only
Task Started Flag A200.14 When a task switches from WAIT or INI to RUN status,
this flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle
only.
Note The only difference between this flag and
A200.15 is that this flag also turns ON when the
task switches from WAIT to RUN status.
Read-only
Maximum Cycle Time A262 to
A263
These words contain the maximum cycle time since the
start of PLC operation. The cycle time is recorded in 8-
digit hexadecimal with the leftmost 4 digits in A263 and
the rightmost 4 digits in A262.
0 to FFFFFFFF: 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms (0.1-ms units)
Read-only
Present Cycle Time A264 to
A265
These words contain the present cycle time in 8-digit
hexadecimal with the leftmost 4 digits in A265 and the
rightmost 4 digits in A264.
Read-only
10-ms Incrementing Free
Running Timer
A0 This word contains the system timer used after the power
is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON
and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every 10
ms. The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF
hex (655,350 ms), and then continues to be automati-
cally incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when
the operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between
processing A and processing B without requiring timer
instructions. This is achieved by calculating the
difference between the value in A0 for processing A and
the value in A0 for processing B. The interval is counted
in 10 ms units.
Read-only
100-ms Incrementing Free
Running Timer
A1 This word contains the system timer used after the power
is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON
and this value is automatically incremented by 1 every
100 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching
FFFF hex (6,553,500 ms), and then continues to be
automatically incremented by 1 every 100 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when
the operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between
processing A and processing B without requiring timer
instructions. This is achieved by calculating the
difference between the value in A0 for processing A and
the value in A0 for processing B. The interval is counted
in 100 ms units.
Read-only
515
Task Information
Debugging Information
Online Editing
Output Control
Differentiate Monitor
Data Tracing
Task Number when Program
Stopped
A294 This word contains the task number of the task that was
being executed when program execution was stopped
because of a program error.
Read-only
Maximum Interrupt Task
Processing Time
A440 Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time
in units of 0.1 ms as hexadecimal data.
Read-only
Interrupt Task with Max.
Processing Time
A441 Contains the task number of the interrupt task with the
maximum processing time. Hexadecimal values 8000 to
80FF correspond to task numbers 00 to FF. Bit 15 is
turned ON when an interrupt has occurred.
Read-only
IR/DR Operation between
Tasks
A99.14 ON when index and data registers are shared between
all tasks.
OFF: Independent
ON: Shared (default)
Read-only
Online Editing Wait Flag A201.10 ON when an online editing process is waiting. Read-only
Online Editing Processing
Flag
A201.11 ON when an online editing process is being executed. Read-only
Online Editing Disable Bit
Validator
A527.00 to
A527.07
The Online Editing Disable Bit (A527.09) is valid only
when this byte contains 5A.
Read/write
Online Editing Disable Bit A527.09 Turn this bit ON to disable online editing. The setting of
this bit is valid only when A527.00 to A527.07 have been
set to 5A.
Read/write
Output OFF Bit A500.15 Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs from the CPU
Unit, CPM1A Units, and Special I/O Units.
Read/write
Differentiate Monitor Com-
pleted Flag
A508.09 ON when the differentiate monitor condition has been
established during execution of differentiation monitoring.
Read/write
Sampling Start Bit A508.15 When a data trace is started by turning this bit ON from
the CX-Programmer, the PLC will begin storing data in
Trace Memory by one of the three following methods:
Data is sampled at regular intervals (10 to 2,550 ms).
Data is sampled when TRSM(045) is executed in the
program.
Data is sampled at the end of every cycle.
Read/write
Trace Start Bit A508.14 Turn this bit ON to establish the trigger condition. The off-
set indicated by the delay value (positive or negative)
determines which data samples are valid.
Read/write
Trace Busy Flag A508.13 ON when the Sampling Start Bit (A508.15) is turned ON.
OFF when the trace is completed.
Read/write
Trace Completed Flag A508.12 ON when sampling of a region of trace memory has
been completed during execution of a trace.
Read/write
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag A508.11 ON when a trigger condition is established by the Trace
Start Bit (A508.14). OFF when the next data trace is
started by the Sampling Start Bit (A508.15).
Read/write
516
Comment Memory
Error Information
Error Log, Error Code
Memory Error Information
Program Index File Flag A345.01 Turns ON when the comment memory contains a pro-
gram index file.
OFF: No file
ON: File present
Read-only
Comment File Flag A345.02 Turns ON when the comment memory contains a com-
ment file.
OFF: No file
ON: File present
Read-only
Symbol Table File Flag A345.03 Turns ON when the comment memory contains a symbol
table file.
OFF: No file
ON: File present
Read-only
Error Log Area A100 to
A199
When an error has occurred, the error code, error con-
tents, and error's time and date are stored in the Error
Log Area.
Read-only
Error Log Pointer A300 When an error occurs, the Error Log Pointer is incre-
mented by 1 to indicate the location where the next error
record will be recorded as a hexadecimal offset from the
beginning of the Error Log Area (A100 to A199).
Read-only
Error Log Pointer Reset Bit A500.14 Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer (A300) to
00.
Read/write
Error Code A400 When a non-fatal error (user-defined FALS(006) or sys-
tem error) or a fatal error (user-defined FALS(007) or
system error) occurs, the 4-digit hexadecimal error code
is written to this word.
Read-only
Memory Error Flag
(fatal error)
A401.15 ON when an error occurred in memory or there was an
error in automatic transfer from the Memory Cassette
when the power was turned ON.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator
on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
Note A403.09 will be turned ON if there was an error
during automatic transfer at startup.
The automatic transfer at startup error cannot be cleared
without turning OFF the PLC.
Read-only
Memory Error Location A403.00 to
A403.08
When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error Flag
(A40115) is turned ON and one of the following flags is
turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error
occurred
A403.00: User program
A403.04: PLC Setup
A403.07: Routing Table
Read-only
Startup Memory Card Trans-
fer Error Flag
A403.09 ON when automatic transfer at startup has been selected
and an error occurs during automatic transfer. An error
will occur if there is a transfer error, the specified file
does not exist, or the Memory Cassette is not installed.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared by
turning the power OFF. The error cannot be cleared with-
out turning the power OFF.)
Read-only
Flash Memory Error A403.10 ON when the flash memory fails. Read-only
517
Program Error Information
FAL/FALS Error Information
Other Fatal Error Flag A401.00 ON when a fatal error that is not defined for A401.01 to
A401.15 occurs. Detailed information is output to the bits
of A314.
OFF: No other fatal error
ON: Other fatal error
Program Error Flag
(fatal error)
A401.09 ON when program contents are incorrect.
CPU Unit operation will stop.
Read-only When error
occurs
Program Error Task A294 This word contains the task number of the task that was
being executed when program execution was stopped
because of a program error.
Read-only
Instruction Processing Error
Flag
A295.08 This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will be turned ON when
an instruction processing error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to stop operation for an instruc-
tion error.
Read-only
Indirect DM/EM BCD Error
Flag
A295.09 This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned
ON when an indirect DM BCD error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to stop operation an indirect DM
BCD error. (This error occurs when the content of an
indirectly addressed DM word is not BCD although BCD
mode has been selected.)
Read-only
Illegal Access Error Flag A295.10 This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned
ON when an illegal access error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to stop operation an illegal
access error. (This error occurs when a region of mem-
ory is accessed illegally.)
Read-only
No END Error Flag A295.11 ON when there isnt an END(001) instruction in each pro-
gram within a task
Read-only
Task Error Flag A295.12 ON when a task error has occurred. The following condi-
tions generate a task error.
There isnt even one regular task that is executable
(started).
There isnt a program allocated to the task.
Read-only
Differentiation Overflow
Error Flag
A295.13 ON when the allowed value for Differentiation Flags
which correspond to differentiation instructions has been
exceeded.
Read-only
Illegal Instruction Error Flag A295.14 ON when a program that cannot be executed has been
stored.
Read-only
UM Overflow Error Flag A295.15 ON when the last address in UM (User Memory) has
been exceeded
Read-only
Program Address Where
Program Stopped
A298 and
A299
These words contain the 8-digit binary program address
of the instruction where program execution was stopped
due to a program error.
A298: Rightmost 4 digits, A299: Leftmost 4 digits
Read-only
FAL Error Flag
(non-fatal error)
A402.15 ON when a non-fatal error is generated by executing
FAL(006). The CPU Unit will continue operating.
Read-only
Executed FAL Number
Flags
A360 to
A391
The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number will
be turned ON when FAL(006) is executed. Bits A360.01
to A391.15 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511.
Read-only
FALS Error Flag
(fatal error)
A401.06 ON when a fatal error is generated by the FALS(006)
instruction. The CPU Unit will stop operating.
Read-only
FAL/FALS Number for Sys-
tem Error Simulation
A529 Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to use to simulate the
system error using FAL(006) or FALS(007).
Set the FAL/FALS number.
0001 to 01FF hex: FAL/FALS numbers 1 to 511
0000 or 0200 to FFFF hex: No FAL/FALS number for sys-
tem error simulation. (No error will be generated.)
Read/write
518
PLC Setup Error Information
I/O Information
Other PLC Operating Information
PLC Setup Error Flag
(non-fatal error)
A402.10 ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup. Read-only
PLC Setup Error Location A406 When there is a setting error in the PLC Setup, the loca-
tion of that error is written to A406 in 4-digit hexadecimal.
Read-only
Too Many I/O Points Flag
(fatal error)
A401.11 ON when the number of Expansion Units and Expansion
I/O Units exceeds the limit, when the number of words
allocated to these Units exceeds the limit, are mounted.
Read-only
Too Many I/O Points, Details A407.00 to
A407.12
Always 0000 hex. Read-only
Too Many I/O Points, Cause A407.13 to
A407.15
The 3-digit binary value of these bits indicates the cause
of the Too Many I/O Points Error.
010: Too many words
011: Too many Units
Read-only
I/O Bus Error Flag
(fatal error)
A401.14 ON in the following cases:
When an error occurs in a data transfer between the
CPU Unit and a Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit.
If this happens, 0A0A hex will be output to A404.
When an error occurs in a data transfer between the
CPU Unit. If this happens, 0000 hex will be output to
A404 to indicate the first Unit, 0001 hex to indicate the
second Unit, and 0F0F hex to indicate an undeter-
mined Unit.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator
on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared.)
Read-only
I/O Bus Error Slot Number A404 Contains information on I/O bus errors.
The CPU Unit will stop operating and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
(A401.04 (I/O Bus Error Flag) will turn ON.)
(This information will be cleared when the error is
cleared.)
0A0A hex: Expansion Unit or Expansion I/O Unit error
Read-only
Duplication Error Flag
(fatal error)
A401.13 ON in the following cases:
Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit
number.
Read-only
Unit Error Flags A436.00 to
A436.02
ON when an error occurs in an Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit.
A436.00: 1st Unit
A436.10: 2nd Unit
A436.02: 3rd Unit
CP1W/CPM1A-TS002 and CP1W/CPM1A-TS102 are
each counted as two Units.
Read-only
Number of Connected Units A437 Stores the number of Expansion Units and Expansion
I/O Units connected as a hexadecimal number.
Note This information is valid only when a Too Many
I/O Points error has occurred. CP1W/CPM1A-
TS002 and CP1W/CPM1A-TS102 are each
counted as two Units.
Read-only
Battery Error Flag
(non-fatal error)
A402.04 ON if the CPU Units battery is disconnected or its volt-
age is low and the Detect Battery Error setting has been
set in the PLC Setup.
Read-only
Cycle Time Too Long Flag
(fatal error)
A401.08 ON if the cycle time exceeds the maximum cycle time set
in the PLC Setup (the cycle time monitoring time).
Read-only
FPD Teaching Bit A598.00 Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring time automatically
with the teaching function.
Read/write
519
Clock
Clock Information
Note The clock data is stored in the CPU Unit as BCD.
Operation Start and End Times
Option Board Error Flag A315.13 ON when the Option Board is removed while the power is
being supplied.
CPU Unit operation will continue and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator will flash.
OFF when the error has been cleared.
Read-only When an error
occurs
Flash Memory Error Flag A315.15 ON when writing to the internal flash memory fails.
CPU Unit operation will continue and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator will flash.
OFF when the error has been cleared.
occurs
Other Fatal Error Flag A402.00 ON when a non-fatal error that is not defined for A402.01
to A402.15 occurs. Detailed information is output to the
bits of A314.
OFF: No other fatal error
ON: Other fatal error
occurs
Clock Data The clock data from the clock built into the CPU Unit is stored here in BCD. Read-only
A351.00 to A351.07 Seconds: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A351.08 to A351.15 Minutes: 00 to 59 (BCD)
A352.00 to A352.07 Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)
A352.08 to A352.15 Day of the month: 01 to 31 (BCD)
A353.00 to A353.07 Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)
A353.08 to A353.15 Year: 00 to 99 (BCD)
A354.00 to A354.07 Day of the week: 00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday,
03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday
Operation Start Time A515 to
A517
The time that operation started as a result of changing
the operating mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored
here in BCD.
A515.00 to A515.07: Seconds (00 to 59)
A515.08 to A515.15: Minutes (00 to 59)
A516.00 to A516.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A516.08 to A516.15: Day of month (01 to 31)
A517.00 to A517.07: Month (01 to 12)
A517.08 to A517.15: Year (00 to 99)
Note The previous start time is stored after turning ON
the power supply until operation is started.
Read/write
Operation End Time A518 to
A520
The time that operation stopped as a result of changing
the operating mode to PROGRAM mode is stored here in
BCD.
A518.00 to A518.07: Seconds (00 to 59)
A518.08 to A518.15: Minutes (01 to 59)
A519.00 to A519.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A520.00 to A520.07: Month (01 to 12)
A520.08 to A520.15: Year (00 to 99)
Note If an error occurs in operation, the time of the
error will be stored. If the operating mode is then
changed to PROGRAM mode, the time that PRO-
GRAM mode was entered will be stored.
Read/write
520
Power Supply Information
Flash Memory Backup Information
Startup Time A510 and
A511
These words contain the time at which the power was
turned ON. The contents are updated every time that the
power is turned ON. The data is stored in BCD.
A510.00 to A510.07: Second (00 to 59)
A510.08 to A510.15: Minute (00 to 59)
A511.00 to A511.07: Hour (00 to 23)
Read/write
Power Interruption Time A512 and
A513
These words contain the time at which the power was
interrupted. The contents are updated every time that the
power is interrupted. The data is stored in BCD.
A512.00 to A512.07: Second (00 to 59)
A512.08 to A512.15: Minute (00 to 59)
A513.00 to A513.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(These words are not cleared at startup.)
Read/write
Number of Power
Interruptions
A514 Contains the number of times that power has been inter-
rupted since the power was first turned ON. The data is
stored in binary. To reset this value, overwrite the current
value with 0000.
Read/write
Total Power ON Time A523 Contains the total time that the PLC has been ON in 10-
hour units. The data is stored in binary and it is updated
every 10 hours. To reset this value, overwrite the current
value with 0000.
Read/write
User Program Date A90 to A93 These words contain in BCD the date and time that the
user program was last overwritten.
A90.00 to A90.07: Seconds (00 to 59)
A90.08 to A90.15: Minutes (00 to 59)
A91.00 to A91.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A92.00 to A92.07: Month (01 to 12)
A92.08 to A92.15: Year (00 to 99)
A93.00 to A93.07: Day of the week (00 to 06)
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Read-only
Parameter Date A94 to A97 These words contain in BCD the date and time that the
parameters were last overwritten.
A94.00 to A94.07: Seconds (00 to 59)
A94.08 to A94.15: Minutes (00 to 59)
A95.00 to A95.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A96.00 to A96.07: Month (01 to 12)
A96.08 to A96.15: Year (00 to 99)
A97.00 to A97.07: Day of the week (00 to 06)
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Read-only
521
Memory Cassette Information
Memory Cassette Access
Status
A342 A342.03: ON when data is being written to the Memory
Cassette or the Memory Cassette is being ini-
tialized. OFF when processing has been com-
pleted.
A342.04: ON when data is being read from the Memory
Cassette. OFF when processing has been
completed.
A342.05: ON when data is being compared with data on
the Memory Cassette. OFF when processing
has been completed.
A342.07: ON when an error occurs in initializing the
Memory Cassette.
OFF the next time the Memory Cassette is
accessed normally (initialized, written, read, or
compared).
A342.08: ON when an error occurs in writing the Mem-
ory Cassette.
compared).
A342.10: ON when an error occurs in reading or com-
paring the Memory Cassette.
compared).
A342.12: ON when the data in the CPU Unit is not the
same as the data in the Memory Cassette
when a verification operation is performed.
compared).
A342.13: ON when the Memory Cassette is being
accessed. OFF when processing has been
completed.
A342.15: ON when a Memory Cassette is mounted.
OFF when a Memory Cassette is not mounted.
Read-only
Memory Casette Verifica-
tion Results
A494 Stores the results of comparing data in the Memory Cas-
sette and CPU Unit. Each bit turns ON to indicate status.
A494.00: User program is different.
A494.01: Function block sources are different.
A494.02: Parameter area is different.
A494.03: Symbol table is different.
A494.04: Comments are different.
A494.05: Program indices are different.
A494.06: Data memory is different.
A494.07: DM initial values are different.
Read-only
522
Information on Read Protection Using a Password
UM Read Protection Flag A99.00 Indicates whether the entire user program in the PLC is
read-protected.
OFF: UM not read-protected.
ON: UM read-protected.
Read-only
Task Read Protection Flag A99.01 Indicates whether read protection is set for individual
tasks.
OFF: Tasks not read-protected.
ON: Tasks read-protected.
Read-only
Program Write Protection for
Read Protection
A99.02 Indicates whether the program is write-protected.
OFF: Write-enabled.
ON: Write-protected.
Read-only
Enable/Disable Bit for Pro-
gram Backup
A99.03 Indicates whether creating a backup program file (.OBJ)
is enabled or disabled.
OFF: Enabled.
ON: Disabled.
Read-only
UM Read Protection
Release Enable Flag
A99.12 Indicates when UM read protection cannot be released
because an incorrect password was input five times con-
secutively.
Read-only
Release Enable Flag
A99.13 Indicates when task read protection cannot be released
because an incorrect password was input five times con-
secutively.
Read-only
523
Communications
Networks
Network Communications Information
Information When Automatically Allocating Communications Ports
Serial Port 1 Information (CP1L CPU Units with M CPU Type)
Communications Port
Enabled Flags
A202.00 to
A202.07
ON when a network instruction or background execution
can be executed with the corresponding port number.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
Read-only
Communications Port Com-
pletion Codes
A203 to
A210
These words contain the completion codes for the corre-
sponding port numbers when network instructions have
been executed.
Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications
ports 0 to 7.
Read-only
Communications Port Error
Flags
A219.00 to
A219.07
ON when an error occurred during execution of a net-
work instruction.
OFF when a normal response is returned.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
Read-only
Network Communications
Port Allocation Enabled Flag
A202.15 ON when there is a communications port available for
automatic allocation.
Note Use this flag to confirm whether a communica-
tions port is available for automatic allocation
before executing communications instructions
when using 9 or more communications instruc-
tions simultaneously.
Read-only
First Cycle Flags after Net-
work Communications Fin-
ished
A214.00 to
A214.07
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after communi-
cations have been completed. Bits 00 to 07 correspond
to ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communications Port Num-
ber stored in A218 to determine which flag to access.
Note These flags are not effective until the next cycle
after the communications instruction is executed.
Delay accessing them for at least one cycle.
Read-only
First Cycle Flags after Net-
work Communications Error
A215.00 to
A215.07
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after a communi-
cations error occurs. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to ports 0
to 7. Use the Used Communications Port Number stored
in A218 to determine which flag to access. Determine the
cause of the error according to the Communications Port
Completion Codes stored in A203 to A210.
Note These flags are not effective until the next cycle
after the communications instruction is executed.
Delay accessing them for at least one cycle.
Read-only
Network Communications
Completion Code Storage
Address
A216 to
A217
The completion code for a communications instruction is
automatically stored at the address with the I/O memory
address given in these words.
Place this address into an index register and use indirect
addressing through the index register to read the com-
munications completion code.
Read-only
Used Communications Port
Numbers
A218 Stores the communications port numbers used when a
communications instruction is executed using automatic
communication port allocations.
0000 to 0007 hex: Communications port 0 to 7
Read-only
Peripheral Port Communica-
tions Error Flag
A392.12 ON when a communications error has occurred at the
serial port 1.
Read-only
Peripheral Port Restart Bit A526.01 Turn this bit ON to restart the serial port 1. Read/write
Peripheral Port Settings
Change Bit
A619.01 ON while the serial port 1s communications settings are
being changed.
Read/write
Peripheral Port Error Flags A528.08 to
A528.15
These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at
the serial port 1.
Read/write
Serial Port 1 Send Ready
Flag
(No-protocol Mode)
A392.13 ON when the serial port 1 is able to send data in no-pro-
tocol mode.
Read-only
524
Serial Port 1 Information (CP1L CPU Units with L CPU Type)
Serial Port 2 Information (CP1L CPU Units with M CPU Type)
Serial Port 1 Reception
Completed Flag
(No-protocol Mode)
A392.14 ON when the serial port 1 has completed the reception in
no-protocol mode.
Read-only
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol Mode)
A392.15 ON when a data overflow occurred during reception
through the serial port 1 in no-protocol mode.
Read-only
Peripheral Port PT Commu-
nications Flags
A394.00 to
A394.07
The corresponding bit will be ON when the serial port 1
is communicating with a PT in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
Read-only
Peripheral Port PT Priority
Registered Flags
A394.08 to
A394.15
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has pri-
ority when the serial port 1 is communicating in NT link
mode.
Read-only
Counter
(No-protocol Mode)
A394.00 to
A394.15
Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data received
when serial port 1 is in no-protocol mode.
Read-only
Serial Port 1 Communica-
tions Error Flag
serial port 1.
Note Not supported for 1:N NT Link Mode.
Read-only
Serial Port 1 Restart Bit A526.00 Turn this bit ON to restart the serial port 1. Read/write
Serial Port 1 Settings
Change Bit
being changed.
Read/write
Serial Port 1 Error Flags A528.00 to
A528.07
the serial port 1.
Read/write
Flag (No-protocol mode)
tocol mode.
Read-only
Completed Flag (No-proto-
col Mode)
no-protocol mode.
Read-only
Overflow Flag (No-protocol
mode)
Read-only
Serial Port 1 PT Communi-
cations Flags
A393.00 to
A393.07
Read-only
Serial Port 1 PT Priority
Registered Flags
A393.08 to
A393.15
mode.
Read-only
Counter (No-protocol Mode)
A393.00 to
A393.15
Read-only
Serial Port 2 Communica-
tions Error Flag
serial port 2.
Read-only
Serial Port 2 Restart Bit A526.00 Turn this bit ON to restart the serial port 2. Read/write
Change Bit
being changed.
Read/write
Serial Port 2 Error Flags A528.00 to
A528.07
the serial port 2.
Read/write
Flag
(No-protocol mode)
tocol mode.
Read-only
Completed Flag
(No-protocol Mode)
no-protocol mode.
Read-only
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol mode)
Read-only
525
Modbus-RTU Easy Master Information (CP1L CPU Units with M CPU Type)
Note DM fixed allocation words for Modbus-RTU Easy Master for serial port 1: D32200 to D32299
DM fixed allocation words for Modbus-RTU Easy Master for serial port 2: D32300 to D32399
Serial Port 2 PT Communi-
cations Flags
A393.00 to
A393.07
Read-only
RS-232C Port PT Priority
Registered Flags
A393.08 to
A393.15
mode.
Read-only
RS-232C Port Reception
Counter
(No-protocol Mode)
A393.00 to
A393.15
Read-only
Serial Port 1 Modbus-RTU
Master Execution Bit
A641.00 Turn ON this bit to send a command and receive a
response for serial port 1 using the Modbus-RTU easy
master function.
This bit will be turned OFF automatically by the system
when communications have been completed.
Read-only
Master Execution Normal
Flag
A641.01 ON when one command has been sent and the
response received for serial port 1 using the Modbus-
RTU easy master function.
Read-only
Master Execution Error Flag
A641.02 ON when an error has occurred in communications for
serial port 1 using the Modbus-RTU easy master func-
tion. The error code is output to D32352 in the DM fixed
allocation words for Modbus-RTU Easy Master.
Read-only
master function.
Read-only
Flag
Read-only
Read-only
526
Modbus-RTU Easy Master Information (CP1L CPU Units with L CPU Type)
Note DM fixed allocation words for Modbus-RTU Easy Master for serial port 2: D32300 to D32399
Instruction-related Information
Function Block Information
Function Block Memory Information
OMRON FB Library Information
Note These Auxiliary Area bits/words are not to be written by the user. The number of resends and response monitoring time must be
set by the user in the FB communications instructions settings in the PLC Setup, particularly when using function blocks from the
OMRON FB Library to execute FINS messages or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in the Settings for
master function.
Read-only
Flag
Read-only
Read-only
Step Flag A200.12 ON for one cycle when step execution is started with
STEP(008).
Read-only
Macro Area Input Words A600 to
A603
Before the subroutine specified in MCRO(099) is exe-
cuted, the source words for the subroutine are trans-
ferred to A600 through A603 (input parameter words).
Read/write
Macro Area Output Words A604 to
A607
After the subroutine specified in MCRO(099) has been
executed, the results of the subroutine are transferred
from A604 through A607 to the specified destination
words (output parameter words).
Read/write
FB Program Data Flag A345.00 Turns ON if the FB program memory contains FB pro-
gram data.
OFF: No data
ON: Data present
Read-only
FB Communications Instruc-
tion Response Required
A580.15 0: Not required
1: Required
Read-only
tion Port No.
A580.08 to
A580.11
0 to 7 hex: Communications port No. 0 to 7
F hex: Automatic allocation
Read-only
tion Retries
A580.00 to
A580.03
Automatically stores the number of retries in the FB com-
munications instruction settings specified in the PLC
Setup.
Read-only
tion Response Monitoring
Time
A581 Automatically stores the FB communications instruction
response monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF hex (Unit: 0.1 s; Range: 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
Read-only
FB DeviceNet Communica-
tions Instruction Response
Monitoring Time
A582 Automatically stores the FB DeviceNet communications
instruction response monitoring time set in the PLC
Setup.
0001 to FFFF hex (Unit: 0.1 s; Range: 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
Read-only
527
OMRON FB Library in the PLC Setup will be automatically stored in the related Auxiliary Area words A580 to A582 and used by
the function blocks from the OMRON FB Library.
528
529
Appendix D
Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address
Read-only Area (Set by System)
Address Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
A0 --- 10-ms Incre-
menting Free
Running
Timer
This word contains the system timer
used after the power is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1 every
10 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex
after reaching FFFF hex
(655,350 ms), and then continues to
be automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be
incremented when the operat-
ing mode is switched to RUN
mode.
Example: The interval can be
counted between processing A and
processing B without requiring timer
instructions. This is achieved by
calculating the difference between
the value in A0 for processing A and
the value in A0 for processing B. The
interval is counted in 10 ms units.
--- Retained Cleared Every
10 ms after
power is
turned ON
---
A1 --- 100-ms Incre-
menting Free
Running
Timer
This word contains the system timer
used after the power is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1 every
100 ms. The value returns to 0000
hex after reaching FFFF hex
(6,553,500 ms), and then continues
to be automatically incremented by 1
every 100 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be
incremented when the operat-
ing mode is switched to RUN
mode.
Example: The interval can be
counted between processing A and
processing B without requiring timer
instructions. This is achieved by
calculating the difference between
the value in A0 for processing A and
the value in A0 for processing B. The
interval is counted in 100 ms units.
--- Retained Cleared Every
100 ms
after power
is turned
ON
---
A20
and
A21
--- Present Value
of Unsigned
Output Value
0
These words contain the present
value of the unsigned output value
(output value = present value of error
counter error counter cycle (s)
gain) for inverter positioning 0.
Data range: 0000 0000 to
8000 0000 hex (0 to 2,147,483,648)
The maximum and minimum output
values set for inverter positioning 0 in
the PLC Setup are applied.
A21 contains the leftmost 4 digits
and A20 contains the rightmost 4
digits.
--- --- Cleared Every error
counter 0
cycle
---
530
Auxiliary Area Allocations by Address Appendix D
A22 --- Error Counter
0 Present
Value, Signed
This word contains the present value
of the error counter for inverter posi-
tioning 0.
Data range: 8000 to 7FFF hex
(32,768 to 32,767) (signed)
counter 0
cycle
---
A23 --- Inverter Fre-
quency 0
Command
Value
This word contains the automatically
calculated frequency command
value for the inverter for inverter posi-
tioning 0.
Data range: 0000 to FFFF hex (0.00
to 655.35 Hz) (0.01-Hz increments,
unsigned)
Set the Power Supply Frequency for
One Motor Revolution per Second,
Number of Encoder Pulses for One
Motor Revolution, and Error Counter
Cycle for inverter positioning 0 in the
PLC Setup before using this value.
counter 0
cycle
---
A24
and
A25
--- Present Value
of Signed Out-
put Value 0
value of the signed output value (out-
put value = present value of error
Data range: 8000 0000 to 7FFF
FFFF hex (214,748,348 to
214,748,347) (signed)
digits.
counter 0
cycle
---
A26 00 Operation
Command
Flag 0
This flag turns ON during an opera-
tion command for inverter positioning
0.
ON: Opera-
tion command
executed.
OFF: Stop
command
executed.
--- Cleared When
inverter
positioning
0 is started
---
01 Forward Oper-
ation Com-
mand Flag 0
This flag turns ON during a forward
operation command for inverter posi-
tioning 0.
ON: Forward
command in
progress
OFF: Reverse
command in
progress or
stopped
--- Cleared When
present
value of
error
counter 0
is positive
---
02 Reverse Oper-
ation Com-
mand Flag 0
This flag turns ON during a reverse
tioning 0.
ON: Reverse
command in
progress
OFF: For-
ward com-
mand in
progress or
stopped
--- Cleared When
present
value of
error
counter 0
is negative
---
03 In-position
Flag 0
This flag turns ON when inverter
positioning 0 is in position.
ON: In posi-
tion
OFF: Not in
position
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put to error
counter 0
is stopped
and the
present
value of
error
counter 0
is within
the in-posi-
tion range
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
531
A26 04 Error Counter
Error Flag 0
This flag turns ON when an error
occurs in the error counter for
inverter positioning 0.
ON: Error
counter error
OFF: No error
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put to error
counter is
stopped
and abso-
lute value
of error
counter
present
value is
greater
than or
equal to
error
counter
error
detection
value
---
05 Error Counter
Pulse Output
Flag 0
This flag is ON while pulses are
being output to the output counter for
ON: Pulses
being output
OFF: Pulse
output
stopped
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put to error
counter 0
is started
---
06 Error Counter
Pulse Output
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Flag 0
This flag is ON while pulse output to
the output counter for inverter posi-
tioning 0 is accelerating or decelerat-
ing.
ON: Pulse
output to the
error counter
is accelerat-
ing or decel-
erating (i.e.,
the fre-
quency is
changing)
OFF: Pulse
output to the
error counter
is constant
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put fre-
quency to
error
counter is
changed
by ACC or
PLS2
instruction
---
07 Error Counter
Alarm Flag 0
This flag turns ON when an alarm
ON: Error
counter alarm
OFF: No error
counter alarm
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put to error
counter is
stopped
and abso-
lute value
of error
counter
present
value is
greater
than or
equal to
error
counter
alarm
detection
value
---
15 Inverter Posi-
tioning Output
Value Sign
Flag 0
This flag is ON when the inverter
positioning 0 output value is positive
and is OFF when it is negative.
ON: Positive
value
OFF: Nega-
tive value
--- Cleared When
signed out-
put value is
between
0000 0000
and 7FFF
FFFF hex
---
A28
and
A29
--- Present Value
of Pulse Out-
put to Inverter
0, Relative
Value
These words contain the relative
value of the internal pulse output
when pulses are being output to the
error counter for inverter positioning
0.
FFFF hex (2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
counter 0
cycle
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
532
A30
and
A31
--- Present Value
of Unsigned
Output Value
1
value of the unsigned output value
(output value = present value of error
Data range: 0000 0000 to
8000 0000 hex (0 to 2,147,483,648)
digits.
counter 1
cycle
---
A32 --- Error Counter
1 Present
Value, Signed
This word contains the present value
of the error counter for inverter posi-
tioning 1.
Data range: 8000 to 7FFF hex
(32,768 to 32,767) (signed)
counter 1
cycle
---
A33 --- Inverter Fre-
quency Com-
mand Value 1
This word contains the automatically
calculated frequency command
value for the inverter for inverter posi-
tioning 1.
Data range: 0000 to FFFF hex (0.00
to 655.35 Hz) (0.01-Hz increments,
unsigned)
Set the Power Supply Frequency for
One Motor Revolution per Second,
Number of Encoder Pulses for One
Motor Revolution, and Error Counter
Cycle in the PLC Setup before using
this value.
counter 1
cycle
---
A34
and
A35
--- Present Value
of Signed Out-
put Value 1
value of the signed output value (out-
put value = present value of error
FFFF hex (214,748,348 to
214,748,347) (signed)
digits.
counter 1
cycle
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
533
A36 00 Operation
Command
Flag 1
This flag turns ON during an opera-
tion command for inverter positioning
1.
ON: Opera-
tion command
executed.
OFF: Stop
command
executed.
--- Cleared When
inverter
positioning
1 is started
---
01 Forward Oper-
ation Com-
mand Flag 1
This flag turns ON during a forward
tioning 1.
ON: Forward
command in
progress
OFF: Reverse
command in
progress or
stopped
--- Cleared When
present
value of
error
counter 1
is positive
---
02 Reverse Oper-
ation Com-
mand Flag 1
This flag turns ON during a reverse
tioning 1.
ON: Reverse
command in
progress
OFF: For-
ward com-
mand in
progress or
stopped
--- Cleared When
present
value of
error
counter 1
is negative
---
03 In-position
Flag 1
This flag turns ON when inverter
positioning 1 is in position.
ON: In posi-
tion
OFF: Not in
position
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put to error
counter 1
is stopped
and the
present
value of
error
counter 1
is within
the in-posi-
tion range
---
04 Error Counter
Error Flag 1
This flag turns ON when an error
ON: Error
counter error
OFF: No error
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put to error
counter is
stopped
and abso-
lute value
of error
counter
present
value is
greater
than or
equal to
error
counter
error
detection
value
---
05 Error Counter
Pulse Output
Flag 1
This flag is ON while pulses are
being output to the output counter for
ON: Pulses
being output
OFF: Pulse
output
stopped
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put to error
counter 1
is started
---
06 Error Counter
Pulse Output
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Flag 1
This flag is ON while pulse output to
the output counter for inverter posi-
tioning 1 is accelerating or decelerat-
ing.
ON: Pulse
output to the
error counter
is accelerat-
ing or decel-
erating (i.e.,
the fre-
quency is
changing)
OFF: Pulse
output to the
error counter
is constant
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put fre-
quency to
error
counter is
changed
by ACC or
PLS2
instruction
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
534
A36 07 Error Counter
Alarm Flag 1
This flag turns ON when an alarm
ON: Error
counter alarm
OFF: No error
counter alarm
--- Cleared When
pulse out-
put to error
counter is
stopped
and abso-
lute value
of error
counter
present
value is
greater
than or
equal to
error
counter
alarm
detection
value
---
15 Inverter Posi-
tioning Output
Value Sign
Flag 1
This flag is ON when the inverter
positioning 1 output value is positive
and is OFF when it is negative.
ON: Positive
value
OFF: Nega-
tive value
--- Cleared When
signed out-
put value is
between
FFFF
FFFF and
8000 0000
---
A38
and
A39
Present Value
of Pulse Out-
put to Inverter
1, Relative
Value
These words contain the relative
value of the internal pulse output
when pulses are being output to the
error counter for inverter positioning
1.
FFFF hex (2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647)
digits.
counter 1
cycle
---
A90 to
A93
All User Program
Date
These words contain in BCD the
date and time that the user program
was last overwritten.
A90.00 to A90.07:
Seconds (00 to 59)
A90.08 to A90.15:
Minutes (00 to 59)
A91.00 to A91.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A91.08 to A91.15:
Day of month (01 to 31)
A92.00 to A92.07: Month (01 to 12)
A92.08 to A92.15: Year (00 to 99)
A93.00 to A93.07: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tues-
day, 03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday,
05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
--- Retained Retained --- ---
A94 to
A97
All Parameter
Date
These words contain in BCD the
date and time that the parameters
were last overwritten.
The format is the same as above.
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
535
A99 A99.00 UM Read Pro-
tection Status
Indicates whether the entire user
program in the PLC is read-pro-
tected.
OFF: UM not
read-pro-
tected.
ON: UM read-
protected.
Retained Retained When pro-
tection is
set or
cleared
---
A99.01 Task Read
Protection
Status
Indicates whether read protection is
set for individual tasks.
OFF: Tasks
not read-pro-
tected.
ON: Tasks
read-pro-
tected.
tection is
set or
cleared
---
A99.02 Program Write
Protection
Status when
Read Protec-
tion Is Set
Indicates whether the program is
write-protected.
OFF: Write-
enabled.
ON: Write-
protected.
tection is
set or
cleared
---
A99.03 Enable/Dis-
able Status for
Backing Up
the Program
to a Memory
Cassette
Indicates whether creating a backup
program file (.OBJ) is enabled or dis-
abled.
OFF:
Enabled.
ON: Disabled.
tection is
set or
cleared
---
A99.12 UM Read Pro-
tection
Release
Enable Flag
Indicates when UM read protection
cannot be released because an
incorrect password was input five
times consecutively.
OFF: Protec-
tion can be
released
ON: Protec-
tion cannot be
released
Retained Retained When
wrong
pass word
is input for
the fifth
time, when
memory is
cleared,
and two
hours after
releasing
protection
is disabled
---
A99.13 Task Read
Protection
Release
Enable Flag
Indicates when task read protection
cannot be released because an
incorrect password was input five
times consecutively.
OFF: Protec-
tion can be
released
ON: Protec-
tion cannot be
released
Retained Retained ---
A99.14 IR/DR Opera-
tion between
Tasks
Retained
ON when index and data registers
are shared between all tasks.
OFF when separate index and data
registers are being used in each
task.
OFF: Inde-
pendent
ON: Shared
(default)
A99.15 Timer/Counter
PV Refresh
Mode Flag
Indicates whether the CPU Unit is
operating in BCD mode or binary
mode.
OFF: BCD
mode
ON: Binary
mode
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
536
A100
to
A199
All Error Log
Area
When an error has occurred, the
error code, error contents, and
errors time and date are stored in
the Error Log Area. Information on
the 20 most recent errors can be
stored.
Each error record occupies 5 words;
the function of these 5 words is as
follows:
1) Error code (bits 0 to 15)
2) Error contents (bits 0 to 15)
3) Minutes (bits 8 to 15),
Seconds (bits 0 to 7)
4) Day of month (bits 8 to 15),
Hours (bits 0 to 7)
5) Year (bits 8 to 15),
Month (bits 0 to 7)
Errors generated by FAL(006) and
FALS(007) will also be stored in this
Error Log.
The Error Log Area can be reset
from the CX-Programmer.
If the Error Log Area is full (20
records) and another error occurs,
the oldest record in A100 to A104 will
be cleared, the other 19 records are
shifted down, and the new record is
stored in A195 to A199.
Error code
Error con-
tents:
Address of
Aux. Area
word with
details or
0000.
Seconds:
00 to 59, BCD
Minutes:
00 to 59, BCD
Hours:
00 to 23, BCD
Day of month:
01 to 31, BCD
Month:
01 to 12, BCD
Year:
00 to 99, BCD
Retained Retained Refreshed
when error
occurs.
A500.14
A300
A400
A200 A200.11 First Cycle
Flag
ON for one cycle after PLC operation
begins (after the mode is switched
from PROGRAM to RUN or MONI-
TOR, for example).
ON for the
first cycle
--- --- --- ---
A200.12 Step Flag ON for one cycle when step execu-
tion is started with STEP(008). This
flag can be used for initialization pro-
cessing at the beginning of a step.
ON for the
first cycle
after execu-
tion of
STEP(008).
Cleared --- --- ---
A200.14 Task Started
Flag
When a task switches from WAIT or
INI to RUN status, this flag will be
turned ON within the task for one
cycle only.
The only difference between this flag
and A200.15 is that this flag also
turns ON when the task switches
from WAIT to RUN status.
ON: ON for
first cycle
(including
transitions
from WAIT
and IN)
OFF: Other
Cleared Cleared --- ---
A20015 First Task
Startup Flag
ON when a task is executed for the
first time. This flag can be used to
check whether the current task is
being executed for the first time so
that initialization processing can be
performed if necessary.
ON: First exe-
cution
OFF: Not exe-
cutable for the
first time or
not being exe-
cuted.
Cleared --- --- ---
A201 A201.10 Online Editing
Wait Flag
ON when an online editing process is
waiting.
(If another online editing command is
received while waiting, the other
command wont be recorded and an
error will occur.)
ON: Waiting
for online edit-
ing
OFF: Not
waiting for
online editing
Cleared Cleared --- A527
A201.11 Online Editing
Flag
ON when an online editing process is
being executed.
ON: Online
editing in
progress
OFF: Online
editing not in
progress
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
537
A202 A202.00
to
A202.07
Communica-
tions Port
Enabled Flags
ON when a network instruction
(SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR)
can be executed with the corre-
sponding port number. Bits 00 to 07
correspond to communications ports
0 to 7.
When two or more network instruc-
tions are programmed with the same
port number, use the corresponding
flag as an execution condition to pre-
vent the instructions from being exe-
cuted simultaneously.
(The flag for a given port is turned
OFF while a network instruction with
that port number is being executed.)
ON: Network
instruction is
not being exe-
cuted
OFF: Net-
work instruc-
tion is being
executed
(port busy)
Cleared --- --- ---
A202.15 Network Com-
munications
Port Alloca-
tion Enabled
Flag
ON when there is a communications
port available for automatic alloca-
tion.
Note Use this flag to confirm
whether a communications
port is available for automatic
allocation before executing
communications instructions
when using 9 or more com-
munications instructions
simultaneously.
ON: Port
available
OFF: Port not
available
Cleared --- --- ---
A203
to
A210
All Communica-
tions Port
Completion
Codes
These words contain the completion
codes for the corresponding port
numbers when network instructions
(SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR)
have been executed.
(The corresponding word will be
cleared when background execution
has been completed.)
Words A203 to A210 correspond to
communications ports 0 to 7.
Non-zero:
Error code
0000:
Normal condi-
tion
Retained --- --- ---
A214 A214.00
to
A214.07
First Cycle
Flags after
Network Com-
munications
Finished
Each flag will turn ON for just one
cycle after communications have
been completed. Bits 00 to 07 corre-
spond to ports 0 to 7. Use the Used
Communications Port Number stored
in A218 to determine which flag to
access.
Note These flags are not effective
until the next cycle after the
communications instruction is
executed. Delay accessing
them for at least one cycle.
ON: First
cycle after
communica-
tions finish
only
OFF: Other
status
--- ---
A215 A215.00
to
A215.07
First Cycle
Flags after
Network Com-
munications
Error
Each flag will turn ON for just one
cycle after a communications error
occurs. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to
ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communi-
cations Port Number stored in A218
to determine which flag to access.
Determine the cause of the error
according to the Communications
Port Completion Codes stored in
A203 to A210.
Note These flags are not effective
until the next cycle after the
communications instruction is
executed. Delay accessing
them for at least one cycle.
ON: First
cycle after
communica-
tions error
only
OFF: Other
status
--- ---
A216
to
A217
All Network Com-
munications
Completion
Code Storage
Address
The completion code for a communi-
cations instruction is automatically
stored at the address with the I/O
memory address given in these
words.
Place this address into an index reg-
ister and use indirect addressing
through the index register to read the
communications completion code.
I/O memory
address for
the network
communica-
tions comple-
tion code
storage
--- ---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
538
A218 All Used Commu-
nications Port
Numbers
Stores the communications port
numbers used when a communica-
tions instruction is executed using
automatic communication port allo-
cations.
0000 to 0007
hex: Commu-
nications port
0 to 7
--- ---
A219 A219.00
to
A219.07
Communica-
tions Port
Error Flags
ON when an error occurred during
execution of a network instruction
(SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to commu-
nications ports 0 to 7.
ON: Error
occurred
OFF: Normal
condition
Retained --- --- ---
A262
and
A263
All Maximum
Cycle Time
These words contain the maximum
cycle time since the start of PLC
operation. The cycle time is recorded
in 8-digit hexadecimal with the left-
most 4 digits in A263 and the right-
most 4 digits in A262.
0 to
FFFFFFFF:
0 to
429,496,729.
5 ms
(0.1-ms units)
--- --- --- ---
A264
and
A265
All Present Cycle
Time
cycle time in 8-digit hexadecimal with
the leftmost 4 digits in A265 and the
rightmost 4 digits in A264.
0 to
FFFFFFFF:
0 to
429,496,729.
5 ms
--- --- --- ---
A270
to
A271
All High-speed
Counter 0 PV
Contains the PV of high-speed
counter 0. A271 contains the left-
most 4 digits and A270 contains the
rightmost 4 digits.
The PV is cleared when operation
starts.
--- --- Cleared Refreshed
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
Refreshed
when
PRV(881)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
---
A272
to
A273
All High-speed
Counter 1 PV
rightmost 4 digits.
starts.
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
Refreshed
when
PRV(881)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
539
A274 A274.00 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 1 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
These flags indicate whether the PV
is within the specified ranges when
high-speed counter 0 is being oper-
ated in range-comparison mode.
Cleared at beginning of operation.
ON: PV in range
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
Refreshed
when
PRV(881)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
---
A274.01 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 2 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A274.02 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 3 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A274.03 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 4 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A274.04 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 5 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A274.05 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 6 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A274.06 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 7 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A274.07 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 8 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
Counter 0
Comparison
In-progress
Flag
This flag indicates whether a com-
parison operation is being executed
for high-speed counter 0.
OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed.
when com-
parison
operation
starts or
stops.
---
A274.09 High-speed
Counter 0
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
This flag indicates when an overflow
or underflow has occurred in the
high-speed counter 0 PV. (Used with
the linear mode counting range only.)
Cleared when PV is changed.
OFF: Normal
when an
overflow or
underflow
occurs.
---
A274.10 High-speed
Counter 0
Count Direc-
tion
This flag indicates whether the high-
speed counter is currently being
incremented or decremented. The
counter PV for the current cycle is
compared with the PLC in last cycle
to determine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
--- --- Cleared Setting
used for
high-speed
counter,
valid dur-
ing counter
operation.
Read only
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
540
Counter 1
Range 1 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
ON: PV in range
each cycle
during
oversee-
ing pro-
cess.
Refreshed
when
PRV(881)
instruction
is exe-
cuted for
the corre-
sponding
counter.
---
A275.01 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 2 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A275.02 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 3 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A275.03 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 4 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A275.04 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 5 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A275.05 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 6 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A275.06 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 7 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A275.07 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 8 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A275.08 High-speed
Counter 1
Comparison
In-progress
Flag
OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed
when com-
parison
operation
starts or
stops.
---
Counter 1
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
OFF: Normal
when an
overflow or
underflow
occurs.
---
A275.10 High-speed
Counter 1
Count Direc-
tion
compared with the PC in last cycle to
determine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
used for
high-speed
counter,
valid dur-
ing counter
operation.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
541
A276
and
A277
All Pulse Output
0 PV
Contain the number of pulses output
from the corresponding pulse output
port.
PV range: 8000 0000 to 7FFF FFFF
hex
(-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
When pulses are being output in the
CW direction, the PV is incremented
by 1 for each pulse.
When pulses are being output in the
CCW direction, the PV is decre-
mented by 1 for each pulse.
PV after overflow: 7FFF FFFF hex
PV after underflow: 8000 0000 hex
digits of the pulse output 0 PV.
digits of the pulse output 1 PV.
Note If the coordinate system is
relative coordinates (unde-
fined origin), the PV will be
cleared to 0 when a pulse
output starts, i.e. when a
pulse output instruction
(SPED(885), ACC(888), or
PLS2(887)) is executed.
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
Refreshed
when the
INI(880)
instruction
is exe-
cuted (PV
change).
---
A278
and
A279
All Pulse Output
1 PV
Cleared ---
A280 A280.00 Pulse Output
0 Accel/Decel
Flag
This flag will be ON when pulses are
being output from pulse output 0
according to an ACC(888) or
PLS2(887) instruction and the output
frequency is being changed in steps
(accelerating or decelerating).
stops.
OFF: Constant speed
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
---
A280.01 Pulse Output
0
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
pulse output 0 PV.
OFF: Normal
--- --- Cleared Cleared
when the
PV is
changed
by the
INI(880)
instruction.
Refreshed
when an
overflow or
underflow
occurs.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
542
0 Output
Amount Set
Flag
ON when the number of output
pulses for pulse output 0 has been
set with the PULS(886) instruction.
stops.
OFF: No setting
ON: Setting made
when the
PULS(886)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
Refreshed
when pulse
output
stops.
---
0 Output
Completed
Flag
pulses set with the PULS(886) or
PLS2(887) instruction has been out-
put through pulse output 0.
stops.
at the start
or comple-
tion of
pulse out-
put in inde-
pendent
mode.
---
0 Output In-
progress Flag
ON when pulses are being output
from pulse output 0.
stops.
OFF: Stopped
when pulse
output
starts or
stops.
---
0 No-origin
Flag
ON when the origin has not been
determined for pulse output 0 and
goes OFF when the origin has been
determined.
Turned ON when power is turned
ON.
Turned ON when operation starts.
each cycle
during the
oversee-
ing pro-
cesses.
---
0 At-origin
Flag
ON when the pulse output PV
matches the origin (0).
each cycle
during the
oversee-
ing pro-
cesses.
---
0 Output
Stopped Error
Flag
ON when an error occurred while
outputting pulses in the pulse output
0 origin search function.
The Pulse Output 0 Output Stop
Error code will be written to A444.
OFF: No error
when ori-
gin search
starts.
Refreshed
when a
pulse out-
put stop
error
occurs.
---
1 Accel/Decel
Flag
This flag will be ON when pulses are
being output from pulse output 1
according to an ACC(888) or
PLS2(887) instruction and the output
frequency is being changed in steps
(accelerating or decelerating).
stops.
OFF: Constant speed
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
543
1
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
pulse output 1 PV.
OFF: Normal
when the
PV is
changed
by the
INI(880)
instruction.
Refreshed
when an
overflow or
underflow
occurs.
---
1 Output
Amount Set
Flag
pulses for pulse output 1 has been
set with the PULS(886) instruction.
stops.
OFF: No setting
ON: Setting made
when the
PULS(886)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
---
1 Output
Completed
Flag
pulses set with the PULS(886) or
PLS2(887) instruction has been out-
put through pulse output 1.
stops.
when
PULS(886)
(886)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
Refreshed
at the start
or comple-
tion of
pulse out-
put.
---
1 Output In-
progress Flag
from pulse output 1.
stops.
OFF: Stopped
when pulse
output
starts or
stops.
---
1 No-origin
Flag
ON when the origin has not been
determined for pulse output 1 and
goes OFF when the origin has been
determined.
Turned ON when power is turned
ON.
Turned ON when operation starts.
each cycle
during
oversee-
ing pro-
cesses.
---
1 At-origin
Flag
ON when the pulse output PV
matches the origin (0).
each cycle
during
oversee-
ing pro-
cesses.
---
1 Output
Stopped Error
Flag
ON when an error occurred while
outputting pulses in the pulse output
1 origin search function.
The Pulse Output 1 Output Stop
Error code will be written to A445.
OFF: No error
when ori-
gin search
starts.
Refreshed
when pulse
output stop
error
occurs.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
544
A283 A283.00 PWM Output
0 Output In-
progress Flag
from PWM output 0.
stops.
OFF: Stopped
when pulse
output
starts or
stops.
---
A283.08 PWM Output
1 Output In-
progress Flag
from PWM output 1.
OFF: Stopped
--- --- Cleared ---
A294 All Task Number
when Program
Stopped
This word contains the task number
of the task that was being executed
when program execution was
stopped because of a program error.
(A298 and A299 contain the program
address where program execution
was stopped.)
Normal tasks:
0000 to 001F
(task 0 to 31)
Interrupt
tasks: 8000 to
80FF (task 0
to 255)
Cleared Cleared When pro-
gram error
occurs.
A298/
A299
A295 A295.08 Instruction
Processing
Error Flag
This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will
be turned ON when an instruction
processing error has occurred and
the PLC Setup has been set to stop
operation for an instruction error.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when
this flag goes ON.
(The task number where the error
occurred will be stored in A294 and
the program address will be stored in
A298 and A299.)
ON: Error
Flag ON
OFF: Error
Flag OFF
gram error
occurs.
A294,
A298/
A299
PLC
Setup
(Opera-
tion when
instruc-
tion error
has
occurred)
A295.09 Indirect DM
BCD Error
Flag
This flag and the Access Error Flag
(AER) will be turned ON when an
indirect DM BCD error has occurred
and the PLC Setup has been set to
stop operation an indirect DM BCD
error. (This error occurs when the
content of an indirectly addressed
DM word is not BCD although BCD
mode has been selected.) CPU Unit
operation will stop and the ERR/ALM
indicator will light when this flag goes
ON.
A298 and A299.)
ON: Not BCD
OFF: Normal
gram error
occurs.
A294,
A298/
A299
PLC
Setup
(Opera-
tion when
instruc-
tion error
has
occurred)
A295.10 Illegal Access
Error Flag
This flag and the Access Error Flag
(AER) will be turned ON when an
illegal access error has occurred and
the PLC Setup has been set to stop
operation an illegal access error.
(This error occurs when a region of
memory is accessed illegally.) CPU
Unit operation will stop and the ERR/
ALM indicator will light when this flag
goes ON.
The following operations are consid-
ered illegal access:
1) Reading/writing the system area
2) Indirect DM BCD error (in BCD
mode)
A298 and A299.)
ON: Illegal
access
occurred
OFF: Normal
condition
gram error
occurs.
A294,
A298/
A299
PLC
Setup
(Opera-
tion when
instruc-
tion error
has
occurred)
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
545
A295 A295.11 No END Error
Flag
ON when there isnt an END(001)
instruction in each program within a
task.
this flag goes ON.
A298 and A299.)
ON: No END
OFF: Normal
condition
Cleared Cleared --- A294,
A298/
A299
A295.12 Task Error
Flag
ON when a task error has occurred.
The following conditions generate a
task error.
There isnt even one regular task that
is executable (started).
There isnt a program allocated to
the task.
A298 and A299.)
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
A298/
A299
A295.13 Differentiation
Overflow Error
Flag
The allowed value for Differentiation
Flags which correspond to differenti-
ation instructions has been
exceeded. CPU Unit operation will
stop and the ERR/ALM indicator will
light when this flag goes ON.
A298 and A299.)
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
A298/
A299
A295.14 Illegal Instruc-
tion Error Flag
ON when a program that cannot be
executed has been stored. CPU Unit
operation will stop and the ERR/ALM
indicator will light when this flag goes
ON.
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
A298/
A299
A295.15 UM Overflow
Error Flag
ON when the last address in UM
(User Memory) has been exceeded.
this flag goes ON.
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
A298/
A299
A298 All Program
Address
Where Pro-
gram Stopped
(Rightmost 4
digits)
These words contain the 8-digit
binary program address of the
instruction where program execution
was stopped due to a program error.
(A294 contains the task number of
the task where program execution
was stopped.)
Right 4 digits
of the pro-
gram address
A299 All Program
Address
Where Pro-
gram Stopped
(Leftmost 4
digits)
Left 4 digits of
the program
address
Cleared Cleared ---
A300 All Error Log
Pointer
When an error occurs, the Error Log
Pointer is incremented by 1 to indi-
cate the location where the next error
record will be recorded as an offset
from the beginning of the Error Log
Area (A100 to A199).
The Error Log Pointer can be cleared
to 00 by turning A500.14 (the Error
Log Reset Bit) ON.
When the Error Log Pointer has
reached 14 hex (20 decimal), the
next record is stored in A195 to A199
when the next error occurs.
00 to 14
hexadecimal
Retained Retained Refreshed
when error
occurs.
A500.14
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
546
A310 All Manufactur-
ing Lot Num-
ber, Lower
Digits
The manufacturing lot number is
stored in 6 digits hexadecimal. X, Y,
and Z in the lot number are con-
verted to 10, 11, and 12, respec-
tively.
Examples:
Lot number 01805
A310 = 0801, A311 = 0005
Lot number 30Y05
A310 =1130, A311 = 0005
A311 All Manufactur-
ing Lot Num-
ber, Upper
Digits
A315 A315.13 Option Board
Error Flag
ON when the Option Board is
removed while the power is being
supplied. CPU Unit operation will
continue and the ERR/ALM indicator
will flash.
OFF when the error has been
cleared.
--- Cleared Cleared Refreshed
when error
occurs.
A402.00,
A424
A315.15 Flash Mem-
ory Error Flag
ON when writing to the internal flash
memory fails. CPU Unit operation will
continue and the ERR/ALM indicator
will flash.
OFF when the error has been
cleared.
when error
occurs.
A402.00
A316
to
A317
All High-speed
Counter 2 PV
rightmost 4 digits.
starts.
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
Refreshed
when
PRV(881)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
---
A318
to
A319
All High-speed
Counter 3 PV
rightmost 4 digits.
starts.
--- --- Cleared ---
Counter 2
Range 1 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
ON: PV in range
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
Refreshed
when
PRV(881)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
547
Counter 2
Range 2 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
ON: PV in range
each cycle
during
oversee
process.
Refreshed
when
PRV(881)
instruction
is exe-
cuted.
---
A320.02 High-speed
Counter 2
Range 3 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A320.03 High-speed
Counter 2
Range 4 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A320.04 High-speed
Counter 2
Range 5 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A320.05 High-speed
Counter 2
Range 6 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A320.06 High-speed
Counter 2
Range 7 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A320.07 High-speed
Counter 2
Range 8 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A320.08 High-speed
Counter 2
Comparison
In-progress
Flag
OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed.
when com-
parison
operation
starts or
stops.
---
A320.09 High-speed
Counter 2
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
Cleared when PV is changed.
OFF: Normal
when an
overflow or
underflow
occurs.
---
A320.10 High-speed
Counter 2
Count Direc-
tion
compared with the PLC in last cycle
to determine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
used for
high-speed
counter,
valid dur-
ing counter
operation.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
548
Counter 3
Range 1 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
ON: PV in range
each cycle
during
oversee-
ing pro-
cess.
Refreshed
when
PRV(881)
instruction
is exe-
cuted for
the corre-
sponding
counter.
---
A321.01 High-speed
Counter 3
Range 2 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A321.02 High-speed
Counter 3
Range 3 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A321.03 High-speed
Counter 3
Range 4 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A321.04 High-speed
Counter 3
Range 5 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A321.05 High-speed
Counter 3
Range 6 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A321.06 High-speed
Counter 3
Range 7 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A321.07 High-speed
Counter 3
Range 8 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A321.08 High-speed
Counter 3
Comparison
In-progress
Flag
OFF: Stopped.
ON: Being executed
when com-
parison
operation
starts or
stops.
---
A321.09 High-speed
Counter 3
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
OFF: Normal
when an
overflow or
underflow
occurs.
---
A321.10 High-speed
Counter 3
Count Direc-
tion
compared with the PC in last cycle to
determine the direction.
OFF: Decrementing
ON: Incrementing
used for
high-speed
counter,
valid dur-
ing counter
operation.
---
A339
and
A340
All Maximum Dif-
ferentiation
Flag Number
These words contain the maximum
value of the differentiation flag num-
bers being used by differentiation
instructions.
--- See
Function
column.
Cleared Written at
the start of
operation
A295.13
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
549
A342 A342.03 Memory Cas-
sette Write
Flag
ON when data is being written to the
Memory Cassette.
OFF: Not writ-
ing
ON: Writing
Retained Cleared --- ---
A342.04 Memory Cas-
sette Read
Flag
ON when data is being read from the
Memory Cassette.
OFF: Not
reading
ON: Reading
A342.05 Memory Cas-
sette Verify
Flag
ON when data is being compared
with data on the Memory Cassette.
OFF: Not veri-
fying
ON: Verifying
A342.07 Memory Cas-
sette Initializa-
tion Error Flag
ON when an error occurs in initializ-
ing the Memory Cassette.
OFF the next time the Memory Cas-
sette is accessed normally (initial-
ized, written, read, or compared).
OFF: No error
ON: Error
A342.08 Memory Cas-
sette Write
Error Flag
ON when an error occurs in writing
OFF: No error
ON: Error
A342.10 Memory Cas-
sette Read
Error Flag
ON when an error occurs in reading
OFF: No error
ON: Error
A342.12 Memory Cas-
sette Mis-
match Flag
ON the data in the CPU Unit is not
the same as the data in the Memory
Cassette when a verification opera-
tion is performed.
OFF: Match
ON: Mis-
match
A342.13 Memory Cas-
sette Access
Flag
ON when the Memory Cassette is
being accessed.
OFF when access is completed.
OFF: Not
being
accessed
ON: Being
accessed
Cleared --- ---
A342.15 Memory Cas-
sette Flag
ON when a Memory Cassette is
mounted.
OFF when a Memory Cassette is not
mounted.
OFF: No
Memory Cas-
sette
ON: Memory
Cassette
mounted
A345 A345.00 FB Program
Data Flag
Turns ON if the FB program memory
contains FB program data.
OFF: No data
ON: Data
present
Retained Cleared Download-
ing pro-
grams from
CX-Pro-
grammer
or Memory
Cassette
or clearing
VM
---
A345.01 Program Index
File Flag
Turns ON when the comment mem-
ory contains a program index file.
OFF: No file
ON: File
present
Download-
ing pro-
grams from
CX-Pro-
grammer
or Memory
Cassette
A345.02 Comment File
Flag
ory contains a comment file.
OFF: No file
ON: File
present
A345.03 Symbol Table
File Flag
ory contains a symbol table file.
OFF: No file
ON: File
present
A345.04 DM Initial Val-
ues Flag
ON when DM initial values are stored
in the flash memory.
OFF: No val-
ues stored
ON: Values
stored
--- --- --- ---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
550
A351
to
A354
All Calendar/
Clock Area
These words contain the CPU Units
internal clock data in BCD. The clock
can be set from the CX-Programmer
such as a Programming Console,
with the DATE(735) instruction, or
with a FINS command (CLOCK
WRITE, 0702).
--- Retained Retained Written
every cycle
---
A351.00
to
A351.07
Seconds (00 to 59) (BCD)
A351.08
to
A351.15
Minutes (00 to 59) (BCD)
A352.00
to
A352.07
Hours (00 to 23) (BCD)
A352.08
to
A352.15
Day of the month (01 to 31) (BCD)
A353.00
to
A353.07
Month (01 to 12) (BCD)
A353.08
to
A353.15
Year (00 to 99) (BCD)
A354.00
to
A354.07
Day of the week (00 to 06) (BCD)
00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tues-
day,
03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday,
05: Friday, 06: Saturday
A360
to
A391
A360.01
to
A391.15
Executed FAL
Number Flags
The flag corresponding to the speci-
fied FAL number will be turned ON
when FAL(006) is executed. Bits
A360.01 to A391.15 correspond to
FAL numbers 001 to 511.
The flag will be turned OFF when the
error is cleared.
ON: That FAL
was executed
OFF: That
FAL wasnt
executed
Retained Cleared Refreshed
when error
occurs.
A402.15
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
551
A392 A392.04 Serial Port 2
Error Flag
(CP1L M-type
CPU Units)
ON when an error has occurred at
serial port 2 of a CP1L M-type CPU
Unit. (Not valid in Peripheral Bus
Mode or NT Link mode.)
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
occurs.
---
Serial Port 1
Error Flag
(CP1L L-type
CPU Units)
ON when an error has occurred at
serial port 1 of a CP1L L-type CPU
Unit. (Not valid in Peripheral Bus
Mode or NT Link mode.)
A392.05 Serial Port 2
Send Ready
Flag (No-pro-
tocol mode)
(CP1L M-type
CPU Units)
ON when the serial port 2 of a CP1L
M-type CPU Unit is able to send data
in no-protocol mode.
ON: Able-to-
send
OFF: Unable-
to-send
Retained Cleared Written
after trans-
mission
---
Serial Port 1
Send Ready
Flag (No-pro-
tocol mode)
(CP1L L-type
CPU Units)
L-type CPU Unit is able to send data
Reception
Completed
Flag (No-pro-
tocol mode)
(CP1L M-type
CPU Units)
M-type CPU Unit has completed the
reception in no-protocol mode.
When the number of bytes was
specified: ON when the specified
number of bytes is received.
When the end code was specified:
ON when the end code is received
or 256 bytes are received.
ON: Recep-
tion com-
pleted
OFF: Recep-
tion not com-
pleted
after
reception
---
Serial Port 1
Reception
Completed
Flag (No-pro-
tocol mode)
(CP1L L-type
CPU Units)
L-type CPU Unit has completed the
Reception
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol
mode) (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
ON when a data overflow occurred
during reception through the serial
port 2 of a CP1L M-type CPU Unit in
no-protocol mode.
specified: ON when more data is
received after the reception was
completed but before RXD(235)
was executed.
ON when more data is received
after the end code was received
but before RXD(235) was exe-
cuted.
ON when 257 bytes are received
before the end code.
ON: Overflow
OFF: No
overflow
Serial Port 1
Reception
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol
mode) (CP1L
L-type CPU
Units)
port 1 of a CP1L L-type CPU Unit in
no-protocol mode.
was executed.
cuted.
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
552
Communica-
tions Error
Flag (CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
ON when a communications error
has occurred at the serial port 1 of
a CP1L M-type CPU Unit. (Not
valid in Peripheral Bus Mode or NT
Link mode.)
ON when a timeout error, overrun
error, framing error, parity error, or
BCC error occurs in Serial Gate-
way mode.
ON: Error
OFF: No error
Send Ready
Flag (No-pro-
tocol Mode)
(CP1L M-type
CPU Units)
M-type CPU Unit is able to send data
ON: Able-to-
send
OFF: Unable-
to-send
after trans-
mission
---
Reception
Completed
Flag (No-pro-
tocol Mode)
(CP1L M-type
CPU Units)
M-type CPU Unit has completed the
ON: Recep-
tion com-
pleted
OFF: Recep-
tion not com-
pleted
after
reception
---
Reception
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol
Mode) (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
port 1 of a CP1L M-type CPU Unit in
no-protocol mode.
was executed.
cuted.
ON: Overflow
OFF: No
overflow
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
553
A393 A393.00
to
A393.07
Serial Port 2
PT Communi-
cations Flags
(CP1L M-type
CPU Units)
The corresponding bit will be ON
when the serial port 2 of a CP1L M-
type CPU Unit is communicating with
a PT in NT Link or Serial PLC Link
mode.
ON: Commu-
nicating
OFF: Not
communicat-
ing
when there
is a nor-
mal
response
to the
token.
---
Serial Port 1
PT Communi-
cations Flags
(CP1L L-type
CPU Units)
when the serial port 1 of a CP1L L-
a PT in NT Link or Serial PLC Link
mode.
A393.08
to
A393.15
Serial Port 2
PT Priority
Registered
Flags (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
The corresponding bit will be ON for
the PT that has priority when the
Unit is communicating in NT link
mode.
These flags are written when the pri-
ority registration command is
received.
ON: Priority
registered
OFF: Priority
not registered
Retained Cleared See Func-
tion col-
umn.
---
Serial Port 1
PT Priority
Registered
Flags (CP1L
L-type CPU
Units)
mode.
These flags are written when the pri-
ority registration command is
received.
A393.00
to
A393.15
Serial Port 2
Reception
Counter (No-
protocol
Mode) (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
Indicates (in binary) the number of
bytes of data received when the
Unit is in no-protocol mode.
--- Retained Cleared Refreshed
when data
is received.
---
Serial Port 1
Reception
Counter (No-
protocol
Mode) (CP1L
L-type CPU
Units)
bytes of data received when the
Unit is in no-protocol mode.
A394 A394.00
to
A394.07
Serial Port 1
PT Communi-
cations Flags
(CP1L M-type
CPU Units)
when the serial port 1 of a CP1L M-
a PT in NT link mode.
ON: Commu-
nicating
OFF: Not
communicat-
ing
when there
is a nor-
mal
response
to the
token.
---
A394.08
to
A394.15
Serial Port 1
PT Priority
Registered
Flags (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
mode.
ON: Priority
registered
OFF: Priority
not registered
Retained Cleared See Func-
tion col-
umn.
---
A394.00
to
A394.15
Serial Port 1
Reception
Counter (No-
protocol
Mode) (CP1L
L-type CPU
Units)
bytes of data received when serial
port 1 of a CP1L L-type CPU Unit is
when data
is received.
---
A395 A395.12 DIP Switch
Pin 6 Status
Flag
The status of pin 6 on the DIP switch
on the front of the CPU Unit is written
to this flag every cycle.
ON: Pin 6 ON
OFF: Pin 6
OFF
Retained See
Func-
tion col-
umn.
Written
every
cycle.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
554
A400 All Error code When a non-fatal error (user-defined
FALS(006) or system error) or a fatal
error (user-defined FALS(007) or
system error) occurs, the 4-digit
hexadecimal error code is written to
this word. When two or more errors
occur simultaneously, the highest
error code will be recorded.
when error
occurs.
---
A401 A401.00 Other Fatal
Error Flag
ON when a fatal error that is not
defined for A401.01 to A401.15
occurs. Detailed information is output
to the bits of A314.
There are no errors that affect this
flag at this time. This flag is reserved
by the system.
OFF: No
other fatal
error
ON: Other
fatal error
Cleared Cleared Refreshed
when error
occurs.
A314
A401.06 FALS Error
Flag
(fatal error)
ON when a fatal error is generated
by the FALS(006) instruction. The
CPU Unit will stop operating and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light.
The corresponding error code will be
written to A400. Error codes C101 to
C2FF correspond to FALS numbers
001 to 511.
This flag will be turned OFF when
the FALS errors are cleared.
ON:
FALS(006)
executed
OFF:
FALS(006)
not executed
when error
occurs.
A400
A401.08 Cycle Time
Too Long Flag
(fatal error)
ON if the cycle time exceeds the
maximum cycle time set in the PLC
Setup (the cycle time monitoring
time). CPU Unit operation will stop
and the ERR/ALM indicator on the
front of the CPU Unit will light.
the error is cleared.
OFF: Cycle
time under
max.
ON: Cycle
time over
max.
when the
cycle time
exceeds
maximum.
PLC
Setup
(Cycle
time moni-
toring
time)
A401.09 Program Error
Flag
(fatal error)
ON when program contents are
incorrect.
ERR/ALM indicator on the front of
the CPU Unit will light. The task num-
ber where the error occurred will be
stored in A294 and the program
address will be stored in A298 and
A299.
The type of program error that
occurred will be stored in A295.08 to
A295.15. Refer to the description of
A295 for more details on program
errors.
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
occurs.
A294,
A295,
A298 and
A299
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
555
A401 A401.11 Too Many I/O
Points Flag
(fatal error)
ON when the number of Expansion
Units and Expansion I/O Units
exceeds the limit, when the number
of words allocated to these Units
exceeds the limit, are mounted.
the CPU Unit will light.
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
occurs.
A407
A401.14 I/O Bus Error
Flag
(fatal error)
ON in the following cases:
When an error occurs in a data
transfer between the CPU Unit
and a Expansion Unit or Expan-
sion I/O Unit. If this happens,
0A0A hex will be output to A404.
(This flag will be turned OFF when
the error is cleared.)
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
occurs.
A404
A401.15 Memory Error
Flag
(fatal error)
ON when an error occurred in mem-
ory or there was an error in auto-
matic transfer from the Memory
Cassette when the power was turned
ON.
The location where the error
occurred is indicated in A403.00 to
A403.08, and A403.09 will be turned
ON if there was an error during auto-
matic transfer at startup.
the error is cleared. (The automatic
transfer at startup error cannot be
cleared without turning OFF the
PLC.)
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
occurs.
A403.00
to
A403.08,
A403.09
A402 A402.00 Other Fatal
Error Flag
ON when a non-fatal error that is not
defined for A402.01 to A402.15
occurs. Detailed information is output
to the bits of A314.
There are no errors that affect this
flag at this time. This flag is reserved
by the system.
OFF: No
other fatal
error
ON: Other
fatal error
when error
occurs.
A315
A402.04 Battery Error
Flag
(non-fatal
error)
ON if the CPU Units battery is dis-
connected or its voltage is low and
the Detect Battery Error setting has
been set in the PLC Setup.
The CPU Unit will continue operating
front of the CPU Unit will flash.
This flag can be used to control an
external warning light or other indica-
tor to indicate that the battery needs
to be replaced.
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
occurs.
PLC
Setup
(Detect
Battery
Error)
A402.10 PLC Setup
Error Flag
(non-fatal
error)
ON when there is a setting error in
the PLC Setup. The CPU Unit will
continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the
CPU Unit will flash. The location of
the error will be written to A406.
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
occurs.
A406
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
556
A402 A402.15 FAL Error Flag
(non-fatal
error)
ON when a non-fatal error is gener-
ated by executing FAL(006). The
CPU Unit will continue operating and
the ERR/ALM indicator on the front
of the CPU Unit will flash.
The bit in A360 to A391 that corre-
sponds to the FAL number specified
in FALS(006) will be turned ON and
the corresponding error code will be
written to A400. Error codes 4101 to
42FF correspond to FAL numbers
001 to 2FF (0 to 511).
ON:
FALS(006)
error occurred
OFF:
FALS(006)
not executed
when error
occurs.
A360 to
A391,
A400
A403 A403.00
to
A403.08
Memory Error
Location
When a memory error occurs, the
Memory Error Flag (A40115) is
turned ON and one of the following
flags is turned ON to indicate the
memory area where the error
occurred
A403.00: User program
A403.04: PLC Setup
A403.07: Routing Table
When a memory error occurs, the
CPU Unit will continue operating and
of the CPU Unit will flash.
(The corresponding flag will be
turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
occurs.
A401.15
A403.09 Memory Cas-
sette startup
Transfer Error
Flag
ON when automatic transfer at star-
tup has been selected and an error
occurs during automatic transfer. An
error will occur if there is a transfer
error, the specified file does not exist,
or the Memory Cassette is not
installed.
the error is cleared by turning the
power OFF. The error cannot be
cleared without turning the power
OFF.)
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when
power is
turned ON.
---
A403.10 Flash Mem-
ory Error Flag
ON when the flash memory is physi-
cally destroyed.
ON: Error
OFF: No error
when error
is
detected.
---
A404 All I/O Bus Error
Details
Contains information on I/O bus
errors.
The CPU Unit will stop operating and
of the CPU Unit will light.
(A401.04 (I/O Bus Error Flag) will
turn ON.)
(This information will be cleared
when the error is cleared.)
0A0A hex:
CPM1A Unit
error
0000 hex: CJ-
series Unit
error, 1st Unit
0001 hex: CJ-
series Unit
error, 2nd
Unit
0F0F hex: CJ-
series Unit
error,
unknown Unit
0E0E hex:
CJ-series Unit
error, no End
cover
when error
is
detected.
A401.14
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
557
A406 All PLC Setup
Error Location
When there is a setting error in the
PLC Setup, the location of that error
is written to A406 in 4-digit hexadeci-
mal.
The CPU Unit will continue operating
front of the CPU Unit will flash.
(A406 will be cleared when the
cause of the error is eliminated.)
0000 to 01FF
hexadecimal
when error
occurs.
A402.10
A407 A407.00
to
A407.12
Too Many I/O
Points, Details
Always 0000 hex. 0000 hex Cleared Cleared --- A401.11,
A407.13
to
A407.15
A407.13
to
A407.15
Too Many I/O
Points, Cause
The 3-digit binary value of these bits
indicates the cause of the Too Many
I/O Points Error.
Note These bits will be cleared
when the error is cleared.
010: Too
many Expan-
sion Unit and
Expansion I/O
Unit words
011: Too
many Expan-
sion Units
and Expan-
sion I/O Units
when error
occurs.
---
A424 A424.00
to
A424.15
Error Option
Board Flags
The bit corresponding to the option
slot turns ON when an error occurs
in an Option Board (A315.13 will be
ON).
Bit 00: Option slot 1
Bit 01: Option slot 2
ON: Error
OFF: No error
Cleared Cleared --- A353.13
A436 A436.00
to
A436.02
CPM1A Unit
Error Flags
ON when an error occurs in a CP-
series Expansion Unit or Expansion
I/O Unit.
A436.00: 1st Unit
A436.10: 2nd Unit
A436.02: 3rd Unit
OFF: No error
ON: Error
A437 All Number of
Connected
CPM1A Units
Stores the number of Expansion
Units and Expansion I/O Units con-
nected as a hexadecimal number.
Note This information is valid only
when a Too Many I/O Points
error has occurred. CP1W/
CPM1A-TS002 and CP1W/
CPM1A-TS102 are each
counted as two Units.
0000 to 0007
hex
A438 All Pulse Output
2 Stop Error
Code
If a Pulse Output Stop Error occurs
for pulse output 2, the error code is
stored.
when ori-
gin search
starts.
Refreshed
when a
pulse out-
put stop
error
occurs.
---
3 Stop Error
Code
stored.
when ori-
gin search
starts.
Refreshed
when a
pulse out-
put stop
error
occurs.
---
A440 All Max. Interrupt
Task Process-
ing Time
Contains the Maximum Interrupt
Task Processing Time in units of
0.1 ms.
(This value is written after the inter-
rupt task with the max. processing
time is executed and cleared when
PLC operation begins.)
0000 to FFFF
hexadecimal
Cleared Cleared See Func-
tion col-
umn.
---
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
558
A441 All Interrupt Task
With Max.
Processing
Time
Contains the task number of the
interrupt task with the maximum pro-
cessing time. Hexadecimal values
8000 to 80FF correspond to task
numbers 00 to FF. Bit 15 is turned
ON when an interrupt has occurred.
(This value is written after the inter-
rupt task with the max. processing
time is executed and cleared when
PLC operation begins.)
8000 to 80FF
hexadecimal
Cleared Cleared See Func-
tion col-
umn.
---
0 Stop Error
Code
written to this word.
when ori-
gin search
starts.
Refreshed
when a
pulse out-
put stop
error
occurs.
---
A445 Pulse Output
1 Stop Error
Code
written to this word.
--- --- ---
A494 A494.00
to
A494.07
Memory
Casette Verifi-
cation Results
Stores the results of comparing data
in the Memory Cassette and CPU
Unit. This information is cleared the
next time the Memory Cassette is
accessed normally (initialized, writ-
ten, read, or compared).
A494.00: User program is different.
A494.01: Function block sources are
different.
A494.02: Parameter area is different.
A494.03: Symbol table is different.
A494.04: Comments are different.
A494.05: Program indices are differ-
ent.
A494.06: Data memory is different.
A494.07: DM initial values are differ-
ent.
OFF: Match
ON: Mis-
match
When
Memory
Cassette is
compared.
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write
timing
Related
flags, set-
tings
Words Bits
559
Read/Write Area (Set by User)
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
A500 A500.12 IOM Hold Bit Turn this bit ON to preserve the sta-
tus of the I/O Memory when shifting
from PROGRAM to RUN or MONI-
TOR mode or vice versa. The I/O
Memory includes the CIO Area,
Transition Flags, Timer Flags and
PVs, Index Registers, and Data Reg-
isters.
(If the status of the IOM Hold Bit itself
is preserved in the PLC Setup (IOM
Hold Bit Status), the status of the I/O
Memory Area will be retained when
the PLC is turned ON or power is
interrupted.)
ON: Retained
OFF: Not
retained
Retained See
Function
column.
See
Function
column.
PLC
Setup
(IOM Hold
Bit Status
setting)
A500.13 Forced Sta-
tus Hold Bit
Turn this bit ON to preserve the sta-
tus of bits that have been force-set or
force-reset when shifting from PRO-
GRAM to MONITOR mode or vice
versa. Bits that have been force-set
or force-reset will always return to
their default status when shifting to
RUN mode.
(If the status of the Forced Status
Hold Bit itself is preserved in the PLC
Setup (Forced Status Hold Bit Sta-
tus), the status of force-set and
force-reset bits will be retained when
the PLC is turned ON or power is
interrupted.)
ON: Retained
OFF: Not
retained
Retained See
Function
column.
See
Function
column.
PLC
Setup
(Forced
Status
Hold Bit
Status
setting)
A500.14 Error Log
Reset Bit
Turn this bit ON to reset the Error
Log Pointer (A300) to 00.
The contents of the Error Log Area
itself (A100 to A199) are not cleared.
(This bit is automatically reset to 0
after the Error Log Pointer is reset.)
OFF to ON:
Clear
Retained Cleared --- A100 to
A199,
A300
A500.15 Output OFF
Bit
Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all out-
puts from the CPU Unit, CPM1A
Units, and Special I/O Units. The INH
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will light while this bit is ON.
(The status of the Output OFF Bit is
retained through power interrup-
tions.)
560
A508 A508.09 Differentiate
Monitor
Completed
Flag
ON when the differentiate monitor
condition has been established dur-
ing execution of differentiation moni-
toring.
(This flag will be cleared to 0 when
differentiation monitoring starts.)
ON: Monitor
condition
established
OFF: Not yet
established
A508.11 Trace Trig-
ger Monitor
Flag
ON when a trigger condition is estab-
lished by the Trace Start Bit
(A508.14). OFF when the next Data
Trace is started by the Sampling
Start bit (A508.15).
ON: Trigger
condition
established
OFF: Not yet
established or
not tracing
A508.12 Trace Com-
pleted Flag
ON when sampling of a region of
trace memory has been completed
during execution of a Trace.
OFF when the next time the Sam-
pling Start Bit (A508.15) is turned
ON.
ON: Trace
completed
OFF: Not trac-
ing or trace in
progress
A508.13 Trace Busy
Flag
ON when the Sampling Start Bit
(A508.15) is turned ON. OFF when
the trace is completed.
ON: Trace in
progress
OFF: Not trac-
ing (not sam-
pling)
A508.14 Trace Start
Bit
Turn this bit ON to establish the trig-
ger condition. The offset indicated by
the delay value (positive or negative)
determines which data samples are
valid.
ON: Trace trig-
ger condition
established
OFF: Not
established
A508.15 Sampling
Start Bit
When a data trace is started by turn-
ing this bit ON from the CX-Program-
mer, the PLC will begin storing data
in Trace Memory by one of the three
following methods:
1) Data is sampled at regular inter-
vals (10 to 2,550 ms).
2) Data is sampled when TRSM(045)
is executed in the program.
3) Data is sampled at the end of
every cycle.
The operation of A508.15 can be
controlled only from the CX-Pro-
grammer.
OFF to ON:
Starts data
trace (sam-
pling)
Turned ON
from Program-
ming Device.
A510 to
A511
All startup Time These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON. The
contents are updated every time that
the power is turned ON. The data is
stored in BCD.
A510.00 to A510.07: Second (00 to
59)
A510.08 to A510.15: Minute (00 to
59)
A511.00 to A511.07: Hour (00 to 23)
A511.08 to A511.15: Day of month
(01 to 31)
See Function
column.
Retained See
Function
column.
Refresh-
ed when
power is
turned
ON.
---
A512 to
A513
All Power Inter-
ruption Time
These words contain the time at
which the power was interrupted.
The contents are updated every time
that the power is interrupted. The
data is stored in BCD.
A512.00 to A512.07: Second (00 to
59)
A512.08 to A512.15: Minute (00 to
59)
A513.00 to A513.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(01 to 31)
(These words are not cleared at star-
tup.)
See Function
column.
Retained Retained Written at
power
interrup-
tion
---
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
561
A514 All Number of
Power Inter-
ruptions
Contains the number of times that
power has been interrupted since the
power was first turned ON. The data
is stored in binary. To reset this
value, overwrite the current value
with 0000.
(This word is not cleared at startup,
but it is cleared when the Memory
Corruption Detected Flag (A395.11)
goes ON.)
0000 to FFFF
hexadecimal
Retained Retained Refresh-
ed when
power is
turned
ON.
A395.11
A515 to
A517
All Operation
Start Time
The time that operation started as a
result of changing the operating
mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is
stored here in BCD.
A515.00 to A515.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A515.08 to A515.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A516.00 to A516.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(01 to 31)
A517.00 to A517.07: Month (01 to
12)
A517.08 to A517.15: Year (00 to 99)
Note The previous start time is
stored after turning ON the
power supply until operation
is started.
See at left. Retained Retained See at
left.
---
A518 to
A520
All Operation
End Time
The time that operation stopped as a
result of changing the operating
mode to PROGRAM mode is stored
here in BCD.
A518.00 to A518.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A518.08 to A518.15: Minutes (01 to
59)
A519.00 to A519.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(01 to 31)
A520.00 to A520.07: Month (01 to
12)
A520.08 to A520.15: Year (00 to 99)
Note If an error occurs in operation,
the time of the error will be
stored. If the operating mode
is then changed to PRO-
GRAM mode, the time that
PROGRAM mode was
entered will be stored.
See at left. Retained Retained See at
left.
---
A523 All Total Power
ON Time
Contains the total time that the PLC
has been ON in 10-hour units. The
data is stored in binary and it is
updated every 10 hours. To reset this
value, overwrite the current value
with 0000.
(This word is not cleared at startup,
but it is cleared to 0000 when the
Memory Corruption Detected Flag
(A395.11) goes ON.)
0000 to FFFF
hexadecimal
Retained Retained --- ---
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
562
Restart Bit
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
Turn this bit ON to restart the serial
port 2 of a CP1L M-type CPU Unit.
(Do not use this bit when the port is
operating in Peripheral Bus Mode.)
Note This bit is turned OFF auto-
matically when the restart
processing is completed.
OFF to ON:
Restart
Serial Port 1
Restart Bit
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Units)
port 1 of a CP1L L-type CPU Unit.
(Do not use this bit when the port is
operating in Peripheral Bus Mode.)
Restart Bit
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
port 1 of a CP1L M-type CPU Unit.
0 to ON:
Restart
A527 A527.00
to
A527.07
Online Edit-
ing Disable
Bit Validator
The Online Editing Disable Bit
(A527.09) is valid only when this byte
contains 5A.
To disable online editing from the
CX-Programmer, set this byte to 5A
and turn ON A527.09.
(Online editing refers to changing or
adding to the program while the PLC
is operating in MONITOR mode.)
5A:
A527.09
enabled
Other value:
A527.09 dis-
abled
Retained Cleared --- A527.09
A527.09 Online Edit-
ing Disable
Bit
Turn this bit ON to disable online
editing. The setting of this bit is valid
only when A527.00 to A527.07 have
been set to 5A.
ON: Disabled
OFF: Not dis-
abled
Retained Cleared --- A527.00
to
A527.07
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
563
A528 A528.00
to
A528.07
Serial Port 2
Error Flags
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
These flags indicate what kind of
error has occurred at the serial port 2
of a CP1L M-type CPU Unit; they are
automatically turned OFF when the
serial port 2 is restarted.
(These flags are not valid in periph-
eral bus mode and only bit 5 is valid
in NT Link mode.)
PLC Link Polling Unit:
Bit 05: ON for timeout error.
PLC Link Polled Unit:
Bit 03: ON for framing error.
Bit 04: ON for overrun error.
These bits can be cleared by the CX-
Programmer.
Bits 00 and 01:
Not used.
Bit 02: ON for
parity error.
Bit 03: ON for
framing error.
Bit 04: ON for
overrun error.
Bit 05: ON for
timeout error.
Bits 06 and 07:
Not used.
Serial Port 1
Error Flags
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Units)
of a CP1L L-type CPU Unit; they are
in NT Link mode.)
Programmer.
A528.08
to
A528.15
Serial Port 1
Error Code
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
of a CP1L M-type CPU Unit; they are
in NT Link mode.)
Programmer.
Bits 08 and 09:
Not used.
Bit 10: ON for
parity error.
Bit 11: ON for
framing error.
Bit 12: ON for
overrun error.
Bit 13: ON for
timeout error.
Bits 14 and 15:
Not used.
A529 All FAL/FALS
Number for
System
Error Simu-
lation
Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to
use to simulate the system error
using FAL(006) or FALS(007).
When FAL(006) or FALS(007) is exe-
cuted and the number in A529 is the
same as the one specified in the
operand of the instruction, the sys-
tem error given in the operand of the
instruction will be generated instead
of a user-defined error.
0001 to 01FF
hex: FAL/FALS
numbers 1 to
511
0000 or 0200
to FFFF hex:
No FAL/FALS
number for sys-
tem error simu-
lation. (No error
will be gener-
ated.)
Counter 0
Reset Bit
When the reset method is set to
Phase-Z signal + Software reset, the
corresponding high-speed counter's
PV will be reset if the phase-Z signal
is received while this bit is ON.
When the reset method is set to Soft-
ware reset, the corresponding high-
speed counter's PV will be reset in
the cycle when this bit turns ON.
--- Retained Cleared --- ---
A531.01 High-speed
Counter 1
Reset Bit
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
564
Counter 0
Gate Bit
When a counter's Gate Bit is ON, the
counter's PV will not be changed
even if pulse inputs are received for
the counter.
When the bit is turned OFF again,
counting will restart and the high-
speed counter's PV will be refreshed.
When the reset method is set to
Phase-Z signal + Software reset, the
Gate Bit is disabled while the corre-
sponding Reset Bit (A531.00 or
A531.01) is ON.
A531.09 High-speed
Counter 1
Gate Bit
A532 All Interrupt
Counter 0
Counter SV
Used for interrupt input 0 in counter
mode.
Sets the count value at which the
interrupt task will start. Interrupt task
140 will start when interrupt counter
0 has counted this number of pulses.
Retained when operation starts.
A533 All Interrupt
Counter 1
Counter SV
mode.
A534 All Interrupt
Counter 2
Counter SV
mode.
A535 All Interrupt
Counter 3
Counter SV
mode.
A536 All Interrupt
Counter 0
Counter PV
These words contain the interrupt
counter PVs for interrupt inputs oper-
ating in counter mode.
In increment mode, the counter PV
starts incrementing from 0. When the
counter PV reaches the counter SV,
the PV is automatically reset to 0.
In decrement mode, the counter PV
starts decrementing from the counter
SV. When the counter PV reaches
the 0, the PV is automatically reset to
the SV.
--- --- Retained Refresh-
ed when
interrupt
is gener-
ated.
Refresh-
ed when
INI(880)
instruc-
tion is
executed.
---
A537 All Interrupt
Counter 1
Counter PV
--- --- ---
A538 All Interrupt
Counter 2
Counter PV
--- --- ---
A539 All Interrupt
Counter 3
Counter PV
--- --- ---
A540 A540.00 Pulse Out-
put 0 Reset
Bit
The pulse output 0 PV (contained in
A276 and A277) will be cleared when
this bit is turned ON.
--- Retained Cleared --- A276 and
A277
A540.08 Pulse Out-
put 0 CW
Limit Input
Signal Flag
This is the CW limit input signal for
pulse output 0, which is used in the
origin search. To use this signal,
write the input from the actual sensor
as an input condition in the ladder
program and output the result to this
flag.
A540.09 Pulse Out-
put 0 CCW
Limit Input
Signal Flag
This is the CCW limit input signal for
flag.
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
565
put 0 Posi-
tioning
Completed
Signal
This is the positioning completed
input signal used in the origin search
for pulse output 0. The input signal
from the servo driver is output to this
bit from the ladder program to enable
using the signal.
--- Retained Cleared ---
put 1 Reset
Bit
The pulse output 1 PV (contained in
A278 and A279) will be cleared when
this bit is turned ON.
--- Retained Cleared --- A278 and
A279
A541.08 Pulse Out-
put 1 CW
Limit Input
Signal Flag
This is the CW limit input signal for
flag.
A541.09 Pulse Out-
put 1 CCW
Limit Input
Signal Flag
This is the CCW limit input signal for
flag.
A541.10 Pulse Out-
put 1 Posi-
tioning
Completed
Signal
This is the positioning completed
input signal used in the origin search
for pulse output 1. The input signal
from the servo driver is output to this
bit from the ladder program to enable
using the signal.
A562 A562.00 Error
Counter 0
Reset Bit
Turn ON this bit to reset the Error
Counter 0 Present Value and turn
OFF the Error Counter 0 Error Flag.
--- --- Cleared --- ---
A562.01 Error
Counter 0
Disable Bit
Turn ON this bit to hold the present
value of error counter 0.
ON: Error
counter value
held.
OFF: Error
counter value
not held.
--- Cleared --- ---
A563 A563.00 Error
Counter 1
Reset Bit
Turn ON this bit to reset the Error
Counter 1 Present Value and turn
OFF the Error Counter 0 Error Flag.
--- --- Cleared --- ---
A563.01 Error
Counter 1
Disable Bit
Turn ON this bit to hold the present
value of error counter 1.
ON: Error
counter value
held.
OFF: Error
counter value
not held.
--- Cleared --- ---
A580 A580.00
to
A580.03
FB Commu-
nications
Instruction
Retries
Automatically stores the number of
retries in the FB communications
instruction settings specified in the
PLC Setup.
0 to F hex --- Cleared Written at
start of
operation
A581 All FB Commu-
nications
Instruction
Response
Monitoring
Time
Automatically stores the FB commu-
nications instruction response moni-
toring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF
hex (Unit: 0.1 s;
Range: 0.1 to
6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
--- Cleared Written at
start of
operation
---
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
566
A598 A598.00 FPD Teach-
ing Bit
Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring
time automatically with the teaching
function.
While A598.00 is ON, FPD(269)
measures how long it takes for the
diagnostic output to go ON after the
execution condition goes ON. If the
measured time exceeds the monitor-
ing time, the measured time is multi-
plied by 1.5 and that value is stored
as the new monitoring time.
(The teaching function can be used
only when a word address has been
specified for the monitoring time
operand.)
ON: Teach
monitoring time
OFF: Teaching
function OFF
A600 to
A603
All Macro Area
Input Words
Before the subroutine specified in
MCRO(099) is executed, the source
words for the subroutine are trans-
ferred to A600 through A603 (input
parameter words).
Input data:
4 words
A604 to
A607
All Macro Area
Output
Words
After the subroutine specified in
MCRO(099) has been executed, the
results of the subroutine are trans-
ferred from A604 through A607 to
the specified destination words (out-
put parameter words).
Output data:
4 words
Settings
Changing
Flag (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
ON while the serial port 1s commu-
nications settings are being changed
for a CP1L M-type CPU Unit. This
flag will be turned ON when
STUP(237) is executed and it will be
turned OFF after the settings have
been changed.
ON: Changing
OFF: Not
changing
Settings
Changing
Flag (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
for a CP1L M-type CPU Unit. This
been changed.
ON: Changing
OFF: Not
changing
Serial Port 1
Settings
Changing
Flag (CP1L
L-type CPU
Units)
for a CP1L L-type CPU Unit. This
been changed.
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
567
Modbus-
RTU Easy
Master Exe-
cution Bit
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
Turn ON this bit to send a command
and receive a response for serial port
2 of a CP1L M-type CPU Unit using
the Modbus-RTU easy master func-
tion.
Note This bit will be turned OFF
automatically by the system
when communications have
been completed.
Turned ON:
Execution
started
ON: Execution
in progress.
OFF: Not exe-
cuted or execu-
tion completed.
Retained Cleared --- DM fixed
allocation
words for
Modbus-
RTU Easy
Master:
D32300 to
D32399
Serial Port 1
Modbus-
RTU Easy
Master Exe-
cution Bit
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Units)
1 of a CP1L L-type CPU Unit using
tion.
Note This bit will be turned OFF
automatically by the system
when communications have
been completed.
Modbus-
RTU Easy
Master Nor-
mal End
Flag (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
ON when one command has been
sent and the response received for
Unit using the Modbus-RTU easy
master function.
ON: Execution
normal.
OFF: Execution
error or still in
progress.
Retained Cleared ---
Serial Port 1
Modbus-
RTU Easy
Master Nor-
mal End
Flag (CP1L
L-type CPU
Units)
master function.
Modbus-
RTU Easy
Master Error
End Flag
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
ON when an error has occurred in
communications for serial port 2 of a
CP1L M-type CPU Unit using the
Modbus-RTU easy master function.
The error code is output to D32252
in the DM fixed allocation words for
Modbus-RTU Easy Master.
ON: Execution
error.
OFF: Execution
normal or still
in progress.
Serial Port 1
Modbus-
RTU Easy
Master Error
End Flag
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Units)
CP1L L-type CPU Unit using the
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
568
Modbus-
RTU Master
Execution
Bit (CP1L
M-type CPU
Units)
1 of a CP1L M-type CPU Unit using
tion.
This bit will be turned OFF automati-
cally by the system when communi-
cations have been completed.
Turned ON:
Execution
started
ON: Execution
in progress.
OFF: Not exe-
cuted or execu-
tion completed.
Retained Cleared --- DM fixed
allocation
words for
Modbus-
RTU Easy
Master:
D32200 to
D32299
Modbus-
RTU Master
Execution
Normal Flag
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
master function.
ON: Execution
normal.
OFF: Execution
error or still in
progress.
Modbus-
RTU Master
Execution
Error Flag
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Units)
CP1L M-type CPU Unit using the
ON: Execution
error.
OFF: Execution
normal or still
in progress.
A642 All Analog
Adjustment
PV
Stores the value set on the analog
adjuster as a hexadecimal value
(resolution: 1/256).
0000 to 00FF
hex
A643 All External
Analog Set-
ting Input
PV
Stores the value set from the exter-
nal analog setting input as a hexa-
decimal value (resolution: 1/256).
0000 to 00FF
hex
A720 to
A722
All Power ON
Clock Data 1
which the power was turned ON one
time before the startup time stored in
words A510 to A511.
A720.00 to A720.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A720.08 to A720.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A721.00 to A721.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A722.00 to A722.07: Month (01 to
12)
A722.08 to A722.15: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written
when
power is
turned
ON.
A723 to
A725
All Power ON
Clock Data 2
which the power was turned ON two
times before the startup time stored
in words A510 to A511.
A723.00 to A723.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A723.08 to A723.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A724.00 to A724.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A725.00 to A725.07: Month (01 to
12)
A725.08 to A725.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
A726 to
A728
All Power ON
Clock Data 3
which the power was turned ON
three times before the startup time
stored in words A510 to A511.
A726.00 to A726.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A726.08 to A726.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A727.00 to A727.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A728.00 to A728.07: Month (01 to
12)
A728.08 to A728.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
569
A729 to
A731
All Power ON
Clock Data 4
which the power was turned ON four
A729.00 to A729.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A729.08 to A729.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A730.00 to A730.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A731.00 to A731.07: Month (01 to
12)
A731.08 to A731.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
A732 to
A734
All Power ON
Clock Data 5
which the power was turned ON five
A732.00 to A732.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A732.08 to A732.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A733.00 to A733.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A734.00 to A734.07: Month (01 to
12)
A734.08 to A734.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
A735 to
A737
All Power ON
Clock Data 6
which the power was turned ON six
A735.00 to A735.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A735.08 to A735.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A736.00 to A736.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A737.00 to A737.07: Month (01 to
12)
A737.08 to A737.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
A738 to
A740
All Power ON
Clock Data 7
seven times before the startup time
A738.00 to A738.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A738.08 to A738.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A739.00 to A739.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A740.00 to A740.07: Month (01 to
12)
A740.08 to A740.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
A741 to
A743
All Power ON
Clock Data 8
eight times before the startup time
A741.00 to A741.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A741.08 to A741.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A742.00 to A742.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A743.00 to A743.07: Month (01 to
12)
A743.08 to A743.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
570
A744 to
A746
All Power ON
Clock Data 9
which the power was turned ON nine
A744.00 to A744.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A744.08 to A744.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A745.00 to A745.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A746.00 to A746.07: Month (01 to
12)
A746.08 to A746.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
A747 to
A749
All Power ON
Clock Data
10
which the power was turned ON ten
A747.00 to A747.07: Seconds (00 to
59)
A747.08 to A747.15: Minutes (00 to
59)
A748.00 to A748.07: Hour (00 to 23)
(00 to 31)
A749.00 to A749.07: Month (01 to
12)
A749.08 to A749.15: Year (00 to 99)
when
power is
turned
ON.
A751 A751.11 DM Initial
Values Read
Error Flag
ON when an error occurred in trans-
ferring DM initial values from the DM
initial value area in flash memory to
the DM Area.
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
(failed to load)
A751.12 DM Initial
Values Save
Execution
Error Flag
ON when the DM Initial Values
Transfer Password (A752) is incor-
rect or when the DM Initial values
area was not specified when starting
to transfer DM initial values from the
DM Area to the DM initial value area
in flash memory.
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
(failed to save)
A751.13 DM Initial
Values Save
Error Flag
ON when an error occurred in trans-
ferring DM initial values from the DM
Area to the DM initial value area in
flash memory.
OFF: Normal
ON: Error
(failed to save)
A751.14 DM Initial
Values Save
Flag
ON while DM initial values are being
transferred from the DM Area to the
DM initial value area in flash mem-
ory.
OFF when the transfer has been
completed.
OFF: Not being
saved
ON: Being
saved
A751.15 DM Initial
Values Save
Start Bit
Turn ON this bit to start transferring
DM initial values. This bit is valid only
when a correct password is stored in
A752 and the DM Area Initial Value
Area is specified (i.e., when A753.00
is ON).
The system will turn this bit OFF
automatically when the transfer has
been completed.
Turned ON:
Transfer
started
OFF: Not trans-
ferring
ON: Transfer-
ring
A752 All DM Initial
Values Save
Password
Set the passwords here to transfer
DM initial values between the DM
area and the DM initial value area in
flash memory. The transfer will not
be started unless the correct pass-
word is set.
The transfer is started when A751.15
is turned ON.
The password will be cleared by the
system when the transfer has been
completed.
A5A5 hex:
Save initial val-
ues from DM to
flash
A753 All DM Initial
Values Save
Area Speci-
fication
Specifies the area to be transferred
to flash memory.
0001 hex: DM
Area specified
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write
timing
Related
Flags,
Settings
Word Bits
571
Note The following flags are provided in a special read-only area and can be specified with the labels given in
the table. These flags are not contained in the Auxiliary Area. Refer to 4-14 Condition Flags and 4-15
Clock Pulses for details.
Flag area Name Label Meaning
Condition Code
Area
Error Flag ER Turns ON when an error occurs in processing an instructions, indi-
cating an error end to the instruction.
Access Error Flag AER Turns ON when an attempt is made to access an illegal area. The
status of this flag is maintain only during the current cycle and only
in the task in which it occurred.
Carry Flag CY Turns ON when there is a carry or borrow in a math operation,
when a bit is shifted into the Carry Flag, etc.
Greater Than Flag > Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is greater
than, when a value exceeds a specified range, etc.
Equals Flag = Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is equals,
when the result of a math operation is 0, etc.
Less Than Flag < Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is less than,
when a value is below a specified range, etc.
Negative Flag N Turns ON when the MSB in the result of a math operation is 1.
Overflow Flag OF Turns ON when the result of a math operation overflows.
Underflow Flag UF Turns ON when the result of a math operation underflows.
Greater Than or Equals
Flag
>= Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is greater than
or equals.
Not Equal Flag <> Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is not equal.
Less than or Equals Flag <= Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is less than or
equals.
Always ON Flag A1 This flag is always ON.
Always OFF Flag A0 This flag is always OFF.
Clock Pulse
Area
0.02-s clock pulse 0.02s Repeatedly turns ON for 0.02 s and OFF for 0.02 s.
1-s clock pulse 1s Repeatedly turns ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s.
1-min clock pulse 1min Repeatedly turns ON for 1 min and OFF for 1 min.
572
Details on Auxiliary Area Operation
A100 to A199: Error Log Area
The following data would be generated in an error record if a memory error (error code 80F1) occurred on 1
April 1998 at 17:10:30 with the error located in the PLC Setup (04 hex).
The following data would be generated in an error record if an FALS error with FALS number 001 occurred on
2 May 1997 at 8:30:15.
Error code
Error flag contents
min s
yr
mo
Error code
Error flag contents
min s
yr mo
day
hr
day hr
Error
record
Error
record
573
Error Codes and Error Flags
Note 1. C101 to C2FF will be stored for FALS numbers 001 to 511.
2. 4101 to 42FF will be stored for FAL numbers 001 to 511.
3. Only the contents of A295 is stored as the error flag contents for program errors.
A200.11: First Cycle Flag
A200.15: Initial Task Flag
A200.15 will turn ON during the first time a task is executed after it has reached executable status. It will be ON
only while the task is being executed and will not turn ON if following cycles.
Classification Error code Meaning Error flags
System-defined
fatal errors
80F1 Memory error A403
80CA I/O bus error A404
80E9 Duplicate number error A410, A411 to 416 (See note 3.)
80E1 Too many I/O error A407
80E0 I/O setting error ---
80F0 Program error A295 to A299 (See note 4.)
809F Cycle time too long error ---
User-defined
fatal errors
C101 to C2FF FALS instruction executed (See note 1.) ---
User-defined
non-fatal errors
4101 to 42FF FAL instruction executed (See note 2.) ---
System-defined
non-fatal errors
008B Interrupt task error A426
009A Basic I/O error A408
009B PLC Setup setting error A406
0200 to 020F CPU Bus Unit error A417
0300 to 035F Special I/O Unit error A418 to A423 (See note 5.)
00F7 Battery error ---
0400 to 040F CPU Bus Unit setup error A427
0500 to 055F Special I/O Unit setup error A428 to A433 (See note 5.)
Time
1 cycle
Execution
started.
A200.15
1 cycle
Executed
Executable status
574
A201.10: Online Editing Wait Flag
A202.00 to A202.07: Communications Port Enabled Flags
A300: Error Record Pointer
Online edit processing
A201.10
Wait
Online editing wait flag
CMN
SEND
PMCR
Port 0
Port 1
Port 7
Network communications in-
struction executed for port 0.
The program is designed so that CMND(490)
will be executed only when A202.00 is ON.
Instruction
execution
A202.00
A202.00
Error record 1
Error record 20
Example
Stored
Stored
Points to the next record to be used.
Stored
next
00 to 14 hex
575
A401.09: Program Error Flag
Error Address
Program Error Flag
(A401.09): ON
UM Overflow Error Flag A295.15
Illegal Instruction Flag A295.14
Distribution Overflow Error Flag A295.13
Task Error Flag A259.12
No END(001) Error Flag A295.11
Illegal Area Access Error Flag A295.10
Indirect DM Addressing Error Flag A295.09
Instruction Processing Error Flag (ER
Flag goes ON)
A295.08
576
577
Appendix E
Memory Map
PLC Memory Addresses
PLC memory addresses are set in Index Registers (IR00 to IR15) to indirectly address I/O memory. Normally,
use the MOVE TO REGISTER (MOVR(560)) and MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER
(MOVRW(561)) instructions to set PLC memory addresses into the Index Registers.
Some instructions, such as DATA SEARCH (SRCH(181)), FIND MAXIMUM (MAX(182)), and FIND MINIMUM
(MIN(183)), output the results of processing to an Index Register to indicate an PLC memory address.
There are also instructions for which Index Registers can be directly designated to use the PLC memory
addresses stored in them by other instructions. These instructions include DOUBLE MOVE (MOVL(498)),
some symbol comparison instructions (=L, <>L, <L, >L, <=L, and >=L), DOUBLE COMPARE (CMPL(060)),
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE (XCGL(562)), DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY (++L(591)), DOUBLE DECRE-
MENT BINARY (L(593)), DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY (+L(401)), DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY (L(411)), SET RECORD LOCATION (SETR(635)), and GET
RECORD LOCATION (GETR(636)).
The PLC memory addresses all are continuous and the user must be aware of the order and boundaries of the
memory areas. As reference, the PLC memory addresses are provided in a table at the end of this appendix.
Note Directly setting PLC memory addresses in the program should be avoided whenever possible. If PLC
memory addresses are set in the program, the program will be less compatible with new CPU Unit mod-
els or CPU Units for which changes have been made to the layout of the memory.
Memory Configuration
There are two classifications of the RAM memory (with battery backup) in a CP-series CPU Unit.
Parameter Areas: These areas contain CPU Unit system setting data, such as the PLC Setup, CPU Bus Unit
Setups, etc. An illegal access error will occur if an attempt is made to access any of the parameter areas from
an instruction in the user program.
I/O Memory Areas: These are the areas that can be specified as operands in the instructions in user pro-
grams.
578
Memory Map Appendix E
Memory Map
Note Do not access the areas indicated Reserved for system.
Note (1) Do not access areas reserved for the system.
(2) D10000 to D31999 (PLC memory addresses 12710 to 17CFF hex) cannot be used with CPU Units
with 14 or 20 I/O Points.
Classification PLC memory
addresses (hex)
User addresses Area
I/O memory
areas
0B100 to 0B7FF --- Reserved for system.
0B800 to 0B801 TK00 to TK31 Task Flag Area
0B802 to 0B83F --- Reserved for system.
0B840 to 0B9FF A0 to A447 Read-only Auxiliary Area
0BA00 to 0BBFF A448 to A959 Read/Write Auxiliary Area
0BC00 to 0BDFF --- Reserved for system.
0BE00 to 0BEFF T0000 to T4095 Timer Completion Flags
0BF00 to 0BFFF C0000 to C4095 Counter Completion Flags
0C000 to 0D7FF CIO 0 to CIO 6143 CIO Area
0D800 to 0D9FF H0 to H511 Holding Area
0DA00 to 0DDFF --- Reserved for system.
0DE00 to 0DFFF W0 to W511 Work Area
0E000 to 0EFFF T0000 to T4095 Timer PVs
0F000 to 0FFFF C0000 to C4095 Counter PVs
10000 to 17FFF D0 to D32767 DM Area (See note 2.)
18000 to FFFFF --- Reserved for system.
579
Appendix F
Connections to Serial Communications Option Boards
Connection Methods
Communications Modes and Ports
The following table shows the relationship between the communications ports and the communications modes
for the Serial Communications Option Boards.
Note (1) The NT-AL001-E Link Adapter can be used to convert between RS-232C and RS-422A/485 to en-
able 1:N communications.
(2) Use 4-wire connections between Link Adapters.
Models of Serial Communications Option Board
Note The CP1W-CIF11 is a non-isolated board, so the maximum transmission distance is 50 m. For distances
over 50 m, use the RS-232C port on the CP1W-CIF01 and then connect through the NT-AL001-E Link
Adapter, which is isolated. Doing so will enable a maximum transmission distance of 500 m.
Communications mode RS-232C
CP1W-CIF01
RS-422A/485
CP1W-CIF11
1:1 1:N
(See note 1.)
1:1 4-wire 1:N 4-wire 1:1 2-wire 1:N 2-wire
Host Link YES YES
(See note 2.)
YES YES No No
Serial PLC Links YES YES YES YES YES YES
Serial Gateway YES YES YES YES YES YES
No-protocol YES YES YES YES YES YES
1:N NT Link YES YES YES YES YES YES
1:1 NT Link YES No YES No YES No
1:1 Link Master YES No YES No YES No
1:1 Link Slave YES No YES No YES No
Model Port Maximum transmission
distance
Connection method
CP1W-CIF01 One RS-232C port 15 m Connector (D-sub, 9-pin female)
CP1W-CIF11 One RS-422A/485 port 50 m (See note.) Terminal block (using ferrules)
580
Connections to Serial Communications Option Boards Appendix F
Reducing Electrical Noise for External Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring communications cables, PLC power lines, and high-power
lines. When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid using I/O wires and other control wires in the
same cable.
If wiring racks are running in parallel, allow at least 300 mm between them.
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must be shielded from each other
using grounded steel sheet metal.
2-Wire and 4-Wire Connections
The transmission circuits for 2-wire and 4-wire connections are different, as shown in the following diagram.
Note (1) Use the same transmission circuit (2-wire or 4-wire) for all nodes.
(2) Do not use 4-wire connections when the 2/4-wire switch on the Board is set to 2-wire.
Communications
cables
Low-current cables
PLC power supply
and general control
circuit wiring
Power lines
300 mm min.
Ground to 100 or less.
Control cables
Power cables
300 mm min.
Communications
cables
PLC power supply
and general control
circuit wiring Power lines
200 mm min.
Ground to 100 or less.
Steel sheet metal

Example of 4-Wire
Connections
Example of 2-Wire
Connections
2/4-wire switch
(DPDT)
Option Board
2/4-wire switch
(DPDT)
Option Board
Not connected
Other Unit
Other Unit Other Unit Other Unit

581
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Settings
The NT-AL001-E Link Adapter has a DIP switch for setting RS-422A/485 communications conditions. When
connecting the Serial Communications Option Board, refer to the DIP switch settings shown in the following
table.
Note When connecting to a CP-series CPU Unit, turn OFF pin 5 and turn ON pin 6.
Connections for Host Link Communications
Port connections for Host Link communications are shown in the following table. Up to 32 nodes can be con-
nected for 1:N connections.
Note (1) Four-wire connections must be used for RS-422A/485 connections with Host Link communications.
(2) Resistance ON indicates the terminating resistance must be turned ON.
(3) 5-V power indicates that a 5-V power supply is required for the Link Adapter. Refer to the Link
Adapter manual for details. A 5-V power supply is not required for a Link Adapter connected to an
RS-232C Option Board mounted on the CPU Unit because power is supplied from pin 6 of the con-
nector.
(4) The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover
baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual for the device being connected to confirm support.
Pin Function Factory setting
1 Not used. Always set this pin to ON. ON
2 Built-in terminating resistance setting
ON: Connects terminating resistance.
OFF: Disconnects terminating resistance.
ON
3 2/4-wire setting
2-wire: Set both pins to ON.
4-wire: Set both pins to OFF.
OFF
4 OFF
5 Transmission mode (See note.)
Constant transmission: Set both pins to OFF.
Transmission performed when CTS signal in RS-232C interface is at high level:
Set pin 5 to OFF and pin 6 to ON.
Transmission performed when CTS signal in RS-232C interface is at low level:
Set pin 5 to ON and pin 6 to OFF.
ON
6 OFF
Port Config-
uration
Schematic diagram, RS-232C ports Schematic diagram, RS-422A/485 ports
Computer to
PLC: C-mode or
FINS com-
mands
PLC to com-
puter: FINS
commands
1:1
Computer to
PLC: C-mode or
FINS com-
mands
1:N
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
5-V power
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
Resistance ON
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C RS-422A/485
5-V power Resistance ON
(See note 1.)
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
5-V power
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C RS-232C
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
5-V power
Resistance ON
B500-AL001
RS-422A
/485
582
Connection Examples
The connection examples in the remainder of this section show only the basic connection diagrams. We rec-
ommend that appropriate noise countermeasures be taken in actual applications, including the use of shielded
twisted-pair cables. Refer to Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring Examples on page 599 for actual wiring
methods.
Host Computer Connections
1:1 Connections Using RS-232C Ports
IBM PC/AT or Compatible Computers
Using NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapters
Note We recommend using the following NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Connecting Cables to connect to NT-
AL001-E Link Adapters.
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
!Caution Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C Option Board for anything but the NT-
AL001-E Link Adapter. Using this power supply for any other external device may damage the
RS-232C Option Board or the external device.
CPU Unit
Pin Signal
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Signal Pin
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (female)
Computer
RS-232C
Option
Board
RS-
232C
interface
5-V (+)
power (-)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Shield
RS-232C
Interface
RS-232C
Option
Board
Signal Signal Pin
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
RS-232C Pin Pin Pin Pin Signal Signal Signal Signal
CPU Unit Computer
RS-422A
(See note)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Terminal block
RS-232C
583
1:N Connections Using RS-232C Ports
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
5-V (+)
power (-)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Shield
RS-232C
Interface
RS-232C
Option
Board
RS-232C
Option
Board
Signal Pin
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
RS-232C
Pin Pin
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Computer
(See note)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: OFF
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Terminal block
Signal Signal
RS-422A
Signal Pin
Pin
Signal
Signal
RS-232C
(See note)
Pin Signal Pin Signal
Pin Signal

RS-232C
584
1:1 Connections Using RS-422A/485 Port
1:N Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports
5-V (+)
power (-)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Shield
RS-232C
Interface
Signal Pin
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
Pin
CPU Unit
Computer
Terminal block
4-wire
Terminating resistance ON
Signal
Signal
Pin Signal

RS-422A
/485
Option
Board
5-V (+)
power (-)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Shield
RS-232C
Interface
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
Pin
CPU Unit
Computer
Terminal block
CPU Unit
B500-AL001-E Link Adapter
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Shield
Shield
Signal
RS-422A/
485
Option
Board
Signal
RS-422A/
485
Option
Board
Shield
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal Signal Pin
Signal
Pin
4-wire
Terminating resistance OFF
4-wire
RS-422A/
485
Option
Board
Signal
Pin
585
Programmable Terminal (PT) Connections
Direct Connections from RS-232C to RS-232C Ports
Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link)
NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only)
OMRON Cables with Connectors:
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
XW2Z-500T-1: 5 m
1:1 Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports
5-V (+)
power (-)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Shield
RS-232C
Interface
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
CPU Unit
Computer
Terminal block
Pin
Signal
Signal
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Shield
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
4-wire
Terminating resistance OFF
4-wire
CPU Unit
RS-422A/
485
Option
Board
Shield
RS-422A/
485
Option
Board
Pin Signal
Pin Signal
Pin
Signal
Pin Signal
RS-422A/
485
Option
Board
CPU Unit
Pin Signal
PT
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
RS-232C
Interface
Hood Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
RS-232C
Option
Board
Pin Signal
CPU Unit
Pin
Signal
Signal
PT
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
Hood
Terminal block
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
Short bar
RS-422A
/485
Option
Board
(See note 2.)
586
Note (1) RS-422A/485 Option Board settings:
Terminating resistance ON, 4-wire.
(2) The terminating resistant setting shown above is an example for the NT631/NT631C. The setting
method varies with the PT. Refer to the manual for you PT for details.
1:N, 4-wire Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports
Communications Mode: 1:N NT Link
CPU Unit
Pin
Signal
Signal
Terminal block or D-sub
connector
RS-422A
/485
Option
Board
Terminal block
Short bar
Terminal block or D-sub
connector
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
FG
FG
Signal
(See note 2.)
PT
PT
Pin
Signal
Signal
Terminal block or D-sub connector
FG
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
Short bar
Signal
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
Terminal block or D-sub connector
FG
(See note 2.)
CPU Unit
RS-422A
/485
Option
Board
Terminal block
PT
PT
587
Connections for Serial Gateway and No-protocol Communications
This section describes the connections for Serial Gateway, and no-protocol communications. Up to 32 nodes
can be used for 1:N connections.
Note (1) The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover
(2) The combined cable length for RS-422A/485 is 500 m including branch lines.
(3) The maximum cable length is limited to 2 m when an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected.
(4) Branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.
Port Configu-
ration
Schematic diagram
RS-232C 1:1
RS-232C 1:N
Resistance
ON
NT-AL001-E
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-232C
interface
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
Resistance
ON
RS-422A/
485
interface
5-V power
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-422A
/485
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485
interface
RS-422A/485
interface B500-AL001-E
Resistance ON
Resistance
ON
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power
Resistance
ON
RS-422A/485
588
Note (1) The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard, however, does not cover
(2) The CP1W-CIF11 is a non-isolated board, so the maximum transmission distance is 50 m. For dis-
tances over 50 m, use the RS-232C port on the CP1W-CIF01 and then connect through the NT-
AL001-E Link Adapter, which is isolated. Doing so will enable a maximum transmission distance of
500 m.
(3) The maximum cable length is limited to 2 m when an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected.
(4) Branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.
Connection Examples
The connection examples in the remainder of this section show only the basic connection diagrams. We rec-
ommend that appropriate noise countermeasures be taken in actual applications, including the use of shielded
twisted-pair cables. Refer to 3-4 RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring for actual wiring methods.
Port Configu-
ration
Schematic diagram
RS-422A/
485
1:1
RS-422A/
485
1:N
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
interface
RS-422A/485
interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power
RS-422A/485
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
interface
RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485
interface
RS-422A/485
interface
B500-AL001-E
Resistance
ON
Resistance
ON
Resistance ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
RS-232C
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power
Resistance
ON
RS-422A/485
589
Connecting RS-232C Ports 1:1
Connections to E5CK Controller
Connections to a Host Computer
Connections to a Personal Computer with RTS-CTS Flow Control
CPU Unit
RS-232C
Shield
OMRON E5CK Controller
RS-232C: Terminal Block
Terminal
Signal Pin
Signal
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Computer
CPU Unit
RS232-C Option Board
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Computer
CPU Unit
590
Connecting a Host Computer with NT-AL001-E Converting Link Adapters
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
XW2Z-500T-1: 5 m
Connections to a Modem
5-V (+)
power (-)
RS-232C
Interface
RS-232C
Option
Board
Signal
Pin
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF (4-wire)
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter RS-232C
Pin Pin Pin Signal Signal Signal Signal
CPU Unit Computer
RS-422A
(See note)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF (4-wire)
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Terminal block
Shield RS-232C
Signal Pin

Modem
CPU Unit
RS-232C
Option Board

591
1:N Connections Using RS-232C Ports
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
Signal Pin
CPU Unit
Shield
NT-AL001-E
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
RS-422A
/485
interface
RS-422A
Shield
DIP SW
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON Terminating
resistance
Pin 3: OFF 4-wire
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
Terminal block
Signal Pin Signal Pin
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
(See note)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Signal
Signal
RS-232C
RS-422A
/485
interface
RS-232C
Option
Board
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
Signal Pin RS-232C
Shield
NT-AL001-E
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(2-wire)
DIP SW
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON Terminating
resistance
Pin 3: ON 2-wire
Pin 4: ON
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
RS-232C
Terminal block
Signal Pin Signal Pin
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male) D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(2-wire)
Signal
Signal
(See note)
RS-422A
/485
interface
RS-422A
/485
interface
CPU Unit
Option
Board

592
1:1 Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports
Signal
Pin
CPU Unit
RS-422A
/485
Option
Board
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(2-wire)
Serial Communications Board/Unit
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
Shield
Terminal block
Signal Signal Pin
Shield
Signal
5-V (+)
power (-)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Signal
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
Computer
RS-232C
Signal Pin
RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
Signal Pin Pin Signal
Shield
RS-422A
Terminal block
RS-422A
/485
Option
Board
RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
CPU Unit
Terminal block

RS-422A
/485 in-
terface
593
1:N Connections Using RS-422A/485 Ports
Signal Pin
CPU Unit
RS-422A/
485
Option
Board
Device supporting RS-422A/485
communications (2-wire)
Terminal block
Signal
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Signal Pin
Pin
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(2-wire)
Signal
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
Shield
Shield
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
Signal
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
Signal
Signal
Pin
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face

CPU Unit
RS-422A/
485
Option
Board
Terminal block
Pin Signal Signal
Shield
RS-422A
RS-422A
RS-422A
594
1:N NT Link Connections with Programmable Terminals
Direct Connections from RS-232C to RS-232C Ports
OMRON Cables with Connectors:
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
RS-422A/
485 Option
Board
Pin Signal
CPU Unit
D-sub, 9-pin con-
nector (male)
4-wire
Terminating
resistance ON
Signal
Shield
D-sub, 9-pin
connector
(male)
DIP Switch
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON (terminating
resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
Terminal block
(+) 5-V
(-) power
RS-232C
Interface
Signal Shield

Shield
(+) 5-V
(-) power
RS-232C
Interface
Terminal block
Shield
DIP Switch
Pin 2: OFF,
otherwise
same as below.
RS-232C
RS-422A
RS-232C
CPU Unit
Pin Signal
PT
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
RS-232C
Interface
Hood Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
RS-232C
Option
Board
Pin Signal
595
CPU Unit
Pin
Signal
Signal
PT
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
FG
Terminal block
RS-422A
/485
Interface
Short bar
Signal
PT
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
FG
RS-422A
/485
interface
(See note 2.)
RS-422A
/485
Option Board
CPU Unit
Pin
Signal
Signal
PT
FG
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
RS-422A
/485
Interface
Short bar
Signal
PT
Terminal block
(See note 2.)
RS-422A
/485 Option
Board
RS-422A
/485
Interface
FG
596
Serial PLC Link Connection Examples
This section provides connection examples for using Serial PLC Link. The communications mode used here is
Serial PLC Link.
Connecting an RS-422A Converter
Note The CP1W-CIF11 is not insulated, so the total transmission distance for the whole transmission path is
50 m max. If the total transmission distance is greater than 50 m, use the insulated NT-AL001-E, and do
not use the CP1W-CIF11. If the NT-AL001-E is used, the total transmission distance for the whole trans-
mission path is 500 m max.
Connection with an RS-232C Port
RS-232C connection is also possible when using a Serial PLC Link to connect two CP1L CPU Units.
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polling Unit)
RS-422A Converter
(CJ1W-CIF11)
CP1L CPU Unit
(Polled Unit #0)
CP1M CPU Unit
(Polled Unit #1)
Serial PLC Link
(Total transmission length: 50 m max.)
RS-422A Converter
(CJ1W-CIF11)
Built-in
RS-232C
port
FG 1
SD 2
RD 3
RS 4
CS 5
5V 6
DR 7
ER 8
SG 9
1 FG
2 SD
3 RD
4 RS
5 CS
6 5V
7 DR
8 ER
9 SG
R
S
-
2
3
2
C
R
S
-
2
3
2
C
Signal Pin No. Pin No. Signal
CP1L CPU Unit
CP1L CPU Unit
597
Connection Examples
Connections in Loopback Test
Connect the communications ports as shown below.
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
R
D
A
R
D
B
+
S
D
A
S
D
B
+
F
G
R
D
A
R
D
B
+
S
D
A
S
D
B
+
F
G
R
D
A
R
D
B
+
S
D
A
S
D
B
+
F
G
CP1L CPU Unit (Master)
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: ON
(With termination resistance.)
Pin No. 2: OFF (4-wire type)
Pin No. 4: OFF
Pin No. 5: OFF (No RS control for RD.)
Pin No. 6: OFF (No RS control for SD.)
RS-422A/485 interface
CP1L CPU Unit (Slave No. 0)
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: OFF
(No termination resistance.)
Pin No. 4: OFF
Pin No. 6: ON (With RS control for SD.)
CJ1M CPU Unit (Slave No. 1)
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: ON
Pin No. 4: OFF
S
i
g
n
a
l

n
a
m
e
S
i
g
n
a
l

n
a
m
e
S
i
g
n
a
l

n
a
m
e
Shield
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
CP1W-CIF01
CP1W-CIF11
RS-422A/485 Option Board CJ1W-CIF11
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
R
D
A
R
D
B
+
S
D
A
S
D
B
+
F
G
R
D
A
R
D
B
+
S
D
A
S
D
B
+
F
G
R
D
A
R
D
B
+
S
D
A
S
D
B
+
F
G
CP1L CPU Unit (Master)
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: ON
Pin No. 2: ON (2-wire type)
Pin No. 4: OFF
CP1L CPU Unit (Slave No. 0)
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: OFF
(No termination resistance.)
Pin No. 4: OFF
CJ1M CPU Unit (Slave No. 1)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: ON
Pin No. 4: OFF
S
i
g
n
a
l

n
a
m
e
S
i
g
n
a
l

n
a
m
e
S
i
g
n
a
l

n
a
m
e
Shield
RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
CP1W-CIF01
CP1W-CIF11
RS-422A/485 port
Pin Signal Pin Signal
RS-232C port

598
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring
Recommended RS-232C Wiring Examples
It is recommended that RS-232C cables be connected as described below especially when the Option Board is
used in an environment where it is likely to be subject to electrical noise.
1. Always use shielded twisted-pair cables as communications cables.
2. Combine signal wires and SG (signal ground) wires in a twisted-pair cable. At the same time, bundle the SG
wires to the connectors on Option Board and the remote device.
3. Connect the shield of the communications cable to the Hood (FG) terminal of the RS-232C connector on
the Option Board. At the same time, ground the ground (GR) terminal of the CPU Unit to 100 or less.
4. A connection example is shown below.
Example: Twisted-pair Cable Connecting SD-SG, RD-SG, RTS-SG, and CTS-SG Terminals in Toolbus Mode
Note The Hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the CPU Unit. Therefore, FG is
grounded by grounding the ground terminal (GR) on the power supply terminal block. Although there is
conductivity between the Hood (FG) and pin 1 (FG), connect the Hood (FG) to the shield because the
Hood (FG) has smaller contact resistance with the shield than pin 1 (FG), and thus provides better noise
resistance.
Model Manufacturer
UL2464 AWG28x5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL product)
AWG28x5P IFVV-SB (non-UL product)
Fujikura Ltd.
UL2464-SB (MA) 5Px28AWG (7/0.127) (UL product) CO-MA-VV-SB
5Px28AWG (7/0.127) (non-UL product)
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
RS-232C
Option Board Remote device
Actual Wiring Example
SG signal wires
Bundle the SG wires.
Aluminum foil
XM2S-0911-E
Pin Signal
Hood
Shield
Signal

Ground to
100 or less.
599
Recommended RS-422A/485 Wiring Examples
Use the following wiring methods for RS-422A/485 to maintain transmission quality.
1. Always use shielded twisted-pair cables as communications cables.
2. Connect the shield of the communications cable to the FG terminal on the RS-422A/485 Option Board. At
the same time, ground the ground (GR) terminal of the CPU Unit to 100 or less.
Note Always ground the shield only at the RS-422A/485 Option Board end. Grounding both ends of the shield
may damage the device due to the potential difference between the ground terminals.
Connection examples are shown below.
2-Wire Connections
4-Wire Connections
Using a B500-AL001-E Link Adapter
Model Manufacturer
CO-HC-ESV-3Px7/0.2 Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.
CP1H CPU Unit
Option Board
Remote device
Shield
Pin Signal Signal
A ()
B (+)
CP1H CPU Unit
Shield
Pin Signal Signal

CP1H CPU Unit
Signal Pin
RS-422
interface
Remote device
B500-AL001-E
Signal Signal Pin Signal Pin
Pin
Signal
Signal

RS-422
RS-422
RS-422
600
With NT-AL001-E RS-232C/RS-422 Link Adapter
Note (1) The following cables are available for this connection.
It is recommended that one of these cables be used to connect the RS-232C port on the Option Board to
the NT-AL001-E RS-232C/RS-422 Link Adapter. The recommended wiring for these cables is shown
below.
Wiring for the Recommended Cables (XW2Z-070T-1 and XW2Z-200T-1, 10-conductor Cables)
(2) The XW2Z-070T-1 and XW2Z-200T-1 Connecting Cables for the NT-AL001-E Link Adapter uses
special wiring for the DTS and RTS signals. Do not use these signals with other devices; they may
be damaged.
(3) The Hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the CPU Unit. Therefore, FG
is grounded by grounding the ground terminal (GR) on the power supply terminal block.
RS-422
FG
RS-232C
CP1H CPU Unit
Option Board
Pin
Remote device
Remote device NT-AL001-E
Signal
Pin Signal Signal Pin Signal
Signal
Shield
(See note.)
Hood Hood

Length Model
70 cm XW2Z-070T-1
2 m XW2Z-200T-1
Pin Signal
Shield
Hood
Signal Pin
Hood

SYSMAC PLC
NT-AL001-E
(internal)
Arrows indicate
signal directions
Loopback
Loopback
Not used.
601
Wiring Connectors
Use the following steps to wire connectors.
See the following diagrams for the length of the cable portion to be cut in each step.
Shield Connected to Hood (FG)
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife. Be careful not to scratch the braided
shield.
3. Trim off the braided shield using scissors so that the remaining shield length is 10 mm.
4. Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper so that the exposed conductor length is 5 mm.
5. Fold back the braided shield.
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded shield.
Shield Not Connected to Hood (FG)
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife. Be careful not to scratch the braided
shield.
3. Trim off all the braided shield using scissors.
4. Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper so that the exposed conductor length is 5 mm.
25 mm (RS-422A)
40 mm (RS-232C)
10 mm

5 mm

Aluminum foil tape

25 mm (RS-422A)
40 mm (RS-232C)

5 mm
602
5. Wrap adhesive tape around the conductor from which the braided shield was removed.
Soldering
1. Thread a heat-shrinking tube through each conductor.
2. Temporarily solder each conductor to the corresponding connector terminals.
3. Completely solder each conductor.
4. Return the heat-shrinking tube to the soldered portion, then heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Assembling Connector Hood
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
Adhesive tape

Soldering iron
Heat-shrinking tube
Inside diameter:
1.5 mm, l = 10
1 mm
Heat-shrinking tube
End connected to FG
Aluminum foil tape
Grounding plate
End not connected to FG

603
Connecting to Unit

604
605
Appendix G
PLC Setup
Startup Settings
Startup Hold Settings
Startup Data Read Setting
Mode: CPU Unit Operating Mode
Note A Programming Console cannot be connected to the CP1L. If the default setting, Use programming
console, is set, the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode.
Name Default Settings When setting is read
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Force Status Hold Bit Not held. Not held. When power is turned
ON
80 14 0
Held. 1
2 IOM Hold Bit Not held. Not held. When power is turned
ON
80 15 0
Held. 1
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Read DM from flash
memory
Do not read. Do not read. When power is turned
ON
82 15 0
Read. 1
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Use programming con-
sole (RUN mode)
Use program-
ming console
(RUN mode)
(See note.)
Use programming con-
sole: RUN mode
When power is turned
ON
81 00 to
15
0000 hex
Program: PROGRAM
mode
8000 hex
Monitor: MONITOR
mode
8001 hex
Run: RUN mode 8002 hex
606
PLC Setup Appendix G
Settings: CPU Unit Settings
Execute Process Settings
Comms Instructions Settings in FB:
Settings for Communications Instructions in Function Blocks
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Do not detect Low Bat-
tery (run without battery)
Detect. Detect Every cycle 128 15 0
Do not detect. 1
2 Detect Interrupt Task
Error
Detect. Detect Every cycle 128 14 0
Do not detect. 1
3 Stop CPU on Instruction
Error
Do not stop. Do not stop. At start of operation 197 15 0
Stop 1
4 Don't resister FAL to
error log
Register. Register. Every cycle 129 15 0
Do not register. 1
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Retry Counts:
Number of retries
0 0 to 15 At start of operation 200 00 to
03
0 hex
:
F hex
2 Response Timeout
(default 2s), Comms
Instructions in FB
2 s 2 s At start of operation 201 00 to
15
0000 hex
1: 1 0.1 s 0001 hex
: :
65535: 65,535 0.1 s FFFF hex
3 Response Timeout
(default 2s), DeviceNet
Comms Instruction in FB
2 s 2 s At start of operation 202 00 to
15
0000 hex
1: 1 0.1 s 0001 hex
: :
65535: 65,535 0.1 s FFFF hex
607
Timings: Time and Interrupt Settings
Cycle Time Settings
Interrupt Setting
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Watch Cycle Time
(default 1000 ms)
Use default. Use default.
(Default: 1 s)
At start of operation 209 15 0
Use user setting. 1
1-1 Watch Cycle
Time (default
1000 ms)
1,000 ms 1: 1 10 ms At start of operation 209 00 to
14
001 hex
: :
40,000:
40,000 10 ms
FA0 hex
2 Cycle Time
(No Setting)
No minimum
cycle time
No minimum cycle time At start of operation 208 00 to
15
0000 hex
1 ms 0001 hex
: :
32,000 ms 7D00 hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Scheduled Interrupt
Interval
10 ms 10 ms At start of operation 195 00 to
03
0 hex
1 ms 1 hex
0.1 ms 2 hex
608
Input Constant Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 0CH: CIO 0 8 ms
Default (8ms)
No filter (0 ms) When power is turned
ON
10 00 to 07 10 hex
0.5 ms 11 hex
1 ms 12 hex
2 ms 13 hex
4 ms 14 hex
8 ms 15 hex
16 ms 16 hex
32 ms 17 hex
2 1 CH: CIO 1 Same as
above.
Same as above. Same as above. 10 08 to 15 Same as
above.
3 2 CH: CIO 2 11 00 to 07
4 3 CH: CIO 3 11 08 to 15
5 4 CH: CIO 4 12 00 to 07
6 5 CH: CIO 5 12 08 to 15
7 6 CH: CIO 6 13 00 to 07
8 7 CH: CIO 7 13 08 to 15
9 8 CH: CIO 8 14 00 to 07
10 9 CH: CIO 9 14 08 to 15
11 10 CH: CIO 10 15 00 to 07
12 11 CH: CIO 11 15 08 to 15
13 12 CH: CIO 12 16 00 to 07
14 13 CH: CIO 13 16 08 to 15
15 14 CH: CIO 14 17 00 to 07
16 15 CH: CIO 15 17 08 to 15
17 16 CH: CIO 16 18 00 to 07
18 17 CH: CIO 17 18 08 to 15
609
Serial Communications Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Communications Settings Standard
(9600; 1,7,2,E)
Standard (9600; 1,7,2,E)
(The standard settings
are as follows: 9,600
baud, 1 start bit, 7-bit
data, even parity, and 2
stop bits.)
Every cycle 144
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
15 0
160
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
Custom 1
2 Mode Host Link Host Link Every cycle 144
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
08 to
11
0 hex
5 hex
NT Link (1:N) 2 hex
RS-232C 160
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
3 hex
ToolBus (peripheral bus) 4 hex
Serial Gateway 9 hex
PC Link (Slave) 7 hex
PC Link (Master) 8 hex
2-1 Host Link
2-1-1 Baud 9,600 bps 300 bps Every cycle 145
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
01 hex
600 bps 02 hex
1,200 bps 03 hex
2,400 bps 161
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
04 hex
4,800 bps 05 hex
9,600 bps 00 or
06 hex
19,200 bps 07 hex
38,400 bps 08 hex
57,600 bps 09 hex
115,200 bps 0A hex
2-1-2 Format
(data
length,
stop bits,
parity)
7,2,E: 7-bit
data, 2 stop
bits, even parity
7,2,E: 7-bit data, 2 stop
bits, even parity
Every cycle 144
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
7,2,O: 7-bit data, 2 stop
bits, odd parity
1 hex
7,2,N: 7-bit data, 2 stop
bits, no parity
2 hex
bits, even parity
160
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
4 hex
bit, odd parity
5 hex
bit, no parity
6 hex
bits, even parity
8 hex
bits, odd parity
9 hex
bits, no parity
A hex
bit, even parity
C hex
bit, odd parity
D hex
bit, no parity
E hex
610
2 2-1 2-1-3 Unit Num-
ber
0 0 Every cycle 147
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
: :
31 161
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
1F hex
2-2 NT Link (1:N): 1:N NT Links
2-2-1 Baud 9,600
(disabled)
38,400 (standard) Every cycle 145
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
115,200 (high speed) 0A hex
161
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
2-2-2 NT/PC
Link Max:
Highest
unit num-
ber
0 0 Every cycle 150
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
: :
7 166
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
7 hex
2-3 RS-232C
2-3-1 Baud 9600 bps 300 bps Every cycle 145
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
01 hex
600 bps 02 hex
1,200 bps 03 hex
2,400 bps 161
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
04 hex
4,800 bps 05 hex
9,600 bps 00 or
06 hex
19,200 bps 07 hex
38,400 bps 08 hex
57,600 bps 09 hex
115,200 bps 0A hex
2-3-2 Format
(data
length,
stop bits,
parity)
7,2,E: 7-bit
data, 2 stop
bits, even parity
bits, even parity
Every cycle 144
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
bits, odd parity
1 hex
bits, no parity
2 hex
bits, even parity
160
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
4 hex
bit, odd parity
5 hex
bit, no parity
6 hex
bits, even parity
8 hex
bits, odd parity
9 hex
bits, no parity
A hex
bit, even parity
C hex
bit, odd parity
D hex
bit, no parity
E hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
611
2 2-3 2-3-3 Start Code Disable. Disable. Every cycle 149
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
12 0
Set. 165
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
1
2-3-4 Start Code 00 hex0x0000 0x0000 Every cycle 148
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
08 to
15
00 hex
: :
0x00FF 164
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
FF hex
2-3-5 End Code Received
Bytes: Receive
specified num-
ber of bytes.
Received Bytes: Receive
specified number of
bytes.
Every cycle 149
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
08 and
09
00
CR,LF 10
Set End Code 165
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
01
2-3-6 Received
Bytes
256 bytes 256 bytes Every cycle 149
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
1 byte 01 hex
: :
255 bytes 165
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
FF hex
2-3-7 Set End
Code
0x0000 1 byte Every cycle 148
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
: :
255 bytes 164
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
FF hex
2-3-8 Delay 0 ms 0: 0 10 ms Every cycle 146
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
15
0000 hex
: :
9999: 9999 10 ms 162
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
270F hex
2-4 ToolBus (peripheral bus)
2-4-1 Baud 9,600 bps 9,600 bps Every cycle 145
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 or
06 hex
19,200 bps 07 hex
38,400 bps 161
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
08 hex
57,600 bps 09 hex
115,200 bps 0A hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
612
2 2-5 Serial Gateway
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
01 hex
600 bps 02 hex
1,200 bps 03 hex
2,400 bps 161
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
04 hex
4,800 bps 05 hex
9,600 bps 00 or
06 hex
19,200 bps 07 hex
38,400 bps 08 hex
57,600 bps 09 hex
115,200 bps 0A hex
2-5-2 Format
(data
length,
stop bits,
parity)
7,2,E: 7-bit
data, 2 stop
bits, even parity
bits, even parity
Every cycle 144
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
bits, odd parity
1 hex
bits, no parity
2 hex
bits, even parity
160
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
4 hex
bit, odd parity
5 hex
bit, no parity
6 hex
bits, even parity
8 hex
bits, odd parity
9 hex
bits, no parity
A hex
bit, even parity
C hex
bit, odd parity
D hex
bit, no parity
E hex
2-5-3 Response
Timeout
50:
50 100 ms =
5 s
50: 50 100 ms = 5 s Every cycle 151
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
08 to
15
00 hex
1: 1 100 ms 01 hex
: :
255: 255 100 ms 167
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
FF hex
2-6 PC Link (Slave)
2-6-1 Baud 9,600 bps
(disabled)
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
115,200 (high speed) 161
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
0A hex
2-6-2 PC Link
Unit No.
0 0 Every cycle 151
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
: :
7 167
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
7 hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
613
2 2-7 PC Link (Master)
2-7-1 Baud 9,600 bps
(disabled)
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
115,200 (high speed) 161
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
0A hex
2-7-2 Link
Words
10 (default) 1
:
10 (default)
Every cycle 150
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
04 to
07
1 hex
:
0 or A hex
166
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
2-7-3 PC Link
Mode
ALL ALL Every cycle 150
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
15 0
Masters 166
(CP1L L-
type CPU
Unit)
1
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
614
Serial Communications Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Communications Settings Standard
(9600 ; 1,7,2,E)
Standard (9600; 1,7,2,E)
(The standard settings
are as follows: 9,600
baud, 1 start bit, 7-bit
data, even parity, and 2
stop bits.)
Every cycle 160
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
15 0
Custom 1
2 Mode Host Link Host Link Every cycle 160
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
08 to
11
0 hex
5 hex
NT Link (1:N): 1:N NT
Links
2 hex
RS-232C 3 hex
ToolBus (peripheral bus) 4 hex
Serial Gateway 9 hex
PC Link (Slave) 7 hex
PC Link (Master) 8 hex
2-1 Host Link
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
01 hex
600 bps 02 hex
1,200 bps 03 hex
2,400 bps 04 hex
4,800 bps 05 hex
9,600 bps 00 or
06 hex
19,200 bps 07 hex
38,400 bps 08 hex
57,600 bps 09 hex
115,200 bps 0A hex
2-1-2 Format
(data
length,
stop bits,
parity)
7,2,E: 7-bit
data, 2 stop
bits, even parity
bits, even parity
Every cycle 160
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
bits, odd parity
1 hex
bits, no parity
2 hex
bits, even parity
4 hex
bit, odd parity
5 hex
bit, no parity
6 hex
bits, even parity
8 hex
bits, odd parity
9 hex
bits, no parity
A hex
bit, even parity
C hex
bit, odd parity
D hex
bit, no parity
E hex
2-1-3 Unit Num-
ber
0 0 Every cycle 161
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
: :
31 1F hex
615
2 2-2 NT Link (1:N)
2-2-1 Baud 9,600
(disabled)
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
2-2-2 NT/PC
Link Max:
Highest
unit num-
ber
0 0 Every cycle 166
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
: :
7 7 hex
2-3 RS-232C
2-3-1 Baud 9600 bps 300 bps Every cycle 161
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
01 hex
600 bps 02 hex
1,200 bps 03 hex
2,400 bps 04 hex
4,800 bps 05 hex
9,600 bps 00 or
06 hex
19,200 bps 07 hex
38,400 bps 08 hex
57,600 bps 09 hex
115,200 bps 0A hex
2-3-2 Format
(data
length,
stop bits,
parity)
7,2,E: 7-bit
data, 2 stop
bits, even parity
bits, even parity
Every cycle 160
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
bits, odd parity
1 hex
bits, no parity
2 hex
bits, even parity
4 hex
bit, odd parity
5 hex
bit, no parity
6 hex
bits, even parity
8 hex
bits, odd parity
9 hex
bits, no parity
A hex
bit, even parity
C hex
bit, odd parity
D hex
bit, no parity
E hex
2-3-3 Start Code Disable. Disable. Every cycle 165
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
12 0
Set. 1
2-3-4 Start Code 00 hex0x0000 0x0000 Every cycle 164
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
08 to
15
00 hex
: :
0x00FF FF hex
2-3-5 End Code Received
Bytes: Receive
specified num-
ber of bytes.
Received Bytes: Receive
specified number of
bytes.
Every cycle 165
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
08 and
09
00
CR,LF 10
Set End Code 01
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
616
2 2-3 2-3-6 Received
Bytes
256 bytes 256 bytes Every cycle 165
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
1 byte 01 hex
: :
255 bytes FF hex
2-3-7 Set End
Code
0x0000 0x0000 Every cycle 164
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
: :
0x00FF FF hex
2-3-8 Delay 0: 0 10 ms 0: 0 10 ms Every cycle 162
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
15
0000 hex
: :
9999: 9999 10 ms 270F hex
2-4 ToolBus (peripheral bus)
2-4-1 Baud 9,600 bps 9,600 bps Every cycle 161
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 or
06 hex
19,200 bps 07 hex
38,400 bps 08 hex
57,600 bps 09 hex
115,200 bps 0A hex
2-5 Serial Gateway
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
01 hex
600 bps 02 hex
1,200 bps 03 hex
2,400 bps 04 hex
4,800 bps 05 hex
9,600 bps 00 or
06 hex
19,200 bps 07 hex
38,400 bps 08 hex
57,600 bps 09 hex
115,200 bps 0A hex
2-5-2 Format
(data
length,
stop bits,
parity)
7,2,E: 7-bit
data, 2 stop
bits, even parity
bits, even parity
Every cycle 160
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
bits, odd parity
1 hex
bits, no parity
2 hex
bits, even parity
4 hex
bit, odd parity
5 hex
bit, no parity
6 hex
bits, even parity
8 hex
bits, odd parity
9 hex
bits, no parity
A hex
bit, even parity
C hex
bit, odd parity
D hex
bit, no parity
E hex
2-5-3 Response
Timeout
50:
50 100 ms =
5 s
50: 50 100 ms = 5 s Every cycle 167
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
08 to
15
00 hex
1: 1 100 ms 01 hex
: :
255: 255 100 ms FF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
617
2 2-6 PC Link (Slave)
2-6-1 Baud 9,600 bps
(disabled)
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
2-6-2 PC Link
Unit No.
0 0 Every cycle 167
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
03
0 hex
: :
7 7 hex
2-7 PC Link (Master)
2-7-1 Baud 9,600 bps
(disabled)
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
00 to
07
00 hex
2-7-2 Link
Words
10 (default) 1
:
10 (default)
Every cycle 166
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
04 to
07
1 hex
:
0 or A hex
2-7-3 PC Link
Mode
ALL ALL Every cycle 166
(CP1L M-
type CPU
Unit)
15 0
Masters 1
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
618
Peripheral Service Settings
Set Time to All Events: Time Setting for Services
Built-in Input Settings
High Speed Counter Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Set time to all events Default Default
(4% of cycle time)
At start of operation 218 15 0
Use user setting. 1
1-1 Time allocated to
services
0: 0 0.1 ms =
0 ms
0: 0 0.1 ms = 0 ms At start of operation 218 00 to
07
00 hex
: :
255: 255 0.1 ms FF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Use high speed counter 0 Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned
ON
50 12 to
15
0 hex
Use. 1 hex
1-1 Counting mode Linear mode Linear mode At start of operation 50 08 to
11
0 hex
Circular mode 1 hex
1-1-1 Circular
Max.
Count
0 0 At start of operation 52 and 51 00 to
15
0000
0000 hex
: :
4,294,967,295 FFFF
FFFF hex
1-2 Reset Z phase, soft-
ware reset
Z phase, software reset When power is turned
ON
50 04 to
07
0 hex
Software reset 1 hex
Z phase, software reset
(comparing)
2 hex
Software reset (compar-
ing)
3 hex
1-3 Input Setting Differential
phase input
Differential phase input When power is turned
ON
50 00 to
03
0 hex
Pulse + direction input 1 hex
Up/Down input 2 hex
Increment pulse input 3 hex
ON
53 12 to
15
0 hex
Use. 1 hex
11
0 hex
Circular mode 1 hex
2-1-1 Circular
Max.
Count
15
0000
0000 hex
: :
4,294,967,295 FFFF
FFFF hex
ware reset
ON
53 04 to
07
0 hex
(comparing)
2 hex
Software reset (compar-
ing)
3 hex
phase input
ON
53 00 to
03
0 hex
Up/Down input 2 hex
619
ON
95 12 to
15
0 hex
Use. 1 hex
11
0 hex
Circular mode 1 hex
3-1-1 Circular
Max.
Count
15
0000
0000 hex
: :
4,294,967,295 FFFF
FFFF hex
ware reset
ON
95 04 to
07
0 hex
(comparing)
2 hex
Software reset
(comparing)
3 hex
phase input
ON
95 00 to
03
0 hex
Up/Down input 2 hex
ON
98 12 to
15
0 hex
Use. 1 hex
11
0 hex
Circular mode 1 hex
4-1-1 Circular
Max.
Count
0 0 At start of operation 100 and
99
00 to
15
0000
0000 hex
: :
4,294,967,295 FFFF
FFFF hex
ware reset
ON
98 04 to
07
0 hex
(comparing)
2 hex
Software reset
(comparing)
3 hex
phase input
ON
98 00 to
03
0 hex
Up/Down input 2 hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
620
Interrupt Input Settings
Base Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 IN0
(CIO 0.00)
Normal Normal When power is turned
ON
60 00 to
03
0 hex
Interrupt 1 hex
Quick 2 hex
2 IN1
(CIO 0.01)
ON
60 04 to
07
0 hex
Interrupt 1 hex
Quick 2 hex
3 IN2
(CIO 0.02)
ON
60 08 to
11
0 hex
Interrupt 1 hex
Quick 2 hex
4 IN3
(CIO 0.03)
ON
60 12 to
15
0 hex
Interrupt 1 hex
Quick 2 hex
5 IN4
(CIO 1.00)
ON
59 00 to
03
0 hex
Interrupt 1 hex
Quick 2 hex
6 IN5
(CIO 1.01)
ON
59 04 to
07
0 hex
Interrupt 1 hex
Quick 2 hex
7 IN6
(CIO 1.02)
ON
59 08 to
11
0 hex
Interrupt 1 hex
Quick 2 hex
8 IN7
(CIO 1.03)
ON
59 12 to
15
0 hex
Interrupt 1 hex
Quick 2 hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Undefined Origin (oper-
ation for limit signal turn-
ing ON)
Hold Hold At start of operation 268 12 to
15
0 hex
Undefined 1 hex
2 Limited Input Signal
Operation
Search Only Search Only When power is turned
ON
256 04 to
07
0 hex
Always 1 hex
3 Limit Input Signal NC NC At start of operation 268 00 to
03
0 hex
NO 1 hex
4 Search/Return Initial
Speed
0 pps
(disabled)
0 pps At start of operation 259 and
258
00 to
15
0000 0001
hex
: :
100,000 pps 0001 86A0
hex
000F 4240
hex
5 Speed Curve Trapezium Trapezium When power is turned
ON
256 12 to
15
0 hex
S-shaped 1 hex
621
Define Origin Operation Settings: Origin Search Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Use define origin opera-
tion
Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned
ON
256 00 to
03
0 hex
Use. 1 hex
1-1 Search Direction CW CW At start of operation 257 12 to
15
0 hex
CCW 1 hex
1-2 Detection Method Method 0 Method 0 At start of operation 257 08 to
11
0 hex
Method 1 1 hex
Method 2 2 hex
1-3 Search Operation Inverse 1 Inverse 1 At start of operation 257 04 to
07
0 hex
Inverse 2 1 hex
1-4 Operation Mode Mode 0 Mode 0 At start of operation 257 00 to
03
0 hex
Mode 1 1 hex
Mode 2 2 hex
1-5 Origin Input Sig-
nal
(X/XA CPU Units)
NC NC Unit version 1.0 and
earlier: At start of
operation
Unit version 1.1 and
later: When power is
turned ON
268 08 to
11
0 hex
NO 1 hex
Origin Input Sig-
nal
(Y CPU Units)
NC (line driver) At start of operation 2 hex
NO (line driver) 3 hex
1-6 Proximity Input
Signal
NC NC At start of operation 268 04 to
07
0 hex
NO 1 hex
1-7 Search High
Speed
0 pps
(disabled)
260
00 to
15
0000 0001
hex
: :
100,000 pps 0001 86A0
hex
000F 4240
hex
1-8 Search Proximity
Speed
0 pps
(disabled)
262
00 to
15
0000 0001
hex
: :
100,000 pps 0001 86A0
hex
000F 4240
hex
1-9 Search Compen-
sation Value
0 pps 2,147,483,648 At start of operation 265 and
264
00 to
15
8000 0000
hex
: :
0 0000 0000
hex
: :
+2,147,483,647 7FFF FFFF
hex
1-10 Search Accelera-
tion Ratio
0 (disabled) 1 (pulses/4 ms) At start of operation 266 00 to
15
0001 hex
: :
65,535 (pulses/4 ms) FFFF hex
1-11 Search Decelera-
tion Ratio
15
0001 hex
: :
1-12 Positioning Moni-
tor Time
15
0000 hex
: :
9,999 ms 270F hex
622
Origin Return Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Speed 0 pps
(disabled)
270
00 to 15 0000 0001
hex
: :
100,000 pps 0001 86A0
hex
000F 4240
hex
2 Acceleration Ratio 0 (disabled) 1 (pulses/4 ms) At start of operation 272 00 to 15 0001Hex
: :
65535
(pulses/4 ms)
FFFF hex
3 Deceleration Ratio 0 (disabled) 1 (pulses/4 ms) At start of operation 273 00 to 15 0001 hex
: :
65535
(pulses/4 ms)
FFFF hex
623
Base Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Undefined Origin (oper-
ation for limit signal turn-
ing ON)
Hold Hold At start of operation 286 12 to
15
0 hex
Undefined 1 hex
2 Limited Input Signal
Operation
Search Only Search Only When power is turned
ON
274 04 to
07
0 hex
Always 1 hex
3 Limit Input Signal NC NC At start of operation 286 00 to
03
0 hex
NO 1 hex
4 Search/Return Initial
Speed
0 pps
(disabled)
276
00 to
15
0000 0001
hex
: :
100,000 pps 0001 86A0
hex
000F 4240
hex
5 Speed Curve Trapezium Trapezium When power is turned
ON
274 12 to
15
0 hex
S-shaped 1 hex
624
Define Origin Operation Settings: Origin Search Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Use define origin opera-
tion
Do not use. Do not use. When power is turned
ON
274 00 to
03
0 hex
Use. 1 hex
1-1 Search Direction CW CW At start of operation 275 12 to
15
0 hex
CCW 1 hex
1-2 Detection Method Method 0 Method 0 At start of operation 275 08 to
11
0 hex
Method 1 1 hex
Method 2 2 hex
1-3 Search Operation Inverse 1 Inverse 1 At start of operation 275 04 to
07
0 hex
Inverse 2 1 hex
1-4 Operation Mode Mode 0 Mode 0 At start of operation 275 00 to
03
0 hex
Mode 1 1 hex
Mode 2 2 hex
1-5 Origin Input Sig-
nal
(X/XA CPU Units)
NC NC Unit version 1.0 and
earlier: At start of
operation
Unit version 1.1 and
later: When power is
turned ON
286 08 to
11
0 hex
NO 1 hex
Origin Input Sig-
nal
(Y CPU Units)
NC (line driver) At start of operation 2 hex
NO (line driver) 3 hex
1-6 Proximity Input
Signal
NC NC At start of operation 286 04 to
07
0 hex
NO 1 hex
1-7 Search High
Speed
0 pps
(disabled)
278
00 to
15
0000 0001
hex
: :
100,000 pps 0001 86A0
hex
000F 4240
hex
1-8 Search Proximity
Speed
0 pps
(disabled)
280
00 to
15
0000 0001
hex
: :
100,000 pps 0001 86A0
hex
000F 4240
hex
1-9 Search Compen-
sation Value
0 pps 2,147,483,648 At start of operation 283 and
282
00 to
15
8000 0000
hex
: :
0 0000 0000
hex
: :
+2,147,483,647 7FFF FFFF
hex
1-10 Search Accelera-
tion Ratio
15
0001 hex
: :
1-11 Search Decelera-
tion Ratio
15
0001 hex
: :
1-12 Positioning Moni-
tor Time
15
0000 hex
: :
9,999 ms 270F hex
625
Origin Return Settings
Basic Settings
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Speed 0 pps
(disabled)
288
00 to 15 0000 0001
hex
: :
100,000 pps 0001 86A0
hex
000F 4240
hex
2 Acceleration Ratio 0 (disabled) 1 (pulses/4 ms) At start of operation 290 00 to 15 0001Hex
: :
65535
(pulses/4 ms)
FFFF hex
3 Deceleration Ratio 0 (disabled) 1 (pulses/4 ms) At start of operation 291 00 to 15 0001 hex
: :
65535
(pulses/4 ms)
FFFF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Use inverter positioning Do not use Use When power is turned
ON
416 00 to 03 0 hex
Do not use 1 hex
2 Gain 0: 10 (0.1 incre-
ments)
0: 10 (0.1 incre-
ments)
ON
418 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 (0.1 increments) 0001 hex
: :
65,535
(0.1 increments)
FFFF hex
3 In-position range 0: 1 0: 1 When power is turned
ON
419 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 0001 hex
: :
65,535 FFFF hex
4 Min. output value 0: 1 0: 1 When power is turned
ON
420 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 0001 hex
: :
65,535 FFFF hex
5 Max. output value 0: 2,000,000 0: 2,000,000 When power is turned
ON
421, 422 00 to 15 00000000
hex
1 00000001
hex
: :
4,294,967,295 FFFFFFFF
hex
6 Error counter overflow
detection value
0: 10,000 0: 10,000 When power is turned
ON
423 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 0001 hex
: :
32,767 7FFF hex
7 Error counter alarm
detection value
ON
424 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 0001 hex
: :
32,767 7FFF hex
626
Operation Adjustment Settings
Basic Settings
8 Error counter cycle 0: 3 (4-ms incre-
ments)
0: 3 (4-ms incre-
ments)
ON
417 00 to 07 00 hex
1 (4-ms incre-
ments)
01 hex
: :
255 (4-ms incre-
ments)
FF hex
9 Power Supply Freq. for
One Motor Revolution
per Sec.
0 (0.1-Hz incre-
ments)
0 (0.1-Hz incre-
ments)
ON
436 00 to 15 0000 hex
: :
65,535 Hz (0.1-Hz
increments)
FFFF hex
10 Number of Encoder
Revolution
0 0 When power is turned
ON
437 00 to 15 0000 hex
: :
65,535 FFFF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Limit output during
acceleration and con-
stant speed
Do not use Use When power is turned
ON
432 00 to 03 0 hex
Do not use 1 hex
deceleration and when
stopped
ON
432 04 to 07 0 hex
Do not use 1 hex
3 Output coefficient dur-
ing acceleration and
constant speed
0: 6 (0.01 incre-
ments)
0: 6 (0.01 incre-
ments)
ON
433 00 to 07 0 hex
: :
255 (0.01 incre-
ments)
FF hex
ing deceleration
0: 96 (0.01
increments)
0: 96 (0.01 incre-
ments)
ON
434 00 to 07 0 hex
: :
255 (0.01 incre-
ments)
FF hex
5 Output coefficient after
pulse output
0: 50 (0.01
increments)
0: 50 (0.01 incre-
ments)
ON
435 00 to 07 0 hex
: :
255 (0.01 incre-
ments)
FF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
1 Use inverter positioning Do not use Use When power is turned
ON
416 08 to 11 0 hex
Do not use 1 hex
2 Gain 0: 10 (0.1 incre-
ments)
0: 10 (0.1 incre-
ments)
ON
425 00 to 15 0000 hex
: :
65,535
(0.1 increments)
FFFF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
627
Operation Adjustment Settings
3 In-position range 0: 1 0: 1 When power is turned
ON
426 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 0001 hex
: :
65,535 FFFF hex
4 Min. output value 0: 1 0: 1 When power is turned
ON
427 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 0001 hex
: :
65,535 FFFF hex
5 Max. output value 0: 2,000,000 0: 2,000,000 When power is turned
ON
429, 428 00 to 15 00000000
hex
1 00000001
hex
: :
4,294,967,295 FFFFFFFF
hex
6 Error counter overflow
detection value
ON
430 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 0001 hex
: :
32,767 7FFF hex
7 Error counter alarm
detection value
ON
431 00 to 15 0000 hex
1 0001 hex
: :
32,767 7FFF hex
8 Error counter cycle 0: 3 (4-ms incre-
ments)
0: 3 (4-ms incre-
ments)
ON
417 00 to 07 00 hex
1 (4-ms incre-
ments)
01 hex
: :
255 (4-ms incre-
ments)
FF hex
9 Power Supply Freq. for
One Motor Revolution
per Sec.
0 (0.1-Hz incre-
ments)
0 (0.1-Hz incre-
ments)
ON
438 00 to 15 0000 hex
: :
65,535 Hz (0.1-Hz
increments)
FFFF hex
10 Number of Encoder
Revolution
0 0 When power is turned
ON
439 00 to 15 0000 hex
: :
65,535 FFFF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
acceleration and con-
stant speed
ON
432 08 to 11 0 hex
Do not use 1 hex
deceleration and when
stopped
ON
432 12 to 15 0 hex
Do not use 1 hex
ing acceleration and
constant speed
0: 6 (0.01 incre-
ments)
0: 6 (0.01 incre-
ments)
ON
433 08 to 15 0 hex
: :
255 (0.01 incre-
ments)
FF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
628
ing deceleration
0: 96 (0.01
increments)
0: 96 (0.01 incre-
ments)
ON
434 08 to 15 0 hex
: :
255 (0.01 incre-
ments)
FF hex
5 Output coefficient after
pulse output
0: 50 (0.01
increments)
0: 50 (0.01 incre-
ments)
ON
435 08 to 15 0 hex
: :
255 (0.01 incre-
ments)
FF hex
by CPU Unit
Internal
address
Bits Settings
629
Index
A
absolute coordinates
selecting, 191
absolute pulse outputs, 191
Access Error Flag, 151
addresses
memory map, 577
Always OFF Flag, 152
Always ON Flag, 152
applications
precautions, xxvii
Auxiliary Area, 136
read/write section, 559, 571
read-only section, 529
B
background execution
special flags, 526
backup
precautions, xxvi
Basic I/O Units
error information, 518
battery
error flag, 518, 555
precautions, xxix
service life, 492
Battery Error Flag, xxvi, 555
bit allocations
PWM(891) outputs, 227
C
Carry Flag, 152
CIO Area, 121
clock
clock data, 519, 550
clock pulses
flags, 153
communications
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 574
flags, 523
no-protocol, 345
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 574
complete link method, 353
Condition Flag
saving and loading status, 153
Condition Flags, 151
coordinate systems (absolute or relative), 192
Counter Area, 138
countermeasures
noise, xxxi
CPU Unit
initialization, 72
cycle time
flags, 514
maximum cycle time, 80, 514, 538
present cycle time, 80, 514, 538
setting, 80
Cycle Time Too Long Flag, 518, 554
D
data areas
overview, 121
data links, 134
Data Registers, 149
data registers
sharing, 124
data tracing, 470
related flags/bits, 515
dates
program and parameters, 386
debugging, 466
flags, 515
DeviceNet
precaution, 392
differential phase mode
details, 158
DIP switch
pin 6 status, 507
direction
automatic direction selection, 194
E
EC Directives, xxx
electromagnetic fields, xxvi
EMC Directives, xxx
Equals Flag, 152
error codes, 573
pulse output stop error codes, 210
Error Flag, 151
630
Index
error log, 572
Error Log Area, 485, 516, 536, 572
errors
basic I/O errors, 526
communications error flags, 523
error codes, 573
error log, 516, 572
failure point detection, 390
FAL/FALS flags, 517
flags, 151
flash memory, 516
Input Units, 486
memory error flags, 516
Output Units, 487
PLC Setup errors, 526
programming error flags, 526
Special I/O Units, 526
troubleshooting, 473
F
failure point detection, 390
FAL Error Flag, 517
FAL errors
flag, 556
FAL/FALS Number for System Error Simulation, 517
FALS Error Flag, 517
FALS errors
flag, 517, 519, 554, 555
FALS instruction, xxv, xxix
FINS commands
list, 368
First Cycle Flag, 514, 536, 573
flash memory
data dates, 520
errors, 516
Flash Memory Error, 516
flowchart
overall CPU operation, 69
Forced Status Hold Bit, 507, 559
force-resetting bits
debugging, 466
force-setting bits
debugging, 466
frequency
frequency measurement, 174
G
Gate Bit
high-speed counters, 173
Greater Than Flag, 152
Greater Than or Equals Flag, 152
H
High-speed Counter Gate Bit, 173
high-speed counter inputs
reset methods, 161
restrictions, 171
Holding Area, 133, 135
Host Link
ports, 579
Host Link commands, 366
Host Link communications, 364
hot starting, 125
hot stopping, 125
I
I/O Hold Bit, xxix
I/O interrupts
response time, 84
I/O memory
addresses, 577
areas, 578
effects of operating mode changes, 74
I/O response time
calculating, 83
immediate refreshing
input bits and words, 71
increment mode
details, 159
index register
sharing, 148
index registers, 142
sharing, 124
indirect addressing
DM Area, 141
index registers, 142
Initial Task Execution Flag, 514
Initial Task Flag, 573
Initial Task Startup Flag, 536
initialization
Index
631
CPU Unit, 72
Input Units
inspection
procedures, 490
installation
location, xxvi
interrupt feeding
ladder program, 257
Interrupt Input Units
response time, 84
interrupts
processing times, 515
IOM Hold Bit, 126, 507, 559
IORF(097) refreshing
input bits and words, 71
IR/DR Operation between Tasks, 515
L
Less Than Flag, 152
Less Than or Equals Flag, 152
Limit Input Signal Type, 209
linear mode counting
details, 160
Low Voltage Directive, xxx
M
maintenance
procedures, 492
memory
memory map, 578
See also data areas
Memory Error Flag, 516, 555
momentary power interruption, 75
MONITOR mode, 73
monitoring
differential monitoring, 467
multiple progressive positioning
ladder program, 242
wiring example, 239
N
Negative Flag, 152
networks
noise, xxvi
reducing, xxx
no-protocol communications, 345
Not Equal Flag, 152
NT Link
ports, 579
O
online editing, 468
effect on cycle time, 82
Online Editing Flags, 536
Online Editing Wait Flag, 574
operating environment, xxvi
precautions, xxvi
operating modes
description, 73
effects of mode changes on counters, 139
operation
debugging, 466
trial operation, 466
Origin Compensation, 208
Origin Detection Method, 204
Origin Input Signal Type, 209
Origin Proximity Input Signal Type, 209
origin return function
details, 197
examples, 214
Origin Return Parameters, 215
origin search
executing, 209
Origin Search Acceleration Rate, 208
Origin Search Deceleration Rate, 208
Origin Search Direction
specifying, 208
origin search function
details, 197
Origin Search High Speed, 208
Origin Search Operation Setting, 204
Origin Search Parameters, 201
Origin Search Proximity Speed, 208
Origin Search/Return Initial Speed, 208
origin status
operations affecting, 193
Output, 195
632
Index
Output OFF Bit, 515, 559
Output Units
outputs
precautions, xxv, xxix
Overflow Flag, 152
P
Parameter Date, 386, 394, 520
parts
replacing parts, 492
peripheral port
PLC Setup
Polled Units
settings, 357
Polling Unit
setting, 357
Polling Unit link method, 353
positioning
vertically conveying PCBs, 237
Positioning Monitor Time, 209
power interruptions
information, 520, 560
momentary interruptions, 75
power OFF processing, 75
power supply, xxvi
precautions, xxix
precautions, xxiii
applications, xxvii
general, xxiv
handling precautions, 491
operating environment, xxvi
periodic inspections, 490
safety, xxiv
Program Error Flag, 554
program errors, 575
PROGRAM mode, 73
program transfer, 466
programming
error flag, 554
program error information, 517
program errors, 575
program protection, 386
protecting the program, 386
transferring the program, 466
pulse + direction mode
details, 158
pulse frequency conversion, 175
pulse input modes
details, 158
Pulse Output 0 settings
speed curve, 196
pulse output modes, 178
pulse output stop error codes, 210
pulse outputs, 176
PWM(891) outputs
bit allocations, 227
details, 227
Q
quick-response inputs
details, 338
R
radioactivity, xxvi
read/write-protection, 387
refreshing
immediate refreshing, 71
IORF(097), 71
refreshing data, 353
relative coordinates
selecting, 191
reset methods, 161
Restart Bits
peripheral port, 523
RS-232C port, 524
ring mode counting
details, 160
RS-232C port
related flags/bits, 523, 524, 551, 552
RUN mode, 73
S
safety precautions, xxiv
scheduled interrupts
response time, 85
S-curve acceleration/deceleration
output pattern, 195
restrictions, 196
Index
633
self-maintaining bits, 135
functions, 342
Serial PLC Links, 353
allocated words, 356
PLC Setup, 357
related flags, 358, 360
simulating system errors, 517
software reset, 161
Special I/O Units
specifications
PWM(891) output, 227
startup
hot starting and stopping, 125
static electricity, xxvi
Step Flag, 536
stocker, 237
T
target value comparison
for interrupt tasks, 172
Task Error Flag, 545
Task Flags, 151
Task Started Flag, 514
tasks
See also interrupt tasks
Task Flags, 151
Timer Area, 137
TR Area, 136
tracing
See also data tracing
trial operation, 466
two-axis multipoint positioning
ladder program, 250
wiring example, 245
U
Underflow Flag, 152
up/down mode
details, 159
User Program Date, 386, 394, 520
V
variable duty ratio pulse outputs
details, 227
vertical conveyor, 237
W
Work Area, 134
work bits, 134
work words, 134
write-protection, 386
634
Index
635
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code Date Revised content
01 December 2007 Original production
Cat. No. W471-E1-01
Revision code
636
Revision History
OMRON Corporation
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7109/Fax: (81)75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
Pu Dong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. W471-E1-01 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice
Printed in Japan
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.

W471-E1-01 CP1L OperationManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

W471-E1-01 CP1L OperationManual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

W471-E1-01 CP1L OperationManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATION MANUAL

Cat. No. W471-E1-01

Input bits: CIO 0.04 to CIO 0.11

Unit Upper Terminal Block

Address actually used.

Address actually used.

Wire the inputs. Wire the inputs.

Set the PLC Setup.

Write the ladder program.

Wire the inputs. Wire the inputs.

Set the PLC Setup.

Set the counter SVs.

Write the ladder program.

Write the ladder program.

Wire the inputs.

Write the ladder program.

2's complement data

You might also like